From The Art and Popular Culture Encyclopedia

This feast Ytu hath no prefixed time nor season, but in time of necessitie. To prepare themselves thereunto, all the people fasted two dayes, during the which they did neyther company with their wives, nor eate anie meate with salt or garlicke, nor drinke any Ghicha."--Natural and Moral History of the Indies () by José de Acosta

{{Template}} Historia natural y moral de las Indias (1590) is a book by José de Acosta.

The English translation was titled Natural and Moral History of the Indies.

Full text of volume 1

WORKS ISSUED BY j&orfetg.THE NATURAL AND MORAL HISTORYOF THE INDIES, No. LX.

THE NATURAL & MORALHISTORY OF THE INDIES,FATHER JOSEPH DE ACOSTA. REPRINTED FROM THE ENGLISH TRANSLATED EDITION OF EDWARD GRIMSTON,1604. AND EDITED, Notes anU ait KntroDuctwn, CLEMENTS 11. MARKHAM, C.B., F.R.S, VOL. I. T 11 K X AT U 1! A L 11 1 S T O R \ (BOOK.S j, u, in, A.ND iv). LONDON : PRLS TKl) FOR HIE 1IAKLUYT SOCIETY . SOT. KICIIARUS, 37, GREAT QtTElilf STJJEKT, >V.C. COUNCIL THE HAKLUYT SOCIETY. COLONEL H. YULE, C.B., PRESIDENT. ADMIRAL C. R. DRINKWATER BETHUNE, C.B. \{-VICE-PRESIDENTS. MAJOR-GENERAL SIR HENRY RAWL1NSON, K.C.B. j W. A. TYSSEN AMHERST, ESQ., M.P. REV. DR. G. P. BADGER, D.C.L, J. BARROW, ESQ. WALTER DE GREY BIRCH, ESQ. E. A. BOND, ESQ. E. H. BUNBURY, ESQ. ADMIRAL SIR RICHARD COLL1NSON, K.C.B. THE EARL OF DUCIE. AUGUSTUS W. FRANKS, ESQ. LIEUT.-GENEHAL SIR J. HENRY LEFROY, C.B., K.C.M.G. R, H. MAJOR, ESQ. COLONEL SIR WM. L. MEREWETHER, C.B., K. C.S.I. ADMIRAL SIR ERASMUS OMMANNEY, C.B. LORD ARTHUR RUSSKLL, M.P. THE LORD STANLEY OF ALDEHLEY. EDWARD THOMAS, ESQ. LIEUT.-GENERAL SIK HENRY THUILL1ER, C.S.I. CLEMENTS R. MARKHAM, C.B., HONORARY SECKETAKI. 997422

CONTENTS OF THE FIRST VOLUME.

PAGE INTRODUCTION ... . i DEDICATION TO THE INFANTA ISABELLA . . xix TRANSLATOR S DEDICATION TO SIR ROBERT CECIL . xxiii ADDRESS TO THE READER . . xxivANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS . xxvii THE NATURAL HISTORY. First Book . 1 ,, Second Book . 73ADVERTISEMENT TO THE READER . .103THE NATURAL HISTORY. Third Book . 104Fourth Book 183NOTICE. The two Volume* are paged throughout, and the Index will be. at the end, of the Second Volume.

INTRODUCTION.

THE Natural and Moral History of the Western Indies by Acosta, which has been selected to formtwo volumes of the Hakluyt Society s series, is a valuable work for two reasons. It contains an expositionof the ideas of learned men of the sixteenth centuryon physical geography, and it is one of the leadingauthorities on the ancient civilisations of Peru andMexico. Our chief knowledge of the author is derived fromhis published works, only a few facts being forthcomingfrom other sources. His parents lived at the town ofMedina del Campo, the city of the plain, about twentyfour miles from Valladolid, in Old Castille, 1 on the leftbank of the swampy river Zapardiel, 2 and overlookedby the old castle of La Mota. 3 They had five sons,named Geronimo, Christoval, Joseph, Diego, and Bernardo ; and at least two, if not more, of these boysjoined the Society of Jesus. Joseph de Acosta wasborn in the year 1540, and he was devoted to theSociety before he had completed his fourteenth year.Bernardo de Acosta entered upon the same career, and1 Between Valladolid and Salamanca. 2 A southern affluent of the Douro. 8 Where Queen Isabella died in 1504. b 11 INTRODUCTION. probably Christoval1 also. The Acostas were fellowtownsmen of that charming old soldier Bernal Diaz,who told the story of the conquest of Mexico, but theywere many years his juniors. Joseph de Acosta became a Jesuit in 1553, and forthe next eighteen years he must have devoted himself to the study of sacred and classical authors, for hewas a man of very great learning, when, at the ageofthirty-two, he sailed for the New World, in companywith several brethren of the same Society. Acosta left Spain in the year 1570, touched at theCanaries, and made a rapid passage across the Atlantic; which, he tells us, would have been still more rapidifthe manners had made more sail. 2 He landed at Carthagena, and finally at Nombre de Dios, whencehejourneyed through eighteen leagues of tropical forest toPanama.3 Here he enjoyed the beauties of the glorious scenery, the novel sights at every turn, and wasinterested, at Capira, in the clever antics of troopsofmonkeys. 4 From Panama the Jesuit, in pursuanceofhis missionary work, embarked for Peru, looking forward with curiosity, and some dread, to the passage1 But this is not the Christoval de Acosta who wrote the well-known book on the medicines and drugs of India. He was a nativeof Burgos. His work (Tractado de las drogas y medicinas de lasIndicts Orientates con sus plantas debuxadas al vivo por ChristovalA costa medico y cirrejano que las vio ocularmente : en el qual se veri-Jica mucho de lo que escrivio el Dr. Garcia de OrtaJ was publishedat Burgos in 1578. It contains plates of the spice-yielding andother plants. Dr. Acosta, called El Africano, suffered captivityin Africa, Asia, and China. His work completed what the learnedPortuguese, Dr. Orta, began. 2 Page 5G. 3 Page 2G3. 4 Page 285. INTRODUCTION. Ill across the equinoctial. For he was steeped in all thelore of the ancient philosophers concerning the unbearable heat of the burning zone. He crossed the linein March, and, to his surprise, it was so cold that hewas obliged to go into the sun to get warm, where helaughed at Aristotle and his philosophy. 1 On his arrival at Lima, he was ordered to cross theAndes, apparently to join the Viceroy in the interior.He took the route, with fourteen or fifteen companions,across the mountainous province of Huarochiri, and bythe lofty pass of Pariacaca, 2 where the whole partysuffered severely from the effects of the rarified atmosphere. 3 Acosta describes these sufferings, which hetells us were renewed on the three other occasions thathe had occasion to cross the cordillera, by Soras andLucanas, 4 by Collahuas, 5 and by Cavanas.6 Healsomentions an attack of snow-blindness, and the wayinwhich an Indian woman cured him.7 Acosta arrived in Peru at an important time. DonFrancisco de Toledo, second son of the Count of Oropesa, a man advanced in years and of great administrative experience, had come out as Viceroy two yearsbefore, in 1568. He was a stern man, capable of com1 Page 90. 2 Pariacaca is over 14,000 feet above the level of the sea. 3 Page 130. 4 The road through the districts of Soras and Lucanas leads tothe coast valley of Nasca. 5 Collahuas is further north, in the modern department ofAncachs, province of Huari. 6 Cavanas, in the department of Puno. This was one of theroutes from the Collao to Arequipa. 7 Page 288. IV INTRODUCTION. mitting unjust and cruel acts to secure the success ofa policy ; but, on the other hand, he was conscientiously anxious to settle the government of the countrywith a view to the well-being of the people, and hisenergy and industry were marvellous. He was oneof the most prolific legislators in history, and his regulations were suited to the wants of the time and wereenduring. In 1571 he had committed a great political crime, in order to secure tranquillity, by beheadingthe unfortunate young Ynca Tupac Amaru. He thendevoted five years to a tour through every part of theViceroyalty of Peru ; and to a settlement of the country, in which he was aided by the Licentiate Polo deOndegardo, the Jesuit Acosta, and the Judge Maticnza. His labours were successful, and the Indiansthemselves acknowledged that the land had not beenso well governed since the days of the good YncaTupac Yupanqui. 1 Toledo was practically the founderof the University of St. Mark at Lima. This Viceroysaw what were the true sources of wealth of the countryhe governed. He did not name silver and gold. Buthe said that "the two things which Peru had that wererich and of great nourishment the two staples weremaize and llamas," corn and wool.2 Our author accompanied the Viceroy to Charcas,3 and was with him during his unsuccessful expeditionagainst the fierce Chirihuana Indians. 4 The principalseat of the Jesuits was, at that time, in the little townof Juli, near the western shores of Lake Titicaca.1 " Desde el buen Tupac Yupanqui no habia estado la tierra tanbien gobernada." 2 Page 256. 3 Page 155. 4 Page 151. INTRODUCTION. VHere a college was formed, the languages of the natives were studied, and eventually a prio ting-press was established. Acosta probably resided much at Juli during his stay in Peru. It was here, in all like lihood, that he observed the famous comet of 1577,from 1st November to 8th December, which extendedlike a fiery plume from the horizon nearly to the zenith. 1 Here, too, he devoted much of his time to the preparation of several learned works, which he tookhome with him in manuscript, including the first twobooks of the Natural History of the Indies. 2 Theparticulars respecting the religion and festivals of the Peruvians, in the work of Acosta, are chiefly derivedfrom the Licentiate Polo de Ondegardo. 3 Several of Acosta s brethren at Juli have been made known to usthrough their works. Among these were Bias Valera, whose valuable writings have been partially preservedby the Ynca Grarcilasso ; Dr. Francisco de Avila, whowrote on the folk-lore of Huarochiri ; Pablo Jose deArriaga, the extirpator of idolatry in the Peruviancoast valleys ; the half-caste, Diego de Alcobaca, whowrote religious confessionaries in the native languages ; and the learned Dr. Gonzalo Holguin, who composeda valuable Quichua grammar. A few years later, the college at Juli was the residence of Ludovico Bertonio, who compiled a copious Aymara dictionary ; and it was at Juli that this dictionary was printed in 1611,as well as a Life of Christ in the same language. AtJuli, Father Acosta received information respecting the river Amazon from a brother who had formerlybeen in the famous piratical cruise of Aguirre. 4 1 Page 122. 2 Page 103, 3 Page 391. 4 Page 82. VI INTRODUCTION. Towards the close of the viceroyalty of Toledo,Father Acosta appears to have moved from the interiorof Peru to Lima. Here he mentions having been engaged in superintending the casting of a great bell, and that there was difficulty in getting fuel for thefurnace, which made it necessary to fell some greattrees in the valley of the Eimac.1 He mentions alsothat he saw camels in Peru, 2 which had been broughtfrom the Canaries ; and that the Viceroy Toledo senthome seeds of the beautiful white datura, which growsround Lima, as worthy of a place in the royal gardens. 3 In 1579 Sir Francis Drake was on the coast, and theViceroy dispatched a fleet under Don Pedro Sarmiento,partly to chase the English pirate, and partly to explore and survey the Straits of Magellan. Acosta hadconversations with the pilot of Sarmiento s fleet, andwas allowed to inspect his chart, thus obtaining muchhydrographical information, and particulars respectingthe tides in the straits. He also conversed with thenew Viceroy Henriquez on the same subject. 4 Don Francisco de Toledo returned to Spain in 1579,and was succeeded by Don Martin Henriquez, ayounger son of the Marquis of Alcanises, who hadpreviously been Viceroy of Mexico. Don Martinmade his entry into Lima on May 4th, 1581. Threeweeks afterwards the new Archbishop, Dr. ToribioMogrovejo, was installed, and commenced his saintly and active career ; which acquired for him so great aname for purity and holiness that he was eventuallyi Page 308. 2 Page 2 72. 3 Page 255. 4 Pages 133, 140, H3, 145. INTRODUCTION. Vll canonised as St. Toribio. In 1582 a Provincial Council was called to meet at Lima, consisting of the Archbishop and the Bishops of Cuzco, Imperial, Santiago de Chile, Paraguay, Quito, Charcas, and Tu-cuman. Don Martin Henriquez opened the third Council of Lima in person. He also founded the College of St. Martin, to be managed by the Jesuits, and was active in promoting useful measures ; but his career as Viceroy of Peru was cut short by death on March 12th, 1583. The Council proceeded with its sittings, and got through a vast amount of work. Full instructions were drawn up for the guidance of parish priests, andcatechisms were prepared for the instruction of the In dians. It may be observed that the proceedings of these Lima Councils throw much light on the religion and folk-lore of the people. For they enter into manyminute details respecting the customs and superstitions which the priests were to suppress, and have thus pre served an invaluable record of the beliefs of the ancient Peruvians. Father Acosta was very busily employedduring the sessions of the third Council of Lima, and he was its historian. The last sitting took place on October 18th, 1583, on which important occasion the Jesuit Father Joseph de Acosta delivered an eloquent and learned oration. 1 The proceedings were forwarded to Spain, and received the royal assent on September 18th, 1591, having pre viously been confirmed by the Pope. The Papal approval was announced by Cardinal Caraffa, in 1588, 1 " Una elegante y docta oracion." Montalvo, page 214. Vlll INTRODUCTION. to the Archbishop of Lima.1 Shortly after the close ofthe last session of the Council, Acosta embarked, withall his valuable manuscripts, representing the literarylabours of about fifteen years, and commenced his voyage to Mexico. He shows himself, in his remarksduring the passage, to be a shrewd observer of nature,and an eager seeker after knowledge. 2 During this, orthe subsequent voyage home, he learnt from an expertPortuguese pilot that there were four points of novariation on the earth, and that one of them was theisland of Corvo in the Azores.3 Acosta landed, after along voyage, at the port of Guatulco, 4 at the westernend of the Gulf of Tehuantepec, in the Oaxaca province,whence he journeyed by land to Mexico, where heresided in 1586.5 In this country he had opportuni1 There are two lives of Archbishop Toribio Mogrovejo. One is by the learned Don Antonio Leon-Pinelo, entitled Vida del Ilus-trissimo Reverendissimo D. Torijjio Alfonso Mogrovejo, Arcobispo dela ciudad de los Reyes (1653). The other is by Dr. Juan FranciscoA. de Montalvo, and has a quaint title-page El Sol del NuevoMundo ideaJo y compuesto en las esclarecidas operadones del Bienaventurado Toribio Arcosbis2)o de Lima (Rome, 1683). Leon Pinclogives very full particulars of the Archbishop s family and ancestry.The work of Montalvo is valuable because it contains notices ofthe lives of many Peruvian authors. 2 Page 127. 3 Page 52. 4 Page 400. Sir Francis Drake, during his famous voyage ofcircumnavigation, arrived at Guatulco on April 15th, 1579. Herehe got provisions, and also " a certaine pot full of rials of platewhich \ve found in the towne, together with a chain of gold, andsome other jewels, which we intreated a gentleman Spaniard toleave behind him, as he was flying out of towne." (Drake s WorldeEncompassed, p. 113.) Here Drake landed a Portugal pilot whomhe had captured out of a vessel at the Cape Verde Islands. Thisman is mentioned by Acosta; sec page 140. 5 Page 454. INTRODUCTION. IX ties, of which he diligently availed himself, for collect ing information touching the natural products, and the civilisation and ancient religion of the Aztecs. Hischief informant, respecting the rites and festivals of the Mexicans, was a brother of the Company of Jesus named Juan de Tobar, who was then a Prebend in the church at Mexico. 1 He also enjoyed the pleasure of seeing his brother Bernardo once more, a Jesuit whodied at Mexico on May 29th, 1613. Acosta went home to Spain in the fleet of 1587, which had a most precious cargo. It contained twelve chests of gold, 3 each weighing 100 Ibs. ; 11,000,000 pieces of silver; 3 two chests of emeralds, 4 each weighing100 Ibs. ; 22,053 cwts. of ginger, 5 50 of sarsaparilla, 48 of cassia fistula, 350 of lignum sanctum, 1309 of Brazil wood, 6 and 99,794 hides from St. Domingo. 7 When they unloaded at Seville, he says that it was a wonderful thing to behold *Bfe river and the arsenal, with such piles of hides and merchandise. 8 The first object of Acosta, after his return to Europe, appears to have been to make arrangements for the publication of his manuscripts. In February 1588 he was in Madrid, at which place he wrote the dedication to Philip II of the two books on the Natural Historyof the Indies, and of his work on the Conversion of the Indians, which were published in Latin at Salamancain 1588 and 1589. He then went to Eome, where his theological works saw the light. His De Christo 1 Page 391. 2 Page 194. 3 Page 204. 4 Page 226. 5 Page 239. 6 Page 2GO. 7 Page 271. s Page 271. X INTRODUCTION. revelato appeared in 1588, and his De temporibusnovissimis in the same year. His Concilium Limenseappeared shortly afterwards, and his Concionum in1596. His complete work on the Natural and Moralistory of the Indies was published at Seville in 1590.Acosta was head of the Jesuits College at Valladolid,and Visitor in Aragon and Andalusia. Finally, he wasappointed to the charge of the College at Salamanca,where he died1 on the 15th of February 1600, in hissixtieth year. The theological works of Acosta give evidence ofgreat learning. The De Christo in scripturis revelatoconsists of nine books, dedicated to Cardinal Caraffa.They are intended to prove that Christ is the centre ofall scriptures, the Saviour whose coming was announcedby the Baptist, and that heretics twist the words ofrevelation to their own purposes. 2 This work was published at Rome in 1588, and again in 1590, in quarto.Other editions appeared at Paris in 1592, at Salamanca, at Venice; and, finally, at Paris in 1841. 3 The1 But not in the grand college of the Jesuits (La Clericia)which may new be seen at Salamanca. It was not built until1614. In the time of Acosta the Jesuits occupied another building, now the cemetery ; and it was here that Acosta died. SeeMadoz. 2 Lib. i. Universurn scriptursc scopum esse Christum, n. FalliHsereticos que scriptures sensem facilem jactant. in. Recte divi-nam scripturam tractari cum ad Dei dilectionem dirigetur. iv. Jesus verus. v. Jesus salvator. vi. Jesus Mater Maria supraomnes Deo grata et nostrse salutis administra electa divinitas.vn. Jesum Joannes Baptista Precursor annuntiat. vui. ix. 3 In the Scriptures Sacrce cursus completus ex commentariis omnium perfectissimis unique kabitis, et a magna parte episcoporum INTRODUCTION. xi De temporibus novissimis is usually bound up with the De Christo revelato. It consists of four books on the prophecies, and on the latter days, with specula tions on the coming of the day of the Lord.1 The Concionum, in three volumes, was published at Sala manca in 1596, at Venice in 1599 (4to.), and at Cologne in 1600 (8vo.). The Concilium Limense, a record of the proceedings of the Council of Lima in 1583, was composed in three books, in Latin. The results of Acosta s South American researches first saw the light at Salamanca in 1588 and 1589, the two works being usually bound up together. Denatura novi orbis, libri duo, et de promulgation Evangelii apud barbaros, sive de procuranda Indorum salute, libri sex. The De natura is the first two books of the Natural History in Latin. These books were written in Peru. A second edition was published at Salamanca in 1595, and again at Cologne in 1596. The De promulgation is an interesting essay on the conversion of the Indians. Acosta here maintains that the salvation of the people of Peru must not be des paired of, on account of the difficulties which surround the missionaries. He urges the importance of studynecnon theologorum Europce Catholicce universim ad hoc interroga- torum designatis unice confletus. Tom. ii (Paris, 1841); 398 pages, beginning at page 698. It is preceded by a short life of Acosta, and is furnished with a good index. 1 Lib. i. Sacris literis trade, Diem Judicii propinquare. n. De magna tribulatione snb Antichristo futura deinceps dicendum. in. Ecclesiam non esse Antichrist! quamvis valida persecutione superandam. iv. An Dies Domini repentinus an potius vehementer formidatus veniat. Xll INTRODUCTION". ing the native languages, and gives advice on thevarious details of a well organised parochial system.Acosta then translated the two books of the Denatura from Latin into Spanish, and added five others,which completed the Historia natural y moral delasIndicts. The first four books are devoted to thenatural history, the last three to the moral history, ofthe Indies. In the former, the learned Jesuit touchesupon all points of interest relating to physical geography as it was then understood, comparing theknowledge of his time with the opinions and beliefs ofancient philosophers and Fathers of the Church. Inthis spirit he discusses the form of the earth andofthe heavens, the distribution of land and sea, thehabitability of the tropics, and the way in whichAmerica may have been peopled. In the first twobooks the discussion is more general, while the nexttwo treat especially of the JNew World and its productions. Chapters are devoted to the winds and tides,and to the fisheries, others to the lakes and rivers, tothe varied aspects of the lands, to volcanoes and earthquakes, to the mineral resources, and to the vegetableand animal kingdoms. The last three books, includingthe " Moral History of the Indies", give an interestingaccount of the religion and government of the peopleof Peru and Mexico, and form a valuable body of information respecting those ancient American civilisations. Acosta was a man of great learning ; he wasan intelligent and indefatigable observer, as well asavery diligent collector of information, and he had exceptionally good opportunities ; so that his work will INTRODUCTION. Xlii always rank high as an authority on the subjects of which it treats. The Historia Natural, in its complete form, was first published at Seville in 1590 (4to.), next at Barcelona in 1591 (Svo.). The Madrid editions appeared in 1608 1 and 1610. An Italian translation, by Giovanni Paolo Gallucio, appeared in 15962 at Venice. The work of Acosta was translated into Dutch bythe great traveller J. Huyghen van Linschoten, and published at Enckhuysen in 1598 (Svo.), and at Amsterdam in 1624 (4to.). 3 The French translation wasby E. Kegnauld, and two editions appeared at Paris in 1597 and 1600. 4 De Bry published the work in Latin at Frankfort in 1602 (fol.) and 1603, and a Germanedition in 1601 (fol.) : being Part ix of his America. 5 Acompilation from it was published by De Bry at Frankfort, in Latin in 1624, and in German in 1623; 1 It is with the Madrid edition of 1608 that the translation, now reprinted, has been collated. 2 Historia naturale e morale delle Indie, novamente tradotta deJle lingua Spagnuola nella Italiana de G. P. Gained. (Venetia, 1596, 4to.) 3 Historic naturael ende morael van de Westersche Indien nu eerstmeal uyt den Spaenschen overgheset door J. Iluyghen van Lin schoten. (Enckhuysen, 1598, 8vo.) 4 Histoire naturelle et morale des Indes . . . traduite par R. Regnauld. (Paris, 1597, Svo.) 5 Theodor de Bry. Americas novae pars . . . de novis orbis naturae. Acosta. America, Pars ix. (Francoforti, 1602, fol.) Von gelegenJieit der Elemente natur de Neiver Welt J. H. van Linschoten. De Bry. (1601, fol.) 6 Paralipomena Americce, hoc est discursus accurataque America? descrirjtio. T. de Bry. America, Pars xn. (Frankfort, fol., 1624.) XIV INTRODUCTION. and it also appeared in Dutch, in the collection ofP. van der Aa, in 1727. 1 The English translation of Acosta, which is reprintedin the present volume, was first published in Londonin 1604. On the title-page only the initials of thetranslator are given " E. G." But it has been ascertained that this was Edward Grimston, a writer andtranslator of note, during the reigns of Elizabeth andJames I. Edward Grimston belonged to an Essexfamily, which sprung originally from the Grimstons ofGrimston Garth, in Yorkshire. Edward served in thewars, was made prisoner at Calais in 1558, and afterwards escaped from the Bastille. Besides translatingAcosta, he wrote a history of France, and a generalhistory of the Netherlands. The latter work, publishedin London in 1609, is a translation of the History ofJean Francois le Petit (Dordrecht, 1601), with additions from the manuscripts of Sir Koger Williams, andbrought down to 1608. Edward Grimston, whoissaid to have lived to the age of ninety-eight, was thegrandfather of Sir Harbottle Grimston of Bradfield, awell-known politician during the civil wars, and ancestor of the present Earl of Verulam. Grimston s translation of Acosta is, on the whole,creditable and trustworthy. There are some omissions,and occasional blunders, especially as regards proper1 Ontdekking -van West Indien vlijtig ondersogt, aangeteekend doorJ. D A. op sign Reys Togl derwaarts gedaan. Anno 1592 en ver- volgens . . . uyt het Spaans vertaald. In P. van der Aa. De AanmerJcensivaardigste Zee en Landreizender Portugeezen, etc. Deel 8. (1727, fol.) INTRODUCTION. XV names and native words, which have been carefully corrected in the present edition. The Natural History of Acosta has been much used by subsequent writers on Peru and Mexico. It is quoted twenty-seven times in the Royal Commentaries of the Ynca Garcilasso de la Vega, and sometimes these quotations consist of long passages. I have given a list of them in the index to my translation of the first part of the Royal Commentaries .* A full notice of Acosta and his works is given by Antonio.2 Purchas, in his Pilgrimage, quotes largely from Acosta, in his account of the Mexican superstitions and sacrifices, and of Peruvian religious ceremonies and government. 3 An abstract of the Natural and1 ii, page 547. 2 " Josephus de Acosta. Medinensis, postquam in sodalitio Societatis, cui se puerum Salmanticse tradidit, omni disciplinarum genere, indefessi virlaboris, ingenium prestans atque acre judicium instruxisset, in occidentalem Indiam delatus, provinciam ibi Peru- anam sodalium rexit praepositus, septemdecimque totos annos cora- moratus est, ea curiose observans et in commentaria digerens, qu8G hodie magno cum fructu atque operse pretio de rebus Indias ab eo extant. Inde reversus visitatorem egit in provinciis Aragonise ac Bceticse, necnon et aliquando procuravit Bomse promovitque salutis Indorum spiritualem causam ; quod postremum ab eo impensum officium Bibliothecse Societatis scriptorem fugit. Sexagenarius tandem e vita migravit munus gerens rectoris in Salmantino col- legio, pluribus scriptis clarus, superstesque anno 1599." Then follows a list of his works : JSibliotheca Hispana Nova sive Hispan- orum Scriptorum qui ab anno M.D. ad M.V.C.LXXXIV jloruere notitia : auctore D. Nicolao Antonio Hispalensi, J. G. (Madrid, 1783, fol., i, page 800.) 3 Puichas, Pilgrimage (1623), lib. v, page 869; and lib. vi, page 931. XVI INTRODUCTION. Moral History is given in Harris s voyages, 1 andinother similar collections, and the work is much reliedupon as an authority by Robertson, and by Prescottin his histories of the conquests of Peru and Mexico.Mr. Prescott quotes Acosta nineteen times in his Conquest of Peru, and nine times in his ConquestofMexico. Adopting Mr. Prescott s Peru as a test, Acostatakes the fourth place as an authority. Garcilasso dela Vega is quoted eighty-nine, Cieza de Leon forty-five,Polo de Ondegardo forty-one, and Acosta nineteentimes. Then follow Pedro Pizarro, Montesinos, Zarate,Hcrrera, and Gomara. 1 Harris s Voyages, vol. i, lib. v, cap. xiii, pages 751 to 799. [ Translation of the Spanish Title page of the yd Edition. THE NATURAL AND MORALHistory of the Indies. In which are discussed the notable things of the heavens, the elements, metals, plants, animals ; and the rites,- ceremonies, laws, government, and wars of the Indians. COMPOSED BY THE FATHER JOSEPH DE ACOSTA(A Priest of the Company of Jesus). DEDICATED TO THE MOST SERENE INFANTA DONA ISABELA CLARA EUGENIA DE AUSTRIA. In the Year With Licence. 1608. Printed in Madrid, in the house of Alonso Martin. At the charges of Juan Berrillo, seller of books. C

To the Most Serene Infanta Dona Ysabela Clara Eugenia de Austria.1 LADY, The King s Majesty, our Lord, having given mepermission to offer to your Highness this small work, entitled The Natural and Moral History of the Indies, it should not be attributed to me as want of consideration, to desire to occupy the time which is so fully spent by your Highness in matters of importance, by diverting it to subjects which, in treating of philosophy, are somewhat obscure, and, as describing barbarous races, may seem out of place. But as a knowledge of, and speculations con cerning the works of nature, especially if they are remarkable and rare, causes a feeling of pleasure and delight in refined understandings, and as an acquaintance with strange cus toms and deeds also pleases from its novelty, I hold that this work may serve as an honest and useful entertainment to your Highness. It will give occasion to consider the works which have been designed by the Most High in the machinery of this world, especially in those parts which we call the Indies, which, being our territory, give us more to consider, and being the abode of new vassals, whom the Most High God has given to the crown of Spain, a know ledge of it is not altogether strange to us. My desire is that, during some spare moments, your Highness should amuse yourself with the reading. With this object it is 1 Daughter of Philip II, by Elizabeth of Valois, and afterwards wife of the Archduke Albert, and sovereign of the Spanish Netherlands. She was married in 1595, went to Brussels in the following year, and died in 1633, without children. c 2 XX DEDICATION. written in the vulgar tongue, though, if I do not deceivemyself, it is not for vulgar understandings. It maybe that,as in other things so in this, your Highness showing aliking for it, this little work may be favored so that theKing our Lord may choose to pass a short time in the consideration of affairs and of people so nearly touching hisroyal crown. I dedicated another book to his Majesty,which I composed in Latin, touching the preaching of theevangel to those Indians. I desire that all I have writtenmay serve, so that the relation of what God, our Lord, deposited of his treasures in those kingdoms, may cause thepeople of them to receive more aid and favor from those towhose charge His high and divine providence has entrustedthem. I entreat your Highness that if some parts of this little work are not agreeable, you will not desist from passingyour eyes over the rest, since it may be that other partsmay please, and, if so, they cannot fail to be highly profitable;for this favor will be beneficial to people and countriessorely needing such favor. God, our Lord, preserve andprosper your Highness for many years, as is the daily andearnest supplication of your servants to the Divine Majesty.Amen. In Seville, the 1st of March, in the year 1590. JOSEPH DE ACOSTA. THEN ATVRALLand Morall Historic of the East and West Indies. Intreating of the remarkeable things of Heaven, of the Elements, Mettalls, Plants, and Beasts which are proper to that Country : Together with the Manners, Ceremonies, Lawes, Governements, and Warres of the Indians. Written in Spanish by Joseph Acosta, and translated into English by E. G. LONDON Printed by Val. Sims for Edward Blount and William Aspley. 1604.

To the Right Honorable Sir Robert Cicill, Knight, Baron of Essingden, Vicount Cranborne, principall Secretary to his Maiestie, master of the Court of Wardes and Liveries, and one of his Highnesse most honourable Privie Counsell. EIGHT HONOEABLE, If it appeare presumption in me to shew my love, my dutie betraies me to it. The advantage I have gleaned from idle houres, in. exchanging this Indian History from Spanish to English, is commended to your Honors Patronage, whose first father loseph Acosta, hath with great observation made worthie the over-looking. Agreater motive then that you are your selfe, needed not to excite me to this dedication. I beseech you, my good Lord, take it into shelter, and receive that which is not, for that which I would it were. Let my insuflficiencie be measured by my good will. So shall my poore abilities thrive vnder your incouragement, and happily leade me on to some stronger vndertaking, wherein I shall bee bound to thanke you for mine owne paines, and for ever remaine Your Lordships most devoted, E. G. The Authors advertisement to the Reader. MANY have written sundry bookes and discourses of theNew World at the West Indies, wherein they describe newand strange things discovered in those partes, with theactes and adventures of the Spaniards, which have conquered and peopled those Countries. But hitherto I havenot seene any other Author which treates of the causes andreasons of these novelties and wonders of nature, or thathath made any search thereof. Neither have I read anybooke which maketh mention of the histories of the antientIndians and naturall inhabitants of the New World. Intruth, these two things are difficult. The first being theworks of Nature, contrarie to the antient and receivedPhilosophy, as to shew that the region which they call theburning Zone is very moist, and in many places very temperate, and that it raines there, whenas the Sunne is neerest,with such like things. For such as have written of theWest Indies have not made profession of so deepe Philosophic ; yea, the greatest part of those Writers have had noknowledge thereof. The second thing it treats of is, of theproper historic of the Indians, the which required muchconference and travaile among the Indians themselves : thewhich most of them that have treated of the Indies couldnot doe, either not vnderstanding the language or notcurious in the search of their Antiquities ; so as theyhave beene contented to handle those things which havebeene most common and superficial!. Desiring, therefore,to have some more particular knowledge thereof, I have TO THE EEADER. XXVbeene carefull to learn e from men of greatest experience and best seene in these matters,, and to gather from their discourses and relations what I have thought fit to give knowledge of the deedes and custonie of these people. Andfor that which concern es the nature of those Countries andtheir properties, I have learned it by the experience of manyfriends, and by my dilligence to search, discover, and conferre with men of iudgement and knowledge. In myopinion, there are many advertisements which may serve and benefit better wits for the seaching out of the truth, or, to proceede farther, in finding that pleasing which is conteined herein. So, as although this new World be notnew, but old, in respect of the much which hath beene writ ten thereof; yet this historic may, in some sort, be held for new, for it is partly historicall and partly philosophicall, as well for that they are the workes of nature as of free will, which are the deedes and customes of men, the which hath caused mee to name it the Naturall and Morall Historie of the Indies. Containing these two things : In the first twobookes mention is made of that which concernes the heavens, temperature and habitation of the world, which books I hadfirst written in Latine, and now I have translated them into Spanish, vsing more the liberty of an author then the strict bonds of a translator, to apply my self the better to those for whom it is written in the vulgar tong. In the two fol lowing books is treated of that which concernes the Ele ments and naturall mixtures, as Mettalls, Plants, Beasts, and what else is remarkable at the Indies. The rest of the bookes relate what I could certainely discover, andwhat I thought worthie memory of the Indians them selves, their Ceremonies, Customs, Governments, Wars,and Adventures. In the same Historie shall be spoken (as I could learne and comprehend) of the figures of the antient Indians, seeing they had no writing nor characters as wehave, which is no small industry to have preserved their XXVI TO THE READER. Antiquities without the vse of letters. To conclude, thescope of this worke is, that having knowledge of the workesof nature, which the wise Author of all nature made, wemay praise and glorifie the high God, who is wonderfull inall things and all places. And having knowledge of theIndians customes, we may helpe them more easily to followand persevere in the high vocation of the Gospel; to theknowledge whereof the Lord would draw this blinde nationin these latter daies. Besides al these things, every onemay sucke out some profit for himselfe ; for that the wisedo alwaies draw forth some good out of the smallest subiect, as we finde deepe Philosophie in the least and basestcreatures. I must only advertise the reader, that the twofirst bookes of this historie or discourse were written inPeru, and the other five since in Europe, dutie binding meto returne into these partes : so as some speake of mattersof the Indies as of things present, and others as beingabsent. And therefore I have thought it good to advertisethe Reader heereof that this diversitie of speach may not betroublesome vnto him. Farewell. ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE DEDICATION TO THE INFANTA ISABELA xix TRANSLATOR S DEDICATION TO THE RIGHT HONOURABLE SIR ROBERT CICILL, KNIGHT - xxiii To THE READER - - xxiv NATURAL HISTORY. BOOK I. CHAPTER 1. Of the opinions of some authors which supposed that the Heavens did not extend to the new found land. View of St. Chrysostom 1 Opinions of Theodoret and Lactantius - 2 St. Jerome and St. Augustine 2 Fathers of the Church may err 3 CHAPTER 2. That the Heaven is round, on all parts moving in his course of itself. Opinion of Aristotle correct - 4 The Author s own experience 4 Proofs that the earth is round 5 Motions of the stars 6 Void places in the Heavens - 7 CHAPTER 3. How the Holt/ /Scripture teacheth us (hat the earth is in the middest of the world. Roundness of the Heavens 8 The waters 9 The earth rests upon nothing . 10 Wisdom of the Creator 1 1 XXV111 ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. CHAPTER 4. Containing an ansivere to that which is objected out ofthe Holy Scripture against the roundness of the earth, Explanation of St. Paul s words 12The letter kills; the spirit quickeneth - 13CHAPTER 5. Of the fashion and forme of Heaven at the new foundland. Comparison of stars in North and South 14The Southern Cross 14Art of navigation - 15Milky Way 15CHAPTER 6. That there is Land and Sea under the two Poles. Men as near Heaven in Peru as in Spain 15The Pole Antarticke 16Distribution of land and sea - 17Land and sea at the Poles 18Question of a North West Passage 18CHAPTER 7. To confute the opinion of Lactantius, who holdes there be no Antipodes. Lactantius and St. Augustine on the Antipodes - 19Reason corrects imagination 20The use of imagination 21CHAPTER 8. The reason why St. Augustine denied the Antipodes. Opinions of St. Augustine 22His difficulty in the greatness of the ocean 23Concurrence of St. Gregory Nazianzen - 23The Scriptures speak only of the then known world 24CHAPTER 9. Of Aristotle s opinion touching the new Worlde, andwhat abused him to make him deny it. Opinions of the ancients as to heat of the burning Zone 25Aristotle s opinion 25Want of knowledge among the Ancients 26Extreme cold and heat of Arctic and Torrid Zones 27The southern Zones - 29 ANALYTICAL TABLE OP CONTENTS. XXI K CHAPTER 10. That Plinie and the auncients held the same opinionivith Aristotle. Pliny thought the tropics uninhabitable 29Arguments of the ancients 30CHAPTER 11. That in ancient Bookes ive finde some knowledge ofthis newe world. Voyage of Hanno - -32Voyage of Eudoxus - 33Ancient knowledge of the East Indies - - 33Sumatra and Malacca - 33- Prophecy of Seneca 34CHAPTER 12. Of the opinions which Plato held of the West Indies. Timeeus and Critias - 36Interpretation of sayings of Plato 36CHAPTER 13. That some have held opinion that in places of HolyScripture, ivhereas they speake of Ophir, is to be understood of our Peru. Hispaniola said to be Ophir - 37Whether Peru be Ophir 37Fancied resemblance of names 38Ophir was in the East Indies 39CHAPTER 14. What Tharsis and Ophir signify in the Holy Script ures. Identification of Tarshish 40Tarshish has divers meanings 41 A general term 42CHAPTER 15. Of the Prophecie of A bdias, which some doe interpret to be the Indies. The discovery of America said to have been foretold in Scripture 42Prophecy of Obadiah 43Sepharad (Zarephath) supposed to be Spain 43 XXX ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. Cities of the South may be the Indies - 43Prophecy of Isaiah 44Many nations to whom Christ has not yet been preached 44CHAPTER 16. By what meanes the first men might come to the Indies,the ivhich was not willingly nor of set purpose. The New World not peopled by a miracle 45Opinion of the Author 46Passage in ships considered - 46New World not reached in ships 47The ancients were ignorant of the compass 48CHAPTER 17. Of the properties and admirable virtue of theAdamante stone for navigation, wliere<*f the Ancients had no knoivledge. Use of the compass in navigation 50Virtues of the load stone - 50Time of its discovery uncertain 51Variation of the compass 52Four points of no variation - 52CHAPTER 18. Wherein an answere is made to them that say that intimes passed they have sailed through the Ocean as at this day. Long voyages not proved by Scripture 53In ancient books no proof of long voyages 54The ancients only coasted along the shore 54CHAPTER 19. That ive may conjecture how the first inhabitants ofthe Indies came thither by force of iveatker and not willingly. Story of the discovery of America by a nameless pilot 54Most new countries discovered by chance 55Wonderful voyage recorded by Cornelius Nepos - 55Ship of Carthage driven to the New World 55Giants said to have landed in Peru 56People of Yea and Arica sailed in South Sea 56Most discoveries due to chance 57 ANALYTICAL TABLE OP CONTENTS. XXXICHAPTER 20. Notwithstanding all that hath bene said, it is morelikely that the first inhabitants of the Indies came by land. The beasts could not have come by sea 57No new creation in America 58Beasts could not have swum to the New World - 59Belief of the Author in a narrow strait 60CHAPTER 21. By what means tame beasts passed to the Indies. The Indians could only make short voyages 61No beasts on the West Indian Islands 62Animals reach islands by swimming 63CHAPTER 22. That the lineage of the Indians hath not passed bythe Atlantis Island as some do imagine. The Atlantis of Plato 64Atlantis a fable 66Pliny on Mount Atlas and Atlantis 66CHAPTER 23. That the opinion of many which hold that the firstrace of the Indians comes from the Jews is not true. A text of Esdras applied to the Indies 67Resemblance between dress of Jews and Indians - 67Points of difference 68The opinion confuted 69CHAPTER 24. The reason why we can find no beginning of the Indians. The peopling of the Indies was gradual 69The first arrivals savage and hunters 70CHAPTER 25. What the Indians report of their beginning. Tradition of a deluge 70Origin of the Yncas 71Origin of American civilizations 72 XXX11 ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. BOOK II. CHAPTER 1. That it is not out of purpose, but necessarie to treate of the nature of the Equinoctiall. The Equinoctial defined 73CHAPTER 2. For what reasons the ancients held that the burningZone ivas not inhabitable. Effect of Sun s motion on temperature . 74The further a country is from the Sun s course the colder - 74The hottest near the Zodiacs 74Dryness and moisture caused by the Sun 75 Hence Aristotle s opinion of the Southern heat . - 75 CHAPTER 3. That the burning Zone is very moist, contrary to the opinion of the Ancients. Yet the burning Zone is inhabited 76The seasons occur, but at different times 76 Seasons of greatest moisture 77CHAPTER 4. That in the Regions which be without the Tropicks there is greatest store of waters whenas the Sunne is farthest of, contrary to that under the burning Zone. Climate of Chile 78Cause of inundation of the Nile 78Inundation of the Paraguay or river Plate 78CHAPTER 5. That betwixt the tivo Tropicks the greatest aboundanceof raine is in Summer, with a discourse of Winter and Summer. Winter and Summer in the Tropics 79 Seasons in Peru 80CHAPTER 6. That the burning Zone abounds with waters andpastures, against the opinion of Aristotle ivho holds the contrarie". Abundance of Water in the Tropics 8 1 The yrreat river Amazons - - 82 ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. XXX111Lake Titicaca 83Question of drainage of Titicaca 84CHAPTER 7. Shewing the reason ivhy the Swine without the Tropickscauseth greatest quantitie of ivaters when it is farthest off ; and contrariwise within them it breedeth most ivhen it is nearest. Rain caused by heat of the Sun 84Effect of the Sun on vapour 8,5 Effect of heat on moisture 87Dry regions in the tropics . 88CHAPTER 8. How wee should understand that which hath been formerly spoken of the burning Zone. Dry region on the coast of Peru 88Exceptions to natural rules 89CHAPTER 9. That the Burning Zone is not violent/// hotte, but moderate. Moderate heat in the tropics 90The Author s experience 90CHAPTER 10. That the heat of the burning Zone is temperate, byreason of the rayne and the shortness of the dayes. Heat tempered by rain 91 Length of days and nights 92Causes for moderate heat in the tropics 93CHAPTER 11. That there be other reasons besides the former mentioned^ which shew that the burning Zone is temperate, especially alongst the Ocean. Causes for temperate climate in the tropics 94The sea tempers the heat 95CHAPTER 12. That the highest lands are the coldest, and the reason thereof. The middle region of the air the coldest 9G Nature of the elements 97 d XXXI V ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. CHAPTER 13. That the colde windes be the principall cause to makethe burning Zone temperate. Coolness of the night not sufficient to moderate Sun s heat - 99Effect of winds in the tropics 99Land and Sea Breezes 100CHAPTER 14. That they which inhabite under the Equinoctiall lire a sweete and pleasant life. Importance of healthy air 101A healthy life possible in the tropics 103These two books written in the Indies. The five following in Europe 103CHAPTER 1. That the natural! Historic <>/ the Indies is pleasantand agreeable. He that takes delight in the works of nature shall taste the true pleasure of Histories 104The Author will write briefly 105CHAPTER 2. Of the windes, their differences, properties, and causesin general!. Properties of the winds 106Names of winds - 107CHAPTER 3. Of certaine properties of wiudcs which Uowe at the newworlde. Origin of the south wind 110Winds in Peru - 111CHAPTER 4. That in the burning Zoue the JSrisas, or Easterlywindes do continually blowe, and without the Zone the westerne, and that the Easterly are ordinarie alwaies there. The trade windes - - 113 ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. XXXVVoyages of the Spanish fleets 114Navigation in the South Sea 115Winds without the tropics 116CHAPTER 5. -Of the differences of the Brisas or Easterne windes, find the West-ernet and likewise of other windes. Direction of the trade winds 1 1 7 Names of the winds 119CHAPTER 6. What is the reason why, sailing under tJie burningZone, we finde alwayes Easterly windes. Cause of the trade winds 121 Motion of the Comet of 1577 122Father Alonzo Sanches on trade winds - 124CHAPTER 7. Why, without the Zone, in a greater altitude, we finde alwai/es westerly whides. Explanation of westerly winds outside the tropics 1 25Variable winds in 40 N. Lat. 125CHAPTER 8.-Of the exceptions to the foresaid Pules, and of the Windes <ntd Calmes, both at Land and at Sea. On land the same rule does not hold 1 25Land and Sea Breezes 126Rain-bearing winds 127The author s voyage from Peru to Mexico 127CHAPTER 9. Of some marvellous effects of tJte windes, vldch ore in some parte* of the Indies. Strange effects of winds 128Sea sickness 129Sickness at great heights 130Remedy for sickness 131Intense cold of the Punas - 132CHAPTER 10. Of the Ocean that environs the Indies, and of the North and South /Seas. No inland seas 135d 2 XXXVI ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. The South Sea 135Question of cutting the Isthmus 1 35Straits of Magellan 136Voyages of Drake and Sarmiento - 137CHAPTER 11. Of the Straight of Magellan, and hoiv it was passed on the south side. Expedition of Sarmiento - 137CHAPTER 12. Of the Straight which some holde to be in Florida. The North West Passage 141 CHAPTER 13. Of the properties of the Straight of Magellan. Depth. Length - 142Tides - 143CHAPTER 14. Of the ebbing and flowing of the Indian Ocean. Tides in the Mediterranean 144Tide at Panama - 145Tide in Magellan Straits 1454 CHAPTER 15. Of sundry Fishes, and their manner of fishing at the Indies. Fish in the South Sea 146Manati 146Voracity of sharks 147Caymans 147Alligators 148Whale fishing 149Fishing in balsas 150Chirihuana fishing 151 CHAPTER 16. Of Lakes and Pooles that be at the Indies. Lake Titicaca 151 Lakes in the Andes 152Lakes in Mexico 153CHAPTER 17. Of many and divers Springs and Fountains. Hot spring at Huancavelica 154 ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. XXXV11Springs of pitch - 155Fountain of salt near Cuzco 155Springs flowing by sarsaparilla plants - 156Springs rising on Vilcafiota - 156Colored springs - 156CHAPTER 18. Of rivers. River Maranon or Amazons - 156Passage of the Pongo 157Paraguay or river Plate - - 158Magdalena - 158Passage of rivers. Irrigation - 159CHAPTER 19. Of the qualitie of the land at the Indies in generall. Coast valleys of Peru - 160Sierra of Peru 161Temperate valleys 162CHAPTER, 20. Of the properties of the land of Peru. , Extent of Peru 163Physical features of Peru - 164Rainfall in Peru - - 165The Collao 166CHAPTER 21. The reason why it does not, ruin on the Llanos, along^the sea coast. Cause of no rain on the coast of Peru - - 167Fertilizing mists - - - - 168CHAPTER 22.- Of the propertie of new Spaine, of the Hands, and ofother Lands. Vineyards in Peru 168Pastures in Mexico - 168Soil of the Antilles 169Climate of Chile - 170CHAPTER 23. Of the unknowne Land, and the diversitie of a wholeday betwixt them of the East and the West. Conjectured land of Australia 1 70 XXXVlll ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. Unknown parts - - 171 Discoveries between Peru and Brazil 1 72 Difference of time - 173CHAPTER 24. Of the Volcanos or Vents of Fire. Description of volcanoes - 1 74 Volcano at Guatimala 175Ashes from Volcano near Quito * 175CHAPTER 25. What should be the reason why the fire and smoake continue so long in these Volcanos. Cause of irruptions 176Death of Pliny 177CHAPTER 26. Of Earthquakes. Earthquakes in sympathy with volcanos 1 78 Great earthquake in Chile 179 Earthquake of Arcquipa in 1582 179Earthquake 9 June, 1586, at Lima 179Earthquake at Quito 179 Sea coast most subject to earthquakes 180Land slip at Angoango - 180CHAPTER 27. How the land and sea imbrace one another. Indentations of coast lines - 181 Shape of South America 182 BOOK IV. CHAPTER 1. Of three kindes of mixtures or compounds, of the which I must intreatc in this Historie. Metals 183 Plants 184 Animals 184Study of God s works 184 ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. XXXIXCHAPTER 2. Of the aboundance and great quantitie of Mettall at the West Indies. Uses of metals 185Gold and silver 186Mineral wealth of Peru 187CHAPTER 3. Of the qualitie and nature of the earth where the mettails are found, and that all these mettalls are not imployed at the Indies, and hoiv the Indians used them. Mineral wealth generally in barren lands 188Gold, silver, and copper 188Use of barter 189CHAPTER 4. Of gold which they dig and refine at the Indies. The Yncas had abundance of gold 191Found in grains 191In veins 192Mines of Caravaya and Valdivia - 192Method of refining 193CHAPTER 5. Of the silver of the Indies. Veins of silver - 195Method of refining by Indians 195196CHAPTER 6. Of the mountaine or hill of Potosi and the discovert/ thereof. Situation of the mines of Potosi 197Description of the hill - 198Discovery of the mines 198CHAPTER 7. Of the treasure which is daily drawne from the rocke or mountaine of Potosi. Pliny on the mines of Spain 201Yield of Potosi 202King s share 203Amount sent home in 1587 - - 20-i xl ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. CHAPTER 8. How they labour in the mines of Potosi. Great labour and peril of mining 205 Chief veins at Potosi 206 Number of Mines 207 Labour in continual darkness 207 Method. of working - 208 CHAPTER 9. How they refine the Mettall of Silver. Kinds of silver ores 209 Method of refining with furnaces 210 With quicksilver - 210 CHAPTER 10. Of the wonderful properties of Quick silver. Properties of quicksilver 211 CHAPTER 11. Of the place where they fmde quicksilver, and how they discovered these rich mines in Huancavilca. Vermillion 214 Discovery in Peru 215 Mercury brought to Potosi in 1571 - 217 King s profit from Huancavilca mine 217 CHAPTER 12. The manner hoiv to drawe out Quick-xilcer and how they refine silver. Method of working the quicksilver mine 217 Transport to Potosi and the coast 218 Use in refining silver 219 CHAPTER 13. Of their engines to grinde the mettal/, and of their triall of silver. Method of grinding silver ores - 220 Water mills - 222 Assay Master; Alloy - 223 Testing the silver - 223 CHAPTKR 14. Of Jlwcraldes. Value of emeralds - 224 Localities where found 22-") ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. xll CHAPTER 15. Of Pearles. Grow in oyster shells . . . .226Fisheries . . . .227Yield . . . . . .228CHAPTER 16. Of the Indian Iread and of maize. Bread of Peruvians made of maize . . .229Description of maize . . . .229Different kinds .... 229Various ways of cooking it . . . .230Fermented liquor from maize . . .230CHAPTER 17. Of Yucas, Cag-avi, Pajias, Chunus, and Rice. Cassava bread made from Yuca . . .232Potatoes . . . . .233Method of making Chunus . . . .233Rice ... .234CHAPTER 18. Of divers routes which growe at the Indies. Various edible roots ....235Abundant Spanish roots in Peru . . . 235CHAPTER 19. Of divers sortes of green Herles and Pulses, and ofthose they call Pepinos and Pine Apples, Strawberries of Chile, and of Cherries. Pine apples . . 236Pepinos .....237Calabashes 238CHAPTER 20. Of Axi or Indian Pepper. Ginger grown in the Indies . . . .239Cultivation of capsicum . . . . . 239Capsicum very hot, but much used . . . 240CHAPTER 21. Of the Plantain. Cultivation of the plantain . . . . 241Description of the plant . . .242May be used fur paper ....211 xlii ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. CHAPTER 22. Of Cacao and Coca. Description of the Cacao ....244Chocolate made from it . . . 245Coca in Peru . . . . . 245Value of coca .....245Cultivation of coca . . . . 246Used by the Yncas . . . .246CHAPTER 23. Of Maguey, Tunal, Cochenelle, Anis, Cotton. Uses of Maquey .....247Prickly pear or Tunal . . . .247Cochineal ....248Cotton . . . . . .249CHAPTER 24. Of Mamays, Guayavos, and Paltas. Mamay apples . . . .249Guayavos . . . . .250Alligator pears .....250CHAPTER 25. Of Chicogapote, Anonas, and Cctpolies. Chirimoyas . . . . .251CHAPTER 26. Of various sortes of fruit Trees, of Cocos, Almondesof the Andes, and Almondes of Chachapoyas. GnavMs .....252Lucmas . . . . .252Paccays . . . . .252Cocoa nuts . . . . .253CHAPTER 27. Of many and diverse floivers, and of some trees which yeelde only a flower, and how the Indians do use them. The Indians love flowers ....255Numerous kinds of flowers ....255The Datura .....255Granadillas . . , 256CHAPTER 28. Of Balsam. Balsam of the Indies . . . .257Piftbreiit kinds 257 ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. CHAPTER 29. Of Amber and other Oyles, Gums, and Drugges, ivhich they bring from the Indies. Liquidambar . . . . .259Cassia fistula . . . .260Storax and copal . . . . .260Sarsaparilla . . . . .260Brazil wood .....260Purgatives . . . .261Tobacco . . . . .261CHAPTER 30. Of great forrests at the Indies of Cedars, of Cayvas,and oilier great trees. Great variety of timber trees . . . 262Strange adventures in a forest . . .262Cedars and Laurels . . . .263Palms . . . . . .263Oak of Guayaquil . .263Bamboos . . . .263Schinus Molle . . . . .264CHAPTER 31. Of Infants ana fruits ivhich have bin carried out of /Spaine to the Indies. Corn and garden vegetables ....265Fruit trees .....265CHAPTER 32. Of grapes, vines, olives, mulberries, and canes of sugar. Vineyards in Peru . . . .267Fig-tree at Mala . . .268Mulberries and silk-worms ....269Sugar estate at Nasca ....269Olives in Mexico and Peru ....269CHAPTER 33. Of Beasts bearing ivootl and of Jcine. Sheep and cloth -making . . . .270Wild cattle in St. Domingo . . . .271Trade in hides . . . . .271Horses and dogs . . . .272 ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. CHAPTER 34. Of some Beasts of Europe which the Spaniardes foundat the Indies, and how they passed thither. Fierce and wild beasts the same as in the Old World . 273Indian hunts called Chacu . . . .273Tigers and beasts . . . . .274Bees and honey . . . . .274CHAPTER 35. Of Fowles which are heere, and are at the Indies, andhoiv they could passe thither. Partridges, pigeons, herons, eagles . . .275Parrots . . . . .275Birds might pass the sea . . . .275Hens and eggs . . . . .276CHAPTER 36. How it should be possible that at the Indies there should be anie sortes of beasts, whereof the like are no where else. All animals must have passed from the Old World . 277God may have made a new creation of beasts . .277Very different from those of Europe . . .278CHAPTER 37. Offowles that are proper to the Indies. Birds of Paradise from China . . . 279Humming birds in Peru . . . .279Condors and Turkey buzzards . . .279Macaws . . . . .279Work in feathers .....280Guano and its use as manure . . .281CHAPTER 38. Of Beasts for the Chaw. Peccaries . . 282Tapirs . . .283Armadillos and Yguanas ....283Chinchillas and Uiscachas 284CHAPTER 39. Of Micos or Indian Monkeys. Various kinds of monkeys Pricks of monkeys ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. xlvCHAPTER 40. Of Vicunas and Tarugas of Peru. Description of Vicuiias . . . .287Vicuna hunts . . . . . 287Wool and cloth made from it . .287CHAPTER 41. Of Pacos, Huanacos, and Sheep of Peru. Uses of llamas and alpacas ....289Llamas beasts of burden . . . .290Disease of llamas . . . . .291CHAPTER 42. Of the bezoar stone. Bezoar stone found in llamas, etc. . . . 292Virtues of the bezoar stone . . . 294

THE NATURAL HIST GEY.

THE FIRST BOOKEOf the Naturall and Morall Historic of theEast and West Indies. CHAP. i. Of tlie opinions of some Authors, which supposed that Hie Heavens did not extend to the new-found ivorld. THE Ancients were so farre from conceypt that this new- LlB- T-found world was peopled by any Nation, that many of themcould not imagine there was any land on that part; and (which is more worthie of admiration) some have flatly denyed that the Heavens (which we now beholde) could extend thither. For although the greatest part (yea, the most famous among the Philosophers) have well knownethat the Heaven was round (as in effect it is), and by that meanes did compasse and comprehend within it self the whole earth ; yet many, (yea, of the holy doctors of greatest authoritie) have disagreed in opinion vpon this point ; sup posing the frame of this vniversall world to bee fashioned like vnto a house ; whereas the roofe that covers it invirons onely the upper part and not the rest ; inferring by their reasons, that the earth should else hang in the middest of the ayre, the which seemed vnto them voyd of sense. For as we see in every building, the ground-worke and founda tion on the one side, and the cover opposite vnto it, even so in this great building of the world, the Heaven should re- maine above on the one part, and the earth vnder it. The glorious Chrysostome (a man better seene in the studie of holy Scriptures then in the knowledge of Philosophic) seemes to be of this opinion, when in his Commentaries Z OF THE FORM OF THE EARTH. LIB. i. ypon the Epistle to the Hebrewes, he doth laugh at thosewhich hold the heavens to be round. And it seemes, theholy Scripture doth inferre as much, terming the HeavensaTabernacle or Frame built by the hand of God. And heepasseth farther vpon this point, saying, that which moovesand goes is not the Heaven, but the Sunne, Moone, andStarres, which moove in the heaven, even as Sparrowes andliom.vi, xni, andhom tner birds moove in the ayre ; contrary to that, which theAntiocP h P Philosophers hold, that they turne with the Heaven it selfe,Theodoret. as the armes of a wheele doe with the wheele. Theodoret,a very grave Authour, followes Chrysostome in this opinion,Theophii. an(J Theophilus likewise, as hee is accustomed almost in allm capital. * s.adHebre. ^hinges. But Lactantius Firmian, above all the rest,Lact.,lib.iii, inst" homing the- same opinion, doth mocke the Peripatetickes andAcademickes, which give the heaven a round forme, placingthe earth in the middest thereof; for that it seemeth ridi culous vnto him, that the earth should hang in the ayre, asis before sayde. By which his opinion he is conformablevnto Epicurus, who holdeth, that on the other part of theearth there is nothing but a Chaos and infinite gulph. And^ seemeth that S. lerome draweth neere to this opinion,, c. 4. writing vpon the Epistle to the Ephesians in these wordes: " The natural! Philosopher by his contemplation pierceth tothe height of heaven, and on the other part he findeth agreat vast in the depth and bowels of the earth." Somelikewise say that Procopius affirmes (the which I have notseene) vpon the booke of Genesis, that the opinion of Arisiib. v, bib- totle, touching the forme and circular motion of the Heavenlip. anriotat. . . "* is contrarie and repugnant to the holy Scriptures. Butwhatsoever the Ancients say or holde touching this point,it must not trouble vs, for that it is wel knowne and verifiedthat they have not beene so studious in the knowledge anddemonstrations of Philosophie, being busied in other studiesof farre greater importance. But that which is more to beadmired is, that S. Augustine himselfe, so well seene in all DOCTORS OP HOLY CHURCH HAVE ERRED. O naturall Sciences, yea, very learned in Astrologie and LlB- * Physicke, remaynes yet still in doubt, not able to resolve, Aug., lib. n whether the Heaven did compasse in the earth on all parts, ut. c. 9." "What care I", saith he. " if we suppose the Heaven doth ia. r*ai. XXXV. inviron the earth on all parts like viito a bowle, 1 beeing in the rniddest of the world, as a bottome is compassed with threed : 2 or that we say it is not so, and that the Heaven covereth the earth of one part onely as a great Basin that hangs over it." 3 In the same place he seemeth to shew (nay, hee speaketh plainely) that there is no certaine demonstra tion to proove the figure of the world to be round, but onely by simple conjectures. In which places cited and others, they hold the circular motion of the Heaven very doubtfull. But wee ought not to take it offencively, nor esteeme lesse of the Doctors of the holy Church, if in some points of Philosophie and naturall knowledge, they have varied in opinion from that which is helde for good philosophic ; seeing all their studie hath been to know, preach, and serve the Creator of all things, wherein they have bin excellent, and having well irnployed their studies in causes of greater waight, it is a small matter in them not to have knowen all particularities concerning the creatures. But those vaine Philosophers of our age are much more to bee blamed who, having attayned to the knowledge of the being and order of the creatures, and of the course and motion of the Heavens, haue not yet learned (wretched as they are) to knowe the Creator of all things, but busying themselves wholly in his workes, have not yet mounted by their imaginations to the knowledge of the Soveraigne Author thereof as the holy |^e" - xiii Scripture teacheth vs ; or if they have knowne him, they have not served and glorified him as they ought, blinded with their imaginations, whereof the Apostle doth accuse and blame them. 1 " Como una bola. 2 " Estando clla en medio del mundo como en el fil." 3 " Como un plato grande quo esta encima. 1 B 2 PROOFS THAT THE EARTH IS ROUND. CHAP. ii. That the Heaven is round on all parts, moovingin his course of it self. But comming to our subiect, there is no doubt but theopinion which Aristotle and the other Peripateticks held withthe Stoicks (that the figure of Heaven was round, and didmoove circularly in his course), is so perfectly true, as wewhich doe now live in Peru see it visibly. Wherin experience should be of more force then all Philosophicall demonstrations, being sufficient to proove that the Heavenis round, and comprehends and contaynes the earth within it of al parts. And to cleere any doubt that might grow, it sufficeth that I have seene in this our Hemisphere that partof Heaven which turnes about this earth, the which was vn-knowne to the Ancients ; and have observed the two Poleswhereon the Heavens turne, as vpon their Axeltrees. I say,the Articke, or North Pole, which those of Europe beholde,and the other Antarticke, or Southerne Pole (whereof saintd<TcnS " Augustine is in doubt), the which we change and take forad lit., cap. tj ie N^h h ere at pevU) having passed the Equinoctiall line. Finally, it sufficeth that I have sayled neere 70 degrees fromNorth to South, that is, forty of the one side of the line and23 on the other, omitting at this present the testimony ofothers which have sayled much farther then my selfe, andin a greater height, comming neere 70 degrees towards theSouth. Who will not confesse but the ship called the Victorie1 (worthie doubtlesse of eternall memorie) hath wonnethe honor and praise to have best discovered and compassedthe round earth, yea, that great Chaos and infinite Vastwhich the ancient Philosophers affirmed to bee vnder the1 Magellan s ship, which is represented on the covers of the volumesof the Ilakluyt Society. See an account of her at page 16 (note) ofvol. i of my translation of the first part of the Royal Commentaries ofthe Yncas, by the Ynca Garcilasso de la Vega. (Hakluyt Society s volume for 1809.) PROOFS THAT THE EARTH IS ROUND. 5 earth, having compassed about the worlde and circled the LlB - r- vastnesse of the great Oceans. Who is hee then that will not confesse by this Navigation but the whole earth (al though it were bigger then it is described) is subiect to the feet of man,, seeing he may measure it ? Thus, without doubt, the Heaven is of a round and perfect figure j and the earth likewise imbracing and ioyning with the water makes one globe or round bovvle framed of these two elements, having their bounds and limits within their own roundnes and greatnes. The which may be sufficiently proved by reasons of Philosophie and Astrologie, leaving al subtil de finitions commonly obiected. That, to the most perfect body (which is the Heaven), we must give the most perfect figure, which, without doubt, is round, whose circular motion could not be firme nor equall in it selfe, if it had any corner or nooke of any side, or if it were crooked (as of necessitie it must be), if the Sun, Moone, and Stars made not their course about the whole world. But leaving all these reasons, it seemes that the Moone is sufficient in this case as a faithfull witnesse of the Heaven it selfe,* seeino-o that her Eclypse happens, but when as the roundnesse of the earth opposeth it selfe diarnetrally betwixt her and the Sunne, and by that meanes keepes the Sunnebeames from shining on her. The which could not chance if the earth were not in the midst of the world, compassed in and in- vironed by the whole Heaven. Some haue doubted whether the light of the Moone were borrowed from the brightnes of the Sunne ; but it is needlesse, seeing there can bee found no other cause of the Eclipses, full, and quarters of the Moone, but the communication of the beames which proceed from the Sunne. Tn like sort, if wee will carefully AUO-., ep. axamine this matter, we shall finde that the darkenesse of Barium, cap. 6. the night proceedes from no other cause but from the shadow which the earth makes, not suffering the light of he siuinc to passe to the other parte of the heaven, where 6 MOTIONS OF THE STARS. LlB - r - his beames shine not. If then it be so, that the sunnepasseth no farther, neyther doth cast his beames on theother part of the earth, but onely turnes about, and returnesto his setting, making a ridge vpon the earth by histurning (the which he must of force confesse that shalldenie the roundnes of the heaven, seeing (according to theirsaying) the heaven as a bason doth onely couer the face ofthe earth), it should then plainly follow that wee could notobserue the difference betwixt the daies and nights, thewhich in some regions be short and long according to theseasons, and in some are alvvaies equall, the which S. AuAugust., p-ustine noteth in his bookes De Genes, ad litteram. Thatlib. do !ittCTam d we may easily comprehend the oppositions, conversions,cap. 19. elevations, descents, and all other aspects and dispositionsof planets and starres, when we shall vnderstaiid they move,and yet notwithstanding the heaven remaines firme andimmoveable. The which seemeth to me easie to comprehend, and will be to all others, if it may be law full to imagine that which my fancy doth conceive ; for if we supposethat every star and planet be a body of it selfe, and that itDan. xiv. ]j G j ed and guided by an Angell, as Habacuc was carriedinto Babilon, who I pray you is so blind but seeth that allthe diverse aspects which we see appeare in planets andstarres may proceede from the diuersity of motion which hethat guides them doth voluntarily giue them. We cannotthen with any reason affirm e but that this space and regionby which they faine that stars do continually march androwle is eleinentarie and corruptible, seeing it divides it selfe when they pass, the which vndoubtedly do not passeby any void place. If then the region wherein the starresand planets move be corruptible, the stars and planets oftheir owue motion should be by reason likewise corruptible,and so by consequence they must alter, change, and befinally extinct ; for naturally that which is conteined is nomore durable then that which conteineth. And to say that VOID PLACES IN THE HEAVENS. 7 the Celestiall bodies be corruptible, it agreeth not with the LlB - T - psalme, {f That God made them for euer": And it is lesse conformable to the order and preservation of this vniversall world. I say moreover, to confirme this truth, that the heauens move, and in them the starres march in turning, the which we cannot easily discerne with our eyes, seeing we see that not onely the starres do moue, but also the re gions and whole parts of heaven ; I speake not onely of the shining and most resplendent parts, as of that which we call Via lactea, and the vulgar S. laques way, but also of the darker and obscurer parts of heaven. For there we see really as it were spots and darkenes, which are most appa rent : the which I remember not to haue seene at any time in Europe, but at Peru, and in this other Hemis phere I haue often seene them very apparant. These spots are in colour and forme like vnto the Eclips of the Moone, and are like vnto it in blacknes arid darkenes ; they march, fixed to the same starres, alwaies of one forme and bignes, as we haue noted by infallible ob servation. It may be this will seenie strange to some, and they will demand whence these spots in heaven should grow. To the which I cannot answere otherwise at this time, but (as the Philosophers do affirme) that this Via lactea, or milken way, is compounded of the thickest parts of the heaven, and for this cause it receiues the greater light ; and contrariwise, there are other parts very thinne and transparent, the which receiuing lesse light seeme more blacke and obscure. Whether this be the true reason or no I dare not certenly affirme. Yet is it true that, according to the figure these spots have in heaven, they moue with the same proportion with their starres without any separa tion, the which is a true, certaine, and often noted expe rience. It followeth then by all that we haue said, that the heaven containeth in it all the parts of the earth, circling continually about it, without any more doubt. ROUNDNESS OE THE HEAVENS. CHAP. in. How the holy Scripture teachcth vs that the earth is in middest of the world. LIB. i. Although it seemes to Procopius Gaza/ and to some othersof his opinion, that it is repugnant to the holy Scripture toSjfuijvii, place the earth in the middest of the world, and to say thatSaLxdivii, ^ne heaven is round, yet in truth this doctrine is not rexcvii.xs x pugnaut, but conformable to that which it doth teach vs. lob xxxyii. . Eccies. i. For laying aside the tearmes which the Scripture it selfedoth vse in many places, " The roundnesse of the earth"; and that which it sayeth in an other place, that whatsoeveris corporeal! is invironed and compassed in by the heavensand conteyned within the roundnes thereof, at the least theycannot deny but that place of Ecclesiastes is very plainewhere it is said, " The Sunne riseth and sets, and returnesto the same place, and so begins to rise againe ; he takeshis course by the South, turning towards the North ; thisspirit niarcheth compassing about all thinges, and thenreturnes to the same place." In this place the paraphraseand exposition of Gregorie Neocesarien, or Nazianzeiie,sayeth, " The Sunne hauing runne about the whole earth,returnes as it were, turning to the same point." That whichSolomon sayeth (being interpreted by Gregorie) could notbe trve if any part of the earth were not invironed with theg 6^ 11 cap< heaven. And so S. Jerome doth vnderstand it, writingEphes. vpon the Epistle to the Ephesians in this sort, " The mostcommon opinion affirines (agreeing with Ecclesiastes) thatthe heaven is round, mooving circularly like vnto a bowle." And it is most certaine that no round figure conteyneth init eyther longitude, latitude, heigth, or depth, for that all Basil., hom. parts are equall. Whereby it appeares, according to S.Hexam. Jerome,

• That those which hold the heaven to be round areprope fincrn not repugnant to the holy Scripture, but conformable to thesame." And although that S. Easile especially, and S.Ambrose (who doth vsually imitate him in his bookes called1 Gozes.

THE WATERS. 9 Hexameron) soeme somewhat doubtfull of this point, yet in LlB> T - the end they grant that the world is round. It is true that S. Ambrose doth not yeelde to this quintessence1 which Amb.,iib.yHexam.,Aristotle attributes to the heavens, without doubt it is a cai j - G - goodly thing to see with what a grace and excellent stile the holy Scripture treates of the scituation and firmenes of the earth to breed in vs a wonderfull admiration, and no lesse content to behold the vnspeakable power and wisedome of the Creator. For that in one place God himselfe saies J^.that it was hee which planted the pillers which support the earth ; giving vs to vnderstand (as S. Ambrose doth well Amb- * tLcxsi. expound it) that the vnmeasurable weight of the whole earth is held vp by the hands of the divine power. The holy Scripture doth commonly so call them, and vseth this phrase, naming them the pillers of heaven and earth, not those of Atlas, as the Poets faine, but of the eternall word of God, who by his vertue supports both heaven and earth. Moreover, the holy Scripture in an other place teacheth, Job ix, 20.that the earth, or a great part thereof, is ioyned to and com passed in by the Element of water, speaking generally, that God placed the earth vpon the waters. And in another Heb> L place, that hee framed the roundnes of the earth vpon the Sea. And although S. Augustine doth not conclude vpon this text, as a matter of faith, that the earth and the water make one globe in the midst of the world, pretending by this meanes to give another exposition to the words of the Psalm e ; yet notwithstanding it is most certaine that by the words of the psalme we are given to vnderstand that we haue no other reason to imagine any other ciment or vniting to the earth then the Element of water, the which although it be pliant and moveable, yet doth it support and inviron this great masse of the earth, the which was wrought by the wisedome of that great Architect. They say, the earth is built vpon the waters and vpon the sea ; but contrariwise, the earth is rather vnder the waters ; for according to com1 " Quinta substantial 10 THE EAETH RESTS UPON NOTHING. LIB. i. mon Judgement and imagination,, that which is on the otherpart of the earth which we inhabite seemes to be vnder theearth, and so by the same reason, the waters and sea whichdoe compasse in the earth on the other part should bevnderneath and the earth above ; yet the very truth is, thatwhat is properly beneath that is alwaies in the midst of thevniversall; but the holy scripture frames it selfe to ourmanner of conceiving and speaking. Some may demaund(seeing the earth is set vpon the waters, as the scripturesayeth) whereon the waters are placed and what supporthaue they ? And if the earth and the water make one roundglobe, how can all this monstrous masse be sustayned? To thisthe holy scripture answereth them in another place, givingvs greatest cause to admire the power of the Creator, andjob xxvi. saith in these wordes, " The earth extends towards theNorth vpon the Vast, and staves hanging vpon nothing." The which in trueth is very well spoken, for that really it seemes this heape of earth and water is set vpon nothing,when we describe it in the middest of the ayre, as in truethit is. But this wonder, which men so much admire, Godhimselfe hath not layd open, demanding of the same lob inthese termes " Tell mee if thou canst, who hath layd thelyne or cast the lead for the building of the world, andwith what morter the foundations have beene layed andioyned." Finally, to make vs vnderstand the fashion andmodell of this admirable frame of the world, the ProphetDauid, accustomed to sing and praise his divine works, saiesvery well in a Psalrae made of this subiect in these wordes,(( ^hou which hast built the earth vpon firmenes it selfe,that it cannot stagger nor move for ever and ever." Meaning to shew the cause why the earth set in the midstof the ayre falleth not, nor staggereth from place to place,for that by nature it hath sure foundations, layed by themost wise Creator, to the end it might sustaine it selfewithout any other support. Mans imagination is therefore WISDOM OF THE CEEATOK. 11 deceive 1 in this place, seeking other foundations of the LlB - r - earth, and for want thereof, doth measure divine things according to humaine reason. So that we neede not to feare (how great or heavy soever this masse of earth then hanging in the aire seemeth to be) that it can fal or turne topsy turuy, being assured vpon this point; for that the same Psalmist saieth that it shall neuer be overthrowne. Truly Dauid with reason (after he had beheld and sung the wonderfull workes of the Lord) doth not cease to praise him in the same, saying, " O, how great and wonderfull are the workes of the Lord." It appeares that all spring from psai. cm.his knowledge. And in truth (if I shall freely speake my opinion touching this point), often in my trauell passing the great gulfes of the Ocean, and marching by other regions of so strange lands, staying to behold and consider the greatnes of these workes of the Lord, I felt a wonderfull consolation of the soveraigne wisedonie and greatnes of the Creator, who shines in his works ; in comparison whereof all the Pallaces, Castells, and princely buildings, together with all the inventions of man, seeme nothing, yea, are base and contemptible in respect thereof. O how often hath come into my minde and mouth that place of the Psalm e which sayeth thus " Great comfort hast thou given me, Lord, by thy workes ; I will not cease to reioyce in the con templation of the workes of thy hands." E-eally and in truth the workes of God haue (I know not what) secret and hidden grace and vertve ; the which although they be often beheld, yet do they still cause a new taste and content, whereas contrariwise, the workes of man, although they be built with exquisite art, yet often seene, they are no more esteemed, but breede a distaste ; be they most pleasant Gardins, Pallaces, or stately Temples, be they Piramides of proud buildings, Pictures, carved images, or stones of rare worke and invention, or whatsoever else adorned with all the beauties possible. Yet is it most certen that viewing 12 ANSWEK TO OBJECTIONS. LlB - x - them twice or thrice with attention, the eye presently turnesaway, being glutted with the sight thereof. But if you beholde the sea with attention, or some steepe mountainegrowing from a plaine to a strange heigth, or the fieldesclad in their naturall verdure with pleasant flowres, or theraging course of some river beating continually against therocks, finally, what worke of nature soever, although it booften viewed, yet doth it still breede a new content, andnever gluttes the sight ; the which is like vnto a statelybancket of the divine wisedom, which doth alwaies cause anew consideration without any lotting. CHAP. iv. Containing an answcre to that wliich is objectedout of the holy Scripture, against the roundnes of the earth. Returning then to the figure of heaven, I know not outof what authentic of the holy scripture they can provethat it is not round, nor his motion circular: neither do Isee (whereas S. Paul calles the heaven a Tabernacle, or aTent wliich God made, and not man:) how can it be appliedto this purpose: for although he telleth vs that it was madeby God, yet must we not therefore coniecture that theheaven covereth the earth like to a roofe on the one partonly, neither that the heaven was framed without motion,as it seemes some would inferre. The Apostle in this placetreated of the conformity of the auncient Tabernacle of thelawe, saying therevpon, that the Tabernacle of the newlaw of grace is heaven: into the which, the great Priestlesus Christ, entred once by his bloud: and thereby is vnderstood, that there is as great preheminence of the newaboue the old, as there is difference betwixt the author ofthe new, which is God, and of the olde which was man:although it be most certcn, that the olde was built by tho ANSWER TO OBJECTIONS. 13 wisedome of God, who instructed his workman Bezeleell. LlB - T - Neither must we imagine that these comparisons, parables, EXO. xxxvi.and allegories, doe in all things agree with that wherevnto they are applyed, as the happy Crysostome hath learnedly chnsost.inspoken vpon this point. The other authoritie (which S. Augustine saies is alleaged of some to shew that the heaven is not round) is this, <f The heavens stretch forth like vnto a p^ciii> skin." Whereby he concludes that it is not round, but flat on the vpper part, wherevnto the same Doctor doth an- swere verie well and familiarly, giuing vs to vnderstand that that place of the Psalme is not properly to be vnder- Gen acnft-stood of the figure of heaven, but onely to shew with what JJram-> c - facilitie God built so great a heaven, being no more painefull for him to build so huge a couer as the heaven is, then to vnfould a double skin. Or else the Psalmist pretending to shew vs the great maiesty of God, to whome the heaven, with his greatnes and beautie, doth serve in like manner as our tents and pavilions in the field. The which was well expressed by a Poet calling it, " The Tent of the cleere heaven . In like sort, the place of Isaii, which sayeth, " Heaven serves mee as a chaire, and the earth for a foote- isaieixvi.stoole^. But if wee follow the error of the Antromorphites, which did atribute corporall members vnto God, according to his divinitie, we should haue occasion vppon this last text, to examine how it were possible the earth should be a foote-stoole to Gods feete, and how the same God could hold his feete of the one part and the other, and many heads round about, seeing that hee is in all partes of the world, which were a vaine and ridiculous thing. Wee must therefore conclude, that in the holy scriptures we ought not to follow the letter which killes, but the spirit which quickneth, as saith S. Paul. 2Corint.u. 14 STARS IN THE SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE. CHAP. v. Of the fashion and forme of Heaven, at the newfound world. LIB< * _ Many in Europe demaund of what forme and fashionHeaven is in the Southerne parts, for that there is nocertaintie found in ancient bookes, who,, although theygraurit there is a Heaven on this other part of the world,yet come they not to any knowledge of the forme thereof,although in trueth they make mention of a goodly greatp n-22 lb V1 Starre seene in those partes, which they call Ganopus.Those which of late dayes have sayled into these parts,have accustomed to write strange things of this heaven;that it is very bright, having many goodly starres: and ineffect, thinges which come farre are commonly describedwith encrease. But it seemes contrary vnto me, holding it for certaine, that in our Region of the North, there is agreater nomber and bigger Starres: finding no starres inthese partes, which exceed the Fisher or the Chariot inbignesse. It is true, that the Crosse in these partes is very fayre and pleasing to behold: wee call the Crosse,foure notable and apparant starres, which make the formeof a crosse, set equally and with proportion. The ignorantsuppose this Crosse to be the southerne Pole, for that theysee the Navigators take- their heigth thereby, as we areaccustomed to doe by the North starre. But they aredeceyved, and the reason why Saylers doe it in this sorte,is for that in the South parts there is no fixed starre thatmarkes the Pole, as the North starre doth to our Pole.And therefore they take their heigth by the starre at thefoot of the Crosse, distant from the true and fixed PoleAntarticke thirtie degrees, as the North starre is distantfrom the Pole Articke three degrees or little more. Andso it is more difficult to take the heigth in those parts, forthat the sayd starre at the foote of the Crosse must bee THE SOUTHEEN HEAVENS. 15 right, the which chanceth but in one houre of the night; LlBt T - which is in divers seasons of the yeere in divers houres, and often times it appeareth not in the whole night, so as it is very difficult to take the heigth. And therefore the most expert Pilots regard not the Crosse, taking the heigth of the Sunne by the Astrolabe, by which they know in what height they are: wherein commonly the Portugals are more expert, as a Nation that hath more discourse in the Arte of Navigation then any other. There are also other starres in these southerne parts, which in some sort resemble those of the North. That which they call the Milken way, is larger and more resplendent in the viaiactea.south parts, appearing therein those admirable blacke spots, whereof wee have made mention. As for other particularities, let others speake of them with greater curiositie, and let this which wee have sayd suffice for this time. CHAP. vi. That there is Land and Sea Under the two Poles. It is no smal labour to have vnfolded this doubt with this knowledge and resolution, that there is a Heaven in these parts of the Indies, which doth cover them as in Europe, Asia, and Affricke. And this point serveth often against many Spaniards, who beeing here, sigh for Spaine, having no discourse but of their countrie. They wonder, yea, they grow discontented with vs, imagining that we have forgotten and make small accompt of our native soyle. To whom we answere, that the desire to returne into Spaine doth nothing trouble vs, being as neere vnto Heaven at Peru, as in Spaine : as saint lerorne saith well, writing unto Paulinus ; That the gates of Heaven are as neere vnto Brittanie, as to lerusalem. But although the Heaven doth compasse in the world of all parts, yet must 16 THE POLE ANTARTICKE. anil 11? LIB. i. we no i magine that there is land necessarily on all parts ofthe world. For being so, that the two elements of earthand water make one globe or bowle, according to thede pini n f the most renowmed ancient authors, (as Plutarchtestifieth) and as it is prooved by most certaine demonstrations, wee may coniecture, that the sea doth occupie allthis part, which is vnder the Antartike or southerne Pole,so as there should not remaine any place in these partes forthe earth, the which saint Augustine doth very learned]yhold against them that maintaine the Antipodes, saying,that although it bee prooved, and wee beleeve that theworlde is round like to a bowle, wee may not thereforeinferre, that in this other part of the worlde, the earth isvncovered, and without water. Without doubt, saintxvfde Augustine speakes well vpon this point; and as the con-. trary is not prooved, so doth it not follow, that there isany land discovered at the Antarticke Pole. The whichexperience hath now plainely taught vs, for although thegreatest part of the world vnder the Pole Antarticke besea, yet is it not altogether, but there is likew se land, soas in all parts of the world, the earth and water imbraceone another, which truely is a thing to make vs admire andglorifie the Arte of the soveraigne Creator. We knowGenes, i. then by the holy Scripture, that in the beginning of theworlde, the waters were gathered together in one place, soas the earth remayiied vncovered. Moreover, the sameholy Writte doth teach vs, that these gatherings togetherof the water were called Sea; and as there be many, so ofnecessitie there must be many Seas. And this diversitieof seas is not onely in the Mediterranean Sea, whereas oneis called Euxine, another the Caspian, an other the Erythrean or redde Sea, another the Persian, an other of Ttalie,and so many others. But also in the great Ocean, whichthe holy Scripture doth vsually call a gulph : althoughreally and in trueth it be but a Sea, yet in many and divers DISTRIBUTION Or LAND AND SEA. 17 manners: as in respect of Peru and all America, the one is LlB - T - called the North Sea, the other the South ; and at the East Indies, the one is called the Indian sea, the other that of China. And I have observed, as well by ray owne naviga tion, as by the relation of others, that the Sea is never divided from the Lande above a thousand Leagues. And although the great Ocean stretcheth farre, yet doth it never passe this measure. I will not for all this affirm e that wee sayle not above a thousand leagues in the Ocean, which were repugnant to trueth, being well knowne that the shippes of Portugal have sailed foure times as much and more, and that the whole world may bee compassed about by sea, as wee have seene in these dayes, without any further doubt. But I say and affirme, that of that which is at this day discovered, there is no land distant from any other fir me land, by direct line, or from some Islands neere vnto it above a thousand leagues ; and so betwixt two firme lands there is no greater distance of sea, accompting from the neerest parts of both the lands : for, from the ends of Europe or Affricke and their coastes, to the Canaries, the Isles of Azores, Cape Verd and others in the like degree, are not above three hundred leagues, or five hundred from the Mayne land. From the saide Hands running along to the West Indies, there are scant nine hundred leagues, to the Hands of saint Dorninick, the Virgins, the Happy Ilandes and the .rest; and the same Hands runne along in order to the Ilandes of Barlovent1 which are Cuba, Hispaniola, and Boriqueu ; 2 from the same Hands vnto the Mayne land are scarce two or three hun dred leagues, and in the neerest part farre lesse. The firme land runnes an infinite space ; from Terra Florida to the land of Patagones, and on the other side of the South, from 1 Barlovento, windward; and sotaccuto, leeward. 2 Boriquen or Brieque Island, also called Crab s Island, is one of the Virgin Isles, two leagues from Porto Rico. 1.8 LAND AND SEA AT THE POLES. LlR - * the Straight of Magellan/ to the Cape of Mendoce,2 thererunnes a long Continent but not very large ; 3 for the largestis here in Peru, 4 which is distant from Brazil about athousand leagues. In this South Sea, although they havenot yet discovered the ende towards the West, yet of latethey have found out the Hands which they call Salomon/the which are many and great, distant from Peru abouteyght hundred leagues. And for that wee finde by observation, that whereas there bee many and great Ilandes, sothere is some firme Land not farre off, I my selfe with manyothers doe beleeve that there is some firme land neere untothe Hands of Salomon, the which doth answere vnto ourAmerica on the West part, and possibly might runne bythe heigth of the South, to the Straightes of Magellan.Some hold that Nova Guinea is firme Land, and somelearned men describe it neere to the Hands of Salomon ; sons it is likely, a good parte of the world is not yet discovered, seeing at this day our men sayle in the South Seavnto China and the Philippines ; and wee say, that to gofrom Peru to those parts, they passe a greater Sea, then ingoing from Spaiue to Peru. Moreover, wee know, that bythat famous Straight of Magellan these two Seas doeioyne and continue one with an other (I say the South seawith that of the North) by that part of the Antarticke Pole,which is in fiftie one degrees of altitude. But it is a greatquestion, wherein many have busied themselves, whetherthese two Seas ioyne together in the North part; but Ihave not heard that any vnto this day could attayne vntothis point : but by certaine likelihoods and coniectures, someaffirmo there is an other Straight vnder the North, opposite1 " Magallanes." 2 Cape Mendocino, on the coast of California. 3 "No muy ancha", not very wide. 4 Aqui en esta parte del Peru." 5 Discovered by Alvaro Mendafia in 1567. ARGUMENTS OF LACTANTIUS. 19 to that of Magellan. But it sufficeth for our subiect, to LlB> r< knowe that there is a firme Land on this Southerne part, as bigge as all Europe, Asia, and Affricke ; that vnder both the Poles we finde both land and sea, one imbracing an other. "Whereof the Ancients might stand in doubt, and contradict it for want of experience. CHAP. vn. To confute the opinion of Lactantius, who Jwldes there Le no Antipodes. Seeing it is manifest that there is firme land vpon the South part or Pole Antartike, wee must now see if it be inhabited : the which hath bene a matter very disputable Lact - lib - * i vn, mst. in former times. Lactantius Firmian and S. Augustine 33 capmocke at such as hold there be any Antipodes, which is as Aug.,iiib. xvi de much to say, as men marching with their feete opposite to Suitale> c - 9- ours. But although these two authors agree in theis ieasts, 1 yet doe they differ much in their reasons and opinions, as they were of very divers spirits and iudgements. Lactan tius followes the vulgar, seeming ridiculous vnto him that the heaven should be round, and that the earth should bee compassed in the midst thereof, like vnto a ball, whereof he writes in these tearmes : " What reason is therefor some to affirme that there are Antipodes, whose steppes are opposite to ours ? Is it possible that any should bee so grosse and simple as to beleeve there were a people or nation marching with their feete upwardes, and their heades downwardes, and that thinges which are placed heere of one sort, are in that other part hanging topsie turvie ; that trees and corne growe downwards, and that raine, snow, and haile, fall from the earth upward."" Then, after some other discourse, the same Lactantius vseth these words : <c The imagination and conceit which some haue had, supi Cosa de burla." C2 20 REASON COKKECTS IMAGINATION. posing the lieaven to be round, hath bcue the cause toinvent these Antipodes hanging in the aire. So as I knowenot what to say of such Philosophers, whoe having onceerred, continue still obstinately in their opinions defendingone another." But whatsoever he saieth, wee that live nowat Peru, and inhabite that part of the world which isopposite to Asia and their Antipodes (as the Cosmographersdo teach vs) finde not our selves to bee hanging in the aire,our heades downward, and our feete on high. Truly it isstrange to consider that the spirit and vriderstanding ofman cannot attaine vnto the trueth, without the vse ofimagination ; and on the other part, it were impossible buthe should erre and be deceived, if hee should wholy forbeareit. We cannot comprehend the heaven to be round as it is,and the earth to bee in the middest of it, without imagination. But if this imagination were not controuled andreformed by reason, in the end wee should be deceiued; whereby we may certainely conclude, that in our soules thereis a certaine light of heaven, whereby wee see and iudge of theinterior formes which present themselves vnto vs, and by thesame we alow of, or reiect that which imagination doth offervnto vs. Hereby we see that the rationall soule is above allcorporall powers : and as the force and eternall vigour oftruth doth rule in the most eminent part of man : yea, weplainely see that this pure light is participant and proceedesfrom that first great light, that whoso knoweth not this, ordoubteth thereof, we may well say that he is ignorant, ordoubtes whether he be a man or no. So, if we shall demaund of our imagination what it thinkes of the roundnesof heaven, without doubt she will answere vs as Lactantiusdoth, That if the heaven were round, the Sun and starresshould fall, when as they move and change their places,rising towards the South. Even so, if the earth did hangin the ayre, those which inhabite the other part, should gowith their feete vpwards^ and their heades downward, and THE USE OF IMAGINATION. 21 the raine which falles from above, should mount vpward ; LlB - with many other ridiculous deformities. But if we consult with the force of reason, she will make small accoumpt of all these vaine imaginations, nor suffer vs to beleeve them no more than a foolish dreame. But Reason will answer with this her integritie and gravitie, that it were a very grosse error, to imagine the whole world to be like vnto a house, placing the earth for the foundation, and the heaven for the covering. Moreover she will say, that as in all creatures the head is the highest part and most elevated, although all creatures have not heades placed in one and the same situation, some being in the highest part, as man, some athwart, as sheepe, others in the middest, as spiders, even so the heaven, in what part soeuer it be, remaines above, and the earth likewise in what part soever, remaines vnderneath. Our imagination therefore is grounded vpon time and place, the which she cannot com prehend nor conceive in generall, but in particular. It followeth, that when wee shall raise it to the consideration of things which exceed the time and place which are knowne vnto her, then presently she shrinkes and cannot subsist, if reason doth not support her. In like sort wee see, vpon the discourse of the creation of the worlde, our imagination straies to seeke out a time before the creation thereof, and to build the world ; she discribes a place, but shee comes not to consider that the worlde might bee made after another fashion. Notwithstanding, reason doth teach vs, that there was no time before there was a motion, whereof time is the measure, neyther was there any place before the vniversall, which comprehendes within it all place. Wherein the excellent Philosopher Aristotle doth Arist., i, doCcl., ca. 3. plainely satisfie, and in a few wordes, that argument made against the place of the earth, helping himselfe with our vse of imagination, when bee sayeth, and with trueth, " That in the world the same place of the earth is in the 22 OPINIONS OP ST. AUGUSTINE. LlB - r - midst and beneath, and the more a thing is in the middest,the more it is vnderneath". The which answer being pro duced by Lactantius Firrnian, yet hee doth passe it overwithout confutation, by reason, saying that he cannot staytheron, and omitte the handling of other matters. CHAP. vni. The reason why S. Augustine denied the Antipodes. The reason which moved S. Augustine to deny the Anti podes was other then that formerly alleadged, being of ahigher iudgement, for the reson before mentioned, that theAntipodes should go vpwards, is confuted by the sameAug., lib. Doctor in his booke of sermons in these words, "The I asegoria- tatomei! Ancients hold that the earth of all parts is beneath, and theheaven above, by reason whereof the Antipodes, which theysay go opposite vnto vs, have like vnto vs the heaven abovetheir heads." Seeing then S. Augustine hath confessedthis to bee conformable to good Philosophic, what reasonshall we say did move so learned and excellent a man tofollow the contrary opinion. Doubtlesse he drew themotive and cause from the bowels of divinitie, whereby theholie Writ doth teach vs that all rnankinde doth come fromthe first man Adam ; and to say that men could passe tothat new world, crossing the great Ocean, were vncredible,and a rneere lye. And in truth if the successe an experience of what we have seene in these ages had not satisfiedvs in this point, wee had yet held this reason to bee good.And although we know this reason neither to be pertinentnor true, yet will we make answere therevnto, shewing inwhat sort, and by what meanes, the first linage of menmight passe thither ; and howe and by what meanes theycame to people and inhabite the Indies. And for that weemeane heereafter to intreat briefly of this subiect, it shall OPINIONS OP ST. AUGUSTINE. 23 be fit now to vnderstand what the holy Doctor Augustine LlB - r - disputes uppon this matter in his bookes of the cittie of God, ec It is no point that we ought to beleeve, as some ^b - J vi affirme, that there are Antipodes, that is to say, men which inhabite that other part of the earth, in whose region the Sunne riseth when it sets with vs, and that their steppes be opposite and contrarie to ours, seeing they afSrine not this by any certaine revelation which they have, but onely by a Philosophicall discourse they make, whereby they con clude that the earth being in the middest of the world, invironed of all parts and covered equallie with the heaven, of necessitie that must be in the lowest place which is in the midst of the world." Afterwards hee continues in these words, " The holie Scripture doth not erre, neither is deceived in anie sort; the truth whereof is well approved in that which it propoundeth of things which are passed, for as much as that which hath bene fore-told, hath succeeded in every point, as we see ; And it is a thing void of all sense to say that men could passe from this continent to the new found world and cut through the Vast Ocean, seeing it were impossible for men to passe into those parts any other way, being most certain that al men deseed from the first man." Wherein we see that all the difficultie S. Augustine hath found was nothing else but the incomparable greatnes of this vast Ocean. Gregorie Nazianzene was of the same opinion, assuring, as a matter without any doubt, that it was not possible to saile beyond the Straights of Gibraltar; and vpon this subiect he writes in an Epistle of his, " I agree well with the saying of Pindarus, That past Cadiz, that Sea is not nauigable ." And hee himselfe in the funerall Sermon he made for saint Basil saith, " It was not tollerable for anie one sailing on the Sea to passe the Straight of Gibraltar." And it is true, that this place of Pindarus, where he saith, " That it is not lawfull, neyther for wise men nor fooles, to know what is beyond the - OPINIONS Ol THE ANCIENTS. L B - l - Straight of Gibraltar", hath beene taken for a Proverbe. Thus we see by the beginning of this Proverbe, how the Ancients were obstinately setled in this opinion; as also bythe bookes of Poets, Historiographers, and ancient Cosniographers, that the end and bounds of the earth were set at Cadiz in Spaine, where they plant the pillars of Hercules ; there they set the limits of the Roinane Empire, and there they describe the boundes of the world. And not onelyprophane writers speake in this sort, Lut also the holyScripture, to apply it selfe to our phrase saith, " That theedict of Augustus Ca3sar was published, to the end that all the world should be taxed ; and of Alexander the great, that he stretched forth his Empire even to the end andvttermost bounds of the earth. And in another place theysay, that the Gospell did flourish and increase through thevniversall world. For the holy Scripture by an vsuall phrase, calleth all the woride, that which is the greatest part thereof, and was at that time discovered and knowne.And the Ancients were ignorant that the East Indian Sea, and that of the West were navigable, wherin they havegenerally agreed. ]>y reason whereof, Plinie writes as a a certain e tructh, that the seas whic i are betwixt twolands take from vs a iust moitie of the habitable earth. For, saith he, we cannot passe thither, neyther they comehither. Finally, Tullie, Macrobius, Pomponius Mela, andthe ancient Writers, hold the same opinion. CHAP ix. Of Aristuilcs opinion toucJiiny the new }\ rurldc, and what abused him to malic him deny it. Besides all the former reasons there was yet an other, which mooved the Ancients to beleeve it to be impossible for men to passe to this new world ; the which they held, for that besides the vastnesse of the great Ocean, the heate of ARISTOTLE. 25 that Keg-ion, which they call the burning Zone, was so ex- LlB - * cessive, as it would not suffer any man, how venturous or laborious so ever, to passe by sea or land from one Pole to an other. For although these Philosophers have themselves affirmed that the earth was round (as in effect it is), and that vnder the 2 Poles there was habitable land, yet could they not conceyve that the Region, containing all that lyeth betwixt the two Tropickes (which is the greatest of the five Zones or Regions by the which the Cosniographers and Astrologers divide the Woiide) might be inha bited by man. The reason they give to maintaine this Zone to be inhabitable was, for the heat of the Sunne, which makes his course directly over this Region, and approcheth so neere as it is set on fire, and so by consequence causeth a want of waters and pastures. Aristotle was of this opinion, who although he were a great Philosopher, yet was hee deceyved in this poynt ; for the cleering whereof it shall be good to observe his reasons, and to note wherein he hath discoursed well, and wherein he hath erred. This Philosopher makes a question of the Mori- Amt.,, dionall or Southerne winde, whether wee should beleeve it 5 - takes his beginning from the South, or from the other Pole contrary to the North, and writes in these termes : " Reason teacheth vs that the latitude and largenesse of the habitable earth hath her boundes and limits, and yet all this habitable earth cannot bee vnited and ioyned one to the other, by reason the middle Region is so intemperate. For it is certain that in her longitude, which is from East to West, there is no immoderate cold nor heate, but in her latitude and lieiglith, which is from the Pole to the Equinoctiall Line. So as we may well passe the whole earth in her longitude, if the greatnesse of the Sea, which ioynes lands together, were no hinderance.^ Hitherto there is no contradicting of Aristotle, who hath great reason to affirme that the earth in her longitude, which is from East to West, 26 WANT OF KNOWLEDGE AMONG THE ANCIENTS. LIB. i. runnes more equaly and is more proper for the life and habitation of man then in her latitude from North to South. The which is true, not onely for this foresaid reason of Aristotle, that there is alwayes one temperature of the Heavens from East to West,, being equally distant both from the Northerne colde and the Southerne heate. Butalso for an other reason, for that travelling alwayes in longitude we see the dayes and nights succeed one another by course, the which falleth not out going in her latitude ; for of necessitie wee must come to that Region vnder the Pole, whereas there is continuall night for sixe Moneths, a very inconvenient thing for the life of man. The Philo sopher passeth on further, reprooving the Geographers, which described the earth in his time, and saith thus, " Wee may discerne the trueth of that which I have sayd, by the passages which may be made by land, and the navi gations by sea, for there is a great difference betwixt the longitude and the latitude, for the distance from the pillars of Hercules at the Straight of Gibraltar, vnto the East Indies, exceeds the proportion of about five to three, the passage which is from Ethiopia to the lake of Meotis in the farthest confines of Scythia, the which is confirmed bythe account of iourneys by land, and by sayling, as we do now know by experience ; we have also knowledge of the habitable earth, even vnto those partes which are inhabit able/ And truely in this point wee must pardon Aristotle, seeing that in his time they had not discovered beyond the first Ethiopia, called the exterior, ioyning to Arabia andAffricke ; the other Ethiopia being wholy vnknowne in his age. Yea, all that great Land which we now call the Landof Prete Ian, neyther had they any knowledge of the rest that lyes vnder the Equinoctiall, and runnes beyond the Tropicke of Capricorne vnto the Cape of good Hope, so famous and well knowne by the navigation of Portugals ; so as if wee measure the Land from this Cape vnto Scythia OPINIONS OF AKISTOTLE. 27 and Tartaria, there is no doubt but this distance and lati- LlB - I - tude will proove as great as the longitude, which is from Gibraltar vnto the East Indies. It is certaine the Ancients had no knowledge of the springs of Nilus, nor of the ende of Ethiopia, and therefore Lucan reprooves the curiositie T ^ ucan> x- of lulius Caesar, searching out the springs of Nilus in these verses : " O Romaine, what availes thee so much travell, 1 In search of Niles first source thy selfe to gravell." And the same Poet speaking to Nile sayth : " Since thy first source is yet so unrevealed, Nile, what thou art, is from the world concealed." 2 But by the holy scripture we may conceive that this land is habitable, for if it were not, the Prophet Sophonias soph., ca.would not say (speaking of these nations called to the Gospell), " The children, of my dispersed (so he calleth the Apostles) shall bring me presents from beyond the bancks of Ethiopia". Yet, as I have said, there is reason to pardon the Philosopher who beleeved the writers and Cosirio- graphers of his time. Let vs continue and examine what followes of the same Aristotle. "One part of the world (saith he) which lieth towards the North, beyond the tem perate zone, is inhabitable for the exceeding cold j the other part vpon the South is likewise inhabitable beyond the Tropicke for the extreame heate. But the partes of the world lying beyond India on the one side, and the pillars of Hercules on the other, without doubt cannot bee ioyned and continued one with the other; so as all the habitable earth is not conteined in one continent by reason of the sea which divides it.

In this last point he speakes

truth. Then hee continues touching the other partes of 1 u Que tienes tu Romano quo ponerte A inquirir de Nilo el nacimiento ? " 2 u Pues es tu nacimiento tan oculto Que ignora el mundo todo cuyo seas." 28 THE SOUTHERN ZONES. LIB. i. ^Q world, saying, " It is necessarie the earth should havethe same proportion with the Pole Antarticke, as this our part which is habitable hath with the North ; and there is no doubt but in that other world all things should be ordred as in ours, especially in the growing and order of the winds." And having alleaged other reasons to no purpose, he concludes, saying, " We must confesse of necessity that the Southerne wind is that which blowes and comes fromthe burning zone, the which being so neere the sunnewantes water and pastures". This is Aristotles opinion, and in truth mans coniecture can hardly passe any farther. So as I do often consider, with a Christian contemplation, how weake the Philosophic of the wise of this world hathbeene in the search of divine things, seeing in humainethings (wherein they seeme so well read) they often erre. Aristotle holds that the habitable earth of the Pole Antartike in longitude from East to West is very great, and in latitude from the Pole Antartike to the Equinoctiall is very small ; the which is so contrary to the truth, that in a maner all the habitation on this side the Pole Antartike is in latitude (I meane from the Pole to the line), and in longitude from East to West it is so small, as the latitude exceede it three partes or more. In his other opinion he affirmes, that the middle region is inhabitable, being vnderthe burning zone, burnt up by the excessive heate caused by the neereness of the sunne, and by this reason hath neither waters nor pastures. The which is in like sort contrary ; for the greatest part of this new world is scitu- ated betwixt the two Tropickes vnder the burning zone, and yet it is found very well peopled arid inhabited by menand other sortes of creatures, being a region of all the world the most fruitful! of waters and pastures, and very temperate in the greatest part, which the will of God hath so appointed, to shew that even in natural! things he hath confounded the wiscdome of this world. To conclude, wee OPINION Or PLINY. Z.J must beleeve that the burning zone is well inhabited, Lin - T< although the auncients have held it impossible. But the other zone or region, which lyeth betwixt the burning zone and that of the Pole Anturtike, although it bee in a climate more commodious for the life of man, yet it is smally peopled and inhabited, seeing wee know no other dwelling in it but the Kingdom of Chile and a small portion ioyning to the Cape of good Hope, The rest is possessed by the Ocean. Although many be of opinion, the which I likewise hold, that there is much more land not yet discovered, the which should be fir me land opposite to the Kingdom of Chile, which runnes beyond the circle or Tropicke of Capricorne. And if there be any, without doubt it is a land of an excellent temper, being in the midst of two extrearnes, and scituate in the same climate with the best regions in Europe. And in this regard Aristotles coniecture was good. But speaking of what is discovered at this day in this zone, it is little in regard of the large countries inha bited vnder the burning zone. CHAP. x. Tlu:d Plinie and the auncients held the same opinion with Aristotle. This opinion of Aristotles, hath bene held by Plinie, who Piin., m>. saith thus : " The temperature of the middle region of the world, where the sunne continually runnes his course, is scorched and burnt vp as with a neere fire." Ioyning to the same region, there are two others of eyther side, which (lying betwixt the heat of this burning zone and the cruell cold of the other two extreams) are very temperate, and can have no communication one with another, by reason of the excessive heate of the heaven, which hath bene the opinion of the Ancients, generally described by the Poet in these verses : 30 VIEWS OF THE ANCIENTS. LlB - * " Heavens circuit is of flue zones, one whereof, 1 Viro-ii in Which still the sunne burnes, makes tlie earth below Gcorg. With flames intempestiue red hotte to glow." And the same Poet in another place, Eneid- " Heare this, if any harbour in that seate2 Whose quarter vnder that large zone is set Amidst foure others by the sunne enlightned." And another Poet speakes more plainely, Ovid, Mcta. u As many regions are there on the ground, As are in heaven, wherein fine parts are found, Whereof the midst, through heate raisd from the raycs Of scorching sunne, inhabitable staies." The Auncients have grounded their generall opinion vpon one reason, which seemed to them certaine and not to be confuted; for finding that the more a region drew neere vnto the South, the hotter it was ; the proofe whereof was so infallible in those regions, as by the same reason in Italie, Apulia is hotter then Tuscane, and in Spaine Andaluzia then Biscaie. A thing so apparent, that although there bee but eight degrees difference or lesse betwixt the one and the other, yet do wee finde the one extreame hotte, and the other very colde, whereby they did inferre that the region so neere the South, having the sunne so directly for zenith, must of necessity bee continually scorched with heate. They did likewise see, that the divers seasons of the yeere, as the Spring, Summer, Autumne, and Winter, were caused by the neerenes and distance of the sunne, finding also that although they were farre from the Tropicke, by which the sunne doth passe in 1 " Quinque tenent coelum zonse : quarum una corusco Semper sole rubens, et torrida semper ab igni." Geonj., lib. i, 1. 233. 2 " Audiit, et si quern tellus extrema refuso - Submovet Oceano, et si quern extenta plagarum Quatuor in medio dirimit plaga solis iniqui." /Enid, lib. vii. 1. 225. FOEMER OPINIONS RESPECTING A NEW WORLD. 31 summer, yet when it approached neere vnto them, at the LlB - r< same season they felt great heate. Whereby they did coniecture that if they had had the sunne so neere vnto them as to go directly over their heads, the heate would have bene so insupportable, as it would burne and consume men with the vehemency thereof. The same reason moved the Auncients to thinke that the middle region was not habitable, and therefore they called it the burning zone. And in truth, if visible experience did not vnfold this doubt, we should yet confesse that this reason were very peremptorie and Mathematicall j 1 whereby we may see how weake our vnderstanding is, to comprehend these naturall things. But wee may say, it is fallen out to the great good and happiness of our age, to have the knowledge of these two great wonders, that is, to know how easily we may saile through the great Ocean, and that vnder the burning zone men inioy a very temperate heaven, the which the Auncients could never beleeve. Of the last of these two wonders, touching the qualitie and habitation of the burning zone, by the grace of God we will discourse amply thereof in the next book. I thinke it therefore fit in this booke to treat of the maner of sailing through the Ocean, for that it imports vs much for the subiect of this worke. But before wee come to this point, it shall be good to shew what the Auncients thought of these new men, whoine we call Indians. CHAP. xi. That in ancient Bookes we finde some knowledge of this newe world. Let vs returne to that which hath beene formerly spoken. Wee must necessarily conclude that the Ancients did be leeve that eyther there were no men beyond the Tropicke 1 u Que era razon concluyente y Matematica." LIB. i. 32 RECORDS OF VOYAGES OF THE ANCIENTS. of Cancer, as S. Augustine and Lactantius doe affirm e, or , if there were any, at the least they did not inhabite betwixt tusphii., the two Tropicks. as Aristotle and Plinie have maintained, cap. 11. and before them the Philosopher Parmenides, the coutrarie whereof is before sufficiently prooved, both for the one andthe other. But many through curiositie may demaund, if the Ancients had no knowledge of this trueth, which to vs is now so apparent; seeing that in trueth it seemeth very strange that this newe worlde which is so spacious as wedoe visibly see it, should be hidden from the Ancients byso many ages. But some at this day, seeking to obscure the felicitie of this age and the Glory of our Nation, strive to proove that the new-found world was knowne to the ?uperp Ancients. And in trueth wee cannot deny but there wasi.adEphes. gome apparency. 1 S. lerome writing vpon the Epistle to the Ephesians, sayth : " We seeke with reason what the Apostle meaneth in these wordes, where he saith : you. have walked for a season according to the course of this world, whether he would have vs to vnderstand that there is an other world, which neither is nor depends of this world ; but other worldes, whereof Clement writes in his Epistle, the Ocean and the worldes which are beyond the Ocean". These are the wordes of S. lerome, but in trueth I cannot finde this Epistle of S. Clement cited by S. lerome, yet I beleeve vndoubtedly, that S. Clement hath written it, seeing S. lerome maketh mention thereof. And with reason saint Clement saith, that beyond the Ocean there is an other worlde, yea, many worldes, as in trueth there is ; seeing there is so great distance from one newe worlde to an other new world (T meane from Peru and the WestIndies, to China and the East Indies). Moreover, Plinie, who hath beene so curious a searcher out of strange things, reportes in his naturall Historic, that Hannon, a Captaine of the Carthaginians, sayled through the Ocean, from the 1 u y realmente no se puecle negar, que aya desto algunos rastros." KNOWLEDGE OP THE ANCIENTS. 33 Straight of Gibraltar, coasting alongst the land, even vnto LlB - T - the confines of Arabia, and that hee left this his Naviga- pim.,m>. ii, c 67 tion in writing. If it bee as Plinie writes, it followes that Hannon sayled as farre as the Portugals do at this day, passing twice vnder the Equinoctiall, which is a fearefull thing. And the same Plinie reports of Cornelius Nepos a very grave Authour, who saith, that the same course hath beene sayled by an other man, called Eudoxus, but by contrary wayes, for this Eudoxus, flying from the King of Latyros, passed by the redde sea into the Ocean ; and turning backe, came to the Straight of Gibraltar, the which Cornelius Nepos affirmes to have happened in his time. And also other grave Authors do write, that a ship of Carthage driven by force of winde into the Ocean, came to a Land which vntill then was vnknowne ; and returning to Carthage, kindled a great desire in the Citizens to dis cover and people this land ; the which the Senate per- ceyving, did forbid this navigation by a rigorous decree, fearing that with the desire of new lands they should leave to love their owne Countrie. By all this wee may gather that the Ancients had some knowledge of the new world, yet shall you hardly finde in the bookes of Ancient writers any thing written of our America and all the West Indies ; but of the East Indies, I say, there is sufficient testirnonie, not only of that on the other side, but also of that on this side, which then was farthest off, going thither by a contrary way to that at this day. Is it not easie to find Malaca in ancient bookes, which they called the golden Chersonese ; the Cape of Comorin, which was called the Promontorie of Cori, and that great and famous Hand of Sumatra, so well knowne by the ancient name of Taprobana. What shall wee say of the two Ethiopias, the Brachmanes, and that great Land of the Chinas ? Who doubtes, but there was often mention made thereof in ancient bookes ; But of the West Indies, we find not in Plinie, that in this navigation Vi, cap. 32, 34 PROPHECY OF SENECA. LIB. i. they p asse(^ the Hands of the Canaries, which he calleth Fortunate ; the principal whereof is sayd to be called Canarie, for the multitude of dogs which are in it. Butthere is scarce any mention in ancient books of the voyageswhich are made at this day beyond the Canaries, by the Gulph which with reason they call great. Yet many hold opinion that Seneca the Tragedian did prophecie of the West Indies, in his Tragedie of Medea, which translated, saith thus : Senec. in u An age shall come, ere ages ende, Med. Act., , . , . ii, in ain. Blessedly strange and strangely blest, When our Sea farre and neere or prest, His shoare shall farther yet extend. " Descryed then shall a large Land be, By this profound Seas navigation, An other World, an other nation, All men shall then discovered see. u Thule accounted heretofore The worldes extreme, the Northcrne bound, Shall be when Southwest parts be found, A neerer Isle, a neighbour shoare." This, Seneca reports in these verses ; and we cannot weldeny, but (vnderstanding it litterally) it is very true ; for if we reckon the many yeeres he speakes of, beginning fromthe time of the Tragedian, it is above a thousand and fourehundred yeeres past ; and if it were from the time of Medea,it is above two thousand yeeres, the which we see plainely now accomplished ; seeing the passage of the Ocean so longtime hidden, hath beene found out, and that they have dis covered a great land and a new world inhabited, morespatious then all the Continent of Europe and Asia. Buttherein may a question with reason be made, whetherSeneca spake this by divination, or poetically and by chance.And to speeke my opinion, I beleeve hee did divine, after the manner of wise men and well advised ; for that in his time they vndertooke newe voyages and navigations by sea, PROPHECY OF SENEGA. 35 hee knew well, like a philosopher, that there was an other LlB - r - land contrary and opposite vnto vs, which they call Antichthon.1 And by this ground he might conceyve that the Industrie and courage of man might in the ende passe the Ocean, and discover new lands and another world, for that in Senecas time they had knowledge of the Voyage which Plinie speaketh of, whereby they passed the great Ocean. The which seemes to bee the motive of Senecas prophecie, as he giveth vs to vnderstand by these former verses, after the which having described the carefull life of the Ancients, free from malice, he followeth thus : " Now is it not as earst it was, For whether the Ocean will or nill, He traverst is by hardy will : Which pastime makes time so to passe." And a little after he saith thus : " Now every boate dares swimine, and sport On surging Seas, fearing no wracke ; Passengers seeking what they lacke, So long a voyage thinke but short. " Nothing is nowe more to discover, No place is now left to surprise, Townes now that for defence devise, With new fortifications cover. " All in the world turn d round about, No thing in place as twas enured, Nothing vnseene, nothing assured This Circle universe throughout. " The Indian, whom at home heate fries, Drinkes of Araxis waters cold : The Persian, rich in gems and gold, Wash in the Rhine and Elbe likewise." Seneca did coniecture this by the great courage of men, as that which shall happen last, saying, It shall fall out in the latter age, etc., as hath bin before mentioned. 1 Antictonft. D2 36 OPINION OF PLATO CHAP, xii. Of the opinion which Plato held of the West Indies. LIB. i. If any one hath treated more particularly of the west ~ Indies, the honor belongs to Plato, who in his Timoeus saith thus : " In those dayes they could not sayle this Gulph" (meaning the Atlantike Sea, which is the Ocean which ineetes at the Straight of Gibraltar) " for that the passage was stopped at the mouth of the pillars of Hercules" (which is the same Straight of Gibraltar) " and this Hand was in those dayes ioyned to the foresaid mouth, and was of that bignesse as it exceeded all Asia and Affricke together ; and then was there a passage to goe from these Hands to others, and from those other Ilandes, they went to the firme Land, the which was neere invironed with the very Sea". This is reported by Critias in Plato. And such as beleeve that this narration of Plato is a true Historic, delivered in these terrnes, say that this great Atlanticke Hand, the which did exceed both Affricke and Asia in greatnesse, did then com prehend the greatest part of the Ocean called Atlantike, which the Spaniards nowe sayle in ; and that those other Hands, which, he sayde, were neere vnto this great one, are those which wee now call the Hands of Barlovento j 1 that is, Cuba, Hispaniola, S. lohn de Port ricco, 2 lamaica, and other Hands of that Countrie ; and that the rnaine Land whereof hee maketh mention, is the same wee now call Tierra Firme, that is, Peru and America ; and that Sea, which he sayth is adioyning to the Tierra Firme, is the South Sea, the which he calleth the very Sea, for that in comparison of her greatnesse, all other Seas, both Mediterranean, yea and the Atlantike Sea, are small in regard thereof. Hereby in trueth they give a cunning and wittie interpretation to these words of Plato. But whether this interpretation should be held for true or not, I am resolved to declare in another place. 1 The AYindwiird Islands. * Porto Rico. WHETHER OPHIR IS PERU. 37 CHAP. xiu. That some have held opinion that in places of holy Scripture, whereas they speake of Ophir, is to l>e vnderstood of our Peru. Some hold opinion that mention is made of the West LlB- Indies in the holy scripture, taking the region of Peru for that Ophir which they make so famous. Eoberto Stefano, or to say more truely Francisco Batablo, a man well scene in the Hebrew toug (as I have heard our master report, who was his disciple) saith in his annotations vpon the 9 chapter of the 3 booke of Kings, that the Hand of Hispaniola which Christo pher Colornbus found out, was that of Ophir, from whence Solomon caused to bee brought foure hundred and twentie ^J 1 -; 1" lib - or foure hundred and 50 talents of most fine and pure golde, for that the golde of Cibao which our men bring from Arias Mon-** tanus in Hispaniola, is of the same fashion and qualitie. And there p2g!;uinare many others which affirme that our Peru is Ophir, ca - 9- deriving one name from another, who beleeve that when as the booke of Paralipomenon 1 was written, they called it ^Paraiip., Peru, grounding it vpon that which the holy scripture saith, 3 that they brought from Ophir pure gold, precious stones, and wood which was rare and goodly which things abound in Peru, as they say. But in my opinion it is farre from the truth, that Peru should be Ophir so famous in the Bible. For although in this Peru there be good store of gold, yet is there not yet such aboundance as it may be equalled with the fame of the riches that was in auncient time at the East Indies. I finde not that in Peru there are 2 Para.,.4 Reg., xxii. such precious stones, or such exquisite woods, as the like 3 Res-, ix- have not been seene at lerusalem. For although there be ex quisite Emeralds, and some hard trees of Aromaticall wood, yet do I not finde any thing of so great commendation as the scripture giueth vnto Ophir. Moreover it seemes not 1 Chronicles. 38 FANCIED RESEMBLANCES OF NAMES. LlB - likely that Solomon would leave tlie East Indies, most rich and plentiful!, to send his fleetes to this farther land, whether if they had come so often, as it is written, we had surely found more signes and testimonies thereof. Moreover the Etimologie of the name of Ophir, and the change or reduc tion thereof to Peru, seemes to me of small consideration, being most certaine that the name of Peru is not very auncient, nor common to all that couiitrie.1 It hath beene vsuall in the discoverie of the new world, to give names to lands and portes of the sea according to the occasions pre sented at their ariuall ; and I beleeve that the name of Peru hath bene so found out and put in practice ; for we find heere that the name hath bene given to all the countrie of Peru, by reason of a river so called by the inhabitants of the eountrie, where the Spaniards arrived vpon their first dis coverie. Whereby we maintaine that the Indians them selves bee ignorant, and do not vse this name and appella tion to signifie their land. It seemeth moreover, the same Authors will say, that Sefer spoken of in the scripture, is- that which we now call Andes, which are most high mountaines in Peru. But this resemblance of names and appel lations is no sufficient proofe. If that were of force, weifebel- clou* mi g^^ as we^ Sa7 that Yucatan is lectan mentioned in the LJcsan holy scripture. Neither may we say that the names of Abraheex Titus and Paul, which the Kings Inguas 2 of Peru do vse, Gen. xxv. come from the Romans or Christians, seeing it is too weake an argument to draw a conclusion of great matters. Wesee plainely that it is contrarie to the intention of the holy scriptures, which some have written, that Tharsis and Ophir were one Province or were reached in the same voyage, con ferring the 22 chapter of the 4 booke of the Kings, with the 1 See my translation of the Royal Commentaries of Garcilasso de la Vega, i, p. 27, for the derivation of the word Peru. 2 Titu and Paullu are names of several Yncas. Titu means "august" or "magnanimous". Royal Comm., i, p. 145. OPHIE WAS IN THE EAST INDIES. 39 20 chapter of the second booke of Paralipomenon, for that LlB - r - in the booke of the Kings, it is said that losaphat prepared a fleete of shippes in Asiongaber to fetch golde at Ophir ; and in Paralipomenon, it is written, that the same fleete was furnished to go vnto Tharsis. Whereby it may be supposed that in these fore- said bookes, where the scripture speakes of Tharsis and Ophir, that it meanes one thing. Some one may demaund what region or Province that Ophir was, whether Solomons fleete went with the Mariners of Hyram King of Tyre and Sidon to fetch gold. And whether King Jjj^

• losaphats fleete, pretending to go, did suffer shipwracke

and perish in Asiongaber, as the holy scripture doth testifie. In this I do willingly agree with the opinion of losephus, in his books of Antiquities, where he saith that it is a Province of the East Indies, the which was found by that Ophir the sonne of lectan, whereof mention is made in the 10 of GGn- x - Genesis; and that Province did abound with most fine gold. Thereof it comes, they did so much extol the gold of Ophir or of Ophas, or as some wil say, this word of Obrise, is the same with Ophrise, for finding there seven sortes or kindes of gold, as S. lerome reportes, that of Ophir was held for the most fine, as heere we esteem e the gold of Yaldivia and Caravaya. The chiefest reason which moves me to thinke that Ophir is at the East Indies and not in the West, is, for that Solomons fleete could not come hither without passing the East Indies, all China, and a great part of the sea ; being vnlikely they would passe all over the world to come thither for gold, that continent especially lying in that sort, as they could not come to the knowledge thereof by any voiage by land. And hereafter we wil shew that the Ancients had never knowledge in the arte of Navigation, without the which they could not runne so farce into the sea. Finally, in these matters (when as there appeares no certaine proofes, but onely light coniectures) we are not bound to beleevc but what we shall thinke 40 IDENTIFICATION OF TARSHISH. CHAP. xiv. What Tharsis and Opliir signifie in the holy Scripture. LIB. i. if evcly mans coniecture and opinion may be allowed, for my part I hold that in the holy scripture these words of Tharsis and Ophir most commonly do not signifie any certaine place ; but it is a word and signification generall to the Hebrewes, as in our vulgar tongue this word of Indies is generall vnto vs in our vsuall maner of speech ; for wee meane by the Indies those rich countries which are farre off, and strange vnto vs. So we Spaniards do in differently call Indies, the countries of Peru, Mexico, China, Malaca, and Bresil ; and from what parts soever of these any letters come, wee say they bee from the Indies, which countries be farre distant and different one from another. Yet we cannot denie but that name of Indies is properly to be vnderstood of the East Indies. And for that in olde time they did speake of these Indies as of a countrie farre off, so likewise in the discoverie of other remote lands, they have given them the names of Indies, being distant from the rest, and held as the end of the world. Even so, in my iudgement, Tharsis in the holy scripture doth not signifie any certaine and determined place, but onely regions a farre off, and according to the vulgar opinion, very rich and strange ; for that which losephus and some others would affirme, that Tharsis is Tarsus, according to the meaning of the scripture, in my opinion hath bene well a?-ceMn refuted by S. lerome, not onely for that these wordes are tomo. written with divers letters, the one with an aspiration, the other without ; but also that many things are written of Tharsis, which cannot agree with Tarsus, a Citie in Cilicia. It is true, that in some places of the scripture, Tharsis is said to be in Cilicia, the which you shall find in the booke

dith ii. of ludith, speaking of Holophernes, who having passed the

MEANING OF THE WORD TAKSHISH. 41 limits of Assyria, he came to the great mountaines of Ange, LlB - * which perchance is Taurus, which hilles be on the left hand of Cilicia, and that he entred into all the Castells, where he Lege nine,assembled all his forces ; having destroyed tha.t famous Citie 27. of Melithi, he ruined all the children of Tharsis and of Israeli, which were ioyning vnto the desart, and those which were in the South, towards the land of Cellon, and from thence passed Euphrates ; but as I have saide, that which is so written of Tharsis, cannot be applied to the Citie of ^^OTin Tarsus. Theodoret and some others, following the inter pretation of the 70, in some places they set Tharsis in Affrike, saying it was the same Citie which was aunciently tLnus^iMd", called Carthage, and is now the kingdome of Tunis ; and they say that lonas ment to go thether, when, as the scrip ture reports, that he fled from the Lord into Tharsis. Others pretend that Tharsis is a certaine countrie of the Indies, wherevnto it seemes that S. lerome is inclined. I will cei. ad not now decide these opinions, but I holde that in this case the scripture doth not alwaies signifie one region or certaine part of the world. It is true that the wise men or Kings that came to worship Christ were of the East; and the scripture saith they were of Saba, Esia, and Madian. And some learned men holde that they were of Ethiopia, Arabia, and Persia ; and yet the Psalmist and the Church sings them, te The Kings of Tharsis shall bring presents." Wee agree then with S. lerome, that Tharsis is a word that hath many and divers significations in the scripture. Sometimes it signifies the Crisolite, or lacinth stone, sometimes a certaine region of the Indies, sometimes the sea, which is of the colour of a lacinth by the reverberation of the sunne. But the same Doctor doth with reason deny that Tharsis is any region of the Indies whither lonas would fly, seeing that parting from loppa, it had beene impossible to saile vnto the Indies by that sea, for that loppa, which at this day wee call laffa, is no port of the red Sea, ioyning to the 42 TAESISH A GENERAL TERM. LlB - * East Indian Sea, but of the Mediterranean Sea, which hath no issue into the Indian. Whereby it doeth plainely appeare that the voyage which Solomons Fleet made, parting from Asiongaber (whereas the shippes of king losophat were lost), went by the redde Sea to Tharsis and Ophir, the which is directly testified in the Scripture. The whichvoyage was very different from that which ionas pretended to Tharsis ; seeing that Asiongaber is the port of a Cittie of Idumea, seated vpon the Straight, whereas the red sea ioynes with the great Ocean. From this Ophir and this Tharsis they brought to Salomon gold, silver, Elephants teeth, 1 Monkies, Indian Cocks, 2 and their voyage was of three yeeres ; all which without doubt ought to bee vnderstood of the East Indies, which is fruitfull and aboundant of all these thinges, as Pliuie testifieth, and our owne experience doth witnes. From our Peru doubtlesse they could not bring any Ele phants teeth, those beastes beeing vnknowne there; but they might well bring gold, silver, and pleasant monkies.3 Finally, the holy Scripture, in my opinion, doth commonlyvnderstand by this word of Tharsis, eyther the great Sea, or farre and strange Regions. So as he supposeth that the prophecies which speake of Tharsis (seeing the spirit of Prophecie may comprehend all things) may often be applied to things of our new world. CHAP. xv. Of the Propliecie of Aldias, which some doe interpret to be the Indies. Many say and affirme that in the holy Scripture it wasforetold long before that this new worlde should be con verted to lesus Christ by the Spanish nation, and to this purpose they expound the text of the Prophecie of Abdias, which sayth thus : " And the transmigration of this host of 1 "Marfil." 2 u Paves/ 3 " Monos muy graciosos." THE PEOPHECY OF OBAIUAH. 43 the children of Ishmael shall possesse all the dwellings of the LTB - * Cananites vnto Sarepte, and the transmigration of Jerusa lem, which is at Bosforo, shall possesse the Citties of the South, and they that shall save, shall come vp to the hill of Sion to iudge the mount of Esau, and the kingdom e shall bee the Lordes." 1 There is no sufficient testimony of the Ancients, nor pertinent reasons to proove that Sepharad, which S. lerome doth interpret the JBosphor or Straight, and the 70 Interpreters Euphrates, should signifie Spaine, but onely the opinion of some who hold it. Others alleage the Caldean Paraphrase, which is of this opinion, and the ancient Rabbins, which .expound it on this sort ; as also that Zarphat is France, which the vulgar and the 70 Interpreters call Sarepta. But leaving this dispute, which belongs to men of more leisure, what necessitie is there to beleeve that the citties of the South or of Negeb (as the 70 write) be those of this new world? Moreover, what need is there to beleeve and to take the Spanish Nation for the transmigration from lerusal.em to Sapharad, vnlesse we will vnderstand lerusalem spiritually, and thereby the Church? So as by the transmigration from lerusalem to Sapharad, the holy spirite shewes vs the children of the holy Church, which inhabit the ends of the earth and the banks of the Sea, for so is Sapharad vnderstood in the Syrian tongue, and doth well agree with our Spaine, which according to the Ancients is the ende of the earth, beeing in a manner all invironed with Sea. And by the Citties of the South we may well vnderstand these Indies, seeing the greatest part of this newe worlde is seated in the South, and the better part looks to the Pole Antartike. That 1 "And the captivity of this host of the children of Israel shall possess that of the Canaanites even unto Zarephath, and the captivity of Jerusalem, which is in Sepharad, shall possess the cities of the south. And saviours shall come up on Mount Zion to judge the Mount of Esau ; and the kingdom shall be the Lord s." Obadiah, verses 20, 21. 44 PROPHECY OF ISATAH. LIB. i. which followeth is easie to interpret, viz., " They which. procure Salvation shall ascend the hill of Sion to iudge the mount of Esau". For wee may say they vnite themselves to the doctrine and strength of the holy Church, whichseeke to breake and disperse the prophane errors of the Gentiles, for that may be interpreted to iudge the mount of Esau, whereby it foliowes that in those daies the Realmeshall neyther bee for the Spaniards nor for them of Europe, but for lesus Christ our Saviour. Whosoever shall expoundthe Prophecie of Abdias1 in this sort ought not to be blamed; being most certaine that the holy Spirit did vnderstand all secrets long before. And it seemes j there is great reason to beleeve that mention is made in the holy Scripture of a matter of such importance as the discoverie of the Indies, of the new world, and their conversion to the faith. Isaias ta^oin- sa^h in these wordes : t: Oh the wings of ships which comep. from the other part of Ethiopia." 2 Many learned Authors hold that al this Chapter is vnderstood of the Indies ; and y. ixvi. that same Prophet in an other place saith : " Those which shall escape out of Israel shal goe farre off to Tharsis and to remote Hands, where they shal convert many Nations vnto the Lord." Amongest the which hee names Greece, Italie, Affricke, with many others ; the which without doubt maywell bee applied vnto the conversion of the Indies. Being most certaine that the Gospel shall be preached generally throughout the world, as our Saviour hath promised, and then the ende of the world shall come. It followes then, and so we ought to vnderstand it, that there be manyNations vpon the face of the earth to whom lesus Christ hath not yet been preached. Whereby we may gather that there remained a great part of the world vnknowne to the Ancients, and that yet at this day there is a good part to discover. 1 Obadiah. 2 " Woe to the land shadowing with wings, which is beyond the rivers of Ethiopia." Jaaiah xviii, 1. THE PEOPLING OF THE NEW WOULD. 45 CHAP. xvi. By wliat meanes the first men might come to the Indies, the which was not willingly, nor of set purpose. Now it is time to make answer to such as say there are !*"> i. no Antipodes, and that this region where we live cannot bee inhabited. The huge greatnes of the Ocean did so amaze S. Augustine as he could not conceive how mankind could passe to this new-found world. But seeing on the one side wee know for certaine that many yeeres agoe there were men inhabiting in these parts, so likewise we cannot deny but the scripture doth teach vs cleerely that all men are come from the first man, without doubt we shall be forced to beleeve and confesse that men have passed hither from Europe, Asia, or Affricke, yet must wee discover by what meanes they could passe. It is not likely that there was an other Noes Arke by the which men might be transported into the Indies, and much lesse any Angell to carie the first man to this new world, holding him by the haire of the head, like to the Prophet Abacuc ; for we intreat not of the mightie power of God, but only of that which is conform able vnto reason, and the order and disposition of humane things. Wherefore these two things ought to be held for wonderfull and worthie of admiration, yea, to bee numbred among the secrets of God. The one is, how man could passe so huge a passage by Sea and Lande ; the other is, that there beeing such multitudes of people they have yet beene vnknowne so many ages. For this cause I demaund, by what resolution, force or Industrie, the Indians could passe so large a Sea, and who might be the Inventer of so strange a passage ? Truely I have often times considered thereof with my selfe, as many others have done, but never could I finde any thing to satisfie mee. Yet will I say what I have conceived, and what comes presently into my minde, seeing that testimonies faile mee whom I might follow, 46 PEOPLING OF THE NEW WORLD. LlBtI> suffering myselfe to be guided by the rule of reason, althoughit be very subtill. It is most certaine that the first men* came to this land of Peru by one of these two meanes,either by land or by sea. If they came by sea, it wascasually, and by chance, or willingly, and of purpose. I vnderstand by chance being cast by force of some storme or tempest, as it happens in tempestuous times. I meanedone of purpose, when they prepared fleetes to discover new lands. Besides these two meanes I see it is not pos sible to find out any other, if wee will follow the course of humane things and not devise fabulous and poeticall fictions; for no man may thinke to finde another Eagle as that of Uanimede, or a flying Horse like vnto Perseus, that shouldcarie the Indians through the aire ; or that peradventurethose first men haue vsed fishes, as Mirtnaids, or the fish called a Nicholas, 1 to passe them thither. But laying aside these imaginations and fopperies, 2 let vs examine these twomeanes, the which will bee both pleasant and profitable. First, in my iudgement, it were not farre from reason to say that the first and auncient people of these Indies have dipcoveredand peopled after the same sort as wee do at this day, that is, by the Arte of Navigation and aide of Pilots, the whichguide themselves by the heigth and knowledge of the hea vens, and by their industrie in handling and changing oftheir sailes according to the season. Why might not this well be ? Must we beleeve that we alone, and in this ourao*e, have onely the Arte and knowledge to saile throughthe Ocean ? Wee see even now that they cut through the Ocean to discover new lands, as not long since Alvaro Mendana and his companions did, who parting from the Port of Lima came alongst the West to discover the land whichlieth Eastward from Peru ; and at the end of three mouethsthey discovered the Hands which they call the Hands of 1 " Pexes Syrenas y Nicolaos."

• " Platicaa de burlas."

PEOPLING OF THE NEW WORLD. 47 Salomon,1 which are many and very great, and by all likele- LlB - T - hood they lie adioyning to new Guinnie, or else are very neere to some other firme land. And even now by cominandernent from the King and his Counsell they are re solved to prepare a new fleete for these Hands.2 Seeing it is thus, why may we not suppose that the Ancients had the courage and resolution to travell by sea, with the same intent to discover the land, which they call Anticthon, oppo site to theirs, and that, according to the discourse of their Philosophie, it should be with an intent not to rest vntill they came in view of the landes they sought ? Surely there is no repugnancie or contrarietie in that which wee see happen at this day, and that of former ages, seeing that the holy scripture doth witnes that Solomon tooke Masters and Pilots from Tyre and Sidon, men very expert in Naviga- 1 ^"x i tion, who by their industry performed this voiage in three yeeres. To what end thinke you doth it note the Arte of Mariners and their knowledge, with their long voiage of three yeeres, but to give vs to vnderstand that Solomons fleete sailed through the great Ocean ? Many are of this opinion, which thinke that S. Augustine had small reason to wonder at the greatnes of the Ocean, who might well coniecture that it was not so difficult to saile through, con sidering what hath been spoken of Solomons Navigation. But to say the truth, I am of a contrary opinion, neither can ^ I perswade my selfe that the first Indians came to this new world of purpose, by a determined voiage ; neither will I yeeld, that the Ancients had knowledge in the Art of Navigation, whereby men at this day passe the Ocean, from one part to another, where . they please, the which they performe with an incredible swiftnes and resolution ; nei ther do I finde in all Antiquities any markes or testimonies of so notable a thing and of so great importance. Besides, 1 In 1567. 4 The second expedition of Mendaiia sailed from Peru in 1595. 48 THE ANCIENTS IGNORANT OF THE COMPASS. LIB. i. I finde not that in ancient bookes there is any mentionmade of the vse of the Tinan or Loadstone,1 nor of the Compasse to saile by ; 2 yea, I beleeve they had no knowledgethereof. And if we take away the knowledge of the coin-passe to saile by, we shall easily iudge how impossible it was for them to passe the great Ocean. Such as haue anyknowledge of the sea vnderstand me well ; for that it is aseasie to beleeve that a Mariner in full sea can direct hiscourse where hee please without a compasse, as for a blindeman to shew with his finger any thing, be it neere or farreoff. And it is strange that the Ancients have been so longignorant of this excellent propertie of the load stone ; piin.,iib. for Plinie, who was so curious in naturall causes, writing1 ofin, cap. 6; fc> xxxivb cap ^is load stone, speakes nothing of that vertue and prolib! Vii,a cap. pertie it hath, alwaies to turne the iron which it touchethtowards the North, the which is the most admirable vertueDios.,iib. it hath. Aristotle, Theophrastus, Dioscorides, Lucretius,v, cap. 10. Lncret., nor any other Writers or naturall Philosophers that I havescene, make any mention thereof, although they treat of theAIIP:. do ] oa(j stone. Saint Augustine, writing many and sundry^vbunuit" properties and excellencies of the load stone in his bookese of the Citie of God, speakes nothing thereof. And with out doubt all the excellencies spoken of this stone arenothing in respect of this strange propertie, looking alwaiestowards the North, which is a great wonder of nature.pun., lib. There is yet another argument, for Plinie, treating of thefirst inventers of Navigation, and naming all the instru ments, yet he speakes nothing of the cornpasse to saile by, nor of the load stone. I say onely, that the art to know the starres was invented by the Phceniciens. Andthere is no doubt but whatsoever the Ancients knew of theArt of Navigation was onely in regard of the starres, andobserving the Shoares, Capes, and differences of landes. 1 "Iman" the load stone. 2 " Aguja de Marear" Mariner s compass. THE ANCIENTS IGNORANT OF THE COMPASS. (-0 And if tbey had once lost the sight of land, they knew not LtB - r - which way to direct their course, but by the Stars, Sunne, and Moone, and that failing (as it doth often in a darke and cloudie season) they did governe themselves by the qualitie of the winds, and by coniecture of the waies which they had passed. Finally, they went as they were guided by their owne motions. As at the Indies, the Indians saile a long way by sea, guided onely by their owne Industrie and natural instinct. And it semes greatly to purpose that which Plinie writes of the Handlers of Taprobana (which at this day we call Sumatra), speaking in this sort, when as he treates of the art and Industrie they vse in sailing. <c Those of Taprobana see not the North to saile by, which defect they supply with certaine small birdes they carrie with them, the which they often let flie, and as those birdes by a natural! instinct flie alwaies towards the land, so the Mariners direct their course after them." Who doubtes then if they had had any knowledge of the compasse they would not have vsed these little birdes for their guides to discover the Land. To conclude, this sufficeth to shew that the Ancients had no knowledge of the secrets of the Loadstone, seeing that for so notable a thing there is no proper word in Latine, Greeke, or Hebrew, for a thing of such importance could not have wanted a name in these tongues if they had knowne it. Wherevpon the Pilots at this day, to direct him his course that holds the helme, sit aloft in the poope of the Shippe, the better to observe the compasse; whereas in olde time they sat in the prow of the Shippe to marke the differences of lands and seas, from which place they commaunded the Helme as they vse at this day at the entrie or going out of any Port or haven, and therefore the Greekes called Pilots Proritas, for that they remained still in the prow. 50 VIRTUES OF THE LOAD-STONE. CHAP. xvu. Of the properties and admirable vertue of the Adamant stone for Navigation, whereof the Ancients had no knowledge. LIB. i. By that which hath been formerly spoken, it appeares~~ that the Navigation to the Indies is as certaine and as short as wee are assured of the Adamant stone. And at this day we see many that have sailed from Lisbone to Goa,from Siville to Mexico, and through all the South sea, evenvnto China, and to the straight of Magellan, and that as certainely and as easily as the Husbandman goeth fromhis Farme vnto the Citie. We have also seene men thathave made fifteene, yea, eighteene voiages to the Indies, and we have heard speake of some Ancients which havemade above twentie voiges, passing and repassing thegreat Ocean, in the which they have not seene any signesof such as have traveled nor met with any passengers to Sap. iv. demand the way of them. For as the Wise man saith, "a ship cutteth the waves of the water leaving no way where it passeth, nor any path in the flouds." 1 But by the vertue andpropertie of the Adamant stone it makes as it were a beatenpath in this Ocean. The high Creator of all things havingimparted this vertue vnto it, that by the touch of iron it hath alwaies his motion and aspect towards the North, inwhat part of the world soever you be. Some search whatshould be the cause of this wonderfull propertie, and imagine I know not what sirnpathie. But for my part I takemore pleasure and content in the consideration of thesewonders to praise the power and greatnes of the Almightie,and reioyce in the contemplation of his admirable workes,and to say with Solomon, speaking vpon this subiect, " O1 " As a ship that passeth over the waves of the water, which, whenit is gone by, the trace thereof cannot be found, neither the pathway of the keel in the waves." Wisdom of Solomon, v. 10. DISCOVERY OP THE COMPASS. 51 father whose providence governes and maintaines a peece LIB -I- of wood, giving it an assured way vpon the sea, and in the Sap xiv midst of the swelling waves, to shew that in the like sort thou canst save and deliver man from all perill and shipwracke; yea, although he were in the midst of the sea without shippe. But for that thy works are full of wisedome, men hazard their lives in a small peece of wood, and passe through the sea in a shippe and are saved." 1 And vpon the same subiect the Psalmist saieth, "They which go Psai.cvi. to the sea in shippes and trafficke by the great waters, have seene the workes of the Lord and his wonders in the depth of the sea/ And in truth it is not one of the least wonders of God that the force of so small a stone should command the sea and force the infinite depth thereof to obey him and follow his commandement. But for that it is an vsuall thing and seernes easie men do not admire it nor take any great regard thereof, and for that his bountie is such the ignorant make lesse account thereof. Notwith standing, such as will duly consider it, are led by reason to blesse the wisedome of (rod, and to give him thankes for so great a benefite. Being then decreed in heaven that these nations of the Indies which have lyen so long hidden should bee knowne and discovered, and that this rowt should be frequented to the end so many soules should come to the knowledge of lesus Christ and winne eternall life. There was an assured guide provided for such as travell that way, that is, the Compasse to saile by, and the vertue of the Adamant stone. Wee doe not certainely know at what time this Art of sail ing was brought to light. But for my part I hold for cer- taine that it is not verie ancient, for besides the reasons alleadged in the former chapter, I have not read in any ancient Author, treating of dialles, any mention made of the Adamant. And yet, undoubtedly, the principall and most necessarie instrument for sunne dialls which we vse at this 1 Wisdom of Solomon, xiv, 3, 4, 5. K 2 52 VARIATION OF THE COMPASS. LlE

T - day is the needle of iron touched with the Adamant stone. Some approved Authors write in the Historie of the East

Indies that the first which began to discover this secret wasvpon the sea was Vasco da Gama, who,, in the heigth of Mosambique, met with certaine Mariners Moores which vsed iiiust. this compasse or needle to saile by, and by the meanes?n.,iib.ii, thereof he sailed through those seas; yet they write not .Vii. ca. from whom they learned this Art. And some amongstthem are of our opinion, that the Ancients were ignorant of this secret. Moreover, I will shew a greater wonder of the needle to saile by, which we might hold incredible, if wehad not proofe thereof by vndoubted experience. The iron touched or rubbed with that part of the Adamant stone which is towards the South, hath this vertue, to turuo alwaies and in all places to the contrarie, which is the North. Yet doth it not in all places directly regard it, buthath certaine points and climats, where it directly regardes the North and their staies; but changing this climate, it- inclines a little, either to the East, or to the West, the farther it goes from this climat, which the Mariners cal North-east, or North-west, which is to say, coasting or in clining to the East or to the West. And it is a thing; ofo O such consequence to vnderstand this declining or coasting of the needle, that if they observe it not advisedly, althoughit bee small, they shall stray wonderfully in their course, j and arrive in another place then where they pretended to go. Once a very expert Pilot of Portugal told mee that 7there were foure poyntes in all the world, whereas the [ needle looked directly towards the North, the which hee( named, but I do not Well remember them. One is in the /)height of the Hand of Corvo at the Terceres or AQores,which is very well knowne to all men; but passing to a greater altitude it declines to the West, and contrariwise, drawing to a lesse altitude towardes the Equinoctiall it leanes to the East. TLe masters of this Arfce can well tell 53 how farre and how much. For my part I would gladly LlB - r - know, of such as presume to knowe all thinges, what should bee the cause of this effect, and for what reason a little yron touched with the Adamant stone receyves such vertue as to looke alwayes towards the North, and with such dexteritie, that it vnderstandeth the sundry Climates and scituations of the world; and which way it should turn and incline, as well as any Philosopher or Cosmographer whatsoever. And seeing wee cannot well discover the causes and reasons of these thinges which wee see dayly, without doubt they were very hard to beleeve if they were not apparent. Herein we discover our follie and vanitie, to make ourselves iudges and to subiect divine and high things to our reason and discourse. It is therefore better, as S. Gregorie the divine sayth, to subiect reason vnto faith, for that in her owne mansion she hath no governernent. But this shall suffice. Let vs returne to our purpose, and conclude that the vse of the needle to sayle by was vnknowne to the Ancients, whereby we may resolve that it was impossible to make a determined voyage, parting from the other world, to come to this by the Ocean, CHAP. xvin. Wherein an answere is made to them that say tJtat in times passed they have sayled through the Ocean as at this day. That which is alleaged to the contrary of that which hath beene spoken, that Salomans Fleet sayled in three yeeres, is no sufficient proofe, seeing the holy Scripture doth not directly affirrne, that this voyage continued three yeeres, but that it was made once in three yeeres. And although wee graunt that the voyage lasted three yeeres, it might bee, as it is likely, that this Fleet sayling towards the East Indies was stayed in their course? by the diversitie of 54 AMERICA DISCOVERED BY CHANCE. LIB. i. Ports and Regions, which they discovered; as at this day, in all the South Sea, they sayle from Chile to newe Spaine, the which voyage, although it bee more certaine, yet is it longer by reason of the turnings they are forced to makevpon the Coast, and they stay in divers Fortes. And in trueth I doe not find in ancient bookes that they havelanched farre into the Ocean, neyther can I beleeve that this their sayling was otherwise then they vse at this dayin the Mediterranean Sea; which makes learned men to coniecture that in old time they did not sayle withoutowers, 1 for that they went alwayes coasting along the shoare; and it seems the holy Scripture doth testifie as much, speaking of that famous voyage of the Prophet lonas, where it sayes, that the Marriners being forced by the weather, rowed to land. CHAP. xix. That we may coniecture hoiu the first inhabitants of the Indies came thither by force of weather, and not willingly. Having shewed that there is no reason to beleeve that the first Inhabitants of the Indies came thither purposely, it followeth then, that if they came by Sea, it was by chanceor by force of weather, the which is not incredible, notwith standing the vastnesse of the Ocean, seeing the like hathhappened in our time, when as that Marriner, whose namewe are yet ignorant of, to the end so great a worke, and ofsuch importance, should not be attributed to any otherAuthor then to God, having, through tempest, discoveredthis new world, left for payment of his lodging, where hehad received it, to Christopher Columbus, the knowledge ofso great a secret.2 Even so it might chance that some of 1 " Que antiguamente no navegaban sin remos." 2 On this story, see my note in the first volume of the Royal Com mentaries of Garcilasso de la Vega, p. 24. VOYAGES OF THE ANCIENTS. 55 Europe or Affricke in times past, have bin driven by foule LlB - weather, and cast vpon vnknowne lands beyond the Ocean. Who knoweth not that most, or the greatest part of the Regions in this newe world, were discovered by this meanes, the which we must rather attribute to the violence of the weather then to the spirit and Industrie of those which have discovered. And to the end we may know that it is not in our time onely that they have vndertaken such voiages, through the greatnesse of our shippes, and the valour and courage of our men, we may reade in Plinie that many of the Ancients have made the like voyages, he writes in this manner : ( It is reported that Caius Csesar, sonne to ; Augustus Ctesar, having charge vpon the Arabian Sea, did there see and finde certaine pieces and remainders of Spanish shippes that had perished." And after he saith : "Nepos reportes of the Northerne circuite, that they brought to Quintus Metellus Ceeler, companion in the Consulship to Caius Affranius (the same Metellus being then Proconsull in Gaule) certaine Indians which had beene presented by the King of Suevia; the which Indians, sailing from India, for their trafficke, were cast vpon Germanie by force of tempest." Doubtles, if Plinie speaketh truth, the Portugales in these daies, saile no further then ; they did in those two shipwrackes, the one from Spaine to the Red Sea, the other from the East Indies to Germanie. The same Author writes in another place that a servant of Annius Plocanius, who farmed the customes of the Red Sea, sailing the course of Arabia, there came so furious a Northerne wind, that in fifteene daies he passed Caramania and discovered Hippuros, a port in Taprobane, which at this day we call Sumatra. And they report of a shippe of Carthage, which was driven out of the Mediterranean Sea by a Northerne wind, to the view of this new world. The which is no strange thing to such as have any knowledge of the sea, to know that sometimes a storme continues long 56 ACCIDENTAL DISCOVERY Oi AME1ITCA. LIB. i. an(j furious, without any intermission. I my selfe going to the Indies, parting from the Canaries, have in fifteene daies discovered the first land peopled by the Spaniards. Andwithout doubt this voiage had been shorter, if the Marinershad set vp all their sailes to the Northerne winds that blew. It seemes therefore likely to me that, in times past, mencame to the Indies against their wills, driven by the furie of the winds. In Peru, they make great mention of cer- taine Giants, which have been in those parts, whose bonesare yet seene at Manta and Puerto Viejo, of a huge greatnes, and by their proportion they should be thrice as big as the Indians.1 At this day they report that the Giants caine bysea, to make warre with those of the Countrie, and that they made goodly buildings, whereof at this day they shewa well, built with stones of great price. They say moreover, that these men committing abominable sinucs, especially against nature, were consumed by fire from heaven. In. like sort, the Indians of Yea and Arica report, that in old time they were wont to saile farre to the Hands of the West, and made their voiages in Scales skinnes blowne up. 2 So as there wants no witnesses to prove that they sailed in the South sea before the Spaniards came thither. Thus wemay well couiecture that the new world began to be in habited by men that have been cast vpon that coast by the violence of the Northerne winds, as wee have seene in our age. So it is, being a matter verie considerable, that the workes of nature of greatest importance for the mostpart have been found out accidentally, and not by the In dustrie and diligence of man. The greatest part of phisicall hearbes, of Stones, Plants, Mettalls, Perle, gold, Adamant,Amber, Diamont, and the most part of such like things, with their properties and vertues, have rather come to the 1 Sec my note on the story of these giants at page 190 of my transla tion of Cieza de Leon.

• See my Introduction to the translation of Cit^t de Leon. p. xlv.

AMERICA PEEHAPS PEOPLED BY LAND. 57 knowledge of men by chance then by art or Industrie, to LlB - r - the end wee may know that the glorie and praise of such wonders should be attributed to the providence of the Creator, and not to mans vnderstanding ; for that which we thinke to happen accidently proceedes alwaies from the ordinance and disposition of God, who does all things with reason. CHAP. xx. Notwithstanding all that hath bene said, it is more likely that the first inhabitants of the Indies came by land. I conclude then, that it is likely the first that came to the Indies was by shipwracke and tempest of wether, but heereupon groweth a difficultie which troubleth me much. For, suppose wee grant that the first men came from farre Countries, and that the nations which we now see are issued from them and multiplied, yet can I not coniecture by what meanes brute beastes, whereof there is great aboundance, could come there, not being likely they should have bin imbarked and carried by sea. The reason that inforceth us to yeeld that the first men of the Indies are come from Europe or Asia, is the testirnonie of the holy scripture, which teacheth us plainely that all men came from Adam. We can therefore give no other beginning to those at the Indies, seeing the holy scripture saieth, that Gen. all beasts and creatures of the earth perished but such as were reserved in the Arke of Noe, for the multiplication and maintenance of their kinde; so as we must necessarily referre the multiplication of all beastes to those which came out of the Arke of Noe, on the mountaines of Ararat, where it staied. And by this meanes we must seeke out both for men and beastes the way whereby they might passe from the old world to this new. Saint Augustine, treating vpon this question, by what reason you shall finde in some llandes 58 HOW BEASTS REACHED THE NEW WORLD. LIB. i. Wolves, Tigers, and other ravenous beastes, which breedeAug., lib. no profit to men, seeing there is no doubt but Elephants, cap d6 7. imt Horses, Oxen, Dogges, and other beastes which serve man to vse, have been expresly carried in shippes, as wesee at this day brought from the East into Europe, andtransported from Europe to Peru, although the voiages beverie long. And by what meanes these beastes which yeeld no profit, but are very hurtefull (as Wolves and others of that wilde nature), should passe to the Indies, supposing, as it is certaine, that the deluge drowned all the earth. Inwhich Treatise this learned and holy man laboures to free himselfe of these difficulties, saying that they might swimvnto these Hands, or that some have carried them thither for their delight in hunting; or that, by the will of God,they had been newly created of the earth, after the sameGen. i. maner of the first creation, when God said, " Let the earth bring forth everie living- thing according to his kinde, Cattle, and creeping Wormes, and the beastes of the field, every one in his kinde." But if we shall apply this solu tion to our purpose the matter will remaine more doubtfull, for, beginning at the last point, it is not likely, accord ing to the order of Nature, nor conformable to the order of government established by God, that perfect creatures, as Lions, Tigers, and Wolves, should be engendered of the earth, as we see that Eattes, Frogges, Bees, and other imperfect creatures are commonly engendered. Moreover,to what purpose is that which the scripture saieth, andGen. vii. doth so often repeate, " Thou shalt take of all the beastes and birdes of the aire, seven and seven, male and female, to maintaine generation vpon earth"; if such beasts after the deluge should be created againe after a new kinde of creation without coniunction of male and female. Andheerevpon might grow another question. Seeing such crea tures are breeding on the earth (according to this opinion) wherefore are they not likewise in all other partos of the HOW LEASTS REACHED THE NEW WORLD. 59 maine Land, arid in many Ilandes, seeing wee must not LlB - s - rogarde the naturall order of creation but the bountie of the Creator. On the other part, I will not hold it for a thing incredible that they have carried some of these beastes for the pleasure of hunting, for that we often see Princes and great men keepe and nourish in their cages (onely for their pleasure and greatnesse) both Lyons, Beares, and other savage beastes, especially when they are brought from farre Countries; but to speake that of Woolves, Foxes, and other beasts which yeeld no profite, and have nothing rare and excellent in them but to hurt the cattell; and to say also that they have carried them by sea for hunting, truely it is a thing that hath no sense. Who can imagine that in so long a voyage men would take the paynes to carrie Foxes to Peru, especially of that kind which they call Anas,1 which is the filthiest that I have seene ? Who woould likewise say that they have carried Tygers and Lyons ? Truely it were a thing worthy the laughing at to thinke so. It was suffi cient, yea, very much, for men, driven against their willes by tempest, in so long and vnknowne a voyage, to escape the danger of the Sea with theyr own lives without busy ing themselves to carrie Woolves and Foxes, and to nourish them at Sea. If these beasts then came by Sea, wee must beleeve it was by swimming, which may happen in some Hands not farre distant from others, or from the mayne Land, the which wee cannot denie, seeing the experience wee have, and that wee see these beasts, beeing prest to swimme day and night without wearinesse, and so to escape. But this is to be vnderstood in smal Straights and passages, for in our Ocean they would mocke at such swimmers, when as birds faile in their flight, yea, those of the greatest wing, vpon the passage of so great a Gulph. And although we finde small birdes, which flie above one hundred leagues, as 1 Anas, the Quichua for a small fox. A toe is another word for a fox (Cants Azcinv). 60 PliOPHECY OF EEH RING S STRAITS. LIB. i. wo } iave often seene in our travel, yet it is a matter impos sible, at the least very difficult, for birdes to passe all the Ocean. All this beeing true which wee have spoken, whatway shall wee make for beastes and birdes to goe to the Indies ? and how can I say they passed from one worlde to an other ? i. I coniecture then, by the discourse I have made,that the new world, which we call Indies, is not altogether severed and disioyned from the other world ; and to speake my opinion, I have long beleeved that the one andthe other world are ioyned and continued one with another in some part, or at the least are very neere. And yet to this day there is no certaine knowledge of the contrary. For towards the Articke or Northerne Pole all the longitude - of the earth is not discovered,! and many hold that aboveFlorida the Land runnes out very large towards the North, and as they say ioynes with the Scithike or German Sea. Others affirme that a Ship sayling in that Sea reported to have scene the coast of Bacalaos1 which stretcheth almost to the confines of Europe. ^Moreover, no man knowes howfarre the land runnes beyond the Cape of Mendozino2 in the South sea, but that they affirme it is a great Continent which runnes an infinite length]; and returning to the Southerne Pole no man knowes the lands on the other part of the Straight of Magellan. A ship belonging to the Bishoppe of Plasencia, which passed the Straight, reports to have sayled alwayes within sight of land; the like Hernando Lamero a Pilot doth affirme, who, forced by foule weather, passed twoor three degrees above the sayd Straight. So as there is noreason or experience that doth contradict my conceit andopinion, which is, that the whole earth is vnited and ioyned in some part, or at the least the one approcheth neere vnto the other. If this be true, as in effect there is some likelyhood, the answere is easie to the doubt we have pro pounded, how the first Inhabitants could passe to the Indies. 1 Newfoundland. 2 Cape Mendocino, in California. THE INDIANS COULD ONLY MARK SHORT VOYAGES. Gl For that wee must beleeve they could not so conveniently LTB - J - come thither by Sea as travelling by Land,, which might be done without consideration in changing by little and little their lands and habitations. Some peopling the lands they found, and others seeking for uewe, in time they came to inhabite and people the Indies, with so many nations, people, and tongues as we see. CFTAP. xxi. By what meanes tame Beasts passed to the Indies. The signes and arguments, which offer themselves to such as are curious to examine the Indians manors and fashions, helpe much to maintayne the foresayd opinion ; for that you shall not finde any inhabiting the Hands that are farre from the maine Land, or from other Hands, as the Bermudes, the reason whereof is, for that the Ancients did never sayle but alongst the coast, and in view of land ; whereupon, it is reported that they have found no great Ships in any part of the Indies capable to passe such Grulphs, but onely Balsaes, Barkes, and Canoes, which are all lesse then our long boates, the which the Indians doe onely vse, with the which they could not runne through so great a Passage, without apparent danger of ship-wracke, and although their shippes had been sufficient, yet had they no knowledge of the Astrolabe or Compasse. If then they had beene but eight or tenne dayes at Sea without sight of land, they must of necessitie loose themselves, having no know ledge where they were. Wee know many Ilandes well peopled with Indians, and their usuall navigations, the which was such, as they may well perforrne in Canoes and boats, without any Compasse to sayle by. Whenas the In dians of Peru, which remayne at Tumbez, did see our first Spanish shippes sayling to Peru, and viewed the greatnosso 62 ANIMALS ON THE ISLANDS. LIB. i. Of their sailes, being spread, and of the bodies of the ships, they stood greatly amazed, not beeing able to perswadethemselves that they were shippes, having never seene anyof the like forme and greatnesse, they supposed they hadbeene rockes. But, seeing them advance, and not to sincke, they stood transported with amazement, vntill that, behold ing them neerer, they discovered men with beards that walked in them, whom then they held for some gods or heavenly creatures. Whereby it appears how strange it was to the Indians to have great Ships. There is yetan other reason, which confirm es vs in the foresayd opinion, which is, that these beastes (which we say are not likely to have been transported by Sea to the Indies) remayne onelyon the maine Land, and not in any Hands foure dayesiorney from the maine Land. I have made this search for proofe thereof, for that it seems to me a point of great importance, to confirme me in mine opinion, that the confines of the Indies, Europe, Asia, and Affricke have some communication one with another, or at the least, approch veryneere together. There are in America and Peru manywilde beastes, as Lyons, although they be not like in greatnesse, fiercenesse, nor of the same colour, redde, to the re nowned Lyons of Affrica. There are also many Tygers,very cruell, and more to the Indians then to the Spaniardes;there are likewise Beares, but in no great aboundance ; ofBoares and Foxes an infinite number. And yet if weeshall seeke for all these kindes of beastes in the Hands ofCuba, Hispaniola, lamaica, Marguerita, or Dominica, youshall not finde any. So as in the sayde Hands, althoughthey were very fertile, and of a great circuit, yet was therenot any kind of beastes for service when the Spaniardsarrived; but at this day there are so great troopes ofHorses, Oxen, Kyne, Dogs, and Hogges, which have multi plied in such abundance, as now the Kine have no certaine master, but belong to him that shal first kil them, be it on ANIMALS REACH ISLANDS BY SWIMMING. 63 the mountaines or on the plaines j which the Indians do, LlB - x - onely to save their hides, whereof they make great traffick, without any regard of the flesh to eate it. Dogges have so increased, as they march by troopes, and endammage the cattel no lesse than wolves, which is a great inconvenience in these Hands. There wants not onely beastes in these Hands ; but also birdes, both great and small. As for Parrots, there are many that flie by flockes ; but, as I have said, there are few of any other kinde. I have not seene nor heard of any Partriges there, as in Peru. Likewise, there are few of those beastes which at Peru they call guanacos, and vicunas, like to wilde goates, very swifte, in whose stomacke they find the bezoar stone, which many do greatly value ; sometimes you shall finde them as bigge as a hens egge, yea, halfe as bigge againe. They have no other kinde of beastes, but such as we call Indian sheepe, the which, besides their wooll and flesh (wherewith they clothe and feede themselves), do serve them as Asses to beare their burthens. They carrie halfe as much as a mule, and are of small charge to their masters, having neede neither of shooes, saddle, nor oates to live by, nor of any furniture, for that Nature hath provided them of all these, wherein she seemes to have favoured these poore Indians. Of all these creatures, and of many other sortes, whereof I will make mention, the maine land at the Indies aboundes. But in the Hands there are not any found, but such as the Spaniards have brought. It is true, that once one of our Friars did see a tiger in an Hand, as hee reported vnto vs vpon the discourse of his peregrination and shipwracke; but being demanded how farre it was from the maine land, he answered, sixe or eight leagues at the most; which passage tigers might easily swim me over. We may easily iriferre by these arguments, and others like, that the first Indians went to inhabit the Indies more by land then by sea; or if there were any navigation, it was neither great 04 THE ISLAND OF ATLANTIS. , 5i r - nor difficult^ being an indubitable tiling, that the one worldis continued and ioyned with the other, or at the least theyapproach one neerer vnto another in some parts. CHAP. xxn. That the lineage of the Indians hath not passedby the Atlantis Hand as some do imagine. sap., cap. Some (following Platoe s opinion, mentioned before)affirme that these men parted from Europe or Affricko togo to that famous and renowned Hand of Atlantis, and sopassed from one Hand vnto another, vntill they came to themaine land of the Indies, for that Cricias of Plato in hisTirneus discourseth in this maner. If the Atlantis Hand wereas great as all Asia and Affrike together, or greater, asPlato saies, it should of necessitie containe all the AtlantikeOcean, and stretch even vnto the Hands of the new world.And Plato saieth moreover that by a great and strangedeluge the Atlantis Hand was drowned, and by that meanesthe sea was made vnnavigable, through the ahoundanceof banckes, rockes, and roughnesse of the waves, whichwere yet in his time. But in the end the ruines of thisdrowned Hand were setled, which made this sea navigable.This hath been curiously handled and discoursed of bysome learned men of good judgement, and yet, to speakthe truth, being well considered, they are ridiculous things,resembling rather to Ovid s tales then a Historic or Philosophic worthy of accompt. The greatest part of Platoe s Interpreters affirme that it is a true Historie, whatsoeverCricias reports of the strange beginning of the AtlantisHand, of the greatnes thereof, of the warres. they hadagainst them of Europe, with many other things. Thatwhich gives it the more credite of a true Historie be thewordes of Cricias (whom Plato brings in in his Timeus), saying that the subject ho moans to treat of is of stranire things, ANCIENT FABLES. 65 but yet true. The other disciples of Plato, considering LlB - that this discourse hath more shew of a fable then of a true Historic, say that we must take it as an allegoric, and that such was the intention of their divine Philosopher. Of this opinion is Procles and Porphire, yea, and Origene, who so much regardes the writings of Plato as when they speake thereof they seeme to bee the bookes of Moses or of Esdras, and whereas they thinke the writings of Plato have no shew of truth they say they are to be vnderstood mystically, and in allegories. But, to say the truth, I do not so much respect the authoritie of Plato (whom they call Divine), as I wil beleeve he could write these things of the Atlantis Hand for a true Historie, the which are but meere fables, seeing hee confesseth that hee learned them of Critias, being a little childe, who, among other songs, sung that of the Atlantis Hand. But whether that Plato did write it for a true Historie or a fable, for my part I beleeve that all which he hath written of this Hand, beginning at the Dialogue of Timeus and continuing to that of Critias, cannot be held for true but among children and old folkes. Who will not accoumpt it a fable to say that Neptune fell in love with Clite, and had of her five paire of twinnes at one birth. And that out of one mountaine hee drew three round balles of water and two of earth, w T hich did so well resemble as you would have judged them all one bowell. What shall wee say, moreover, of that Temple of a thousand paces long and five hundred broade, whose walles without were all covered with silver, the seeling of gold, and within ivorie indented and inlaied with gold, silver, and pearle. In the end, speaking of the mine thereof, he concludes thus in his time : " In one day and one night came a great delug e, whereby all our souldiers were swallowed by heapes within the earth, and in this sort the Atlantis Hand being drowned, it vanished in the Sea." Without doubt it fell out happily that this Hand vanished so suddenly, seeing- it was bigger 66 PLINY ON ATLAS AND ATLANTIS. LlB- * than Asia and Affrike, and that it was made by enchantment. It is in like sort all one to say that the ruines of thisso great an Hand are seene in the bottome of the sea, andthat the Mariners which see them cannot saile that way.Then he addes : " For this cause vnto this day that Seaisnot navigable, by reason of the bancke, which by little andlittle has growne in that drowned Hand." I would willinglydemand what Sea could swallow vp so infinite a continentof land, greater then Asia and Affrike, whose confinesstretched vnto the Indies, and to swallow it vp in such sortas there should at this day remaine no signes nor markesthereof whatsoever, seeing it is well kuowne by experiencethat the Mariners finde no bottomo in the Sea where theysay this Hand was. Notwithstanding, it may seeme indis-creete and farre from reason to dispute seriously of thosethings which are reported at pleasure, or if we shall givethat respect to the authoritie of Plato (as it is reason) womust rather vnderstand them to signifie simply, as in apicture, the prosperitie of a Citie, and withall the ruinethereof. For the argument they make to prove that thisAtlantis Hand hath been really and indeede, saying thatthe sea in those parts doth at this day beare the nameofAtlantike is of small importance, for that wee knowe Mountpiin.,iib. Atla . whereof Plinie says this sea tooke the name, is vponV, cap. 1 ; J ca l si* vl> the confines of the Mediterranean Sea. And the same Pliniereportes that joyning to the said Mount there is an Handcalled Atlantis, which he reports to be little and of smallaccompt. CHAP. xxni. That the opinion of many which holdc that the. first race of the Indians comes from the lewes is not true. Now that wee have shewed how vnlikely it is that thefirst Indians passed to the Indies by the Atlantis Hand,there aro others holde opinion that they tooke the way, JEWrSTI DESCENT OF THE INDIANS. 07 whereof Esdras speakesin his fourth booke, in this manner : LTB - T - ec And whereas thou sawest that he gathered an other pe-ace- 4 Es(lr- xiiif able troope vnto him, thou shalt know those are the ten tribes, which were carried away captives out of their own land in the time of king Ozeas, whom Salmanazar, king of the Assyrians tooke captives, and ledde them beyond the river, so were they brought into an other land ; but they tooke this counsell to themselves to leave the multitude of the heathen, and go forth into a farther countrie, where never mankind dwelt, that they might there observe their statutes, which they could not keepo in their owne land ; and they entred by the narrowe passages of the river Euphrates, for then God shewed his wonders, and stayed the springs of the flood untill they were passed over; for the way vnto that countrie is very long, yea, of a yeere and a halfe, and this Eegion is called Arsareth ; T then dw.elt they there vntill the latter time, and when they come forth againe the most Mightie shall hold still the springs of the river againe, that they may goe through ; for this cause sawest thou this multitude peaceable/ 2 Some will apply this text of Esdras to the Indies, saying, they were guided by God, whereas never mankinde dwelt, and that the land where they dwelt is so farre off, as it requires a yeere and a halfe to performe the voyage, beeiiig by nature very ,jeaceable. And that there are great signes and arguments amongst the common sort of the Indians, to breed a beleefe that they are descended from the lews ; for, commonly you shall see them fearefull, submisse, ceremonious, and subtill in tying. And, moreover, they say their habites are like vnto those the lewes vsed ; for they weare a short coat or waste-coat, and a cloake imbroidered all about; they goe bare-footed, or with soles tied with latchets over the foot, which they call ojatas. 3 And they say, that it appears by 1 Ararat, or Armenia. a Esdras^ xiii, 89 to 47. 3 Usii.ta. The Quichua word for sandals. F2 68 REASONS AGAINST THE JEWISH ORIGIN. LIB. i. their Histories, as also by their ancient pictures, whichrepresent them in this fashion, that this attire was the ancientliabite of the Hebrewes, and that these two kinds of garments, which the Indians onely vse, were vsed by Samson, which the Scripture calleth Tunicam et Syndonem;beeing the same which the Indians terme waste-coat andcloake. But all these coniectures are light, and ratheragainst them then with them ; for wee know well, that theHebrewes vsed letters, whereof there is no shew amongthe Indians; they were great lovers of silver, these makeno care of it ; the lews, if they were not circumcised, heldnot themselves for lewes, and contrariwise the Indians arenot at all, neyther did they ever vse any ceremonie xieereitas many in the East have done. But what reason of coniecture is there in this, seeing the lewes are so careful topreserve their language and Antiquities, so as in all partsof the world they differ and are known from others, andyetat the Indies alone, they have forgotten their Lineage, theirLaw, their Ceremonies, their Messias ; and, finally, theirwhole Indaisme. And whereas they say, the Indians arefeareful cowards, superstitious, and subtill in lying ; for thefirst, it is not common to all, there are some nations amongthe Barbarians free from these vices, there are some valiantand hardy, there are some blunt and dull of vnderstanding.As for ceremonies and superstitions, the Heathen havealwayes vsed them much ; the manner of habites describedwhich they vse, being the plainest and most simple in theworld ; without Arte, the which hath been common,notonely to the Hebrewes, but to all other Nations ; seeingthat the very History of Esdras (if wee shall beleeve theScriptures that bee Apocrypha) make more against themthen for their purpose ; for hee saith in that place, that theten tribes went from the multitude of the Heathen, to keepetheir faith and ceremonies, and we see the Indians giventoall the Idolatries in the world. And those which holde this PROBABLE WAY OF PEOPLING THE INDIES. 09 opinion, see well if the entries of the River Euphrates LlB - I> stretch to the Indies, and whether it be necessary for the Indies to repasse that way, as it is written. Besides, I know not how you can name them peaceable, seeing they be alwaies in warre amongst themselves. To conclude, I cannot see how that Euphrates in Esdras Apocrypha should be a more convenient passage to goe to the new world, then the inchanted and fabulous Atlantis Hand of Plato. CHAP. xxiv. The reason why we can find no beginning of the Indians. It is easier to refute and contradict the false opinions conceyved of the Originall of the Indians, then to set downe a true and certaine resolution ; for that there is no writing among the Indians, nor any certaine remembrances of their founders; neyther is there any mention made of this new world in their bookes that have knowledge of letters ; our Ancients held, that in those parts, there were neyther men, land, nor haven. So as hee should seeme rash and presumptuous, that should thinke to discover the first beginning of the Indians. But we may iudge a farre off, by the former discourse, that these Indians came by little and little to this newe world, and that by the helpe and meanes of the neerenesse of lands, or by some navigation ; the which seemes to mee the meanes whereby they came, and not that they prepared any armie to goe thither of purpose; neyther that they have been caried thither by any ship-wracke or tempest, although some of these things may chance in some part of the Indies ; for these Regions being so great, as they containe Nations without number, we may beleeve, that some came to inhabite after one sort, and some after an other. But in the ende I resolve vpon this point, that the true and principall cause to people the 70 TRADITION OF A DELUGE. Ll"- * Indies,, was,, that the lands and limits thereof are ioynedand continued in some extremities of the world, or at theleast were very neere. And I beleeve it is not manythousand yeeres past since men first inhabited this new. world and West Indies, and that the first men that entred,were rather savage men and hunters, then bredde vp incivill and well governed Cornrnon-weales ; and that theycame to this new world, having lost their owne land, orbeing in too great numbers, they were forced of necessitioto seeke some other habitations ; the which having found,they begannc by little and little to plant, having no otherlaw, but some instinct of nature, and that very darke, andsome customes remayning of their first Countries. Andalthough they came from Countries well governed, yet is it not incredible to thinke that they had forgotten all throughthe tract of time and want of vse, seeing that in Spaineand Italic we find companies of men, which have nothingbut the shape and countenance onoly, whereby we may couiecturc in what sort this new world grew so barbarous andvncivill. CHAP. xxv. What the Indians report of their beginning. It is no matter of any great importance to know whatthe Indians themselves report of their beginning, beingmore like vnto dreainefi, then to true Histories. Theymake great mention of a deluge hapned in their Countric ; but we cannot well iudge if this deluge were vniversall(whereof the scripture makes mention) or some particularinundation of those regions where they are. Some expertmen say that in those Countries are many notable signesof some great inundation, and I am of their opinion whichlliinko that these markes and shewcs of a deluge was notthat of Noe, but some other particular, as that which Platospeaker of, or Deuealions floud, which the Poets sing of; ORIGIN OF THE YNCAS. 71 whatsoever it be, the Indians say that al men were Downed LlB - r- in this deluge ; and they report that out of the great Lake Titicaca came one Viracocha, which staied in Tiahuanaco, where at this day there is to bee seene the ruines of ancient and very strange buildings, and from thence came to Cuzco, and so began mankinde to multiply. 1 They shew in the same lake a small island, where they faine that the sunne hid himselfe, and so was preserved ; and for this reason they make great sacrifices viito him in that place, both of sheepe and inen. Others report that sixe, or I know not what number of men, came out of a certaine cave by a window, by whome men first began to multiplie ; and for this reason they call them Paccari-tampu. 2 And therefore they are of opinion that the Tampus is the most ancient race of men. They say also, that Mango Capa, 3 whom they acknowledge for the founder and chiefe of their Ingas, was issued of that race, and that from him sprang two families or linages, the one of Hanan Cuzco, the other of Urin Cuzco. They say moreover, that when the Kings Ingas attempted warre and conquered sundrie Provinces, they gave a colour and made a pretext of their enterprise, saying, that all the world ought to acknowledge them ; for that all the world was renued by their race and Countrie : and also that the true religion had been revelled to them from heaven. But what availeth it to speake more, seeing that all is full of lies and vanitie, and farre from reason ? Some learned men write, that all which the Indians make mention of, is not above 400 yeeres old, and whatsoever they speake of former ages, is but a confusion full of obscuritie, wherein we find 110 truth. The which may not seeme strange, they having 1 See my translation of the Royal Commentaries of Carcilasso Ynca dc la Veya, i, pp. 61 to 73, for traditions of the origin of the Yncas. Also Laws and Rites of the Yncas, pp. 74 and 153. a From Paccari, morning 1 in Quicluw, and tai/qtti } an inn. 3 Manco Ceapac, the first Ynca. 72 ORIGIN OF AMERICAN CIVILIZATIONS. LIU. i. 11O vse of bookes, or writing; in steode whereof they vse counting with their Quipu-camayocs, 1 the which is peculiar vnto them. By which reckoning all they can report is not past 400 yeeres. Instructing my selfe carefully of them, to know from what land and what nation they passed, to that where they now live, I have found them so farre vnable to give any reason thereof, as they beleeve confidently, that they were created at their first beginning at this new world, where they now dwell. But we have freed thern of this ct. xvii. m-rorj)y .pur faith, which teacheth vs that all men came from the first man. There are great and apparant coniectures, that these men for a long time had neither Kings nor common wealcs, but lived in troupes, as they do at this dayin Florida, the Chiriguanas, 2 those of Bresill, and many other nations, which have no certaine Kings, but as occasion is offered in peace or warre, they choose their Captaines as they please. But some men excelling others in force andon. x. wit, began in time to rule and domineere as Nembrot3 did; so increasing by little and little, they erected the kingdomesof Peru and Mexico, which our Spaniards found ; andalthough they were barbarous, yet did they farre surpasse all the other Indians. Behold how the foresaid reason dothteach vs that the Indians began to multiply, for the mostpart, by savage men and fugitives, which may suffice touching the beginning of these men we speake of, leaving the rest vntill we treate of their Historie more at large. 1 The Quipn-camayoc was the officer in charge of the quipus or knot records of the Yncas. 2 A wild tribe in forests to the east of the Andes. 3 Nimrod. THE SECOND BOOKEOf the Naturall and Morall Historic of the Indies. CHAP. i. That it is not out of purpose, but necessarie, to trcate of the nature of the Equinoctiall. 1 FOR the well conceiving of things at the Indies, it is neces- LIB. sai ie to know the nature and disposition of that Region, "~ which the Ancients did call the burning Zone, the which they held uninhabitable, seeing the greatest part of this new world, which hath bin of late discovered, lies and is scituate vnder this region. And it seemes to me greatly to purpose which some do say, that the knowledge of things at the Indies depends on the well vnderstanding the nature of the Equinoctiall ; for that the difference which is betwixt the one and the other world proceeds in a manner from the qualities of this Equinoctiall. And we must note that all the space betwixt the two Tropickes must be properly taken and held for this middle line, which is the Equinoctiall ; so called, for that the Sunne running his course therein, makes the daies and nights even through out the world ; yea, they that dwell vnder this line, inioy, throughout the yeare, the same equalitie of daies and nights. In this Equinoctiall line we finde so many admirable quali ties, that with great reason man s vnderstanding doth studio and labour to search out the causes, not moved therevnto so much by the doctrine of ancient Philosophers, as by reason and certaine experience. 1 " Quo se lia de tratar do la naturalcza de la Equiiiocial." 74 HEAT OF THE EQUINOCTIAL. CHAP. IT. For what reason the Ancients held that the burningZone was not inhabitable. LIB. n. Examining this subiect from the beginning, no man candome that which we plainely see, that the Sunne whenit drawes neere doth heate, and when it retyres, groweth cold.The daies and nightes, with the Winter and Summer, bewitnesses heereof, whose varietie with the heate and coldgrowes by the neerenes and distance of the Sunne. Moreover it is certaine the more the Sunne approacheth andcasteth his beames perpendicularly, the more the earth is scorched and burnt, the which we see plainely in the heateof the South, and in the force of Summer, whereby we mayiudge, in my opinion, that the farther a Countrie is distantfrom the course of the Sunne, the more cold it is. So woiinde by experience that the Countries and Regions whichapproach neerest to the North are coldest; and contrariwise, those that lie neere the Zodiake, where the Sunnekcepes his course, are most hot. For this cause Ethiopiapasseth Affrike and Barbaric in heate, Barbarie exceedesAndalousia, Audalousia Castile, and Arragoii surpassesBiscaie and Fraunce. And the more they decline to theNorth the colder they are ; and so by consequence, thosewhich approach neerest to the Sunne, and are beaten perpendicularly with his beanies, they do most feele the heatethereof. Some vrge another reason to this effect, which isthat the motion of the heaven is very sodaine and lighttowards the Tropikes, but neere the Poles it is slow andheavie, whereby they conclude that the region which theZodiake circles and conteines, is set on fire with heate forthree causes and reasons ; the one for the neerenes of theSunne, the other for that his beames reflect directly, and thethird for that it doth participate and feele this swift andsoJaine motion of the heaven. See what reason und dis- THE BURNING ZONE VERY MOIST. 75 course tcacheth vs, touching the cause of heat and cold Ll3> " vpoii the regions of the earth. But what shall we say of the two other qualities, wet and drie ? Even the same. For the drought seemes to grow by the neerenes of the Sunne, and moistnes, being retired farre off, for that the night being colder then the day, is likewise more moist ; and the day which is drier, is also hotter. Winter, whilst the Sun runnes his course farther off, is more cold and ramie, and Summer, when the Sunne is neere, is more hotte and drie ; for even as the fire hath the propertie to parch and burne, so hath it to drie vp the moistnes. These things therefore considered, Aristotle and other Philosophers at tribute vuto the regions of the South, which they call burnin 0-. an excessive heat and a drouth likewise. And there- O

• fore they said, this region is wonderfully scorched and drie ; and so by consequence hath neither waters nor pastures,

whereby of necessitie it must be contrarie and vnfit for mans life. CHAP. in. That the burning Zone is very moist, contrary to the opinion of the Ancients. All that we have propounded seemes vndoubtedly true, and to purpose; and yet the conclusion they would draw from it is directly false ; for that the Region of the South, which they call the burning Zone, is peopled and inhabited by men ; and wee our selves have stayed long there, beeing very commodious, pleasant, and agreeable. If, therefore, it be so, as we cannot denie it, that from a true proposition we cannot draw a false conclusion, and yet this conclusion should be false (as indeed it is), we must of necessitie re- turne backe the same way, to examine this proposition more strictly, and whence the error should proceede ; we will first shew the trueth, as assured experience doth teach vs, then 7(3 SEASONS OF GREATEST MOISTURE. LIB. ii. wju we p roove it, although it be verie difficult, and willendevour to give a reason, following the termes of Philosophic. The last point that wee propounded, that the droughtis greatest whenas the Sunne is neerest to the earth,seemeth certaine and infallible, and yet it is very false ; forthere is never greater aboundance of raine in the burningZone, then whenas the Sunne goeth directly over them, andis very neere. Truely, it is an admirable thing, and worthyobservation, that the ayre is most cleere, and without raynevnder this burning Zone, whenas the Sunne is farthest off;and contrariwise there is most rayne, snow, and mists,whenas the Sunne is neerest. Such as have not travelledin this new world, will haply thinke this incredible, anditwill seeme strange even vnto such as have beene there, ifthey have not well observed it ; but the one and the otherwill willingly yeeld, in noting the certaine experience ofthat which hath beene sayd of this part of Peru, which looksto the Southerne or Antartike Pole; the Sunne is thenfarthest off, when it is neerest vnto Europe, that is, in Maie,lune, luly, and August, whenas hee makes his course in theTropicke of Cancer. During which Moneths, the aire atPeru is very cleere and caline, neyther doth there fall anysnow or raine ; all their rivers fall much, and some are driedvp quite ; but as the yeere increaseth, and the Sunne approcheth neere vnto the Tropicke of Capricorne, then begins it to raine and to snow, and their Rivers swell fromOctober to December. Then after that the Sunne retyringfrom Capricorne, whenas his beames reflect directly vponthe heads of them of Peru, then is the violence of theirwaters great, then is the time of raine, snow, and greatoverflowings of their Rivers, when, as their heate is greatest,that is, from lanuarie to mid March ; this is so true andcertaine, as no man may contradict it. And at that timethe contrary is found in the Regions of the Pole Articke,beyond the Equinoctial!, which proceeds from the same SEASONS OF GREATEST MOISTURE. 77 reason. But let vs now looke into the temperature of LlB - " Panama and all that coast, as well of new Spaine, the Hands of Barlovent, Cuba, Hispaniola, Jamaica, as of S. lohn de Puerto Rico, wee shall, without doubt, finde that from the beginning of November vntill Aprill, they have the aire cleere and bright; the reason is, for that the Sunne passing by the Equinoctiall to the Tropicke of Capricorne, retyres from those Regions more then at any other time of the yeere. And contrariwise, they have violent showers and great swellings of water, whenas the Sunne returnes and is neerest vnto them, which is from June vnto September, for then his beames beate most vpon them. The like happens at the East Indies, as we learne daily by letters that come. So, as it is a generall rule, although in some places there is an exception, that in the Region of the South or burning Zone, which is all one, the aire is most cleere and driest, whenas the Sun is farthest off; and contrariwise when it approcheth, there is greatest rayne and humiditie j and even as the Sunne advanceth or retyreth little or much, even so the earth abounds or wants water and moisture. CHAP. iv. That in the Regions which be without the Tropicks there is greatest store of waters, whenas the Sunne is farthest off, contrary to that vnder the burning Zone. In Regions which lie without the Tropicks we see the con trary to that which hath beene spoken ; for that the rayne is mingled with cold, and the drought with heate, the which is well knowne in all Europe and the old world, as we see in the same manner in the new world, whereof the whole Kingdome of Chile is a witnesse, which lying without the Tropicke of Capricorne, and in the same height with Spaine, is subiect to the same lawes of Winter and Summer, but that Winter is there, whenas it is Summer in Spaine, being 78 OVERFLOWING OF THE Nlf.E. LIB. n. viider divers Poles. So as when it is cold in these Provinces, the waters are in great aboundance, which is, whenthe Sunne is farthest off, from the beginning of Aprill tothe end of September; finally, the disposition of seasonsislike to that in Europe, which is, that the heat and droughtcomes whenas the Sunne returnes, which is the cause thatthis Realme of Chile approcheth neerer the temperatureofEurope then any other of the Indies, as well in the fruitesof the earth as in the bodies and spirits of men. The likethey report of that part which lies before the Inner Ethiopia,that stretcheth out in manner of a point vnto the CapeBonne Esperance or Good Hope, the which they holde foratrue cause of the inundations of Nile, which bee in Summer,whereof the Ancients have so much disputed, for that inthat Region the Winter and raine begins in April, whenasthe Sunne hath passed Aries; and these waters, whichpartly grow from snow and partly from raine, assemble andmake great Lakes and Pooles, from whence by good andtrue Geographic the River of Nile proceedes, and by thismeanes goes by little and little stretching out her course,till that, having runne a long way, it finally, in the timeofSummer, overfloweth Egypt, which seemeth against nature,and yet it is certainely reported : for at what time it isSummer in Egypt, lying vnder the Tropicke of Cancer,then is it winter at the springes of Nile, which is vndcrthe other Tropicke of Capricorne. There is in Americaanother inundation like to that of Nile, at Paraguay, or Riverde la Plata, which is as much to say, as the River of silver,the which receiving yeerely infinite waters which fall fromthe Mountaines of Peru, doth so terribly swell in hercourse, and over-flowes that Region, as the Inhabitants areforced, during those Moneths, to retyre themselves intoboats and Canoes, and to leave the dwelling of the Land. SEASONS IN THE TROPICS. 79 CiiAr. v. That betwixt the two TropicJcs the greatest aboundance ofraitie is in Summer, with a discourse of Winter and Summer. To conclude, Summer is alwayes accompanied with hcate L.and drought_, in the two temperate Zones, and Winter with cold and moistnesse ; but vnder the burning Zone those qualities are not alike, for that raine accompanies heate, and drought folioweth the cold : I vnderstand by cold, want of excessive heat, so as Winter is taken in our Europe for the colde and raynie season, and summer for the hot and cleere season. Our Spaniards which live at Peru, and in newe Spaine, seeing these two qualities not to concurre to gether as in Spaine, call that season Winter, wherein there is greatest aboundance of raine and waters -, and Summer, where there is little or none at all : wherein they are plainely deceived, although they affirme by a generall rule, that in the Mountaines of Peru it is Summer from the Moneth of Aprill to September, for that the raine ceaseth in that season ; and that Winter is, from the moneth of September vnto Aprill, for that the showres returne then ; and therefore it is winter and summer at -the same time as in Spaine. So, as when the Sunne goeth directly over their heads, they then take it to be the depth of Winter, having greatest store of raine. But it is worthy to be laughed at, comming from ignorant men and vnlearned ; for even as the difference betwixt the day and night pro ceeds from the presence or absence of the Sunne in our hemisphere, according to the motion of the first motor, 1 which is the cause of day and night ; even so the difference which we see betwixt Winter and Summer proceeds from the neerenesse and distance of the Sunne, according to the motion of the said Sunne, which is the proper cause. To 1 u Seo im el movimiento del primer Mobil." 80 SEASONS IN PERU. LIB. ii. gpeake trueth then, it is Summer wlienas the Sunneisneerest, and Winter when it is farthest off. Both heateand coldnesse, and every other temperature, grovves ofnecessitie, by the neerenesse and distance of the sunne; but to raine, or not to raine, which is humiditie and drought,doe not necessarily follow. It is therefore easie to iudge,besides this vulgar opinion, that at Peru the Winteriscleere and without raine, and the Summer full of showres,and not otherwise, as many beleeve, that the winter is hotteand the summer cold. They fall into the like error, vponthe difference they make betwixt the Plaines and theMountaines of Peru, saying, that when it is summer vponthe mountaine, it is winter in the vallie, which is in April,Male, lune, luly, and August; for then the aire is verycleere vpon the mountaine, without any raine or mistes,and at the same season we commonly see fogges in theplaine, which they call cjarua, which is, as it were, a verygentle dew, wherewith the sunne is obscured. But winterand summer, as it is said, are caused by the neerenesse anddistance of the sunne. Seeing, then, that throughout allPeru, both vpon the Mountaines and on the Plaines, thesunne approcheth and retyreth in one sort, there is noreason to say, that when it is summer in one part, that itis winter in another; yet is it no matter of any importanceto contend vpon the signification of words. Let them termethem as they please, and call that summer when it rainesnot, although the heat be greater. But that whereuntowe must have greatest regard, is the trueth of the subiect,which is, that drought and want of raine is not alwaiesgreatest when the sunne approcheth neerest, as we see inthe burning Zone. ABUNDANCE OF WATER IN THE T1JOPICS. 81 CHAP. vi. That the burning Zone abounds with waters and pastures, against the opinion of Aristotle, wlio holds tlie contrarie. By the former Discourse wee may easily conceive that the LlB - TI> burning Zone is not drie, but abounding with waters ; the which is so true, as it exceeds all the Regions of the world for store of waters, except in some parts, where there are sands and desart Countries, as wee finde likewise in some other parts of the world. As for water from Heaven, wee have alreadie shewen that there is great aboundance of raine, snow, and haile, which especially abound in the kingdome of Peru. But as for land-waters, as rivers, fountaines, brookes, springs, floods, and lakes, I have not spoken thereof till now ; yet, being an ordinarie thing, that the waters be low have a correspondence with them above, wee must not imagine that there can bee any want : and in trueth there is so great store of springs and fountaines, as you shall not finde in any Region or Countrie of the world ; so many lakes, marishes, and such store of rivers, for the greatest part of America is almost uninhabitable through too great aboundance of waters ; for that the rivers, swelled with the great Raines in Summer, doe often overflow their banckes with such furie, as they breake all they incounter : and in many places they cannot passe, by reason of the mudde and myre of marishes and vallies : for this cause, those that live neere to Paraguay (whereof wee have made mention), fore seeing the rising of the River before it comes, put them selves and their goods into Canoes, and so preserve them selves and their goods, floating vp and downe, almost for the space of three moneths : and when the River is returned within her boundes, then they goe to their houses, still wette and dropping with the flood. And this River is so great, as Nile, Ganges, and Euphrates all together cannot \ 82 THE GEEAT RIVER AMAZONS. LlB - " equall it. But what shall we say of the great river of Magdalena, which falles into the sea betwixt S. Martha and Carthagena, and with reason is called the great river. Sailingin those parts, I was amazed to see her streame, which wasvery cleere, runne ten leagues into the sea, being in breadthabove two leagues, not mingling nor vanquished with theviolent waves of the Ocean. But if we shall speake moreofrivers, that great floud called by some the river of Amazons, by others Marafion, and by some the river of Orellana, which our Spaniards sailed in their discoveries, oughtto blemish all the rest ; and, in truth, I am in doubt whitherI may tearme it a river or a sea. It flowes from the tnountaines of Peru, from whence it receiues a great aboundanceof water, both of raine and of rivers, which it gathereth intoit; then passing by the great plaines of Paytiti, Dorado,and the Amazons, in the end it falles into the Ocean, almostright against the Hand of Marguerita and Trinidad.1 Ithath so large and broad a channel, specially in the lastthird part of her length, as it contains in it many greatHands. And that which seemes incredible, wliea you sailethrough the midst of it, you shall see nothing but aire andwater. They say, moreover, that from the midst you cannot see nor discover with the eye many great and highmountaines which are vpon the bankes, by reason of thegreat bredtli. We have learned from credible persons thegreat and wonderfull bredth of this river (which, in myopinion, deserves well the name of Empresse and Queeneof all flouds), which was by the report of a brother of ourcompany, who, being then yong, sailed it in the companyof Pedro de Ursua, with who nihee was present at all the1 Here there is confusion between the Amazon and Orinoco, derivedfrom the story of Aguirre. See my argument in favour of Aguirrehaving ascended the Rio Negro and come out by the Orinoco, in myIntroduction to the Search for El Dorado, p. xlvii. (Hakluyt Societysvolume, 1.861.) LAKE TITICACA. adventures of this strange entrie and discoverie ; and at the LTB- " seditious and pernitious acts of that wicked Diego de Aguirre, from the which God delivered him to place him in our com pany. Such are the rivers in that region, which they call the burning Zone, and the drie and parcht vp countrie, in the which Aristotle and the Ancients affirmed there were neither waters nor pastures. But seeing I have made men tion of the river of Marafion, to shew the abundance of the waters that are in the burning zone, it shall not be from the purpose to speake somewhat of that great Lake which they call Titicaca, which is in the midst of the Province of Collao. There are above ten great rivers which loose them selves entring into that Lake, and yet hath it no issue but one small current of water, 1 although some hold it to be very deepe, and of such a fashion, as it is impossible to build a bridge over it for the depth of the water, neither can they passe it by boate for the violence of the current. They passe it by an artificiall and notable practice, peculiar to the Indians, with a bridge of straw laied vpon the water, the which, being of so light i\ substance, sinkes not, and yet this passage is very easie and safe. This Lake containes almost foure score leagues, thirtie five in length, and fifteene in bredth at the largest place. There are many Hands which in olde time were inhabited and tilled, but now lie waste. It brings forth a great aboundance of reedes, which the Indians call totora, which serves them to a thousand vses ; for it is meate for swine, for horses, and for men; they make houses therewith, fire, and barkes. To conclude, the Uros in this their totora finde all they have neede of. These Uros be such dull and brutish people, as they esteeme not themselves men. It is reported of them, that being demanded of what nation they were, They an swered, they were not men, but Uros, as it were some kinde of beastes. There are whole villages of these Uros inhabit1 The river 84 RAIN CAUSED BY HEAT OF THE SUN. LlB - " ing in the Lake in their boates of tortora, the which aretied together and fastened to some rocke, and often timesthe whole village change th from place to place. So, as heethat would seeke them now whereas they were yesterday,shall finde no shew nor remainder of them, or of theirvillage. The current or issue of this Lake, having runneabove fiftie leagues, makes another Lake, but lesse then thefirst, which they call Paria, and containes in it some smallHands, but they finde no issue thereof. Some imagineitrunnes vnder the ground, and that it falles into the Southsea; giving out, that there is a branch of a river which theysee rise and enter into the sea neere the banke, havingnoknowledge of the Spring. But, contrariwise, I beleeve thatthe waters of this Lake dissolve and are dispearsed withinthe Lake it selfe, through the heate of the Sunne. Thisdiscourse seemes sufficient to prove that the Ancients hadno reason to holde that the middle region was uninhabitablefor the defect of waters, seeing there is such store bothfrom heaven and on the earth. CHAP. vn. Shewing tlie reason wh.y the Sunne without theTropicks causetli greatest quantitie of waters when it is farthest off; and contrariwise, within them it breedeth most when it is neerest. Considering with my selfe often times what should causethe Equinoctial to be so moist, as I have said, to refute theopinion of the Ancients, I finde no other reason but thegreat force of the sunne in those partes, whereby it drawesvnto it a great aboundance of vapors from out of the Ocean,which in those parts is very great and spatious ; and havingdrawne vnto it this great aboundance of vapours, doth suddenly dissolve them into raine, and it is approoved by manytryed experiences, that the raine and great storm es from EFFECT OF THE SUN ON VAPOUR. 85 heaven proceed from the violent heat of the Sunne ; first, as LlB - " we have said before, it raines in those countries whenas the Sunne casts his beames directly vpon the earth, at which time he hath most force : but when the Sun retyres, the heat is moderate, and then there falls no raine ; whereby we may conclude that the force and heat of the Sunne is the cause of raine in those Countries. Moreover, we observe, both in Peru, New Spaine, and in all the burning Zone, that the raine doth vsually fall in after-noone, when as the sunne- beames are in their greatest force, being strange to see it raine in the morning. And therefore travellers, fore-seeing it, begin their iourneys earely, that they may end and rest before noone, for they hold that commonly it raines after noone. Such as have frequented and travelled those Coun tries, can sufficiently speake thereof. And there are that (having made some abode there) say, that the greatest aboundance of raine is, when the Moone is at the full ; but, to say the trueth, I could never make sufficient proofe thereof, although I have observed it. Moreover, the dayes, the yeere, and the moneths, shew the trueth hereof, that the violent heate of the sunne causeth the raine in the burning Zone : experience teacheth vs the like in artificiall thinges, as in a Limbecke,1 wherein they draw waters from hearbs and flowers ; for the vehernencie of the fire forceth and driveth vp an aboundance of vapours, which being pressed, and finding no issue, are converted into liquor and water. The like wee see in gold and silver, which wee re fine with quicke-silver, the fire being small and slow, wee draw out almost nothing of the quicke-silver, but if it bee quicke and violent, it doth greatly evaporate the quick silver, which incountring the head above, doth presently turne into liquor, and begins to drop downe. Even so the violent heate of the sunne produceth these two effects, when it finds matter disposed, that is, to draw vp the 1 " Alquitares y alambiques." Both words mean a still. 86 EFFECT OF THE SUN ON VAPOURS. Ll!J - " vapours on high, and to dissolve them presently, and turnethem into raine, when there is any obstacle to consumethem. And although these things seeme contrary, that onesunne within the burning Zone, being neere, should causeraine, and without the Zone afarre off should breed the likeeffect ; so it is, that all well considered, there is no contrarietie. A thousand effects in naturall causes proceede ofcontrarie things by divers meanes : we drie linnen by thefire and in the aire, and yet the one heats and the othercooles ; pastures are dried and hardened by the sunne andwith the frost; moderate exercise provokes sleepe, beingtoo violent, it hmdereth : if you lay no wood on the fire, itdieth ; if you lay on too much, it likewise quencheth : forthe onely proportion entertaines and makes it to continue.To well discerne a thing, it must not be too neere the eie,nor too farre off, but in a reasonable distance proportionable ; being too farre off from any thing, we loose the sight,and too neere likewise, we cannot see it. If the sunnebeames be weake, they draw vp no fogge from the rivers; if they be violent, having drawne vp the vapours, they presently dissolve and consume them ; but if the heat bemoderate, it drawes vp and preserves it : for this reasonthe vapours rise not commonly in the night, nor at noone,but in morning, whenas the sunne begins to enter into hisforce. There are a thousand examples of naturall causesvpon this subiect, which we see do often grow from contrarie things : whereby we must not wonder if the sunne,being neere, engenders raine, and being farre off, works thelike effect : but being of a moderate and proportionable distance, causeth none at all. Yet there remaines one doubtwhy the neerenes of the sunne causeth the raine vnder theburning Zone, and without, when it is farthest off. In myopinion, the reason is, that in Winter, without the Tropicks,the sunne hath not force sufficient to consume the vapourswhich rise from the land and sea ; for these vapours grow EFFECTS OF HEAT ON MOTSTUEE. 87 in great aboundance in the cold region of the aire, where LlB - " they are congealed and thickened by the extremitie of the cold ; and after being pressed, they dissolve and turne into water. Therefore, in Winter, when the sunne is farthest off, the daies short, and the nights long, his heat hath small force : but when the sunne approacheth, which is in the summer time, his force is such as it drawes vp the vapors, and suddenly consumes and disperseth them ; for the heat and the length of the daies grow through the neerenes of the sunne. But within the Tropickes, vnder the burning Zone, the far distance of the sunne workes the same effects that the neerenes doth without the Tropiks ; by reason whereof, it raines no more vnder the burning Zone when the sunne is farre off, then without the Tropicks when it is neerest, for that in this approaching and retyring, the sunne remaines alwaies in one distance, whence proceedes this effect of cleerenes. But when the sunne is in the period of his force in the burning zone, and that he cast his beames directly vpon the inhabitants heads, there is neither cleerenes nor drienes, as it seems there should be, but rather great and strange showers ; for that by this violent heat he drawes vp suddenly a great aboundance of vapours from the Earth and Ocean, which are so thicke, as the winde, not able easily to disperse them, they melt into water, which breedeth the cold raine in so great abound ance : for the excessive heat may soone draw vp many vapours, the which are not so soone dissolved : and being gathered together through their great aboundance, they inelt and dissolve into water. The which we may easily discerne by this familiar example : rost a peece of porke, mutton, or veale ; if the fire be violent and the meate neere, we see the fatte melts suddenly and droppes away; the reason is, that the violent heat drawes forth the humour and fatte from the meate, and being in great aboundance, cannot dissolve it, and so it distills more away. But when DEY REGIONS IN THE TROPICS. LIB. it. fjie re j s mo^erate, and the meat in an equall distance,, wesee that it rostes hansomely, and the fatte drops not toosuddenly, for that the moderate heat drawes out the moist-ncs which it consumes suddenly. And therefore Cookesmake a moderate fire, and lay not their meate too neere nortoo farre off, lest it melt away. The like may be seene inanother experience, in candles of tallow or waxe : if the wikeLee great, it melts the tallow or the waxe, for that the heatcannot consume the moistnes which riseth ; but if the flamebe proportionable, the waxe melts nor droppes not, for thatthe flame doth waste it by little and little as it riseth. Thewhich seemeth to me the true reason, why vnder the Equi-- noctiall and burning Zone, the violence of the heat dothcause raine, the which in other Regions growes throughwant thereof. CHAP. vin. How wee should vnderstand that which hathbeen formerly spoken of the burning Zone. If in naturall and phi si call things we must not seeke outinfallible and mathematicall rules, but that which is ordi-narie and tried by experience, which is the most perfectrule, wee must then beleeve what wee have said, that thereis more humiditie vnder the burning Zone then in otherRegions ; and that it raines lesse there, when the sunne is iieerest, must be taken and vnderstood after one sort, as intruth it is the most common and ordinarie. But this is notto hinder the exceptions which nature hath given to thisrule, making some Regions of the burning Zone extreamelydrie. The which is reported of Ethiopia, and wee haveseene it in a great part of Peru, where all that land orcoast, which they call llanos, wants raine, yea, land waters,except some vallies, where rivers fall from the mountaines; the rest is a sandie and barren soile, where you shall hardly MODERATE HEAT IN THE TROPICS. 89 finde any springs, but some deepe welles. But with the LlB - IT - helpe of God, wee will shew the reason why it raineth not in these llanos (the which many demand) ; for now I onely pretend to shew that there are many exceptions to naturall rules, whereby it may happen that in some part of the burning Zone it raines not when the sunne is neerest, but being farthest off, although vnto this daie I have neither seene nor heard of it ; but if it be so, wee must attribute it to the particular qualitie of the earth ; and also, if sometimes the contrarie doth chance, we must have regard that in naturall things there happens many contrarieties and lets, whereby they change and dissolve one another. For example, it may be the sunne will cause raine, and that the winds will hinder it, or else cause more aboundance then hath been vsuall. The windes have their properties and divers beginnings, by the which they worke divers effects, the which are most commonly contrarie to that which the order and season requires. Seeing then in all places we see great varieties in the yeere, which proceedes from the divers motions and aspectes of Planets, it is not out of purpose to say, that in the burning Zone wee may see and observe some things contrarie to that we have tried. But to con clude, that which we have spoken is a certaine and vn- doubted truth, which is, that the great draught which the Ancients held to be in the middle region, which they call the burning Zone, is nothing at all ; but, contrariwise, there is great humiditie, and then it raines most when the sunne is iieerest. CHAP. ix. That the Burning Zone is not violently liotte, but moderate. Hitherto wee haue treated of the humiditie of the Burning Zone, now it shall be fit to discourse of the other two 90 MODERATE HEAT IN THE TROPICS. LIB. ir. qualities, Hotte and Colde. We have shewed in the be ginning of this Discourse how the Ancients held that theburning Zone was hotte and exceeding drie, the which is not so ; for it is hote and moist, and in the greatest partthe heat is not excessive, but rather moderate, which somewould hold incredible, if we had not tried it. WhenI passed to the Indies, I will tell what chaunced vnto mee: having read what Poets and Philosophers write of theburning Zone, I perswaded my selfe, that comming to theEquinoctiall, I should not indure the violent heate, but it fell out otherwise ; for when I passed, which was when thesun was there for Zenith, being entered into Aries, in themoneth of March, I felt so great cold, as I was forced to gointo the sunne to warme me ; what could I else do then, butlaugh at Aristotle s Meteors and his Philosophic, seeing thatin that place and at that season, whenas all should bescorched with heat, according to his rules, I, and all mycompanions were a colde? In truth, there is no region in the world more pleasant and temperate, then vnder theEquinoctiall, although it be not in all parts of an equall temperature, but have great diversities. The burning Zone in some parts is very temperate, as in Quito, and on the coast plaines of Peru ; in some partes verie colde, as at Potosi ; andin some very hote, as in Ethiopia, Bresill, and the Moluccas.This diversitie being knowne, and cortaine vnto vs, wemust of force seeke out another cause of cold and heatthen the sunne beanies, seeing that in one season of theyeere, and in places of one height and distance from thePole and Equinoctiall, we finde so great diversitie, that some are invironed with heat, some with cold, and others piato m tempered with a moderate heat. Plato placeth his mostTim. and critia. renowned Atlantis Hand vnder the burning Zone ; then hesaieth, that at certaine seasons of the yeere it hath thesunne for Zenith, and yet it was very temperate, fruitfull, vCc. i^ and rich. Plinie saieth, that Taprobana, which at this day HEAT TEMPERED BY EAIN. 91 they call Sumatra, is vnder the Equinoctiall, as in effect it LlB - " is, writing, that it is not onely happie and rich, but also peopled with men and beasts ; whereby we may easily iudge, that although the Ancients held the heate of the burning Zone to be insupportable, yet might they well vnderstand that it was not so great as they had spoken. The most excellent Astrologer and Cosmographer, Ptolemy, and the worthie Philosopher and Physitian, Avicen, were of a better resolution, being both of opinion that vnder the Equinoctiall, there were verie commodious habitations. CHAP. x. TJiat the heat of the burning Zone is temperate, by reason of the rayne and the shortnes of the dayes. Since the discoverie of this newe worlde, wee have found by experience that which late Writers have held for trueth. But it is a naturall thing, whenas any matter beyond our conceit is made knowne vnto vs by experience, we by and by examine the cause. Therefore wee desire to know the reason why a Region where the sunne approacheth neerest, is not onely temperate, but in many parts cold. Con sidering this matter generally, I finde two general causes which maketh this Region temperate ; the one is that before mentioned, for that this Region is very moist and subiect to raine, and there is no doubt but the rayne doth refresh it, -for that the water is by nature cold ; and although by the force of the fire it be made hotte, yet doth it tem per this heat proceeding onely from the sunne-beames. The which we see by experience in the inner Arabia, the which is burnt with the Sunne, having no showres to temper the violence thereof. The cloudes and mists are the cause that the sunne offends not so much, and the showers that fall from them refresh both the ayre and the earth, and moisten likewise, how hot soever it be. They 92 LENGTH OP DAYS AND NIGHTS. LIB. it. drinke raine water, and it quencheth the thirst,, as our menhave well tried, having no other to drinke. So, as reasonand experience doth teach vs, that raine of it selfe dothtemper the heat ; and having by this meanes shewed that the burning Zone is much subiect vnto raine, it appearesthat there is matter in it to temper the violence of the heat. To this I will adde an other reason, which deserves to be knowne, not only for this matter, but for many others; for although the Sunne be very hotte and burning vnderthe Equinoctial!, yet is it not long, so as the heate of the daybeing there shorter, and of lesse continuance, it causeth not so violent a heate ; the which it behooves to specific moreparticularly. Such as are practised in the knowledge of the Spheare teach very well, that the more the Zodiake is oblique and traversing our Hemisphere, the more vnequall are the daies and nights ; and contrariwise, where the sphere is straight, and the signes mount directly, there the dayes and nights are equall. And therefore in all that Region which is betweene the two Tropicks, there is lesse inequality then without them, and the more we approachthe Line, the lesse inequalitie we finde, the which we havetryed in those parts. Those of Quito, for that they are vnder the line, have not throughout the whole yeere the daycs and nights more short at one season then at an other, but are continually equall. Those of Lima beeing distant almost twelve degrees, finde some distance betwixt the dayes and the nights, but very little, for that in December andlanuarie, the dayes increase an houre or little lesse. Thoseof Potosi finde much more difference, both in winter and in summer, being almost under the Tropicke. But those that live without the Tropikes, find the dayes in winter shorter, and in summer longer; the more remote they are from the Equinoctial and come neere the Pole, as we see in Germanyand in England the daies are longer in summer then in Italic and Spaine. It is a thing which the Sphere doth CAUSES FOR MODERATE HEAT IN THE TROPICS. 93 teach, and experience doth plainely shew vs. We must LlB> " adde an other proposition, which is likewise true and very considerable for all the effectes of nature to vnderstand the perseverance and continuation of the efficient cause to worke and moove. This presupposed, if any one demaund of me, why vnder the Equinoctiall Line the heat is not so violent in summer as in some other Regions (as in Anda lusia in the moneths of luly and August), I will answere, that in Andalusia the dayes are longer, and the nights shorter; and as the day being hot, inflames and causeth heat, so the nights being cold and moist, give a refreshing. According to the which, at Peru, there is no such great heat, for that the dayes in summer are not long, nor the nights short ; so as the heate of the day is much tempered by the freshnesse of the night. And although the burning Zone be neerer the Sunne then all other Regions, yet doth not the heate continue there so long. It is a naturall thing that a small fire continued, heats more then a greater that lastes but little, especially if there bee any thing to refresh it. He therefore that shal put these two properties of the Zone in one ballance, that it is most rainie in the time of greatest heate, and that the dayes are shortest there, he shall perchance finde them to equall the other two con trarieties, which bee, that the Sunne is neerer and more directly over them then in other Regions. CHAP. xi. That there be other reasons besides the former mentioned, ivliich sheiv that the burning Zone is tempe rate, especially alongst the Ocean. Being a thing concluded, that the two forenamed proper ties are common and vniversal to all the region of the burning Zone : and yet in the same there are found some places very hote, and other exceeding colde ; Also, that tlio 94 CAUSES FOE A TEMPEEATE CLIMATE LIB. it. temperature is not there equall in all places, but vnder oneclimate, one part is hote, another colde, and the third temperate, all at one season ; we are forced to seeke outother reasons, whence this great diversitie should proceedein the burning Zone. Discoursing therefore vpon this question, I do finde three apparant and certaine causes, anda fourth more obscure and darke. The apparant andcertaine causes be : The first is the Ocean, the secondthe scituation of the land, and the third, the nature andpropertie of many and sundry windes. Besides these threewhich I holde for manifest, I beleeve there is a fourthhidden and lesse apparant, which is the propertie of thesame land inhabited, and the particular influence of theheavens. Whoso woulde neerely consider the causes andgenerall reasons before mentioned, shall finde them insuffi cient for the full resolution of this point, observing that which daily happens in diverse partes of the Equinoctial!. Manomotapa, 1 and a great part of the kingdom of Presterlean3 are seated vnder the line, or very neere. In whichregions they endure excessive heate, and the men are all blacke ; the which is not onely in those parts of the landfarre from the sea, but also in Hands invironed with thesea. The Hand of Saint Thomas is vnder the Line, theHands of Cape Verd are very neere, and both in the oneand the other are violent heates j and the men are likewiseblacke. Vnder the same line, or very neere, lies a part ofPeru, arid of the new kingdome of Granada, which not withstanding are very temperate Countries, inclining rather to colde then heate, and the inhabitants are white. TheCountry of Bresill is in the same distance from the line with Peru, and yet both Bresill and all that coast is ex- treamely hot, although it be in the North sea, and the othercoast of Peru, which is in the South sea, is very temperate.I say then, that whosoever would consider these differences, 1 On the cast side of Africa. 2 Abyssinia. WITHIN THE TROPICS. 9o . and give a reason thereof, cannot content himselfe with LlB - " these generall rules before specified, to proove that the burning Zone may be a temperate land. Among the speciall causes and reasons, I have first placed the Sea, for without doubt, the neerenesse thereof doth helpe to temper and coole the heat ; for although the water be salt, yet is it alwayes water, whose nature is cold, and it is a thing re- markeable, that in the depth of the Ocean, the water can not be made hot by the violence of the Sunne, as in rivers ; finally, even as salt-peeter (though it be of the nature of salt) hath a propertie to coole water, even so we see by ex perience, that in some ports and havens, the salt-water doth refresh ; the which wee have observed in that of Callao, whereas they put the water or wine which they drinke, into the Sea in flaggons to be refreshed, whereby wee may vndoubtedly finde, that the Ocean hath this propertie, to temper and moderate the excessive heate ; for this cause we feele greater heat at land then at sea, Cceteris paribus ; and commonly Countries lying neere the sea, are cooler then those that are farther off. Oceteris paribus, as I have said, even so the greatest part of the new world, lying very neere the Ocean, wee may with reason say, although it bee vnder the burning Zone, yet doth it receive a great benefite from the sea to temper the heat. CHAP. xn. That the highest landes arc tlie coldest, and tJte reason thereof. Bvt if we shall yet search more particularly, we shall not finde in all this land an equall temperature of heate, although it be in equall distance from the sea, and in the same degree, seeing that in some partes there is great heate, and in some, very little. Doubtlesse, the cause thereof is, that the one is lower, and the other higher ; which causeth that 96 LOFTY REGIONS ARE THE COLDEST. LIB. ii. }ie one jg h t ej an(j the other colde. It is most certaine,that the toppes of the mountaines are colder then in thebottome of the vallies, the which proceedes, not onely tha.t the sunne beames have greater repercussions vpon lowerplaces, although it be a great reason ; yet there is an other,which is, that the Region, of the ayre is colder when it is farthest from the ground. The Plaines of Collao in Peru, ofPopayan, and of new Spaine make sufficient proofe hereof.For without al doubt those parts are high countries, andfor this reason cold, although they be all invironed withhigh points of mountaines, much subiect to the Sunnebeames. But if we demand why at Peru, and in newSpaine, the Plaines along the coast be very hote, and theplaines of the same Countries of Peru and new Spaine becontrariwise colde ? In truth I see no other reason can begiven, but that the one is a lowe country, and the otherhigh. Experience dooth teach vs, that the middle regionof the ayre is colder than the neather. And therefore themore the mountaines approach to the middle, the colderthey are, being covered with snow and frosts. Reason it selfe dooth yeelde to it. For if there be a sphere andregion of fire, as Aristotle and the other Philosophers say,the middle region of the ayre must be most colde, by Antiparistasis, the colde being expelled and thickned there, as insummer time we see in wells that are very deepe. For thiscause the Philosophers affirme, that the two extreameregions of the ayre, that above and the other belowe, arethe hottest, and the middle region more colde. If it bethus, as experience doth teach vs, we shall yet draw outanother reason and notable argument to shew that theburning Zone is temperate, which is, that the greatest partof the Indies is a high countrey, filled with many mountaines, which by their neerenesse refresh the neighbourcountries. You may continually see vppon the toppes ofthese mountaines, snow, haile and frozen waters ; and the NATURE OF THE ELEMENTS. 97 cold so bitter, as the grasse is all withered, so as the men LlB> " and beasts which passe that way are benummed with colde. This, as I have saide, is in the burning Zone ; and it hap pens most commonly when they have the sunne for zenith. Tt is therefore most certaine and conformable vnto reason, that the mountaines are colder than the vallies and plaines, for that they participate more of the middle region of the aire, which is very colde. The cause why the middle region of the ayre is more colde, hath bin shewed before ; for that the region of the aire next to the fiery exhalation, the which (according to Aristotle) is vpon the spheare of the aire, repells and thrustes backe all the colde, the which retires itself into the middle region of the aire, by Antiparistasis, as the Philosophers speake. Now if any one should question with me in this manner if it be so, that the ayre is hot and moist, as Aristotle holdes, and as we commonly say, whence then proceeds the cold which is congealed in the middle region of the ayre, seeing it cannot come from the fierie spheare ? For if it come from the water or the earth, by Anst. Me. this reason the lower region of the aire should be colder than the middle. To answer truely what I thinke, I will confesse that this Argument and Obiection is so difficult as I am almost ready to follow the opinion of such as reproove the qualities, agree ments, and disagreements which Aristotle gives vnto the Elements, saying they are but imaginations, who for this occasion hold the aire to be colde by nature. And to this end they vse many arguments and reasons, whereof we will propound one very familiar and well knowne, leaving the rest aparte. In the canicular dayes we are accustomed to beate the ayre with a fanne, and we finde that it doth refresh us; so as these Authors affirnie that heate is no private property of any other Element but of fire only, which is dis persed and mingled with all things (as the great Dionysius cionys. c. doth teach us). But whether it be so or otherwise (for I 98 THE COOL WINDS TEMPER THE TEOPICAL HEAT. LIB. H. w -}} noj. coutradict Aristotle, but in that which is mostcertaine), in the end they agree all that the middle regionof the ayre is colder than the lowest next to the earth, asexperience dooth shew vs, seeing that in this middle regionare congealed snowe, haile, frosts, and other signes ofextreame colde. The middle region then, which they callthe burning Zone, having on the one side the sea and onthe other the mountaines, we must hold them for sufficientcauses to temper and coole the heate. CHAP. xin. That the colde windes be the principall causetomake the burning Zone temperate. The temperature of this region ought chiefly to be attributed to the property of the wind that blows in that country,the which is pleasant and fresh. The providence of thegreat God, Creator of al things, hath bin such as he hathordained fresh and coole windes in that region where thesunne makes his course (which seernes should be burnt vp),that by their coolenes the excessive heate of the sunne mightbe qualified. And they are not farre from appearance ofreason, which held that the earthly Paradise was vnder theEquinoctiall. If they had not deceived themselves in thecause of their opinion, saying that the equalitie of the dayesand nights was sufficient of it selfe to make that Zone temperate, to which opinion many others have beenc opposite,of which number was that renowned Poet, saying " That coast incessantly by hotte beames tyred Of Phoebus, who from thence never retyred." 1 The coolenesse of the night then is not sufficient to mode1 " Y a quella parte Esta siempre de un Sol bravo encendida Sin que fuego jamas della se aparta," EFFECT OF WINDS IN THE TROPICS. 99 rate and to correct the violent lieate of the Sunne, but rather LlB - IT - this burning Zone receives so sweet a temperature by the benefite of the fresh and pleasant aire, as, notwithstanding it were held by the Ancients to be more hotte then a burn ing furnace, yet those which inhabite there take it for a delightfull spring. It appeares by arguments and very apparant reasons that the cause heereof consistes principally in the qualitie of the winde. We see in one climate some regions and Citties hotter then others, onely for that they feele lesse wiade to refresh them. The like is in other Countries where no winde blowes, the which are all on fire like vnto a furnace. There are many of these Villages and Townes in Bresill, Ethiopia, and Paraguay, as every one knoweth; and that which is more considerable, wee see these differences, not only on the Land, but also on the Sea. There are some seas where they feele great heat, as they report of that of Mozambique and Ormus in the East, and of the Sea of Panama in the West, the which for this reason engenders and brings forth great Lizards (called Cayamans), as also in the sea of Bresill. There are other seas in the same degree of height very colde, as that of Peru, in the which wee were a cold, as I have said before, when we first sailed it, which was in March, when the Sunne was directly over vs. In truth, on this continent, where the land and sea are of one sort, wee cannot imagine any other cause of this so great a difference but the qualitie of the winde which doth refresh them. If wee shall iieerely look into the considera tion of the winde, whereof we have spoken, wee may resolve many doubts which some obiect, and which seeme strange and wonderful!. Wherefore the Sunne casting his beames vppon the burning Zone, and particularly at Peru, and that more violently then in Spaine in the Canicular daies, yet they defend the heat with a light covering, so as with a slender covering of mats or straw they are better preserved from the heate then in Spaine vnder a roofe of wood or a 100 LAND AND SEE BEEEZES. LIB. ii. vauit Of s tone. Moreover, why are not the nightes insummer at Peru as hotte and troublesome as in Spaine ? Wherefore on the highest tops of mountaines, even amongstthe heaps of snow, you shall sometimes feele great and in supportable heat ? Wherefore in all the Province of Collao,when ye come into the shade, how little soever, you feele colde, but,, comming into the Sunne beames, you presentlyfinde the heate excessive ? Why is all the coast of Peru,being ful of sands, very temperate ? And why is Potosi(distant from the silver Citie but eighteene leagues, and inthe same degree) of so divers a temperature that the Countrie, being extreamely colde, it is wonderfully barren anddrie ? And contrariwise, the silver Citie is temperate, in clining vnto heat, and hath a pleasant and fertil soil ? Itis more certaine that the winde is the principall cause ofthese strange diversities, for without the benefite of thesecoole windes the heate of the Sunne is such as (although it bee in the midst of the snow) it burnes and sets all on fire ; but when the coolenes of the aire returnes suddenly the heatis qualified, how great soever it be ; and whereas this coolewinde raincs ordinarie, it keepes the grosse vapours and exhalations of the earth from gathering together, which causea heavie and troublesome heat, whereof we see the contrariein Europe, for by the exhalation of these vapours the earthis almost burnt vp with the Sunne by day, which makes thenights so hotte and troublesome, as the aire doth often seemelike vnto a furnace. For this reason, at Peru, this freslmcsof the winde is the cause (by the meanes of some smallshade at the Sunne setting) that they remaine coole. Butcontrariwise in Europe the most agreeable and pleasingtime in summer is the morning, and the evening is themost hotte and troublesome. But at Peru, and vnder all the Equinoctiall it is not so ; for every morning the windefrom the sea doth cease, and the Sunne beginnes to casthis beanies, and for this reason they feele the greatest heat IMPORTANCE OF PURE AIR. 101 in the morning, vntill the returne of the same windes, which LlB - " otherwise they call the tide or winde of the sea, which makes them first to feele cold. We have tried al this whilst we were at the Hands of Barlovente, where in the mornings we did sweat for heat, and at noone we felt a fresh aire, for that then a north-easterly wind, which is fresh and coole, doth commonly blow. CHAP. xiv. That they which inhabite vnder the Equinoctiall, live a sweete and pleasant life. If those which have held opinion, that the earthly Paradice was vnder the Equinoctiall, had beene guided by this discourse, they had not seemed altogether deceived, not Biues, lib. that I will conclude that the delightfull Paradice, whereof emit., c. 21.the Scripture speakes, was in that place, which were too great a temeritie to affirme it for certaine. But I may well say, if there be any Paradice on earth it ought to bee placed whereas they inioy a sweete and quiet temperature; for there is nothing more troublesome or repugnant to mans life, then to live vnder a heaven or aire that is contrarie, troublesome or sicklie ; as there is nothing more agreeable then to inioy a heaven that is sound, sweet and pleasant. It is certaine that we do not participate of any of the Elements, nor have not the vse of any so often in our bodies as of the aire. It is that which invironeth our bodies on all parts, which enters into our bowells, and at everie instant visits the heart, and there ingraves her properties. If the aire be anything corrupted, it causeth death ; if it be pure and healthfull, it augmenteth the strength ; finally, we may say, that the aire alone is the life of man ; so, as although we have goods and riches, if the aire be trouble some and vnholesome, wee cannot live quietly nor with content. But if the aire be healthfull, pleasant, and sweete, 102 A HEALTHY LIFE POSSIBLE IN THE TROPICS. LlB - " although we have no other wealth, yet doth it yeelde con tent. Considering with my selfe the pleasing temperatureof many Countries at the Indies, where they know not whatwinter is,, which by his cold doth freese them, nor summerwhich doth trouble them with heat, but that with a Mattethey preserve themselves from the iniuries of all weather, and where they scarce have any neede to change their gar ments throughout the yeere. I say, that often considering of this, I find that if men at this day would vanquish their passions, and free themselves from the snares of covetousnesse, leaving many fruitelesse and pernicious disseines, without doubt they might live at the Indies very pleasant and happily ; for that which other poets sing of the Elisean fields and of the famous Tempe, or that which Plato reports or faines of his Atlantis Hand, men should finde in these lands, if with a generous spirit they would choose rather to command their silver and their desires then to remaineslaves as they are. That which wee have hitherto discoursed shal suffice touching the qualities of the Equinoctiall, ofcolde, heat, drought, raine, and the causes of temperature.The particular discourse of windes, waters, landes, mettalls, plants, and beasts (whereof there is great aboundance at the Indies), shall remaine for the other bookes. The difficultie of that which is handled in this, though briefly, will haplymake it seeine tedious. 103 Ail advertisement to the Reader. The Eeader mvst vnderstand, that I wrote the two first bookes in Latine, when I was at Peru, and therefore they speake of matters of the Indies, as of things present : Being since returned into Spaine, I thought good to translate them into our vulgar tongue, and not to change my former maner of speeach. But in the five following bookes, for that I made them in Europe, I have beene forced to change my stile, and therein to treate of matters of the Indies, as of Countries and things absent. And for that this diversitie of speech might with reason offend the Reader, I have thought good to advertise him thereof. THE THIRD BOOKEOf the Naturall and Morall Historic of theIndies. CHAP. i. That the naturall Historic of the Indies is pleasantand agreeable. LIB. in. EVEEIE naturall Historic is of it selfe pleasing, and very~~ profitable, to such as will raise vp their discourse and con templation on high, in that it doth move them to glorify the Author of all nature, as we see the wise and holy menpsai. cm, do, specially David in many Psalmes. And lob likewise, cxxxv, xci, -I Ji xxxii, xviii, treating1 of the secrets of the Creator, whereas the sameviii. jobxxviii, Lord answereth lob so amplie. He that takes delight to xli- ] vriderstand the wondrous works of Nature shal taste the

• true pleasure and content of Histories ; and the more,whenas he shal know they are not the simple workes ofmen, but of the Creator himself, and that he shall comprehend the naturall causes of these workes, then shall he truly

occupie himselfe in the studie of Philosophic. But he that shall raise his consideration higher, beholding the gret andfirst architect of all these marvells, he shal know his wiscdom and infinite greatnes, and (we may say) shall be divinely iniployed. And so the discourse of naturall things mayserve for many good considerations, although the feeblenesand weakenes of many appetites are commonly accustomedto stay at things lesse profitable, which is the desire to know new things, called curiositie. The Discourse andHistoric of naturall things of the Indies (besides the common content it gives) hath yet another benefite, which is to treate of things n farre off, the greatest parte whereof were THE WINDS. 105 vnknowne to the most excellent Authors of that profession LlB - m- which have bin among the Ancients. And if wee should write these naturall things of the Indies so amply as they require, being so strange, I doubt not but we might com pile works no lesse than those of Plinie, Theophrastus, and Aristotle. But I hold not my selfe sufficient, and although I were, yet is not my intent but to note some naturall things which I haue seene and knowne being at the Indies, or have received from men worthy of credit, the which seeme rare to me and scarce known in Europe. By reason whereof I will passe over many of them briefly, ether bicause they are writen of by others, or else require a longer dis course then I can now give. CHAP. n. Of the windes, their differences, properties, and causes in generall. Having discoursed in the two former Books of that which concernes the heavens, and the habitation of the Indies in generall, it behooves vs now to treate of the three elements : aire, water, and land, and their compounds, which be mettalls, plants, and beasts ; for, as for the fire, I see no speciall matter at the Indies which is not in other regions ; vnlesse some will say, that the manner to strike fire in rubbing two stones one against another, as some Indians vse, or to boyle any thing in gourdes, casting a burning stone into it, and other such like things, are remarkable, whereof I have written what might be spoken. But of those which are in the Yulcans1 and mouths of fire at the Indies, worthy doubtlesse to be observed, I will speake in their order, treat ing of the diversitie of grounds, whereas they finde these fires or Vulcans. Therefore, to beginne with the winds, I say, that with good reason, Salomon, in the great iudgement 1 Volcanos. 106 THE WINDS. LIB. in. whicn God had given him, esteernes much the knowledge of~ the windes, and their properties, being very admirable ; for that some are moyst, others drie, some vnwholesome, otherssound, some hote, others colde, some calme and pleasant,others rough and tempestuous, some barren, and othersfertile, with infinite other differences. There are somewindes which blow in certaine regions, and are, as it were,Lordes thereof, not admitting any entry or communicationI of their contraries. In some partes they blow in that sorte, J as sometimes they are Conquerors, sometimes conquered;often there are divers and contrary winds, which doe runnotogether at one instant, dividing the way betwixt them,sometimes one blowing above of one sort, and another below of another sorte ; sometimes they incounter violentlyone with another, which puts them at sea in great danger: there are some windes which helpe to the generation ofcreatures, and others that hinder and are opposite. Thereis a certaine wind, of such a quality, as when it blowes insome country, it causeth it to raine fleas, and in so greataboundaunce, as they trouble and darken the aire, and coverall the sea shoare : and in other places it raines frogges.These diversities, and others which are sufficiently knowne,are commonly attributed to the place by the which thesewindes passe. For they say, that from these places theytake their qualities to be colde, hote, drie, or moyst, sickly, orsound, and so of the rest, the which is partly true, and cannot be denied ; for that in a small distance you shall see inone winde many diversities. For example, the Solanusor Easterne winde is commonly hote and troublesome inSpaine ; and in Murcia it is the coolest and healthfullesfc that is, for that it passeth by gardens, and that largechampairie which wee see very fresh. In Carthagena,which is not farre from thence, the same winde is trouble some and vnwholesome. The meridionall (which they ofthe Ocean call South, and those of the Mediterranean sea, THE WINDS. 107 Mezo giorno) commonly is raynie and boisterous, and in the LlB - IIJ - same Citie whereof I speak, it is wholesome and pleasant. Plinie reports that in Affricke it raines with a Northerne winde, and that the Southerne winde is cleere. Hee, then, that shall well consider what I have spoken of these windes, may conceive, that in a smal distance of land or sea one winde hath many and diverse qualities, yea some times quite contrary whereby we may inferre that he draweth his property from the place where he passeth, the which is in such sort true (although we may not say infallibly), as it is the onely and principall cause of the diversitie of the windes. For in a single region containing fiftie leagues in circuite (I putte it thus for an example), it may clearly be seen that the winde which blowes of the one parte is hote and moist, and that which blowes on the other is colde and drie. Notwithstanding this diversitie is not found in places by which it passeth, the which makes mee rather to say that the windes bring these qualities with them, whereby they give vnto them the names of these qualities. For example, we attribute to the Northerne winde, otherwise called Cier^o, the property to be colde and drie, and to dissolve mists ; to the Southerne wind, his contrary, called Leveche, wee attribute the con trary qualitie, which is moist and hote, and ingenders mists. This being generall and common, we must seeke out another vniversall cause to give a reason of these effects. It is not enough to say that the places by which they passe give them these qualities, seeing that passing by the same places we see contrary effects. So as we must of force confesse that the region of the heaven where they blowe gives them these qualities, as the Septentrionall is colde, because it commes from the North, which is the region farthest from the Sunne. The Southerne, which blows from the Midday or South, is hote, and for that the heate drawes the vapours. It is also moist and raynie, and contrariwise the north is drie 108 THE WINDS. LIB. in. an(j subtile, for that it suffereth no vapours to congeale. Andin this manner wee may discourse of other windes, givingthem the qualities of the region where they blowe. But,looking more precisely into it, this reason can not satisfieme. I will therefore demaund, What doth the region ofthe aire by which they passe, if it doth not give them theirqualities ? I speake it for that in Germanie the Southernewinde is hote and moist, and in Affrike the Northerne is cold and drie. Notwithstanding it is most certaine that inwhat region soever of Germanie the Southerne winde is ingendred, it must needes be more cold then any part ofAffrike where the Northerne is ingendred. And if it be so, why is the Northerne winde more cold in Affrike then theSoutherne in Germany, seeing it proceeds from a hotterregion ? Some may answer me that the reason is for thatit blowes from the North, which is colde j but this is neithersufficient nor true, for if it were so, whenas the Northernewinde blowes in Affrike, it should also runne and continuehis motion in al the Region, even vnto the North, the whichis not so. For at one instant there blowe Northerno windesvery colde in countries that are in fewer degrees, and South- erne winds, which are very hotte, in countries lying in moredegrees, the which is most certaine, vsuall, and well knowne.Whereby (in my opinion) wee may inferre that it is no pertinent reason to say that the places by which the winds dopasse give them their qualities, or that they be diversified,for that they blowe from divers regions of the ayre, althoughthe one and the other have some reason, as I have said.But it is neeclefull to seeke further to knowe the true andoriginall cause of these so strange differences which we seein the windes. I cannot conceive any other, but that thesame efficient cause which bringeth foorth and maketh thewinds to grow dooth withall give them this originall qualitie,for in trueth the matter whereon the windes are made,which is no other thing (according to Aristotle) but the THE WINDS. 109 exhalation of the interior Elements, may well cause in effect LlB- a great parte of this diversitie, being more grosse, more subtile, more drie, and more moist. But yet this is no per tinent reason, seeing that we see in one region, where the vapours and exhalations are of one sorte and qualitie, that there rise windes and effectes quite contrary. We must therefore referre the cause to the higher and celestiall effi cient, which must be the Sunne, and to the motion and in fluence of the heavens, the which by their contrary motions give and cause divers influences. But the beginnings of these motions and influences are so obscure and hidden from men, and on the other part so mighty, and of so great force, as the holie Prophet David, in his propheticall Spirite, and the Prophet leremie, admiring the greatnes of the Lorde, speake thus : " Qui profert ventos de thesauris suis.^ He that drawes the windes out of his treasures. In trueth leremy. x. these principles and beginnings are rich and hidden trea sures, for the Author of all things holdes them in his hand and in his power, and when it pleaseth him sendeth them foorth for the good or chastisement of men, and sends foorth such windes as hee pleaseth, not as that Eolus, whome the Poets doe foolishly faine to have charge of the windes, keeping them in a cave like vnto wild beasts. We see not the beginning of these windes, neyther do we know how long they shal continue, or whither they shal goe. But we see and know well the diverse effects and operations they have, even as the supreame trueth the Author of all things hath taught vs, saying, " Spirittis vbi vult spirat, et vocem eius audis, et nescis vnde venit, aut quo vadit." The spirit or winde blowes where it pleaseth, and although thou feelest the breath, yet doost thou not knowe whence it commeth, nor whither it shall goe. To teach vs that conceiving a little of matters which are present and common vnto vs, wee should not presume to vnderstand that which is so high and so hidden as the causes and motives of the Holy Ghost, It 110 THE WINDS. LIB. in. -j g therefore sufficient that wee knowe his operations andeffectes, the which are plainely discovered in his greatnesand perfections, and to have treated a litle philosophicallyof the windes, and the causes of their differences, properties,and operations, which wee have produced into three ; theplace by which they passe, the regions where they blowe,and the celestiall virtue, the beginning and motive of thewindes. CHAP. in. Of certaine properties of windes which blowe atthe new worlde. It is a question much disputed by Aristotle, whether theSoutherne winde, which we call Abrego orLevcche blowes fromthe pole Antartike, or onely from the Equinoctiall line? whichis properly to demaund, if beyond the Equinoctiall it holdethe same qualitie of hote and rainie as we see here. It is apoint whereof we may with reason stand in doubt, foralthough it passe the Equinoctiall, yet is it still the Southerne wind, seeing it comes from the same parte of theworlde; as the Northerne winde which comes to the contrary continues stil the same winde, although it passe theburning Zone and Equinoctiall line. And it seems hereby,tliat these two windes should hold their first properties, theone to be hote and moist, the other colde and drie ; theSouth to breede mists and raine, and the North to dispersethem, and to make a cleere Skie. Notwithstanding Aristotleleanes to the contrary opinion, for that in Europe the Northerne winde is colde, because it comes from the Pole, aregion extreamely colde, and the Southerne winde contrariwise is hotte, because it comes from the South, which is theregion the Sunne dooth most heate. By this reason thenwe should believe that the South winde should be colde tothem that inhabite on the other side of the line, and the WINDS IN PERU. Ill Northerne wind should be hote, for in those partes the LlB< m- Southerne wind comes from the Pole, and the Northerne from the Line. And though it seemes by this reason that the Southern winde should be more colde there than the Northern is heere, for that they holde the region of the South Pole to be more colde then that of the North, by reason that the Sunne stayeth seaven dayes every yeere in the Tropike of Cancer more than it doth in the Tropicke of Capricorne, as it appeareth by the Equinoxes and Solstices he makes in the two Circles, wherein it seemeth that Nature would shew the preheminence and excellencie of this moity of the worlde, which is in the North, above the other parte in the South ; so as it seemeth there is reason to beleeve that these qualities of the windes doe change in passing the Line ; but in trueth it is not so, as I could comprehend by the experience I had some yeeres, being in those partes of the Indies which lie on the South, or the other side of the Line. It is true that the Northerne winde is not vsually colde and cleere there as heere. In some parts of Peru, as at Lima, and on the Plaines, they find the Northern windes troublesome and vnwholesome, and all along the coast, which runs above five hundred leagues, they holde the Southerne windes for healthfull and coole, and (which is more) most cleere and pleasant ; yea it never raines, con trary to that wee see in Europe, and of this side the Line. Yet that which chaunceth vpon the coast of Peru is no generall rule, but rather an exception and a wonder of Nature, neuer to raine vpon that coast, and ever to have one winde, without giving place to his contrary, whereof we will heereafter speake our minde. Now let vs stand vpon this point, that the Northerne winde beyond the line hath not the s.ame properties which the Southerne winde hath on this side, although they both blow from the midday to regions and parts of the world 112 WINDS IN PEEU. LIB. in. wn{ ch be opposite and contrarie. For it is no generall rulethere, that the Northerne winde is neither hote nor rainiethere, as the South winde is on this side ; but contrariwise, it raines whenas the South winde blowes there, as wesee in all the Sierra or mountaine of Peru, in Chile, and inthe Countrie of Congo, which is on the other side of the line,and farre advanced into the Sea. And in Potosi likewise,the winde which they call Tomahani (which is our North),if my inemorie faile me not, is extreamely cold, drie, andvnpleasant, as it is heere with vs. Yet doth not the Northerne winde disperse the cloudes usually there as it dothheere ; but contrariwise, if I be not deceived, it doth oftencause raine. There is no doubt but the windes do borrowthis great diversitie of contrarie effects from the places bywhich they passe, and the neere regions where they arebred, as we see by daily experience in a thousand places.But speaking in generall of the qualitie of the windes, wemust rather look to the coastes or partes of the world fromwhence they proceede, then to observe whether they be onthis side or beyond the line, as it seeines the Philosopherheld opinion. These capitall windes, which be the Eastand West, have no such vniversall qualities, nor so commonin this continent nor in the other as the two former. TheSolanus, or Easterne winde, is commonly here troblesomeand vnholsome, and the Westerne, or Zephirus, is moremilde and healthfull. At the Indies, and in all the burningZone, the Easterne winde which they call Brisa, is contrari wise very healthfull and pleasant. Of the West, I cannotspeak any thing certaine or generall, for that it blowes notat all, or very seldonie, in the burning Zone, for in all thenavigation betwixt the two Tropikes, the Easterne winde is ordinary. And for that it is one of the admirable workesof Nature, it shall be good to vnderstand the cause and thebeginning thereof. WINDS IN THE INDIES. 1.13 CHAP. iv. That in the burning Zone, the Brisas, or Easterly windes, do continually blowe, and without the Zone the luesterne, and that the Easterly are ordinarie alwaies there. The waies at Sea are not as at Land, to returne the same ^IB. T- way they passe. It is all one way, saieth the Philosopher, from Athens to Thebes, and from Thebes to Athens ; but it is not so at Sea, for we go one way, and returne by an other. The first which discovered the east and west Indies, ^ an - d? Barros 111 laboured much with great difficultie to finde out their course, ^ c^, G Ca. 6. vntill that Experience (the mistris of these secrets) had taught them, that to saile through the Ocean is not like the passage in Italie, through the Mediterranean sea, where, in their returne, they observe the same Ports and Capes they had sight of in their passage, attending still the benefite of the winde, which changeth instantly, and when that failes, they have recourse to their owers ; and so the Gallies go and come daily, coasting along the shoare. In some partes of the Ocean, they may not looke for any other winde then that which blowes, for that commonly it continues long, To conclude, that which is good to go by, is not fit to re turne with : for in the sea beyond the Tropicke, and within the burning Zone, the Easterly windes raine continually, not suffering their contraries. In the which region, there are two strange things : the one is, that in that Zone (being the greatest of the five into the which the world is divided) the Easterly windes (which they call Brisas) do raine, not suffering the Westerne or Southerne (which they call lower windes), to have their course at any season of the yeere : The other wonder is, that these Easterly windes never cease to blow, and most commonly in places neerest to the line, where it seemes that calmes should be more frequent, being a part of the world most subiect to the heate of the Sunne ; i 114 VOYAGES OF THE SPANISH FLEETS. LIB. m. but it is contrarie, for you shall hardly finde any calmesthere, and the winde is cold and continues longer, whichhath been found true in all the navigations of the Indies. Thisis the reason why the voyage they make from Spaine to theWest Indies is shorter, more easie, and more assured, thenthe returne to Spaine. The fleetes, parting from Seville,have more difficultie to passe the Canaries, for that thegulph of Yeguas is variable, being beaten with diverswindes ; but having passed the Canaries, they saile witha westerne winde vntill they come to the burning Zone,where presently they finde an Easterly winde, and sothey saile on with full windes, so as they have scant anyneede to touch their sailes in the whole voiage : for thisreason they called this great gulph the gulph of Damas, forthe calrnenes and pleasantnes thereof. Then, followingtheir course, they corne to the Hands of Guadalupe, Dominica, Deseada, Marigalante, and the rest, which in thatplace be, as it were, the suburbs of the Indies. There thefleetes seperate and divide themselves, whereof some (whichgo to New Spaine) take to the right hand towards Hispaniola, and having discovered Cape San Anton, they passevnto San Juan de Lua, alwaies vsing the same Easterlywindes. Those for the maine Land take the left hand, discovering the high mountaine of Tayrona ; then, havingtouched at Carthagena, they passe vnto Nombre de Dios,from whence they go by land to Panama, and from thenceby the South Sea to Peru. But when the fleetes returnoto Spaine, they make their voiage in this sort : The fleetoof Peru discovers Cape San Anton, then they enter intothe Havana, which is a goodly Port in the HandofCuba. The fleete of New Spaine doth likewise touch at theHavana, being parted from Vera Cruz, or from the HandofSan Juan de Lua, the which is not without difficultie, forthat commonly Easterly windes blowe there, which is acontrarie winde to go to the Havana. These fleetos beino- TRADE WINDS. 115 ioyned together for Spaine, they seeke their height without LlT1 - Irr- the Tropicks, where presently they finde Westerly winds, which serve them vntill they conie in view of the Azores or Terceras, and from thence to Seville. So as their voiage in going is of a small height, not above twentie degrees from the line, which is within the Tropickes. But the returne is without the Tropickes, in eight and twentie or thirtie de grees of height at the least, for that within the Tropickes the Easterne winds continually blow, the which are fittest to go from Spaine to the West Indies, for that their course is from east to west ; and without the Tropickes (which is in three and twentie degrees of height) they finde westerly winds, the which are the more certaine and ordinarie, the farther you are from the line, and more fit to returne from the Indies ; for that they are windes blowing from the South and West, which serve to runne into the East and North. The like discourse is of the Navigation made into the South sea, going from New Spaine or Peru to the Philippines or China, and returning from the Philippines or China to New Spaine, the which is easie, for that they saile alwaies from East to West neere the line, where they finde the Easterly windes to blow in their poope. In the yeere 1584, there went a shippe from Callao in Lima to the Philip pines, which sailed 2000 and 700 leagues without sight of land, and the first it discovered was the Hand of Lusson, where they tooke port, having performed their voiage in two moneths, without want of winde or any torment, and their course was almost continually vnder the line ; for that from Lima, which is twelve degrees to the South, he came to Manilla, which is as much to the North. The like good fortune had Alvaro de Maudana, whenas he went to discover the Hands of Salomon, for that he had alwaies a full gale, vntill he came within view of these Hands, the which must be distant from that place of Peru, from whence he parted, about a thousand leagues, having runne their course alwaies 116 THE TEADE WINDS. LIB. in. - n one height to the South. The returne is like vnto thevoiage from the Indies vnto Spaine, for those which returnefrom the Philippines or China to Mexico, to the end theymay recover the Westerne windes, they mount a greatheight, vntill they come right against the Hands of lappon,and, discovering the Caliphornes, they returne by the coastof New Spaine to the port of Acapulco, from whence theyparted. So, as it is proved likewise by this navigation,that they saile easily from East to West within the Tropickes,for that there Easterly windes do raine j but returning fromWest to East they must seeke the Westerne windes withoutthe Tropickes in the height of seven and twentie degrees.The Portin gales prove the like in their navigations to theEast Indies, although it be in a contrarie course, for thatgoing from Portugall the voiage is troublesome, but theirreturne is more easie ; for that in going their course is fromthe West to the East, so as they must of necessitie mount,vntill they have found their generall windes, which theyhold to be above the seven and twentith degree. Andintheir returne they discover the Terceras, but with mo^e ease,for that they come from the East, where the Easterly orNorth erne windes do serve them. Finally, the Marinershold it for a certaine rule and observation that within theTropickes continually raine Easterly windes, and therefore it is very easie to saile to the West. But without the Tropickes there are in some seasons Easterly windes, and insome and more ordinarie Westerne windes, by reason whereofthey which saile from West to East labour alwaies to be outof the burning Zone, to put themselves in the height ofseven and twentie degrees. And for this reason men haveindangered themselves to vndertake strange Navigations,and to seeke out farre Countries vnknowne. THE TRADE WINDS. 117 CHAP. v. Of tJie differences of the Bris as or Easterne windes, and the Westerns, and likewise of other windes. Although that which we have spoken be generall and well LlB - m- approoved, yet there rernaines still a desire in me to learne the cause of this secret, why vnder the burning Zone we saile alwaies from East to West with so great facilitie, and not from West to East, which is as much as if wee should demaund why the Easterly windes raine there, and not the Westerly, for that according to good Philosophie that which is perpetuall, vniversall, and of it selfe (as the Philoso phers say), must have a proper cause and of it selfe. But before I stay at this question, which seemes remarkeable, it shal be necessary to shew what we vnderstand by Brisas or Easterly windes and Westerly, for that it will serve much for this subiect, and for many other matters touching windes and navigations. The Pilotes make two and thirty poynts of windes, for that to bring their ship to the desired haven they must make their account as punctually and as strictly as they can, for bending to the one side or the other never so little, in the end of their course they should finde themselves farre from their pretended place. And they reckon but two and thirty quarters of the windes, for that more woulde confound the memorie. But with reckoning as they accompt two and thirty windes, so may they reckon three score and foure, one hundred twenty and eight, and two hundred fifty and six. Finally, multiply these partes to an infinite, for the place where the shippe is, being as it were the centre, and all hemisphere in circumference, what should let but wee may accompt lines without number, the which comming from this centre drawe directly to these lineall circles in so many partes, which might cause as many diverse windes, seeing that the winde comes from all partes of the hemisphere, which we may divide into as 118 DIEECTION OF THE TRADE WINDS. LIB. m. many paries as we will imagine, yet the wisdome of man,conformable to the holy Scripture, observes foure windes,the principall of all others, and as it were the foure cornersof the worlde, the which they ioyne in making a crosse with two lines, whereof the one goes from one Pole to another,and the other from one Equinoctiall to the other. Of theone side the North or Aquilon, and the Southerne windeor mid-day opposite, and on the other side the East, whichcomes from the Sunne rising, and the West from his setting. And although the holy Scripture in some places speakes ofother diversities of windes, as of Eurus and Aquilon, whichthose in the Ocean sea call Nordest, and they of the Mediterranean sea Gregal, whereof there is mention made in Saint Paul s navigation, yet the same holy Scripture makesmention of those foure notable windes, which all the worldeknowes, which are, as is saide, North, South, East, andWeast. But for that we finde three differences in the rising ofthe Sunne, from whence the name of East comes, that is the two greatest declinings which he doth vsually make,and the meane betwixt them both, as hee dooth rise indiverse places in winter, in summer, and in that whichholdes the middle of these two seasons. For this reasonthey have reckoned two other windes, the East of summerand the East of winter, and by consequence two Wests,the one of summer and the other of winter, their contraries, so as there are eight windes in eight notable poyntes ofheaven, which are the two Poles, the two Equinoxes, thetwo Solstices, and their opposites in the same Circle, thewhich are called by divers names and appellations in everyplace of the sea and land. Those which saile the Ocean doevsually call them thus. They give the name of North tothose windes that blowe from our Pole, which carrieth thesame name, and Northeast that which is neerest, and comesfrom the summer East. They call East that which comes NAMES OF THE WINDS. 119 directly from the rising Equinoctial!, and Southeast that LlB - which comes from the winter rising. To the Mid-day or Pole Antartike they give the name of Southwest, and to that of the winters setting the name of Southwest ; to the right setting Equinoctiall the name of West,, and to the summers setting Northwest. They divide amongst them the rest of the winds, and give them their names as they participate and approach to others, as North-northwest, North-northeast, East-northeast, East-southeast, Southsouthwest, West-southwest, W^est-norwest, so as by their names we know whence they proceed. In the Mediter ranean sea, although they follow the same division and maner of reckoning, yet doe they give them other different names. They call the North Tramontana, and his contrary, the South, Mezogiorno or Mediodia. The East they call Levante, and the West Poniente, and those which crosse these foure they call thus : Southeast is by them named Xirocque, or Xaloque, and his opposite, which is Norwest, they call Mestral. The northeast they call Gregal, and the Southwest his contrary, Levesche, Lybico, or Affricaine. In Latine the foure knowne winds be Septentrio, Auster, Subsolanus, Favonius, and those which be interlaced are Aquilo, Vulturnus, Affricus, and Corus. According vnto Plinie, Vulturnus, which Eurus is the same winde as Southeast or Xaloque. Favonius is the West or Ponent, Aquilo and Boreas is Nortest or Gregal, or Tramontana, Affricus, and Libique is the Southwest or Levesche, Auster and Notus is the South or Midday, Corus and Zephirus the Northwest or Mestral, and to the Northeast or Gregal they give no other name then Phenicias. Some divide them after an other maner, but for that it is not now our purpose to repeate the Latine and Greeke names of all the windes; lette vs onely shew which be those amongst these windes that the Mariners of the Indian Ocean call Brisas and which Vendavales. I was long in some difficulty about these names, seeing them 120 NAMES OF THE WINDS. LIB. m. ^- vge tliem very diversly, vntill I found that these nameswere more generall then proper and peculiar. They call Brisas those which serve to goe to the Indies, the which blowe in their poope, which by this meanes comprehend all the Easterly windes, and those which depend of them. Andthey do call Vendavales those which are fitte to returne from the Indies, which blowe from the South to the west, so as they be, as it were, two Esquadrons of windes of eyther side; the Corporalles be of one side Northeast or Gregal, on the other Southwest or Leveche. But you must vnderstand that of the number of eight windes and differences which we have counted, five are proper to saile by, and not the other three. I say that when a ship sailes at sea he may make a long voyage with one of these windes, although they serve him not equally, but he cannot vse any of the other three. As if a shippe goe to the South he shall saile with the North, Northeast, Northweast, and with East and Weast, for side-windes serve to goe or to come. But with a Southerne wind he cannot saile, being directly contrary, nor with his two Collaterals, which is Southest and Southwest, which is a very triviall thing, and common to them that saile. And therefore it is not needefull to explaine them heere, but to signifie that the side- windes of the right East are those which commonly blow to the burning Zone, which they doe call Brisas, and those from the South declining to the Weast, which serve to saile from West to East, are not common in the burning Zone, and therefore they seeke them without the tropikes; and the Indian Mariners commonly call them Vendavales. CAUSE OF THE TRADE WINDS. 121 CHAP. vi. What is the reason why sailing vnder the burning Zone we finde alwayes Easterly windes ? Let vs now speake of that which, toucheth the Question LIB. m.propounded : what should be the reason whie vnder the burning Zone wee saile easily from East to West, and not contrary ? wherein we must presuppose two certaine groundes. The one is, that the motion of the first moover, which they call Diurnall, not onelie drawes and mooves with him the celestiall spheares, which are inferiour vnto him, as wee see daily in the sunne, the rnoone, and the starres, but also the Elements do participate of this motion, inso much as they are not hindered. The earth is not mooved, by reason of her heavinesse, which makes it immooveable, being far from this first motor. The element of water moves not likewise with this Diurnall motion, for that it is vnited to the earth and make one sphere, so as the earth keeps it from all circular motion. But th other two elements of fire and aire are more subtil and nearer the heavenly regions, so as they participate of their motion, and are driven about circularly as the same celestial bodies. As for the fire, without doubt it hath his sphere (as Aristotle and other Philosophers have held), but for the aire (which is the point of our subiect) it is most certaine that it mooves with a motion diurnall, which is from East to Weast, which we see plainely in Comets that moove from the East vnto the West, mounting, descending, and finally turning in the hemispheare in the same sort as the Starres move in the firmament ; for otherwise these comets being in the region and sphere of the aire, whereas they ingender, appeares consum d. It should be impossible for them to moove cir cularly, as they doe, if the element of the aire doth not moove with the same motion that the first motor dooth. For these elements being of a burning substance, by reason 122 MOTION OF THE COMET OF 1577. LIB. in. they should be fixt, without mooving circularly, if the sphere where they are did not moove ; if it be not as we faine, that some Angell or intellectuall Spirite dooth walke with the Cornet, guiding it circularly. In the yeere of our Lord Godone thousand five hundred seaventy and seaven appeeredthat wonderfull Comet (in forme like vnto a feather) fromthe horizon almost to the middest of heaven, and continuedfrom the first of November vntil the eight of December. I say from the first of November, for although in Spaine it was noted but the ninth of November (according to the testi mony of Writers of that time), yet at Peru, where I was then, I remember well we did see it and observe it eight dayesbefore, and all the time after. Touching the cause of this i diversity (some may dilate vpon it particularly) I will onelyshow that during those fourtie dayes which it continued weall observed (both such as were in Spaine and we that lived then at the Indies) that it mooved daily with an vniversall motion, from East to Weast, as the Moone and otherPlanets, wherby it appeeres that the sphere of the aire being its Region, the element it selfe must of necessitie moove after the same sort. We noted also, that besidesthis vniversall motion it had an other particular, by which it moved with the planets fro west to east, for every night it turned more Eastward, like vnto the Moone, Sunne, andPlanet of Venus. Wee did also observe a third particular motion, whereby it mooved from the zodiacke towards theNorth ; for after some nights it was found nearer vnto theSeptentrionall signes. And it may be this was the reasonwhy the great Comet was sooner seene by those that weresoutherly, as at Peru, and later discovered by them ofEurope ; for by this third motion (as I have saide) it approached neerer the Northerne Regions. Yet every onemay well observe the differences of this motion, so, as weemay well perceive, that many and sundry celestiall bodiesgive their impressions to the sphere of the aire. In like CAUSE OF THE TRADE WINDS. 123 sorte it is most certaine that the ayre mooves with the cir- LlB - m- cular motion of the heaven, from Est to West, which is the first ground before mentioned. The second is no lesse certaine, the which is, that the motion of the aire in those parts that are vnder the Line, or neere vnto it, is very swift and light the more it approacheth to the Equinoctiall j but the farther off it is from the Line, approaching neere the Poles, the more slowe and heavie this motion is. The reason heereof is manifest, for that the mooving of the celestiall bodies being the efficient cause of the mooving of the ayre, it must of necessitie be more quicke and light, where the celestiall bodies have their swiftest motion. To labour to shew the reason why the heaven hath a quicker motion vnder the burning Zone, which is the Line, * then in any other part of the heaven, were to make small account of men ; seeing it is easie to see in a wheele that its motion is more slowe and heavy in the part of greatest circumference then in the lesse, and that the greater cir cumference ends at one instant with the lesser. From these two grounds proceedes the reason where such as saile great gulphs from east to west doe always finde the winde in their poope, going in a small altitude, and the neerer they come to the Equinoctiall, the more certaine and durable the winde is. Arid contrariwise, sailing from west to east, they always finde the winde contrary ; for that the swift motion of the Equinoctiall drawes after it the element of the aire, as it doth the surplus of the higher spheares. So as the aire dooth alwayes follow the motion of the day, going from east to weast, without any alteration and the motion of the aire being swift, draweth after it all the vapours and exhalations which rise from the sea, which causeth in those Regions a continuall easterly winde, which runnes from the Levant. Father Alonso Sanchez, a religious man of our Company, who hath travelled the east and west Indies, as a man ingenious and of experience, said, that sailing 124 CAUSE OF THE TKADE WINDS. LIB. in. vnder the Line or neere vnto it, with a continued anddurable season, it seemed to him to be the same aire, mooved by the heaven the which guided the ships, and wasnot properly a winde nor exhalation, but an aire moved with the daily course of the sunne ; for proofe whereof he shewedthat the season is alwayes equall and alike at the gulph of Damas, and in other great gulphes where wee saile vnderthe burning Zone, by reason whereof their sailes always bear an equal strain, without its being needful to trim them in all their voyage. And if the ayre were not mooved by the heavens, it might sometimes faile, some times change to the contrary, and sometimes there wouldgrow some stormes. Although this be learnedly spoken, yet can we not deny it to be a winde, seeing there are vapours and exhalations of the sea, and that we some times see the Brisa or easterly winds stronger, some times more weake, and placed in that sort as sometimes they can hardly carry all their sailes. We must then know(and it is true) that the aire mooved, draweth vnto it the vapours it findes ; for that the force is great and findss no resistance, by reason whereof the easterne and weasterne windes are contiiiuall, and in a maner alwayes alike, in those parts which are neere the Line, and almost vnder all the burning zone, which is the cause the Sunne followes betwixt the two circles of Cancer and Capricorne. CHAP. vn. Why without the Zone, in a greater altitude, u-ev finde alwayes westerly windes. Whoso would neerely looke into what hath bin spoken may likewise vnderstand that going from the west to the east, in altitude beyond the Tropikes, we shall finde west- erne windes, for that the motion of the Equinoctiall being o swift, it is a cause that the ayre mooveth vnder it accord- CAUSE OF THE WESTERLY WINDS. 125 ing to this motion, which is from east to west, drawing LlB - m- after it the vapors and exhalations that rise of either side the Equinoctial or burning zone, incountring the course and motion of the zone, are forced by the repercussion to returne almost to the contrary, whence growe the southwest winds so ordinary in those parts. Even as we see in the course of waters, the which (if they be incountred by others of more force) returne in a maner backe, so it seemes to be like in vapours and exhalations, whereby it growes that the windes doe turne and separate themselves from one part to another. These westerly winds do commonly raine in a meane altitude, which is from twenty and seeven to thirty and seven degrees, though they be not so certaine nor so regular as the Brisas that are in a lesse altitude. The reason is, for that the south-west windes are no causes of this proper and equal motion of the heaven, as the Brisas are, being neere to the Line. But (as I have said) they are more ordinarie, and often more furious and tempestuous. But passing into a greater latitude, as of fortie degrees, there is as small assurance of windes at sea as at land ; for sometimes the east or north winde blowes, and sometimes the south or west ; whereby it happeneth their navigations are more vncertaine and more dangerous. CHAP. vin. Of the exceptions to the foresaid Rules, and of the Windes and Calmes, loth at Land and at Sea. That which we have spoken of winds which blow ordiimrilie within and without the Zone, must be vnderstood of the maine Sea and in the great gulphes ; for at land it is otherwise, where we finde all sorts of windes, by reason of the inequalitie which is betwixt the mountaines and the vallies; the great number of Rivers and Lakes, and the divers scituations of Countries, whence the grosse and 126 LAND AND SEA BREEZES. LIB. HI. thicke vapors arise, which are moved from the one part or the other, according to the diversitie of their beginnings, which cause these divers windes the motion of the aire, caused by the heaven having not power enough to drawand move them with it. And this varietie of windes is not onely found at land, but also vpon the sea coast, which is vnder the burning Zone, for that there be foraine or land windes which come from the land, and many which blow from the sea ; the which windes from the sea are commonlymore wholesome and more pleasant then those of the land, which are contrariwise, troublesome and vnwholsome, although it be the difference of the coast that causeth this diversitie ; commonly the land windes blow from mid-night to the sunne rising, and the sea windes vntill sunne setting. The reason, perhaps, may be, that the earth, as a grosse substance, fumes more whenas the sunne shines not vponit, even as greene wood, or scarce drie, smoakes most whenthe flame is quenched. But the sea, which is compoundedof more subtile partes, engenders no fumes but when it is hote, even as straw or haie, being moist and in small quantitie, breedes smoake when it is burnt, and when the flame failes, the fume suddenly ceaseth. Whatsoever it be, it is certaine that the land winde blowes by night, and that of the sea by day. So that even as there are often contrarie, violent, and tempestuous windes vpon the sea coast, so do we see very great calmes. Some men of great experience report, that having sailed many great passages at sea vucler the line, yet did they never see any calrnes, but that they alwaies make way little or much, the aire being moved bythe celestiall motion, which is sufficient to guide a ship, blowing in poope, as it doth. I have already said that a ship of Lima going to Manilla sailed two thousand seven hundred leagues, alwaies vnder the line, or not above twelve degrees from it, and that in the moneths of Februarie and March, whenas the sunne is there for Zenith, and in all this RAIN-BEARING WINDS. 127 space they found no calmes, but alwaies a fresh gale, so as Lis - in two moneths they performed this great voyage. But in the burning Zone and without it you shall vsually see great calmes vpon the coastes, where the vapors come from the Hands or maine land. And therefore stormes and tempestes, and the suddaine motions of the aire, are more certaine and ordinarie vpon the coastes, whereas the vapors come from the land, then in full sea, I meane under the burning Zone, for without it, and at sea, there are both calmes and whirl e- windes. Notwithstanding, sometimes betwixt the two Tropickes, yea, vnder the line, you shall have great raine and suddaine showers, yea, farre into the sea ; for the work ing whereof the vapors and exhalations of the sea are suffi cient, which moving sometimes hastily in the aire, cause thunder and whirlewindes ; but this is more ordinarie neere to the land and vpon the land. When I sailed from Peru to New Spaine I observed that all the time we were vpon the coast of Peru our voiage was (as it was ordinary) very calme and easie, by reason of the Southerne winde that blowes, having alwaies a fore winde returning from Spaine and New Spaine. As we passed the gulph, lanching farther into the sea, almost vnder the line, we found the season coole, quiet, and pleasant, with a full winde, but com- ming neere to Nicaragua, and to all that coast, we had contrarie windes, with great store of raine and fogges. All this navigation was vnder the burning Zone ; for from twelve degrees to the South, which is Lima, wee sailed to the seventeenth, which is Gautulco, a port of New Spaine ; and I beleeve that such as have observed their navigations, made vnder the burning Zone, shall finde what I have said, which may suffice for the windes which raine at sea vnder the burning Zone. 128 STRANGE EFFECTS OF WINDS. CHAP. TX. Of some marvellous effects of the windes, whichare in some paries of the Indies. It were a very difficult matter to report particularly theadmirable effectes which some windes cause in divers regionsof the world, and to give a reason thereof. There arewindes which naturally trouble the water of the sea, andmakes it greene and blacke, others cleere as Cristall ; somecomfort and make glad, others trouble and breede heavines.Such as nourish silkewormes have great care to shut theirwindowes whenas the South-west windes do blow, and toopen them to the contrarie ; having found by certaineexperience that their wormes diminish and die with the oneand fatten and become better with the other ; and who sowill neerely observe it shall finde in himself that the diversi ties of windes cause notable impressions and changes in thebodie, principally in sicke partes and ill disposed, when theyami u. 10 are most tender and weake. The holy scripture calleth onei!miv. V11 & burning winde, another a winde full of dew and svveetnes. Dan. iii. And it is no wonder if we see such notable effects of thewindes in plants, beasts, and men, seeing that we see it visibly in yron, which is the hardest of all mettalls. I havescene grates of yron in some partes of the Indies so rustedand consumed that, pressing it betwixt your fingers, it dissolved into powder, as if it had been hay or parchedstraw, the which proceedes only from the winde which dothcorrupt it, having no meanes to withstand it. But leavingapart many other great and notable effects, I will onelymake mention of two. The one, although it causeth pangsgreater than death it selfe, yet doth it not breede any furtherinconvenience. The other takes away life without feelingof it. The sicknes of the sea, wherewith such are troubledas first begin to go to sea, is a matter very ordinary ; andyet if the nature thereof were vnknowne to men, we should SEA SICKNESS. 129 take it for the pangs of death, seeing how it afflicts and LlB - m- torments while it doth last, by the casting of the stomacke, paine of the head, and other troublesome accidents. But in trueth this sicknes, so common and ordinarie, happens unto men by the change of the aire and sea. For although it be true that the motion of the shippe helpes much, in that it moves more or less, and likewise the infections and ill savours of things in the shippe ; yet the proper and nnturall cause is the aire and the vapors of the sea, the which doth so weaken and trouble the body and the sto macke, which are not accustomed therevnto, that they are wonderfully moved and changed ; for the aire is the ele ment by which wee live and breathe, drawing it into our entrailes, the which we bathe therewithal!. And therefore there is nothing that so suddenly and with so great force doth alter vs, as the change of the aire we breathe, as we see in those which die of the plague. It is proved by many experiences, that the aire of the sea is the chiefe cause of this strange indisposition ; the one is, that when there blowes from the sea a strong breath, we see them at the land as it were sea-sicke, as I rayselfe have often found. Another is, the farther we go into the sea, and retyre from land, the more we are touched and dazeled with this sick nes. Another is, that coasting along any Hand, and after lanching into the maine, we shall there finde the aire more strong. Yet will I not deny, but the motion and agitation may cause this sicknes, seeing that we see some are taken therewith passing rivers in barkes : others in like sort going in coches and caresses, according to the divers com plexions of the stornacke ; as contrariwise, there are some, how boistrous and troublesome soever the sea be, doe never feele it. Wherefore it is a matter certaine and tried that the aire of the sea doth commonly cause this effect in such as newly go to sea. I thought good to speake this, to shew a strange effect, which happens in some partes of the K 130 SICKNESS AT GREAT HEIGHTS. LIB. m. Indies, where the ayre and the wind that rains makes mendazie, not lesse, but more then at sea. Some hold it for afable, others say that it is an addition ; for my part I will speake what I have tried. There is in Peru a high mountaine which they call Pariacaca, 1 and having heard speakeof the alteration it bred, I went as well prepared as I couldaccording to the instructions which were given me, by suchas they call Vaguianos, or expert men; but notwithstandingall my provision, when I came to mount the stairs, as they call them, which is the top of this inountaine, I wassuddenly surprized with so mortal! and strange a pang that I was ready to fall from my beast to the ground ; and althoughwe were many in company, yet every one made haste (with out any tarrying for his companion) to free himselfe speedilyfrom this ill passage. 2 Being then alone with one Indian,whom I intreated to keep me on my beast, I was surprisedwith such pangs of straining and casting as I thought to cast vp my soul too; for having cast vp meate, fleugrne, andcholler, both yellow and greene, in the end I cast vp blood, with the straining of my stomacke. To conclude, if this hadcontinued, I should vndoubtedly have died ; but this lasted not above three or four houres, that we were come into amore convenient and naturall temperature, where all ourcompanions, being fourteene or fifteene, were much wearied.Some in the passage demaunded confession, thinkingverily to die ; others got off their beasts, beeing over come with casting, and going to the stoole ; and it wastolde me that some have lost their lives there with this accident. I beheld one that did beate himselfe againsto the earth, crying out for the rage and griefe which this passage of Pariacaca hadde caused. But commonly it 1 Caeca means a rock in Quichua. I cannot, with certainty, identify this pass of Pariacacca. - The sickness, at great heights in the Andes, caused by rarified at mosphere, is called Sorocli. SICKNESS AT GREAT HEIGHTS. 131 dooth no important harme, onely this, paine and trouble- LlB - m- some distaste while it endures : and not onely the passage of Pariacaca hath this propertie, but also all this ridge of the mountaine, which runnes above five hundred leagues long, and in what place soever you passe, you shall finde strange intemperatures, yet more in some partes then in other, and rather to those which mount from the sea than from the plaines. Besides Pariacaca, I have passed it by Lucanas1 and Soras ; 2 in another place, by Collahuas, 3 and by Cavanas.4 Finally, by foure different places, going and comming, and alwaies in this passage I have felt this alter ation, although in no place so strongly as at the first in Paria caca, which hath beene tried by all such as have passed it. And no doubt but the winde is the cause of this intemperature and strange alteration, or the aire that raignes there. For the best remedy (and all they finde) is to stoppe their noses, their eares, and their mouthes, as much as may be, and to cover themselves with cloatkes, especially the sto- rnacke, for that the ayre is subtile and piercing, going into the entrailes, and not onely men feele this alteration, but also beasts, that sometimes stay there, so as there is no spurre can make them goe forward. For my part, I holde this place to be one of the highest parts of land in the worlde, for we mount a wonderfull space. And in my opi nion, the mountaine Nevada of Spaine, the Pirenees, and the Alpes of Italie, are as ordiuarie houses in regard of hie Towers. I therefore perswade my selfe, that the element of the aire is there so subtile and delicate, as it is not pro portionable with the breathing of man, which requires a more grosse and temperate aire, and I beleeve it is the 1 More correctly Rucana. See also Lib. vi, cap. xv ; and G. de la Vega, ii, p. 267. Lucanas is a modern province in the department of Ayacucho. 2 Soras, a district near Lucanas. 3 Collahua is near Arequipa. See G. de la Vega, i, p. 232. 4 Cariha. See G. de la Vega, i, p. 80. K2 INTENSE COLD ON THE PUNAS. LlB - m- cause that doth so much alter the stomacke and trouble all the disposition. The passages of the rnountaines Nevadaand others of Europe which I have seene, although theaire be colde there, and doth force men to weare moreclothes, yet this colde doth not take away the appetite for meat, but contrariwise it provokes; neither dooth it causeany casting of the stomacke, but onely some paine in thefeete and handes. Finally, their operation is outward. Butthat of the Indies, whereof I speake (without molesting offoote or hand, or any outward parte), troubles all theentrailes within: and that which is more admirable, whenthe sunne is hote, which maketh mee imagine that thegriefe wee feele comes from the qualitie of the aire whichwee breathe. Therefore, that is most subtile and delicate, whose colde is not so sensible as piercing. All this ridgeof mountains is for the most part desart, without any vil lages or habitations for men, so as you shall scarce findeany small cotages -to lodge such as do passe by night.There are no beasts, good or bad, but some vicunas, whichare their countrey muttons, and have a strange and wonderful property, as I shall shew in his place. 1 The grassois often burnt, and all blacke with the aire, and this desartrunnes five and twenty or thirty leagues overthwart, and in length above five hundred leagues. There are other desartsor places not inhabited, which at Peru they call Punas2 (speaking of the second poynt we promised), where thequallitie of the ayre cutteth off mans life without feeling. In former time the Spaniardes went from Peru to therealme of Chille by this mountaine, but at this day they dopasse commonly by sea, and sometimes alongst the side ofit. And though that way be laborious and troublesome,yet is there not so great daunger as by the mountaine,where there are plaines, on the which many men have1 Lib. iv, cap. xli. " J*/n/(tx are the lofty plateaux of the Andes. INTENSE COLD ON THE PUNAS. I3o perished and died, and sometimes have scaped by great Llr> - ut - happe, whereof some have remained lame. There runs a small breath, which is not very strong nor violent, but proceedes in such sorte that men fall downe dead in a manner without feeling, or, at the least, they loose their feete and handes ; the which may seeme fabulous, yet is it most true. I knew and was long intimate with General Geronimo Costillas, 1 one of the first settlers in Cusco, who had lost three or foure toes, which fell off in passing the desart of Chile, being perished with this aire, and when he came to look on them they were dead, and fell off without any paine, even as a rotten apple falleth from the tree. This Captaine re ported, that of a good army which hee had conducted by that place in the former yeeres, since the discoverie of this kingdome by Almagro, a great part of the men remained dead there, whose bodies he found lying in the desart with out any stink or corruption; adding therevuto one thing very strange, that they found a yong boy alive, and being examined how hee had lived in that place, hee saide that hee laie hidden in a little cave, whence hee came to cutte the flesh of a dead horse with a little knife, and thus had he nourished himselfe a long time, with I know not how many companions that lived in that sort, but now they were all dead, one dying this day, and another to morrow, saying that hee desired nothing more then to die there with the rest, seeing that he found not in himselfe any disposition to goe to any other place, nor to take any taste in any thing. I have vnderstoode the like of others, and parti cularly of one that was of our company, who being then a secular man, had passed by these desarts ; and it is a 1 Geronimo Costillas was a native of Zamora, of good family. He accompanied Almagro s expedition to Chile ; and was afterwards actively engaged in the campaign against Giron. See G. de la Vega, ii, p. 243 and note. 134 THE SOUTH SEA. LIB. in. strange thing the qualitie of this colde aire, which killes and also preserves the dead bodies without corruption. I have also vnderstoode it of a reverend religious man, of the Order of Saint Dominike, and Prelate thereof, who haddeseene it passing by the desarts ; and which is strange, heereported, that travelling that way by night, was forced to defend himselfe against that deadly winde which blowesthere (having no other meanes) but to gather together agreat number of those dead bodies that lay there, andmade therof, as it were, a rampire and a bolster for his head ; in this manner did he sleepe, the dead bodies givinghim life. Without doubt this is a kinde of cold so piercingthat it quencheth the vitall heate, cutting off his influence, and, being so exceeding colde, yet doth not corrupt norgive any putrifaction to the dead bodies, for that putrifactiongroweth from heate and moystness. As for the other kindeof ayre which thunders vnder the earth, and causeth earth quakes, more at the Indies then in any other regions, I wil speake thereof in treating the qualities of the land at the Indies. We will content our selves now with what weehave spoken of the wind and aire, and passe to that whichis to be spoken of the water. CHAP. x. Of the Ocean that invirons the Indies, and of theNorth and South Seas. Amongst all waters the Ocean is the principal!, by whichthe Indies have beene discovered, and are invironed there with ; for either they be Hands of the Ocean sea, or maineland, the which wheresoever it ends is bounded with this Ocean. To this day they have not discovered at the Indiesany mediterranean sea, as in Europe, Asia, and Affrike,into the which there enters some arme of this great sea, QUESTION OF CUTTING THE ISTHMUS. 135 and makes distinct seas, taking their names from the Pro- LlB< m< vinces they bathe ; and almost all the mediterranean Seas continue and ioyne together, and with the Ocean it selfe, by the straight of Gibraltar, which the Ancients called the Pillars of Hercules, although the Eed Sea beeing separated from the mediterranean seas, enters alone into the Indian Ocean ; and the Caspian sea ioynes not with any other : so that at the Indies wee finde not anie other sea then this Ocean, which they divide into two, the one they call the north sea, and the other the south; for that the Indies which were first discovered by the Ocean, and reacheth vnto Spaine, lies all to the north, and by that land there after discovered a sea on the other side, the which they called the South Sea, for that they decline vntill they have passed the Line; and having lost the North, or Pole articke, they called it South. For this cause they have called all that Ocean the South Sea, which lieth on the other side of the East Indies, althogh a great part of it be seated to the north, as al the coast of new Spaine, Nica ragua, Guatimala, and Panama. They say that hee that first discovered this sea was called Blasco Nunez de Balboa, the which he did by that part which we now call Tierra Firme, where it growes narrow, and the two seas approach so neere the one to the other, that there is but seaven leagues of distance; for although they make the way eighteene from Nombre de Dios to Panama, yet is it with turning to seeke the commocfitie of the way, but drawing a direct line the one sea shall not be found more distant from the other. Some have discoursed and propounded to cut through this passage of seaven leagues, and to ioyne one sea to the other, to make the passage from Peru more commodious and easie, for that these eighteene leagues of land betwixt Nombre de Dios and Panama is more painefull and chargeable then 2300 by sea, wherevpon some would say it were a meanes to drowne the land, one sea 136 STEATTS OF MAGELLAN. LITI. in. "being lower then another. As in times past we finde it Herodotus, written, that for the same consideration they gave over theenterprize to win the Eed sea into Nile, in the time oflovms. King Sesostris, and since, in the Empire of the Ottomans.But for my part, I hold such discourses and propositionsfor vaine, although this inconvenient should not happen,the which I will not hold for assured. I beleeve there is no humaine power able to beat and breake downe thosestrong and impenetrable mountaines, which God hath placedbetwixt the two seas, and hath made them most hardrockes, to withstand the furie of two seas. And althoughit were possible to men, yet in my opinion they shouldfeare punishment from heaven in seeking to correct theworkes which the Creator by his great providence hathordained and disposed in the framing of this vniversall world. Leaving this discourse of opening the land, andioyning both seas together, there is yet another lesse rash, but very difficult and dangerous to search out. Whetherthese two great gulphes do ioyne in any other part of theworld, which was the enterprize of Fernando Magellan, a Portugal] gentleman, whose great courage and constanciein the research of this subiect, and happy successe in the finding thereof, gave the name of eternall memory to this straight, which iustly they call by the name of the disco verer, Magellan, of which straight we will intreate a little, as of one of the greatest wonders of the world. Some havebeleeved that this straight which Magellan had discoveredin the South Sea was none, or that it was straightened, as Don Alonso tie Ercilla writes in his Araucana ; and at this day there are some that say there is no such straight, butthat they are ilands betwixt the sea and land, for that themaine land endes there, at the end whereof are all ilautls, beyond the which the one sea ioynes fully with the other, or to speake better, it is all one sea. But in truth it is most ccrtaine, there is a straight and a long and stretched VOYAGE OF SARMIENTO. 137 out- land on eyther side, although it hath not yet beene LlB - m- knowne how far it stretcheth of the one side of the straight towards the South. After Magellan, a shippe of the Bishoppe of Plasencia, Don Guttieres Carvajal, passed the straight (whose mast they say is yet at Lima, at the entrie of the palace), they went afterwards coasting along the South to discover the Straight, by the commandement of Don Garcia de Mendoza, then governor of Chill e, according to that which Captaine Ladrillero found it and passed it. I have read the discourse and report he made, where he saieth, that he did not hazard himselfe to land in the Straight, but having discovered the North sea he returned back, for the roughnes of the time, winter being now come, which caused the waves comming from the North to grow great and swelling, and the sea continually foming with rage. In our time, Francis Drake, an Englishman, passed this straight. After him, Captaine Sarmiento passed it on the South side. And lastly, in the yeere 1587, other Englishmen passed it, by the instruction of Drake, which at this time runne all along the coast of Peru. And for that the report which the master Pilot that passed it made, seemeth notable vnto me, I will heere set it downe. CHAP. xi. Of the Straight of Magellan, and how it was passed on the south side. In the yeere of our Lord God, one thousand five hundred seaventy nine, Francis Drake having passed the Straights and runne alongest the coast of Chille and all Peru, and taken the shippe of San Juan de Antona, where there was a great number of barres of silver, the Viceroy Don Francisco de Toledo armed and sent foorth two good shippes to dis cover the Straight, appoynting Pedro Sarmiento for Cap- 138 VOYAGE OF SARMIENTO. LlB - In- taine, a man learned in Astrologie. They parted from Callao of Lima in the beginning of October; and foras much as vpon that coast there blowes a contrary winde from the South, they tooke the sea, and having sailed litle above thirty days with a favourable winde, they came to the same altitude of the Straight; but for that it was very hard to discover, they approched neere vnto the land, wherethey entred into a great Bay, in the which there is an Archipelague of Hands : Sarmiento grew obstinate, that this was the Straight, and staied a whole moneth to finde it out, by diverse wayes creeping vppe to the high mountaines. But seeing they could not discover it, at the in stance of such as were in the army they returned to sea. The same day the weather grew rough, with the which they ranne their course ; in the beginning of the night the Admiralls light failed, so as the other shippe never see themafter. The day following the force of the winde continuing still, being a side wind, the Admiralles shippe discovered an opening, which made land, thinking good to enter there for shelter vntill the tempest were past. The which suc ceeded in such sort, as having discovered this vent, they found that it ranne more and more into the land, and coniecturing that it should be the Straight which they sought, they tooke the height of the Sunne, where they found them selves in fiftie degrees and a halfe, which is the very height of the Straight; and, to be the better assured, they thrust out their Brigandine, which having run many leagues into this arme of the sea without seeing any end, they found ,| it to be the very Straight. And for that they had order to f passe it, they planted a hie Crosse there, with letters thereon, to the end, that if the other ship should chance to arrive there, they should have newes of their Generall and follow. They passed the Straight in a favourable time, without difficultie, and, passing into the north sea, they came to certaine vnknowne Ilandes, where they tooke in QUESTION AS TO THE STRAIGHT. 139 fresh water and other refreshings. From thence they tooke LlB - m- their course towardes Cape de Verde, from whence the Pilote maior returned to Peru, by the way of Carthagena and Panama, carrying a discourse of the Straight to the Viceroy, and of all their successe, of whom he was well re warded for his good service. But Captaine Pedro Sarmiento sailed from Cape Verde to Seville in the same ship wherewith he had passed the Straight, and went to Court ; where his Maiestie rewarded him; and at his instance, gave commaundernent to prepare a great army, which he sent vnder the commaund of Diego Flores de Valdes, to people and fortifie this Straight. But this army, after variable successe, spent much, and profited little. Returning now to the Viceadmiralles shippe, which went in company of the Generall, having lost him in the storme, they tooke the sea, but the wind being contrary and stormy, they looked all to perish, so as they confessed themselves, and prepared for death. This tempest continued three dayes without intermission, and hourely they feared to runne on ground ; but it fel out contrary, for they went still from land, vntill the ende of the third day, that the storme ceased, and then taking the height, they found themselves in fiftie sixe degrees ; but seeing they had not crossed, and yet were farre from land, they were amazed, whereby they surmized (as Hernando Lamero, Pilot of the said ship, tolde me) that the land which is on the other side of the Straight, as wee goe by the south sea, runnes not in the same direction as it doth to the Straight, but that it turneth to the East ; for else it were im possible but they shoulde have touched land, having runne so long time with this crosse winde ; but they passed on no further, neyther coulde they discover the lands end (which some holde to be there) whether it were an Hand on the other side of the Straight, where the two seas of 140 SUPPOSED FLORIDA STRAIGHT. LIB. in. North and South, doe ioyne together, or that it did runnevppe towardes the East, and ioyne with the land of Yista as they call it, which answers to the Cape of Good Hope (as it is the opinion of some). The trueth hereof is not to this day well known e, neither is there any one found that hath discovered that land. The Viceroy Don Martin Henriquezsaid vnto me, that he held this report for an invention of the English, that the Straight should presentlie make anHand, and that the two seas did ioyne together; for that (beeing Viceroy of Xew Spaine) hee had diligently examined the Portugall Pilote, who had bin left there byFrancis Drake, and yet had no knowledge of any such matter by him. But that was a very Straight, and a maineland on either side. Returning then to the saide Viceadmirall, they discovered this Straight (as the saide Hernando Lamero reported vnto mee) but by another mouth or entrie, and in a greater height, by reason of a certaine great Hand which is at the entrie of the Straight, which they call the Bell, for the forme it carries. And, as he saide, hee woulde have passed it ; but the Captaine andsouldiers woulde not yeelde therevnto, supposing that the time was too farre spent, and that they were in great daunger. And so they returned to Chille and Peru, without passing it. CHAP. XTI. Of the Straight ivhich some holde to be in Florida. Even as Magellan found out this Straight vppon the South, so some have pretended to discover another Straight, which they say is in the north, and suppose it to be in Florida, whose coast runs in such sort, as they knowe noend thereof. Peter Melendez, the Adelantado, a man very expert at sea, affirmeth for certaine that there is a Straight, THE NOETH-WEST PASSAGE. 141 and that the King had commanded him to discover it, LlB - wherein he shewed a great desire ; he propounded his reasons to proove his opinion,, saying, that they have seene some remainders of shippes in the North Sea, like vnto those the which the Chinois vse, which had beene im possible, if there were no passage from one sea vnto another. Moreover, he reported, that in a cerfcaine great Bay in Florida (the which runnes 300 leagues within the land) they see whales in some season of the yeere, which come from the other sea. Shewing moreover other likeli hood, he concludes, that it was a thing agreeing with the wisedome of the Creator, and the goodly order of nature, that as there was communication and a passage betwixt the two seas at the Pole Antartike, so there should in like sort, be one at the Pole Artike, which is the principall Pole. Some will say that Drake had knowledge of this Straight, and that he gave occasion so to iudge, whenas he passed along the coast of new Spaine by the South Sea. Yea, they hold opinion, that other Englishmen, 1 which this yeere 1587, tooke a shippe comrning from the Philippines, with great quantitie of gold and other riches, did passe this straight, which prize they made neere to the California, which course the ships returning from the Philippines and China, to new Spaiue, do vsually observe. They confi dently beleeve that, as the courage of man is great, and his desire infinite, to finde new meanes to inrich himselfe, so within few yeeres this secret will be discovered. And truly, it is a thing worthie admiration, that as the Ants do alwaies follow the trace of other, so men in the knowledge and search of new things, never stay, vntill they have the desired end for the content and glorie of men. And the high and eternall wisedome of the Creator vseth this 1 This was the voyage of Cavendish. The prize was taken by him off Cape San Lucas, the south point of California, on November 14th, 1587. 142 STEAITS OF MAGELLAN. LIB. in. curiositie of men, to communicate the light of his holy Gospell to people that alwaies live in the obscure darkenesse of their errors. But to conclude, the straight of the Artike Pole (if there be any) hath not been yet discovered. It shall not therefore be from the purpose, to speake what we know of the particularities of the Antartike straight, already discovered and knowne, by the report of such as have seene and observed it. CHAP. xni. Of the properties of the Straight of Magellan. This Straight, as I have said, is iust fiftie degrees to the South, and from one sea to another, fourscore and ten or a hundred leagues, in the narrowest place it is a league andlittle lesse, where it was intended the King should build a Fort to defend the passage. It is so deepe in some places that it cannot be sounded, and in some places they finde ground at 18, yea, at 15, fadomes. Of these hundred leagues which it containes in length from one sea vnto the other, it is plainely seene that the waves of the South Sea runne 30leagues, and the other 70 are possessed with the billowes and waves of the North Sea. But there is this difference, that the 30 leagues to the South runne betwixt the rockes and most high rnountaines, whose tops are continually covered with snow, so as they seeme, by reason of their great height, to be ioyned together, which makes the entrie of the Straight to the South so hard to discover. In these 30 leagues the sea is very deepe, and without bottome, yet may they fasten their ships to the land, the banckes beingstraight and vneven ; but, in the 70 leagues towards the North, they finde ground, and of either side there are large plaines, the which they call Savannahs. Many great rivers of faire and cleere water runne into this Straight, and there about are great and wonderfull forrests, whereas they finde TIDES. 143 some trees of excellent wood and sweete, the which are not LlB - m< knowne in these partes, whereof such as passed from thence to Peru, brought some to shew. There are many meadowes within the land,, and many Hands in the midst of the Straight. The Indians that inhabite on the South side are little and cowards ; those that dwell on the North part are great and valiant they brought some into Spaine, which they hadde taken. They found peeces of blew cloth, and other markes and signes that some men of Europe had passed there. The Indians saluted our men with the name of lesus. They are good archers,, and goe clad in wilde beasts skinnes, whereof there is great aboundance. The waters of the Straight rise and fall as the tide, and they may visibly see the tides come of the one side of the North sea, and of the other from the South whereas they meete, the which (as I have said) is thirtie leagues from the South, and three score and tenne from the North. And although it seemes there should be moredaunger then in all the rest, yet whenas Captaine Sarmiento his shippe, whereof I spake, passed it, they had no great stormes, but found farre lesse difficultie then they expected ; for then the time was very calme and pleasant. And, moreover, the waves from the north sea came broken, by reason of the great length of three score and tenne leagues, and the waves from the south sea were not raging, by reason of the great deapth, in which deapth the waves breake, and are swallowed vp. It is true, that in winter the straight is not navigable, by reason of the tempests and raging of the sea in that season. Some shippes which have attempted to passe the Straight in winter have perished. One onely shippe passed it on the south side, which is the Captaine I made mention of. I was fully instructed of all that I have spoken by the pilote thereof, called Hernando Alonso, and have seene the true discription of the Straight they made in passing it, whereof they carried the copie to the King of Spaine, and the original to the Viceroy of Peru. 144 TIDES. CHAP. xiv. Of the ebbing and flawing of the Indian Ocean.LT. in. Qne Of the most admirable secrets of Nature is theebbing and flowing of the sea, not onely for this strangeproperty of rising and falling, but much more for thedifference there is thereof in diverse seas,, yea in diversecoastes of one and the same sea. There are some seas thathave no daily flowing nor ebbing, as we see in the innerMediterranean, which is the Thyrene sea, and yet it flowesand ebbes every day in the vpper Mediterranean sea, whichis that of Venice, and iustly giveth cause of admiration,that these two seas being Mediterranean, and that of Venicebeing no greater then the other, yet hath it its ebbing andflowing as the Ocean, and that other sea of Italie none at all. There are some Mediterranean seas, that apparently riseand fall everie moneth ; and others that neyther rise in theday nor in the moneth. There are other seas, as the SpanishOcean, that have their flux and reflux every day; andbesides that, they have it monethly, which commeth twice,that is to say, at the entry, and at the ful of every Moone,which they call Spring tides. To say that any sea haththis daily ebbing and flowing, and not monethly, I knowenot any. It is strange, the difference we finde of thissubiect at the Indies, for there are some places whereas thesea doth daily rise and fall two leagues, as at Panama, andat a high water it riseth much more. There are otherplaces where it doth rise and fall so little, that hardly canyou finde the difference. It is ordinary in the Ocean sea tohave a daily flowing and ebbing, and that was twice in anaturall day, and ever it falls three quarters of an houresooner one day then another, according to the course of theMoone : so as the tide falles not alwayes in one houre of theday. Some would say, that this flux and reflux proceededfrom the locall motion of the water of the sea ; so as the TIDES. 145 water that riseth on the one side falles on the other that is LlB - m- opposite vnto it ; so that it is ful sea on the one side when as it is a lowe water on the opposite, as we see in a kettle full of water, when wee moove it ; when it leanes to the one side the water increaseth, and on the other it diminisheth. Others affirme, that the sea riseth in all partes at one time, and decreaseth at one instant ; as the boyling of a pot, comming out of the centre it extendeth it selfe on all partes, and when it ceaseth, it falles likewise on all partes. This second opinion is true, and in my iudgement, cer- taine and tried, not so much for the reasons which the Philosophers give in their meteors, as for the certaine experience wee may make. For to satisfie my selfe vpoii this point and question, I demanded particularly of the said Pilot, how he found the tides in the straight, and if the tides of the South sea did fall whenas those of the North did rise. And contrariwise (this question being true) why the increase of the sea in one place, is the decrease thereof in another, as the first opinion holdeth. He answered that it was not so, but they might see plainely, that the tides of the North and South seas rise at one instant, so as the waves of one sea incountred with the other, and at one instant likewise they began to retire, every one into his sea, saying, that the rising and falling was daily seene, and that the incounter of the tides, as I have saide, was at three score and tenne leagues to the North sea, and thirtie to the South. Whereby wee may plainely gather, that the ebbing and flowing of the Ocean is no pure locall motion, but rather an alteration ; whereby all waters really rise and increase at one instant ; and in others they diminish, as the boyling of a pot, whereof I have spoken. It were im possible to comprehend this poynt by experience, if it were not in the Straight, where all the Ocean, both on th one side and on th other, ioynes together ; for none but Angelles can see it, and iudge of the opposite parts ; for L 146 MANATIS. LIB. in. j-j^ man h^k not so long a sight, nor so nimble and swift footing as were needefull, to transporte his eyes from oneparte to another, in so short a time, as a tide will give himrespite, which are only six houres. CHAP. xv. Of sundry Fishes, and their manner offishing at the Indies. There are in the Indian Ocean an infinite number offishes, the kindes and properties whereof the Creator onlycan declare. There are many such as we have in the seaof Europe, as shaddes1 and aloses, 2 which come from the seainto the rivers; dorads,3 pilchards, 4 and many others. Thereare others, the like I doe not thinke to have seene in thesepartes, as those which they doe call Cabrillas, 5 which doesomewhat resemble the trowt, 6 and in new Spaine they call them Bobos, they mount from the sea into the rivers. Ihave not seene any bream there, nor trowts, although somesay there are in Chille. There are tunny fish in somepartes vpoii the coast of Peru, but they are rare; andsome are of opinion that, at a certaine time, they do casttheir spawne in the Straight of Magellan, as they doe inSpaine at the Straight of Gibraltar, and for this reasonthey finde more vpon the coast of Chille, although those I have seen there are not like to them in Spaine. At theIlandes (which they call Barlovento), which are Cuba, SantoDomingo, Puerto Rico, and Jamaica, they find a fish which they call Manati, a strange kinde of fish, if we maycall it fish, a creature which in genders her yoong ones alive, and hath teates, and doth nourish them with milke, feedingof grasse in the fieldes, but in effect it lives continually in 1 Li^u*, a ssluu.1. ~ Sai alos, a shad. 3 Dorados. 4 Sardinas, sardine. 5 Calrillas, prawns. Tnicliat--. VORACITY OP SHARKS. 147 the water, and therefore they eate it as fish; yet when I LlB - ITI - did eate of it at Santo Domingo on a friday, I hadde some scruple, not for that which is spoken, but for that in colour and taste it was like vnto morsel! es of veale, so is it greene, and like vnto a cowe on the hinder partes. I didde woonder at the incredible ravening of the Tiburons, or sharkes, whenas I did see drawne from one (that was taken in the Port) out of his gullet, a butchers great knife, a great yron hooke, and a peece of a cowes head with one whole home; neyther doe I knowe if both were there or no. I did see in a creeke made with that sea, a quarter of a horse for pleasure hanging vpon a stake, whither pre sently came a company of these Tiburons at the smel thereof; and for the more pleasure, this horse flesh was hung in the aire, I knowe not how many hand breadth from the water ; this company of fish flocke about it, leap ing vp, and with a strange nimblenesse cut off both flesh and bone off the horse leg as if it had beene the stalk of a lettuce ; their teeth being as sharpe as a rasour. There are certaine small fishes they call Romeros, 1 which cleave to these Tiburons, neyther can they drive them away, and they are fed with that which falles from the Tiburons. There are other small fishes, which they call flying fishes, the which are found within the tropickes and in no other place, as I thinke : they are pursued by the Dorados, and to escape them they leape out of the sea, and goe a good way in the ayre, and for this reason they are called flying Fishes; they have wings as it were of linnen cloth, or of parchment, which do supporte them some space in the ayre. There did one flie or leape into the shippe wherin I went, the which I did see, and observe the fashion of his wings. In the Indian histories there is often mention made of Lizards or Caymans, as they call them, and they are the 1 Pilot fish. L 2 148 ALLIGATORS. LIB. in. very same which Plinie and the Antients call Crocodiles; ~~ they finde them on the sea side, and in hote rivers, for in colde rivers there are none to be found; and, therefore, they finde none vpon all the coast of Peru vnto Payrta, but forward they are commonly seene in the rivers. It is a most fierce and cruell beast, although it be slow and heavie. Hee goes hunting and seekes his prey on the land, andwhat hee takes alive he drownes it in the water, yet dooth hee not eate it but out of the water, for that his throate is of such a fashion as if there entred any water he should easily be drowned. It is a woonderfull thing to see a combat betwixt a Cayman and a Tiger, whereof there are most cruell at the Indies. A religious man of our Companytolde me that he had seene these beasts fight most cruelly one against the other; vpon the sea shoare the Caymanwith his taile gave great blowes vnto the Tiger, striving with his great force to carry him into the water; and the Tiger with his pawes resisted the Caymant, drawing himto land. In the end the Tiger vanquished and opened the Lizard, it seemes by the belly, the which is most tender and penetrable, for in every other parte hee is so hard, that no lance, and scarce a harquebuze, can pierce it. Thevictory which an Indian had of a Cayman was yet morerare ; the Cayman had carried away his yong childe, andsodainly plunged into the sea; the Indian, mooved with choller, cast himselfe after him, with a knife in his hand, and as they are excellent swimmers and divers, and the Cayman swimineth alwayes on the toppe of the water, heehurt him in the belly, and in such sort, that the Cayman,feeling himselfe wounded, went to the shoare, leaving the little infant dead. But the combate which the Indians havewith Whales is yet more admirable, wherein appeares the power and greatnesse of the Creator to give so base a Nation, as be the Indians, the industry and courage to incounter the most fierce and deformed beast in the worlde, WHALE FISHING. 149 and not only to fight with him, but also to vanquish him, LlB - m- and to triumph over him. Considering this/ I have often remembred that place of the Psalme, speaking of the psaimciii.Whale, Draco iste, quern formasti ad illudendum eum. What greater mockerie can there be then to see an Indian leade a whale as bigge as a mountaine vanquished with a corde. The maner the Indians of Florida vse (as some expert men have tolde me) to take these whales (whereof there is great store) is, they put themselves into a canoe, which is like a barke of a tree, and in swimming approach neere the whales side; then with great dexteritie they leape to his necke, and there they ride as on horsebacke, expecting his time, then hee thrustes a sharpe and strong stake, which hee carries with him, into the whales nosthrill, for so they call the hole or vent by which they breathe; presently he beates it in with an other stake as forcibly as hee can; in the meane space the whale dooth furiously beate the sea, and raiseth mountaines of water, running into the deepe with great violence, and presently riseth againe, not knowing what to doe for paine; the Indian still sittes firme, and to give him full payment for this trouble, he beates another stake into the other vent or nosthrill so as he stoppeth him quite, and takes away his breathing; then hee betakes him to his canoe, which he holdes tied with a corde to the whales side, and goes to land, having first tied his corde to the whale, the which hee lettes runne with the whale, who leapes from place to place whilest he finds water enough ; being troubled with paine, in the end hee comes neere the land, and remaines on ground by the hugenesse of his body, vnable any more to moove ; then a great number of Indians come vnto the conquered beast to gather his spoiles, they kill him, and cut his flesh in peeces, this do they drie and beate into powder, vsing it for meate, it dooth last them long : wherein is fulfilled that which is spoken in another Psalme of the whale, Dedisti eum \SS\. 150 FISHING! IN BALSAS. LIB. in. escam populis ^Ethiopum. Peter Melendez the Adelan- ~ tado did often speake of this kinde of fishing. WhereofMonardes makes mention in his booke. There is an other fishing which the Indians do commonly vse in the sea,, the which, although it be lesse, yet is it worthy the report. They make as it were faggots of bul-rushes or drie sedges well bound together, which they call Balsas; having carried them vppon their shoulders to the sea, they cast them in, and presently leape vppon them. Being so set, they lanch out into the deepe, rowing vp and downe with small reedes of eyther side, they goe a league or two into the sea to fish, carrying with them their cordes and nettes vppon these faggots, and beare themselves thereon. Theycast out their nettes, and do there remaine fishing the greatest parte of the day and night, vntill they have filled vp their measure, with the which they returne well satis fied. Truely it was delightfull to see them fish at Callao of Lima, for that they were many in number, and every one set on horsebacke, cutting the waves of the sea, which in their place of fishing are great and furious, resembling the Tritons or Neptunes, which they paint vppon the water, and beeing come to land they drawe their barke out of the water vpon their^ backes, the which they presently vndoe, and lay abroade on the shoare to drie. There were other Indians of the vallies of Yea w 7 hich were accustomed to goe to fish in leather, or skinnes of sea-wolves, blowne vp with winde, and from time to time they did blowe them like balles of winde, lest they should sinke. In the vale of Caiiete, which in olde time they called Huarco, there were a great number of Indian fishers : but because they resisted the Ynca when he came to conquer that land, he madeshew of peace with them, and therefore to feast him they appoynted a solemne fishing of manie thousand Indians, which went to sea in their vessels of reeds; at whose re turne, the Ynca, who had layde many souldiers in ambush, LAKE TITICACA. 151 made a,cruell butcherie of them, so as afterward this land LlB - m- remained vnpeopled, although it be aboundant and fertile. I did see an other manner of fishing, wherevnto Don Francisco de Toledo the Viceroy didde leade mee, yet was it not in the sea, but in a river which they call great, in the Province of Charcas, where the Indians Chirihuanas plunged into the water, and swimming with an admirable swiftnesse, followed the fish, where with dartes and hookes which they vse to carry in their right hand, only swimming with the left, they wound the fish, and so hurt they brought them foorth, seeming in this more like vnto fishes then men of the land. But now that we have left the sea, let vs come to other kinde of waters that remaine to be spoken of. CHAP. xvi. Of Lakes and Pooles that be at the Indies. In place of the Mediterranean Sea, which is in the old world, the Creator hath furnished this new with many Lakes, whereof there are some so great as they may be properly called seas, seeing the Scripture calleth that of Palestina so, which is not so great as some of these. The most famous is that of Titicaca, which is at Peru, in the Province of Collao, the which., as I have said in the former booke, containes neere fourscore leagues in compasse, into the which there runnes ten or twelve great rivers. A while since they began to saile in it with barkes and shippes, wherein they proceeded so ill that the first shippe was split with a tempest that did rise in the Lake. The water is not altogether sower nor salt, as that of the sea, but it is so thicke as it cannot be drunke. There are two kindes of fishes breed in this Lake in great aboundance, the one they call Suchis, 1 which is great and savorous, but phlegmatike and vnwholesome, and the other Bogos, which is more 1 Sec also G. dc hi V< <j, i, lib. viii, cap. 22. 152 LAKES IN THE ANDES. healthful^ although it be lesse and fuller of bones ; there are great numbers of wilde duckes and widgeons. Whenas the Indians will feast it, or shew delight to any one that passeth along the two banckes, which they call Chucuyto and Omasuyo, they assemble a great number of canoes, making a circle and invironing the fowle, vntill they take with their hands what they please, and they call this maner of fishing Chacu. On the one and the other bancke of this Lake are the best habitations of Peru. From the issue thereof there growes a lesser Lake, although it be great, which they call Paria, vpon the bankes whereof there are great numbers of cattell, especially swine, which grow ex ceeding fatte with the grasse vpon those banks. There are many other Lakes in the high mountains whence proceede brooks and rivers, which after become great flouds. Ypon the way from Arequipa to Callao there are two Lakes vpon the mountains of the one and other side the way ; from the one flowes a brooke, which growes to a floud, and falles into the South sea; from the other they say the famous river of Apurimac takes her beginning, from the which some hold that the renowned river of Amazones, other wise called Maranon, proceed es, with so great an assembly and aboundance of waters, which ioyne in these mountaines. It is a question which may be often asked, why there are so many Lakes in the toppes of these mountaines, into the which no river enters, but contrariwise many great streames issue forth, and yet do we scarce see these Lakes to diminish anything at any season of the yeere. To imagine that these Lakes grow by the snow that melts or raine from heaven, that doth not wholy satisfie me, for there are many that have not this aboundance of snow nor raine, and yet we see no decrease in them, which makes me to beleeve they are springs which rise there naturally, although it be not against reason to thinke that the snowne and raine helpe somewhat in some seasons. These Lakes are so common LAKES IN MEXICO. 153 in the highest toppes of the mountaines that yon shall LlB - IIT< hardly finde any famous river that takes not his beginning from one of them. Their water is very cleere, and breedes little store of fish, and that little is very small, by reason of the cold which is there continually. Notwithstanding, some of these Lakes be very hotte, which is another wonder. At the end of the vallie of Tarapaya, neere to Potozi, there is a Lake in forme round, which seemes to have been made by compasse, whose water is extreamely hote, and yet the land is very colde. They are accustomed to bathe them selves neere the banke, for else they cannot indure the heate being farther in. In the midst of this Lake there is a boiling of above twenty foote square, which is the very spring, and yet (notwithstanding the greatnes of this spring) it is never seene to increase in any sort ; it seemes that it exhales of it selfe, or that it hath some hidden and vnknowne issue, neither do they see it decrease, which is another wonder, although they have drawne from it a great stream e, to make certaine engines grinde for mettall, considering the great quantity of water that issueth forth, by reason whereof it should decrease. But leaving Peru, and passing to New Spaine, the Lakes there are no less to be observed, especially that most famous of Mexico, where we finde two sortes of waters, one salt like to that of the sea, and the other cleere and sweete, by reason of the rivers that enter into it. In the midst of this Lake is a rocke verie delightfull and pleasant, where there are baths of hote water that issue forth, the which they greatly esteeme for their health. There are gardins in the middest of this Lake, framed and fleeting vpon the water, where you may see plottes full of a thousand sortes of hearbes and flowers, and they are in such sort as a man cannot well conceive them without sight. The Citie of Mexico is seated in the same Lake, although the Spaniards have filled vp the place of the situation with earth, leaving oncly some currents of water, great and 154 LAKES IN MEXICO. LIB. in. small,, which enter into the Citie, to carrie such things as ~ they have neede of, as wood, hearbes, stone, fruites of thecountrie, and all other things. When Cortes conqueredMexico he caused Brigandins to be made, yet afterwards hethought it more safe not to vse them, therefore they vseCanoes, whereof there is great store. There is great storeof fish in this Lake, yet have I not seene any of price ; not withstanding, they say the revenue of this Lake is worththree hundred thousand duckets a yeere. There are manyother Lakes not far from this wr hence they bring much fish to Mexico. The Province of Mechovacan is so called for that it aboundeth greatly with fish. There are goodly andgreat Lakes, in the which there is much fish, and this Province is coole and healthfull. There are many other Lakeswhereof it is not possible to make mention, nor to knowthem in particular, onely we may note by that which hathbeene discoursed in the. former booke, that vnder the burning Zone there is greater abundance of Lakes then in anyother parte of the worlde ; and so by that which we haveformerly spoken, and the little we shall say of rivers audfountaineSj we will end this discourse of Waters. CHAP. xvn. Of many and divers Springs and Fountaines. There is at the Indies, as in other parts of the world,great diversitie of Springs, Fountaines, and Rivers, andsome have strange properties. In Huancavilica of Peru(where the mines of quicksilver be) there is a Fountainethat casts forth hote water, and in running the water turnesto rocke, of which rocke or stone they build in a maner all the houses of the village. This stone is soft, and easie to cutte, for they cut it as easily with yron as if it were wood; it is light and lasting. If men or beasts drinke thereof theydie, for that it congeales in the very entrailes, and turnes SPRINGS OF PITCH. 155 into stone, and for that cause some horses have died. As LlIJ - m- this water turnes into stone, the which flowes stoppes the passage to the rest, so as of necessitie it changeth the course, and for this reason it rurmes in divers places as the rocke increaseth. At the point of Cape S. Helen there is a spring or fountaine of pitch, which at Peru they call Copey. This should be like to that which the Scripture speakes of the wild valley, where they did finde wells of pitch. The Mariners vse these fountaines or wells of Copey to pitch their ropes and tackling, for that it serves them as pitch and tarre in Spaine. When I sailed into Kew Spaine by the coast of Peru the Pilot showed me an Hand, which they call the lie of Wolves, where there is another fountaine or well of Copey or pitch, with the which they anoint their tackling. There is an other fountaine of pitch, which the Pilot (an excellent man in his charge) tolde me he had seene, and that sometimes sailing that waies, being so farre into the sea as he had lost the sight of land, yet did he know by the smell of the Copey where he was, as well as if he had knowne the land, such is the savour that issues continually from that fountaine. At the baths, which they call the baths of the Ynca, there is a course of water which conies forth all hote and boiling, and ioyning vnto it there is another, whose water is as cold as ice. The Ynca was accustomed to temper the one with the other, and it is a wonderfull thing to see springs of so contrarie qualities so neere one to the other. There are an infinite number of other hote springs, specially in the Pro vince of Charcas, in the water whereof you cannot indure to hold your*hand the space of an Ave Maria, as I have seene tried by wager. In a farme neere to Cuzco springs a foun tain of salt, which as it runs turns into salt, very white and exceeding good, the which, if it were in another countrie, were no small riches, yet they make very small accournpt thereof for the store they have there. The waters which 156 HOT AND COLD SPRINGS. LIB. in. runne in Guayaquil, which is in Peru, almost vnder the~~ Equinoctiall line, are held to be healthfull for the Frenchdisease, and other such like, so as they come from manyplaces farre off to be cured. And they say the cause thereofis for that in that Countrie there is great aboundance ofrootes, which they call sarsaparilla, 1 the vertue and opera tion whereof is so knowne that it communicates her propertie to the waters wherein it is put to cure this disease. Vilcafiota is a mountaine, the which (according to commonopinion) is in the highest part of Peru, the toppe whereofis all covered with snow, and in some places is blacke like coale. There issueth forth of it two springs in contrarieplaces, which presently growe to be very great brookes,and so by little and little become great flouds, the one goesto Collao, into the great Lake Titicaca, the other goes tothe lands, and is that which they call Yucay, 2 which, ioyningwith another, runnes into the North Sea with a violentand furious course. This spring, when it comes out of therocke Vilcafiota, as I have said, is of the colour of lie, havingan ashie colour, and castes a fume as a thing burnt, thewhich runs farre in this sort, vntill the multitude of watersthat runnc into it quench this smoake and fire which it drawes from the spring. Tn New Spaine I have scene aspring as it were hike, somewhat blew ; in Peru another ofcolour red like bloud, wherevpon they call it the red river. CHAP. xvm. Of Elvers. Amongst all Rivers, not onely at the Indies, but generallythrough the world, the River Maranon or of Amazons is the chiefe, whereof we have spoken in the former booke.The Spaniards have often sailed it, pretending to discover1 See my translation of Cicza de Leon, p. 200. 2 The Vilcamayu, which flows into the Ucayali. PASSAGE OF THE PONGO. 157 the lands, which by report are very rich, especially those LlB> m< they call Dorado and Paytiti. Juan de Salinas, the Adelantado, made a memorable entrie, though of small effect. There is a passage which they call Pongo, 1 one of the most daungerous in all the worlde, for the river being there straightened, and forced betwixt two high steepe rockes, the water falles directly downe with so great a violence that, comming steepe downe, it causeth such a boyling as it seemeth impossible to passe it without drowning, yet the courage of men durst attempt to passe it for the desire of this renowned Dorado ; they slipt downe from the top to the bottome, thrust on with the violence and currant of the floud, holding themselves fast in their canoes or barkes ; and although in falling they were turned topsie turvie, and both they and their canoes plunged into the deepe, yet by their care and industry they recovered themselves againe ; and in this sort the whole army escaped, except some few that were drowned. And that which is more admirable they carried themselves so cunningly that they neyther lost their powder nor munition. In their returne (having suffered many troubles and daungers) they were forced in the end to pass backe that same way, mounting by one of those high Rockes, sticking their poinards in the rocke. Captain Pedro de Ursua made an other entry by the same river, who being dead in the same voyage and the souldiers mutinied, other Captaines followed the enter prise by an arme that comes into the north sea. A religious man of our company told vs that, being then a secular man, he was present in a manner at all that enterprise, and that the tides did flowe almost a hundred leagues vp the river, and whereas it enters into the sea (the which is vnder the line or very neere) ; it hath 70 leagues breadth at the mouth of it, a matter incredible, and which exceedes the breadth of the Mediterranean 1 A corruption of Puncu, a door. 158 EIVERS OF PERU. LIB. m. sea^ though there be some others, who in their descriptionsgive it but twenty-five or thirty leagues bredth at themouth. Next to this river that of Plata, or of Silver, holdesthe second place, which is otherwise called Paraguay, whichrunnes from the mountaines of Peru into the sea, in thirtyfive degrees of altitude to the South ; it riseth (as they say)like to the river of Nile, but much more without comparison,and makes the fields it overflowes like vnto a sea for thespace of three moneths, and after returneth againe to hiscourse, in the which ships do saile many leagues againstthe streame. There are many other rivers that are not ofthat greatnes, and yet are equall, yea they surpasse thegreatest of Europe, as that of Magdalena, neere to SantaMartha the great river, and that of Alvarado in New Spaine,and an infinit number of others. Of the south side, on themountains of Peru, the rivers are not vsually so great, forthat their current is not long, and that many waters cannotioyne together, but they are very swift, descending fromthe mountaines., and have sodaine falles, by reason whereofthey are very dangerous, and many men have perishedthere. They increase and overflowe most in the time ofheate. I have gone over twenty and seaven rivers vponthat coast, yet did I never passe any one by a foord.The Indians vse a thousand devises to passe their rivers.In some places they have a long cord that runs fro one sideto th other, and thereon hangs a basket, into the which heputs himselfe that meanes to passe ; and then they drawe it from the bancke with another corde, so as hee passeth inthis basket. In other places the Indian passeth, as it wereon horse backe, vppon a bottle of straw, and behinde himhee that desires to passe ; and so rowing with a peece of aboorde, carries him over. In other places they makeafloate of gourds or pompions, vppon the which they setmen with their stuffe to carry over, and the Indians havingcordes fastned to them, goe swimming before, and drawe PASSAGE OF RIVERS. IRRIGATION. 159 this floate of pompions after them, as horses doe a Coach ; LlB - others goe behinde thrusting it forward. Having passed, they take ther barke of pornpions vppon their backe, and return e swimming; this they doe in the river of Santa in Peru. We passed that of Alvarado in New Spaine vpon a table, which the Indians carried vpon their shoulders, and when they lost their footing they swamme. These devises, with a thousand others wherewith they vse to passe their rivers, breede a terrour in the beholders, helping them selves with such weake and vnsure means, and yet they are very confident. They do vse no other bridges but of haire or of straw. There are now vppon some rivers bridges of stone, built by the diligence of some governours, but many fewer then were needfull in such a country, where so many men are drowned by default thereof, and the which yeeldes so much silver, as not onely Spaine, but also other strange countries make sumptuous buildings therewith. The Indians do drawe from these floudes, that runne from the mountaines to the vallies and plaines, many and great brooks to water their land, which they vsually doe with such industry, as there are no better in Murcia, nor at Milan it selfe, the which is also the greatest and onely wealth of the Plaines of Peru, and of many other partes of the Indies. CHAP. xix. Of the qualitie of the land at the Indies in generall. We may know the qualitie of the land at the Indies, for the greatest parte (seeing it is the last of the three Elements, whereof wee have propounded to treate in this Booke), by the discourse we have made in the former Booke of the burning Zone, seeing that the greatest part of the Indies dooth lie vnder it. But to make it knowne the more par ticularly, I have observed three kindes of landes, as I have 160 COAST VALLEYS OF PEEU. LIB. in. passed through those Eegions ; whereof there is one verylowe, another very high, and the third which holds themiddle of these two extreaines. The lower is that whichlieth by the sea coasts, whereof there is in all partes of theIndies, and it is commonly very hote and moist, so as it is not so healthfull ; and at this day we see it lesse peopled,although in former times it hath beene greatly inhabitedwith Indians, as it appeareth by the histories of NewSpaine and Peru, and where they kept and lived, for thatthe soile was naturall vnto them being bred there. Theylived of fishing at sea, and of seeds, drawing brooks fromthe rivers, which they vsed for want of raine, for that it raines little there, and in some places not at all. This lowecountrie hath many places inhabitable, as wel by reason ofthe sands which are dangerous (for there are whole mountaines of these sandes) as also for the marishes which growby reason of the waters that fall from the mountaines,which finding no issue in these flatte and lowe landes,drowne them, and make them vnprofitable. And in trueth the greatest parte of all the Indian seacoast is of this sort, chiefly vppon the South Sea. Thehabitation of which coasts is at this present so wasted andcontemned, that of thirtie partes of the people that in habited it, there wants twenty-nine ; and it is likely therest of the Indians will in short time decay. Many, according to the varietie of their opinions, attribute this todiverse causes ; some to the great labour which hath beeneimposed vppon these Indians ; others vnto the change andvarietie of meates and drinks they vse, since their commerce with the Spaniardes ; others to their great excesseand drinking, and to other vices they have ; for my part, Ihold this disorder to be the greatest cause of their decay,whereof it is not now time to discourse any more. In thislowe countrey (which I say generally is vnhealfchfull, andvnfit for mans habitation) there is exception in some places COAST VALLEYS. SIERRA.. 161 which are temperate and fertile, as the greatest part of the LlB - m> Plaines of Peru, where there are coole vallies and very fertile. The greatest part of the habitation of the coast entertaines all the traffike of Spaine by sea ; whereon all the estate of the Indies dependeth. Ypon this coast there are some Townes wel peopled, as Lima and Truxillo in Peru, Panama, and Carthagena vppon the maine land, and in the Hands San Domingo, Puerto Rico, and Havana, with many other Townes which are lesse than these, as Vera Cruz in New Spaine, Yea, Arica and others in Peru ; the ports are commonly inhabited, although but slenderly. The second sort of land is contrary, very high, and by con sequent, colde and drie, as all the mountaines are com monly. This land is neither fertile nor pleasant, but very healthfull, which makes it to be peopled and inhabited. There are pastures, and great store of cattell, the which for the most parte entertaines life, and by their cattell they supply the want they have of corne and graine by truck ing and exchange. But that which makes these landes more inhabited and peopled is the riches of the mines that are found there, for that all obeys to golde and silver. By reason of the mines there are some dwellings of Spaniards and Indians which are increased and multiplied, as Potosi and Huancavilica in Peru, and Cacatecas in New Spaine. There are also through all these mountaines great dwellings of the Indians, which to this day are maintained, yea, some Vwill say they increase, but that the labourpf the mines dooth consume many, and some generall diseases have destroyed a great part, as the Cocoliste, in New Spaine, yet they finde no great diminntion. In this extreamitie of high ground they finde two commodities, as I have saide, of pastures and mines, which doe well countervail the two other that are in the lower grounds alongest the sea coast, that is, the commerce of the sea and the aboundance of wine, which groweth not but in the hot kndes. Betwixt these two ex- M 162 TEMPERATE VALLEYS. LIB. in. treames there is ground of a meane height, the which,although it bee in some partes higher or lower one thanother, yet doth it not approach neyther to the heate of thesea coast nor the intemperature of the mountaines. In thissorte of soile there groweth many kindes of graine, aswheate, barley, and mays, which grows not at all in the highcountries ; but well in the lower ; there is likewise store ofpasture, cattel, fruits, and greene forrests. This part is thebest habitation of the three for health and recreation, andtherefore it is best peopled of any parte of the Indies ; thewhich I have curiously observed in manie voyages that Ihave vndertaken, and have alwayes found it true that theProvince best peopled at the Indies be in this scituation.Let vs looke neerely into New Spaine (the which, withoutdoubt, is the best Province the Sunne dooth circle), bywhat parte soever you doe enter you mount vp, and whenyou have mounted a good height you beginne to descend,yet very little, and that land is alwayes much higher thenthat along the sea coast. All the land about Mexico is of this nature and scituation,and that which is about the Vulcan, which is the best soileof the Indies, as also in Peru, Arequipa, Guamanga, andCuzco, although more in one then in the other. But in theend all is high ground, although they descend into deepevallies, and climbe vppe to high mountaines ; the like is spoken of Quito, Santa Fe, and of the best of the newkingdome. To conclude, I doe beleeve that the wisedomeand providence of the Creator would have it so, that thegreatest parte of this countrey of the Indies should be hilles, that it might be of a better temperature, for, being lowe,it had beeiie very hotte vnder the burning zone, especiallybeing farre from the sea. Also all the land I have seeneat the Indies is neere to the mountaines on the one side orthe other, and sometimes of all partes. So as I have often times saide there, that I woulde gladly see any place from TEMPERATE VALLEYS. 163 whence the horizon did fashion it selfe and end by the LlB - heaven, and a countrey stretched out and even, as we see in Spaine in a thousand champaiue fields, yet doe I not remember that I have ever seene such sightes afc the Indies, were it in the Hands or vpon the maine land, although I have travelled above seaven hundred leagues in length. But, as I have saide, the neerenesse of the mountain es is very commodious in this region to temper the heate of the Sunne. To conclude, the best inhabited partes of the Indies are as I have saide, and generally all that countrie aboundes in grasse, pastures, and forrests, contrary vnto that which Aristotle and the Auntients did holde. So as when wee goe out of Europe to the Indies wee woonder to see the land so pleasant, greene, and fresh. Yet this rule hath some exceptions, and chiefly in the land of Peru, which is of a strange nature amongst all others, whereof wee will now proceede to speake. CHAP. xx. Of the properties of the land of Peru. Wee meane by Peru not that great parte of the worlde which they call America, seeing that therein is contained Bresil, the kingdome of Chille, and that of Grenada, and yet none of these kingdomes is Peru, but onely that parte which lies to the South, beginning at the kingdome of Quito, which is vnder the Line, and runnes in length to the realme of Chille, the which is without the Tropickes, which were sixe hundred leagues in length, and in breadth it containes no more then the mountaines, which is fiftie common leagues, although in some places, as at Chachapoyas, it be broader. This parte of the world which we call Peru is very remarkeable, and containes in it strange properties, which serveth as an exception to the generall rule of the 164 PHYSICAL FEATURES OF PERU. LIB. in. Indies. The first is, that vpon all that coast it blowes con tinually with one oiiely winde, which is South and South west,, contrary to that which dooth vsually blow vnder theburning Zone. The second is, that this winde, being bynature the most violent,, tempestuous, and vnhealthfull ofall others, yet in this region it is marvellous pleasing, health ful, and agreeable, so as we may attribute the habitationof that part therevnto, without the which it would betroublesome and uninhabitable, by reason of the heate, if it were not refreshed with the winde. The third propertie is, that it never raines, thunders, snowes, nor hailes in all this coast, which is a matter worthy of admiration. Fourthly,that a little distance from the coast it raines and snowesterribly. Fiftly, that there are two ridges of mountaineswhich ruune the one as the other, and in one altitude, not withstanding on the one there are great forrests, and it raines the greatest part of the yeere, being very hote, andthe other is all naked and bare, and very colde ; so aswinter and summer are divided on those two mountaines,and raine and cleerenesse it selfe. For the better vnderstanding hereof wee must consider that Peru is divided asit were into three partes, long and narrow, which they call Llanos, Sierras, and Andes the Llanos runnes alongest thesea coast, the Sierras be all hilles, with some vallies, andthe Andes be steepe and craggie mountaines. The Llanosor sea coast have some temie leagues in breadth, in someparts lesse, and in some parts a little more. The Sierracontaines some twentie leagues in breadth, and the Andesas much, sometimes more, sometimes lesse. They runnein length from north to south, and in breadth from east towest. It is a strange thing that in so small a distance asfiftie leagues, equally distant from the Line and Pole, thereshould bee so great a contrarietie as to raine almost continually in one place and never in the other. It never rainesvpon the coast or Llanos, although there falles sometimes a RAINFALL IN PERU. 165 small dew, which they call Garua, and in Spanish Mollina, L!B> in< the which sometimes thickens and falles in certaine droppes of water, yet is it not troublesome nor such as they neede any covering. Their coverings are of mattes, with a little earth vpon them, which is sufficient. Vpon the Andes it raines in a manner continually, although it be sometimes more cleere then other. In the Sierra, which lies betwixt both the extreames, it raineth in the same season as it dooth in Spaine, which is from September vnto Aprill, but in the other season the time is more cleere, which is when the Sunne is farthest off, and the contrarie when it is neerest, whereof we have discoursed at large in the former booke. That which they call Andes and Sierra are two ridges of most high mountaines, which runne above a thousand leagues, the one in view of the other, and almost equally. There are an infinite number of vicunas, which breede in the Sierras, and are properly like vnto wilde goates, very nimble and swift. There are also of those beasts which they call Guanacos and Pacos, which are sheepe, which we may wel terme the asses of that countrey, whereof we shall speake in their place. And vpon the Andes they finde apes, very gentle and delightfull, and parrots in great numbers. There also they find the hearb or tree which they call coca, that is so greatly esteemed by the Indians, and the trafficke they make of it is worthy much rnony. That which they call Sierra causeth vallies, whereas it opens, which are the best dwellings of Peru, as is the valley of Xauxa, of Andahuaylas, and Yucay. In these vallies there growes wheat, mays, and other sortes of fruits, but lesse in one then in the other. Beyond the Citie of Cuzco (the ancient Court of the Lordes of those Kealmes), the two ridges of mountaines seperate themselves one from the other, and in the midst leave a plaine and large champian, which they call the Province of Collao, where there are many rivers and great store of fertile pastures ; there is 166 THE COLLAO. LIB. in. a] so hat greafc Lake of Titicaca. And although it be a ful soile, and in the same height and intemperature, that theSierra having no more trees nor forrests, yet the want theyhave of bread is countervailed with the rootes they sowe,the which they call Papas, and they grow in the earth. Thisroote is the Indians foode; for drying it, and making it cleaiie, they make that which they call chunu, which is the bread and nourishment of those Provinces. There areother rootes and small hearbes which they eate. It is 7 ahealthfull soile, best peopled, and the richest of all theIndies, for the aboundance of cattell they feed, as well ofthose that are in Europe, as sheepe, neate, and goates, asof those of the Countrie which they call Guanacos andPacos, and there are store of Partridges. Next to theProvince of Collao is that of Charcas, where there are hotevallies very fertile, and very high rockes, the which arevery rich in mines, so as in no part of the world shall younude better nor fairer. CHAP. xxi. The reason why it does not rain on the Llanos,along the Sea coast. For that it is rare and extraordinarie to see a Countriewhere it never raines nor thunders, men desire naturally toknow the cause of this strangenes. The reason which somegive that have neerely looked into it is, that vpon thatcoast there rise no vapors sufficient to engender raine forwant of matter; but onely that there be small and lightvapors which cannot breede any other then mistes anddewes, as we see in Europe, oftentimes vapors do rise inthe morning which are not turned into raine but intomistes only, the which growes from the substance, whichis not grosse and sufficient enough to turne to raine. They CAUSE OF NO RAIN ON THE COAST. 167 say the reason why that which happens but some times in LlB - nr- Europe falles out continually vpon the coast of Peru is, for that this region is very drie and yeeldes no grosse vapors. The drinesse is knowne by the great abundance of sandes, having neither welles nor fouutaines, but of fifteene fathoms deepe (which is the height of a man or more), and that is neere vnto rivers, the water whereof, piercing into the land, giues them nieanes to make welles. So as it hath been found by experience, that the course of rivers being turned, the welles have beene dried vp vntill they returned to their ordinarie course ; and they give this reason for a materiall cause of this effect; but they have another efficient, which is no lesse considerable, and that is the great height of the Sierra, which, comming along the coast, shadowes the Llanos, so as it suffers no winde to blowe from the land, but above the toppes of these mountaines. By meanes whereof there raines no winde but that from the Sea, which finding no opposite, doth not presse nor straine forth the vapors which rise to engender raine, so as the shadowe of the mountaines keepes the vapors from thickning, and convertes them all into rnistes. There are some experiences agree with this discourse, for that it raines vpon some small hilles along the coast, which are at least shadowed, as the rockes of Atico and Arequipa. It hath rained in some yeeres whenas the northern or easterly windes have blowen : yea, all the time they have continued, as it hap pened in seven tie eight, vpon the Llanos of Truxillo, where it rained aboundantly, the which they had not seene in many ages before. Moreover, it raines vpon the same coast, in places, whereas the easterly or northerne windes be ordinarie, as in Guayaquil, and in places whereas the land riseth much, and turnes from the shadow of the moun taines, as in those that are beyond Arequipa. Some discourse in this maner, but let every one thinke as he please. It is most certaine; that comming from the mountaines to the 168 FERTILIZING MISTS. LIB. in. va/HieSj they do vsually see as it were two heavens, onecleere and bright above, and the other obscure, and as it were a graie vaile spread vnderneath, which covers all thecoast ; and although it raine not, yet this mist is wonderfullprofitable to bring forth grasse, and to raise vp and nourishthe seede ; for although they have plentie of water, whichthey draw from the Pooles and Lakes, yet this moisturefrom heaven hath such a vertue, that ceasing to fal vponthe earth, it breedes a great discommoditie and defect ofgraine and feedes. And that which is more worthy ofadmiration, the drie and barren sandes are by this deaw sobeautified with grasse and flowers, as it is a pleasiug andagreeable sight, and verie profitable for the feeding ofcattell, as we see in the mountaine called Arena, neere tothe Cittie of Kings. CIJAP. xxn. Of the >r(>i>crtie of new Syaine, of the Hands,and of oilier Lands. New Spaine passeth all other Provinces in pastures,which breeds infinite troopes of horse, kine, sheepe, andother cattell. It aboundes in fruite and all kinde of graine.To conclude, it is a Countrie the best furnished, and mostaccomplished at the Indies. Yet Peru doth surpasse it inone thing, which is wine, for that there growes store andgood ; and they daily multiplie and increase, the whichdoth grow in very hote vallies, where there are waterings.And although there bee vines in New Spaine, yet the grapecomes not to his maturitie, fit to make wine. The reasonis, for that it raines there in lulie and August, whenas thegrape ripens ; and therefore it comes not to his perfection.And if anyone through curiositie would take the paines tomake wine, it should be like to that of Genoa and Lorn- SOIL OF THE ISLANDS. 169 bardie, which is very small and sharpe, having a taste like LlB - vnto verjuice. The Hands which they call Barlovente, which be Hispariiola, Cuba, Puerto Rico, and others there abouts, are beautified with many greene pastures, and abound in cattell, as neate, and swine, which are become wilde. The wealth of these Hands be their sugar-workes and hides. There is much Cassia fistula and ginger. It is a thing incredible, to see the multitude of these marchandizes brought in one fleete, being in a maner impossible that all Europe should waste so much. They likewise bring wood of an excellent qnalitie and colour, as ebony, and others, which serve for buildings and joyners. There is much of that wood which they call Lignum sanctum, fit to cure the pox. All these Hands and others there abouts, which are many, have a goodly and pleasant aspect, for that throughout the yeere, they are beautified with grasse and greene trees, so as they cannot discerne when it is Autumne or Summer, by reason of continuall moisture ioyned to the heate of the burning Zone. And although this land be of a great circuite, yet are there few dwellings, for that of it selfe it engenders great Arcabucos, as they call them, which be Groves or very thicke Coppices ; and on the plain es there are many marishes and bogges. They give yet another notable reason, why they are so smally peopled, for that there have remained few naturall Indians, through the inconsideratenesse and disorder of the first Conquerors that peopled it; and therefore, for the most part, they vse Negros, but they cost deere, being very fit to till the land. There growes neither bread nor wine in these Hands, for that the too great fertilitie and the vice of the soile, suffers them not to seede, but castes all forth in grasse, very vneaqually. There are no olive trees, at the least they beare no olives, but rnanie greene leaves pleasant to the view, which beare no fruite. The bread they vse is of cassava, whereof we shall heereafter speake. There is 170 CLIMATE OF CHILE. _ gold in the riuers of these Hands, which some draw foorth,but in small quantitie. I was little lesse then a yeere in theseilands, and as it hath beene told me of the maine land ofthe Indies, where I have not been, as in Florida, Nicaragua,Guatimala, and others, it is in a maner of this temper, as Ihave described ; yet have I not set downe every particularof Nature in these Provinces of the firme land, having noperfect knowledge thereof. The Countrie which doth mostresemble Spaine, and the regions of Europe, in all the WestIndies, is the realme of Chille, which is without the generallrule of these other Provinces, being seated without theburning Zone, and the Tropicke of Capricorne. This landof it selfe is coole and fertile, and brings forth all kindes offruites that be in Spaine ; it yeeldes great aboundance ofbread and wine, and aboundes in pastures and cattell. Theaire is wholesome and cleere, temperate betwixt heate andcold, winter and summer are very distinct, and there theyfinde great store of very fine gold. Yet this land is pooreand smally peopled, by reason of their continuall warrewith the Araucanos and their associates, being a roughpeople and friends to libertie. CHAP. xxni. Of the vnhnownc Land, and the divcrsitle of awltule day betwixt them of tJie East and the West, There are great coniectures, that in the temperate Zoneat the Antartike Pole, there are great and fertile lands; but to this day they are not discovered, neither do theyknow any other land in this Zone, but that of Chille, andsome part of that land which runnes from Ethiopia, to theCape of Good Hope, as hath been said in the first booke; neither is it knowne if there be any habitations in the othertwo Zones of the Poles, and whether the land continues THE UNKNOWN LANDS. 171 and stretcheth to that which is towards the Antartike or LlB - m- South Pole. Neither do we know the land that lies beyond the straight of Magellan, for that the greatest height yet discovered is in fiftie-six degrees, as hath beene formerly saide ; and toward the Artike or Northerne Pole, it is not knowne how farre the land extendes, which runnes beyond the Cape of Mendocjno, and the Californias, nor the bounds and end of Florida, neither yet how farre it extendes to the West. Of late, they have discovered a new land, which they call New Mexico, where they say is much people that speake the Mexicaine tongue. The Philippines and the fol lowing Hands, as some report that know it by experience, ranne above nine hundred leagues. But to intreate of China, Cochinchina, Syam, and other regions which are of the East Indies, were contrary to my purpose, which is onely to discourse of the West ; nay, they are ignorant of the greatest part of America, which lies betwixt Peru and Bresill, although the bounds be knowne of all sides, wherein there is diversitie of opinions ; some say it is a drowned land, full of Lakes and waterie places ; others affirme there are great and flourishing kingdomes, imagining there be the Paytiti, the Dorado, and the Cassars, where they say are wonderfull things. I have heard one of our Company say, a man worthy of credit, that hee had seene great dwellings there, and the waies as much beaten, as those betwixt Salamanca and Valladolid ; the which he did see, whenas Pedro de Ursua, and after, those that succeeded him, made their entrie and discoverie by the great river of Amazons, who beleeving that the Dorado which they sought was farther off, cared not to inhabite there, and after went both without the Dorado, which they could not finde, and this great Province which they left. To speake the truth, the habitations of America are to this day vnknowne, except the extrearnities, which are Peru, Bresill, and that part where the land beginnes to straighten, which is the 172 THE UNKNOWN LANDS. LIB. in. YivQY Of Silver, then Tucuman, which makes the round toChille and Charcas. Of late we have vnderstood by lettersfrom some of ours which go to Santa Cruz de la Sierra, thatthey go discovering of great Provinces and dwellings,betwixt Bresill and Peru. Time will reveile them, for asat this day the care and courage of men is great, to compasse the world from one part to another; so wee maybeleeve, that as they have discovered that which is nowknowne, they may likewise lay open that which remaines,to the end the Gospell may be preached to the whole world,seeing the two Crownes of Portugall and Castille, have metby the East and West, ioyning their discoveries together,which in truth is a matter to be observed, that the one iscome to China and lappan by the East, and the other tothe Philippines, which are neighbours, and almost ioyningvnto China, by the West ; for from the Hands of Lusson,which is the chiefe of the Philippines, in the which is theCitie of Manilla, vnto Macao, which is in the He of Canton,are but foure score or a hundred leagues, and yet we findeit strange, that notwithstanding this small distance fromthe one to the other, yet according to their accoumpt, thereis a daics difference betwixt them ; so as it is SundayatMacao, whenas it is but Saterday at Manilla, and so of therest. Those of Macao and of China have one day advancedbefore the Philippines. It happened to father AlonsoSanches, of whom mention is made before, that partingfrom the Philippines, he arrived at Macao the second day ofMaie, according to their computation, and going to say theMasse of S. Athanasius, he found they did celebrate thefeast of the invention of the holy Crosse, for that they didthen reckon the third of Maie. The like happened vntohim in another voyage beyond it. Some have found this alteration and diversitie strange,supposing that the fault proceedes from the one or theother, the which is not so; but it is a true and well DIFFERENCE OF TIME. 173 observed computation, for according to the difference of LlB - waies where they have beene, we must necessarily say, that when they meete, there must bee difference of a day ; the reason is, for that sailing from West to East, they alwaies gaine of the day, finding the sunne rising sooner ; and contrariwise, those that saile from East to West, do alwaies loose of the day, for that the Sunne riseth later vnto them ; and as they approach neerer the East or the West, they have the day longer or shorter. In Peru, which is west ward in respect of Spaine, they are above sixe houres behinde ; so as when it is noone in Spaine, it is morning at Peru ; and when it is morning heere, it is mid night there. I have made certaine proofe thereof, by the computation of Eclipses of the Sunne and Moone. Now that the Portugalls have made their navigations from West to East, and the Castillians from east to west, when they came to ioyne and meete at the Philippines and Macao, the one have gained twelve houres, and the other hath lost as much ; so as at one instant, and in one time, they finde the difference of twentie houres, which is a whole day ; so as necessarily, the one are at the third of Maie, whenas the others accoumpt but the second ; and whenas the one doth fast for Easter eve, the others eate flesh for the day of the resurrection. And if we will imagine that they passe farther, turning once againe about the world, vsing the same computation, when they should returne to ioyne together, they should finde by the same accoumpt, two daies difference ; for as I have saide, those that go to the Sunne rising, accoumpt the day sooner, for that the Sunne riseth to them sooner, and those that go to the setting, accoumpt the day later, for that it goes from them, later; finally, the diversitie of the noone tide causeth the divers reckoning of the day. And now for as much as those that doe saile from East to West, change their noone tide without perceiving it, and yet still follow the same computation they did when they parted, of 1 74 VOLCANOS. LIB. m. necessitie^ having made the compasse of the worlde, theymust finde the want of a whole day in their computation. CHAP. xxiv. Of Hie Volcanos or Vents offire. Although we finde vents of fire in other places, as mountand Wesuvio, which now they call mount Soma, yetis that notable which is found at the Indies. Ordinarilythese Volcanos be rockes or pikes of most high mountaines,which raise themselves above the toppes of all other mountaines. Upon their toppes they have a plaine, and in themidst thereof a pitte or great mouth, which discends evenvnto the foote thereof a thing verie terrible to beholde.Out of these mouthes there issues smoke, and sometimesfire; some cast little smoke, and have in a maner no forceof Volcanos, as that of Arequipa, which is of an vnmeasurableheight, and almost all sand. It cannot be mounted vp inlesse then two daies, yet they have not found any shew offire, but onely the reliques of some sacrifices wlrch theIndians made while they were Gentiles, and sometimes it doth cause a little smoke. The Volcan of Mexico, which isneere to the Puebla de los Angeles, is likewise of an admirableheight, whereas they mount thirty leagues in turning ; fromthis Volcan issueth not continually, but sometimes, almostevery day a great exhalation or whirlwinde of smoake, whichascends directly vp, like to the shot of a Crossebow, andgrowes after like to a great plume of feathers, vntill it ceaseth quite, and is presently converted into an obscure anddarke cloude. Most commonly it riseth in the morningafter the Sunne rising, and at night when it setteth, althoughI have seene it breake out at other times. Sometimes it dooth cast foorth great store of ashes after this smoke.They have not yet seene any fire come from it, yet they feareit will issue forth and burne al the land round about, which VOLOANOS. 175 is the best of all the kingdome. And they holde it for certaine that there is some correspondencie betwixt this Vulcan and the Sierra of Tlascala, which is neere vnto it, that causeth the great thunders and lightnings they doe commonly heare and see in those parts. Some Spaniards have mounted vppe to this Volcano, and given notice of the mine of sulphre to make powder thereof. Cortes reportes the care hee had to discover what was in this Volcano. The Volcans of Guatimala are more renowned, as well for their greatnesse and height, which those that saile in the South Sea discover a farre off, as for the violence and terrour of the fire it casts. The three and twentieth day of December, in the yeere of our Lord God one thousand five hundred eighty and sixe, almost all the Cittie of Guati mala fell with an earthquake, and some people slain. This Volcano had then, sixe moneths together, day and night, cast out from the toppe, and vomited as it were a floud of fire, the substance falling vpon the sides of the Volcan was turned into ashes, like vnto burnt earth a thing passing man s iudgement to conceive how it could cast so much matter from its centre during sixe moneths, being accus tomed to caste smoke alone, and that sometimes with small flashes. This was written vnto me, being at Mexico, by a Secretarie of the Audienca of Guatimala, a man worthy of credite, and at that time it had not ceased to cast out fire. This yeere past, in Quito, I being in the Cittie of Kings, the Volcano which is neere therevnto, cast such aboundance of ashes, that in many leagues compasse thereabout it darkned the light of the day, and there fell such store in Quito as they were not able to goe in the streetes. There have beene other Volcanos seene which cast neither smoake, flame, nor yet ashes, but in the botome they are seene to burn with a quicke fire without dying; such a one was that which in our time a covetous and greedy Priest seeing, perswaded himselfe that they were heapes of golde hee did see burn- 176 VOLCANOS. LlB m- ing, imagining it coulde be no other matter or substancewhich had burnt so many yeeres and not consumed. Andin this conceit hee made certaine kettles with chaines, andan instrument to gather and drawe vp the golde out of thispitte or Volcano; but the fire scorned him, for no soonerdid his yron chaine and caldron approach neere the fire,but sodainely they were broken in peeces. Yet some toldemee that this man was still obstinate, seeking other inventions for to drawe out this golde as he imagined. CHAP. xxv. What sliould be the reason wluj the fire andsmoalie continues so lomj in these Volcanos ? There is no neede now to make any mention of otherVolcanos, seeing wee may well vnderstand by the formerwhat they are; yet is it woorthy the search what should bethe cause why the fire and smoake continues in these Volcanos, for that it seemes a prodigious thing, yea, against thecourse of nature, to vomite and cast out so many flames.Whence dooth this matter proceede, or whether it be iu-gendred within the bowelles thereof? Some have heldopinion that these Volcanos consume the inner substancethey have of nature; and for this reason they beleeve thatnaturally they shal end whenas they have consumed thefuell (as a man may say) that is within them. Accordingto which opinion we see at this day some mountaines androckes, from whence they drawe a burnt stone which islight, but very hard, and is excellent to builde with, asthat which is carried to Mexico. And in effect there aresome shewes of that which hath beene spoken, that thesemountaines or rockes hadde sometimes a naturall fire,which hath died after the matter was consumed; and sothese stones have remayned burnt and pierced with thefire as we see. For my part I will not contradict it, that in VOLCANOS. 177 those places there hath not bin fire sometimes, or volcanos. LlB - m- But there is some difficultie to beleeve it should be so in all volcanos, considering the matter they cast out is almost infinite, and that being gathered together it could not be contained in the same concavitie from whence it goes. Moreover, there are some volcanos, that in hundreds, yea, thousands of yeeres, are alwaies of one fashion, casting out continually smoke, fire, and ashes. Plinie the Historiogra pher of naturall things (as the other Pliuie his nephew reports) searching out the secret how this should passe, and approching too neere th exhalation of fire of one of these volcanos, died, and thinking by his diligence to find an end thereof, had an end of his life. For my parte, vpon this consideration I think, that as ther are places in th earth whose vertue is to draw vaporous matter and to con vert it into water, which be the fountaines that alwayes runne, and have alwayes matter to make them ruiine, 1 for that they drawe vnto them the substance of water : in like sorte there are places that have the propertie to draw vnto them note exhalations, and to convert them into fire and smoke which, by their force and violence, cast out other thicke matter which dissolves into ashes, into pumico stone, or such like substance. For a sufficient argument to prove it to be so in these volcanos, they sometimes cast smoke, and not alwaies, and sometimes fire, and not alwaies, which is according to what it can drawe vnto it, and digest, as the fountaines which in winter abound and in summer decrease; yea, some are quite dried vp, according to the force and vigour they have and the matter that is presented : even so it is of these volcanos, which cast fire more or lesse at certaine seasons. Others say that it is hell fire which issueth there, to serve as a warning, thereby to consider what is in the other life : but if hell (as Divines holde) be in the centre of the earth, the which containes in diameter 1 " Que siempre manan, y siempre tieneu de que manar." N 178 EARTHQUAKES. LIB. in. aboye two thousand leagues, we can not iudge that thisBasil, psai. fire is from the centre ; for that hell fire (as Saint Basil andm Hexa. other Saints teach) is very different from this which wee see,that it is without light, and burneth without comparisonmuch more then ours. And therefore I conclude, thatwhat I have saide, seemes to me more reasonable. CHAP. xxvi. Of Earthquakes. Some have held that, from these Yolcanos which are atthe Indies, the earthquakes proceed, being very commonthere ; but for that they ordinarily chance in places farrefrom those Volcanos it can not be the totall cause. It istrue, they have a certaine simpathy one with another, forthat the hote exhalations which engender in the inner concavities of the earth, seeme to be the materiall substanceoffire in the Volcanos, whereby there kindleth an other moregrosse matter, and makes these shewes of flame and smokethat come forth. And these exhalations (finding no easieissue in the earth) move it to issue forth with greatviolence, wherby we heare that horrible noise vnder theearth, and likewise the shaking of the earth, being stirredwith this burning exhalation ; even as gunpowder in mines,having fire put to it, breakes rockes and walles : and as thechesnut laid into the fire leapes and breakes with a noyse,whenas it casts forth the aire (which is contained withinthe huske) by the force of the fire : even so, these Earthquakes do most commonly happen in places neere the wateror sea. As we see in Europe and at the Indies, that townesand cities farthest from the sea and waters are least afflictedtherewith ; and contrariwise, those that are seated vponportes of the sea, vpon rivers, the sea coast, and places neerevnto them, feele most this calamitie. There hath happenedin Peru (the which is wonderfull, and worthy to be noted)Earthquakes which have runne from Chile vnto Quito, and EARTHQUAKES. 179 that is above fine hundred leagues,, I say the greatest that LlB - ever I heard speake of, for lesser be more common there. Vpon the coast of Chile (I remember not well in what yeare) there was so terrible an earthquake, as it overturned whole mountains, and thereby stopped the course of rivers which it converted into lakes, it beat downe townes, and slew a great number of people, causing the sea to leave her place some leagues, so as the shippes remained on drie ground, farre from the ordinary roade, with many other heavie and horrible things. And, as I well remember, they say this trouble and motion, caused by the earth quake, ranne three hundred leagues alongest the coast. Soon after, which was in the yeere eighty two, happened that earthquake of Arequipa, which in a manner overthrew the whole citie. Since, in the yeere eightie sixe, the nineth of lune, fell an other earthquake in the cittie of Kings, the which, as the Viceroy did write, hadde runne a hundred three score and tenne leagues alongest the coast, and over- thwart in the Sierra fiftie leagues. The mercy of the Lord was great in this earth quake, to forewarne the people by a great noyse which they heard a little before the earth quake, who, taught by former experiences, presently put themselves in safetie, leaving their houses, streetes, and gardins, to go into the fieldes ; so as, although it ruined a great parte of the Cittie, and of the chiefest buildings, yet there died not above fifteene or twenty persons of all the inhabitants. It caused the like trouble and motion at sea, as it had done at Chile, which happened presently after the earthquake, so as they might see the sea furiously to flie out of her boundes, and to runne neere two leagues into the land, rising above fourteene fadorne : it covered all that plaine, so as the ditches and peeces of wood that were there swamme in the water. There was yet an other earthquake in the realme and Cittie of Quito ; and it seemes all these notable earthquakes vppon that coast have succeeded one N2 180 EARTHQUAKES. LlB - m- an other by order, as in trueth it is subiect to these inconveniences. And therefore, although vpon the coast of Peruthere be no torments from, heaven, as thunder and lightning, yet are they not without feare vppon the land : andsoeverie one hath before his eies the Heraults of divine Justice,to moove him to feare God. For, as the Scripture saith,Fecit hcec vt timeatur. Returning then, to our purpose,Isay the sea coast is most subiect to these earthquakes, thereason is, in my iudgenient, for that the water dooth stopthe conduites and passages of the earth, by which the hoteexhalations should passe, which are engendered there. Andalso the humiditie thickning the superficies of the earthdooth cause the fumes and hot exhalations to goe close together and incounter violently in the bowells of the earth,which doe afterwards breake forth. Some have observed that such earthquakes have vsuallyhapned whenas a rainie season falles after some drie yeeres.Wherevpon they say, that the Earthquakes are most rarewhere are most welles, the which is approoved by experience. Those of the Cittie of Mexico hold opinion, that theLake whereon it is seated, is the cause of the Earthquakesthat happen there, although they be not very violent : andit is most certaine that the Townes and Provinces farrewithin the land, and farthest from the sea, receive sometimes great losses by these earthquakes, as the Cittie ofChachapoyas at the Indies, and in Italie that of Ferrara,although vpon this subiect; it seemes this latter, beingneere to a river, and not farre from the Adriatic sea, shouldrather be numbred among the sea-Townes. In the yeereofour Lord one thousand five hundred eightie and one, inChuqui-apu, a Cittie of Peru, otherwise called La Paz,there hapned a strange accident touching this subiect. Avillage called Angoango, 1 where many Indians dwelt that1 Ancu-ancu, a hamlet in the parish of Achacache, which is the capital of the province of Omasuyos, on the eastern side of lake Titicaca. EMBRACING OF LAND AND SEA. 181 were sorcerers and idolatrers, fell sodainely to mine, so as LlB> a great parte thereof was raised vp and carried away3 and many of the Indians smothered, and that which seems in credible (yet testified by men of credit) the earth that was ruined and so beaten downe, did runne and slide vpon the land for the space of a league and a halfe, as it had beene water or wax molten, so as it stopt and filled vppe a Lake, and remayned so spread over the whole countrey. CHAP, xxvii. How the land and sea imbrace one an other. I will end with this element of earth, vniting it to the precedent of water, whose order and embracing is truely of it selfe admirable. These two elements have one spheare divided betweene them, and entertaine and embrace one another in a thousand sortes and maners. In some places the water encounters the land furiously as an enemy, and in other places it invirons it after a sweete and amiable manner. There are partes whereas the sea enters far within the land, as comming to visite it; and in other partes the land makes restitution, casting his capes, points, and tongues farre into the sea, piercing into the bowelles thereof. In some partes one element ends and another beginnes, yeelding by degrees one vnto another. In some places, where they ioyne, it is exceeding deepe, as in the Hands of the South Sea, and in those of the North, whereas the shippes ride close to the land ; and, although they found three score and tenne, yea foure score fadomes, yet do they finde no bottome, which makes men coniecture that these are pikes or poynts of land which rise vp from the bottome, a matter woorthy of great admiration. Heerevpon a very expert Pilote said vnto me, that the Hands which they call of Woolves, and others, that lie at the entry of the coast of New Spaine, beeing called Cocos, were of this manner. 182 SHAPE OF SOUTH AMERICA. LIB. in. Moreover, there is a place in the midst of the greatOcean, without the view of land, and many leagues from it, where are seene as it were two towers or pikes of a veryhigh elevated rocke, rising out of the middest of the sea,and yet ioyning vnto it they finde no bottome. No mancan yet perfectly comprehend, nor conceive the full andperfect forme of the land at the Indies, the boundes beingnot wholly discovered to this day : yet wee may guessethat it is proportioned like a heart with the lungs. Thebroadest of this heart is from Bresill to Peru, the poynt atthe straight of Magellan, and the top where it ends is thefirme land, and there the continent begins by little andlitle to extend it selfe vritill wee come to the height ofFlorida and the vpper laudes, which are not yet well discovered. We may vnderstand other particularities of thisland at the Indies, by the Commentaries which the Spaniardshave written of their successe and discoveries; and amongestthe rest, of the Peregrination which I have written ; whichin trueth is strange, and may give a great light. This, inmy opinion, may suffice at this time to give som knowledgeof things at the Indies, touching the common elements, ofthe which all parts of the worlde are famed. THE FOVRTH BOOKEOf the Naturall and Morall Historic of the Indies. CHAP. i. Of three kindes of mixtures or compounds, of the which I must intreate in this Historie. HAVING intreated in the former booke of that which con- LlB - cernes the Elements, and the simples of the Indies, in this present booke we will discourse of mixtures and compounds, seeming fit for the subject we shall treate of. And although there be many other sundrie kindes, yet we will reduce this matter into three, which are Mettalls, Plants, and Beasts. Mettalls are (as plants) hidden and buried in i the bowels of the earth, which have some conformitie in/ themselves, in the forme and maner of their production ; for that wee see and discover even in them, branches, and as it were a bodie, from whence they grow and proceede, which are the greater veines and the lesse, so as they have a knitting in themselves : and it seemes properly that these ininerales grow like vnto plants, not that they have any inward vegitative life, being onely proper to plants : but they are engendered in the bowels of the earth, by the vertue and force of the Sunne and other planets, and in long continuance of time they increase and multiply after the manner of plants. And even as mettalls be pl hidden in the earth, so we may say, that plants be living creatures fixed in one place, whose life is maintained by the nourishment which Nature furnisheth from their first beginning. But living creatures surpasse plants, in that 184 STUDY OF GOD S WORKS. LIB. iv. they have a more perfect being ; and therefore have needeof a more perfect foode and nourishment ; for the searchwhereof, Nature hath given them a moving and feeling to, discover and discerne it. So as the rough and barren earthvis as a substance and nutriment for mettalls ; and thatwhich is fertile and better seasoned a nourishment forplants. The same plants serve as a nourishment for livingcreatures, and the plants and living creatures together as anourishment for men ; the inferiour nature alwaies servingfor the maintenance and sustentation of the superiour, andthe lesse perfect yeelding vnto the more perfect : wherebywe may see how much it wants, that gold and silver andother things which men so much esteem e by their covetousiiesse, should be the happiness of man, wherevnto he shouldtend, seeing they be so many degrees in qualitie inferior toman, who hath been created and made onely to be a subjectto serve the vniversall Creator of all things, as his properend and perfect rest, and to which man, all other things inthis world, were not propounded or left, but to gaine thislast end. Afyho so would consider of things created, anddiscourse according to this Philosophic, might draw somefruite from the knowledge and consideration thereof, makingvse of them to know and glorifie their Author. But hethat would passe on farther to the knowledge of their properties and profits, and would curiously search them out,hee shall finde in these creatures, that which the Wisemansaies, that they are snares and pitfallcs to the feete ofSap. xiv. fooles and ignorant, into the which they fall and loosethemselves daily. To this intent therefore, and that theCreator may be glorified in his creatures, I pretend to spcakeof some things in this Booke, whereof there are manyatthe Indies worth the report, touching mettalls, plants, andbeasts, which are proper and peculiar in those parts. Butfor that it were a great worke to treate thereof exactly, andrequires greater learning and knowledge ; yea, much more USES OF METALS. 185 leisure than I have, my intent is only to treate of some LlB - Iv- tilings succinctly, the which I have observed, as well by experience, as the report of men of credite, touching these three things which I have propounded, leaving to men more curious and diligent to treate more amply of these matters. CHAP. ii. Of the aboundance and great guantitie of Mettall at the West Indies. The wisedome of God hath made mettalls for phisicke, and for defence, for ornament, and for instruments for the worke of men, of which foure things we may easily yeelde examples, but the principall end of mettalls, and the last thereof, is, for that the life of man hath not onely neede of nourishment as the beasts, but also he must worke and labour according vnto the reason and capacitie which the Creator hath given him. And as mans understanding doth apply itself to diverse artes and faculties, so the same Author hath given order, that hee should finde matter and subiect to diverse artes, for the conservation, reparation, suretie, ornament and exaltation of his workes. The diversitie therefore of mettalls, which the Creator hath shut vp in the closets and concavities of the earth, is such and so great that man drawes profit and commoditie from everie one of them. Some serve for curing of diseases, others for armes and for defence against the enemies, some are for ornament and beautifying of our persons and houses, and others are fit to make vessels and yron-workes, with divers fashions of instruments, which the industry of man hath found out and put in practise. But above all the vses of mettalls, which bee simple and natural, the communication and commerce of men hath found out one, which is the vse of money, the which (as the Philosopher saieth) is the 186 GOLD AND SILVER. LIB. IT. measure of all things. And although, naturally, and ofArist. v, it selfe, it be but one onely thing, yet in value and estimaEthio., cap. 5 - tion, wee may say that it is all things. Mony is vnto vs asit weare, meate, clothing, house, horse, and generally whatsoever man hath neede of. By this meanes all obeyes toEccies. x. m0ny, and as the Wiseman saith, to finde an invention thatone thing should be all. Men, guided or thrust forward bya naturall instinct, choose the thing most durable and mostmaniable, which is mettall, and amongst mettalls, gavethem the preheminence in this invention of mony, which oftheir nature were most durable and incorruptible, which is silver and golde. The which have bin in esteeme, not onlieamongst the Hebrewes, Assirians, Greekes, Komans, andother nations of Europe and Asia, but also amongst themost retyped and barbarous nations of the world, as by theIndians both East and West, where gold and silver is heldin great esteeme, imploying it for the workes of theirTemples and Pallaces, and for the attyring and ornament ofkings and great personages. And although we have foundsome Barbarians, which know neither gold nor silver, as it is reported of those of Florida, which tooke the baggesand sackes wherein the silver was, the which they cast vponthe ground, and left as a thing vnprofitable. And Plinielikewise writes of the Babitacques, which abhorred gold,and therefore they buried it, to the end that no man shouldvse it. But at this day they finde few of these Floridiansor Babitacques, but great numbers of such as esteeme,seeke, and make accoumpt of gold and silver, having noneede to learne it of those who go from Europe. It is true,there covetousnesse is not yet come to the height of ours,neither have they so much worshipped gold and silver, although they were Idolaters, as some blinde Christians, whohave committed many great out-rages for gold and silver. Yet is it a thing very worthy of consideration, that thewisedome of the Etemail Lord would inrich those partes MINERAL WEALTH OP PERU. 187 of the world which are most remote, and which are peopled LlB - IV- with men of lesse civilitie and governement, planting there great store of mines, and in the greatest aboundance that ever were, thereby to invite men to search out those lands, and to possesse them, to the end that by this occasion, they might plant religion and the worship of the true God, amongst those that knew it not, fulfilling therein the prophecie of Isaiah, saying, that the Church should stretch forth her boundes, not onely to the right, but also to the left : which is vnderstood as S. Augustine saieth, that the a Gospell should be spread abroad, not onely by those that 3[ ang<)Cap sincerely, and with a true and perfect charity, preach and declare it, but also by those that publish it, tending to temporall ends ; whereby wee see, that the Indian land, being more aboundant in mines and riches, hath beene in our age best instructed in the Christian religion, the Lord vsing our desires and inclinations to serve his soveraigne intentions. Herevpon a Wise man said, that what a father doth to marie his daughter wel, is to give her a great por tion in manage ; the like hath God done for this land so rough and laboursome, giving it great riches in mines, that by this meanes it might be the more sought after. At the West Indies then there are a great store of mines of all sortes of mettalls, as copper, yron, lead, tinne, quicke-silver, silver and gold : and amongst all the regions and partes of, the Indies, the realmes of Peru abound most in these met- .. tails, especially with gold, silver, quicke-silver, or mercurie, whereof they have found great store, and daily discover new mines. And without doubt, according to the qualitie of the earth, those which are to discover, are without com parison farre more in number then those which are yet discovered : yea, it seemes that all the land is sowed with these mettalls, more then any other in the world that is yet knowne vnto us, or that ancient writers have made men tion of, 188 RICHES OF THE INDIES. CHAP. in. Of the qualitie and nature of the earth where themettalls are found, and that all these mettalls are not imployed at the Indies, and how the Indians vsed them. LIB. iv. The reason why there is so great aboundance of mettalls~~ at the Indies (especially at the West of Peru, as I havesaide) is the will of the Creator, who hath imparted hisgiftes as it pleased him. But comming to a naturall andPhiio., lib. philosophicall reason, it is very true, which Philon a wisev, cle Genes. rman writes, saying, that gold, silver, and mettalls grow\ \ naturally in land that is most barren and vnfruitefull. Andwe see, that in lands of good temperature, the which arefertile with grasse and fruites, there are seldome found anyEuseb., lib* mines ; for that Nature is contented to give them vigour toviii, de pre- par.evang., bring forth fruites more necessarie for the preservation andmaintenance of the life of beasts and men. And contrariwise to lands that are very rough, drie, and barren (as in(the highest mountains and inaccessible rockes of a roughtemper) they finde mines of silver, of quicke-silver, and ofgold ; and all those riches (which are come into Spaine sincethe West Indies were discovered) have beene drawne outof such places which are rough and full, bare and fruitlesse : yet the taste of this mony makes these places pleasing andagreeable, yea, well inhabited with numbers of people.And although there be, as I have said, many mines of all kinds of mettalls as at the Indies, yet they vse none butthose of gold and silver, and as much quicke-silver as is necessarie to refine their gold and silver. They carrie yronthither from Spaine and China. As for copper, the Indianshave drawne of it, and vsed it for their arines, the whichwere not vsually of yron, but of copper. Since the Spaniardspossessed the Indies, they have drawne very little, neitherdo they take the paine to seeke out these mines, althoughthere be many busying themselves in the search of richer USE OF BARTER. 189 and more precious mettalls, wherein they spend their time LlD> IT - and labour. They vse no other mettalls, as copper and yron, but only that which is sent them from Spaine, or that which remaines of the refining of gold and silver. We finde not that the Indians in former times vsed gold, silver, or any other mettall for mony, and for the price of things, but only for ornament, as hath been said, whereof there was great quantitie in their Temples, Palaces, and Toombes, with a thousand kindes of vessels of gold and silver, which they had. They vsed no gold nor silver to trafficke or buy withall, but did change and trucke one thing for another,, as Homer and Plinie report of the Ancients. They had xSiifcajsome other things of greater esteerne which went current amongst them for price, and in steede of coine ; and vnto this day this custoine continues amongst the Indians, as in the Provinces of Mexico, in steede of money they vse cacao, which is a small fruit, and therewith buy what they will. In Peru they vse coca to the same end, the which is a leafe the Indians esteeme much, as in Paraguay, they have stamps of yron for coine, and cotten woven in Santa Cruz de la Sierra. Finally, the maner of the Indians trafficke, and their buying and selling, was to exchange, and give things for things; and although there were great martes and famous faires, yet had they no neede of mony, nor of brokers, for that every one had learned what he was to give in exchange for every kinde of merchandise. Since the Spaniards entred, the Indians have vsed gold and silver to buy withall ; and in the beginning there was no coine, but silver by weight was their price and mony, as they report of the ancient Romans. Since, for a greater benefite, thev Plin lib - J xxxiii, c. 4. have forged coine in Mexico and Peru, yet vnto this day they have not in the West Indies coined any mony of copper or other mettall but only of silver and golde ; for the richnes of that Countrie hath not admitted nor received 190 GOLD. LIB. iv. suc],j mony ag they call bullion, nor other kindes of alloy, which they use in Italie, and in other Provinces of Europe.Although in some Hands of the Indies, as San Domingoand Puerto Kico, they vse coine of leather which is square,the which are currant onely in those Hands, having little silver or gold. I say little, although there be much, forthat no man digges it and refines it. Bat for that theriches of the Indies, and their manner to labour in themines, consistes of golde, silver, and quicke-silver. I will speake something of these three mettalls, leaving the restfor this time. CHAP. iv. Of gold wldcli tlicij dig and refine at tlie Indies, \ Gold amongst other mettals hath bin always held themost excellent, and with reason, being the most durableand incorruptible of all others ; for fire which consumesand diminishes the rest amends it, and brings it to perfection. Golde which hath often passed through the fire, keepeshis colour, and is most fine and pure, which properly is called, as Plinie saith, Obriso, whereof the Scripture makesso often mention, and vse, which consumeth all otherpiin., lib. mettalles, as the same Plinie saith, dooth not any thinoxxxiii, c. 3. * waste golde, nor yet hurte it, neither is it eaten nor growetholde.jAnd although his substance and body be firine andsolide, yet dooth it yielde and bow woonderfully ; thebeaters and drawers of golde knowe well the force it hathto bee drawen out without breaking. All which thingswell considered, with other excellent properties, will giveand xxi 1 tnen of iudgment to vnderstand, wherefore the holie Scripcant. in. ture dooth compare Charitie to golde. To conclude, therePsaim ixvii. is little neede to relate the excellencies thereof to make it 3 Re<?. vi. more desirable. For the greatest excellencie it hath, is tobe knowne, as it is, amongst men, for the supreaine power GOLD. 191 and greatnesse of the worlde. Coming therefore to onr LlB - IY- subject; at the Indies there is great abundance of this mettall, and it is wel knowne by approved histories that the Yncas of Peru did not content themselves with great and small vessels of gold, as pots, cups, goblets, and flagons ; yea with kowles or great vessels, but they had chaires also and litters of massie golde, and in their temples they had set vppe manie Images of pure gold, whereof they find some yet at Mexico, but not such store as when the first Conquerours came into the one and the other kingdome, who found great treasure, and without doubt there was much more hidden in the arth by the Indians. It would seem ridiculous to reporte that they have made their horse shooes of silver for want of yron, and that they have payd three hundred crownes for a bottle of wine, and other strange things ; and yet in trueth this hath come to passe, yea and greater matters. They drawe golde in those partes after three sorts, or at the least, I have seene all three vsed. For either they find gold in graines, in powder, or in stone. They do call golde in graines, small morsels of gold, which they finde whole, without mix ture of any other mettall, which hath no neede of melting or refining in the fire : and they call them pippins, for that commonly they are like to pippins, or seeds of melons, or pompions : and that wherof lob speakes, when he saies, iob xxviii. glelce illius aurum, though sometimes there be greater, and such as I have seene weighed many poundes. It is the excellencie of this mettall alone, as Plinie affirmes, to be rim., Hb. xxxiv, ca. 4. found thus pure and perfect, which is not seene in any other mettalles, which are alwayes earthy, and have a scumme, and rieede purging by the fire : I have likewise seene silver like to hoar frost. There is an other kinde which the Indians call papas; and sometimes they find peeces very fine and pure, like to small round rootes, the which is rare in that mettall, but vsual in gold. They 192 GOLD. LIB. iv. gn(je little of this golde in pippin, in respect of the otherkindes. Golde in stone is a veine of gold that groweth oringendereth within the stone or flint, as I have seene in themines of Saruma, within the government of Salinas, verygreat stones pierced and intermixed with gold ; others thatwere halfe gold, and half stone. The golde which growethin this manner is found in pittes or mines, which havetheir veines like to the silver mines, but it is very hard todrawe it foorth : Agatarchides writes in his first bookeof the Erythrean or red sea (as Phocion reportes in hisBibliotheca), of the manner and fashion to refine golde,the which the antient Kings of Egypt were wont to vse,and it is a strange thing to see how that which is writtenresembles properly to the manner they vse at this day inrefining these mettalls of golde and silver. The greatestquantitie of golde which is drawne at the Indies is that inpowder, the which is found in streames and places wheremuch water hath passed, because the rivers of Indiaabound in this kinde of golde. As the Ancients for thisoccasion did celebrate the river of Tagus in Spain, Pactolusin Asia, and Ganges in the East Indies, and calledEamenta auri, what we call golde in powder, and ofthis sort is the greatest quantitie of golde they haveat this day. At this present, in the Hands of Barlovent,Hispaniola, Cuba, and Puerto Rico, there hath beene, andisgreat quantity in the rivers, but they bring little fromthence into Spaine, for want of the naturall inhabitants ofthe countrie, and the difficultie to drawe it. There is greataboundance in the kingdome of Chilie, of Quito, and inthe new realme of Grenada. The most famous golde is that of Caravaya in Peru, andof Yaldivia in Chilie, for that it riseth with his alloy andperfection, which is twenty three carats and a halfe, andsometimes more. They make accoinpt likewise of the goldof Veragua to be very fine. They bring much golde to GOLD. 193 Mexico from the Philippines, and China, but commonly it LTI IV - is weake, and of base alloy. Gold is commonly found inixt with silver or with copper, but that which is mixed with silver is commonly of fewer carats then that which is mixed with copper. If there be a fift parte of silver, Plinie S^a. 1?saieth, it is then properly called Electrum, which hath the property to shine more at the light of the fire then fine gold or fine silver. That which is incorporate with copper, is commonly of a higher value. They refine powdred golde in basens, washing it in many waters until the sand falles from it, and the golde as most heavie remaineth in the bottome. They refine it likewise with quicke-silver and strong water, for that the allume whereof they make this water hath the virtue to separate gold from drosse, or from other mettalls. After it is purified and molten, they make brickes or small barres to carry it vnto Spain ; for being in powder they cannot transport it from the Indies, for they can neither custome it, marke it, nor take assay, until it be molten. The foresaide Historiographer reporteth that SSiJo! Spaine above all other Countries of the world did abound in gold and silver, especially Galicia and Portugall, and above all the Asturias, whence hee saieth they brought every yeere twenty thousand pounds of golde, and that they found not so great aboundance in any other place. The which is confirmed in the booke of Maccabees, where it is iMaccab. saide, that amongest the great riches of the Romans, they had in their power the golde and silver of Spaine. At this day the great treasure of Spaine comes from the Indies, wherein the divine Providence hath appoynted one Eealme to serve another, which doe im parte their wealth to partici pate their government for the good the one of the other, in communicating mutually the goodes and graces they doe injoy ; wee can not value nor esteeme the quantitie of gold that is brought from the Indies, but we may well say, it is much more then that which Pliny reports was brought 194 SILVER. LIB. iv. y eerely from Spaine to Rome. In the fleete where I came,~ which was in the yeere 1585, the declaration of the firme/land was of twelve cassons or chests of golde, every cassonat the least weighed four arrobas, that is a hundred weight,and a thousand fifty and sixe rnarcs from New Spaine,which was for the King only, besides that which cameforMerchants and private men being registered, and muchthat came unregistred. This may suffice touching thegolde of the Indies, and now we will speake of silver. CHAP. v. Of the Silver at the Indies. Job xxviii. We rcade these wordes in the Booke of lob, Silver hathcertain beginnings and roots in his veins, and golde hathasetled place, where it ingenders and thickens, yron withdigging is drawnc out of the earth, and stone molten withheate is turned into copper." 1 Hereby he wisely shewesinfew words the nature of silver, gold, yron and copper. Wehave spoken something of the places where golde is ingendcred and congealed, which is either of the foresaide stonesin the depth of inountaines, and in the bowells of the earth,or in the sand of rivers and where brookes have runne,orelse on the toppes of mountaines, the which golde in powder runncs downe with the water. And this is the common opinion they holde at the Indies. Wherevppon manyof the common sort believe that the deluge having drownedall, even to the highest hills, hath beene the cause thatatthis day they finde this golde in the rivers, and in placesso farre off. Now we wil shew how they discover the minesof silver, their veines, rootes, and beginnings whereof lobspeakes. 1 " Surely there is a vein for the silver, and a place for gold wherethey fine it." " Iron is taken out of the earth, and brass is molten out of the stone."Jol) xxviii, 1 , 2. SILVER. 195 And first I will say, that the reason why they give silver LlB - Iv - the second place among- all other rnettalles is, for that it approacheth neerer to golde then any other, being more durable and lesse indarnaged by the fire, and more maniablc then any other ; yea it passeth golde in brightnesse, beauty and sound, the which is cleere and agreeable, for the colour is more conformable and resembling the light, and the sound more percing, more lively, and more delicate. Like wise there are some places where they value silver more then golde. It is yet an argument to judge that gold is more pretious than other mettalls for that it is found with greater difficultie, and Nature seems more sparing in bring ing it foorth, although there be countries, as they say of Chine, where they find golde more easily than silver ; yet it is more common and ordinarie to finde silver with more facilitie and greater abundance then gold. The Crea tor hath furnished the West Indies with so great a treasure of silver, as all that which we reade of in antient Histories and that which is spoken of the mines of Spaine, and other provinces, is not comparable to that we see in those partes. The mines of silver are commonly found in mountaines, and high rockes very desart, although they have sometimes bin found in Plaines and Champaines. There are two different kindes, the one they call straggling, the other fixed and settled. The straggling are peeces of mettall found in certaine places, the which dravvne away there is no more found. But the fixed veines are those which have a con tinuance in depth and length, like to great branches and armes of trees, and when they find anie one of them they commonly finde many in the same place. The maner to purge and refine siluer which the Indians have vsed was by melting, in dissolving this masse of mettall by fire, which casts the earthly drosse aparte, and by his force separates silver from lead, tinne from copper, and other mettalls mixt. To this end they did build small furnaces in places whereas I o 2 SILVER. LIB. iv. 1 the wind did commonly blow, and with wood and cole mader their refining, the which furnaces in Peru they call huayras.Since the Spaniards entred, besides this manner of refiningwhich they vse to this day, they likewise refine silver withqvick-silver, and draw more by this means then in refiningit by fire. For there is some kind of silver mettall foundwhich can by no means be purged and refined by fire, butonely with quicksilver. But this kind of mettall is commonly poore arid weake, the which vsually they findeingreatest aboundance. They call that poore which yields leastsilver and great quantitie of other mettall, and that rich whichyieldes most silver. It is strange to see not onely the difference betwixt the refining of mettall by fire, and withoutitby quicke-silver, but also that some of these mettalles,which are refined by the fire can not well be molten with5 any artificiall winde as with bellows, but when it is kindledand blowen with the naturall ayre or naturall winde. Themetall of the mines of Porco is easily refined with bellowes,I and that of the mines of Potosi cannot be molten with! bellowes, but only by the breath of their liuayras, whicharesmall furnaces vpon the sides of the mountaines, built expressly where the. winde lies, within the which they meltthis metall ; and though it be hard to yielde a reason for thisdifference, yet is it most certaine and approoved by longexperience ; so as the greedie desire of this mettall, so muchvalued amongst men, hath made them seek out a thousandgentle inventions and devises, whereof wee will hereaftermake mention. The chiefe places of the Indies fromwhence they draw silver are New Spaine, and Peru; butthemines of Peru farre surpasse the rest ; and amongstallothers of the worlde, those of Potosi, whereof wee willintreate a little at leasure, being the most famous andre-markeable things at the Indies. MINES OF POTOSI. 197 CHAP. VT. Of the mountainc or lull of Potosi and .the discovery thereof. The mountaine or hill of Potosi so famous, scituate in the LlB - Province of Charcas, in the kingdome of Peru, distant from the Equinoctiall towardes the South or Pole Antartike, 21 degrees and two thirds : so as it falls under the Tropicke, "bordering upon the burning Zone, and yet this region is extreamely cold, yea, more then old Castill in the kingdom of Spaine, and more than Flanders itselfe, although by reason it should be hote or temperate, in regard of the height and elevation of the Pole where it is seated. The reason of this so cold a temperature is the height of the mountaine, whereas colde and intemperate windes con tinually blow, especially that which they call TomaTiaui, which is boistrous and most cold. It raines most commonly in lune, lulie, and August. The ground and soile of this mountaine is drie, cold, and very vnpleasant, yea, altogether barren, which neither engenders nor brings forth any fruite, grasse, nor graine ; it is naturally inhabitable, for the intern perature of the heaven, and the barrennes of the earth. But the force of silver, which drawes vnto it the desire of all thinges, hath peopled this mountaine more then any other place in all these Kingdomes, making it so fruitfull of all kindes of meats, as there wantes nothing that can be desired, yea, in great abouiidance; and although there be nothing but what is brought by carriage, yet every place aboundes so with fruite, conserves, exquisite wines, silkes, and all other delicats, as it is not inferiour to any other part. This mountaine is of colour darke red, and is in form pleasing at the first sight, resembling per fectly the fashion of a pavilion or of a sugar loafe. It exceedes all other hilles and mountaines about it in height. The way whereby they ascend, is very rough and vneven, 198 MINES OF POTOSL LIB. iv. anc[ ye t}iev g Vp0n horse-backe. It is round at the top,and at the foote it hath a league in circuite. It containesfrom the toppe to the bottome 1680 common yardes, thewhich reduced to the measure of Spanish leagues makesaquarter of a league. At the foote of this mountaine thereis another small hill that riseth out of it, in the which therehath beene sometimes mines of metall dispearsed, whichwere found as it were in purses, and not in fixed or continued veines ; yet were they very rich, though fewinnumber. This small rocke was called by the IndiansHuayna Potosi, which is young Potosi ; at the footewhereof beginnes the dwellings of the Spaniards andIndians, which are come to the riches and worke of Potosi,/ which dwelling may containe some two leagues in circuite,and the greatest trafficke and commerce of all Peru is inthis place. The mines of this mountaine were not diggednor discovered in the time of their Yncas, which were theLordes of Peru, before the Spaniardes entred, althoughthey had digged and opened the mines of Porco, neere toPotosi, distant onely sixe leagues. The reason mightbethe want of knowledge thereof, although some do reportIknow not what fable, that having sometimes labouredtoopen those mines, a voyce was heard, commaunding themnot to touch it, being reserved for others. In. trueth theyhad no knowledge of Potosi, nor of the wealth thereof, tillafter twelve yeeres that the Spaniards were entred intoPeru, the discovery whereof was made in this manner. An Indian called Hualpa, of the nation of Chumpivilca,which is a province of Cusco, going one clay to hunt forvenison, passing towardes the west whither the beast wasfled, he beganne to runne vppe against the rocke, whichatthat time was covered and planted with certaine crops theycall quinua, 1 and with thick bushes, and as he strived togette vp a way which was somewhat rough and vneasie,1 " Chenopodium quinua." MINES OF POTOSI. 199 hee was forced to lay holde vpon a brauncli, wliicli issued LlB - Iv- from a veine of a silver mine (which since they have called La Eica) which he pulled vp, perceiving in the hole or roote thereof rnettall, the which hee knew to be very good, by the experience hee had of the mines of Porco : and after finding vpon the ground certaine peeces of mettall, which lay broken and dispersed neere to this veine, being scarse well able to iudge thereof, for that the colour was spoyled and changed by the sunne and raine, he carried it to Porco to trie by the Huayras (which is the triall of mettall by fire), and having thereby found the great riches and his happy fortune, he secretly digged and drew metfcall out of this veine, not imparting it to any man vntil that an Indian, called Huanca, of the valley of Xauxa, which is vpon the bordures of the Cittie of Kings, who remaining at Porco, neere vnto Hualpa of Chumpivilca, perceved one day that he made a refining, and that his wedges and brickes wr ere greater then such as were vsually made in those places : and also increasing in his expence of apparrell, having till then lived but basely. For this reason, and for that the mettall that his neighbour refined was different from that of Porco, he thought to discover this secret, and wrought so, that although the other kept it as secret as hee could, yet thorow importunitie he was forced to carry him vnto the rocke of Potosi, having enioyed this rich treasure full two months. And then Hualpa the Indian willed Huanca for his part to take a veine, which he had discovered neare to the rich veine, which at this day is called the veine of Diego Centeno, that was not lesse rich, but more hard to digge and to draw foorth ; and so by agreement they divided betweene them the richest rocke in the world. It chaunced after, the Indian Huanca finding some difficulty to digge and draw foorth his mettall, being most hard, and the other Hualpa refusing to impart any of his mine vnto him they fell at debate ; so as Huanca of Xnuxa grieved there- 200 MINES OF POTOSI. LIB. iv. with, and with some other discontents, discovered thissecret vnto his inaister called Yillaroel a Spaniard, who thenremained at Porco. This Yillaroel, desirous to vnderstandthe trueth, went to Potosi, and finding the riches his Yanacona or servant had discovered vnto him, caused the IndianHuanca to be inrolled, undertaking with him the saideveine, which was called Centeno, they call it vndertaking,that is as much as to note and mark the mine, and so muchground in circuite for him, which the Lawe graunts vntothose that discover any mine, or vnto those that digge. them : by meanes whereof, having discovered them to theJustice, they remayned Lords of the mine, to dig and drawfoorth the silver, as being their owne, paying only theirduties vnto the King, which is a fift parte. So as the firstdiscovery and inregistriug of the mines of Potosi was tho21 of April, in the yeare of our Lord, one thousand fivehundred fortie five, in the territorie of Porco, by the saideYillaroel a Spaniard, and Huanca an Indian. Presentlyafter they discovered another veine, which they called theveine of Tinne, the which is very rich, although it be roughand very painfull to worke in, the mettall being as hard asflint. Since the thirtie day of August in the same yeere ofa thousand five hundred forty and five the veine calledMendieta was inrolled, and these are the foure principallveines of Potosi. They say of the rich veine, the first thatwas discovered, that the metall lay above the ground theheight of a launce, like vnto rockes, raising the superficiesof the earth, like vnto a crest of three hundred foote longand thirteen foote broade, and that this remained bare andvncovered by the deluge. This veine having resisted theviolence and force of the water, as the hardest part. Themettall was so rich as it was halfe silver, and this veinecontinued in his bounty fiftie or three score eslados, whichis the height of a man, and then it failed. In this maner themi nes of Potosi were discovered by the Divine Providence, MINES OF POTOSI. 201 who (for the felicitie of Spaine) would have the greatest LlB - IY- treasure that ever was in this world discovered at such time whenas the Bmperour Charles the fift of famous memorie held the Empire, the kingdonies of Spaine,, and the Seigniorie of the Indies. Presently after that the dis- coverie of Potosi was knowne in Peru, many Spaniardes, and the most parte of the citizens of the city of La Plata, which is eighteene leagues from Potosi, came thither to take mines : yea there came many Indians from divers provinces, especially the Haayradores of Porco, so as within a short space it was the best peopled habitation of all the kingdome. CHAP. vn. Of tit e treasure which is daily drawne from tJie rocJie or monntaine of Potosi. I have often doubted if in antient Histories there were found any so rich mines as those we have seen in our time in Peru. If there were ever rich mines in the worlde, and famous for this effect, they have bin those of Spaine, which they of Carthage did inioy, and since, the Romans, the which, as I have saide, are not onely famous and esteemed in prophane bookes, but also in the holy Scriptures. Hee that maketh most particular mention of these mines, at the least that I have seene, is Plinie, who writeth thus in his naturall Historic : " They finde silver in almost all provinces, but that of Spaine is the best, which growes and ingenders in a barren soile, vppon mountaines and rockes. It is a certaine and infallible thing, that in places where they have once discovered any of these veines, there are others not farre off, which is likewise found in all other mettalls, and for this the Greekes, in my opinion, called them mettalls. It is strange that the pits or holes of these mines of Spaine, the which they began to digge in Hannibals time, are at this day, and hold the names of their discoverers. Amongst 202 MINES OF I OTOSI. LIB. iv. these mines, that which Bebelo discovered, which holdeshis name vnto this day, was very famous ; and they say it yeelded so great riches to Hanniball that everie day theygathered three hundred pounds weight of silver, and vntothis day they have always continued labouring in this mine,so as it is now digd 15 hundred passes deep into themountaine. Out of which pits, notwithstanding the deapth,the Gascoines that labour in them drawe out the water,that they may worke with more ease, whilest their candellesand lights last, and that in such aboundaunce as it seeinesufhfchro- to be a river." Hitherto are the woordes of Pliny, thewhich I would set downe word by word, the better to content such as know what mines be, seeing that what is triedat this day was then in vse. And truely the riches of thismine of Hannibal vpon the Pirrenean hilles, was great andfamous, which the Romans possessed, having continued thework even unto Plinies time, which was about three hundred y ceres. The deapth of this mine was fifteene hundredpasses, which is a mile and a halfe : and it was so rich inthe beginning, that it was woorth daily to the maisterthereof three hundred poundes, at twelve ounces to thepound. But although this were a great treasure, it did notapproach neere to that which in our time hath bin found inPotosi : for as it appeareth by the Registers of the house ofcontraction of that Province, and as many antient menworthie of credit doe testifie, whenas the licentiate Poliogoverned that Province, the which was many yeeres afterthe discovery of this mountaine, they did every saterdayenter a hundred and fifty and twoo hundred thousandpeeces, whereof the Kings fift amounted to thirty and fortythousand peeces ; and for every yeere a million and a halfe,or little lesse. So as according to that computation theydid drawe every day from this mine thirty thousandworth if z e peeces, whereof there came to the King for his fift, sixerialls and a, , fourth part, thousand peeces a day. MINES OF POTOSI. 203 There is yet another thing to be spoken of, to shew the LlB - Iv- riches of Potosi, that the account which hath been made was only of silver that was marked and customed. And it is well knowne in Peru that they have long vsed silver in these Eealmes which they call currant, which was neither marked nor customed. And they holde it for certain which know these mines, that in these daies the greatest parte of silver drawne at Potosi was not customed, and this had course amongst the Indians, and much amongst the Spaniardes, as I have seene continued to my time ; so, as it may appeare, the third part of the riches of Potosi, yea the one halfe, came not to light, neither was it customed. There is yet a more notable consideration, in that which Plinie saith they hadde digged a fifteene hundred pases in this mine of Bebelo, and, that continually they found water, which is the greatest hinderaunce they have to drawe foorth theyr mettall. But in this of Potosi, although they have digged two hundred cstados or heights of a man in deapth, yet did they never finde any water, which is the greatest happinesse of this mountaine. But the mines of Porco, whose mettall is good and very rich, are at this day left for the discommoditie of water, which they have found in their worke ; for they are two insupportable labours in searching of the mettall ; first to digge and breake the rockes, and then to drawe out the water all together. The first of them, that is, to cut through the rockes, is paine enough ; yea, very hard and excessive. Finally, at this day the King re ceives for his fift yeerely, from the mines of Potosi, a million of silver, besides the wealth that growes by quick silver and other royall prerogatives, which is a great treasure. Some men of iudgement having cast vp the ac- comptes, say that what hath beene brought into the custom e house of Potosi vnto the yeere of our Lord one thousand five hundred eighty and five, amounteth vnto a hundred thousand millions of peeces of essay, whereof every Peece is 204 MINES OF POTOSI. LIB. iv. \voorth thirteen Halls and a fourthe parte, not reckoningthe silver which hath bin caried away without custome, orthat hath beene entred in other royall custome houses,or the silver that hath beene wrought in the country, whichis not entred, the which is innumerable, although the first Registers of Entries are not so exactly kept as at this day; for, that in the beginning and first discoveries, they madetheir receit by Romans, so great was their aboundance. But by the instructions and remembrances of Don Francisco de Toledo, the Viceroy, in the yeare of our SaviourChrist one thousand five hundred seaventy and foure, theyfind seventy and sixe millions to that yeere : and from thatyeare to eighty five inclusive, it appeares by the royallregisters, there were thirty five millions more eutred. Theysent this accompt to the Viceroy from Potosi, in the yeereI have mentioned, being then in Peru; and since, thewealth that hath come from Peru by ship hath amountedto much more. In that fleete where I came in the yeareone thousand five hundred eighty seaveu, there were elevenmillions transported in the two fleets of Peru and Mexico,whereof two thirds were in that of Peru, and almost the onehalfo for the King. I thought good to set this downe parti cularly, to shew the power which his heavenly Maiestie hathgiven to the Kings of Spaine, heaping so many Crownsand Kingdonies vpon them, who (by the especiall favour ofheaven) have ioyned the East with the West Indies, in-vironing the whole worlde with their Power. [It may bethought that this provision has been made, through theprovidence of our God, for the good of these people, living atsuch a distance from their head, who is the Roman Pontiffand Vicar of Christ our Lord. Also for the defence of thesame Catholic Faith and Roman Church in these partswhere the truth is so opposed and persecuted by the here tics. For the Lord of Heaven, who gives and takes awaythe kingdoms at his will, has so ordered it. We ought, MINES OF POTOSI. 205 therefore,, humbly to pray that He will be pleased to favour LlB the pious zeal of the Catholic King, giving him prosperous success and victory against the enemies of the holy faith. In. this cause he spends the treasure of the Indies which have been given to him, and he even needs much more.1 ] The riches of Potosi justify this digression,, and we will now turn to the mines, and show how they are worked, and how they refine the metal that is obtained from them. CHAP. vin. How they labour in the mines of Potosi. Boetius, complaining of the first iuventer of mines, spake Boetiusdeconsolat. well : " Heu primus quis fuit ille, Auri qui poiidera tecti. Gemmasque, latere volcntes, Preciosa pericula fodit ? " Alas, who was the first, So curious and accurst, Who digged out of the mine, Mans mind to vnderrnine, Pleavie weights of golde ore, Better concealde before : And pearlt crept into ground, Pale for feare to be found : Galing gold, wringing rings, Precious, but perilous things." With reason he calleth them precious dangers, for the great labour and perill wherewith they draw out these mettalls, which men so much esteeme. Plinie saies, that in PH., Kb. . . xxxiii, ca. 1. Italie there are many mines, but the Ancients would not suffer their people to worke in them, only to preserve the people. They brought these mettalls from Spaine, and made the Spaniards labour in the mines as tributaries. The 1 This passage is omitted in the old translation. 206 MINES OF POTOSI. LIB. iv. iik e doth Spaine D0w with the Indies, for there remainingmany mines of mettall yet in Spaine, they will not seekethem, nor suffer any to worke in them, by reason of the in- conveniencies which happen daily, but they bring themfrom the Indies, where they digge it with much labourand perill. This rocke of Potosi containes, as I havesaid, foure principall veines j that is, La Rica, that of Centeno, that of Estano, and that of Mendieta. All theseveines are of the East part of the mouiitame, as looking to the Sunne rising, for on the West part there is not any. The foresaid veines runne from North to South, which is from Pole to Pole. In the largest place they have six foote, and in the narrowest a spanne bredth. There are others of divers fashions, that runne out of the said veines, like as out of the great armes of trees there commonlysprowt foorth lesse. Everie veinc hath divers mines whichare partes and portions of the same, distinct and dividedbetwixt divers masters by whose names they are commonlyr called. The great mine containes foure-score yardes, neither may it be more by the law, and the least containesfoure. All these mines are at this day very deepe. InLa Rica they reckon 78 mines which are 80 yards deep,or a hundred stades or height of a man, and in some placestwo hundred. In the veiiio of Centeno are 24 mines,whereof some arc 70 or 80 stades deepe, and so of the otherveines of this mountaine. For a remedie to this greatprofunditie they have invented mines which they call socaloncs, 1 which are caves or ventes made at the foote of themountaine, the which go crossing til they incounter withthe veines ; for wee must vnderstand that although theveines runne North to South as hath been said, yet is it in declining from the toppe to the foote of the mountaine,which may be as they beleeve by conjecture above twelvehundred stades. And by this account, although the mines1 Adite, or horizontal cuttings. MINES OP POTOSI. 207 extend in such a profunditie, yet there remaines six times LlB- IV> as much space unto the bottome or roote, the which they say are most rich and aboundant, as the body and spring of all veines. Although unto this day we have seene the con trary by experience, for the higher the veine is to the superficies of the earth, the more rich they find it; and the deeper it goes the poorer it is, and of the baser aloy. They then invented the socaboncs, by which they enter to worke in the mines very easily, with lesse charge, paine, and danger. They have eight foote in breadth, and an cstado in height, the which they shut with doores. By them they drawe forth their mettall very easily, paying to the pro prietary of the socabon the fift part of all the metall they draw forth. There are nine already made and others are begunne. They were twenty and nine yeeres in making of one socabon, called Venino, which comes from the Rica veine. It was begunne in the yeere 1556, the eleventh yeere of the discovery, and was ended in the yeere 1585, the eleventh of August. This socabon reached the Rica veine thirtie five estados from the roote or spring, and from thence where it met to the mouth of the mine, were a hundred thirty five estados. So they must descend all this depth to labour in the mine. This socabon containes from his mouth vnto the veine of Crusero as they call it, 250 yardes, in which worke were spente twentie nine yeeres, whereby wee may see what great paines men take to draw silver out of the bowells of the earth. They labour in these mines in continual! darknes and obscuritie, without know ledge of day or night. And forasmuch as those places are never visited with the Sunne, there is not onely a con tinual darkness, but also an extreme colde, with so grosse an aire contrary to the disposition of man, so as such as newly enter are sicke as they at sea. The which happened to me in one of these mines, where I felt a paine at the heart, and beating of the stomach. Those that labour 208 MINES OP POTOSI. LIB. iv. therein vse candles to light them, dividing their workinsuch sort, as they that worke in the day rest by the night,; and so they change. The mettall is commonly hard, andtherefore they breake it with hammers, splitting and hewingit by force as if they were flintes. After, they carry vp thismettall upon their shoulders, by ladders of three branchesmade of neates lether twisted like peeces of wood, whichare crossed with staves of wood, so as by every one of theseladders they mount and discend together. They are tencstados long a peece, and at the end of one, beginnes anotherof the same length, every ladder beginning and endingatplatformes of wood, where there are seates to rest them likeunto galleries, for that there are many of these ladders tomount by one at the end of another. A man carries ordinarilythe weight .of two arrobas1 of mettall vpon his shoulders, tiedtogether in a cloth in maner of a skippe, and so mountthey three and three. He that goes before carries a candletied to his thumb, for, as it is said, they have no light fromheaven, and so go they vp the ladder holding it with boththeir handes ; to mount so great a height which commonlyis above a hundred and fiftie cstados, a fearful thing andwhich breeds an amazement to thinke vpon it, so great is thedesire of silver, that for the gaine thereof men indure anypaines. And truly it is not without reason, that Plinie,plin- in ,., treating1 of this subiect. exclaimes and saies thus: " Weproem., lib. J enter even into the bowells of the earth, and go huntingafter riches, even to the place of the damned." And after,in the same book, he saieth, " Those that seeke for mettallsperforme workes more then giants, making holes and cavesin the depth of the earth, piercing mouutaines so deepe bythe light of candles, whereas the day and the night arealike, and in many moneths they see no day. So as oftenthe walles of their mines fal, smothering many of them thatlabour therein." And afterwards he addes, "They pierce the1 50 Ibs. xxxiii, cap. QUALITIES OF SILVER ORES. 209 hard rocke with hammers of yron, waying 150 poundes, and Lin - draw out the mettall upon their shoulders, labouring day and night, one delivering his charge to another, and all in dark ness, onely the last sees the light; with wedges and hammers they breake the flintes, how hard and strong soever, for the hunger of gold is yet more sharpe and strong." This Plinie saies, who although he speakes as a historigrapher of that age, yet doth he seeme to prophecie of this time. Neither is it lesse which Phocion of Agatarchides reports of the great travail they indure, whom they called Chrysios, in drawing out of golde : for as the said Author saieth, gold and silver are as painefull to digge and drawe forth, as they are pleasing to possesse. CHAP. ix. How they refine the Mettall of Silver. The Vein, as I have said, where they finde silver, runnes betwixt two rockes, which they call La Caxa, whereof the one is commonly as hard as flint, and the other soft and more easie to breake. This mettall is not always equal, and of the same value, for you shall finde in one and the same veine, one sort of mettall very rich, which they call Gcbcilla, or Tacana, from which they draw much silver, and another is poore, from whence they draw little. The most rich mettall of this mountaine is of the colour of amber, and the next is that which inclines to blacke. There is other somewhat red, and other of the colour of ashes ; finally of divers and sundrie coloures, which seeme to such as know them not, to be stones of no value. But the miners do presently know his qualitie and perfection, by certaine signes and small veines which they finde in them. They carry all this mettall they drawe out of these mines vpon Indian sheepe, 1 which serve them as asses to carry it to the milles. The richest mettall is refined by melting 1 Llamas. p 210 REFINING OF SILVER ORES. LIB. iv. j n those small furnaces which they call Huayras, forthat is most leadie, by reason whereof, it is most subjectto melt, and for the better melting thereof, th Indianscast in a matter they call Soroche, which is a mettalful of lead. The mettal being in these furnases, the filthand earthie drosse, through the force of the fire, remainesin the bottome, and the silver and lead melt ; so as thesilver swimmes vpon the lead, untill it be purified ; thenafter they refine the silver many times. After this manerofmelting they have vsually drawne out of one quintall ofmettall, thirtie, fortie, and fiftio peoces of silver, and yetIhave scene some most excellent, that have bin shewne me,where they have drawne in the melting two hundred, yea,two hundred and fiftie peeces of silver of a quintall of mettal, a rare wealth, and almost incredible, if we had notseen the tryall thereof by fire, but such mettalls are verierare. The poorest mettall is that which yeeldes two, three,live, or six peeces or little more. This mettall hath commonly little lead, but is drie, and therefore they cannotrefine it with fire. And for this reason, in Potosi ihere wasgreat store of these poore mettalls, whereof they madenogreat account, but were reiected like straw, and as theskumme of the good mettall, vntill they found mcanestorefine it by quicke-silver, whereby the skumme as theycalled it was of great profit, for the qui eke-silver byastrange and wonderfull propertie purifies the silver, andisapt for these mettalls which are drie and poore, whereinthey consume less quicke-silver then in the richer : for thericher they are the more ncede of quicke-silver they have.At this day the most vsuall manor of refining in Potosiisby quicke-silver, as also in the mines of Zacatecas, andothers of New Spaine. There were in old time, vpon thesides and toppcs of Potosi, above six thousand HuayraSjwhich are small furnaces where they melt their mettall, thewhich were placed like lightes (a pleasant sight to behold PROPERTIES OF QUICKSILVER. 211 by night) casting a light a farre off like a flame of fire, j LlB - " But at this day there are not above two thousand, for that j (as I have said) they vse little melting, but refine it by quick-silver, the which is the greatest profit. And for that the properties of quicke-silver are admirable ; and that this maner of refining of silver is remarkable, I will discourse of quicke-silver, of the mines and worke, and what is requisite for that subiect. CHAP. x. Of the wonder/nil properties of Quiche-silver. Qvickesilver, so called by the Latines, for that it runnes and slides suddenly from place to place, amongst all other mettalls hath great and wonderfull vertues. The first is, although it be a true mettall, yet is it not hard, neither hath it any certaine forme nor subsistence like to other met talls, but is liquide, not like vnto golde and silver molten, but of his owne proper nature ; and although it be a liquor, yet is it more heavie then any other mettall : and therefore all others swim above and sinke not to the bottom e, being more light. I have seene two poundes of yron put into a barrell of quicke-silver, the which did swimme about like vnto wood or cork vpon the water. Plinie gives an exception heerevnto, saying that gold alone doth sinke and not swimme above it. I have not seene the experience ; but it may be this growes, by reason that quicke-silver by nature doth inviron gold, and covers it, which is one of the most important properties it hath ; for it ioynes with gold in a strange maner, it seekes it where it lies, and invirons it in such sort, as it doth distinguish and separate it from any other body or mettall wherewith it is inixt : for this reason such take gold as will preserve themselves from the dan gers and discommodities of quicke-silver. They had vsed a remedie to those (in whose eares they have put quickep2 212 AFFINITY OF MERCURY AND GOLD. LIB. iv. silver, to cause them to die secretly) to put little plates ofgold into their eares (for that gold hath the vertue to drawout Mercurie) and after they drew out these plates all whitewith the quicke-silver, it did sticke vnto them. Being oneday at Madrid, I went to see the exquisite workes whichlacomo de Tre^o (a rare worke-man of Milan) madeforSan Lorenzo el Eeal ; it was my hap to be there one daywhenas they gilded certaine peeces of a countertable ofbrasse, which is done with quicke-silver ; and for that thefume of Mercurie is mortall, ho tolde me that the worke-men preserved themselves from this venome, by swallowinga double duckat of gold roled vp ; the which being in thestomacke, drawes vnto it all the quicke-silver that enters infume by the eares, eyes, nostrilles, and mouth,, and by thisin canes freed themselves from the danger of quicke-silver,which the gold gathered in the stomacke, and after cast outby the excrements : a thing truly worthy of admiration.After the quicke-silver hath purified and purged gold fromall other mettalls and mixtures, he is likewise separatedfrom the golde his friend by the heate of the fire, theriin..in>. which purifies it from all quicke-silver. Plinie saies,xxxiii, c. fi. that by a certaine art and invention they did seperategold from quick-silver. It seemes to me the Ancients had no knowledge to refine silver by quicke-silver,which at this day is the greatest vse, and chiefe profite ofquickesilver ; for that he saies plainely, that quickesilverioynes with 110 other rnettall but with gold ; and whenhemakes mention of refining of silver, he speakes onely butof the manner of melting ; whereby wee may inferre thatthe Ancients had no knowledge of this secret. In truth,though there be a league and simpathie betwixt golde andquicke-silver, yet whereas the mercurie findes no golde,itioynes with silver, though not in the like maner as withgold ; but in the end, it doth dense and purge it from earth,copper, and lead, amongst the which the silver growes, PROPERTIES OF QUICKSILVER. 213 without any neede of fire to melt it : yet must they vse fire Lll! - to separate it from the silver, as I will shew hereafter. Quicksilver holds no account of other inettalls, but of golde and silver; but contrariwise it doth corrupt them, force and consume them, and flieth from them as much as may be. The which is likewise admirable, and for this cause they put it in earthen vessells, or in beasts skinnes. For if it be put in vessells of copper, of yron, or other mettall, it presently pierceth and corrupts them. And therefore Plinie calleth it the poyson of all things, for that it consumes and spoyles all. We finde quicke-silver in the graves of dead men, which after it hath consumed the bodies, comes foorth pure and whole. There hath beene likewise found in the bones and marrow of men and beasts, who having received it in fume by the mouth and nostrills, congeales within them and pierceth even vnto the bones. Therefore it is a dangerous thing to frequent so perillous and mortall a creature. It hath an other propertie, which is, to runne and make a hundred thousand small droppes, whereof not one is lost, be they never so little, but they returne every way to their liquor. It is almost incorruptible, having nothing in a maner that may consume it. And therefore Plinie calls it the eternall sweate. It hath yet another propertie, that -although it dooth separate gold from copper, and all other mettalls, yet they that will guilde copper, brasse, or silver, use quicke-silver as the meanes of this vnion ; for with the helpe thereof they guilde mettalls. Amongest all the woonders of this strange liquor that seemes to me most woorthy observation, that although it be the weightiest thing in the worlde, yet is it converted into the lightest of the worlde, which is smoake, and sodainely the same smoake which is so light a thing turnes againe into so heavy a sub stance, as is the proper liquor of quicke-silver, whereinto it is dissolved ; for this smoake incountering the mettall on high, being a solide bodie, or comming into a colde region, 21 -1 QUICKSILVER KNOWN TO THE ROMANS. LlB - IV - sodainely it thickens and is converted into quickesilver, andif you set him once againe to the fire, hee dooth likewisereturne into smoake, to be resolved again into quicke-silver.A strange transmutation of so heavy a substance into solight a thing ; and of so light into so heavy, the which womay hold for a rare thing in Nature. And therefore theAuthor of Nature is iustly to be glorified in these and all other strange properties of this mettall, seeing that all things created doe properly obey their secret and vnknownelawes. CHAP. xi. Of the place where they finde quicke-silver, andhow they discovered these rich mines in Iluancavilca. Quicke-silver is found in a kinde of stone, which doothlikewise yeelde vermillion, which the Antients calledMinium, and at this day they call the images of cristallminiades, which are painted with quick-silver. The Antients made great accompt of this Minium or vermillion,holding it for a sacred colour, as Pliuie reportes, saying,that the Romans were accustomed to paint the face oflupiter, and the bodies of those that triumphed in Ethiopia: yea their idolles and their Governors likewise had their facescoloured with this Minium. And this vermillion was soesteemed at Rome (which they brought onely from Spaine,where they had many pittes and mines of quickesilver,which continue there to this day) that the Romans sufferedit not to be refined in Spaine, lest they should stealesome of it, but they carried it to Rome, sealed vp in amasse as they drew it out of the mine, and after refined it. They did yeerely bring from Spaine, especially from Andalusia, about tenno thousand poundweight, which the Romansvalued as an infinite treasure. I have reported all this outof that Author, to the end that those which do see whatpasseth at this day in Peru, may have the content to know DISCOVEEY OF QUICKSILVER IN PERU. 215 what chanced in former ages among the mightiest Lords of LTB - 1V- the world. I speak for the Yncas kings of Peru, and for the naturall Indians thereof, which have laboured and digged long in these mines of quicke-silver, not knowing what quicke-silver was, seeking onely for Cinabrium orvermillion, which they call Llinipi, 1 the which they esteeme much, for that same effect that Plinie reportes of the Romans and Ethiopians, that is, to paint the face and bodies of them selves and their idolls : the like hath been much practised by the Indians, especially when they went to the warres, and they vse it at this day in their feasts and dauncing, which they call slubbering, 2 supposing that their faces and visages so slubbered3 did much terrifie, and at this day they holde it for an ornament and beautifying ; for this cause there were strange workes of mines in the mountaines of Huancavilca, which are in Peru, neere to the cittie of Guamanga, out of the which they drew this mettall. It is of such a manner, that if at this day they enter by the caves or soc- cabones, which the Indians made in those dayes, they loose themselves, finding no passage out : but they regarded not quicke-silver, which naturally is in the same substance or mettall of vermillion, neither hadde they knowledge of any such matter. The Indians were not alone for so long a time without the knowledge of this treasure, but likewise the Spaniards, who until the yeare of the incarnation of our Saviour, one thousand five hundred three score and six, and threescore and seaven, at such time as the licentiate Castro governed in Peru, discovered not the mines of quicke-silver, which happened in this manner. A man of iudgment called Henrique Garces, a Portugall borne, having a peece of this coloured mettall, as I have said, which the Indians call Llirnpi, with which they paint their faces, as hee beheld 1 Llht/pi is the Q.uiclma for mercury, and Ychma for vermillion. 2 Emltixarw. 3 Eirifrixwlos. Fainted with red lead. 216 QUICKSILVER IN PEEU. LIB. iv. j wep^ found it to be the same which they call Vermillionin Castille ; and for that hee knew well that vermillion wasdrawne ont of the same mettall that quickesilver was, heconiectured these mines to be of quickesilver, and went to theplace whence they drew this mettall to make triall thereof.The which hee found true, and in this sorte the mines ofPalcas in the territorie of Guamanga being discovered,great numbers of men went thither to drawe out quickesilver, and so to carry it to Mexico, where they refine silverby the meancs of quickesilver, wherewith many are inriched.This country of mines which they call Huancavilca was thenpeopled with Spaniards and Indians that came thither, andcome still to worke in these mines of quicke-silver, whichare in great numbers and very plentifull ; but of all thesemines, that which they call Amador de Cabrera, or LosSantos, is goodly and notable. It is a rocke of most hardstone, interlaced all with quickesilver, and of that greatness that it extends above four score varas or yardes inlength, and forty in breadth ; in which mine they havemany pittes and ditches, of three score and tenne cstadosdeepe, so as three hundred men may well worke together,such is the capacity thereof. This mine was discovered byan Indian of Amador de Cabrera, called Nauincopa, of thevillage of Acoria, the which Amador de Cabrera caused tobo registered in his name. He was in suit against thethe Fiscal, but the vsuiruite was adiudged to him bysentence as the discoverer. Since, he solde his interestto another, for two hundred and fifty thousand ducates ; and afterwards thinking he had bin deceived in the sale,he commenced an action against the buyer, being worth, asthey say, above five hundred thousand ducats ; yea, someliolde it to be worth a million of golde, a rare thing to see amine of that wealth. Wheiius Don Francisco of Toledo governed in Peru,there was one which had bin in Mexico, and observed how REFINING WITH QUICKSILVER. 217 they refined silver with mercury, called Pedro Fernandes de Lin - IV - Velasco, who offred to refine silver at Potosi with mercury ; and having made triall thereof in the yeare of our redemp tion, one thousand five hundred seaventy and one, perfourmed it with credite ; then beganne they to refine silver at Potosi with quicksilver, which they transported from Huancavilca, which was a goodly helpe for the mines ; for by the meanes of quickesilver they drew an infinite quantity of mettall from these mines, whereof before they made no accompt, the which they called scrapings. For as it hath beene said, the quickesilver purifies the silver, although it be drie, poore, and of base alloy, which can not be doone by melting in the fire. The Catholike King drawes from his quickesilver mines, without any charge or hazard, almost foure hundred thousand peeces, the which are fourteene rialls a peece, or little less, besides the rights that rise in Potosi, where it is employed, the which is a great riches. They doe yearely, one with another, drawe from these mines of Huancavilca eight thousand quintalls of quickesilver, yea and ..more. CHAP. xn. Tlie manner how to drawe out Quicke-silver and liow they refine Silver. Let vs now speake how they drawe out Quicke-silver, and how they refine silver therewith. They take the stone or mettall where they find the quicke-silver, the which they put into the fire in pots of earth well luted, being well beaten, so as this mettall or stone comming to melt by the heate of the fire, the quicke-silver separates it selfe, and goes forth in exhalation, and sometimes even with the smoake of the fire, vntil it encounters some body where it staies and congeales, and if it passe vp higher, without meeting of any hard substance, it mountes vp vntill it be 218 REFINING WITH QUICKSILVER . IV * colde, and then, congeled, it falles dowue again. When themelting is finished, they vnstoppe the pottes and draw forththe mettal, sometimes staying vntil it be very cold, for if there remained any fume or vapor, which should incounterthem that vnstopt the pottes, they were in danger of death,or to be benummed of their limbes, or at the least to loosetheir teeth. And for that they spend an infinite quantitieof wood in the melting of these mettals, a miller called llodrigo de Torres, found out a profitable invention, whichwas to gather certaine straw which growes throughoutall those mountaines of Peru, the which they call ycliu, 1 it is like unto a hard reede wherewith they make their fire. It is a strange thing to see the force which this straw hath tomelt and dissolve these mettalls, the which falls out, assxiii] 1?. -i. Pliuio saies, that there is gold which melts more easily withthe flame of straw then with hote burning coales. Theyput the quicke-silver thus molten into skinues, for that it keepes best in leather, and in this sort they lay it into theKings store house, from whence they carry it by sea to Arica, and so to Potosi by land vpon their sheepe. Thereis yeerely spent in Potosi for the refining of mettalles, about six or seven thousand quintalles of qnicke-silver, besides that they draw from the plates, which is the earthor drosse of the first washings of these mettalls, which aremade in caldrons. The which plates they bnrne in their furnaces to draw out the quicke-silver which remaines in them, and there are above fiftie of these furnaces in the Citie of Potosi, and in Tarapaya. The quantitie ofmettalls which they refine, as some men of experiencehave made the account, doth amount yeerely to abovethree hundred thousand quintalles ; from the earth anddrosse whereof being molt and refiued, they may drawyeerely above two thousand quintalles of quicke-silver. 1 YcJui (Stipa Ychu of Knotty is the coarse grass of the Peruvian Cordilleras. REFINING WITH QUICKSILVER. 219 We must understand there are divers sortes of mettalls, for some yeelde much silver, and waste little quicke-silver; others consume much quicke-silver, and yielde little silver ; and there are others which consume much quicke-silver and yeelde much silver ; and others that consume little quicke-silver, and also yeelde little silver ; and as men incounter in these rnettalles, so they grow rich or poore in their trafficke. Although commonly the rich mettall yeelds much silver, and consumes much quicke-silver ; and like wise that which is poore, yeeldes little silver, and consumes as little mercurie. They first beat and grind the mettall very small, with the hammers of the machinery, which beat this stone like vnto tanne milles, and being well beaten they searce it in a copper scarce, making the pouder as small and fine as if it were horse haire ; these searces being well fitted, doe sift thirtie quintalles in a day and a night ; then they put the pouder of the mettall into the vessels vpon furnaces, whereas they anoint it and mortifie it with brine, putting to everie fiftie quintalles of pouder, five quintalls of salt. And this they do for that the salt seperates the earth and filth, to the end the quicke-silver may the more easily draw the silver vnto it. After, they put quicke-silver into a peece of holland and presse it out vpon the mettall, which goes forth like a dewe, alwaies turning and stirring the mettall, to the end it may be well incorpo rate. Before the invention of these furnaces of fire, they did often mingle their mettall with quicke-silver in great troughes, letting it settle some daies, and did then mix it and stirre it againe, vntil they thought all the quicke-silver were well incorporate with the silver, the which continued twentie daies and more, and at the leest nine daies. / Since they discovered, as the desire to get is diligent, that to shorten the time fire did much helpe, to incorporate silver the sooner with quicke-silver, they invented these furnaces, whereon they set vessels to put in their mettall with salt 220 REFINING WITH QUICKSILVER. LIB. iv. ancj quicke-silver, and vnderneatli they put fire by little andlittle in furnaces made for the nonce vnderneath ; so as infive or six daies the quicke-silver is incorporate with thesilver. And when they finde that the mercurie hath donehis part, and assembled all the silver, leaving nothingbehinde, but is well imbrued, as a sponge doth water,dividing it from the earth, lead and copper, with the whichit is engendered. Then after they separate it likewise fromthe quicke-silver, the which they do in this sort ; they putthe mettall in caldrons, and vessels full of water, wherewith certaine wheeles they turn the mettall round about, asif they should make mustard, and so the earth and drossegoes from the mettall with the water that runs away. Thesilver and quicke-silver as most ponderous remaining in thebotome, the mettall which remaines is like unto sand, thenthey take it out and wash it againe in great platters ofwood, or keelers full of water, still drawing the earth fromit, vntil they leave the silver and quicke-silver well clensed.There slippes away also some small portion of silver andquicke-silver with the earth and dross, which they callwashings, the which they after wash againe and draw outthe remainder. When the silver and quicke-silver areclensed and beginne to shine, and that there remainesno earth, they put all the mettall into a cloth, which theystraine out very forcibly, so as all the quicke-silver passethout, being not incorporate with the silver, and the restremaines as a loafe of silver, like to a marke of almondspressed to draw oyle. And being thus pressed the re mainder containes but the sixt part in silver, and five inmercurie. So as if there remaines a marke of threescorepounds, ten are of silver, and fiftie of mercurie. Ofthese markes they make pinas, as they call them, likepine apples or sugar loaves, hollow within, the whichthey commonly make of a hundred pound weight ; thento separate the silver from the quicke-silver, they put it REFINING WITH QUICKSILVER. 221 into a violent fire, which they cover with an earthen Ln vessel, like to the mold of a sugar loafe, or vnto a capuchon or hoode, the which they cover with coales, and set fire vnto it ; whereby the quicke-silver exhales in sinoake, the which striking against the capuchon of earth, it thickens and distills, like vnto the smoake of a potte covered ; and by a pipe, like vnto a limbecke, they receive the quicke-silver which distils, the silver remaining without changing the forme, but in weight it is diminished five partes of that it was, and is spungious, the which is worthy the observation. Of two of these loaves they make one bar re of silver, in weight 65 or 66 markes ; and in this sorte they carry it to the touch, custome, and marke. Silver drawne with mercurie is so fine, that it never abates of two thousand three hundred and fourescore of alloy, and it is so excellent, that the worke men are inforced to allay it, putting some mixture to it, as they do likewise in their mints, whereas their moiiy is stampt. Silver indures all these martiredomes, if we may so call it, to be refined, the which if we consider well, it is a bodie framed where they grinde, sift, kneade, lay the leven, and bake the silver; besides all this they wash it and wash it againe, they bake it and bake it againe, induring the pestells, sives, troughes, furnaces, caldrons, presses, and finally by the water and fire, I speake this, for that seeing this art in Potosi, I did consider what the Scripture speakes of the iust, Golabit eos et purga- Mat. m. bit quasi argentum. And that which they speake in another ^ccies. 11 part, Sicut argentum purgatum septuplum. So as to purifie Psal- X1> silver, to refine and dense it from the earth and stone where it ingenders, they purge and purifie it seven times ; for in effect it passeth their handes seven times, yea oftener, vntill it remaines pure and fine ; so is it in the word of God, where the soules must be so purified that shall injoy the heavenly perfection. 222 GRINDING MILLS. CHAP. xiii. Of their Engines to grinde the mettall, and oftheir triall of Silver. LIB. iv. To conclude this subject of silver and of rnettalls, thereremaines yet two things to speake of, the one is of theirengins and milles, the other of their essay or triall : I havesaid before how they grinde their mettal, for the receivingof the quicksilver, which is done with diverse instrumentsand engins, some with horses like vnto hand-milles, otherslike water-milles ; of which two sortes there are great numbers. But for that the water they doe vse commonly is butof raine, whereof they have not sufficient but three monthsin the yeare, December, January, and February : for thisreason they have made Lakes and standing Pooles, whichcontaine in circuite about a thousand and six hundredroddes, and in deapth three estados ; there are seven withtheir sluces : so as when they have neede of any water theyraise vp a sluce, from whence runnes a little stroame ofwater, the which they stoppe vppon holy-dayes. And whenthe Lakes and Pooles doe fill, and that the yeare aboundswith mine, their grinding dooth then continue fixe orseaven moneths ; so as even for silvers sake men desirea good yeere of raiue in Potosi, as they doe in other placesfor bread. There are some other engins in Tarapaya, whichis a valley three or foure leagues distant from Potosi,whereas there runnes a river as in other parts. The differ ence of these eugins is, that some goe with sixe pestels,some with twelve, and others with fourteene. They grindeand beate the mettal in morters, labouring day and night; and from thence they carry it to be sifted vpon the bankesof the brooke of Potosi. There are forty eight water-mills,of eight, ten, and twelve pestells, and foure on the otherside, which they call Tanacu-fiuiiu ; in the Cittie of Tarapaya, there are two and twenty engins all vpoii the water; TRIAL OP SILVER. 223 besides, there are thirty goe with horses in Potosi, and LlB- IV- many others in divers partes, so great the desire of man is to get silver, which is tryed by deputies appoynted by the King. To give the alloy to every peece, they cary the bars of silver vnto the Assay maister, who gives to every one his number, for that they carry many at Once, he cuttes a small peece of every one, the which he weighs iustly, and puttes them into a cruset, which is a small vessell made of burnt bones beaten ; after, hee placeth everie crusible in his order in the furnace, giving them a violent fire, then the mettall melteth, and that which is lead goes into smoake, and the copper and tinne dissolves, the silver remayning most fine, of the colour of fire. It is a strange thing, that being thus refined, although it be liquid and molten, yet it never spilles, were the mouth of the crusible turned downewardes ; but it remayneth fixed, without the losse of a droppe. The Assay maister knoweth by the colour and other sigues, when it is refined, then dooth he draw the crusibles from the fire, and weighs every peece curiously, observing what every one wants of his weight ; for that which is of high alloy, wastes but little, and that which is baser diminisheth much and according to the waste he sees what alloy he beares, according to the which he markes every barre punctu ally. Their ballaunce and weights are so delicate, and their graines so small, as they cannot take them vppe with the hand, but with a small paire of pincers : and this triall they make by candle light, that no ayre might inoove the bal- lance. For of this little the price of the whole barre dependeth. In trueth it is a very delicate thing, and requires a great dexteritie, which the holy Scripture vseth in many Psai. ixv. places, to show how God prooves his chosen : and to note xvSIl?. the differences of the merites of soules, whereas God gives the title of an Assay-maister to the prophet leremie, that hee may trie and declare the spiritimll vertue of men, and 224 EMERALDS. LIB. iv. of j^g workes, which is the proper worke of the Spirita ofici-cm. vi. God, being he that weighs the Soules of men. WewillProver. xvi. rest content with what we have spoken touching silver,mettalls, and mines, and will passe to the two other mixtures, the which are plants and beasts CHAP. xiv. Of Emeraides. It shall not be from the purpose to speake somthingof enieraldes, both for that it is a pretious thing, asgolde and silver, as also for that they take their beginning from mines and mettalls, as Plinie reportes. Theemerald hath bin in old time in great esteeme, as the sameAuthor writes, giving it the third place amongst all iewellesand pretious stones, that is, next to the diamond and pearle.At this day they do not so much esteeme the emerald, northe pearle, for the great aboundance is brought of these twosorts from the Indies, onely the diamond holds the principality, the which can not be taken from it. Next, therubies come in price and other stones, which they holdmore pretious than the emerald. Men are so desirous ofsingularities and rare things, that what they see to becommon, they do not esteeme. They report of a Spaniard,who being in Italie when the Indies were first discovered,shewed an emerald to a Lapidary, who, asking him thevalue thereof, after he had well viewed it, being of anexcellent lustre and forme, he prized it at a hundred ducats;he then shewed him an other greater than it, which hevalued at three hundred ducats. The Spaniard, drunkewith this discourse, carried him to his lodging, shewing hima casket full. The Italian, seeing so great a numberofemeralds, sayde vnto him, Sir, these are well worthacrowne apeece. The like hath happened both at the Indies EMERALDS. 225 and in Spaine, where the stones have lost their estimation, LlB- for the great abundance they finde of them there. Pliny reportes many excellencies of the emerald, amongst Pim., lib. xxxvii, ca- the which he saith, that there is nothing more pleasing, 5 - nor more healthful for the sight ; wherein he hath reason, but his authority importeth little, seeing there is such store. It is reported that Lolia, a Roinane Darne, bestowed ^"c s^vppon a scoffion1 and a garment embroidered with pearle and emerald 400,000 ducats, the which at this day might be doone with lesse than forty thousand ducats, yea two such. They have been found in diverse partes of the Indies. The Kings of Mexico didde much esteerne them ; some did vse to pierce their nosthrils, and hang therein an excellent emerald; and they hung them on the visages of their idolles. The greatest store is found in the New Kingdome of Grenada and in Peru, neere vnto Manta and Puerto Viejo. There is towardes that place a soile which they call the Land of Emeraldas; for the knowledge they have of aboundance to be there; and yet vnto this day they have not conquered that land. The emeralds grow in stones like vnto cristall; I have seene them in the same stone, fashioned like a veine, and they seeme by little and little to thicken and refine. I have seene some that were halfe white and halfe greene ; others all white, and some greene and very perfite. I have seene some of the bignesse of a nut, and there have bin some greater found ; but I have not knowen that in our time they have found any of the form and bignesse of the catino or iewel they have at Genoa, the which they esteeme (and with reason) as a iewell and not as a relique; yet without comparison, the emerald which Theophrastus speakes of, which the King of Babilon presented to the King of Egypt, surpasseth that of Genoa ; it was foure cubites long and three broade; and they say, that in lupiters Temple there was a needle or pyramide, made of foure 1 Tocado. Q 226 PEARLS. LIB. iv. emeralds stones of forty cubits long, and in some placesfoure broade, and in others two ; and that in his time therewas in the temple of Hercules at Tyre, a pillar of emerald. Itmay be, as Plinie saieth, it was of some greene stone, somewhat like to the emerald, and they called it a false emerald.As some will say, that in the Cathedrall Church of Cordovathere are certaine pillars of emeraldes which remaine sinceit was a mosque for the Kings Miramamolins Moores,1 which raigned there. In the fleete, the yeare one thousandfive hundred eighty and seven, in the which I came fromthe Indies, they brought two chests of emeralds, everyone weighing at the least foure arrobas, whereby wee mayx4. xxix> see the aboundaunce they have. The holy Scripture compoc. xxi. mends these emeralds as pretious iewels, they number themamongest the pretious stones which the hie Priest carriedon his Ephod or breast-plate, as those which did beautifiethe walles of the heavenly Jerusalem. CHAP. xv. Of Pearles. Now that w r e intreat of the great riches that comes fromthe Indies, it were.no reason to forgette the pearle, whichthe Ancients called Margaritas, and at the first were insogreat estimation, as none but royall persons were sufferedto weare them ; but at this day there is such aboundanceas that the negresses themselves do weare chaines thereof;they growe in oyster shells, in eating whereof I have foundpearles in the middest of them. These oisters within areofthe colour of heaven, very lively, and in some places theymake spoones of them, the which they call of mother of pearle.The pearles do differ much in forme, in bignes, figure, colour,and polishing; so likewise in their price they differ much.Some they call Ave Marias, being like the small grainesof1 "Reyes Miramamolines Moros," meaning the Khalifas of Cordova. PEARL FISHERIES. 227 beades; others are Pater Nosters, being bigger. Seldome LlB - IV shall you finde two of one greatnesse, forme, and colour. For this reason the Romans (as Pliny writeth) called them P!"1 - ! 1 v J ?-in, c. 35. Unions. Whenas they doe finde two that are alike in all poyntes, they raise the price much, especially for ear-rings. I have seene some payres valued at thousands of ducats, although they were not like to Cleopatra s two pearles, whereof Pliny reportes either of them being woorfch a hun dred thousand ducats, with the which this foolish Queene wonne a wager she hadde made against Marc Anthony to spend in one supper above an hundred thousand ducats so, at the last course, shee dissolved one of these pearles in strong vinegar, and dranke it vp. They say the other pearle was cutt in two, and placed in the Pantheon at Rome, at th eares of the image of Venus. Of the other Clodius, the son of the tragedian Esop, relates that in a banquet he pre sented to every one of his guests (amongest other meates) a rich pearle dissolved in vineger, to make his feast the more royall and sumptuous. These were the follies of those ages, and those at this day are nothing lesse, for that we see not onely hattes and bandes, but also buskins, and womens pantofles (yea, of base condition), imbrodred all over with pearle. They fish for pearles in diverse partes of the Indies, the greatest aboundaunce is in the South Seas, neere vnto Panama, where the Ilandes of pearles be, as they call them. But at this day they finde greatest store, and the best, in the North Sea, the which is neare to the Rio de la Hacha. I did see them make their fishing, the which is done with great charge and labor of the poore slaves, which dive sixe, nine, yea twelve fadomes into the sea, to seeke for oysters, the which commonly are fastened to the rockes and gravell in the sea. They pull them vp, and bring them above the water to their canoes, where they open them, drawing forth the treasure they have within them. The water of the sea in Q 2 228 MAIZE. LIB. iv. this p arte is verie colde, but yet the labor and toile isgreatest in holding of their breath, sometimes a quarter,yea halfe an houre together, being vnder the water at theirfishing. And to the end these poore slaves may the bettercontinue and holde their breaths, they feede them with driemeates, and that in small quantitie, so as covetousnessemakes them abstaine and fast thus against their willes.They employ their pearles to diverse workes, and they piercethem to make chaines, whereof there is great store in everyplace. In the yeere of our Lord one thousand five hundredeighty one, I did see the note of what came from the Indiesfor the King ; there were eighteen marcs of pearle, besidesthree caskets ; and for private persons, there were twelve hundred threescore and foure marcs, and besides them, seavencaskets not pierced, which heeretofore we would haveesteemed and helde for a lie. 1 CHAP. xvi. Of Hi c Indian Bread, and of Mays. In our discourse of plants wee will beginne with thosewhich are proper and peculiar to the Indies ; and after withthe rest that are common to the Indies and Europe ; andforasmuch as plants were chiefly created for the nourishment of man, and that the chiefs (whereof he takes hisnourishment) is bread, it shall be good to shew what breadthe Indians vse, and whereon they live for want thereof.They have, as we have heere, a proper name, whereby theynote and signifie bread, which at Peru they call tanta^andin other places by another name. But the qualitie and substance of the bread the Indians vse differs much from ours: for we finde not they had any kinde of wheat or barly, norany other kinde of graine which they vse in Europe to make1 " Que en otro tiempo se tuviera por fabuloso." 2 Ttanta is the Quichua for bread. USES OF MAIZE. 229 bread withall : insteede wliereof the}7 " vsed otlier kindes of LlB - graines and rootes, amongst the which Mays holds the first place, and with reason. In Castile they call it Indian wheat, and in Italic they call it Turkey graine. And even as wheat is the most common graine for the vse of man in the regions of the old world, which are Europe, Asia, Affrike, so, in the new found worlde, the most common graine is Mays, the which is found almost in all the kingdomes of the West Indies, as at Peru, New Spaine, in the new kingdome of Granada, in Gautimala, in Chile, and in the Tierra. Firme. . I do not finde that in old time, in the Hands of Barlovente, as Cuba, Santo Domingo, lamaica, and S. Juan, 1 that they vsed Mays. Now they vse more the Yuca and Casavi, whereof we will presently intreate. I do not thinke that this Mays is any thing inferiour to our wheat in strength nor substance, but it is more hote and grosse, and engenders more bloud, wherevpon they that have not bin accustomed therevnto, if they eat too much, they swell and become scabbed. It growes vpon canes or reedes ; every one beares one or two mazorcas, to the which the graine is fastened, and although the graine be bigge, yet finde they great store thereof, so as in some mazorcas I have told seven hundred graines. They must plant it with the hand one by one, and not very thicke ; it requires a hote and moist ground, and growes in great aboundance in many places of the Indies. It is not strange in those countries to gather 300 Fancyas or measures for one sowen. There is difference of Mays as there is of wheat, one is great and very nourishing, another small and drie, which they call Moroche.2 The greene leaves and stalks of Mays is a good foode for their mules and horses, and it serves them for straw when it is dried ; the graine is of more nourishment for horses then barley; and therefore, in those countries, they vse to water their horses before they eate, for if they 1 Puerto Rico. 2 MurucJiu is "hard" in Quichua. 230 MAIZE BEER. LIB. iv. should drinke after, they would swell as when the} 7 eatewheat. Mays is the Indians bread, the which they commonlyeate boiled in the graine hote, and they call it Moti, 1 as theChinese and Japanese eate their rice sodden with the hotewater. Sometimes they eate it baked. There is some Maysround and bigge, as that of Lucanas, which the Spaniardseate roasted as a delicate meat, and it hath a bettertaste then toasted beans. There is another kindeofeating it more pleasant, which is, to grinde the Mays, andto make small cakes of the flower, the which they put in thefire, and then bring them hote to the table. In some placesthey call them Arepas. They make also round bowlesofthis paste, and so trimme them that they continue long,eating it as a dainty dish. The Indians also make a certaine kinde of paste of this flourmixt with sugar, a kind of biscuits which they call melindres.This Mays serves the Indians, not only for bread, but alsofor wine : for they do make their drinke thereof, wherewiththey are sooner drunke than with wine of grapes. Theymake this wine of Mays in diverse sortes and maners, calling it in Peru Aqua, 2 and by the most common name of theIndies Chicha. And the strongest is made like unto beere;steeping the graine vntill it begins to sprout. After, theyboyle it in such sort, that it growes so strong, as a littleoverthrowes a man. In Peru they call this Sora.3 Its useis forbidden by the Law, for the great inconveniences thatgrow thereby, making men drunke. But this Lawe is illobserved, for that they vse it still ; yea they spend wholerim., lib. dayes and nights in carousing. Pliny reporteth that thismaner of beverage of graine stieped, and after sodden,wherewith they were made drunke, was in old time vsedinSpaine, France, and other Provinces, as at this dayin1 l\hitti, boiled maize. 2 Acca fermented liquor, in Quicliua. 3 *Sora is not a Quicliua word. See G. (k la Vega, i, p. 277. VALUE OP MAIZE. 231 Flanders they vse ale made of malt. There is another LlB - maner of making this Agua or Chicha, which is to mash the mays, and make a leven thereof, and then boile it yea the Indians holde opinion that, to make good leven, it must bee chewed by old withered women, which makes a man sicke to heare, and yet they doe driiike it. The cleanliest manner, the most wholesome, and that which least harmeth, is to roast the Mays, which the most civil Indians doe vse, and some Spaniardes, yea for physicke. For in effect they finde it a very wholesame drinke for the reines, so as you shall hardly finde any one at the Indies complaine of paine in the backe, for that they do drinke of this Chicha. The Spanyards and Indians eate this Mays boyled and roasted for daintinesse, when it is tender in the grape like milke ; they putte it into the pot, and make sauces that are good to eate. The buds of Mays are very fatte, and serve in- steede of butter and oyle : so as this Mays at the Indies serves both for men and beasts, for bread, wine, and oile. For this reason the Viceroy Don Francisco de Toledo saide, that Peru hadde two things rich, and of great norishment, which were Mays, and the cattell of the countrey. In truth, he had reason, for these two things did serve them as a thousand. I will aske sooner than I can answer it, whence Mays was first carried to the Indies, and why they do call this profitable graine in Italie, Turkie graine ? for in trueth I cloe not finde that the Antients make any mention of this graine, though that millet (that Plinie writes to come from the Indies into Italie, tenne yeares before he didde write it) hath some resemblance vnto Mays, for that it is a graine, as he saies, that growes in reede, and covers it selfe with the leafe, and hath the toppe like haires, being very fertile; all which things agree not with millet. To conclude, God hath imparted to ev ry region what is needefull. To this continent he hath given wheate, which is the chiefe nourish- 232 CASSAVA BREAD. LIB. iv. ment of man ; and to the Indians he hath given Mays,,which hath the second place to wheate, for the nourishmentof men and beasts. CHAP. xvn. Of Yucas, Caqavi, Papas, Chunus, and Rice. In some partes of the Indies they vse a kinde of breadthey call Cacavi, 1 which is made of a certaine roote theycall Yuca. This Yuca is a great and grosse roote,which they cutte in small morsells, they grate or scrape it, and then put it in a presse to straine, making a thinue andbroade cake thereof, almost like vnto a Moores target orbuckler; then doe tljey drie it, and this is the breade they eate.It hath no taste, but is healthfull and of good nourishment.For this reason we said, being at Santo Domingo, thatit was the proper foode for great eaters, for that they mighteate much, without any feare of surfietting. They must ofnccessitie water this Caravi before they eate it : it is sharpe,and easely watered with water or broath, wherein it is verygood, for that it swells much, and so they make capirotadas; but it is hardly stieped in milke, in honny of sugar cane, or inwine, for that these liquors cannot pierce it, as it doth breadmade of wheate. Of this Cacavi there is one kind moredelicate than any other, which is that they make of theflower called Xauxau, which they do much esteeme in thosepartes. For my parte, I esteeme more a morsell of bread,how hard and black soever. It is a strange thing that theiuice or water that cometh from this roote when they straineit, which makes the Cacavi, is a deadly poison, and killesany that drinkes thereof ; but the substance that remainethis a very wholesome bread and nourishment, as we havesaide. There is another kinde of Yuca, which they callsweet, and hath not this poyson in the iuyce ; this is eaten1 Cassava. POTATOES. 233 in the roote boyled or roasted, and is good meate. Cagavi LlB - IV< will keepe long, and therefore they carry it to sea in steede of biscuit. The place where they vse most of this bread is at the Hands of Barlovente, which are Saint Domingo, Cuba, Puerto Rico, Jamaica, and some others thereabouts ; for that the soile of these Hands will neither beare wheate, nor Mays, for whenas they sowe wheate, it comes vp well, and is presently greene, but so vnequally, as they cannot gather it ; for of the seede sowen at one instant, some is spindled, some is in the eare, and some doth but bud, one is great and an other little, one is in the grasse and another in the graine ; and although they have carried labourers thither, to see if there were any tillage or Art to be vsed, yet could they finde no remedy for the quality of the earth. They carry rneale from New Spaine or the Canaries, which is so moist, that hardly can they make any profitable bread, or of good taste. The wafer cakes wherewith they say Masse, did bend like to wet paper, by reason of the extreame humiditie and heate which are ioyntley in that countrey. There is another extreame contrary to this, which hinders the growing of mais or wheate in some parts of the Indies, as on the height of the Sierra of Peru, and the provinces which they call the Collao, which is the greatest parte of this "Realm e, where the climate is so colde and drie, as it will not suffer any of these seedes to grow : in steede thereof the Indians vse an other kinde of roote, which they call Papas. These rootes are like to grownd nuttes, they are small rootes, which cast out many leaves. They gather this Papas, and dry it well in the Sunne, then beating it they make that which they call Chunu, which keeps many daies, and serves for bread. In this realme there is great trafficke of Chunu, the which they carry to the mines of Potosi ; they likewise eat of these Papas boyled or roasted. There is one sweete kinde, which growes in hot places, whereof they do make certaine sauces and minced meates, 234 RICE. LIB. iv. whi ch they call Locro. To conclude,, these rootes are the bread of that land ; so as when the yeare is good, they reioyce much, for that oftentimes they freeze in the earth, so great is the cold of that region : they carry Maysfrom the valley or sea coast, and the Spaniardes which are dainty, carrie likewise from the same places wheate rneale, whereof they doe make good breade, because that the land is drie. In other partes of the Indies, as at the Philippines, they vse Rice insteade of bread, whereof there growes very good, and in great aboundance in all that countrey, and in China, and it is of good nourishment, they seethe it in purcelaines, and after mix it hote with the water amongest other meates. In many places they do make their wine anddrinke of this rice, steeping, and then after boyling it, as they do the beere in Flanders, or the Ac,ua in Peru. Riceis a meate not much lesse common and generall throughoutthe world than wheate or mays, and perchaunce more ; for besides that they vse it in China, Lippon, and the Phillippines, and in the greatest parte of the East Indies, it is a graine most common in Affrike and Ethiopia. It requires a wet ground, almost overflowne like to a medow. In Europe,Peru, and Mexico, where they have the vse of wheate, theyeate rice as a meate, and not for bread ; they seethe it with milke or with broth, or in some other sorte. The mostexquisite rice commeth from the Philippines and China, as hath beene saycle. And this may suffice to vnderstandwhat they eate generally at the Indies in steade of bread. CHAP. xvin. Of divers Rootes wliicli growe at the Indies. Although in these partes the Land be more aboundantand fertile in frvites that growes vpon the earth, by reason EDIBLE ROOTS. 235 of the great diversitie of fraite trees and plantes we have ; LlB - IV- yet for rootes and other things that grow vnder the earth, the which they vse for meates, in my opinion there is greatest aboundance there : for of these kindes of plants, we have radishes, turnips, parsnips, carrots, liekes, gar lic, and some other profitable rootes. But in those coun tries they have so many divers sortes, .as I cannot reckon them ; those which I now remember besides Papas, which is the principall, there is Ocas, 1 Yanaocas, 2 Camotes, 3 Batatas, Xiquimas, Yuca, Cochuchu, Cavi, Totora, Mani, and an infinite number of other kindes. They have likewise carried fruites to the Indies from these parts, the which prosper better there then the Indian plants do brought into Europe; the reason in my opinion is, for that there is greater variety of temperatures then in these partes, by meanes whereof the plants in those regions do rise and prosper better, fitting themselves to the tempe rature they require. And the rootes and plants which grow there, and were not transported from hence, are better then they be heere; for onions, garlic and parsnips are not in Spaine, as they be at Peru; and as for turnips, there is so great abundance, as they have increased in some places in such sort, that as they have affirmed to me, they could not destroy the aboundance which grew vp, for to sowe corne there. Wee have seene radish roots as bigge as a mans arme, very tender, and of a good taste, and of these rootes I have spoken, some serve for ordinairie meate, as the Camotres, which being rosted, serve as pulse. There are other rootes that serve them for dainties, as the Cochuchu. It is a small sweete roote, which some preserve for more delight. There are other rootes used to coole, as the xiquima, which is in qualitie very cold and moist, and in summer it 1 Oxalis tuberosa. 2 Yana-oca means black oca. 3 Sweet potatoe. 236 PINE APPLES. LIB. iv. refreshetli and quencheth the thirst; but the Papas andOcas be the chiefe for nourishment and substance. TheIndians esteeme garlic aboye all the rootes of Europe, andhold it for a fruite of great force; wherein they wantno reason, for it comforts and warmes the stomacke, andthey eate it with an appetite rawe as it comes out of the ground. CHAP. xix. Of divers sortcs of green Hearbes and Pulses, and of those they call Pepinos and Pine Apples, Straw berries of Chile, and of Cherries. Seeing wee have begunne with the lesser Plants, I mightin few wordes touch that which concernes Flowers and Pothearbes, and that which the Latines call Arbusta, withoutany mention of trees. There are some kindes of these shrubbes at the Indies which are of very good taste. Thefirst Spaniards named many things at the Indies with suchSpanish names as they did most resemble, as Pines, Pepinos and Cherries, although they be very different fruites to those which are so called in Spaine. The Pines, or Pine-aples, are of the same fashion and forme outwardly to those of Castillo, but within they wholly differ, for that they have neither apples, nor scales, but are all one flesh, which may be eaten when the skinne is off. It is a fruite that hath an excellent smell, and is very pleasant anddelightfull in taste, it is full of iuyce, and of a sweete andsharpe taste, they eate it being cut in morcells, and steeped a while in water and salt. Some say that this breedes choler, and that the vse thereof is not very healthfull. ButI have not scene any experience thereof, that might breede beleefe. They grow one by one like a cane or stalke, whichriseth amongst many leaves, like to the lillie, but some what bigger. The apple is on the toppe of every cane, it FRUITS OF THE INDIES. 237 growes in hote and moist groundes, and the best are those LlB - IVi of the Hands of Barlovente. It growes not in Peru, but they carry them from the Andes, the which are neither good nor ripe. One presented one of these Pine-apples to the Ernperour Charles the fift, which must have cost much paine and care to bring it so farre, with the plant from the Indies, yet would he not trie the taste. I have seene in New Spaine, conserves of these pines, which was very good. Those which they call Pepinos are not trees, but shrubbes, continuing but one yeere. They gave it this name, for that some of this fruite, and the most part, is in length and roundnes like to the cucumbers of Spain ; but for the rest they differ much, for they are not greene, but violet, yellow, or white, neither are they thornie or rough, but polished and even, having a very different taste, and farre better then that of Spaine, for they have a sharpe sweet taste, very pleaasant when it is ripe, yet is it not so sharpe as the pine. They are very coole, full of liquor, and of easie digestion, and in time of heate, fit to refresh. They take away the rinde which is white, and all that remaines is meat. They grow in a temperate soile and require watering. And although for the resemblance they call them cucumbers, yet are there many of them round, and others of a different fashion, so as they have not the figure of cucumbers. I do not remember to have seene this kinde of fruite in New Spaine, nor at the Hands, but vpon the llanos of Peru. That which they call the straw berry of Chile, is of the same sort, very pleasant to eate and comes neere the taste of cherries, but in all other things it differs much for that it is no tree, but an hearbe, which grow r es little and spreades vpon the earth, casting forth this little fruite, the which in colour arid graines re sembles almost the mulbery, when it is white and not ripe, yet is it more rough and bigger then the mulbery. They say this little fruite is naturally found in the fieldes of 238 CALABASHES. LIB. iv. Chile, where I have seene them. They set it vpon plantsand branches, and it growes like any other shrubbe.Those which they call cherries, are verily the fruites of trees,and have more resemblance then the rest to our cherries.There are divers sorts, whereof they call some cherries ofNicaragua, the which are very red and small, and havelittle meat vpon the stone, but that little is of an exquisitetaste, and of a sharpenes as good, or rather better, thencherries. They hold this fruite to be very wholesome, andtherefore they give it to sicke folkes especially to provoke an appetite. There are others that be great and ofa dark colour, they have much meat, but it is grosse and ofno taste, like to the Cliavacanas, which have every one twoor three small stones. But to returne to pot-hearbs, Ifinde not that the Indians had any gardens of divers hearbsand plants, but did onely till the land in some partes forpulses, which they vse, as those which they call Frisolesand Pallares, which serve them as our lentils, beanes, ortares : neither have I knowne that these pulses, or anyother kinds that be in Europe, were there befove theSpaniards entred, who carried plants and pulses fromSpaine thither, where they now grow and increase wonderfully, and in some places exceede greatly the herbs ofthese partes. As, if we speake of melons which grow inthe vallie of Yea, in Peru, whose roote becomes a stalkethat continues many yeeres, bearing melons yeerely, andthey trim me it like vnto a tree : a thing which I do notknow to be in any part of Spaine. But that is more monstrous of the Calibasses or Indian Pompions, and the greatnesthey have as they grow, especially those which are properto the Countrie, which they call Capallos ; the which theyeate most commonly in Lent, boiled and trimmed withsome other sauce. There are a thousand kindes of Cali basses : some are so deformed in their bignes, that of therinde cut in the middest and clensed, they make, as it were, CAPSICUM. 239 baskets to put in all their meat for their dinner. Of the LlB - IV- lesser they make vessells to eate and drinke in, and do trimme them handsomely for many vses. I have spoken this of small plants ; wee will now speake of greater ; but first of their Axi, which is of the lesser. CHAP. xx. Of Axi or Indian Pepper. They have not found at the West Indies any kinde of Spices proper or peculiar to them, as pepper, cloves, cinamon, nutmegges or ginger, although one of our company, who had travelled much, and in diverse partes, tolde vs, that in the deserts of the Hand of lamaica he had found trees where pepper grewe. But they are not yet assured thereof, neither is there anie trade of these spicec at the Indies. The ginger was carried from the Indies to Hispaniola, and it hath multiplied so, as at this day they know not what to do with the great aboundaunce they have. In the fleete the yeare 1587, they brought 22053 quintalls of ginger to Seville : but the naturall spice that God hath given to the West Indies, is that we call in Castille, Indian pepper, and in India, Axi, as a generall worde taken from the first land of the Hands, which they conquered. In the language of Cusco, it is called Vchu, and in that of Mexico, Chili. This plant is well knowne, and therefore I will speake a little, onely wee must vnderstand, that in olde time it was much esteemed amongst the Indians, which they carried into places where it grew not, as a rnarchandise of consequence. It growes not vpon cold grounds, as on the Sierra of Peru, but in hote valleys, where it is often watered. There is of this Axi of diverse colours, some is greene, some red, some yellow, and some of a burning color, which they call Caribe, the which is extreamely sharpe and biting ; there is an other sorte not so sharpe, but is so 240 CAPSICUM. LlB - IV - sweete, as they may eate it alone as any other fruite. Thereis some of it very small and pleasing in the mouth, almostlike to the smell of muske, and is very good. That whichis sharpe and biting in this Axi, be the veines and thegraine onely : the rest is not : for that they eate it greeneand dry,, whole and beaten, in the pot, and in sauces, beingthe chiefe sauce, and all the spice they have at the Indies.When this Axi is taken moderately, it helps and comfortsthe stomacke for digestion : but if they take too much, it hath bad effects, for of its self it is very note, fuming, andpierceth greatly, so as the vse thereof is preiudiciall to thehealth of yong folkes, chiefely to the soule, for that it provokes to lust. It is strange, that although the fire andheate of it be \vell knowne by experience, and that everyman saies it burnes in the mouth and the stomacke ; yetsome, yea many, holde, that the Indian pepper is nothute, but colde, and well tempered. But I might say tothen, the like should be of pepper ; though they broughtme as many experiences as they would of the one and theother : yet is it a very mockery to say it is not note, seeingit is so in the highest degree. They vse salt to temper thisAxi, having great force to correct it, and so they moderateone with the other by the contrarietie that is in them.They vse also Tomates, which are colde and very wholesome.It is a kinde of graine great and full of iuyce, the whichgives a good taste to sauce, and they are good to eate.They have generally throughout the Indies of this Indianpepper, at the Hands, New Spaine, Peru, and all the restthat is discovered. As mays is the generall graine forbread, so Ax-i is the most common spice for sauces. THE PLANTAIN. 241 CHAP. xxi. Of the Plantain. Comming to the greater plants or trees at the Indies, the _ first that shall be needefull to treate of is the Plantain/ or Plantano, as the vulgar call it. I have been sometimes in doubt whether the plane which the antients have so much celebrated,, and that of the Indies, were of one kinde. But if we compare this with what the antients write of the other, without all doubt they will appeare to be very different. The reason why the Spaniards call it platano (for the Indians had no such name) was, as in other trees, for that they have found some resemblance of the one with the other, even as they called some fruites prunes, pines, and cucumbers, being far different from those which are called by those names in Castille. The thing wherein was most resemblance, in my opinion, betwixt the platanos at the Indies and those which the antients did celebrate, is the greatnes of the leaves, for that these have them very great and coole, and the antients did likewise much esteeme them for the greatnesse and coolenesse of their leaves. It is also a plant that requireth much water, and in a manner continually, which agrees with the sacred Scripture that saith : " Like to the plane neere Ecoi. a, 4. the waters^. But in truth there is no more comparison nor resemblance of the one with the other then there is, as the Proverb saith, betwixt an egge and a chesnut. For, first, the antient plane carries no fruit, at the least they made no account therof, but the chiefest reason why they esteemed it was for the shade, for that there was no more Suune vnder a plane than viider a roofe. And contrariwise, the reason why they shoulde regarde it at the Indies, yea make great accompt thereof, is by reason of this fruite, which is very good ; for they have little shade. Moreover, the antient plane had the body so bigge, and the boughs so spread, that Pliny reporteth of one Licinius, a Romane ii/ca. i. 1 Platano. K 242 THE PLANTAIN. LIB. iv. Captaine, who, with eighteene of his companions, dined atease in th/ hollow of one of these planes : and of the Emperour Caius Caligula, who, with eleven of his guests, feastedvpon the toppe of an other plane, where he made themasumptuous banquet. The Indian platanos have neither sogreat nor hollow bodies, nor so broade boughs. He saieth,moreover, that the auntient planes grew in Italie andinSpaine, although they had beene brought thither fromGreece; and first from Asia, but the Indians platanos groweneither in Italy nor in Spaine. I say they growe not there,for although we have scene some at Seville in the Kingsgardens, yet they prosper not, nor are of any account.Finally, whatsoever they find apparently alike betwixt theone and the other is really very different. For although theleaves of the auntient planes were very great, yet were theynot such, nor so great as those at the Indies, seeing thatriin.,iib. Pliny compares it to the leafe of a vine or fig-ge tree. xi, c. 10. The leaves of the Indian platan o are of a wonderfull bignes,and are, in a manor, sufficient to cover a man from the footeto the head, so as no man can doubt but there is greatdifference betwixt the one and the other. But put the casethat this Indian platano be different from the antient, yet deserves it no lesse commendation, it may be more, by reasonof the profitable qualities it hath. It is a plant thatmakes a stocke within the earth, 1 out of the which springsmany and sundrie sprigges, divided and not ioyned together. These sprigges grow bigge, every one makingasmall tree apart, and in growing they cast forth theseleaves, which are of a fine greene, smooth, and great, asIhave said. When it is growne to the height of an estado anda balfe, or two, it puttes forth one only bough of fruite,whereon sometimes there are great numbers of this fruite,and sometimes lesse. I have tolde vpon some of these boughsthree hundred, whereof every one was a spanne long, more1 u Es planta quc en la tierra hace sepa, y della saca diversos pimpollos, sin estor asido ni travado uno de otro." THE PLANTAIN. 243 or lesse, and two or three fingers bigge ; yet is there much LlB - IV - difference heerein betwixt some and others. They take away the rinde, and all the rest is a firrne kernell and tender, good to eate, and nourishing. This fruite inclines more to cold then lieate. They are accustomed to gather the boughs or clusters, as I have said, being greene, and put them into vessells, where they ripen, being well covered, especially when there is a certaine hearbe mingled with it, which serves for this effect. If they suffer them to ripen on the tree, they have a better taste, and a very good smell, like to camuesas. They last almost all the yeere, for that there are alwaies yong ones that grow out of this stocke ; so as when one endes another beginnes to yeelde his fruite ; the one is halfe ripe, and the other be ginnes to bud anew, so as one succeedes another, and the fruite continues the whole yeere. In gathering the cluster, they cut the sprigge or stalke, for that it beares but one, and never but once : but as I have saide, the stalke re- maines, and castes forth new stnlkes, vntill it growes olde and dies. This plantain continues many yeares, and re quires much moisture, and a very hote ground. They put ashes at the foote of it, for the better entertaining therof, and they make small groves, and very thicke, which are of great profit and revenue vnto them ; for that it is the fruite they vse most at the Indies, and is generall in all places, although they say the first beginning comes from Ethiopia. And trueth the Negros vse them much, and in some places they serve them as bread, yea they make wine of them. They eate this fruite rawe like other fruits ; they likewise roast it, and make many sorts of potages and con serves, and in all thinges it serveth very well. There is a kinde of small plantains, white, and very delicate, which in Hispaniola they call Dominiques. There are others which are stronger and bigger, and red of colour. There growe none in the kingdome of Peru, but they are brought from R 2 244 COCOA. LlB - IY - the Indies,, as from Mexico,, Cuernavaca, and other vallies.In Tierra Firme, and in some Hands, there are greatstore of plantains, like vnto thicke groves. If this plant werefit for the fire, it were the most profitable of all others, butit is nothing fit, for neither the body nor the boughs willburne, and much lesse will it serve for building, beingasappy wood, and without force. Yet Don Alonzo de Ercilla,as it is said, vsed the leaves of this tree dried, to write a partof the Araucana, and in truth it may serve for want of paper,seeing that the leafe is as broade as a sheet of paper, orlittle lesse, and foure times as long. CHAP. xxn. Of Cacao and Coca. Although the plantain be the most profitable, yet theCacao is most esteemed in Mexico, and the Coca in Peru,in which two trees they have great superstition. TheCacao is a fruit little lesse than almonds, yet more fatte,the which being roasted hath no ill taste. It is so muchesteemed amongest the Indians (yea and among theSpaniards) that it is one of the richest and the greatesttraffickes of New Spaine, for being a drie fruite, and thatkeepes long without corruption, they carry whole shippesloaden from the province of Guatimala. The last yeare anEnglish Pirat did burne in the Port of Guatulco in NewSpaine above a hundred thousand cargoes of Cacao. Theyvse it instead of money, for with five Cacaos they buy onething, with thirtie an other, and with a hundred an other,without any contradiction; and they vse to give it to thepoore that beg for almes. The chiefe vse of this Cacao,isin a drinke which they call Chocolate, whereof they makegreat accompt in that Country, foolishly, and withoutreason, for it is loathsome to such as are not^ acquaintedwith it, having a skumnie or froth that is very vnpleasantto taste, if they be not very well conceited thereof. Yetit COCA. 245 is a drinke very much esteemed among the Indians, where- LlB - Iv with they feast noble men as they passe through their Country. The Spaniards, both men and women, that are accustomed to the Countrey, are very greedy of this Chocolate. They say they make diverse sortes of it, some hote, some colde, and some temperate, and put therein much of that Chili; yea they make paste thereof, the which they say is good for the stoinacke, and against the catarrh. Whatsoever it be, such as have not been nourished there, are not very curious thereof. The tree whereon this fruite growes is of reasonable bignesse, and well fashioned j it is so tender, that to keepe it from the burning of the Sunne, they plant neere vnto it a great tree, which serves onely to shade it, and they call it the mother of Cacao. There are plantations where they are grown like to the vines and olive trees of Spaine. The province where there is greatest trade in cacao is Guatimala. There growes none in Peru, but this country yields Coca, respecting which there is another still greater superstition. It seems almost fabulous. But in trueth the trafficke of Coca in Potosi doth yearley mount to above half a million of dollars, for tha they vse foure scoure and tenne, or foure score and fifteen thousand baskets every yeare. In the yeare one thousand five hundred eighty three, they spent a hundred thousand. A basket of Coca in Cusco is woorth two peeces and a halfe and three ; and in Potosi it is readily worth foure peeces, and five Tomines, and five peeces tried. 1 It is a kinde of marchandise, by the which all their Markets and Faires are made with great expedition. This Coca, whereof they make such account, is a small greene leafe, which groweth vpon small trees about a fadome high, and in hote and moyst grounds ; every foure moneths it casts forth this leafe, which they call Tresmitas ; it requires great care in planting, beeing very tender, and much more to keepe it when it is gathered. They laie it in order in long and 1 " Pesos ensayados." 240 COCA. narrow baskets, and laden theyr slieepe of the country,which go in troopes with one, two, or three thousandbaskets of this marchandise. They bring it commonly fromthe valleys of the Andes, where there is an extreame heate,and where it raines continually the most part of the yeare; wherein the Indians endure much labour and paine toentertaine it, and often many die, for that they go from theSierra and colde places to till and gather them in the valleys.And therefore there hath beene great question and diversityof opinions among learned men, whether it were moreexpedient to pull vp these trees, or to let them growe, butin the end they remained. The Indians esteeme it much,and in the time of their Kings Yncas it was not lawfull forany of the common people to vse this Coca without licencefrom the Governor. Their vse is to carry it in their mouthes,chawing it and sucking out the iuyce, but they swallow it not. They say it gives them great courage, and is verypleasing vnto them. Many grave men holde this as asuperstition and a meere imagination ; for my part, and tospeake the truth, I perswade not my selfe that it is animagination; but contrariwise, I thinke it works and givesforce and courage to the Indians ; for we see the effectswhich cannot be attributed to imagination, as to go somedaies without meate, but onely ahandfull of Coca, and otherlike effects. The sauce wherewith they doe eate this Cocais proper enough, whereof I have tasted, and it is like thetaste of leather. The Indians mingle it with the ashes ofbones, burnt and beat into powder, or with, lime, as othersaffirm e, which seemeth to them pleasing and of a goodtaste ; and they say it dooth them much good. Theywillingly imploy their money therein, and vse it as money; yet all these things were not inconvenient, were not thehazard of the trafficke thereof, wherein so many men areoccupied. The Lords Yncas vsed Coca as a delicate androyall thing, which they offered most in their sacrifices,burning it in honor of their idolls. MAGULY. 247 CHAP. XXTII. Of Maguey, Tuned, Gochcnille, Anir, and Cotton. Maguey is a tree of wonders, whereof the Notaries or Chapetons (as the Indians call them) are wont to write miracles, in that it yeeldeth water, wine, oyle, vineger, hony, sirrope, threede, needles, and a thousand other things. It is a tree which the Indians esteerae much in New Spaine, and have commonly in their dwellings some one of them for the maintenaunce of life; it grows in the fields, and hath great and large leaves, at the end whereof is a strong and sharp point, which serves to fasten like pins, or to sowe as a needle; and they draw out of this leafe as it were a kinde of threed which they vse. They cut the body, which is big, when it is tender, wherein is a great hollownesse, by which the substance mounts from the root, and is a liquor which they drink like water, being sweet and fresh. This liquor being sodden, turnes like wine, which growes to vinegar, suffring it to sowre, and boyling it more, it becomes as hony, and boyling it halfe, it serves as sirrope, which is healthfull enough and of good taste in my iudgement it is better then the sirrope of raisins. Thus doe they boyle this liquor, and vse it in diverse sortes, whereof they drawe a good quantitie, for that in some seasons they draw daily some pots of this liquor. There are also of these trees in Peru, but they are not so profitable as in New Spaine. The wood of this tree is hollow and soft, and serves to keepe fire, like to the match of a harquebuze, and preserves it long ; I have seene the Indians vse it to that end. The Tunall 1 is another famous tree in New Spaine : if we may call a tree a heape of leaves gathered together one vpon another, it is the strangest fashioned tree of all other, 1 Prickly pear. 248 PRICKLY PEARS AND COCHINEAL. for first there grows one leafe out of the ground, thenanother vpon it, and so one vpon one, till it commeth to hisperfection ; but as the leaves grow vp and on the sides,those vnderneath doe become great, and loose in a mannerthe forme of leaves, making a bodie and braunches, whichare sharpe, pricking and deformed, so as in some places theydoe call it a Thistle. There are thistles or wilde Tunalls,the which do carry no fruite, or else it is very pricking,without any profit. There are likewise planted Tunallswhich yeelde fruite much esteemed amongst the Indians,the which they call Tunas, and they are much greater thenPlumbes, and long. They open the shell which is fatte,and within it is meate and small graines, like to those offigges, which be very sweete ; they have a good taste,especially the white, which have a pleasing smell, but thered are not vsually so good. There is another sorte ofTunalls which they esteeme much more, although it yeeldes no fruit, yet it beares an other commoditie andprofit, for certayne small wormes breede in the leavesof this tree, when it is well husbanded, and aro there-vnto fastned, covered with a certaine small fine web,which doth compasse them in daintily ; and this is thatIndian Cochinillc so famous, and wherewith they dye.They let it drie, and being dried, carry it into Spaine,which is a great and rich marchandise. The arroba of thisCochinille or graine is worth many ducats. In the fleete,the yeare 1587, they did bring five thousand sixe hundredseventy seven arrobas, which amounted to two hundredfoure score three thousand seven hundred and fifty peeces,and commonly there conies every yeare as great a wealth. These Tunalls grow in temperate grounds inclining tocolde. In Peru there growes none to this day, I haveseene some plants in Spaine, but they deserve not estimation. I will speake something likewise of the Anir,although it comes not from a tree, but from an hearb, for COTTON. 249 that it serveth for the dying of cloth, and is a marchandise. LlB - IV- It groweth in great aboundance in New Spaine, from whence there came in the fleete I mentioned 5263 arrobas, or ther- abouts, which amounted to so many peeces. Cotton likewise growes vpon small shrubs and great trees like to little apples, which doe open and yeelde forth this webbe ; which being gathered, they spinne to make stuffes. It is one of the things at the Indies of greatest profite, and most in vse, for it serves them both insteed of flaxe and wooll to make their garmentsIt groweth in a hote soyle, and there is a great store in the vallies and sea coast of Peru, in New Spaine, the Philippines and China. But the greatest store of any place that I know is in the province of Tucuman, in that of Santa Cruz de la Sierra, and at Paraguay, whereas Cotton is their chiefe revenue. They carry cotton into Spaine from the Hand of Santo Domingo ; and the yeare that I spake of there came 64,000 arrobas. At the Indies whereas this cotton growes, they make cloth, which both the men and women vse commonly, making table napkins thereof, yea and sailes for their shippes. There is some coarse, and other that is fine and delicate ; they dye it into diverse colours, as wee doe by our woollen cloth in Europe. CHAP. xxiv. Of Mameys, Guayavos, and Palias. These Plants we have spoken of are the most profitable of the Indies, and the most necessary for the life of man : yet there are many other that are good to eate, among the which the Mameys are esteemed, being in fashion like to great peaches, and bigger; they have one or two stones within them, and their meate is somewhat hard. There are some sweete, and others somewhat sower, and have the riude hard. They make conserves of the meate of this 250 GUAVAS. ALLIGATOR PEARS. LIB. iv. fruite, which is like to marmelade. The vse of this fruite isreasonable good, but the conserves they make thereof arebetter. They grow in the Hands. I have not seene anyinPeru. It is a great tree, well fashioned, and a reasonablefaire leafe. The Guayavos be other trees which commonlycarry an ill fruite, full of sower kernells, and are like tolittle apples. It is a tree little esteemed vpon the TierraFirme and at the Hands, for they say it smells like to thechinches. The taste and savour of this fruite is very grosse,and the substance vnholesome. In Santo Domingo and otherHands, there are whole mountaines full of these Guayavos,and they say there was no such kinde of trees before theSpaniards came there, but that they brought them theyknow not from whence. This tree hath multiplied infinitely,for that there is no beast that will eate the kernells or thegraine, so as being thus scattered on the earth, being hoteand moist, it multiplies in this sort. In Peru, the Guayavosdiffers from others, for that the fruite is not red, but white,neither hath it any ill smell, but is of a very good taste; and of what sort of Guayavos soever it bee, the fruit is asgood as the best of Spaine, especially of those which theycall Guayavos de Matos, and of other little white Guayavillas.It is a fruit reasonably holesome, and agrees with thestomache, being of a strong digestion, and cold. The Paitas1 commonly are hote and delicate. The Palta is a greattree, and carries a faire leafe, which hath a fruite like togreat peares : within it hath a great stone, and all the restis soft meate, so as when they are full ripe, they are, asitwere, butter, and have a delicate taste. In Peru the Paltasare great, and have a very hard skale, which may be takenoff whole. This fruite is most vsuall in Mexico, havingathinne skinne, which may be pilled like an apple: they holdit for a very holesome meate, and, as I have said, it declinesa little from heat. These Mamayes, Guayavos, and Paltns,1 Alligator pears. CHIRIMOYAS. 251 1)0 the Indians peaches, apples, and peares ; and yet would LlB - IV - I rather choose them of Europe. But some others by vse, or it may be by affection,, doe more esteeme those of the Indies. I doubt not but such as have not seene nor tasted of these fruites, will take small pleasure to reade this dis course, yea, they will grow wearie to heare it, as I have done in writing it, which makes me to abridge it, speaking of some other sortes of fruites, for it were impossible to in- treate of them all. CHAP. xxv. Of Chicoqapote, Anonas, and Capolies. Some, desirous to augment thiuges at the Indies, have given out that there is a fruite like vnto quince marmalade, and another which tastes like a meate made of almonds and creame, 1 for that the taste of them deserves these names. The marmalad is that which they call Zapotes or Chicocapotes, which have a sweete taste, and neere vnto the colour of mar malade. Some Creoles (for so they call the Spaniards borne at the Indies) say that this fruite passeth all the fruites of Spaine in excellency ; yet am I not of that opinion ; at the least they say, it passeth all other fruites in taste ; but I will not dwell vpon this question, for that it doth not deserve it. Those Chicocapotes or Zapotes, wherein there is little differ ence, grow in the hotest partes of New Spaine, neither have I knowledge of any such fruite in the firrne land of Peru. As for the Blanc-mange, it is that Anona or Guanavana which growes in Tierra Firrne, which is fashoned like vnto a peare, a little sharpe and opened, within it is white, tender, and soft like butter, sweete and of a pleasing taste. It is no whit meate, though they call it Blanc-mange, but in truth they have added much vnto it by giving this name : although it be delicate and of a sawcie and delicious taste, 1 u Manjar-blauco." 252 LUCUMAS, PACCAYS, GUAVAS. LIB. iv. an(j according to the iudgement of some it is held for the~ best fruite of the Indies, yet hath it many blacke kernellswithin it, and the best which I have seene is in New Spaine,where the Capolies also grow, which be like vnto cherries,with a stone, but somewhat bigger : the forme and shapeislike vnto cherries, of a good taste, being sweete and sharpe; but I have not seene any Capolies in any other Countrie.CHAP. xxvi. Of various sortcs of fruit Trees, of Cocos,Almondes of the Andes, and Almonds of Chachapoyas. It were not possible to reckon all the fruites and trees atthe Indies, for that I remember not many, and there aremany more whereof I have no knowledge ; and in myopinion, it were troublesome to speake of all those I nowremember. There are some grosse fruites, as those whichthey call Lucumas (of which fruite they speake in a proverbe,that it is a counterfet price), the Guavas, Paccayes, Hobos,and the nuttes which they call imprisoned ; l which fruitesseeme to many to be the same kinde of nuttes we haveinSpaine ; yea, they say, if they were often transplanted fromplace to place, they would carry nuttes altogether like tothose of Spaine. And the reason why the fruite is so vnpleasant is, for that they are wilde. To conclude, we oughtwell to consider the providence and riches of the Creator,who impartes to so diverse partes of the world, such varietieof fruite trees, all for the service of man that inhabites theearth. And it is an admirable thing to see so many differentformes, tastes, and effects vnknowne, whereof we did neverheare speake before the discoverie of the Indies. And whereofPlinie himselfe, Dioscorides, and Theophrastus (yea, the mostcurious), had no knowledge, notwithstanding all their searchand dilligence. There have beene some curious men of our1 Eucarceladas. COCOA NUTS. 253 age, which have written some Treatises of the Indian plants, LlB> IT- of hearbes, and roots, and of their operations for phisicke, to whom they may flie for their better instruction. I onely pretend (and in few words) to treate superficially of that which comes to memory touching this subject ; yet do I not thinke it good to passe away vnder silence the Cocos or In dian palmes, by reason of a very notable propertie it hath. I call them palmes, not properly, or that it beares dates, but that they are trees like to other palmes. They are high and strong, and the higher they grow the broader they stretch out their branches. These Cocos yield a fruit which they likewise call Cocos, whereof they com monly make vessells to drinke in, and some they say have a vertue against poison, and to cure the paine in the side. The nutte and meate being dried, is good to eate, and comes neere in taste to greene chesnuttes. When the Coco is tender vpon the tree, the substance within it is, as it were, milke, which they drinke for daintines, and to refresh them in time of heate. I have seene of these trees in San Juan de Puerto Rico, and other parts of the Indies, and they report a wonderfull thing, that every raoneth or Moone, this tree casts forth a new branch of this Cocos ; so as it yeeldes fruite twelve times in the yeere, as it is written in the Apocalips : and in truth this seemes like vnto it, for that all the branches are of different ages, some beginning, others being ripe, and some halfe ripe. These Cocos are commonly of the forme and bignes of a small melon. There is of another kinde which they call Coquillos, the which is a better fruite, whereof there be some in Chile. They are some what lesse then nuttes, but more round. There is another kinde of Cocos, which have not the kernell so oylie, but within they have a great number of small fruites like almonds, like vnto the graines of a Pomegranate. These almonds are thrice as bigge as those of Castill, and resemble them in taste, though they be more sharpe, and 251 BRAZILIAN NUTS. LIB. iv. likewise moist and oylie. It is a good meate ; they vse italso in feasting, for lack of almonds to make marchpanes,and such other things. 1 They call them Almonds of theAndes, for that these Cocos growe aboundantlie vpou theAndes of Peru ; they are so strong and hard, as to openthem they must beate them with a great stone, when theyfall from the tree. If they chance to hit anie one on thehead, he hath no more need of any surgeon. It is an incredible thing, that within the hollow of these Cocos, whichare no bigger than the rest, or little more, there are suchamultitude of these almonds. But as touching almondes andother fruites, all trees must yeelde to the almonds of Chachapoyas, which I cannot otherwise call. It is the most pleasing, delicate, and wholesome fruit of all that I have sceneat the Indies ; yea, a learned Physician did affirrne, thatamongcst all the fruits at the Indies or in Spaine, nonecame neere these Almonds in excellencie. There are bothgreater and lesse than those of the Andes, but all are fatterthan those of Castillo. They are very tender to oate, andthey have much iuyce and substance, and are oylie and verypleasant : they grow vpon high trees, bearing great leaves.And as it is a pretious thing, so nature hath given themagood covering and defence, being in a huske somewhatbigger and more pricking than a chesnut. Yet when thishuske is drie, they easily draw foorth the graine. They saythat the apes, who are very greedie of this fruit, andwhereof there is aboundance in Chachapoyas of Peru (whichis the onely countrey, to my knowledge, where these treesdoe growe), fearing they should pricke them, and yet desirousto draw forth the almond, they cast them from the toppe ofthe tree against the stones, and having broken the huske,they open them to eate the fruite at their pleasure. 1 " Macjapanes." FLOWEES. 255 CHAP. XXVTI. Of many and diverse flowers, and of some trees ivhich yeeldc otiely a flower, and hoiu the Indians do vse them. The Indians are great lovers of flowers, and in New L . Spaine more than in any other parte of the worlde, and therefore they are accustomed to make many kindes of nosegaies, which there they call Saddles, with such prety varietie and art, as nothing can be more pleasing. They have a custorae amongst them, that the chiefest man offer their Suchiles or nosegayes in honour to Noblemen, and to their guests ; and they presented vs with such aboundance as we passed through that Country, as we knew not what to doe with them ; and at this day they vse the principall flowers of Castill to that end, for that they grow better there than heere, as gilliflowers, roses, iasmins, violets, orange flowers, and other sortes which they have transported out of Spaine. The rose tree groweth too fast in some places, so as they beare no roses. It chaunced one day that a rose garden was burned, and the sprouts which sprouted out, presently bare aboundance of roses, and thereby they learnd to prune them, and to cut off the superfluous braunches, so as at this day they yeeld reasonable store of roses. But besids these kindes of flowers, which have beene transported from hence, there are many others whose names I do not know, whereof some are red, blew, yellow, violet and white, with a thousand different colours, which the Indians did vse to carry on their heads, as feathers for ornament. True it is, that many of these flowers are onely pleasing to the sight, having no good savour, eyther they are grosse, or else they have none at all ; and yet there be some of an excellent scent, as those which growe vpon a tree termed by them Floripondio 1 or carry flower, which beares no fruit, but onely these flowers, which are greater than the Lillie, and are like to 1 The Datura. 256 FLOWERS. GEANADILLAS. LlB- 1V> little bells, all white, which have within them small threeds,as we see in the lillie : it leaves not all the yeare to bearethese flowers, whose smell is woonderfull sweete and agreeable, especially in the cool of the morning. The ViceroyDon Francisco de Toledo sent of these trees vnto KingPhilip, as a thing woorthy to be planted in royall gardens.In New Spaine the Indians esteeme much of a flower, whichthey call Yolosuchil, which signifieth flower of the heart,for that it beares the forme of a heart, and is not muchlesse. There is likewise an other great tree, which bearesthis kinde of flower, without any fruit e ; it hath a strongsavour, and in my opinion, too violent, the which mayseeme to some more pleasing. It is a thing well knowne,that the flower which they call of the Sunne, hath the figureof the Sunne, and turtles according to the motion thereof.There are other kindes which they call pinks of the Indies, the which are like to a fine orange tawnie velvet, oraviolet ; those have no scent of any account, but onely faire tothe eye. There are other flowers, which besides the beautieof the eye, although they have no smell, yet have they a savourlike vnto cresses, the which if you shoulde eate withoutlooking of them, you would iudge them to be no other.The flower of Granadilla1 is held for an admirable thing, andthey say it hath in it the markes of the passion, and thattherein they note the nailes, the pillar, the whips, andcrowne of thornes, and the woundes, wherein they are notaltogether without reason, and yet to finde out and observethese things, it requires some pietie to cause beleefe : butitis very exquisite and fair to the eye, although it havenosmell. The fruite which they also call Granadilla is eatenand drunke ; or to speake more properly, sucked forarefreshing ; this fruite is sweete, and too sweete after someopinions. The Indians were vsed in their feasts and dancesto carry flowers in their handes, and the Kings and Noblemen carry them for their greatnes. For this reason we1 Passion flower. BALSAM. 257 commonly see pictures of their ancient people with flowers LlB- 1V> in their hands, as heere they paint people with gloves in their hands. I thinke this sufficient touching flowers. They vse basil for the same purpose of perfume and recreation, although it is no flower, but an hearbe onely, which they were wont to plant carefully in their gardins, but now they regard it not, so as it growes onely about their pooles and ponds. CHAP, xxvin. Of Balsam. The Soveraigne Creator hath not onely fashioned plants to serve as meat, but also for recreation, for phisicke, and for the cure of man. I have spoken somewhat of those that serve for nourishment, which is the chiefe, and a little of those that serve for recreation, and now we are to intreate of those which are proper for phisicke, wherein I will speake something. And although all plants are medicinall when they are well knowne and applied, yet there are some things especially, which wee see directly ordained by the Creator for phisicke, and for the health of man, as liquors, oiles, gummes, and rozines, which come from divers plants and hearbes, and which easily shew by experience whereto they are proper. Above all, balsam is with reason esteemed for the excellent smell, but much more for the exquisite effect it hath to cure woundes and divers other remedies, as experience hath taught in the cure of diseases. The balsam which comes from the West Indies is not of the same kind of true balsam which they bring from Alexandria or Cairo, and in old time was in ludea, which ludea (as Plinie writeth) did of all the world possesse this greatnesse, vntill the Emperor Yespasian broght it to Rome and into Italie. The reason why I say the liquor of the one and the other are not of one kinde, is for that the trees from whence it comes are very different; for the balsam tree of Palestine XVI. 258 BALSAM. LIB. iv. wag sma]i ? and fashioned like to a vine (as Plinie reporteth,wlio had seene it), and those that at this day that have seenecant. i. them in the East, say as much. As also the holy Scripturecalles the place where the balsam grows, Vine of Engaddi,for the resemblance it hath to vine. At the Indies I haveseene the tree from whence they draw the balsam, whichisas bigge as a pomegranate tree, and some thing neerethefashion; and if my memory failes me not, it hath nothingstrab., lib. common with the vine, although that Strabo writes that theancient tree of balsam was of the bignes of a pomegranatetree. But in other respects they are much alike, as likewise they be in their admirable smells, and in the cure andhealing of wounds, in colour and substance, seeing theyreport of other balsams that there is some white, vermilion,greene, and blacke, the which is likewise seene in thatofthe Indies. And as they drew forth the balsam of theoldworld by cutting and making incisions in the barke, to causethe liquor to distill out, so do they with that at the Indies,although it distilles in greater aboundance. And as in theancient there is one kinde which is pure, the which theycall Opobalsamum, which be the very teares that distill, soas there is another sort which is not so exquisite, the whichthey drawe from the barke and leaves strained and boiledon the fire, the which they call Xilobalsamum. The likeisalso in the Indian balsams. There is one pure that distillesfrom the tree, and others that the Indians draw outbystraining and boiling the leaves and wood; yea, theydosophisticate and augment it with other liquors, to makeit increase. It is not without reason they call it balsam,for in truth it is so (although it be not of the samekinde of the ancient), yet it is much esteemed andshould be more, if the great aboundance were notthecause, as in emeraldes and pearles. That which importes most, is the vse wherein it is imployed, for incense in the Church. The Apostolike See hath given BALSAM. 259 libertie to use creame of balsam at the Indies in the LlB - IV- sacrament of confirmation and other ceremonies which they vse. They bring balsam to Spaine from Isew Spaine, from the Province of Guatimalla, from Chiapa, and other places where it aboundes most, although the most esteemed be that which comes from the Hand of Tolu, which is in Tierra Firme, not farre from Carthagena. This balsam is white, and commonly they hold the white to bee more perfect then the red, although Plinie gives the first place to the vermilion, ^J 11^ ^the second to the white, the third to greene, and the last to blacke ; but it seemes that Strabo esteemed more the white strab.,iibr. balsams, as we do. Monardes discourseth at large of the Geo raP- Indian balsam in the first and second part, especially of that of Carthagena and Tolu, which is all one. I have not found that the Indians in olde time did much esteeme balsam, nor yet imploy it in any important vse, although Monardes saieth, that the Indians cured their woundes therewith, and from thence the Spaniardes learned it. CHAP. xxix. Of Amber, and oilier Oyles, Gums; and Drugges, which they bring from the Indies. .Next to balsam, liquidambar holdes the second place : it is another liquor which is likewise sweete and medicinall ; but more thicke, and turnes into a paste of a hote complexion, and a good perfume, the which they apply to woundes, bruises, and other necessities ; wherein I will referre my selfe to the Physicians, especially to Doctor Monardes, who in his first Part hath written of this liquor, and many others that are medicinal, which come from the Indies. This liquid ambar comes from New Spaine, which hath that advantage above other Provinces in goomes, liquors, and iuyce of trees, whereby they have such aboundance of matter, for perfume and phisicke, as is the Anime, whereof there comes great s2 260 DEUGS AND DYES. store, copall, or suchicopal, which is another kinde, storaxand incenso, which have excellent operations, and haveavery good smell, fit for fumigations. Likewise the Tacamahaca and Carafia, which are also very medicinall. They bringlikewise from this Province oyle of grease which they callaveto, and which the Physicians and Painters vse much,theone for plasters, the other to varnish their pictures. Theybrng also for the Physicians Cassia fistula, the which growesplentifully in Santo Domingo. It is a great tree, which carriesthese canes as his fruite. They brought in the fleete whereinI carne from Santo Domingo fortie eight quintalles of Cassiafistula. Sarsaparilla 1 is not lesse knowne, for a thousandremedies wherein it is vsed. There came in the same fleetefiftie quintalles from the same Hand. There is muchofthis Sarsaparilla at Peru, and most excellent in the Province of Guayaquil, which is vnder the Line. Many gotobe cured into this Province, and it is the opinion of some,that the pure water onely which they drinke, gives themhealth, for that it passeth by rootes as I have said, fromwhence it drawes this vertue, so as there needes no greatcovering or garments to make a man sweate in that countrie. The w r ood of Guayacan, which they call Lignum sanctum, or Indian wood, growes aboundantly in the sameHands, and is as heavie as yron, so as it presently sinkesinthe water ; heereof they brought in the same fleete 350quintalls, and they might have brought twentie, yea,ahundred thousand of this wood, if there were vse for it.There came in the same fleete, and from the same Hand,130 quintalles of Bresill wood, the which is fierie red, sowell knowne, and much vsed in dying and other things.There are at the Indies infinite numbers of other aromaticall woodes, gurnmes, oyles, and drugges, so as it is notpossible to name them all, neither doth it now much import.I say onely, that in the time of the Kings Yncas of Cusco,1 See my translation of Cieza de Leon, pp. 200, 395. TOBACCO. 201 and the Mexicaine Kings, there were many great personages LlB - IV - expert in curing of diseases with simples, and did goodly cures, having the knowledge of the many vertues and pro perties of hearbes, rootes, woodes, and plants which grow there, and whereof the Ancients of Europe have had no knowledge. There are a thousand of these simples fit to purge, as the rootes of Mechoagan, the pinones de la Puna, the conserve of Guanuco, the oyle of Fig-trees, and many other things, the which being well applied, and in time, they hold to be of no lesse efficacie then the drugges that come from the East. The which may be seene in reading the discourse which Monardes hath made in the first and second Part, where he treates amply of Tobacco, whereof they have made notable experiences against poison. Tobacco is a small tree or plant, common enough, the which hath in it rare vertues, as amongst others it serves for a counterpoison, like to many and divers other plants : for the Creator of all things hath imparted his vertues at his pleasure, not willing that any thing should grow idle. But it is another soveraigne gift to man, to know them and their proper vses, the which the same Creator gives to whome hee pleaseth. Dr. Francisco Hernandez hath made a goodly worke vppon this subiect, of Indian plants, liquors, and other medicinal things, by the Kings expresse commission and commaundement, causing all the plants at the Indies to be lively painted, which they say are above a thousand two hundred ; and that the worke cost above three score thousand ducats : out of which worke the Doctor Nardo Antonio, an Italian Physician, hath made a curious extract, sending him to the foresaid bookes that desires more exactly to knowe the plants at the Indies, especially for physicke. 262 FORESTS, CHAP. xxx. Of great forrests at the Indies, of Cedars, ofCeyvas, and other great trees. Although from the beginning the earth did bring foorthplants and trees by the commandement of the Lord, yethath it yielded more in one place than in another andbesides the plants and trees, which by the industry of manhave beene transplanted and carried from place to place,there are many which Nature it selfe hath brought forth.I do beleeve, that of this sort there are more at the newworld, which we do call the Indies, either in numberordiversitie, than in the olde, as Europe, Asia, or Affrike.The reason is, for that the climate at the Indies is generallyhot and moist, as we have declared in the second Booke,against the opinion of the Antients, which causeth theearth naturally for to bring foorth an infinite number of wildplants, whereby the greatest part of the Indies is inhabitable, being almost impossible to travell by reason of thewoodes and thicke forrests that are there, which they labourdailie to cut downe. It hath bin needefull (passing throughsome partes of the Indies, especially where they newlyentred) to make their way, in cutting downe trees, andpulling vp bushes, so that fas some religious men havewritten that have tried it) they coulde not sometimes havepassed above a league in a day. One of our brothers(aman worthy of credite) reported vnto vs, that being straiedin the inountaines, not knowing which way he shoulde passe,he fell among such thicke bushes that he was forced to govpon them, without setting foote to the ground, bythespace of fifteen e whole dayes : and to see the Suime, ortoniarke some way in this thicke forrest full of wood, he wasforced to climbe to the top of the highest trees to discover.He that shall reade the discourse of his travell, how oftenhee was lost, and the wayes he passed, with the strange TIMBER TREES. 263 adventures that happened vnto him, the which I have writ- LlB - IV- ten briefly, being so worthy the knowledge, and having my selfe travelled a little over the mountain es of the Indies, were it but the eighteene leagues betwixt Nombre de Dios and Panama, may well iudge what great forrests there are. So as having no winter in those parts, to nip them with colde, and the humiditie of the heavens and earth being so great, as the mountaines bring foorth infinit forrests, and the plaines, which they call Savannas, great plenty of grasse : there is no want of pasture for feeding, of timber building, nor of wood for fewell. It is impossible to set downe the differences and formes of so many wilde trees, for that the names of the greatest parte are vnknowne. Cedars, in olde time so much esteemed, are there very common, both for buildings and shippes, and they are of diverse sortes, some white, and some redde, very odoriferous. There are great store of laurels, very pleasant to beholde, vpon the Andes of Peru, vppon the mountaines of Tierra Firme, in the Hands, in Nicaragua, and in New Spaine. There are also infinite numbers of Palmes and Ceyvas, whereof the Indians make their Canoes, which are boates made of one peece. They bring into Spaine from the Havana, excellent timber. In the Hand of Cuba, there are infinite numbers of like trees, as Evanos, Caovana, Granadillo, Cedars, and other kindes which I do not know. There are great pine trees in New Spaine, though they be not so strong as those in Spaine; they beare cones but empty apples. 1 The oaks as they call them of Guayaquil, is an excellent wood and sweet, when they cut it; yea, there are canes or most high reedes, of whose boughs or small reedes they doe make bottles and pitchers to carry water, and do likewise vse them in their buildings. There are likewise the " Palos de Mangles", whereof they make masts for their 264 TIMBER TREES. LID. iv. shippes^ and they hold them as strong as yron. Nolle1 is atree of many vertues, which casteth foorth small boughes,whereof the Indians make wine. In Mexico they call itthe tree of Peru, for that it came from thence; but it growesalso in New Spaine, and better than those in Peru. Thereare a thousand other trees, which were a superfluous labourto intreate of, whereof some are of an exceeding greatnesse.I will speake only of one which is in Tlacochavaya, threeleagues from Gauxa in New Spaine. This tree beingmeasured within, being hollow, was found to have ninefadome, and without, neare to the roote, sixteene, andsomewhat higher, twelve. This tree was strooke withlightning from the toppe to the bottome through the heart,the which caused this hollownesse ; they say that before thethunder fell vpon it, it was able to shadow a thousand men,and therefore they did assemble there for theyr daunces andsuperstitions ; yet to this day there doth remaine someboughes and verdure, but not much. They know not whatkinde of tree it is, but they say it is a kind of cedar. Suchrim.jib. as shali finde this strange, let them reade what Pliniexxii, c. 1. rcporteth of the plane of Lycia, the hollow whereof contained foure score foote and one, and seemed ratheracabbin or a house than the hollow of a tree, his boughs likea whole wood, the shaddow whereof covered a great partoftli (3 field. By that which is writen of this tree, we havenogreat cause to wonder at the weaver, who hadde hisdwelling and loome in the hollow of a chesnut tree ; andofanother chesnut tree, if it were not the very same, into thehollow whereof there entered eighteene men on horsebacke,and passed out without disturbing one another. TheIndians did commonly vse their idolatries in these trees, sostrange and deformed, even as did the antient Gentiles, assome writers of those times doe report. 1 ScJihws Molle. See my translation of G. dc la Vega, i, 187 ; andii oGl 367. PLANTS INTRODUCED FROM SPAIN. 265 CHAP. xxxi. Of Plants midfruits which have bin carried out of Spaine to the Indies. The Indians have received more profit, and have bin LIB. IT. better recompensed in plants that have bin broght from Spaine, than in any other marchandise, for that those few which are carried from the Indies into Spaine, growe little there, and multiply not ; and contrariwise the great number that have beene caried from Spaine to the Indies, prosper wel and multiplie greatly. I know not whether I shall attribute it to the bounty of the plants that goe from hence, or to the goodnesse of the soile that is there. Finally, there is at the Indies any good thing that Spaine brings foorth ; in some places it is better, in some worse, as wheate, barley, hearbes, and all kindes of pulses ; also lettuce, cab bage, radishes, onions, garlike, parsley, turnips, parsnips, nightshade, 1 or apples of love, siccorie, beetes, spinage, pease, beanes, vetches ; and finally, whatsoever groweth heere of anie profite, so as all that have voyaged thither, have beene curious to carry seedes of all sorts, and all have growen, although diversly, some more, some Jesse. As for those trees that have most aboundantly fructified, be orange trees, limons, citrons, and others of that sort. In some partes there are at this day, as it were, whole woods and forests of orange trees ; the which seeming strange vnto mee, I asked who had planted the fields with so many orange trees ? they made mee answer, that it did come by chaunce, for that oranges being fallen to the ground, and rotten, their seeds did spring, and of those which the water had carried away into diverse partes, these woods grew so thicke, which seemed to me a very good reason. I have saide that this fruite hath generally increased most at the Indies, for that I have not beene in any place but I 1 Bcrengenas. 266 FKUITS INTRODUCED FROM SPAIN. LIB. iv. fi n(j0 orange trees, for that all their soyle is hote andmoist, which this tree most desires. There growes not anyvppon the Sierra or mountain s, but they carry them fromthe vallies or sea coast. The conserve of oranges which,they do make at the Hands is the best I have seene aniewhere; peaches, nectarines,, and apricotes have greatlymultiplied, especially in New Spaine. At Peru theregrowes few of these kindes of fruites, except peaches, andmuch lesse in the Hands. There growes apples and peares, butnot abundantly; there are but few plumbs, but aboundanceof figges, chiefly in Peru. They finde quinces in all thecountry of the Indies, and in New Spaine, in suchaboundance as they gave vs fifty choice ones for halfe ariall. There is great store of pomegranates, but they areall sweete, for the sharp are not there esteemed. There arevery good melons in some partes of Peru. Cherries, bothwilde and tame, have not prospered well at the Indies, thewhich I do not impute to want of temperature, for thatthere is of all sorts, but to carelessnesse, or that they havenot well observed the temperature. To conclude, I do notfinde that in those partes there wants any dainty fruite.As for grosso fruites, they have no chesnuttes, neitherdoe I fiude that any have growne there to this day.Almonds growe there, but rarely. They carry fromSpaine, for such as are dainty mouthed, both almonds,nuttes, and filberts ; but I have not knowne they hadany medlers, which importes little. In my Judgement,this may suffice to shew that there wanteth no delightful!fruites. Now let vs speake somewhat of plants that profit,and which have been carried from Spaine, and so we willende this discourse on plants, which is getting long. VINES. 267 CHAP, xxxii. Of grapes, vines, olives, mulberries, and canes of sugar. I meane by profitable plants, those which, besides that LlB> Iv> which they eate in the house, bring silver to theyr masters; the chiefe of these is the vine, whereof commeth wine, vineger, grapes, greene and dry, veriuyce, and sirrope ; but the wine is the best. There growes no wine nor grapes in the Ilandes, nor in Tierra Firme, but in New Spaine there are some vines which beare grapes, and yet make no wine. The cause is, for that the grape ripens not well,, by reason of the raine that falles in the months of luly and August, which hinders their ripening, so as they serve onely to eate. They carry wine out of Spaine, and from the Canaries, to all partes of the Indies, except Peru and the realme of Chile, where there are vines that yeelde excellent wine, which increase daily both in quantity, for that it is great riches in that country, and in beauty, for that they are become with time and practise more expert vine growers. The vines of Peru are commonly in hote vallies, where there are water channels, and they irrigate by hand, because there falles no raine at all from heaven in the Llanos, and the rains in the Sierra are not in the proper season. There are some places where the vines are not watered, neither from heaven nor earth, and yet they increase in great aboundance, as in the valley of Yea, -and in the hoy as that they call Villacuri, in which places they finde hoy as where the earth is suncke downe amongest the sands, which are thorowout the yeare of a woonderfull coolenesse, and yet it raines not there at any time, neither is there any maner of meanes to water it artificially; the reason is, because the soile is spongy, and suckes vp the water of the rivers that fall from the mountains, which moisten these sands, or else it is the moistnesse of the sea, as others suppose, which passing 268 VINEYARDS. LIB. iv. over this sand, is the cause why it is not barren nor vnprofitable, as the Philosopher teaches. The vines have soincreased there, as for this cause onely the tithes of theChurches are multiplied five or sixe times double withinthese twentie yeares. The most fertile vallies for vines beVitor neare to Arequipa, Yea in the territory of Lima, andCaracato in the Countrey of Chuquiapu j 1 they carry thiswine to Potozi, Cusco, and divers partes, which yeeldes agreat revenue ; for, notwithstanding all the aboundancethey have, an arroba is there woorth five or sixe duckats,and if it be Spanish wine (as they commonly carry intheir fleetes) it is woorth tenne or twelve. They makewine like to that of Spaine, in the realrne of Chile, beingin the same climate ; but it corrupteth being carried toPeru; they eate the grape where they cannot drink thewine. And it is strange, that in the city of Cusco youshall fiude ripe grapes all the yeare long ; the reason is (asthey say) for that those valleys bring foorth fruits in diversemoneths of the yeare, either for that they cutte their vinesin diverse seasons, or that this varietie proceedes from thequality of the soyle ; but whatsoever it be, it is mostcertaine there are some valleys which carry fruit all theyeare. If any one wonder at this, it may be he willwonder much more at that which I shall say, and per-chaunce not beleeve it. There are trees in Peru, whereofthe one part yeeldes fruit one sixe moneths of the yeare,and the other halfe part yeeldes fruit the other sixe moneths.In Mala, which is thirteene leagues from the Cittie ofKings, 2 there is a figge tree, whereof the one halfe whichistowards the south is greene, and yeeldeth his fruite oneseason of the yeare, that is when it is summer vpon theSierra, and the other moiety towards the Llanos or seacoast is greene, and yeeldes his fruite in the other contraryseason, when it is summer vpon the Llanos, which groweth1 La Paz, in Upper Peru (now Bolivia). 2 Lima. SUGAR-CANE. OLIVES. 269 from the diverse temperature, and the ayre which commeth LlB - Iy from the one part and the other. The revenue of wine there is not small,, but it goeth not out of the country. But the silke that is made in New Spaine is transported into other countries, as to Peru. There were no mulberrie trees in the Indies, but such as were brought from Spaine. and they grow well, especially in the province which they call Misteca, where there are silke-wormes, and they put to worke the silke they gather, whereof they make very good taffetas. Yet, to this day, they have made neyther damaske, sattin, nor velvet. The sugar yet is a greater revenue, for they not only spend it at the Indies, but also they carry much into Spaine, for the canes grow exceeding well in many parts of the Indies. They have built their engins in the Hands, in Mexico, in Peru, and in other partes, which yeeldeth them a very great revenue. It was tolde me that the engine for sugar in Nasca was worth yeerely above thirty thousand peeces of revenue. That of Chicama, ioyning to Truxillo, was likewise of great revenue, and those of New Spaine are of no lesse ; and it is a strange thing to see what store they consume at the In dies. They brought from the Hand of Santo Domingo, in the fleete wherein I came, eight hundred ninety eight chests of sugar, which being, as I did see, shipped at Puerto Rico ; every chest, in my opinion, weighed eight arrobas ; every arroba weighing five and twenty pounds, which are two hundred weight of sugar. Sugar is the chiefe revenue of these Hands, so much are men given to the desire of sweete things. There are likewise olives and olive trees at the Indies, I say in Mexico and Peru, yet hath there not beene to this day any mill for oile, for that they eate all their olives, and dresse them well : they finde the charge is greater to make oile than the profit, and therefore they carry all the oyle they do spend from Spaine. And heere we will end with plants, and will passe to such beasts as be at the Indies, 270 WOOL-BEARING ANIMALS. CHAP, xxxin. Of Beasts bearing wooll, and of Kine. I finde there are three kindes of beasts at the Indies,whereof some have been carried from Spaine ; others are ofthe same kinde we have in Europe, and yet not carried bythe Spaniardes ; and others are proper to the Indies, whereofthere are none in Spaine. Of the first kinde are sheepe,kiue, goates, swine, horses, asses, dogs, cattes, and othersuch beasts, for there are of all these kindes at the Indies.The smaller cattell have greatly multiplied, and if they couldmake profite of their woolls by sending them into Europe,it were one of the greatest riches the Indies had, for therethe flockes of sheepe have great pastures, whereas theirfeeding failes not. In Peru there is such store of pasturesand feedings, as no man hath any proper to himselfe, butevery man feedes his troopes where he pleaseth. For thisreason there is commonly great store of flesh, and very goodand cheape, and all other things that come from sheepe, asmilke and cheese. For a time they lost their woolles, vntillthat some beganne to husband it, and to make cloth andcoverings, which hath beene a great helpe for the poorersort of the countrie, for that the cloth of Castillo is verydeere there. There are many clothiers in Peru, but morein New Spaine, yet the cloth that comes from Spaine is farrebetter, whether the wooll be more fine or the worke-menmore expert. In former times there were men that didpossesse threescore and ten, yea, a hundred thousand sheepe,and at this day they have not many lesse. If this wereinEurope, it were a very great substance, but in that countrieit is but a meane wealth. In many partes of the Indies, and,I thinke, in the greatest part, small cattell do not increaseand profite well, by reason that the grasse is high and thesoile so vicious, that they cannot feede so well as greatcattell. And therefore there is an infinite number of kine, CATTLE AND GOATS. 271 whereof there are two kindes. Some are tame and go in LlB - IV- troupes, as in the Land of Charcas, and other Provinces of Peru, as also in all New Spain e : from these tame kine they draw such profite as they do in Spaine, that is, the flesh, butter, calves, and oxen, to till the ground. The other kinde is wilde, which live in the mountaines and forrests, and therefore they tame them not, neither have they any master to whom they are proper, both for the roughnes and thickenes of the forrest, as also for the great multitude there is, and he that first killes them is the master, as of any wilde beast. These wilde kine have so multiplied in Santo Domingo and thereabouts, that they troope together in the fields and woods by thousands, having no master to whom they appertaine. They hunt these beasts onely for their hides ; they go to the field on horse-backe with their weapons to hough them, coursing the kine : and when they have strucken any and staied them, they are their owne ; they flay them and carry the hides home, leaving the flesh, which every one neglects for the aboundance there is, so as some have testified in this Hand, that in some places the aire hath been corrupted with the aboundance of these stinking carcases. The hides they bring into Spaine is one of the best revenues of the Hands and of New Spaine. In the fleet, the yere 1587, there came from Santo Domingo 35444 hides, and from New Spaine 64350, which they value at 96532 peeces, so as when they discharge one of these fleetes it is admirable to behold the river of Seville, and in the arsenall (where they vnlade) so many hides and so much marchandize. There are also great numbers of goates, whose cheefe profite is their tallowe, besides their kid-milke and other commodities, for that both rich and poore vse this tallowe for lightes ; for, as there is a great quantitie, so do they make very good accoumpt of it ; yea, more then of oyle, but all the tallow they vse is onely of the males. They vse their skinnes for shooes, yet I hold them not so good as 272 LIB. iv. those which, are carried from Castille. Horses have multiplied there, and are very excellent in many places ; yea,in many partes there are races found as good as thebest in Spaine, as well for racing and for porupe asalso for travell : and therefore they vse horses most commonly, although there be no want of mules, whereof thereare many, especially where they make their carriages byland. There is no great numbers of asses, having no greatvse for them, neither for travell nor service. There aresome few cammells. I have scene some in Peru that werebrought from the Canaries, and have multiplied there a little.In Santo Domingo, dogges have so multiplied in numberand bignes, as at this day it is the scourge and afflictionof that Hand : for they eate the sheepe, and go in troupesthrough the fields. Such that kill them are rewarded liketo them that kill woolves in Spaine. At the first there wereno dogges at the Indies, but some beasts like vnto littledogges, the which the Indians call Alco, and therefore theycall all dogges that go from Spaine by the same name, byreason of the resemblance that is betwixt them. The Indians doe so love these little dogges, that they will sparetheir ineate to feede them, so as when they travell in thecountrie they carry them with them vpon their shoulders orin their bosomes, and when they are sicke they keepethem with them, without any vse, but onely for company.CHAP, xxxiv. Of some Beasts of Europe which the Spaniardesfound at the Indies, and how they passed thither. It is certaine that they have carried from Spaine all thesebeasts whereof I have spoken, of which kindes there werenone at the Indies when they were first discovered abouta hundred yeares since; for besides that it may be welapproved by witnesses at this day living, it is also a sufH- HUNTING OF WILD BEASTS. 273 cient argument to see, that the Indians in their tongue LlB< have no proper words to signifie these beasts,, but they vse the same Spanish names, although they be corrupted : for, } being ignorant of the thing, they tooke the word common to those places from whence they came. I have found this a good rule, to discerne what things the Indians had before the Spaniardes came there, and what they had not : for they gave names to those they had and knew before,, and have given new names to these that are newly corne vnto them, which commonly are the same Spanish names, although they pronounce them after their maner, as for a horse, wine,, and wheate. LThey found of some sortes of beasts that are also in Europe, and were not carried thither by the Spaniards. These are lions, tigres, beares, boares, foxes, and other fierce and wilde beasts, whereof we have treated in the first booke, so as it was not likely they should passe to the Indies by sea, being impossible to swimme the ocean : and it were a follie to imagine that men had imbarked them with them. It followes therefore that this worlde ioynes with the new in some part : by which these beasts might passe, and so by Genes, little and little multiplied this new world. [For, in accord ance with the Holy Scripture, all these animals were saved in the ark of Noah, and have thence been spread over the world.pj The lions which I have seene are not red, neither have they such haire as they vsually paint them with. They are grey, and not so furious as they seeme in pictures. The Indians assemble in troupes to hunt the lion, and make as it were a circle, which they do call Chacu^ wherewith they in- viron them, and after they kil them with stones, staves, and other weapons. These lions vse to climbe trees, where being mounted, the Indians kil them with launces and crosse- bowes, but more easily with harquebuzes. The tygres are more fierce and cruell, and are more dangerous to meete, 1 Omitted in the old translation. 2 For an account of the Chacu, see G. de in Vega, ii, p. 115. T 274 WILD BEASTS. LlB - IY - because they breake foorth and assaile men in treason.They are spotted as the Historiographers describe them.I have heard some report that these tygres were veryfierce against the Indians, yet would they not adventureatall vppon the Spaniards, or very little ; and that they wouldchoose an Indian in the iniddest of many Spaniardes, andcarry him away. The beares, which in Cusco they call Otoroncos, 1 be of thesame kinde that ours are, and keepe in the ground. Thereare few swarmes of bees, for that their honniecombesarefound in trees, or vnder the ground, and not in hives asinCastillo. The honny combes which I have scene in theProvince of Charcas, which they call Lechiguanas, are ofagrey colour, having little iuyce, and are more like vntosweete strawe, than to hony combs. They say the beesarelitle, like vnto flies ; and that they swarme vnder the earth.The hony is sharp and black, yet in some places thereisbetter, and the combes better fashioned, as in the provinceof Tucuman in Chille, and in Carthagena. I have not seenenor heard speake of wild boares ; but of foxes and otherwild beasts that eate their cattell and fowle, there are morethan their shepheards would willingly have. Besides thesebeasts that are furious and hurtfull, there are others thatare profitable, and have not beene transported bytheSpaniardes, as stagges and diere, whereof there is greataboundance in all the forrests. But the greatest parte isakinde of diere without homes; at the least, I have neverseene nor heard speake of other, and all are without homeslike vnto corcos? It seemes not hard to beleeve, butisalmost certaine, that all these beasts for their lightnesse,and being naturally wilde, have passed from one worldto1 rtiinnicn is the Quichua for a jaguar. A bear is Ueumari. SeeG. dc la Ve<ja, ii, pp. 385, 386; where lie refers to the mistake of Acostain applying the word Otoroncox (a corruption of Uturuncu} to the bear,instead of to the jaguar. 2 A small deer. PASSAGE OP BIKDS. 275 an other, by some parts where they ioyne, seeing that in LlB - the great Hands far from the maiue land I have not heard that there are any, though I have made diligent inquiry. CHAP, xxxv. -Of Fowles which are heere, and are at Hie Indies, and how they could passe thither. Wee may more easily beleeve the same of birdes, and that there are of the same kindes that we have, as partridges, turtles, pigeons, stockdoves, quailes, and many sorts of falcons, which they send from New Spaine and Peru to the noblemen of Spaine, for they make great accompt of them. There are also herons and eagles of diverse kindes ; and there is no doubt but these birds and such like, have sooner passed thither than lions, tygres, and stagges. There are likewise at the Indies great numbers of parrots, especially vpon the Andes of Peru, and in the Hands of Puerto Rico and Santo Domingo, where they flee by flockes, as pigeons do here. To conclude, birdes with their wings may goe where they will; and truely many kindes might well passe the gulph, seeing it is certaine, as Plinie affirmeth, that Pim., lib. there are many that passe the sea, and goe into strange regions, although I have not read that any fowle hath passed by flight so great a gulph as is the Indian Ocean, 1 yet hold I it not altogether impossible, seeing the common opinion of mariners, that you shall finde them two hundred leagues and more from the land. And as Aristotle doth Arist., iu>. iii, de part teach, that birdes endure the water easely, having little respiration, as wee see in sea fowle, which dive and remain long vnder the water. Even so we may say that the fowle which bee at this present vppon the maine land, and in the Hands at the Indies, might passe the sea, resting them selves in some small Hands or vpon some land which they 1 " El Mar Oceano de Indias." T 2 nimal 276 THE DOMESTIC FOWL. LIB. iv. discovered by a natural! instinct (as Plinie reporteth ofriin.,iib. some),, or peradventure falling into the water when theywere weary of flying, and after beganne their flight anewwhen they had a little rested. As for the fowles whichwesee in the Hands where there are no beasts, I beleeve certainly that they passed by one of the foresayde meanes.But for other birdes which we finde vppon the maine land,especially those whose flight is shorte, it is more crediblethat they came thither as the beasts did, which are of thesame kindes that wee have in Europe. For at the Indiesthere are great birds, very heavy, as ostriches, whereofthere are many in Peru, which doe vse sometimes to terrifiethe Indian sliecpo as they do goe with their burthens. But leaving these birds that govern themselves withoutthe care of man, except onely for hawking, let vs now speakeof tame fowle ; I wondered at hennes, seeing there weresome at the Indies before the Spaniards came there, thewhich is well approoved, for they have a proper name of thecountry, and they call a henne Hualpa, 1 and the egge Ronto,2and they vse the same proverb wee doe, to call a cowardahenne. Those that were at the discovery of the HandsofSoloman do report that they have seene hennes there likevnto ours : wee may conceive that the henne being so tamea fowle and so profitable, men might carry them with themwhen they passed from one place to another, as we seeatthis day the Indians in their travel carry their henne withthem, or chicken, vpon the burden they have on theirshoulders : and likewise they carry them easily in theircages of reedes or wood. Finally, there be at the Indiesmany kindes of beasts and birds such as we have in Europe,as I have specified, and other sortes which I leave to othersto discourse of. 1 See, on this subject, G. <le la Vcc/a, ii, pp. 482 to 485. 2 llimtn is the Quiclma for an egg. ORIGIN OF AMERICAN ANIMALS. 277 CHAP, xxxvi. How it should be possible that at the Indies there should be anie sortes of beasts, whereof the like are no where else. [it were a matter more difficult to shew and prove, what LlB - IV - beginning many and sundry sorts of beasts had, which are found at the Indies, of whose kindes we have none in this continent. For if the Creator hath made them there, wee may not then alleadge nor flie to Noahs Arke, neither was it then necessary to save all sorts of birds and beasts, if others were to be created anew. Moreover, wee could not affirme that the creation of the world was made and finished in sixe days, if there were yet other new kinds to make, and specially perfit beasts, and no lesse excellent J than those that are knowen vnto vs. If we say then that all these kindes of creatures were preserved in the Arke by Noah, it followes that those beasts, of whose kindes we finde not any but at the Indies, have passed thither from this continent, as we have saide of other beasts that are knowne vnto vs. This supposed, I demand how it is possible that none of their kinde shoulde remaine heere ? and how they are found there, being as it were travellers and strangers. Truly it is a question that hath long held me in suspense. I say for example, if the sheep of Peru, and those which they call Pacos and Huanacus, 1 are not found in any other regions of the worlde, who hath carried them thither ? or how came they there ? seeing there is no shew nor remainder of them in all this worlde. If they have not passed from some other region, how were they formed and brought foorth there ? It may be God hath made a new creation of beasts. That which I speake of these Pacos and Huanacus may be said of a thousand different kindes of birdes and beasts of the forrest, which 1 Alpacas and Huanacus. 278 ORIGIN OF AMERICAN ANIMALS. LIB. n-. have never beene knowne, neither in shape nor name ; andwhereof there is no mention made, -neither among theLatins nor Greekes, nor any other nations of the worldj[We must then say, that though all beasts came out of theArke, yet by a naturall instinct and the providence ofheaven, diverse kindes dispersed themselves into diverseregions, where they found themselves so well, as theywoulde not parte ; or if they departed, they did not preserve themselves, but in processe of time, perished wholy,as we do see it chaunce in many things. For if we shalllooke precisely into it, we shall fiude that it is not properand peculiar alone to the Indies, but generall to manyother Nations and Provinces of Asia, Europe, and Affrike,where they say there are certaine kindes of creatures thatare not found in other regions, at the least if they be anywhere else, they are knowne to be carried from thence.Seeing then these creatures came out of the Arke, as forexample the elephant, which we finde only in the EastIndies, and from thence have bcene imparted to otherregions, wee may say as much of these creatures of Peru,and of others of the Indies, which are not found in anyother part of the world. Wee may likewise consider well vppon this subiect,whether these beasts differ in kind, and essentially, fromallothers, or if this difference be accidentall, which mightgrowe by diverse accidents, as we see in the linages of men,some are white, others blacke, some giants, others dwarfes;and in apes, some have no taile, others have ; and in sheepe,some are bare, others have fleeces; some great and strongwith a long necke, as those of Peru ; others weake andlittle, having a short necke, as those of Castille. Buttospeake directly, whoso would by this Discourse, shewingonly these accidentall differences, preserve the propagationof beasts at the Indies, and reduce them to those of Europe,he shal vndertake a charge he will hardly discharge with AMERICAN BIRDS. 279 his honor. f For if we shall indge the kindes of beasts by LlB - IV - their properties, those of the Indies are so diverse, as it is to call an egge a chesnut, to seeke to reduce them to the knowne kinds of Europe! CHAP, xxxvu. Of Fowles that are proper to the Indies. There are many kindes of notable fowles at the Indies, eyther of the same sort that ours be, or of different. They bring certaine birds from China that have no feete, and all their bodies are almost feathers. They sit not vpon the ground, but hang vpon boughs, by strings or feathers which they have, and so rest themselves like flies or aierie things. 1 In Peru there are birdes which they call Tominejos, 2 so small that often times I have doubted, seeing them flie, whether they were bees or butter-flies ; but in truth they are birdes. Contrariwise, those which they call Condores be of an exceeding greatnes, and of such a force, that not onely they will open a sheepe and eate it, but also a whole calfe. Those which they call Auras, and others Gallinazos3 (which in my opinion are of a kinde of ravens) are of a strange fleetness, and have a very quicke sight, being very fit to dense citties, for that they leave no carion nor dead thing. They passe the night on trees or vpon rockes, and in the morniug they come to the cities and townes, sitting on the toppes of the highest buildings, where they attend their prey. Their young have white feathers, as they report of ravens, and so change into blacke. The Guacamayos 4 be birdes bigger then parrots, and re semble them somthing; they are esteemed for the varietie of their feathers, which be very faire and pleasing. In New 1 This is the old error about birds of Paradise. 2 Humming birds. 3 Turkey buzzards. Macaws. WORE -IN FEATHERS. LIB. iv. Spaine there are aboundance of birdes with excellentfeathers, so as there be not any found in Europe that comeneere them, as we may see by the images of feathers theybring from thence, the which are, with great reason, muchvalued and esteemed, giving cause of admiration, that withthe feathers of birdes they should make so excellent a worke,and so perfectly equall, as they sceme properly to be thetrue coloures of a painter, and have so lively and pleasingaregard, as the Painter cannot exceede it with his pencilland colours. Some Indians which are good and expertworkemen in this Art will represent perfectly in feathers,whatsoever they see draw no with the pencill, so as thePainters of Spaine have, in this point, no advantage overthem. To Don Felipe, the Prince of Spaine, his sclioole-master did give three figures or portraitures made offeathers, as it were, to put in a Breviary. His Highnes didshew them to King Felipe, his father, the which his Maiesty,beholding attentively, said that hee had never scene, in sosmall a worke,, a thing of so great excellency and perfection.One day as they presented to Pope Sixtus V anothersquare bigger tliun it, wherein was the figure of St. Francis,and that they had told him it was made of feathers by theIndians, he desired to make triall thereof, touching thetable with his fingers, to see if it were of feathers, for thatit seemed strange to see them so properly fitted, that theeye could not iudge nor discerne whether they were naturallcolours of feathers, or artificial!, done with the pencill. Itis a goodly thing to see the lustre which a greene, anorange tawny like gold, and other fine colours do cast, and,beholding them another way, they seeme dead colours.They make the best and goodliest figures of feathers inthe Province of Mechoacan, in the village of Pascaro.The manner is with small delicate pinsors they pull thefeathers from the dead fowles, and with a fine paste theycunningly ioyne them together. They take the small and GUANO. 281 delicate feathers of those birds, which in Peru they call LlB - IV - Tominejos, or others like vnto them, which have the most perfect colours in their feathers. The Indians (besides these images) did vse feathers in many other most excellent workes, especially for the ornament of Kings and Noblemen, their Temples and Idolls. There are also other great birdes which have excellent and fine feathers, whereof they make plumes of sundry colours, especially when they go to warre, inriching them with gold and silver very artificially, which was a matter of great price. They have the same birdes still, but they are not so curious, neither do they make so many gentill devices as they were wont. There are other birdes at the Indies, contrarie to these of so rich feathers, the which (besides that they are ill favoured) serve to no other vse but for dung, and yet perchance they are of no lesse profite. I have considered this, wondering at the providence of the Creator, who hath so appointed that all creatures should serve man. In some Hands and head lands, which are ioyning to the coast of Peru, wee see the toppes of the mountaines all white, and to sight you would take it for snow, or for some white land, but they are heapes of dung of sea fowle which go continually thither : and there is so great aboundance, as it riseth many elles, yea, many launces in height, which seemes but a fable. They go with boates to these Hands onely for the dung, for there is no other profit in them. And this dung is so commodious and profitable as it makes the earth yeelde great aboundance of fruite. They cal this dung Guano, whereof the valley hath taken the name, which they call Lunahuana1 in the valleys of Peru, where they vse this dung, and it is the most fertile of all that countrie. The quinces, poungranets, and other 1 Properly Runalmanac. Acosta s derivation is wrong. The word is derived from Runa, u a man"; and Huanani, "to warn". "The warning of men." Sec O. <le la Vc<ja, ii, p. 181. Rimahuanac (corruptly Luna huana) is on the coast of Peru, near Chincha. PECCARIES. LIB. iv. frui g there, exceede all other in bountie and greatnes ; andthey say the reason is, for that the water wherewith theywater it passeth by a land compassed with this dung, whichcauseth the beautie of this fruite. So as these birdes havenot only the flesh to serve for meate, their singing for recreation, their feathers for ornament and beautie, but alsotheir dung serves to fatten the ground. The which hathbin so appointed by the soveraigne Creator for the serviceof man, that he might remember to acknowledge and beloyall to him from whom all good proceedes. CHAP, xxxviii. Of Beasts for the Chase. Besides the Beasts of Chase, whereof we have spoken,which be common to the Indies and Europe, there areothers which I doe not remember to have scene here, vnlesse pcrhappes they have been brought from thence.There are beasts called Sainos^ made like small hogges,which have this singular to themselves, to have their navillvppon the ridge of their backes : these go by troupesthrough the woods ; they are cruell and nothing fearefull,but, contrariwise, they assail, and have their tusks sharpeas rasors, wherewith they make dangerous wounds and incisions, if such as hunt them put not themselves in safetie.Such as hunt them, for the more safer killing of them,climbe vp into trees, whither the Sainos or hogges comepresently in troupes, biting the tree when they cannot hurtethe man, and then with their launces they kill what theywill. They are very good to eate, but they must of necessitie cut off the round peece where the navil growes vponthe backe ; for otherwise, within a day they corrupt. Thereis another kinde of little beast like to sucking pigges, and1 Peccaries. The Quichua word is Sinturu. r TAPIRS, ARMADILLOS, CHINCHILLAS, 283 they call them Guadatinajas. I am in doubt whether there LlB - Iv - were any swine at the Indies before the Spaniardes came thither, like to these in Spaine, for that in the discoverie of the Hands of Solornan, it is said they found hennes and swine of Spaine. But howsoever it be, it is most certaine that this cattell hath greatly multiplied at the Indies. They eate the flesh fresh, and hold it to be as holesome and as good as if it were of mutton ; as in Carthagena, in some partes, they are become wilde and cruell, the which they hunt like wilde boars, as wee see in Santo Domingo and other Hands where the beasts live in the forrests. In some places they feede them with the grain e of mays, and they grow wonderfully fatte, to have the grease, which they vse for want of oyle j in some places they make gamons, as in Toluca of New Spaine, and in Paria of Peru. Returning, then, to such beasts as are peculiar there, even as the Sainos are like vnto swine, though somewhat lesse, even so the Dantas1 resemble small kine, but more vnto mules, having no homes. The hides of these beasts are much esteemed for jerkins and other coverings, they are so hard as they resist any blow whatsoever. And as the Dantas be defended by the hardnes of their hides, so those which they call Arma dillos are by the multitude of their scales, which open and shut as they please, like to a cuirasse. There be litle beasts which go thorow the woods, called Armadillos, by reason of the defence they have, hiding themselves within their scales, and opening when they list. I have eaten of them, and doe not holde it for a meate of any great woorth ; but the flesh of the Yguanas is a better meate, but more horrible to the eye; for they are like to the very lizardes of Spaine, although they be of a doubtfull kinde, for that they go to the water, and comming to land, they clinibe the trees vpon the bankes ; and as they cast themselves from the trees into the water, the boates watch vnderneath to receive them. 1 Tapirs. 284 SLOTHS. MONKEYS. LIB. iv. rpjjQ Chinchillas is another kind of small beasts, like squirrels; they have a woonderfull sinoothe and soft skinne,which they weare as a healthfull thing to comfort thestomacke, and those partes that have neede of a moderateheate ; they make coverings and rugges of the haire of theseChinchillas, which are found on the Sierra of Peru, wherethere is likewise a small beast very common, which they callCuyes, 1 and which the Indians hold for a very good meate; arid they are accustomed often to offer these Cuyes in theirsacrifices. They are like small conies, and have their borowsin the ground, and in some places they have vndermined allthe land : some are grey, some white, and some speckled.There are other small animalles which they call Uiscachas,2 and are like to hares, although they be bigger; they huntthem and eate the flesh. Of common hares there are greatstore in some parts. There are also conies in the realmeof Quito, but the good are come from Spaine. Thereisanother strange beast, the which for his great heavinesseand slownesse in mooviug the} call Perico-ligero, 3 or thelittle light doggc ; lice hath three nailes to every hand, andmooves both hands and feete as it were by compnsse, andvery heavily : it is in face like to a monkie, and hath a shrillcrie; it climbeth trees, and eatcs ants. CHAP, xxxix. Of Micos or Indian, Monldes. Throughout all the forests, eyther of these Hands, of theTierra Firme, or of the Andes, there are infinite numbersof Micos or Monkies, which are a kind of apes, but verydifferent, in that they have a taile ; yea, a very long one.And amongest them there are some kinds which are thrise,yea foure times bigger than the ordinary; some are all blacke,1 Guinea pigs. - Laf/idium Peruvianiim. * The sloth. MONKEYS. 285 some bay, some grey, and some spotted. Their agilitie LlB - IV - and maner of doing is admirable, for that they seeme to have reason and discourse to go vpon trees, wherein they seeme to imitate birds. Going from Nombre de Dios to Panama I did see in Capira one of these monkies leape from one tree to an other, which was on the other side of a river, making me much to wonder. They leape where they list, winding their tail.es about a braunch to shake it ; and when they will leape further than they can at once, they vse a pretty devise, tying themselves by the tailes one of another, and by this nieanes make as it were a chaine of many ; then doe they launch themselves foorth, and the first holpen by the force of the rest takes holde where hee list, and so hangs to a bough, and helps all the rest, till they be gotten vp. It were long to report the fooleries, trickes, traverses, and pleasant sportes they make when they are taught, which seeme not to come from brute beasts, but from a manlike vnderstanding. I sawe one in Cathagena, in the Governours house, so taught as the things he did seemed incredible. They sent him to the taverne for wine, putting the pot in one hand and the money in the other, and they could not possibly gette the money out of his hand before he had his pot full of wine. If any children mette him in the streete and threw any stones at him he would set his pot downe on the one side and cast stones against the children till he had assured his way, then would he returne to carry home his pot. And which is more, although hee were a good bibber of wine (as I have oftentimes seene him drinke when his maister hath given it him) yet would he never touch it vntill leave was given him. They told me, moreover, that if hee sawe any women painted he would fall vppon them, pull off their attire, and would seeke to bite them. This may bo an addition which I have not seene, but I doe not thinke there is any beast in the world approacheth 286 VICUNAS. LlB - IV - so neare the conversation of a man as this monkey doth.They report so many things, which for feare I shoulde bethought to give credite to fables, or they should be soc. 2; lib. x* esteemed, I thinke best to omitte, blessing the Authorofall creatures, in that hee would create a kinde of beasteonely for the recreation and delight of man. Some reportthat they carried these Micos or Monkies to Solomon fromthe West Indies, but for my parte I holde it was from theEast Indies. CHAP. XL. Of Vicunas and Tarugas of Peru. Amongst the most remarkable things at the Indies ofPeru be the vicunas and sheepe of the countrie as theycall them, which are tractable beasts and of great profite.The vicunas are wilde and the sheepe are tame. Somethinke that the vicunas are those which Aristotle, Plinie,and other Authors call Capreas, which are wilde goates,and in truth they have some resemblance for the lightnesthey have in the woodes and mountaines, but yet they areno goates, for the vicunas have no homes as those havewhereof Aristotle makes mention, neither are they thegoates of the East Indies, from whom they draw the bezoarstone ; for if they be of that kinde it were a diverse one,as in the race of dogges the mastiff is divers from the greyhound. The vicunas of Peru are not those beasts whichcarrie the bezoar stone in the Province of New Spaine,which there they cal Bezaars, for that they are a kindof stagges or deer; yet do I not know in any part ofthe world there be any of these beasts, but in Peru andin Chile, which are countries ioyning one to another.These vicunas are greater than goates, and lesse thencalves. Their haire is of the colour of dried roses, somewhat cleerer; they have no homes like stagges and goates. VICUNAS. 287 They feede vpon the highest tops of the mountains,, which LlB - IY - they call Punas. The snowe nor frost doth not offend them, but contrariwise they seem to delight in it. They goe in troopes, and runne most lightly ; when they meete with any travellers or beasts, they fly away, seeming very fearefull, and in flying they drive their young ones before them. They do not finde that they multiply much; and therefore the Kings Yncas did defend the hunting of vicunas, if it were not for their feasts, or by their commandement. Some complaine, that since the Spaniards entred there, they have given too much libertie to hunt the vicunas, and by this meanes they are much diminished. The manner the Indians vse in their hunting, they assemble many men together, to the number of 1000 or 2000; yea, more, and invironing^ a great circuit of wood, they hunt their game vntil they have compassed it in on all parts, and by this meanes they commonly take three or foure hundred, and so choosing what they list, they let go the rest, especially the females for breede. They are accus tomed to sheere these beasts, and of their fleece to make coverings and rugges of great value, for that this wooll is like to white silke, which lastes long; and as the colour is naturall and not died, so is it perpetuall. The stuffes that are made of this wooll are very fresh and good in summer, and they hold them profitable for the inflammation of the reines and other parts, tempering the excessive heate. This wooll hath the like vertue when it is made in quiltes, and therefore some vse it to that end, for the triall they have made thereof. They say, moreover, that this wooll, or coverings made thereof, is phisicall for other indispositions, as for the gowt ; yet doe I not know that they have made any certaine triall thereof. The flesh of these vicunas is not good, although the Indians eate it, and drie it. For the effects of physicke, I will say what I have seene vppon the Sierra of Peru. Comming one night into a Tambo or 288 LLAMAS. LIB. iv. Innej being much afflicted with paine in mine eies, thinkingthey would fall out, the which dooth commonly happeninthose partes, for that they passe thorow places coveredwith snow, which is the cause of this accident, 1 beingtroubled with this paine, and out of patience, there camean Indian woman, which said to me, " Father, lay this tothine eies, and thou shalt be cured". It was a peece of theflesh of vicunas, newly killed and all bloody. I vsedthis medicine, and presently the pain ceased, and sooneafter went quite away. Besides these Chacus, whichisthe most common manner of hunting at the Indies, theyhave vsed another more private to take them, which is, thatcomming neere, they do cast certaine lines with plummetsoflead, which entangle their legges, so as they cannot runne,and by this means they take the vicuna. The chiefe reasonW 7 hy this beast is esteemed is, by reason of the bezoars stonethey fmde in them, whereof we will intreate heereafter.There is another kinde of beasts, which they call tarugas,3which likewise are wilde, and more nimble than the vicuiias. They are greater of body, and more hote. Theyhave soft eares and hanging : they goe not in troups as thevicunas. I have not scene them but alone, and mostcommonly in high places. They also drawe bezoars stonesfrom these tarugas, which arc greater, and have moreoperation and vertue. CHAP. XLI. Of Pacos, Huanacos, and Sheep of Peru. There is nothing at Peru of greater riches and profitthan the cattell of the country, which our men call Indiansheep, and the Indians in their generall language call themLlama. For all things well considered, it is a beast of the1 Snow blindness. 2 Tarnca, a deer. Ccrvits anfifticiisix. LLAMAS. 289 greatest profite and least charge of any that I knowe : LlB - IV - from them they drawe meate and clothing, as from the sheepe of Spain. Moreover, they have the benefite to carry all things they have neede of, vsing them to beare their burthens; and they have no neede eyther of shooes or saddles, nor yet of oates, but he serveth his maister for nought, feeding on the grasse hee findes in the fieldes ; so as God hath furnished them of sheepe and donkeys, and all in one beast. And as it is a poore nation, so would hee in this poynt free them from charge, for that there is much pasture vpon the Sierra ; and this kinde of cattell hath no neede of any other charge. There are two kindes of these sheepe or Llamas, the one they call Pacos, 1 or sheepe bearing wooll, and the others are bare, and have litle wooll, so are they better for burthen : they are bigger than great sheepe, and lesse than calves, they have a very long necke, like to a camel, whereof they have good neede ; for, being high of stature, they have need of a long necke, else should they be deformed. They are of diverse colours, some all white, others all blacke, some grey and some spotted, which they call Moromoro. The Indians had great superstitions in choosing the beasts for sacrifices, of what colour they should be, according to the diversitie of seasons and sacrifices. Their flesh is good, although it be hard, but that of their lambs is the better, and the most delicate that can bee eaten ; yet they eate not many, for that the chiefe fruite and profit they yielde is their wooll, to make clothes, and their service to carry burdens. The Indians make stuffs of this wooll wherewith they clothe themselves, the one is grose and common, which they call auasca, and the other fine and delicate, which they call ccompi, they make carpets and coverings, and other exquisite workes, which last long, and have a very fair lustre, like halfe silke : and that which is most rare, is their maner of weaving 1 Alpaca. 290 LLAMAS. LlB IY - their workes, being both sides alike, so as you shall notfind any end in a whole peece. The Ynca King of Peruhad many chiefe workmen, to make this worke of ccompi; and the which, for the most part, were resident in theProvince of Capachica, ioyning to the great lake of Titi-caca. They dye this wooll into diverse fine colours, withsundry kindes of hearbes, whereof they make many sortesof workes, both coarse and fine. All the Indians, bothmen and women, woorke in the Sierra, and have theirloomes in their houses, having no neede to buy any stuffesfor their necessary vses. Of the flesh of these sheepe theymake charqui, or dried flesh, the which will last verylong, whereof they make great accompt. They are accustomed to drive troupes of these sheepe with burthens, andto go in bandes, three hundred, five hundred, yea, a thousand in a company, with wine, mays, coca, chunu, 1 quickesilver, and all other kindes of marchandise, and of silver,which is the best of all. They carry barres of silver fromPotosi ^to Arica, which is three score and tenne leagues.I have often wondered to see these troupes of sheepe ladenwith a thousand or two thousand barres of silver, and muchmore, which is above three hundred thousand ducats, without any other guard or escort than some Indians, whichserve onely to guide these sheepe, and to lade and vnladethem, or at the most, some few Spaniardes ; and they sleepeall night in the middest of the fieldes, without otherguarde ; and yet in so long a way and so weake a guarde,they never finde want or losse of anie thing in so greatatreasure of silver, so safe is the way in Peru. The burthenwhich one of these sheepe dooth commonly carry is ofsix am.bas foure or sixe ari obas. When their voyage is long they goeis a hundred and fifty llot above two, three, or foure leagues at the most on a day.pounds Those that guide those troupes have their fixed haltingplaces, where they are assured to have water and pasture,1 Frozen Potatoes. LLAMAS. 291 and there they unlade and set vppe their tents, making LlB - IV - fire, and dressing their meates, which is not painefull, although it be a fleugmatike and slow manner of travell. When there is but one daye s iourney, one of these sheepe will beare eight arrobas in weight, or more, and beares this burthen eight or tenne leagues in a day, as the poore souldiers were wont to doe when they marched through Peru. This kinde of cattell delights most in a cold aire, and for this cause they live vpon the Sierra, and die in the Llanos, by reason of the heate. Sometimes these sheepe are all covered with ice and frost, and yet they continue sound and well. The bare sheepe are pleasant to behold, for they will stay vpon the way, raising vppe their neckes, and will looke vpon any one very wistly, and so they remaine a long time, without mooving or any show of feare, which giveth occasion of laughter, seeing them thus to stand. And yet sometimes they do growe amazed sodainely, and runne away with their burthens, even to the highest rockes, so as not being able to come vnto them, they are constrained to kil them with an harquebuze, lest they should loose their barres of silver, which they some times carry. The Pacos will grow reasty vnder their burdens, lying downe, and will endure to be cutte in a thousand peeces before they wil rise when this humor takes them ; whereof the proverb growes in Peru, to say that one is reastie, to signifie he is obstinate ; for that when any of these beasts is moodie, it is with excesse. The remedy they have is, to stay and sit downe by the Paco, making much on him, vntil the fit be past, and that he rise : and sometimes they are forced to stay two or three houres. They have a disease like to scabbes, which they call Caraehe, 1 whereof they commonly die. The Antients had a remedy, to bury them quicke that had the Carache, lest 1 See also G. de /a Vega (ii, p. 378) respecting this disease among the llamas. 292 BEZOAR STONE. LlB - IY- they shoulde infect the rest, being a very contagious disease, and goes from one to another. An Indian that hathone or two of these sheepe is not reputed poore, for oneofthem is woorth sixe or seaven peeces of assay, and more,according to the time and place. CHAP. XLII. Of the Bezoar stone. The Bezoar stone is found in all these beasts before mentioned, which are proper to Peru, whereof some Authorsofour time have written whole bookes, which they may readethat desire to have a more particular knowledge. For thepresent subiect it shall be sufficient to say that this stonewhich they call Bezoar is found in the stomacke and bellyof this beast, sometimes one alone, sometimes two, three,and foure. They are very different in forme, greatnesse,and colour, for that some are small like filberds and lesse,others like walnuts, some like pigeons egges, and others, asbigge as a hens egge ; and I have scene some as bigge as anorange. In forme some are round, others in fashion like tolentils and many other formes. For their colour someareblack, some white, some grey, dark greene, and others asif they had beene gilded. It is no certaine rule to iudgethe best and most fine by the colour or forme. All thesestones are made and fashioned of divers films and skins onevpon another. In the province of Xauxa and other provinces of Peru they find these stones in divers kindsofbeasts, both wild and tame, as in the Huanacos, Pacos,Vicunas, and Tarugas, some adde an other kind, whichthey say are wilde goates, which the Indians call Gypris.1These other kindes of beastes are very well knowen in Peru,whereof wee have already discoursed. The Huanacos,orcountry sheepe, or Pacos have commonly the lesser stones1 Not a Quichua word. BEZOAR STONE. 293 and blacke, neither are they so much approved for the vse of physicke. They draw the greatest Bezoar stones from the Vicunas, and they are grey or white, or of a dark greene, which are helde for the better. They esteem those of the Tarugas for the most excellent, whereof there are some reasonable bigge. They are commonly white, inclining to grey, and they have the filmes commonly ^bigger an^ thicker than the rest. They finde the Bezoar stone equally both in male and female. All beasts that ingender it chew the cud, and commonly feede vpon the snow and rockes. The Indians reporte and teach by tradition from their fathers and Antients that in the province of Xauxa, and in other pro vinces of Peru, there are many herbs and venomous beasts, which poison the water and the pastures where they eate and drinke, and where they breathe ; amiddest which venomous hearbes there is one very well knowne of the Vicuna by a naturall instinct, and of other beasts that ingender the Bezoar stone which eate this hearb, and by meanes thereof they preserve themselves from the poisoned waters and pastures ; and they say that of this hearb the stone is compounded in the stomacke, whence it drawes all the vertue against poyson and other woonderfull effects. This is the opinion and tradition of the Indians, discovered by men of great experience in the kingdome of Peru, which agrees with reason, and with that which Plinie reports of the mountaine goates, which are nourished and fed vpon poison without suffering any harme. The Indians being demaunded why the sheepe, kine, goates, and calves, such as are in Castille, have not the Bezoar stone, seeing that they feede on the same rockes, their answer is, that they beleeve not that those beasts of Castille eate of that hearb, or that they have found the Bezoar stone in stags and fallow diere. This seemes to agree with our knowledge, for that in New Spaine they find the Bezoar stone, although there be no 294 BEZOAE STONE. LlB - IY- Vicunas, Pacos, Tarugas, nor Huanacos, but only stags,in some of which they finde these stones. The principall vertue of the Bezoar stone is againstpoison and venomous diseases, although there bee heereindivers opinions ; some hold it for a mockerie, othersfor a miracle. Howsoever it be, it is most certaine thatit is of a great operation when it is applied in time,and convenient in a maner as hearbes, and to personscapable and disposed ; for there is no medicine thatdoth alwaies cure infallibly. In Spaine and Italic wehave seene admirable effects of this stone against thetabordete^ which is a kinde of plague, but not so muchasin Peru. They do apply it beaten and put into someliquor, which may make it fit for the cure of melancholy,the falling sickness, pestilent feavers, and many otherdiseases. Some take it in wine, others in vinegar, inlemonade, with bullock s tongue, borrage and otherways, as the Phisitians and Apoticaries prescribe. TheBezoar stone hath no proper savour, as Rasis the Arabiandoth testifie. Wee have seene notable trialls, and there isno doubt but the Author of this vniversall world hath givengreat vertues to this stone. The Bezoar stones which comefrom the East Indies have the first place of account, theyare of an olive colour ; the second are those of Peru, andthe third those of New Spain. Since that these stoneswere in request, they say the Indians have made artificiallones ; and many when they see these stones greater thenthe ordinarie, they take them to be false and counterfeit; triall and experience is the best mistres to know them.One thing is worthy admiration, that they grow and arefashioned vpon very strange things, as vpon the tagge ofapoint, vpon a pinne, or a peece of wood, which they finde inthe centre of this stone, and yet do they not hold it false,for that the beast might swallow it, and the stone thicken1 Fever. BEZOAE STONE. 295 vpon it, and growes one vpon another, and so it increaseth. LlB - IV- I did see in Peru two stones fashioned vpon pinones of Castille, which made vs to wonder much, for that in all Peru we had not seene any pines or pinones of Castille, if they were not brought from Spaine, which seemes to me very extraordinary. This little may suffice touching the Bezoar stone. They bring other phisicall stones from the Indies, as the stone of Hyjada, the bloud stone, the stones of milke, and of the mother.1 Those which they call Cornerinas, for the heart, whereof there is no neede to speake, having nothing common with the subiect of beastes, whereof we have entreated ; which gives vs to vnderstand how the great Master and Author of all hath imparted his benefites and wonderfull secrets to all partes of the world ; for the which he is to be glorified for ever. Amen. 1 " Otras piedras medicinales se traen de Indias, como de hyjada, y de sangre, y de leche, y de inadre." END OF F1EST VOLUME. 1. BlCHARDS, 37, GKAT QUEEN 51BE1T, \V.C.

RETURN TO the circulation desk of any University of California Library or to the | NORTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY Bldg. 400, Richmond Field Station j University of California Richmond, CA 94804-4698 ALL BOOKS MAY BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS 2-month loans may be renewed by calling (510)642-6753 1-year loans may be recharged by bringing books to NRLF Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior to due date. DUE AS STAMPED BELOW - NOV 2 8 2001

• -.<. -FE&

SUBJECT TO RECAH 12,000(11/95) FODAA MO nnx UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEYFORM NO. DD6, 60m, 12/80 BERKELEY, CA 94720 GENERAL LIBRARY - U.C. BERKELEY BODD277MEb

Full text of volume 2

NATURAL & MORAL

HISTORY OF THE INDIES.

BT

FATHER JOSEPH DE ACOSTA.

BEFBINTED FROM THE

ENGLISH TRANSLATED EDITION OF pDWARD GRIMSTON,

1604.

AND EDITED,

Wiiifj Notes antr an Sntroliuction,

BY

CLEMENTS K MARKHAM, C.B., F.RS.

VOL. n.

the'mokal histoky

( \ S:VEUSiTX

LONDON : PRINTED FOR THE HAKLUYT SOCIETY.

XSGCCLXXX.

• \

M.^

T. RICHARDS, 37, ORRAT QURRK STRRRT, W.C.

COUNCIL

ov

THE HAKLUYT SOCIETY.

GoLOirsL H. YULE, C.B., PsBBiDBirr.

Admiral C. B. DMNKWATBR BBTHUNB, C.B. )

[ t1cx-pbb8idxbt8. MAJOB-GEirBBAL Sib HENRY RAWLINSON, K.C.B. )

W. A. TYSSEN AMHERST, Esq., M.P.

Rbv. Db. Q. p. badger, D.C.L.

J. BARROW, Esq.

WALTER DE GRAY BIRCH, Esq.

B. H. BUNBURY, Esq.

Thb Eabl ov DUOIE.

Captain HANKEY, R.N.

LiBUT.-GEifBBAL SiB J. HENRY LEPROY, C.B., K.C.M.G.

R. H. MAJOR, Esq.

Rbab-Admibal MAYNE, C.B.

CoLOirxL SiB WM. L. MEREWETHER, C.B., K.C.S.I.

DELMAR MORGAN, Esq.

AsMXBAL Sib ERASMUS OMMANNEY, C.B.

LoBD ARTHUR RUSSKLL, M.P.

Thb Lobs STANLEY ov Aldbblbt.

EDWARD THOMAS, Esq.

Libut.-Gbitbbal Sib HENRY THUILLIER, C.S.I.

CLEMENTS R. MARKHAM, C.B., Howobabt Secbetaby.

I

CONTENTS OF THE SECOND VOLUME.

PAOB

Analytical Table of Contents . . i

The Moral History. Fifth Book . .298

Sixth Book . .390

Seventh Book . 448

j> >>

>j »

Contents op the Index .... 535 Index ...... 535

NOTICK

TJie two Volumes are paged through(mty and the Index is at the

end of the Second Volume,

T

ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.

MORAL HISTORY. BOOK V.

PAOI

Prologue to the following Books - - - 296

Chafteb 1. — That the pride and malice of the Divell hath been the

cause of idolatrie.

Scriptural evidence of the Devirs pride - - 298

He hath retired into remote parts - - - 299

Always inventing idolatries - - - - 300

Chapter 2. — Of many kinds of idolatry the Indians have used.

Worship of elements called Huaca - - - 301

Idolatry of images or of the dead - - - 301

Chapter 3. — That the Indians have some knowledge of God,

Peruvians acknowledge a Supreme Being - - 301

There is no name for God among them - - 302

Offerings to Viracocha by Peruvians - - - 303

Difficulty in dealing with idolaters - - - 303

Chapter 4. — On the first kinde of idolatrie, upon naturall and

universall things.

Adoration of the sun . > . . 303

Worship of thunder and lightning - " f " ^^^

Of the earth, rainbow, and stars - - - 305

Names of stars ----- 305

Mexican worship of Vitzilipuztli - - \- 305

The sin of idolatry . . - \ 306

h

/ ^

-*-«.,

• ». /

r

^-

11 ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.

Chapter 5. — Of the idolatry of the Indians used to partictUar

things.

The Devil has also made them worship base things - 307

Peruvians worship all things in nature - - 308

Belief in a deity of all best things of their kind - - 308

The Apachitas or votive heaps - - - 309

An Ynca sceptic touching the sun - - - 310

Chapter 6. — Of another hind of idolatry upon tlie dead.

Mourning for the dead becomes idolatry - - 311

Images and mummies of the dead - - - 312

Chapter 7. — Of the superstitions they used to the dead.

Peruvian belief in a future state - - - 313

They carefully preserved dead bodies - - - 313

Human sacrifices to the dead - - - 314

Food and clothes placed with the dead- - - 315

Chapter 8. — Of the manner of burying the dead among the

Mexicaine and sundrie other nations.

In Mexico the priests interred the dead - - 315

Custom of burning the dead - - - 315

The servants of a great man killed at his funeral - 316

Chapter 9. — ITie fourth and last hinde of idolatry the Indians used, especially the Mexicaines^ to images and idolls.

The Holy Ghost condemns worship of images - - 317

The idol of Vitzilipuztli in Mexico - - - 318

Temple of the Mexican idol - - - - 3 1 9

Dress and form of the image - - - 320

Idol of Quetzaalcoatl in Cholula - - - 321

Feast in Tlascala - - - - 322

Chapter 10. — Of a strange manner of idolatry practised amongst

the Mexicaines.

Intended victims worshipped as the idol - - 323

ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. Ill

Chapter 11. — How the Divell hath laboured to make himself equall unto Gody and. to imitate him in his sacrijices, religion, and

sacraments.

The Devil strives to imitate the religion of God - - 324

Scarce anything that the Devil has not counterfeited - 326

Chapter 12. — Of the temples that were found at the Indies.

In every province of Peru there was a chief Huaca - 325

The great temple at Cuzco - - - - 326

The golden image of the sun - - - 326

Chapter 13. — Of the Proud Temples at Mexico,

Famous temple of Vitzilipuztli - - - 327

Description of the temple - - - . 328

Other temples in Mexico - . . . 329

Chapter 14. — Of the Priests and their offices.

Mexicans had several grades of priests - - 330

Their duties - - - - - 331

^ Chapter 15. — Of tJte Monastery of Virgins.

Many convents of virgins in Peru - - 332

Duties of the virgins - . . _ 332

Religious women in Mexico - - - - 333

•Chapter 16. — Of the Monastenes of religious men that the Dei*ill

hath invented for superstition.

Letters from Jesuits in Japan touching the BouEes - 334

In Peru there were no monasteries for men - - 335

In Mexico there were houses of secluded men - - 336

Little boys as novices in Mexico . . _ 336

Dress and penance of Mexican monks - - - 337

V^Chapter 17. — Of Penance and Strictnes the Indians have used at

the DivelVs persuasion.

Penance of Mexican priests - - - - 339

Discipline at feast of Tezcatlipuca - - - 339

Peruvian fasts - - - - - 339

A 2

iv /•> ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.

Chapter 18. — Of the sacrifices the Indiana made to the Bivell^ and

wherefore,

Peruvian sacrifices of shells, coca, etc. - - 340

Sacrifice of animals . - - - 341

Sacrifices of first fruits . - - . 343

Chapter 19. — Of the sacrifices they made of men.

Human sacrifices in Peru - - . - - 344

Malice of the Devil - - . - - 345

Chapter 20. — Of the horrible sacrifices of men which the Mexicans

used, Mexicans sacrificed captives - - - - 346

The manner of sacrificing - - - 347

Dress of the priests - - - - 348

The bodies cast down a flight of steps - - - 349

Chapter 21. — Of another kind of sacrificing of msn which the

Meodcaines used.

The flaying of men _ - - . 350

The victim reverenced as a God - - - 351

Captives sought for to sacrifice - - - 352

Chapter 22. — How the Indians grew weary and could not endure

the cruelty of Sathan,

The Indians desire to be freed from priestly yoke - 352

Spaniards resolved to abolish the sacrifices - - 353

A victim spoke after his heart was cut out - - 353

Chapter 23. — How the Divell hath laboured to imitate and counter- feite the SacrameTits of the Holy Church,

Solemn feast of Raymi in Peru - - - 354

Feast of Situa - - - - - 355

Ceremony resembling communion - - - 355

ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTKNTS. V

Chapter 24. — In what manner the Dwell hxUh laboured to counter- feite the feast of the Holy Sacrament and Communion used

in the Holy Church,

Mexican virgins make the image of their God of paste and

honey . . - . . 355

Procession of the idol - - - - 357

The paste offered to the idol . . . 353

After the ceremony the paste is eaten - - - 359

^ Chapter 25, — Of Confessors and Confession which the Indians

used.

Confession most general in the Collao - - - 361

The Ynca only confessed to the sun - - - 361

Practices of sorcerers . _ _ . 352

Confession in Japan - - - 363

^ Chapter 26. — Of the abominable unction which the Mexicaine Friestes and other nations used, and of their witchcraftes,

Mexican priests anointed - - - - 364

Method of preparing the unction . - . 3^5

Reputed power of the unction ... 366

Sorcerers in Peru - - - - - 367

Their divination ----- 368

«^hapter 27. — Of the ceremonies and customs of the Indiums which

are like unto ours.

Their baptisms and marriages _ . - 369

Mexican marriage and divorce - - - 370

Numerous idols in Mexico and Peru - - - 371

Chapter 28. — Of some Feasts celebrated by them of Cusco, and how the Divdl would imitate the mysterie of the Holy Trinitie,

Peruvian feast of Ray mi - - - - 372

Peruvian Trinity - - - - -372

Other months and feasts of the Peruvians - - 374

Feast of Situa - - - - - 375

Vi ANALYTICAL TABLE OP CONTENTS.

Chapter 29. — Of the feast of Jubilee which tlie Mexicaines

celebrated. Feast of Tezcatlipuca - - - 377 to 384

Chapter 30. — Of the Feast of Marchanta which those of Chohetecas

celebrated. Feast of Quetzalcoatl - - - - 384

Mexican festivals ----- 385

^ Chapter 31. — What profit may be dravme out of this discourse of

the Indians superstitions.

Profit from the study of Indian superstitions - - 388

BOOK VI.

Chapter 1. — That they erre in their opinion which hold the Indians

to want judgment .

Ill-treatment of the Indians - - - 390

Authorities for Peru and Mexico - - - 391

Chapter 2. — Of the method of computing time and the Kalendar

the Mexicaines used. Mexican calendar - - - , - 392

Chapter 3.— How the Kings Yncas accounted the yeares and

moneths. Peruvian calendar _ _ . _ 395

Chapter 4. — That no nation of the Indies Imth beene found to have

had the use of letters.

Letters unknown in America - - - 397

Chapter 5. — Of the fashion of letters and bookes the Chinois used. Chinese writing . . _ _ 399

ANALYTICAL TABLE OV CONTENTS. VU

Chapter 6. — Of the schools and universities in China,

Chinese learning - - - - - 401

Chapter 7. — Of the fashion of letters and writings which the Mexi-

caines tised.

Mexican picture writing . - - - 403

Mexican records ----- 404

Chapter 8. — Of Hesters and the manner of reckoning which the

Indians of Peru used, Peruvian Quipus - - - - - 406

Chapter 9. — Of the order the Indians Jholdc in their writing. Various ways of writing . - - - 408

Chapter 10. — How the Indians dispatched their messengers. Use of messengers - - / - 409

Chapter 11. — Of the mxinn/er of government and of the Kings

which the Indians had.

Government in various countries - - - 410

Mexico and Peru compared - - - - 411

Chapter 12. — Of the Government of the Kings Yncas of Peru,

Ynca ceremonies - - - - - 412

Ynca government - - - - 413

Chapter 13. — Of the distribution the Yncas m^ade of their vclsscUs,- Divisions of the Ynca Empire - - - 414

Chapter 14. — Of the edifices and meaner of buildings of the Yncas,

Ynca edifices - - - - -415

Ynca bridges - . _ - - 415

Chapter 15. — Of the Ynccts revenu^es, and the order of Tributes they

imposed upon the Indians,

Ynca revenue and tribute - - - - 418

Flocks of llanias - ^ - - - 420

Vm ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.

Chapter 16. — Of arts and offices which the Indians did exercise.

Arts and handicrafts - - - - 421

Head dresses ..... 422

Chapter 17. — Of the posts and Chasquis the Indians did use. Posts and messengers .... 423

Chapter 18. — Of the justice^ laweSy and punishments tohich the

Yncas have establishedy and of their marriages.

Ynca marriages - . . . . 424

Chapter 19. — Of the Originall of the Yncas ^ Lords of Peru^ toith

their conquests and victories. Indian Governments . . - . 426

Extent of the Ynca Empire - - - - 427

Origin of the Yncas .... 428

Chapter 20. — Of the first Ynca, and his Successors. Lineage of the Yncas .... 429

Chapter 21. — Of Pacha^cvti Ynca Yupanqui and what happened in

his time unto Guaynacapa,

Ynca traditions - - - . . 430

Manners of the Yncas .... 432

Chapter 22. — Of the greatest and most fam/ms Yn4ia called

Quanacupa, Conquests of Huayna Ccapac . . _ 433

The body of Huayna Ccapac sent to Lima - - 434

Death of Huascar - - - - 434

Chapter 23. — Of the last Successors Yncas.

Manco Ynca ..... 435

Execution of Tupac Amaru - - - - 435

Succession of Yncas .... 435

Chapter 24. — Of the manner oftJie Mexicans common-ueal. Mexican succession - - - - 436

4HS/i^'?

ANALYTICAL TABLE O? CONTENTS. IX

Chapter 25. — OJ the titles and dignities the Indians used, Mexican nobility ----- 438

Chapter 26. — How the Mexicaines made war^ and of their orders

of Knighthood. Mexican warfare ----- 440 •Mexican knighthood _ . - . 441-

4^HAPTER 27. — Of the great order and diligence the Mexicaines used

to instruct their youth.

Schools in the Mexican temples - . . 442

Training for soldiers and priests . _ - 443

^ Chapter 28. — Of the Indians feasts and dances.

Dances in Peru ----- 444

Dances in Mexico - - - - 445

Music and dancing - - - - 446

BOOK VII.

Chapter 1. — That it is profit able to understand tlie action of the

Indians, especially the Mexicans.

Profit to be derived from history - - - 448

Chapter 2. — Of the ancient inhabitants of Neio Spaine, and how

the ^avatlacas came thither.

Chichemecas, the first inhabitants of Mexico - - 449

Habits of the wild people - - . _ 450

Invasion of the Navatlacas - - - - 451

Chapter 3. — How the six Lineages of Navatlacas peopled the land

of Mexico.

Lineages of the Navatlacas - - - - 452

War between Tlascaltecas and Chichimecas - - 453

Peopling of America - - . . 455

X ANALYTICAL TABLB OP CONTENTS.

Chapter 4. — Of the Mexicainea departure^ of their journey, and peopling of the Province of Mechoacan,

Migration of the Mexicans - - - - 456

Chapter 5. — Of that which happened in Malinalca in Ttda, and in

OhapuUepec,

Continued migration of the Mexicans - - - 459

Chapter 6. — Of the Warres the Mexicaines had against them of

Culhuacan,

Mexicans and the King of Culhuacan - - - 461

Continued march ... - 462

Chapter 7. — Of the foundation of Meodco,

Foundation of Tenoxtitlan or Mexico - - - 463

Division of the city into quarters . - . 464

Chapter 8. — Of the sedition of those of TlatelulcOy and of th£ first

Kings the Mexicaines did choose.

Sedition of Tlatelulco - . - . 465

First Mexican King . . - - 466

Chapter 9. — Of the strange tribute the Mexicaines paid to them of

Azcapuzalco.

Mexican tribute to Azcapuzalco - - - 468

Floating gardens - . - . . 469

Death of the first Mexican King ... 470

Chapter 10. — Of the second King, and what happened in his

raigne. The second Mexican King - - - - 471

Death of the second King - - - - 472

Chapter 11. — Of Chimalpopoca, the third king, and his cruell death, and the occasion of the warre which the Mexi- caines made. The third Mexican King - - - - 473

Power of Mexican Kings - - - - 474

Murder of the third Mexican King - - - 475

ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. XI

Chapter 12. — OJ iihe fourth King called Izcoalty and of the toar

against the Tepaneccu,

The fourth Mexican King - - - - 477

The warrior Tlacaellel - - - - 478

Chapter 13. — Of the hattell the Mexicaines gave to the Tepa-

necas, and of the victory they obtained - - 480

Chapter 14. — Of the warre and victory the Mexicaines had

against the Gittie of Guyoacan - - -483

Chapter 15. — Of the warre and victorie the Mexicaines had

against the Suchimilcos - - , 435

Chapter 16. — Of the fift King of Mexico^ called Monte- zuma^ the first of that name - - - 488

Chapter 17. — How Tlacaellel refused to be King^ and of the

election and deedes of Ticocic - - - 491

Chapter 18. — Of the death of Tlacaellel y and the deedes of

Axayaca^ the seventh King of the Mexicaines - - 494

Chapter 19. — -Of the deedes of Autzol, the eighth King of

Mexico. Accession of the eighth king - - - 497

Conquests of Autzol - - - - 497

Macliinations of a sorcerer - - - - 498

Water brought to Mexico - - - - 499

Chapter 20. — Of the election of great Montezuma, the last King of

Mexico. Character of Montezuma - - - - 500

Speech of the King of Tezcuco - - - 501

Reply of Montezuma . - . . 502

XU ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS.

Chapter 21. — H(yw Montezuma ordered the service of his house, and

of the warre he made for his coronation.

Household of Montezuma - - - - 503

Coronation of Montezuma - - - - 504

Chapter 22. — Of the behaviour and greatnes of Montezuma, Government of Montezuma . - . 505

Chapter 23. — Of the presages and strange prodigies which happened in Mexico before the fall of their Empire,

Signs and wonders - - - - 506

Credibility of omens - - - - 507

A talking stone ----- 509

Strange omens - - - - - 510

Chapter 24. — Of tlie newes Montezuma received of the Spaniards arrival in his countrey, and of the Amhassage he sent them.

Arrival of the Spaniards - - - - 513

Eeception of Cortes - - - - 514

Return of the ambassadors - - - - 515

Terror of Montezuma - - - - 516

Chapter 25, — Of the Spaniards entrie into Mexico,

Montezuma's strategy - - - - 517

Meeting of Cortes and Montezuma - - - 518

Interview with Montezuma - - - 519

Chapter 26. — Of the death of Montezuma and the Spaniards

departure out of Mexico,

Rising of the Mexicans - - - - 520

Death of Montezuma - - - - 522

Retreat of the Spaniards - - - - 522

Submission of the Mexicans - - - 523

ANALYTICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS. XUl

Chapter 27. — Of some miracles which God hath showed at the Indies in favour of the faithy beyond the desert of those that

wrought them,

Santa Cruz de la Sierra - - - - 524

Curing by miracles - - . . 525

Miracle at the siege of Cuzco ... 526

Divine interposition on the side of the Spaniards - 526

Chapter 28. — Of the manner how the Divine Providence disposed of the Indies, to give an entrie to the Christian Religion,

Designs of Providence - - - - 527

Importance of large monarchies - - - 528

-J)ifficulty in converting small tribes - - - *• 528

-Divisions among the natives a great help - - 529

Gallantry of the Araucans - - - - 529

-Aids to conversion - - - - 530

Defeat of Satan - - - - -631

bruits of conversion - - - - 532

Conclusion . - - . - 533

A Prologue to the Bookes following.

Having intreated of the Natural History of the Indies, I will hereafter discourse of the Morall History, that is to say of the deeds and custom es of the Indians. For after the heaven, the temperature, the scituation, and the qualities of the new world ; after the elements and mixtures — I mean mettals, plants, and beasts, whereof we have spoken in the former Bookes, as occasion did serve; both Order and Reason doth invite vs to continue and vndertake the dis- course of those men which inhabite the new world. And therefore I pretend in the following bookes to speake what I thinke worthie of this subiect. And for that the intention of this Historie is not onely to give knowledge of what hath passed at the Indies, but also to continue this know- ledge, to the fruite we may gather by it, which is to helpe this people for their soules health, and to glorifie the Creator and Redeemer, who hath drawne them from the obscure darkenes of their infidelitie, and imparted vnto them the admirable light of his Gospel. And therefore I will first speake in these bookes following what concernes their religion or superstition, their customes, their idolatries, and their 'sacrifices; and after, what concernes their policie

i

296

and government^ their lawes, cnstomes, and their deedes. And for that the memorie is preserved amongst the Mexi- caine Nation, of their beginnings, snccessions, warres, and other things worthie the relation ; besides that which shall be handled in the sixt booke, I will make a peculiar Dis- course in the seventh, shewing the disposition and fore- warnings this Nation had of the new Kingdome of Christ our Lord, which should be extended in these Countries, and should conquer them to himselfe, as he hath done in all the rest of the world. The which in truth is a thing worthie of great consideration, to see how the divine providence hath appointed that the light of his word should finde a passage

/ in the furthest boundes of the world. It is not my proiect at this time to write what the Spaniardes have done in those partes, for there are bookes enow written vpon this subiect, nor yet how the Lordes servants have laboured and profited, for that requires a new labour. I will onely content my selfe to plant this Historic and relation at the doores of the Gospel, seeing it is alreadie entered, and to make knowne the Naturall and Morall things of the Indies, to the end that Christianitie may be planted and augmented, as it is expounded at large in the bookes we have written,

/ De procuranda Indiorum salute. And if any one wonder at some fashions and customes of the Indies, and wil scorne them as fooles, or abhorre them as divelish and inhumane people, let him remember that the same things, yea, worse, have beene scene amongst the Greekes and Bomans, who have commanded the whole world, as we may easily vnder-

297

standi not onely of oar Authors^ as Easebius of Cesarea^ Clement of Alexandria, and others, but also of their owne, as Plinie, Dionysius of Halicarnaas^ and Plutarke : for the Prince of darkness being the head of all Infidelitie, it is no new thing to finde among Infidells, cruelties, filthines, and follies fit for such a master* And although the ancient Gen- tiles have farre surpassed these of the new world in valour and naturall knowledge, yet may wee observe many things in them woorthie the remembrance. But to conclude, they / shew to be barbarous people, who being deprived of the supernaturalj light, want likewise philosophic and natural knowledge.

tj*

THE FIFT BOOKE

Of the Naturall and Morall Historic of the

Indies.

Chap. i. — That the Pride and Malice of the Bivell hath

beene the cause of Idolatrie.

Lib. v. y The Pride and PresumptiQn of the DiveU is so great and obstinate that alwaies hee seekes and strives to be honoured as God, and doth arrogate to himselfe all hee can, what- soever doth appertaine to the most high God, hee ceaseth not to abuse the blinde Nations of the worid vpon whom the cleere light of the holy Gospel hath not yet shone.

lob xii. Wee read in lob of this prowd tyrant, who settes his eyes aloft, and amongst all the sons of pride, he is the King. The holy Scripture instructes vs plainely of his vile inten- tions, and his overweening treason, whereby he hath pre- tended to make his Throne equall vnto Gods, saying in

Isaiah xiv. Isaiah, " Thou diddest say within thy selfe, I will mount vp to heaven and set my chaire vpon all the starres of heaven, and I will sit vpon the toppe of the Firmament, and in the sides of the North, I will ascend above the height of the cloudes, and will be like to the most high." And in

x^ui Ezekiel, " Thy heart was lifted up, and thou hast said, I am God, and have set in the chaire of God in the midst of the sea.^^ Thus doth Satan continually persist in this wicked desire to make himselfe God. And although the iust and severe chastisement of the most high hath spoiled him of all his pompe and beautie, which made him grow prowd, being intreated as his fellonie and indiscretion had

.J

FBIDE OF THE DEVIL. 299

^ deserved, as it is written by the same Prophets ; yet hath ^"- ^•

he left nothing of his wickedness and perverse practises, the which he hath made manifest by all meanes possible, like a mad dogge that bites the sword wherewith he is strucken. For as it is written, the pride of snch as hate God doth alwaies increase. Hence comes the continaall and strange care which this enemie of God hath alwaies had to make him to be worshipt of men, inventing so many kinds of Idolatries, whereby he hath so long held the gretest part of the world in subiection, so as there scarce remaines any one comer for God and his people of Israel. And since Mart. xii. the power of the Gospel hath vanquished and disarmed him, and that by the force of the Crosse, hee hath broken and ruined the most important and puissant places of his kingdome with the like tyrannic, hee hath begunne to assaile the barbarous people and nations farthest off, striving to maintaine amongst them his false and lying divinitie, the which the Sonne of God had taken from him in his Church, tying him with chaines as in a cage or prison, like a furious beast, to his great confusion, and reioycing of the servants of God, as he doth signify in lob.

But in the end, although idolatrie had beene rooted out of the best and most notable partes of the worlde, yet he hath retired himself into the most remote parts, and hath ruled in that other part of the worlde which, although it be much inferiour in nobilitie, yet is it not of less com passe. There are two causes and chiefe motives for the which the divell hath so much laboured to plant idolatry and all in- fidelity, so as you shall hardly finde any Nation where there is not some markes thereof. The one is this great pre- sumption and pride, which is such, that ^hoso would con- sider how hee durst affront the very Sonne of God, and true God, in saying impudently, that he should fall downe and worship him ; the which he did, although he knew not certainely that this was the very God, yet had he some Mat.

IV.

300 HAUCE OT THE BSYIL.

Ld, r.

opinion that it was the Sonne of God. A most cmell and horrible pride to dare thus impudently affiront his Grod. Tmely wee shall not finde it very strange that hee makes himselfe to be worshipped as God by ignorant Nations^ seeing hee would seeke to be worshipped by God himselfe^ calling himselfe God^ being an abhominable and detestable creature. The other cause and motive of idolatrie is the mortall hatred he hath conceived for ever against man- kinde. For as our Saviour saith; hee hath beene a mur- therer from the beginnings and holdes it as a condition and inseparable qualitie of his wickednesse. And for that hee knowes the greatest misery of man is to worship the crea«  tnre for God ; for this reason hee never leaves to invent all sortes of Idolatries to destroy man and make him ennemy to God. There are two mischiefes which the divell causeth in idolatry : the one, that hee denies his God, according to Deut.xxxii. the text, Thou hast left thy God who created thee; the other is, that hee doth subiect himselfe to a thing baser than himselfe ; for that all creatures are inferior to the rea- sonable, and the divell, although hee be superior to man in nature^ yet in estate he is much inferior, seeing that man in this life is capable of Divinitie and Etemitie. By this meanes God is dishonoured, and man lost in all parts by idolatry, wherewith the divell in his pride is well content.

Chap, ii.^ — Of many Mndes of idolatry the Indians

have vsed.

Sap. xiv. Idolatry, saieth the Holy-Ghost by the Wise man, is the cause, begi9ning, and end of all miseries ; for this cause the enemy of mankinde hath multiplied so many sortes and diversities of idolatry, as it were an infinite matter to spe- cific them all. Yet we may reduce idolatry to two heades, the one grounded vppon naturall things, the other vpon

V

N

BELIEF IN A SUPBEHE BEINQ. 301

things imagined and made by mans invention. The first ^■-- is divided into two ; for eyther the thing they worship is generally as the Sunne^ Moone^ Fire^ Earthy and Elements, or else it is particnlar, as some certayne river, fonntaine, tree, or forrest, when these things are not generaly wor- shipped in their kindes, but onely in particular. In this / first kind o f idolatry they have exceeded in Peru, and they properly call it Huaca. The second kinde of idolatry, which depends on mans inventions and fictions, may likewise be divided into two sortes, one which regards onely the pure arte and invention of man, as to adore the images or statues of y gold, wood, or stone, of Mercury or Pallas, which neyther are, nor ever were any thing else but the bare pictures ; and the other that concemes that which really hath beene,* and is in trueth the same thing, but not such as idolatry faines, as the dead, or some things proper vnto them, / which men worshippe through vanitie and flatterie, so as we reduce all to foure kindes of idolatry, which the infi- dells vse; of all which it behooveth us to speake some- thing.

Chap. in. — That the Indians have some knowledge of Ood,

First, although the darknesse of infidelitie holdeth these Nations in blindenesse, yet in many thinges the light of truth and reason works somewhat in them. And they com- monly acknowledge a supreame Lord and Author of all things, which they of Peru called Viracocha,^ and gave him names of great excellence, as Pachacamac, or Pachayacha- chic,^ which is the Creator of heaven and earth : and Vsapu,*

> See G, dela Vega (ii, p. 66) for the meaning of the word Viracocha^ properly, Uira-ccocha,

' PachacamaCy Creator of the World. Pachayackachic^ Teacher of the World. ' Sapay, Only.

/

302 NO NAME FOB OOD.

^"•^' which is admirable, and other like names. Him they did worship, as the chiefest of all, whom they did honour in be- holding the heaven. The like wee see amongst them of Mexico and China, and all other infidelles. Which accord- eth well with that which is saide of Saint Paul, in the Acts of the Apostles, where hee did see the Inscription of an Altare, Ignoto Deo — To the vnknown God. Wherevpon the Apostle tooke occasion to preach unto them, saying, Acta xvii. " He whomo you worship without knowing, him doe I preach vnto you^*. In like sort, those which at this day do preach the Gospel to the Indians find no great difficultie to perswade them that there is a high God and Lord over all, and that this is the Christians God and the true God. And yet it iath caused great admiration in me, that although they had this knowledge, yet had they no proper name for God. If wee shall seeke into the Indian tongue for a word to answer to this name of God, as in Latin, Bens, in Greeke, Theos, in Hebrew, El, in Arabike, Alia; but wee shall not finde any in the Cuscan or Mexicaine tongues. So as .such as preach or write to the Indians vse our Spanish name Dios, fitting it to the accent or pronunciation of the Indian tongues, the which differ much, whereby appeares the small knowledge they had of God, seeing they cannot so much as name him, if it be not by our very name : yet in trueth they had some little knowledge, and therefore in Peru they made him a rich temple, which they called Pachacamac, which was the principall Sanctuarie of the realme. And as it hath been saide, this word of Pachacamac is, as much to say, as the Creator, yet in this temple they vsed their idolatries, worshipping the divell and figures. They likewise made sacrifices and oflTrings to Viracocha, which held the chiefe place amongst the worships which the Kings Tncas made. Heereof they called the Spaniards Virocochas, for that they holde opinion they are the sonnes of heaven, and divine ; even as others did attribute a deitie to Paul and Barnabas,

FORMS OP IDOLATRY. 303

calling the one lupiter, and the other Mercurie, so woulde ^"' ^' they ofifer sacrifices vnto them, as vnto gods : and as the Barbarians of Melita (which is Malta), seeing that the viper Actaxviu. did not hurt the Apostle, they called him God.

As it is therefore a trueth, conformable to reason, that there is a soveraigne Lorde and King of heaven, whome the Gentiles, with all their infidelities and ido- latries, have not denyed, as wee see in the Philosophy ^ of TimaBus in Plato, in the Metaphisickes of Aristotle, and AHat!?^^™' in the Asclepio of Tresmigister, as also in the Poesies of J^toph. Homer and Virgil. Therefore the Preachers of the Gospel in piman- '

dro. and

have no great difficultie to plant and perswade this truth Asciepio. of a supreame God, be the Nations of whome they preach never so barbarous and brutish. But it is hard to roote out of their mindes that there is no other God, nor any other deitie then one ; and that all other things of themselves have no power, being not workeing proper to themselves, but what the great and onely God and Lord doth give and impart vnto them. To conclude, ifc is neces- sarie to perswade them by all meanes in reproving their errors, as well in that wherein they generally fail in wor- shipping more then one God, as in particular (which is much more), to hold for Gods, and to demand favour and helpe of those things which are not Gods, nor have any power, but what the true God their Lord and Creator hath given them.

Chap. iv. — Of the first kinde of Idolatries vpon natxirall and

universall things.

Next to Viracocha, or their supreme God, that which most commonly they have and do adore amongst the Infi- dells is the Sunne ; and, after, those things which are most remarkable in the celestiall or elementarie nature, as the

304 PBBUTIAK DKinS&

hiM.r, moone^ starres, sea, and land. The Hnacas, or Oratories, wliich the Yncas Lords of Pern had in greatest reverence next to Yiracocha and the sunne, was the thunder, which they called by three divers names, Chnqnilla, Catnilla, and IntiiUapa,^ supposing it to bee a man in heaven, with a sling and a mace, and that it is in his power to cause raine, haile, thunder, and all the rest that appertaines to the region of the aire, where the cloudes engender. It was a Huaca (for so they called the Oratories) generall to all the Indians of Peru, offering vnto him many sacrifices ; and in Cnzco, which is the Q!ourt and Metropolitane Cittie, they did sacrifice children vnto him, as to the Sunne. They did worship these three, Yiracocha, the Sunne, and Thunder, / after another maner than all the rest, as Polo^ writes, who had made triall thereof, they did put as it were a gauntlet or glove vpon their hands when they did lift them vp to worshippe them. They did worshippe the earth, which they called Pachan^ma, as the Ancients did the goddesse Tellus ; and the sea likemse, which they call Mamacocha, as the Ancients worshipped Thetis or Neptune. More- over, they did worship the rainebow, which were the armes and blazons of the Ynca, with two snakes stretched out on either side^ Amongst the starres they all did com- monly worship that which they called Colca, and we heere the little goats.^ They did attribute divers offices to divers starres, and those which had neede of their favour did worship them, as the shepheard did sacrifice to a star which they called vrcuchillay,**which they holde to be a sheepe of divers colours, having the care to preserve their cattell. It is understood to be that which the Astronomers call Lyra. These shepheards worshippe two other starres, which walke neere vnto them, they call them Catuchillay

Yllapa is thunder in Quichua. Chuqui-ylla was the name of the God of Thunder. Ynti-yllapa, the Sun's thunder.

« Polo de Ondegardo. « The Plaiades.

MEXICAN DEITIES. 305

And vrcuchillay ; and they faine them to be an ewe and a ^"- ^• lambe. Others worshipped a starre which they called Machachuay^ to which they attribute the charge and power over serpents and snakes, to keepe them from hurting of them. They ascribe power to another starre^ which they called Chuquinchincay (which is as much as jaguar), over tigres, beares, and lyons, and they have generally be- leeved, that of all the beasts of the earth, there is one alone in heaven like vnto them, the which hath care of their pro- creation and increase. And so they did observe and wor- ship divers starres, as those which, they called Chacana, Topatorca, Mamana, Mirco, Miquiquiray, and many others. So, as it seemed, they approached somewhat neere the pro- positions of Platoes Ideas. The Mexicaines almost in the same manor, after the supreame God, worshiped the Sunne. And therefore they called Hernando Cortez, as he hath written in a letter sent vnto the Bmperour Charles the fift, Sonne of the Sunne, for his care and courage to compasse the earth. But they made their greatest adoration to an Idol called Vitzilipuztli, the which in all this region they called the most puissant, and Lord of all things ; for this cause the Mexicaines built him a Temple, the greatest, the fairest, the highest, and the most sumptuous of all other. The scituation and beautie thereof may wel be coniectured ^ by the ruines which yet remaine in the midst of the Cittie of Mexico. But heere the Mexicaines Idolatrie hath bin more pernicious ^nd hurtfuU then that of the Yncas, as wee shall see plainer heereafter, for that the greatest part of their adoration and idolatrie was employed to Idols, and not to naturall things, although they did attribute naturall effects to these IdoUs, as raine, multiplication of cattell, warre, and generation, even as the Greeks and Latins have forged Idolls of Phoebus, Mercurie, lupiter, Minerva, and of Mars. ^ To conclude, whoso shall neerely looke into it, shall finde this manner which the Divell hath vsed to deceive the

I ly.i

306

THK SIN OF IDOLATRY.

LfEB. r.

Sap. xiii.

Horn. i.

Indians^ to be the same wherewith hee hath deceived the Oreekes and Romans, and other ancient Gentiles, giving them to vnderstand that these notable creatures, the Sanne Moone, Starres, and Elements, had power and authoritie to doe good or harme to men. And although God hath created all these things for the vse of man, yet hath man so much forgotte himselfe as to rise vp against him. Moreover, he hath imbased himselfe to creatures that are inferiour vnto himselfe, worshiping and calling vpon their workes, for- saking his Creator. As the Wise man saieth well in these wordes, *' All men are vaine and abused that have not the knowledge of God, seeing they could not know him, that is, by the things that seemed good vnto them : and although they have beheld his workes, yet have they not attained to know the author and maker thereof, but they have beleeved that the fire, winde, swift aire, the course of the starres, great rivers, with Sunne and Moone, were Gods and governours of the world; and being in love with the beautie of these things, they thought they should esteeme them as Gods/^ It ia reason they should consider how much more faire the Creator is, seeing that he is the Author of beauties and makes all things. Moreover, if they admire the power and effects of these things, thereby they may vnderstand how much more mightie hee is that gave them their being, for by the beautie and greatnes of the creatures, they may iudge what the Maker is. Hitherto are the wordes of the Booke of Wisdome, from whence we may draw a good and strong argument, to overthrow the Idolatrie of Infidells, who seeke rather to serve the creature then the Creator, as the Apostle doth iustly reprehend them. But for as much as this is not of our present subiect, and that it hath been sufficiently treated of in the Sermons written against the errors of the Indians, it shall bee sufficient now to>49hew that they did worship the great God, and their vaine and lying gods all of one fashion ; for their maner to pray to

1

IDOLATRY OP THE INDIANS. 807

"Viracocha, to the Sunne, the Starres, and the rest of their ^"- ^'

Idolls^ was to open their hands, and to make a eertaine Bound with their mouthes, like people that kissed, and to aske that which every one desired in oflTering his sacrifices, yet was there great difiference betwixt the words they vsed in speaking to the great Ticciviracocha,^ to whom they did attribute the cheefe power and commandement over all things, and those they vsed to others, the which every one did worship privately in his house, as Gods or particular liords, saying that they were their intercessors to this great Tieciviracocha. This manor of worship, opening the hands, and as it were kissing, hath something like to that which lob had in horror, as fit for Idolaters, saying, " If I have lobxxxii. kissed my hands with my mouth, beholding the Sunne when it shines, or the Moone when it is light, the which is a great iniquitie, and to deny the most great God/'

Chap. v. — Of the Idolatry the Indians vsed to particular

things.

The Divell hath not bene contented to make these blinde Indians to worshippe the Sunne, Moone, Starres, Earth and Sea, and many other generall things in nature, but hee hath passed on further, giving them for God, and making them subiect to base and abiect things, and for the most part, filthy and infamous. No man needes to woonder at this barbarous blindnes, if hee remember what the Apostle ■^^' ^• speaketh of Wise men and Philosophers. That having knowne God, they did not glorifie him, nor give him thankes as to their God, but they were lost in their own imagina- tions and conceipts, and their hearts were hardened in their follies, and they have changed the glory and deity of the

1 " Aticsi-Uiracocha", according to Molina. From "Atic", a con- queror.

x2

308 IDOLS OP THE PERUVIANS.

^"- ^- eternall God into shews and figures of vaine and corruptible things, as men, birds, beasts, and serpents ; we know well that the Egyptians did worship the Dogge of Osiris, the Cow of Isis, and the Sheepe of Ammon ; the Romans did worship the goddesse Februa, of Feavers, and the Tarpeien Goose ; and Athenes the wise woman, the Cocke, and the Raven, and such other like vanities and mockeries, whereof the auntient Histories of the Gentiles are full. Men fell into this great misery, for that they would not subiect themselves to the Lawe of the true God and Creator, as Saint Athanasius dooth learnedly handle, writing against Idolatry. But it is wonderfuU strange to see the excesse which hath beene at the Indies, especially in Peru ; for they worshipped rivers, fountaines, the mouthes of rivers, entries of mountaines, rockes or great stones, hilles and the tops of mountains, which they call Apachitas, and they hold them for matters of great devotion. To conclade, they did worship all things in natare which seemed to them remarkable and difierent from the rest, as acknow- ledging some particular deitie.

They shewed me in Caxamalca of Nasca a little hill or great mount of sand, which was the chiefe IdoU or Huaca of the Antients. I demaunded of them what divinitie they found in it ? They answered, that they did worship it for the woonder, being a very high mount of sand, in the midst of very thicke mountains of stone. Wee had neede in the. ^. cittie of Kings of great store of great wood for the ^ "^ ^ melting of a Bell, and therefore they cut downe a great

deformed tree, which for the greatnesse and antiquitie thereof had beene a long time the Oratorio and Huaca of the Indians. And they beleeved there was a certaine Divinity in any thing that was extraordinary and strange in his kinde, attributing the like vnto small stones and mettalls ; yea, vnto rootes and fruites of the earth, as the rootes they call Papas. There is a strange kinde which they

\

I I

"^ "i.

FEBUVIAN SUFEBSTJTI0N8. 309

call Llallahuas, which they kissed and worshipped. They ^"' ^• did likewise worshippe Beares, Lions, Tygres, and Snakes, to the end they should not hurt them ; and such as their gods bee, such are the things they oflfer vnto them in their worshippe. They have vsed as they goe by the way, to cast, in the crosse wayes, on the hilles, and toppes of mountaines, which they call Apachitas,^ olde shooes, feathers, and coca chewed, being an hearb they vse much. And when they have nothing left, they cast a stone as an offring, that they might passe freely, and have greater force, the which they say increaseth by this meanes, as it is reported in a provinciall Council of Peru. And therefore £^}J;i ^ they finde in the hie wayes great heapes of stones offered, p-^'^p-^* and such other things. ^ The like foUie did the Antients vse, of whome it is spoke in the Proverbs. Like vnto him that Prou. xxvi. oflFereth stones vnto the hill of Mercurie, such a one is hee that honoureth fooles,"^ meaning that a man shall reape no more fruit nor profit of the second than the first, for that their God Mercury, made of stone, dooth not acknow- ledge any offering, neyther doth a foole any honour that is doone him. They vsed another offring no lesse absurd, pulling the haire from the eyebrowes to offer it to the Snnne, hills, Apachitas, to the winds, or to any other thing they feare. Such is the miseries that many Indians have lived in, and do to this day, whom the divell doth abuse, like very babes, with any foolish illusion whatsoever. So dooth Saint Chrysostome in one of his Homilies compare them, but the servants of God, which labour to draw them to salvation, ought not contemne these follies and child- ishnesse, being sufficient to plunge these poore abused creatures into etemall perdition; but they ought with good and cleere reasons to draw them from so great ignorance.

> Correctly " Apachecta". See G, de la Vega^ i, p. 117-

> ^* As he that bindeth a stone in a sling, so is he that giveth honour to a fool." — Proverbs xxvi, v. 8.

310 ARGUMENT AGAINST THE SXiN BEING GOD.

^"- ^' For in tmeth it is a matter woorthy of consideratioiij to see how they subiect themselves to such as instruct them in the trae way of life. There is nothing among all the creatures more beautifuU than the Sunne. which all the Gentiles did commonly worship. A discreete captaine and good chris- tian told me that he had with a good reason perswaded the Indians that the Sunne was no god. He required the Cacique or chiefe Lord to give him an Indian that were light, to carry him a letter ; which doone^ he saide to the Cacique, Tell me who is Lord and chiefe, either this Indian that carriias the letter, or thou that dost send him ? The Cacique answered, without doubt I am, for he dooth but what I commaund him. Even so replied the Captaine^ is it of the Sunne we see, and the Creator of all things. For that the Sunne is but a servant to the most high Lorde, which, by his commaundement, runnes swiftly, giving light to all nations. Thus thou seest it is against reason to yeeld that honour to the Sunne which is due to the Creator and Lord of all. The Captaine's reason pleased tbem all ; and the Cacique with his Indians sayde it was trueth, and they were much pleased to vnderstand it.

They report of one of the Kings Yncas, a man ©f a Bubtill spirite, who, seeing that all his predecessors had worshipped the Sunne, said that hee did not take the Sunne to be 6od^ neither could it be, for that Qod was a great Lord, who with great quiet and leasure performeth his workes^ and that the Sunne doth never cease his course, saying that the thing which laboured so much could not seeme to be God.^ Wherein hee spake truth. Even so, when they shew the Indians their blind errors by lively and plaine reasons, they are presently perswaded and yeelde admirably to the trueth.

» This was Huayna Ccapac. See G, de la Vega, ii, p. 446.

QUOTATION FROM THE WISl^OM OF SOLOMON. 311

Chap. vi. — Of another Tcinde of idolatry vpon the dead.

There is an other kinde of idolatry, very diflFerent from ^"- ^•

the rest, which the Gentiles have vsed for the deads sake

whom they loved and esteemed; and it seemeth that the

Wise man wonld give vs to vnderstand, that the beginning

of idolatry proceeded thence, saying thus : '* The seeking of J^^^f ^'

IdoUes was the beginning of fornication, and the bringing

vp of them is the destruction of life. For they were not from

the beginning, neither shall they continue for ever, but the

vanitie and idlenesse of men hath found out this invention,

therefore shall they shortly come to an end; for when a

father mourned heavily for the death of his miserable Sonne,

he made for his consolation an Image of jbhe dead man, and

beganne to worshippe him as a god, who a little before had

ended his daies like a mortall man, commanding his servants

to make ceremonies and sacrifices in remembrance of him.

Thus in processe of time this vngratious custome waxing

strong was held for a lawe, and Images were worshipped

by the commaundement of Kings and Tirantes. Then they

beganne to doe the like to them that were absent, and such

as they could not honour in presence, being farre off, they

did worship in this sort, causing the Images of Kings to be

brought whom they would worship, supplying, by this

invention, their absence whom they desired to flatter. The

curiositie of excellent workmen increased this Idolatrie, for

these Images were made so excellent by their Art, that the

ignorant were provoked to worshippe them, so as by the

perfection of their Arte, pretending to content them that

gave them to make, they drew Pictures and Images farre

more excellent ; and the common people, ledde with the

shew and grace of the worke, did holde and esteeme him

for a God, whome before they had honoured as a man. And

this was the miserable errour of men, who sometimes

312 WORSHIP OP ANCESTOES.

^"- ^- yeelding to their aflFection and sence, sometimes to the flatterie of their Kings, did attribute vnto stones the incom- » municable name of God, worshipping them for Gods/^

/ All this is in the booke of Wisdome, woorthy to be noted;

and such as are curious in the search of Antiquities shall

finde that the beginning of idolatry were these Images of

the dead. I say idolatry, which is properly the worship of

f ' IdoUes and Images ; for that it is not certaine that this

other idolatry, to worship the creatures, as the Sunne and

and the hostes of heaven, or the number of Planets and

ler.xix. Starrcs, whereof mention is made in the Prophets, hath

beene after the idolatry of Images, although without doubt

Sophon. i. they have made idols in honour of the Sunne, the Moone,

/ and the Earth. {Returning to our Indians ; they came to the

' height of Idolatry by the same meanes the Scripture

^ maketh m^ention of: first they had a care to keepe the

bodies of their Kings and Noblemen whole, from any ill ^v ■ ^ scent or corruption above two hundred yeares. In this

■^ sorte were their Kings Yncas in Cusco, every one in his ^ Chappell and Oratorio, so as the Marquis of Canete being > Viceroy, to root out Idolatry, caused three or foure of their y gods to be drawne out and carried to the city of Kings, • which bredde a great admiration, to see these bodies (dead so many yeares before) remaine so faire and also whole.^ Every one of these Kings Yncas left all his treasure and revenue^ to entertaine the place of worshippe where his body was layed, and there were many Ministers with all his familie dedicated to his service ; for no King successor did vsurpe the treasures and plate of his predecessor, but he did gather all new for himselfe, and his pallace. They were not content with this Idolatry to dead bodies, but also they made their figures and representations; and every King in his life time caused a figure to be made wherein he was represented, which they called Huauque, which signifieth

^ See G, de la Vega, ii, p. 91.

V V.'

.^ •^^-^-

CUSTOMS BESPECTINa THE DEAD. 313

brotter, for that they should doe to this Image, during his , life and death, as much honor and reverence as to himself. I They carryed this Image to the warres, and in procession for rain or fayre weather, making sundry feastes and sacrifices ' vnto them. There have beene many of these IdoUes in GascOj ; and in that territorie, but nowe they say that this supersti- tion of worshipping of stones hath altogether ceased, or for , the most part, after they had beene discovered by the diligence of the Licentiate Polo^ and the first was that of the Ynca Rocca, chief of the faction or race of Hanan Cusco. And we find that among other Nations they had in great estimation and reverence the bodies of their prede- cessors, and did likewise worship their Images.

Lib. t.

Chap. vii. — Of Sujperstitions they vsed to the Dead,

The Indians of Peru beleeved commonly that the Soules lived after this Hfe, and that the good were in glorie and the bad in paine ; so as there is little difiScultie to perswade them to these articles. But they are not yet come to the knowledge of that point, that the bodies should rise with the soules. And therefore they did vse a wonderfull care, as it is saide, to preserve the bodies which they honoured after death; to this end their successors gave them gar- ments, and made sacrifices vnto them, especially the Kings Tncas, being accompanied at their funeralls with a great number of servants and women for his service in the other life ; and therefore on the day of his decease they did put to death the woman he had loved best, his servants and officers, that they might serve him in the other life.

Whenas Huayna Ccapac died (who was father to Atahu- alpa, at what time the Spaniards entred), they put to death aboue a thousand persons of all ages and conditions, for his service, to accompany him in the other life ; after many

814 CUSTOMS BE8P£CTIN0 THE DKAD.

^^'^- songs and drunkennes they slew them ; and these that were appointed to deaths held themselves happy. They did sacrifice many things vnto them, especially yong children, and with the blond they made a stroake on the dead mans / face, from one eare to the other. This superstition and inhumanities to kill both men and women, to accompanie and serve the dead in the other life, hath beene followed by others, and is at this day vsed amongst some other barbarous

.( Nations. And as Polo writes^ it hath beene in a manor

generall throughout^ all the Indies. The venerable Bed© reportes, that before the Englishmen were converted to the Gospel they had the same custome, to kill men to accom- pany and serve the dead. It is written of a Portugall, who, being captive among the Barbarians, had beene hurt with a dart, so as he lost one eye, and as they would have sacrificed him to accompany a Nobleman that was dead, hee said vnto them that those that were in the other life would make small account of the dead if they gave him a blind man for a companion, and that it were better to give him an attendant that had both his eyes. This reason being found good by the Barbarians they let him go. Besides this super- stition of sacrificing men to the dead, beeing used but to great Personages, there is another far more general and common in all the Indies, which is to set meate and drinke vpon the grave of the dead, imagining they did feede thereon : the which hath likewise beene an error amongst the Ancients, as saint Augustine writes, and therefore they gave them meate and drinke. At this day many Indian Infidells doe [secretly draw their dead out of the churchyard and burie I them on hilles, or vpon passages of mountains, or else in I their owne houses. They have also vsed to put gold and silver in their mouth, hands, and bosome, and to apparell them with new garments, durable and well lined, vnder the herse. \^ They beleeve that the soules of the dead wandred vp and

MEXICAN CUSTOMS. 815

downe and indare colde, thirst, hanger, and travell, and for ^"^ ^• this caase thej make their anniversaries, carrying them clothes, meate^ and drinke. So as the Prelates, in their Synodes, above all things, give charge to their Priests to let the Indians vnderstand, that the offerings that are set vpon the sepulchre is not to feede the dead but for the poor and ministers, and that God alone dooth feede the scales in the other life, seeing they neither eate nor drinke any corporall thing, being very needefuU they should vnderstand it, lest they should convert this religious vse into a superstition of the gentiles as many doe.

Chap. viii. — Of the manner of burying the dead among the Mexicaine and sundrie other Nations,

Having reported what many nations of Peru have done with their dead, it shall not be from the purpose to make particular mention of the Mexicaines in this poynt, whose mortuaries were much solemnified and full of notable follies. It was the office of the priests and religious of Mexico (who lived there with a strange observance, as shall be said here- after) to interre the dead and doe their obsequies. The places where they buried them was in their gardens, and in the courts of their owne houses ; others carried them to the places of sacrifices which were doone in the mountaines ; others burnt them, and after buryed the ashes in theyr Temples, and they buryed them all with whatsoever they had of apparel, stones, and Jewells. They did put the ashes of such as were burnt into pots, and with them the Jewells, stones, and earerings of the dead, how rich and pretious soever. They did sing the funerall offices like to answeres, and did often lift vp the dead bodies, dooing many cere- monies. At these mortuaries they did eate and drinke, and if it were a person of qualitie they gave apparrell to all such

316 MEXICAN CUSTOMS.

Lib. t. as Came to the interrement. T\Tien any one dyed they layd him open in a chamber, vntill that all his kinsfolkes and friendes were come, who brought presents vnto the dead, and saluted him as if he were living. And if he were a King or a Lord of some towne, they oflFered him slaves to be put to death with him, to the end they might serve him in the other world. They likewise put to death his priest or chap- laine (for every Noble man had a priest which administred these ceremonies within his house), and then they killed him that hee might execute his office with the dead. They like- ^^ wise killed his cooke, his butler, his dwarfes and deformed

men, by whom he was most served ; neyther did they spare the very brothers of the dead, who had most served them : for it was a greatnesse amongest the Noble men to be served by theyr brethren and the rest. Finally they put to death all of his traine for the entertaining of his house in the other world ; and lest poverty should oppresse them they buried with them much wealth, as golde, silver, stones, curtins of exquisite worke, bracelets of gold, and other rich peeces. And if they burned the dead, they vsed the like with all his servants and ornaments they gave him for the other world. Then tooke they all the ashes they buryed with very great solemnity. The obsequies continued tenne dayes, with songs of plaints, and lamentations, and the priests carried away the dead with so many ceremonies, and in so great number as they coulde scarce accoumpt them. To the Captaines and Noblemen they gave trophees and marks of honour accord- ing to their enterprises and valor imployed in the warres and governements ; for this effect they had armes and par- ticular blasons. They carried these markes or blasons to the place where he desired to be buried or burnt, marching before the body, and accompanying it, as it were, in pro- cession, where the priests and officers of the Temple went with diverse furnitures and ornaments, some casting incense, others singing, and some sounding of mournefuU

WORSHIP OF IMAGES AND IDOLS. 817

flates and drummes^ which did much increase the sorrow of ^'•^' his kinsfolkes and subjects. The priest who did the oflSce was decked with the markes of the idoll which the noble man had represented, for all noble men did represent idolles, and carried the name of some one, and for this occasion they were esteemed and honoured. The order of knighthoode did commonly carry these forsaide markes. He that should be burnt, being brought to the place appoynted, they invi- roned him with wood of pine trees and all his baggage, then set they fire vnto it, increasing it still with goomie wood, vntill that all were converted into ashes, then came there foorth a Priest attired like a Divell , having mouthes vpon every ioynt of him, and many eyes of glasse, holding a great stafie with the which hee did mingle all the ashes very boldly and with so terrible a gesture, as he terrified all the assistants. Sometimes the minister had other different habites according to the qualitie of the dead. I have made this digression of obsequies and funeralls vpon the idolatry and superstition they had to the dead. It is reason to returne now to our chiefe subject and to finish this matter.

Chap. ix. — The fourth and last Tcinde of Idolatry the Indians vsed, especially the Mexicaines, to Images and Idolls.

Although in trueth God is greatly offended with these above named Idolatries, where they woorship the creatures; yet the holy Ghost doth much more reproove and condemne another kind of idolatry, and that is of those that worship Images and figures made by the hand of men, which have nothing else in them but to be of wood, stone, or mettall, and of such forme as God hath given them. And therefore the Wiseman speaketh thus of such people, ^^They are miserable, whose hopes may be counted among the dead.

318 IDOLS OP MEXICO.

^™- ^- that have called the workes of mens handes gods, as golde,

silver, and the invention of the likenes of beastes, or a

fniitlesse stone, which hath nothing more in it than antiqui-

[ tie/^ And hee dooth divinely follow this proposition against

this errour and follie of the Gentiles ; as also the Prophets

isa. xiiv. Isaiah, Jeremiah, Baruc, and King David, doe treate thereof

JL 6X*G • A •

Psarcxm. ai^pV- ■'•* ^^ convenient and necessary that the ministers of Christ which doe reproove the errors of idolatry, should have a good sight, and consider well these reasons which the holy-Ghost doth so lively set downe, being all reduced

Hosea viii. into a shoi't Sentence by the Prophet Hosea, '^ He that hath made them was a workeman, and therefore can they be no gods, therefore the Calfe of Samaria shalbe like the Spiders webbe/' Returning to our purpose, there hath beene great curiositie at the Indies in making of idoUes and pictures of diverse formes and matters, which they wor- shipped for gods, and in Peru they called them Huacas, being commonly of fowle and deformed beasts ; at the least, such as I have seene, were so. I beleeve verily that the Divel, in whose honour they made these idolles, was pleased to cause himselfe to be worshipped in these deformities, and in trueth it was found so, that the Divell spake and answered in many of these Huacas or idoUs, and his priests and ministers came to those Oracles of the father of lies, and such as he is, such were his counsells and prophesies. In the provinces of New Spaine, Mexico, Tescuco, Tlascalla, Gholula, and in the neighbour countries to this realme, this kinde of idolatry hath beene more practised than in any other realme of the world. And it is a prodigious thing to heare the superstitions rehersed that they have vsed in that poynt, of the which it shall not be vnpleasant to speake something. The chiefest idoll of Mexico was, as I have sayde, Vitzilipuztli. It was an image of wood, like to a man, set vpon a stoole of the colour of azure, in a brankard or litter ; at every corner was a piece of wood in forme of a Serpant^s head.

IDOLS OF MEXICO. 319

The stoole signified that he was set in heaven : this idoll hadde all the forehead azure^ and had a band of azure ynder the nose from one eare to another : vpon his head he had a rich plume of feathers, like to the beake of a small bird, the which was covered on the toppe with gold burnished very browne .' hee had in his left hand a white target, with , the figures of .five pine apples made of white feathers, set in j a crosse : and from above issued forth a crest of gold, and ! at his sides hee hadde foure dartes, which (the Mexicaines say) had beene sent from heaven to do those actes and pro- wesses which shall be spoken of. In his right hand he had an azured staflfe, cutte in fashion of a waving snake. All these ornaments, with the rest, had their meaning, as the Mexicaines doe shew : the name of Vitziliputzli signifies the left hand of a shining feather.^

I will speake heereafter of the prowde Temple, the sacri- fices, feasts, and ceremonies of this great idoll, being very notable things. But at this present we will only shew that this idoll, thus richly appareled and deckt, was set vpon an high Altare in a small peece or boxe, well covered with linnen clothes, iewells, feathers, and ornaments of golde, with many rundles of feathers, the fairest and most exqui- site that could be found : hee had alwaies a curtine before him for the greater veneration. loyning to the chamber or chappell of this idoll, there was a peece of lesse worke, and not so well beautified, where there was another idoll. they called Tlaloc. These two idolls were alwaies together, for that they held them as companions, and of equall power. There was another idoll in Mexico, much esteemed, which was the god of repentance, and of jubilies and pardons for their sinnes. They called this idoll Tezcatlipuca ; he was made of a blacke shining stone like to layel,^ being attired with some ornamental devises after their manner ; it had eareringa of golde and silver, and through the nether lippe a small

• ** Siniestra de pluma relumbrante." « " Azauache."

Lib. t.

ICB«T.

320 XKXICAS IDOL8.

tabe of cristaH, in length lialfe a foote : in the which they sometimes pnt a gieene feather^ and sometimes an azared^ which made it resemble sometimes an emerald, and some- times a tnrqaois: it had the haire broided and bound Tp with a haire-lace of golde bomished, at the end whereof did hang an eare of golde, with two firebrands of smoake painted therein^ which did signifie the prayers of the afflicted and sinners that he heard^ when they recommended themselves ynto him. Betwixt the two eares hanged a number of small herons. He had a iewell hanging at his necke^ so great that it covered all his stomacke : vpon his armes bracelets of golde ; at his navill a rich greene stone ; and in his left hand a fanne of pretions feathers, of greene^ azure, and yellow, which came forth of a looking glasse of golde, shining and well burnished, and that signified, that within this looking glasse hee sawe whatsoever was doone in the world. They called this mirror or plate of golde Itlac- heaya, which signifies his glasse for to looke in. In his right hand he held foure dartes, which signified the chas- tisement hee gave ynto the wicked for their sinnes. And therefore they feared this idoll most, lest he should discover their faults and offences. At his feast they had pardon of their sinnes, which was made every foure years, as shalbe declared heereafter. They held this idoll Tezcatlipuca for the god of drought, of famine, barrennesse, and pestilence : And therefore they paynted him in another forme, being set in great maiesty vppon a stoole compassed in with a red curtin, painted and wrought with the heads and bones of dead men. In the left hand it had a target with five pines, like vnto pine apples of cotton : and in the right a little dart, with a threatening countenaunce, and the arme stretcht out, as if he would cast it; and from the target came foure dartes. It had the countenance of an angry man, and in choler, the body all painted blacke, and the bead full of Quales feathers. They vsed great superstition to

I

GODS OP THE MEXICANS. 321

this idoll, for the feare they had of it. In Cholula, which is a commonwealth of Mexico, they worshipt a famous idoll, which was the god of marchandise, being to this day greatly given to trafficke. They called it Quetzaalcoatl.

This idoll was in a great place in a temple very high : it had about it golde, silver, Jewells, very rich feathers, and habites of divers colours. It had the forme of a man, but the visage of a little bird with a red bill, and above a combe full of wartes, having rankes of teeth, and the tongue hang- ing out. It carried vpon the head a pointed myter of painted paper, a sithe in the hand, and many toyes of golde on the legges ; with a thousand other foolish inventions, whereof all had their significations ; and they worshiped it, for that he enriched whome hee pleased, as Memnon and Plutus. In trueth this name which the Cholulanos gave to their God was very fitte, although they vnderstoode it not: they called it Quetzaalcoatl, signifying colour of a rich feather, for such is the divell of covetousnesse. . These barbarous people contented not themselves to have gods onely, but they had goddesses also, as the Fables of Poets have brought in, and the blind gentility of the Greekes and Romans worshipt them. The chiefe goddesse they worshipt was called Tozi, which is to say our grandmother, who, as the Histories of Mexico report, was daughter to the king of Culbuacan, who was the first they fleaed by the commaunde- ment of Vitzliputzli, whom they sacrificed in this sort, being his sister, and then they beganne to flea men in their sacri- fices, and to clothe the living with the skinnes of the sacrificed, having learned that their gods were pleased there- with, as also to pull the hearts out of them they sacrificed, which they learned of their god, who pulled out the hearts of such as he punished in TuUa, as shall be sayd in his place. One of these goddesses they worshipt had a sonne, who was a great hunter, whome they of Tlascalla afterwardes tooke for a god, and those were ennemies to the Mexicaines, by whose

Y

Lib. r.

Lib. v.

322 GODS OF THE MEXICANS.

ayde the Spaniardes wonne Mexico. The province of Tlascalla is very fit for hunting, and the people are much given therevnto. They therfore made a great feast vnto this idoll, whom they painted of such a forme as it is not now needefull to loose any time in the description thereof. The feast they made was pleasant^ and in this sort : They sounded a Trumpet at the breake of day, at the sound whereof they all assembled with their bowes, arrows, netts, and other instruments for hunting : then they went in pro- cession with theyr idoll, being followed by a great number of people to a high mountayne, vpon the toppe whereof they had made a bower of leaves, and in the middest thereof an Altare richly deckt, where- vpon they placed the idoll. They marched with a great bruit of Trumpettes, Cornets, Flutes, and Drummes, and being come vnto the place they invironed this mountaine on all sides, putting fire to it on. all partes : by meanes whereof manie beasts flew foorth, as stagges, Connies, hares, foxes, and woolves, which went to the toppe flying from the fire. These hunters followed after with great cries and noyse of diverse instruments, hunting them to the top before the idoll, whither fled such a num- ber of beastes, in so great a prease, that they leaped one vpon another, vpon the people, and vppon the Altare, wherein they tooke great delight. Then tooke they a great number of these beasts, and sacrificed them before the idoll, as stagges and other great beasts, pulling out their hearts, as they vse in the sacrifice of men, and with the like cere- mony : which done, they tooke all their prey vppon their shoulders, and retired with their idoll in the same manner as they came, and entered the citty laden with all these things, very ioyfull, with great store of musicke, trumpets, and drummes, vntill they came to the Temple, where they placed their idoll with great reverence and solemnitie. They presently went to prepare their venison, wherewith they made a banquet to all the people; and after dinner

HUMAN SACRincES. 323

they made their playes, representations, and daun^es before ^"- ^' the idoll. They had a great number of other idolles, of gods and goddesses ; but the chiefe were of the Mexicaine Nation, and the neighbour people as is saide.

Chap. x. — Of a strange manner of Idolatry practised amongst

the Mexicaines,

As we have saide that the kings Yncas of Peru caused Images to be made to their likenesse, which they called their Guacos or brothers/ causing them for to be honored like themselves : even so the Mexicains have done of their gods, which was in this sorte. They tooke a captive, such as they thought good ; and afore they did sacrifice him vnto their idoUs, they gave him the name of the idoll, to whome hee should be sacrificed, and apparelled him with the same ornaments like their idoll, saying, that he did repre- sent the same idoll. And during the time that this repre- sentation lasted, which was for a yeere in some feasts, in others sixe moneths, and in others lesse, they reverenced and worshipped him in the same manor as the proper idoll ; and in the meane time he did eate, drincke, and was merry. When hee went through the streetes, the people came forth to worship him, and every one brought him an almes, with children and sicke folkes, that he might cure them, and bless them, suffering him to doe all things at his plea- sure, onely hee was accompanied with tenne or twelve men lest he should flie. And he (to the end he might be rever- enced as he passed) sometimes sounded vppon a small flute, that the people might prepare to worship him. The feast being come, and hee growne fatte, they killed him, opened him, and eat him, making a solempne sacrifice of him.

In trueth, it was a pittifuU thing to consider in what sort / Sathan held this people in his subiection, and doth many to

^ Huaca was a sacred thiog or place. Huauque is brother in Quichua.

y2

324 CCKHIKO OF THE DETIL.

Lf». T. i^jjjg jjiy^ which commit the like cruelties and abominations^ with the losse of the miserable sonles and bodies of sach as they offer to him, and he langhs and mockes at the follie of these poore miserable creatures, who deserve well for their offences, to be forsaken of the most high God, to the power of their adversary, whom they have chosen for their god / and support. But seeing wee have spoken sufficient of the Indians idolatrie ; it followes that we treate of their Religion, or rather Superstition, which they vse in their sacrifices^ temples, ceremonies, and the rest.

Chap. xi. — Sow the Devill hath laboured to make himself squall vnto Ood, and to imitate him in his Sacnjices,

Religion, and Sacraments,

Before wee come to this point, we ought to consider one thing, which is worthie of speciall regard, the which is, how /the Divell, by his pride, hath opposed himself to God ; and that which God, by his wisedome, hath decreed for his honour and service, and for the good and health of man, the Divell strives to imitate and to pervert, to bee honoured, and to cause men to be damned : for as we see the great God hath Sacrifices, Priests, Sacraments, Religious Prophets, and Ministers, dedicated to his divine service and holy cere- monies, 80 the Divell hath his sacrifices, priests, his kinds of sacraments, his ministers appointed, his secluded and fained holinesse, with a thousand sortes of false prophets. All which will be pleasant to vnderstand, being declared in particular, and of no small fruite for him that shall reraem-

john V. ber, how the Divell is the father of lies, as the truth saieth in the Gospel ; and therefore hee seekes to vsurpe to hira- solfe the glorie of God, and to counterfeit the light by his

Bxod. vii. darknes. The Sooth-saiers of Egipt, taught by their master Sathan, laboured to do wonders, like vnto those of Moses

TEMPLE OF PACHACAMAC. 325

and Aaron, to be eqaall vnto them. We reade in the Booke ^"- ^• of ludges, of that Micas, Priest of the vaine IdoU, which vsed the same ornaments which were vsed in the Tabernacle of the trne God, as the Bphod, the Seraphin, and other things. There is scarce any thing instituted by lesus Christ our Saviour in his Lawe of his Gospel, the which the Divell hath not counterfeited in some sort, and cari'ied to his Gentiles, as may be seene in reading that which we hold for certaine, by the report of men worthie of credite, of the customes and ceremonies of the Indians, whereof we will treate in this Booke.

Chap. xii. — Of the Temples that were found at the Indies,

Beginning then with their Temples, even as the great God would have a house dedicated, where his holy name might be honoured, and that it should be particularly vowed to his service ; even so the Devil, by his wicked practises, perswaded Infidells to build him prowd Temples, and par- ticular Oratories and Sanctuaries. In every Province of Peru, there was one principall Guaca,^ or house of adoration; and besides it, there was one generall throughout all the Kingdome of the Yncas ; amongst the which there hath beene two famous and notable, the one which they called Pachacamac, is foure leagues from Lima, whereat this day they see the mines of a most ancient and great building, out of the which Francisco Pizarro and his people drew in- finite treasure, of vessell and pottes of gold and silver, which they brought when they tooke the Ynca Atahualpa. There are certaine memories and discourses which say, that in this Temple the Divell did speake visibly, and gave answers by his Oracle, and that sometimes they did see a spotted snake ; and it was a thing very common and

1 Huaca.

I

326 TEMPLE OP CUZCO.

^"- ^' approved at the Indies, that the Devill spake and answered

^n these false Sanctuaries, deceiving this miserable people.

But where the Gospel is entred, and the Crosse of Christ

planted, the father of lies is become mute, as Plutarch writes

piu., ub.de of his time ^^Cur cessaverit Pithias fondere oracula^^ and

tract.

aJ^K^ro lustine Martir treates amply of the silence which Christ ^ ^*' imposed to devills, which spake by Idolls, as it had been before much prophecied of in the holy Scripture. The maner which the Infidel Ministers and Enchanters had to consult with their gods, was as the Devill had taught them. It was commonly in the night they entred backward to their idol], and so went bending their bodies and head, after an vglie maner, and so they consulted with him. The answer he made, was commonly like vnto a fearefuU hissing, or to a gnashing which did terrific them ; and all that he did ad- vertise or command them, was but the way to their perdi- tion and ruine. There are few of these Oracles found now,

r

through the mercy of God, and great powre of lesus

^hrist. There hath beene in Peru another Temple and

1 Oratorio, most esteemed, which was in the Cittie of Cusco,

' where at this day is the monasterie of Santo Domingo. We

r may see it hath been a goodly and a stately worke by the

y\/^ pavement and stones of the building, which remaine to this

o ^ ^ / day. This Temple was like to the Pantheon of the Eomans,

for that it was the house and dwelling of all the gods ; for the Kings Yncas did there behold the gods of all the Nations and provinces they had conquered, every Idoll having his private place, whither they of that Province came to worship it with an excessive charge of things which they brought for his service. And thereby they supposed to keep safely in obedience those Provinces which

they had conquered, holding their gods as it were in hostage.

In this same house was the Punchao,^ which was an Idoll of the Sunne, of most fine gold, wrought with great riches of

^ Punchau, the day; hence the Sun.

TEMPLE OF MEXICO. 327

stoneSj the which was placed to the East, with so great Art, as the sun at its rising did cast his beames thereon : and as it was of most fine mettall, his beames did reflect with such a brightnes that it seemed another Sunne. The Tncas did worship this for their God, and the Pachayacha,^ which signifies the Creator of heaven. They say, that at the spoile of this so rich a Temple, a souldier had for his part this goodly plate of gold of the Sunne. And as play was then in request he lost it all in one night at play, whence come the proverb they have in Peru for great gamesters, saying that they play the Sunne before it riseth.^

Lib. v.

Chap. xiii. — Of the Prowd Temples at Mexico.

The Superstitions of the Mexicaines have without com- / parison been greater than the rest, as well in their cere- monies as in the greatnes of their Temples, the which in old time the Spaniards called by this word Cu, which word might bee taken from the Ilanders of Santo Domingo, or of Cuba, as many other wordes that are in vse, the which are neyther from Spaine nor from any other language now vsuall among the Indians, as is Mays, Chico, Vaquiano, Chapeton, and other like. There was in Mexico, this Cu, the famous Temple of Vitziliputzli ; it had a very great circuite and within a. faire Court. It was built of great stones, in fashion of snakes tied one to another, and the circuite was called Coatepantli, which is a circuite of snakes ; vppon the toppe of every chamber and oratorie where the IdoUs were, was a fine piller wrought with small stones, blacke as iette, set in goodly order, the ground raised vp with white and red, which below gave a great light ; vpon the top of the pillar were battlements very artificially made, wrought like snails,

» Pacha-yachachic, " The teacher of the universe".

" Mancio Serra de Leguisamo. See G, de la Vega^ i, p. 272, and note.

328 TEMPLE Of MEXICO.

^"- ^- ! supported by two Indians of stone, sitting, holding candle - I sticks in their hands^ the which were like Oroisants gar- nished and enriched at the ends with yellow and green feathers and long fringes of the same. Within the circuite of this court there were many chambers of religious men, and others that were appointed for the service of the Priests and Popes, for so they call the soveraigne Priests which serve the IdoU. This Court is so great and spatious, as eight or ten thousand persons did dance easily in round holding hands, the which was an vsuall custome in that Realme, although it seeme to many incredible.

There were foure gates or entries, at the Bast, West, North, and South, at every one of these gates beganne a faire cawsey of two or three leagues long. There was in the midst of the Lake where the Cittie of Mexico is built foure large cawseies in crosse, which did much beautifie it, vpon every portall or entery was a God or IdoU, having the visage turned to the causey right against the Temple gate of Vitziliputzli. There were thirtie steppes of thirtie fadome long, and they divided from the circuit of the court by a streete that went betwixt them ; vpon the toppe of these steppes there was a walke of thirtie foote broad, all plaistered with chalk e, in the midst of which walke was a Pallisado artificially made of very high trees, planted in order a fadome one from another. These trees were very bigge, and all pierced with small holes from the foote to the top, and there were roddes did runne from one tree to apother, to the which were chained or tied many dead mens heads. Vpon every rod were twentie seniles, and these ranckes of seniles continue from the foote to the toppe of the tree. This Pallissado was full of dead mens sculls from one end to the other, the which was a wonderful! mournefull sight and full of horror. These were the heads of such as had beene sacrificed; for after they were dead, and had eaten the flesh, the head was delivered to the Ministers of

\

\

TEMPLES IN MEXICO. 329

the Temple, which tied them in this sort vntill they fell oflF by morcells, and then had they a care to set others in their places. Vpon the toppe of the Temple were two stones or chappells, and in them were the two IdoUs which I have spoken of^ Vitziliputzli and his companion Tlalot. These Chappells were carved and graven very artificially, and so high that to ascend vp to it there was a staire of stone of sixscore steppes. Before these Chambers or Chappells there was a Court of fortie foote square, in the midst whereof was a high stone of five hand breadth, poynted in fashion of a Pyramide; it was placed there for the sacri- ficing of men, for being laid on their backes it made their bodies to bend, and so they did open them and pull out their hearts, as I shall show heereafter. There were in the Cittie of Mexico eight or nine other Temples, the which were ioyned one to another within one great circuite and had their private staires, their courts, their chambers, and their dortoires. The entries of some were to the East, some to the West, others to the South, and some to the North. All these Temples were curiously wrought, and compassed in with divers sortes of battlements and pictures, with many figures of stones, being accompanied and fortefied with great and large spurres or platformes. They were dedicated to divers gods ; but next to the Temple of Vitz- iliputzli was that of Tescalipuca, which was the god of penaunce and of punishments, very high and well built.

There were foure steps to ascend, on the toppe. was a flat or table of sixe score foote broad, and ioyning vnto it was a hall hanged with tapistry and curtins of diverse colours and works. The doore thereof being low and large was alwayes covered with a vaile, and none but the priests might enter in. All this Temple was beutified with diverse images and pictures most curiously ; for that these two Temples were as the cathedrall churches, and the rest in respect of them as parishes and hermitages ; they were so spatious and had

Lib. t.

330 MEXICAN PRIESTS.

^"- ^- 30 many chambers, that there were in them places for the ministerie, colleges, schooles, and houses for priests, whereof wee will intreate heereafter. This may suffice to conceive the devills pride and the misery of this wretched nation, who with so great expence of their goods, their labour, and their lives, did thus serve their capitall enimy, who pre- tended nothing more than the destruction of their soules and consumption of their bodies. But yet they were well pleased, having an opinion in their so great an error that they were great and mighty gods to whome they did these services.

[ Chap. xiv. — Of the Priestes and their offices.

We find among all the nations of the world, men specially dedicated to the service of the true God, or to the false, which serve in sacrifices, and declare vnto the people what their gods command them. Ther was in Mexico a strange

, curiositie vpon this point. And the devill counterfeiting the vse of the Church of God, hath placed in the order of his Priests, some greater or superiors, and some lesse, the one as Acolites, the other as Levites, and that which hath made me most to woonder, was, that the devil would vsurpe

^ to himselfe the service of God ; yea and vse the same name : for the Mexicaines in their antient tongue called their hie Priests Papes, as they should say soveraigne Bishops, as it appeares now by their Histories. The Priests of Vitzliputzli succeeded by linages of certaine quarters of the Citty, de- puted for that purpose, and those of other idolls came by election, or being offered to the temple in their infancy. The dayly exercise of the Priestes was to cast incense on the idoUes, which was doone foure times in the space of a naturall day. The first at breake of day, the second at noone, the third at Sunne setting, and the fourth at mid- night. At midnight all the chiefe officers of the Temple did

MEXICAN PRIESTS. 331

rise, and in steade of bells, they sounded a long time vpon ^"- ^-

trumpets, cornets and flutes very heavily ; which being

ended, he that did the oflSce that weeke stept foorth attyred

in a white roabe after the Dalmatike manner, with a censor

in his hand full of coales, which he tooke from the harth

burning continually before the Altare; in the other hand

he had a purse full of incense, which he cast into the censor,

and as he entred the place where the idoll was, he incensed

it with great reverence, then tooke he a cloth, with the

which he wiped the Altar and the curtins. This doone, they

went all into a Ohappell, and there did a certaine kinde of

rigorous and austere penaunce, beating themselves, and

drawing of blood, as I shall shew in the treatise of Penance

which the Divell hath taught to his creatures ; and heereof

they never fayled at these Mattins at Midhight. None other

but the Priestes might entermeddle with their sacrifices,

and every one did imploy himselfe according to his dignity

and degree. They did likewise pi^ach to the people at some

feastes, as I will shew when we treate thereof. They had

revenues, and great ofierings were made vnto them. I will

speake heereafter of their vnction in Consecrating their -

Priestes. In Peru the Priestes were entertained of the

revenues and inheritance of their God, which they called

Chacaras, which were many and also verie rich.

Chap. xv. — Of the monastery^of Virgins which the divell hath

invented for his service.

As the religious life, (whereof many servants of God have made profession in the holy Church, immitating lesus Christ and his holy Apostles) is very pleasing in the sight of his divine maiesty, by the which his holy Name is so honoured, and his Church beutified : So the father of lies hath laboured to imitate and counterfeit him heerein; yea, as it were, hath striven with God in the observance and austere life of

332 SELECTED VIRGINS IN PERU.

Lib. v. jjig ministers. jThere were in Peru many monasteries of Virgines (for there are no other admitted), at the least one in everie Province. In these monasteries there were two sortes of women, one antient, which they called Mamaco- mas,^ for the instruction of the yoong ; and the other was of yoong maidens, placed there for a certaine time, and after they were drawn foorth, either for their gods or for the Ynca. They called this house or monastery Acllaguagi,^ which is to say, the house of the chosen. Every monastery , had his Vicar or Governour called Appopanaca,^ who had liberty and power to choose whome he pleased, of what qualitie soever, being vnder eyght yeares of age, if they seemed to be of a good stature and constitution.

These Virgines thus shut vp into these monasteries were instructed by the Mamacomas in diverse thinges needefull for the life of man, and in the customes and ceremonies of their gods ; and afterwards they tooke them from thence, being above foureteene, sending them to the Court with sure- gards, whereof some were appoynted to serve the Guacas and Sanctuaries, keeping their virginities for ever: spme others were for the ordinary sacrifices that were made of maidens, and other extraordinary sacrifices, they made for the health, death, or warres of the Ynca: and the rest served for wives and concubines to the Ynca, and vnto other his kinsfolkes and captaines, vnto whome hee gave them, which was a great and honourable recompence : This dis- tribution was vsed every yeare. These monasteries pos- sessed rents and revenues for the maintenaunce of these Virgins, which were in great numbers. It was not lawfuU for any father to refuse his daughters when the Appopanaca

» Mama-cuna^ " Mothers". Cuna is the plural particle.

• Aclla^ selected or chosen ; Huasi^ a house.

• Apu^ chief j Panaca, from Pana, which means the sister of a brother.

Panaca is the archaic genitive. Apu-panaca is literally " the chief over sisters of the brethren". The Apu-panaca was the official who selected the virgins, one over every Hunu or 10,000 souls.

SACRED VIRGINS IN MEXICO. 333

required them for the service of these monasteries. Tea, ^"' ^' many fathers did willingly oflFer their daughters, supposing it was a great merit to be sacrificed for the Ynca. If any of these Momacomas or Acllas were found to have trespassed against their honour, it was an inevitable chasticement to ,

bury them alive, or to put them to death by some other kind of cruell torment.

The devill hath even in Mexico had some kind of religious x women, although their profession was but for one yeare, and it was in this sorte : Within this great circuit whereof we have spoken, which was in the principall temple, there were two houses like cloysters, the one opposite to the other, one of men, the other of women : In that of women, they were virgines onely, of twelve or thirteene yeares of age, which they called the Maydes of Penaunce. They were as many as the men, and lived chastly and regularly, as virgins dedicated to the service of their god. Their charge was, to sweepe and make cleane the temple, and every morning to prepare meate for the idoU and his ministers, of the almes the religious gathered. The foode they prepared for the idoU were small loaves in the forme of handes and feete, and others twisted as marchpane;^ and with this bread they prepared cer- taine sawses, which they cast dayly before the idoll, and his priests did eate it, as those of Baal, that Daniel speaketh of. Dan. xiv. These virgins had their haire cutte, and then they let them growe for a certaine time : they rose at midnight to the idolls mattins, which they dayly celebrated, performing the same exercises the religious did. They had their Abbesses, who imployed them to make cloth of diverse fashions for the ornament of their idolls and temples. Their ordinary habite was all white, without any worke or colour. They did their penance at midnight, sacrificing and wounding themselves, and, piercing the toppe of their eares, they layde the blood which issued foorth vpon their cheekes ; and after, to wash

^ Melcochas, honey cakes.

Lib. v.

334 SACRED VIRGINS.

off the blood, they bathed themselves in a pool, which was within their monastery. They lived very honestly and dis- creetly ; and if any were found to have offended, although, but lightly, presently they were put to death without re- mission, saying, shoe had polluted the house of their god. They helde it for an augure and advertisement, that some one of the religious, man or woman, had committed a fault when they saw a Ratte or a Mowse passe, or a Bat in the chappell of their idoll, or that they had gnawed any of the vailes ; for that they say a Catte or a Bat would not adven- ture to committe such an indignity, if some offence had not gone before, and then they beganne to make search of the fact, and having discovered the offender or offenders, of what quality soever, they presently put them to death.

None were receyved into this monastery but the daughters of one of the sixe quarters, named for that purpose : and this profession continued, as I have sayd, the space of one whole yeare: during the which time, their fathers, and they themselves, had made a vowe to serve the idoll in this man- ner, and from thence they went to be married. These virgins of Mexico, and more especially they of Peru, had some re- semblance to the Vestall Virgins of Ronre, as the Histories shew, to the end wee may vnderstand how the devill hath desired to be served by them that observe Virginitie, not that chastitie is pleasing vnto him, for he is an vncleane spirite, but for the desire he hath to take from the great God, as much as in him lieth, this glory to be served with cleannesse and integrity.

Chap. xvi. — Of the Monasteries of religious men that the devill hath invented for sujperstition.

It is well knowne, by Letters written by the fathers of our company from lappon, the number aud multitude of religious men that are in those Provinces, whome they call

MONKS IN CHINA AND MEXICO. 335

Bonqos, and also their superstitions, custoraes^ and lies. ^"' ^' Some fathers that have been in those countries report of these Bon50S and religious men of China, saying, that there are many Orders, and of diverse sortes, some came vnto them clad in white, bearing hoodes, and others all in blacke, without haire or hoode, and these are commonly little esteemed, for the Mandarins or ministers of Justice whippe them, as they do the rest of the people. They make pro- fession not to eate any flesh, fish, nor any thing that hath life, but onely Eice and hearbes ; but in secret they do eate any thing, and are worse than the common people. They say the religious men which are at the Court, which is at Paquin,^ are very much esteemed. The Mandarins go com- monly to recreate themselves at the Varelas^ or monasteries of these Menkes, and returne in a manner alwayes drunke. These monasteries commonly are without the townes, and have temples within their close : yet, in China they are not greatly curious of idolles, or of temples, for the Mandarins little esteeme idolls, and do hold it for a vaine thing, and worthy to be laughed at; yea, they beleeve there is no other life, nor Paradice, but to be in the office of the Man- darins, nor any other hel than the prisons they have for offendours. As for the common sorte, they say it is neces- sary to entertaine thean with idolatry, as the Philosopher ^™^ J"» himself teacheth his Governors : and in the Scripture it was an excuse which Aaron gave for the idol of the Calfe, that ^J^fJ'^ he caused to be made ; yet the Chinois vsed to carry in the poupe of their shippes, in little chapels, a virgin imbosst, set in a chaire witlj two Chinois before her kneeling in manor of Angels, having a light burning there both day and night. And when they are to sette saile they do many sacrifices and ceremonies, with a great noyse of drummes and bells, casting papers burnt at the poupe.

Comming to our religious men, I doe not knowe that in

> Peking. • 2 Viharas.

X2X11.

336 MEXICAN MONKS.

Lib, y. / pe^^ there is any proper houses for men, but for the , Priests and Sorcerers, whereof there is an infinite number. y' But it seemeth, that in Mexico the devil hath set a due ob- servation ; for within the circuit of the great temple there \were two monasteries, as before hath bin sayd, one of Vir- gins, whereof I have spoken, the other of yoong men se- cluded, of eighteen e or twenty yeares of age, which they called religious. They weare shaved crownes, as the Friars in these partes, their haire a little longer which fell to the middest of their eare, except the hinder part of the head, which they let growe the breadth of foure fingers downe to their shoulders, and which they tied vppe in tresses. These young men that served in the temple of Vitzliputzli lived poorely and chastely, and did the office of Levites, mini- string to the priests and chiefe of the temple their incense, lights, and garments; they swept and made cleane the holy places, bringing wood for a continual fire to the harth of their god, which was like a lampe that stille burnt before the Altar of their idoU. Besides these yong men there were other little boyes, as novices, that served for manuall vses, as to deck the temple with boughs, roses, and reeds, give the Priests water to wash with, give them their rasors to sacrifice, and goe with such as begged almes to carry it. All these had their superiors, who had the governement over them; they lived so honestly, as when they came in publike where there were any women, they carried their heads very lowe, with their eyes to the ground, not daring to beholde them ; they had linnen garments, and it was lawfull for them to goe into the Citty foure or sixe together, to aske almes in all quarters : and when they gave them none, it was lawful to go into the corne fields and gather the eares of corne or clusters of mays, which they most needed, the Maister not daring to speake nor hinder them. They had this liberty because they lived poorely, and had no other revenues but almes. There might not be above fifty live in penance.

PENANCS. 337

rising at midnight to sonnd the comets and tmmpets to ^^-^^ awake the people. Every one watched the idoll in his tame^ lest the fire before the Altar should die; they gave the censor^ with the which the Priest at midnight incensed the idoU^ and also in the morning, at noone, and at night. They were very subject and obedient to their superiors, and passed not any one poynt that was commaunded them. And at midnight, after the priest had ended his censing, they retired themselves into a secret place apart, sacrificing and drawing blood from the calfes of their legges with sharpe bodkins; with this blood they rubbed their temples and vnder their eares ; and, this sacrifice finished, they pre- sently washt themselves in a little poole appoynted to that end. These yong men did not annoint their heads and bodies with_any betun^ as the Priestes did ; their garments were of a coarse white linnen cloth they do make there. These exercises and strictnesse of penance continued a whole yeare, during which time they lived with great auste- ritie and solitarinesse. In truth it is very strange to see that this* false opinion of religion hath so great force among these yoong men and maidens of Mexico that they will serve the Divell with so great rigor and austerity, which many of vs doe not in the service of the most high God, the which is a great shame and confusion ; for those amongst vs that glory to have doone a small penaunce, although this exercise of the Mexicaines was not continually but for a yeare onely, which made it the more toUerable.

Chap. xvii. — Of Penance and the Strictnes the Indians have

vsed at the DivelVs perswasion.

Seeing we are come to this point, it shall bee good both to discover the cursed pride of Sathan and to confound it,

• Pitch, a coarse wax.

338 PENANCE OF MEXICAN PRIESTS.

Ln. T. and somewhat to quicken our coldnes and sloth in the ser-

vice of the great God ; to speake something of the rigor and strange penance this miserable people vsed at the DivelFs perswasion, like to the false Prophets of Baal, who did beate

3 Re?. and wound themselves with lancets, drawincr forth blond :

xviii. ^ ^ °

or, like those that sacrificed their sonnes and daughters Psai. or. vnto loathsomo Belphegor,^ passing them through the fire, as

4 Reg. xxi.' holy Writ testifieth ; for Sathan hath alwayes desired to be

served^ to the great hnrte and spoyle of man. ,It hath beene said that the priests and religious of Mexico rose at mid- nighty and having cast incense before the idoU, they retired \ themselves into a large place, where there were many lights ; 1 and, sitting downe, every one took a poynt of Maguay^^ I which is like vnto an awle or sharpe bodkin, with the which, ^j or with some other kindes of launcets or rasors, they pierced I the calfes of their legges neare to the bone, drawing foorth i much blood, with the which they annoynted their temples, I and dipt these bodkins or lancets in the rest of the blood, i then set they them vpon the battlements of the Court, ' stickt in gloabes or bowles of strawe, that all might see and know the penance they did for the people : they do wash oflf the blood in a lake appoynted for that purpose, which they call Ezapangue, which is to say water of blood.

There were in the Temple a great number of bodkins or lancets, for that they might not vse one twice. Moreover, these Priests and Eeligious men vsed great fastings, of five or ten daies together, before any of their great feastes, and they were vnto them as our foure ember weekes ; they were so strict in continence that some of them (not to fall into any sensualitie) slit their members in the midst, and did a thousand thinges to make themselves vnable, lest they should ofiend their gods. They drunke no wine and slept little, for that the greatest part of their exercises were by night, com-

> " Al suzio Beelfegor." ^ Maguey, Mexican aloe.

PBNANGfi OF PERUVUNS. 339

mitting great cruelties and martiring themselves fop the ^^•^- Divell, and all to be reputed great faaters and penitents.

They did vse to discipline themselves with cordes fnll of knottes^ and not they onely^ but the people also vsed this punishment and whipping in the procession and feast they made to the idoU Tezcatlipuca/ the which (as I have said before) is the god of penance ; for then they all carried in their hands new cordes of the threed'of Maguey a fadome long^ with a knot at the end, and therewith they whipped themselves, giving great lashes over their shoulders. The Priests did fast five daies together before this feast, eating , but once a day, and they lived apart from their wives, not going out of the Temple during those five daies; they did whip themselves rigorously in the manner aforesaid. The lesuites which have written from the Indies treate amply of the penances and exceeding rigor the Bonzes^ vse, all which was but counterfait, and more in shew then in trneth. In Peru, to solemnize the feast of the Ytu^ which was great, all the people fasted two daies; during the which they did not ac- company with their wives, neyther did they eate any meate with salt or axi,* nor drinke chicha. They did much vse this kinde of fasting for some sinnes, and did penance, whip- ping themselves with sharp stinging nettles, and often they strooke themselves over the shoulders with certain stones. This blinde nation, by the perswasion of the Divell, did transport themselves into craggy mountaines, where some- times they sacrificed themselves, casting themselves downe from some high rocke. All which are but snares and de- ceites of him that desires nothing more then the losse and mine of man.

' Tezcatlipoca was the most important of the Mexican gods. The prayers to him are given by Sahagon. His principal image was cut out of obsidian. > Bonzes, Buddhist Priests.

« Hatun is *' great" in Quichua. * Chile pepper.

z2

840 PBBUVUH SACBinCBS.

Chap, xviti. — Of the Sacrifices the Indians made to the Divell,

and whereof.

Lib. t. It hath beene in the aboundance and diversitie of Offringa and Sacrifices taught vnto the Infidells for their idolatrie, that the enemy of God and man hath most shewed his sub- tiltie and wickednes. - And as it is a fit thing and proper to religion to consume the substance of the creatures for the service and honour of the Creator, the which is by sacrifice, even so the father of lies hath invented the meanes to cause the creatures of God to be offered vnto him, as to the Author and Lord thereof. * The first kinde of sacrifices which men v%ed wa^ very simple; for Caine offered the fruites of the earth, and Abell the best of his cattell, the which likewise Gen. zy. ^oe and Abraham did afterwardes and the other patriarkes, vntil that this ample ceremony of Levi was given by Moses, wherein there are so many sortes and differences of sacrifices of divers things for divers affaires and with divers cere- monies. In like sort, among some nations, l^ee hath beeno content to teach them to sacrifice of what they had ; but, among others, hee hath passed farre^ givii^g them a multi- tude of customes and ceremonies vpon sacrifices, and so many observances as they are wonderfull. And thereby it appeares plainely that he meanes to contend and equall him- selfe to the ancient law, and in many things vsurpe the same y ceremonies. Wee may draw all the sacrifices the Infidells vse into three kindes — one of insensible things, another of beasts, and the third of men. They did vse in Peru to sacri- fice coca which is an hearb they esteeme much, of mays which is their wheate, of coloured feathers, and of chaquira^ which otherwise they call mollo? of shelles or oysters, and sometimes gold and silver being in figures of little beasts.

> Chaquira, See Cieza de Leon, pp. 176, 405 ; and G. de la Vega^ i, lib. VIII, cap. 5. • Mulhi^ Quichua for a shell.

PERUVUN SACRIFICES. 841

Also of the fine ptuflTe of Oumbij^ of carved and sweete wood, and most commonly tallow burnt. They made these offer- ings or sacrifices for a prosperous winde, and faire weather, or for their h.ealth, and to be delivered from some dangers and mishappes. Of the second kinde their ordinary sacri- fice was of OuyeSy^ which are small beasts like rabbets, the which the Indians eate commonly. And in matters of im- portance, or when they were rich men, they did offer Pacos^ or Indian sheepe bare or with wooll, observing curiously the numbers, colours, and times. The manner of killing their sacrifices, great or small, which the Indians did vse accord- ing to their ancient ceremonies, is the same the Moores vse at this day, the which they call Alquihle,^ hanging the beast by the right fore legge, turning his eyes towards the sun, speaking certain wordes according to the qualitie of the sacrifice they slew; for, if it were of colour, their words were directed to Chuquilla^ and to the Thunder, that they might want no water; if it were white and smoothe they did offer it to the Sunne with certain words ; if it had a fleece they did likewise offer it him with some others, that he might shine vpon them and favour their generation; if it were a OuanacOy which is gray, they directed their sacrifice to Viracocha. In Cusco they did every yeare kill and sacrifice with this ceremony a shorne sheepe to the Sunne, and did bume it, clad in a red waste-coate; and when they did bume it, they cast certaine small baskets of Coca into the fire, which they call Vilcaroncay for which sacrifice they have both men and beasts appointed which serve to no other vse. They did likewise sacrifice small birdes, although it were not so vsuall in Peru as in Mexico, where the sacrificing of

> Ccompi, Quichua for fine cloth. See G, de la Vega^ i, lib. v, cap. 6. « Cuy (for Ccoy)y a guinea pig. See G, de la Vega^ i, lib. vi, cap. 6.

• Alpacas.

• Kibla, the place to which Muhammadans look when praying.

• Chuquilla (Chuqui-ylla)^ the Peruvian god of thunder and lightning.

See Molina MS. {Laws attd Rites of the YncaSy pp. 26, 56, 155, 167).

UNlVLi.MXY j

ha. T.

342 PERUVIAN SAOBIFICES.

^^- ^- quailes was very ordinarie. Those of Peru did sacrifice the birdes of the Puna, for so they call the desart, when they should go to the warres, for to weaken the forces of their adversaries Huacas. They called these sacrifices Guzcovicsa, or Contevicsa, or ffuallavicsa, or Sopavicsa, and they did it in this manner : they tooke many kindes of small birdes of the desart, and gathered a great deale of a thomie wood, which they called Yanlli, the which being kindled they gathered together these small birdes. This assembly they called Quiso. Then did they cast them into the fire, about the which the officers of the sacrifice went with certaine round stones carved, whereon were painted many snakes, lions, toades, and tigres, vttering this word Vsachum} which signifies, let the victorie be given vnto vs, with other wordes, whereby they sayed the forces of their enemies Huacas were confounded. And they drew forth certaine black sheepe, which had beene kept close some daies without meate, the which they called Vrcu,^ and in killing them they spake these words: ^^As the hearts of these beasts be weakened, so let our enemies be weakned/' And if they found in these sheep that a certaine peece of flesh behind the heart were not con- sumed by fasting and close keeping, they then held it for an ill augure. They brought certaine black dogs, which they call ApuTucos^ and slew them, casting them into a plaine with certaine ceremonies, causing some kinde of men to eate this flesh, the which sacrifices they did lest the Ynca should be hurt by poison j and for this cause they fasted from morn- ing vntill the stars were vp, and then they did glut and de- file themselves like to the Moores. This sacrifice was most fit for them to withstand their enemies gods ; and, although at this day a great part of these customes have ceased, the wars being ended, yet remaines there some relikes by reason of the private or generall quarrels of the Indians, or the

> From Usachuni^ I accomplish. « The male animal.

^ Apu^ chief. Ruccu, old or decrepid. In Quichua allco is a dog.

PBBUVIAN SACBIFICE8. 343

Caciques^ or in their citties. They did likewise offer and ^»- ^- sacrifice shelles of the sea which they call Mollo^ and they offered them to the foantaines and springs, saying that these shells were daughters of the sea^ the mother of all waters. They gave vnto these shells sandrie names according to the color, and also they vse them to divers ends. They vsed them in a manor in all kinde of sacrifices^ and yet to this day they put beaten shells in their Ghicha for a superstition. Finally they thought it convenient to offer sacrifices of everything they did sow or raise vp. There were Indians appointed to doe these sacrifices to the fountaines, springs^ and rivers, which passed through the townes or by their Chacras, which are their farmes, which they did after seede time, that they might not cease running, but alwaies water their groundes. The sorcerers did coniure to know what time the sacrifices should be made, which, being ended, they did gather of the contribution of the people what should be sacrificed and delivered them to such as had the charge of these sacrifices. They made them in the beginning of win- ter, at such time as the fountaines, springs, and rivers did increase by the moistures of the weather, which they did attribute to their sacrifices. They did not sacrifice to the fountaines and springs of the desarts. To this day con- tinues the respect they had to fountaines, springs, pooles, brookes, or rivers which passe by their citties or chacras, even vnto the fountaines and rivers of the desarts. They have a speciall regard and reverence to the meeting of two rivers, and there they wash themselves for their health, anointing themselves first with the flower of mays, or some other things, adding therevnto divers ceremonies, the which they do likewise in their bathes.

» Mullu, a shell.

344 HUMAN SACRIFICES.

Chap, xix — Of the Sacrifices they made of men,

^'•^' The most pittifuU disaster of this poore people is their ^ slavery vnto the Devill, sacrificing men vnto him, which are the Images of God. In many nations they had vsed to kill (to accompany the dead, as hath beene declared) such per- sons as had been agreeable vnto him, and whome they imagined might best serve him in the other world. Besides this, they vsed in Peru to sacrifice yong children of foure or siz yeares old vnto tenne; and the greatest parte of these sacrifices were for the affaires that did import the Ynca, as in sickness for his health, and when he went to the warres for victory, or when they gave the wreathe to their new Ynca, which is the marke of a King, as heere the Scepter and the Growne be. In this solemnitie they sacrificed the number of two hundred children, from foure to ten yeares of age, which was a cruell and inhumane spectacle. The manner of the sacrifice was to drowne them and bury them with certaine representations and ceremonies; sometimes they cutte off their heads, annointing themselves with the blood from one eare to another.

They did . likewise sacrifice Virgines, some of them that were brought to the Ynca from the monasteries, as hath beene saide. In this* case there was a very great and generall abuse. If any Indian qualified or of the common sorte were sicke, and that the Divine told him confidently that he should die, they did then sacrifice his owne sonne to the Sunne or to Yirachoca, desiring them to be satisfied with him, and that they would not deprive the father of life. This cruelty is like to that the holy Scripture speakes of, which King Moab vsed in sacrificing his first borne sonne vpon the wall in the sight of all Israel, to whome this act seemed so mournfuU as they would not presse him any further, but returned to their houses. The Holy Scripture

MBXTCAK HUMAN 8ACBIFICE8. 345

also shewes that the like kinde of sacrifice had been in yse ^"' ^'

amongst the barbarous nations of the Gananeans^ and lebu- seans^ and others, whereof the booke of Wisedome speakes:

• ^ They call it peace to live in so great miseries and vexa-

tions as to sacrifice their own children, or to doe other hid- den sacrifices^ as to watch whole nights doing the actes of fooles^ and so they keepe no cleanenesse in their life, nor i.n their marriages, but one through envy takes away the life of another, another takes away his wife and his content- ment, and all is in confusion, blood, murther, theft, deceipt, corruption, infidelitie, seditions, periuries, mutinies, forget- fulnesse of God, pollution of soules, change of sexes and birth, inconstancie of marriages, and the disorder of adul- tery and filthiness; for idolatry is the sincke of all miseries/' The Wise man speaketh this of those people of whome David Psai. cr. complaines, that the people of Israel had learned those cus- tomes, even to sacrifice their sonnes and daughters to the divell, the which was never pleasing nor agreeable \Tito God. For as bee is the Authour of life, and hath made all these things for the commoditie and good of man, so is hee not pleased that men should take the lives one from another; although the Lord did approve and accept the willingnesse of the faithfuU patriarke Abraham, yet did hee not consent to the deede, which was to cut off the head of his sonne; wherein wee see the malice and tyranny of the divell, who would be herein as God, taking pleasure to be worshipt with the effusion of man's blood, procuring by this meanes the ruine of soule and body together for the deadly hatred he beareth to man as his cruell enemy .^

^ See, on the eubject of Peruyian human sacrifices, the yolume on Laws and Rites of the Yncas^ pp. 64, 58, 79, 85, 100, 166. See also my note on the subject in G. de la Vega, i, p. 139.

346 MEXICAN HUMAN SACRIFICES.

Chap. xx..'^Of the horrible sacrificeB of men which the Mexi-

eames vsed.

Lib. t. / Although they of Peru have surpassed the Mexicaines in the slaughter and sacrifice of their children (for I have not read nor ynderstood that the Mexicaines vsed any such sacrifices), yet they of Mexico have exceeded them, yea, all the nations of the worlde, in the great number of men

Lwhich they had sacrificed, and in the horrible maner thereof. And to the end we may see the great miserie wherein the Divell holdes this blind Nation, 1 wil relate particularly the custome and inhumane maner which they have observed. First, the men they did sacrifice were taken in the warres, ney ther did they vse these solemne sacrifices but of Captives : so as it seemes therein they have followed the custome of the Ancients. For as some Authors say they called the sacrifice Victima, for this reason, because it was of a con- quered thing : they also called it Hostia quasi ab hoste, for that it was an offering made of their enemies, although they have applied this word to all kindes of sacrifices. In

/ truth the Mexicaines did not sacrifice any to their idolls, but Captives, and the ordinarie warres they made was onely to have Captives for their sacrifices : and therefore when they did fight they laboured to take their enemies alive, and not to kill them, to inioy their sacrifices. And this was the reason which Mote^uma gave to the Marquis del Valle,^ when he asked of him why being so mighty, and having con- quered so many kingdomes, hee had not subdued the Pro- vince of Tlascalla, which was so neere : Motequma answered him that for two reasons hee had not conquered that Pro- vince, although it had beene easie if he would have vnder- taken it : the one was for the exercise of the youth of

' The title conferred upon Hernan Cortes.

HBXICAN HUMAN SACRIFICES. 847

Mexico, lest they shonld fall into idlenes and delight : the ^"- ^- other and the chiefe cause why he had reserved this Pro- vince was to have Captives for the sacrifices of their gods. The maner they vsed in these sacrifices was, they assem- bled within the palisado of dead mens seniles (as hath * beene said), snch as should be sacrificed, vsing a certaine ceremony at the foot of the palisado, placing a great guard about them. Presently there stept foorth a Priest, attyred with a shorte surplise full of tasselles beneath, who came from the top of the temple with an idoll made of paste, of wheate and mays mingled with hony, which had the eyes made of the graines of greene glasse, and the teeth of the graines of mays ; hee descended the steppes of the temple with all the speede he could, and mounted on a great stone planted vpon a high terrasse in the midst of the court. This stone was called Quauxicalli, which is to say the stone of Eagle, whereon he mounted by a little ladder, which was in the fore part of the terrase, and descended by an other staire on the other side, still embracing his idoll. Then did he mount to the place where those were that should be sacrificed, shewing this idoll to every one in particular, saying vnto them this is your god. And having ended his shew, he descended by the other side of the staires, and all such as should die went in procession vnto the place where they should be sacrificed, where they found the Ministers ready for that oflice. The ordinary manner of sacrificing was to open the stomake of him that was sacrificed, and having pulled out his heart halfe alive, they tumbled the man downe the staires of the Temple, which were all im- brewed and defiled with blood. And to make it the more plaine, sixe sacrificers beeing appoynted to this dignitie, came into the place of sacrifice, foure to holde the hands and feete of him that should be sacrificed, the fift to holde his head, and the sixt to open his stomacke, and to pull out the heart of the sacrificed. They called them Chachalmua,

348 MEXICAN HUMAN SACBiriCES.

^^- ^- which in our tong is as much as the ministers of holy things. It was a high dignitie^ and much esteemed amongest them, wherein they did inherite and succede as in a fee simple. The minister who had the office to kill^ which was

• the sizt amongest them^ was esteemed and honoured as the

soveraigne Priest and Bishop, whose name was different^ according to the difference of times and solemnities. Their habites were likewise divers when they came foorth to the sacrifice^ according to the diversitie of times. The name of their chiefe dignitie was Papa and Topilzin ;^ their habite and robe was a red curtain^ after the Dalmatica fashion^ with tasselles belowe^ a crowne of rich feathers^ greene^ white^ and yellow vpon his head^ and at his eares like pendants of golde^ wherein were set greene stones^ and vnder the lip^ vpon the middest of the beard, hee had a peece like vnto a small canon of an azured stone. These sacrificers came with their faces and handes coloured with a shining blacke. The other five had their haire much curled^ and tied vp with laces of leather bound about the middest of the head : vpon their forehead they carried small roundelets of paper, painted with diverse colours, and they were attired in a Dalmatica robe of white, wroght with blacke. With this attire they represented the very figure of the Divell, so as it did strike feare and terror into all the people to see them come forth with so horrible a representation. The soveraigne priest carried a great knife in his hand of a large and sharpe fiint : another priest carried a coUer of wood, wrought in forme of a snake : all sixe put themselves in order, ioyning to this Piramidall stone whereof I have spoken, being directly against the doore of the Chappell of their idoU. This stone was so pointed as the man which was to be sacrificed being laid thereon vpon his backe did bend in such sort as letting the knife but fall vpon his stomacke it opened very easily in the middest. When

1 Topiltzin, the chief sacrificial priest.

MEXICAN HUMAN SACRIFICES. 349

tho sacrificers were thus in order they drew forth such a$ ^■- ^• had beene taken in warre^ which were to be sacrificed at that feast^ and being accompanied with a guard of men all naked they caused them to mount vp these large staires in ranke to the place where the Ministers were prepared: and as every one of them came in their order, the six sacrificers tooke the prisoner, one by one foote another by the other, and one by one hand another by the other, casting him on bis backe vpon this pointed stone, where the fift of these Ministers put the coUer of wood about his necke, and the high priest opened his stomacke ?nth the knife, with a strange dexteritie and nimblenes, pulling but his heart with his hands, the which he shewed smoaking ynto the Sunne, to whom he did ofier this heate and fume of the heart, and presently he turned towardes the idoll, and did cast the heart at his face, then did they cast away the body of the sacrificed, tumbling it downe the staires of the Temple, the stone being set so neere the staires as there were not two foote space betwixt the stone and the first steppe, so as with one spume with their foote they cast the body from the toppe to the bottome. In this sort one after one they did sacrifice all those that were appointed. Being thus slain, and their bodies cast downe, their masters, or such as had taken them, went to take them vp and carried them away : then having divided them amongest them they did eate them, celebrating their feast and solemnitie. There were ever forty or fifty at the least thus sacrificed, for that they had men very expert in taking them.' The neighbour Nations did the like, imitating the Mexicaines in the customes and ceremonies of the service of their gods.

350 KEXICAN HITMAN 8A0BIFICES.

Chap. xxi. — Of another hind of sacrifices of men which the

Mexicaines vsed.

Lib. t. There was an other kinde of sacrifice which they made in divers feasts, which they called Bacaxipe Velitzli, which is as much as the fleaing of men.^ They call it so for that in some feasts they tooke one or more slaves as they pleased, and after they had flead him they with that skinne appa- relled a man appoynted to that end. This man went dauncing and leaping thorow all the houses and market places of the cittie, every one being forced to oflTer some- thing vnto him : and if any one failed hee would strike him over the face with a comer of the skinne, defyling him with the congealed blood. This invention continued vntill the skinne did stinke : during which time, such as went gathered together much almes, which they imployed in necessary things for the service of their gods. In many of these feasts they made a challenge betwixt him that did sacrifice and him that should be sacrifyced thus : they tied the slave by one foote to a wheele of stone, giving him a sword and target in his handes to defend himselfe: then presently stept foorth hee that sacrificed him, armed with another sword and target : if he that should be sacrificed defends himselfe valiantly against the other, and resisted him, hee then remayned freed from the sacrifyce, winning the name of a famous Captaine, and so was reputed : but if hee wore vanquished they .then sacrifyced him on the stone where- vnto he was tyed. It was an other kinde of sacrifyce, whenas they appoynted any slave to be the representation of the idoll, saying that it was his picture. They every yeare gave one slave to the Priests, that they might never want the lively image of their idoll. At his fyrst entry into the oflice, after hee had beene well washed, they attyred

> Xipeme means flayed.

PEOPLE WEABT OF THE SACRIFICES. 851

him with all the ornaments of the idoll, giving him the tw. t. same name. Hee was that whole yeare reverenced and honoured as the idoll itselfe, and had alwayes with him twelve men for his guarde^ lest hee should flie^ with which guarde they suffered him to goe freely, and where hee would : and if by chaunce he fled, the chiefe of the guarde was put in his place to represent the idoll, and after to be sacrificed.

This Indian had the most honourable lodging in all the temple, where he did eate and drincke, and whither all the chiefe Ministers came to serve and honour him, carrying him meate after the manner of great personages. When hee went through the streetes of the citie hee was well accompanyed with noble men ; he carried a little flute in his hand, which sometimes he sounded, to give them knowledge when he passed. Then presently the women came forth with their little children in their arms, which they presented vnto him, saluting him as god. All the rest of the people did the like : at night they put him in a strong prison or cage, lest he should flie; and when the feast came they sacrificed him, as hath beene sayde. By these and manie other meanes hath the Divell abused and entertained these poore wretches, and such was the multitude of those that had beene sacrificed by this infernall cruelty as it seems a matter incredible, for they aflSrme there were some dayes five thousand or more, and that there were above twenty thousand sacrifyced in diverse places. The divell to inter- taine this murther of men, vsed a pleasant and strange in- vention, which was, when it pleased the priests of Sathan they went to their Kings, telling them how their gods died for hunger, and that they should remember them. Presently they prepared themselves, and advertised one another that their gods required meate, and therefore they should com- mand their people to be ready to goe to the warres ; and thus the people assembled, and the companies appoynted

352 ABOLITION OF THE SACRIFICES.

^^' "^^ went to field, where they mnstred their forces ; and all their

quarrell and fight was to take one another for sacrifice,

striving on eith^^ side to take what captives they could, so as in these battells they laboured tnore to take then to kill^ for that all their intention was to take men alive, to give them to their idoUs to eate, for after that manor brought they their sacrifice vnto their gods. And wee must vnder- stand that never king was crowned vntill he had subdewed some province, from the which hee brought a great number of captives for the sacrifices of their gods, so as it was an infinit thing to see what blood was spilt in the honour of the Divell.

Chap, xxii. — How the Indians grew weary and could not

endure the cruelty of Sathan.

Many of these Barbarians were nowe wearied and tyred with such an excessive cruelty in sheading so much blood, and with so tedious a tribute to be alwayes troubled to get captives for the feeding of their gods, seeming vnto them a matter supportable; yet left they not to foUowe and execute their rigorous lawes, for the great awe the ministers of these idols kept them in and the cunning wherewith they abused this poore people. But inwardly they desired to be freed from so heavy a yoke. And it was a great providence of God that the first which gave them knowledge of the Lawe of Christ found them in this disposition; for, without doubt, it seemed to them a good law and a good God to be served in this sorte. Heerevpon a grave religious man in New Spain told me that when he was in that country hee had demaunded of an auntient Indian, a man of qualitie, for what reason the Indians hadde so soone received the Lawe of lesus Christ and left their owne, without making any other proofe, triall, or dispute thereon, for it seemed they

A60UTI0N OF THB SACRIFICES. 353

had changed their religion without any sufficient reason to ^■* ^• moove them. The Indian answered him: "Beleeve not, Father, that we have embraced the Law of Christ so rashly as they say, for I will tell you that we were already weary and discontented with such things as the idolls commaunded Ys, and were determined to leave it and to take another Law. But whenas we found that the religion that you preached had no cruelties in it, and that it was fit for vs and both iust and good, we vnderstood and beleeved that it was the true Law, and so we received it willingly/^ Which answer of this Indian agrees well with that we read in the first Dis- course, that Femand Cortes sent to the Emperor Charles the Fift, wherein hee reportes that after he had conquered the city of Mexico, being in Cuyoacan^ there came Ambas- sadors to him from the province and commonwealth of Mechoacan, requiring him to send them his law and that he would teach them to vnderstand it, because they intended to leave their owne, which seemed not good vnto them, ' which Cortes graunted, and at this day they are the best Indians and the truest Christians that are in New Spaine. The Spaniards that saw these cruell sacrifices resolved with all their power to abolish so detestable and cursed a butcher- ing of men, and the rather for that in one night before their eies they sawe threiescore or threescore and tenne Spaniards sacrificed, which had beene taken in a battell given at the conquest of Mexico; and another time they found written with a cole in a chamber in Tezcuco these wordes: *^Here such a miserable man was prisoner with his companions whom they of Tezcuco did sacrifice/^

There happened a very strange thing vpon this subiect, and yet true, being reported by men worthie of credite; which was that the Spaniards beholding these sacrifices, having opened and drawne out the heart of the lustie yong man, and cast him from the toppe of the staires (as their custome was) when hee came at the bottome, he said to the

A A

354 THE PERUVIAN FEAST OF BATHI.

Lib. ▼. Spaniards in his language, "Knightes, they have slaine me/' the which did greatly moove our men to horror and pittie. It is no incredible thing that having his heart pulled out hee might speake, seeing that Galen reports that it hath often chanced in the sacrifice of beasts^ after the heart hath Gaien^iib. been drawne out and cast vpon the altar the beasts have

li, de Hip. ^

^iMJi^l**^"' breathed; yea, they did bray and cry out alowde, and some- ^^' *' times did runne. Leaving this question how this might be© in nature, I will follow my purpose, which is to shew hov? much these barbarous people did now abhorre this insuport- able slaverie they had to that infemall murthering^ and how great the mercy of the Lord hath beene vnto them, impart- ing his most sweete and agreeable law.

Chap, xziii. — How the Divell hath laboured to imitate and

m

counterfaite the Sacraments of the holy Church,

That which is most admirable in the hatred and presump- tion of Sathan is, that he hath not onely counterfaited in idolatry and sacrifices but also in certaine ceremonies our sacraments, which lesus Christ our Lord hath instituted and the holy Church doth vse, having especially pretended to imitate in some sort the Sacrament of the Communion^ which is the most high and divine of all others, for the great error of Infidells which proceeded in this maner. In the first moneth, which in Peru they called Rayme^ and answer- eth to our December, they made a most solemne feast called Capacrayme,^ wherein they made many sacrifices and cere- monies, which continued many daies, during the which no stranger was sufiered to bee at the Court, which was in Cusco. These daies being past, they then gave libertie to strangers to enter, that they might be partakers of the feastes and sacrifices, ministring to them in this maner.

^ Raymi was the month of June.

' Ccapac Raymi was the solstice of December.

PiERTJVIAN COMMUNION. 855

The Mamaconas of the Sutme, which were a kinde of ^"•^• Nunnes of the Sanne, made little loaves of the flower of/ Majs^ died and mingled with the bloud of white sheepe^ which they did sacrifice that day; then presently they com- manded that all strangers should enter^ who set themselves in order; and the Priests, which were of a certaine lineage, discending from Liuquiyupangui,^ gave to every one a mor- cell of these small loaves, saying vnto them that they gave these peeces to the end they should be vnited and confede- rate with the Ynca, and that they advised them not to speake nor thinke any ill against the Ynca, but alwaies to beare him good affection, for that this peece should be a witnesse of their intentions and will, and if they did not as they ought he would discover them and be against them. They carried these small loaves in great platters of gold and silver appointed for that vse, and all did receive and eate these peeces, thanking the Sunne infinitely for so great a favour which hee had done them, speaking wordes and making signes of great contentment and devotion; protest- ing that during their lives they would neither do nor thinke any thing against the Sunne nor the Ynca : and with this condition they received this foode of the Sunne, the which should remaine in their bodies for a witnesse of their fidelitie which they observed to the Sunne and to the Ynca their King. This manor of divelish communicating they likewise vsed in the tenth moneth called Coyarayme,^ which was Sep- tember, in the solemne feast which they called Oytua,^ doing the like ceremonies. And besides this communion (if it be lawfuU to vse this word in so divelish a matter) which they imparted to all strangers that came, they did likewise send of these loaves to all their Guacas, sanctuaries, or idolls, of the whole Realme; and at one instant they found people of all sides which came expresly to receive them, to whom they

» Lloque Yupanqui was the third sovereign of the Ynca dynasty.

• Ccoya Raymi. * Festival of Situa,

A A 2

Lib. v.

356 MEXICAN COMMUNION.

said (in delivering them) that the Snnne had sent them that in s\gne that hee wonld have them all to worship and honour ^

him^ and likewise did sende them in hononr of the Caciques. Some^ perhappes, will hold this for a fable and a fiction ; yet is it most true that, since the Ynca Yupangi (the which is hee that hath made most lawes^ customes, and ceremonies^ as Numa did in Rome), this manor of communion hath con- tinued vntill that the Gospel of our Lord lesus Christ thrust out all these superstitions, giving them the right foode of life, which vnites their soules to God. Whoso would satiafie himselfe more amply let him reade the relation which the Licentiate Pdo did write to Don leronimo de Loaysa^ Arch- bishop of the Cittie of Kings, where he shall finde this and many other things which he hath discovered and found out by his great dilligence.

Chap. xxiv. — In what maner the Divell hath laboured in

Mexico to counterfaite the feast of the holy Sacrament

and Communion vsed in the holy Church.

1

It is a thing more worthy admiration to heare speak of the Feast and solemnitie of the Communion which the Divel himselfe, the Prince of Pride, ordayned in Mexico, the which (although it bee somewhat long) yet shall it not be from the purpose to relate, as it is written by men of credite. The Mexicaines in the moneth of Maie made*their principall feast to their god Vitzilipuztli, and two daies before this feast, the Virgins whereof I have spoken (the which were shut vp and secluded in the same Temple and were as it were religious women) did mingle a quantitie of the seede of beetes with rested Mays, and then they did mould it with honie, making an idoU of that paste in big- nesse like to that of wood, putting insteede of eyes graines of greene glasse, of blue, or white; and for teeth graines of Mays set forth with all the ornament and furniture that I

MEXICAN COMMUNION. 357

have said. This being finished^ all the Noblemen came and ^"- ^• brought it an exquisite and rich garment^ like vnto that of the idol^ wherewith they did attyre it. Being thus clad and deckt^ they did set it in an azured chaire and in a litter to carry it on their shoulders. The morning of this feast being come^ an houre before day all the maidens came forth at- tired in white with new ornaments^ the which that day were called the Sisters of their god Yitzlipuztli^ they came crowned -with garlands of Mays rested and parched^ being like vnto azabar or the flower of orange; and about their neckes they had great chaines of the same^ which went bauldricke-wise vnder their left arme. Their cheekes were died with ver- iniUion, their armes from the elbow to the wrist were covered with red parrots' feathers. And thus attyred they tooke the idoU on their shoulders carrying it into the Court, where all the yoong men were attyred in garmentes of an artificiall red^ crowned after the same maner like vnto the women. When as the maidens came forth with the idoU the yong men drew neer with much reverence, taking the litter wherein the idoU was vpon their shoulders^ carrying it to the foote of the staires of the Temple^ where all the people did humble themselves, laying earth vpon their heads^ which was an ordinarie ceremonie which they did observe at the chiefe feast of their gods. This ceremony being ended, all the people went in procession with all the diligence and speede they could, going to a mountain, which was a league from the city of Mexico, called Chapultepec, and there they made sacrifices. Presently they went from thence with like dili- gence to go to a place neere vnto it which they called Atla- cuyauaya, where they made their second station; and from thence they went to another burgh or village a league be- yond Cuyoacan, from whence they parted, returning to the citie of Mexico, not making any other station. They went in this sort above foure leagues in three or foure houres, calling this procession Tpayna VitzlipuztlL Being come to

358 ' MEIICAN COMMUNION.

^^' ^* the foote of the staires they set downe the brancard or litter with the idoll^ tyiug great cordes to the armes of the bran- carde; then, with great observance and reverence, they did drawe vp the litter with the idoll in it to the top of the Templcj some drawing above and others helping belowe; in the meane time there was a great noise of fluites, trumpets^ coiiietSj and drummes. They did mount it in this manner^ for that the staires of the Temple were veiy steepe and narrow, so as they could not carry vp the litter vpon their shoulders, while they mounted vp the idoll all the people stoode in the Court with much reverence and feare. Being mounted to the top, and that they had placed it in a little lodge of roses which they held readie, presently came the yong men, which strawed many flowers of sundrie kindes, wherewith they filled the temple both within and without. This done all the Virgins came out of their convent, bring- ing peeces of paste compounded of beetes and rested Mays, which was of the same paste whereof their idoll was made and compounded, and they were of the fashion of great bones. They delivered them to the yong men, who carried them vp and laide them at the idolPs feete, wherewith they filled the whole place that it could receive no more. They called these morcells of paste the flesh and bones of Vitzilipuztli. Having layed abroade these bones, pre- sently came all the Ancients of the Temple, Priests, Levites, and all the rest of the Ministers, according to their dig- nities and antiquities (for heerein there was a strict order amongst them) one after another, with their vailes of diverse colours and workes, every one according to his dignity and office, having garlands vpon their heads and chaines of flowers about their neckes; after them came their gods and goddesses whom they worshipt, of diverse figures, attired in the same livery; then putting themselves in order about • those morsells and peeces of paste, they vsed certaine cere- monies with singing and dauncing. By meanes whereof

MEXICAN COMMUNION. 359

they were blessed and consecrated for the flesh and bones ^" ^* of this idolL

This ceremoDj and blessing (whereby they were taken for the flesh and bones of the idoU) being ended they honoured those peeces in the same sorte as their god. Then came foorth the sacriflcers^ who beganne the sacriflce of men in the manner as hath beene spoken^ and that day they did sacrifice a greater number than at any other time^ for that it was the most solemne feast they observed. The sacrifices being ended^ all the yoong men and maides came out of the temple attired as before^ and being placed in order and ranke^ one directly against another^ they daunced by drummes^ the which sounded in praise of the feast^ and of the idoU which they did celebrate. To which song all the most ancient and greatest noble men did answer, dauncing about them, making a great circle, as their vse is, the yoong men and maides remayning alwayes in the middest. All the citty came to this goodly spectacle, and there was a commaundement very strictly observed throughout all the land, that the day of the feast of the idoU Yitzilipuztli they should eate no other meate but this paste, with hony, whereof the idoU was made. And this should be eaten at the point of day, and they should drincke no water nor any other thing till after noone : they held it for an ill signe, yea, for sacrilege to doe the contrary : but after the cere- monies ended, it was lawfull for them to eate any thing. During the time of this ceremony they hid the water from their litle children, admonishing all such as had the vse of* reason not to drinke any water ; which, if they did, the anger of God would come vpon them, and they should die, which they did observe very carefully and strictly. The ceremonies, dancing, and sacrifice ended, they went to vn- clothe themselves, and the priests and superiors of the temple tooke the idoU of paste, which they spoyled of all the ornaments it had, and made many peeces, as well of the

360 MEXICAN COHMUNIOK.

LiB.v. j^qH itselfe a9 of the tronchons which were consecrated, and then they gave them to the people in manor of a com- munion, beginning with the greater, and continuing vnto the rest, both men, women, and little children, who received it with such teares, feare, and reverence as it was an ad- mirable thing, saying that they did eate the flesh and bones of God, wherewith they were grieved. Such as had any sicke folkes demaunded thereof for them, and carried it with great reverence and veneration.

All such as did communicate were bound to give the tenth of this seede, whereof the idoU was made. The solemnitie of the idoU being ended an olde man of great authoritie stept vp into a high place, and with a lowde voice preached their lawe and ceremonies. Who would not wonder to see the divell so curious to seeke to be worshipped and re- verenced in the same manor that lesus Christ our God hath appoynted and also taught, and as the Holy Church hath accustomed. Hereby it is plainely verified what was pro- pounded in the beginning, that Sathan strives all he can to vsurp and chalenge vnto himselfe the honor and service that is due to God alone, although he dooth still intermixe with it his cruelties and filthinesse, being the spirite of murther and vncleanenesse and the father of lies.

Chap. xxv. — Of Confessors and Confession which the Indians

vsed.

The father of lies would likewise counterfeit the sacra- ment of Confession, and in his idolatries seeke to be honored with ceremonies very like to the maner of Christians. In Peru they held opinion that all diseases and adversities came for the sinnes which they had committed, for remedy whereof they vsed sacrifices : moreover they confessed themselves verbally, almost in all provinces, and had Confessors ap- poynted by their superiors to that end, there were some

PERUVIAN CONFESSION. 361

sinnes reserved for the saperiors. They received penannce, ^"- ^• yea, sometimes very sharpely, especially when the o£fendor was a poore man, and had nothing to give his Confessor. This office of Confessor was likewise exercised by women. The manner of these confessors sorcerers, whom they call Ychuiri or Ychnri,^ hath beene most generall in the pro* vinees of CoUasuio.^ They holde opinion that it is a heinoas sinne to conceale any thing in confession. The Ychuyri or confessors discovered by lottos or by the view of some beast hides if anything were concealed, and punished them with many blowes with a stone vpon the shoalders, vntill they had revealed all : then after they gave him penaunce, and did sacrifice. They doe likewise vse this confession when their children, wives, husbands, or their Caciques be sicke, or in any great exploite. And when their Ynca was sicke all the provinces confessed themselves, chiefly those of the province of CoUao. The Confessors were bound to hold their confessions secret, but in certain cases limited. The sinnes that they chiefly confessed was first to kill one another out of warre, then to steale, to take another man's wife, to give poison or sorcery to doe any harme; and they helde it to be a grievous sinne to be forgetfuU in the rever- ence of their Guacas, or Oratories, not to observe the feasts, or to speake ill of the Ynca and to disobey him. They ac- cused not themselves of any secret actes and sinnes. But, according to the report of some Priests, after the Christians came into that countrey, they accused themselves of their thoughts. The Ynca confessed himselfe to no man, but onely to the Sunne, that hee might tell them to Virachoca, and that he might forgive them. After the Ynca had been ^ confessed, hee made a certaine bath to cleanse himselfe in a running river, saying these words : " I have told my sinnes to the Sunne, receive them thou river, and carry them to

• Ychurichuc is a confessor, according to Arriaga, from Ychurini, I

confess. > Colla-suyu : the southern division of the Ynca Empire.

Lib. ▼.

362 FBBUVIAN CONFESSION.

the sea^ where they may never appeare more. Others that confessed vsed likewise these baths^ with certaiue cere- monies very like to those the Moores vse at this day, which they call Ottadoy, and the Indians call them Opucuna} When it chaunced that any man's children died he was held for a great sinner^ saying that it was for his sinnes that the sonue died before the father; and, therefore, those to whom this had chanced, after they were confessed, they were bath'd in this bath called Opacuna, as is saide before. Then some deformed Indian, crookebackt and counterfet by nature, came to whippe them with certaine nettles. If thB Sorcerers or Inchaunters by their lots and divinations affirmed that any sicke body should die, the sicke man makes no difficulty to kill his owne sonne, though he had no other, hoping by that meanes to escape death, saying that in his place he offered his sonne in sacrifice. And this crueltie hath beene practised in some places, even since the Christians came into that countrey. In trueth it is strange that this cus- tome of confessing their secret sinnes hath continued so long amongest them, and to doe so strict penances, as to fast, to give apparell, gold, and silver, to remaine in the mountaines, and to receive many stripes vpon the shoulders. Our men say, that in the province of Chucuito, even at this day they meete with this plague of Confessors or TchuriB, whereas many sicke persons repaire vnto them ; but now, by the grace of God, this people beginnes to see cleerely the effect and great benefite of our confession, wherevnto they come with great devotion. And partely this former custome hath been suffered by the providence of the Lord, that con- fession might not seeme tedious vnto them.

By this meanes the Lord is wholy glorified, and the Divell (who is a deceiver) deceived. And for that it concerneth this matter I will reporte the manner of a strange confess si on the Divell hath invented at lappon, as appeares by a

• Upa-cuna^ baths, from Upatii^ I wash.

CONFESSION IN JAPAN. 363

letter that came from thence^ which saith thus: " There are ^"•▼• in Ocaca very great and high and stiep rockes, which have prickes or poynts on them^ above two hundred fadome high. Amongest these rockes there is one of these pikes or poyntes so terribly high that when the Xamabusis (which be pil- grimes) doe but looke vp vnto it, they tremble and their haire stares, so fearefull and horrible is the place. Ypon the toppe of this poynt there is a great rod of yron of three fadome long, placed there by a strange devise ; at the end of this rodde is a ballance tied, whereof the scales are so bigge as a man may sit in one of them. And the Goquis (which be divells in human shape) commaund these pilgrims to enter therein one after another, not leaving one of them; then, with an engine or instrument which mooveth by roeanes of a wheele, they make this rodde of yron whereon the bal- lance is hanged to hang in the aire, one of these Xamabuzis bein^ set in one of the scales of the ballaunce. And as that wherein the man is sette hath no counterpoise on the other side, it presently hangeth downe, and the other riseth vntill it meetes with and toucheth the rodde; then the Goquis telleth them from the rocke that they must confesse them- selves of all the sinnes they have committed to their remem- brance, and that with a lowde voyce to th*end that all the reste may heare him. Then presently hee beginneth to confesse, whilest some of the slanders by do laugh at the sinnes they doe heare, and others sigh ; and at every sinne they confesse the other scale of the ballance falles a little, vntill that having tolde all his sinnes it remaines equall with the other, wherein the sorrowfuU penitent sits ; then the Goquis turnes the wheele and drawes the rodde and bal- lance vnto him, and the Pilgrime comes foorth ; then enters another, vntill all have passed. A lapponois reported this after hee was christned, saying that he had beene in this pilgrimage, and entred the ballance seaven times, where he had confessed himselfe publikely. He saide, moreover, that

364 UNCTION IN MEXICO

Lib. ▼. If nj^Q QQQ jj j conceale any sinne the empty scale yeelded not ; and if hee grew obstinate after instance made to con- fesse himselfe, refusing to open all his sinnes, the Goquis cast him downe from the toppe, where in an instant he is broken into a thousand peeces. Yet this Christian, who was called John, told vs that commonly the feare and terrour of this place is so great to all such as enter therein, and the danger they see with their eies to fall out of the ballance and to be broken in peeces, that seldome there is any one but discovers all his sins. This place is called by another name Sangenotocoro, that is to say, the place of Confession; wee see plainely by this discourse how the Divell hath pre- tended to vsurp vnto himselfe the service of God, making confession of sinnes (which the Lord hath appoynted for the remedy of man) a divellish superstition, to their great losse and perdition. He hath doone no lesse to the Heathen of lappon than to those of the provinces of CoUao in Peru.

Chap, xxvi.— (y the abominable unction which the Mexicaine priestes and other Nations vsed, and of their witchcraftes,

God appoynted in the auntient Lawe the manner how they should consecrate Aaron^s person and the other Priests, and in the Lawe of the Gospel wee have likewise the holy creame and vnction which they vse when they consecrate the Priestes of Christ. There was likewise in the auntient Lawe a sweete composition, which God defend should be employed in anie other thing then in the divine service. The Divel hath sought to counterfet all these things after his manner as hee hath accustomed, having to this end in- vented things so fowle and filthie, whereby they discover wel who is the Author. The priests of the idolles in Mexico were annoynted in this sort, they annointed the body from the foote to the head,«and all the haire likewise, which hung

-^

UNCTION IN MEXICO. 365

like tresses^ or a horse mane^ for that they applyed this ^^•^- ynction wet and moyst. Their haire grew so as in time it hnng downe to their hammes, so heavily that it was trouble- some for them to beare it, for they did never cut it nntill they died, or that they were dispensed with for their great age, or being employed in governments or some honorable charge in the commonwealth. They carried their haire in tresses, of sixe fingers breadth, which they died blacke with the fume of sapine, or firre trees, or rosine ; for in all Anti- qnitie it hath bin an offring they made vnto their idoUs, and for this cause it was much esteemed and reverenced. They were alwayes died with this tincture from the foote to the head, so as they were like vnto shining Negroes, and that was their ordinary vnction; yet, whenas they went to sacri- fice and give incense in the mountaines, or on the tops thereof, or in any darke and obscure caves where their idoUes were, they vsed an other kinde of vnction very differ- ent, doing certaine ceremonies to take away feare, and to give them courage. This vnction was made with diverse little venomous beastes, as spiders, scorpions, palmers, sala- manders, and vipers, the which the boyes in the CoUedges tooke and gathered together, wherein they were so expert, as they were alwayes furnished when the Priestes called for them. The chiefe care of these boyes was to hunt after these beasts; if they went any other way and by chaunce mot with any of these beasts they stayed to take them, with as great paine as if their lives depended thereon. By the rea- son whereof the Indians commonly feared not these venom- ous beasts, making no more accompt than if they were not so, having beene all bred in this exercise. To make an oint- ment of these beastes they tooke them all together, and burnt them vpon the harth of the Temple, which was before the Altare, vntill they were consumed to ashes ; then did they put them in morters with much Tobacco or betum (being an hearbe that Nation vseth much to benumme the

Lib. ▼.

3G6 MEXICAN UNCTION.

flesh thafc they may not feele their travell), with the which they mingle the ashes^ making them loose their force j they did likewise mingle with these ashes scorpions^ spiders^ and palmers alive^ mingling all together; then did they put to it a certaine seede being grownd, which they call Ololuchqui, whereof the Indians make a drinke to see visions, for that the vertue of this hearbe is to deprive man of sence. They did likewise grinde with these ashes blacke and hairie worraes, whose haire only is venomous, all which they mingled together with blacke, or the fume of rosine, putting it in small pots which they set before their god, saying it was his meate : and, therefore, they called it a divine meate. By means of this oyntment they became witches, and did see and speake with the Divell. The priestes being slab- bered with this oyntment lost all feare, putting on a spirit of cruelty. By reason whereof they did very boldely kill men in their sacrifices, going all alone in the night to the monntaines and into obscure caves, contemning all wilde beasts, and holding it for certayne and approved that both lions, tigres, serpents, and other furious beasts which breede in the monntaines and forrests fled from them by the vertue of this betum of their god.

And in trueth, though this betum had no power to make them flie, yet was the Divelle^s picture sufficient whereinto they were transformed. This betum did also serve to cure the sicke and for children, and therefore all called it the Divine Physicke ; and so they came from all partes to the superiors and priests, as to their saviors, that they might apply this divine physicke, wherewith they anoynted those parts that were grieved. They said that they felt heereby a notable ease, which might be, for that Tobacco and Olo- luchqui have this propertie of themselves to benumme the flesh, being applied in manner of an emplaister, which must be by a stronger reason being mingled with poysons ; and for that it did appease and benumme the paine, they helde

60RCBBVBS AND WITCHKS. 367

it for an effect of healthy and a divine virtue. And there- ^"* ^' fore ranne they to these priests as to holy men, who kept the blind and ignorant in this error, perswading them what they pleased, and making them rnnne after their inventions and divellish ceremonies, their authority being such as their vrordes were sufficient to induce beliefe as an article of their faith. And thus made they a thousand superstitions among the vulgar people, in their maner of offering incense, in cut- ing* their haire, tying small flowers about their necks, and strings with small bones of snakes, commaunding them to bathe at a certain time; and that they should watch all night at the harth lest the fire should die; that they should eate no other breade but that which had bin offered to their gods, that they should vpon any occasion repaire vnto their witches, who with certaine graines tolde fortunes, and divined, look- ing into keelers and pailes full of water. The sorcerers and ministers of the divell vsed much to besmere themselves. There were an infinite number of these witches, divines, en- chanters, and other false prophets. There remaines yet at this day of this infection, althogh they be secret, not daring publikely to exercise their sacrileges, divelish ceremonies, and superstitions, but their abuses and wickednes are dis- covered more at large and particularly in the confessions made by the Prelates of Peru.

There is a kinde of sorcerers amongst the Indians allowed hy the Kings Yncas, which are, as it were, sooth-saiers, they take vpon them what forme and figure they please, flying farre through the aire in a short time, beholding all that was done. They talke with the Divell, who answereth them in certaine stones or other things which they reverence much. They serve as coniurers, to tell what hath passed in the farthest partes, before any newes can come. As it hath chanced since the Spaniardes arrived there, that in the dis- tance of two or three hundred leagues, they have knowne the mutinies, battailes, rebellions, and deaths, both of tyrants.

368 PBKmriAir sovcBKKsa

▼• and ihose of tbe King's partie^ and of private men^ the which haye beene knowne the same day they chanced^ or the day after^ a thing impossible by the conrse of natare. To worke this divination^ they shnt themselves into a boose, and he- came drank vntil they lost their sences, a day after they an- swered to that which was demanded. Some affirme they vse certaine vnctions. The Indians say that the old women do commonly vse this office of witchcraft, and specially those of one Province, which they call Coaillo, and of another towne caUed Manchay, and of the Province of Haarochiri. They likewise shew what is become of things stolne and lost. There are of these kindes of Sorcerers in all partes, to whom commonly doe come the Anaconas,^ and Chinas, which serve the Spaniardes, and when they have lost any thing of their masters, or when they desire to know the successe of things past or to come, as when they goe to the Spaniardes citties for their private affiiires, or for the pub- like, they demaand if their voyage shall be prosperous, if they shall be sicke, if they shall die, or return safe, if they shall obtaine that which they pretend : and the witches or coniurers answer, yea, or no, having first spoken with the Divell, in an obscure place ; so as these Anaconas do well heare the sound of the voyce, but they see not to whom these coniurers speake, neither do they vnderstand what they say. They make a thousand ceremonies and sacrifices to this eflFect, with the which they mocke the Divell and grow exceeding drunke, for the doing whereof, they particularly vse an hearbe called Villca,^ the iuyce whereof they mingle with their Chicha, or take it in some other sort, whereby we may see how miserable they are, that have for their masters, the ministers of him whose office is to deceive. It is mani- fest that nothing doth so much let the Indians from receiv- ing the faith of the holy Gospel, and to persever therein, as

• Yana'Ctmas, or Indians held to domestic service. See Balboa, p. 120. « A tree, the fruit of which is a purgative. — Mom,

MEXICAN BITE EESEHBLINQ BAPTISM. 869

the conference with these witches, whereof there have bin, and are still, great numbers, althoagh by the grace of the Lord, and diligence of the Prelates and Priestes, they de* crease, and are not so hurtefull. Some of them have beene converted and preacTied publikely, discovering and blaming themselves, their errors and deceites, and manifesting their devises and lies, whereof wee have scene great effects ; as also we vnderstand by letters from Jappon, that the like hath arrived in those parts : all to the glory and honour of our* Lord God.

Lib. r.

Chap, xxvii. — Of other Ceremonies and Oustomes of the Indians wJdch are like vnto ours.

The Indians had an infinite number of other ceremonies and customes which resembled to the ancient law of Moses, and some to those which the Moores vse, and some ap- proached heere to the law of the Gospel, as their bathes or Opacuna, as they call them ; they did wash themselves in water, to dense them from their sins. The Mexicaines had also amongst them a kind of baptisme, the which they did with ceremony, cutting the eares and members of yong children new borne, counterfaiting in some sort the circum- cision of the lewes. This ceremony was done principally to the sonnes of Kings and Noblemen; presently vpon their birth the priestes did wash them, and did put a little sword in the right hand, and in the left a target. And to the children of the vulgar sort they put the markes of their offices, and to their daughters instruments to spinne, knit, and labour. This ceremony continued four daies, being made before some idolL They contracted marriage after their manor, whereof the Licentiate Polo hath written a whole Treatise, and I will speake somewhat thereon heere- after. In other things their customes and ceremonies have

B B '

370 MEXICAN MARBUQR AND DIYOBCV.

'*"• ^- some show of reason. The Mexicaines were married by the handes of their priestes in this sort. The Bridegroome and the Bride stood together before the priest, who tooke them by the hands asking them if they woald marrie, then having vnderstood their willes, hee tooke a corner of the vaile where- with the woman had her head covered^ and a corner of the mans gowne^ the which he tied together on a knot, and so led them thus tied to the Bridegroomes house, where there was a harth kindled, and then he caused the wife to go seven times about the harth, and so the married couple sate downe together, and thus was the marriage contracted. The Mexicaines were very iealous of the integritie of their wives ; so as if they found they were not as they ought to be (the which they knew eyther by signes or dishonest wordes), they presently gave notice thereof to their fathers and kinsfolkes of their wives, to their great shame and dis- honor, for that they had not kept good guarde over them. But they did much honour and respect such as lived chastely, making them great banquttes, and giving great presentes both to her and to her kinsfolkes. For this occasion they made great offerings to their gods, and a solemne banket in the house of the wife, and another in the husbands. When they went to house they made an inventory of all the man and wife brought together, of provisions for the house, of land, of iewells and ornaments, which inventories every father kept, for if it chanced thoy made any devorce (as it was common amongest them when they agree not), they divided their goods according to the portion that every one brought, every one having libertie in such a case to marry whome they pleased ; and they gave the daughters to the wife, and the sonnes to the husband. t was defended vpon paine of death, not to marry againe togetiier, the which , they observed very strictly. And although it seeme that many of their ceremonies agree with ours, yet differ they ma^ for the great abaraination they. mingle tJie«ewithall.

NUMEBOUS IDOLS. 871

It is common and general! to have vsaally one of these three things, either cruelty, filthines, or slouth ; for all their ceremonies were cruell and hurtefull, as to kill men and to spill blood, are filthy and beastly, as to eate and drinke to the name of their Idolls, and also to pisse in the honour of them, carrying them vpon their shoulders, to annoint and besmeere themselves filthily, and to do a thousand sortes of villanies, which were at the least, vaine, ridiculous, and idle, and more like the actions of children then of men. The cause thereof is the very condition of this wicked spirit, whose intention is alwaies to do ill, provoking men still to mnrthers and filthines, or at the least to vanities and fruitelesse actions, the which every man may well know, if he duly consider the behaviour and actions of the Divell, towardes those he sets to deceive. For in all his illusions we finde a mixture of these three, or at least of one of them. The Indians themselves (since they came to the knowledge of our faith) laugh and mocke at these fooleries and toyes, in the which their gods held them busied, whom they served more for feare, least they should hurte them, in not obeying them in all things, then for any love they bare them. Although some, yea, very many lived, abused and deceived, with the vaine hope of temporal! goods, for of the eteruall they had no knowledge. And whereas the tempo- rail power was greatest, there superstition hath most in* creased, as we see in the Bealmes of Mexico and Cusco, where it is incredible to see the number of idolls they had; for within the citty of Mexico there were above three hundred. Mango Ynca Yupangui, amongst the Kings of Cusco, was hee that most augmented the service of their idolls, inventing a thousand kindes of sacrifices, feasts, and ceremonies. The like did King Iscoalt^ in Mexico, who was the fourth king. There was also a great number of supex*-

1 Izcohuatl. He built the famous temple of Huitzilopochtli, the first god of the Mexicans.

Bb2

Lib. ▼.

372 PERUVIAN FESTIVALS.

Lib. v. stitions ETid Sacrifices in other Nations of the Indians^ as in the Province of Guatiraala^ at the Hands in the new King- dome^ in the Province of Chile, and others that were like Commonwealthes and Comminalties. Bat it was nothing in respect of Mexico and Ousco, where Sathan was as in Rome, or in his lerusalem^ vntill he was cast out against his will^ and the holy Crosse planted in his place, and the Kingdome of Christ our God occupied, the which the tyrant -did vsurpe.

Chap, xxviii. — Of some Feasts celebrated by them of Gusco, and how the Divell would imitate the mysterie of

the holy Trinitie.

To conclude that which concemes Religion, there restes something to speake of the feasts and solemnities which the Indians did celebrate, the which (for that they are divers and many) cannot be all specified. The Yncas, Lords of Peru, had two kindes of feasts, some were ordinarie, which fell out in certaine moneths of the yeere ; and others extra- ordinary, which were for certaine causes of importance, as when they did crowne a new King, when they beganne some warre of importance, when they had any great neede of water or drought, or other like things. For the ordinary feasts, we must vnderstand, that every raoneth of the yeare they made feasts, and divers sacrifices, and although all of them had this alike, that they offered a hundred sheepe, yet in colour and in forme they are very divers. In the first moneth, which they call Rayme, which is the moneth of December, they made their first feast, which was the prin- ^ cipall of all others, and for that cause they called it Capac- rayme, which is to say, a rich and principall feast. In this feast they offered a great number of sheepe and lambs in sacrifice, and they burnt them with sweete wood, then they

PERUVIAN TRINITY. 373

caused gold and silver to be brought vpon certaiue sheepe, un.r, setting vppon them three Images of the Sun^ and three of the. thunder^ the father, the sonne, and the brother. In these feasts they dedicated the Yncas children, putting the Guaras or ensignes vpon them, and they pierced their eares; then some olde man did whip them with slings, and an- noynted their faces with blood, all in signe that they should •

be true Knights to the Ynca. No stranger might remaine in Cusco during this moneth, and this feast, but at the end thereof they entred, and they gave vnto them peeces of the paste of mays with the blood of the sacrifice, which they did eate in signe of confederation with the Ynca, as hath bin said before. It is strange that the Divell after his manner hath brought a trinitie into idolatry, for the three images of the Sunne called Apomti, Churunti, and Inti- quaoqui,^ which signifieth father and lord Sunne, the sonne Sunne, and the brother Sunne. In the like manor they named the three Images of Chuquilla, which is the God that rules in the region of the aire, where it thunders, raines, and snows. I remember that, being in Chuquisaca, an honour- able priest shewed me an information, which I had long in my handes, where it was prooved that there was a certaine Huaca or Oratory, whereas the Indians did worship an idoll called Tangatanga, which they saide was one in three, and three in one. And as this Priest stood amazed thereat, I saide that the Divell by his infernall and obstinate pride (whereby he alwayes pretendes to make himselfe God) did steale all that he could from the trueth, to imploy it in his lyings and deceits. Comming then to the feast of the second moneth, which they ealled Camay ,^ besides the sacri- fices which they made, they did cast the ashes into the river, following five or six leagues after, praying it to carry them

' Apu-yntij Cliief Sun ; Churi-ynti, Son-Sun ; Ynti-huauqiie, Brother- Sun.

« Canay-quilla, The month from 8th December to 9th January.

874 PERUVIAN FESTIVALS.

Lib. t. iu^Q ^jj^ g^a, for that the Virochoca should there receive this present. In the third, fourth, and fiffc moneth, they offered a hundred blacke sheepe, speckled, and grej, with many other thingSj which I oinitte for being too tedious* The sixt moneth is called Hatuncuzqui Aymuray, which answer* eth to Maie, in the which they sacrificed a hundred sheepe

• more, of all colours ; in this moon and moneth, which is

when they bring maizefrom the fieldes into the house, they made a feast, which is yet very vsuall among the Indians, and they doe call it Aymuray.*

This feast is made comming from the Ghacra or farme vnto the house, saying certaine songs, and praying that the Mays may long continue, the which they call Mamacora. They take a certaine portion of the most fruitefuU of the Mays that growes in their farmes, the which they put in a certaine granary which they doe call Pirwa, with certaine ceremonies, watching three nightes ; they put this Mays in the richest garments they have, and beeing thus wrapped and dressed, they worship this Pirua, and hold it in great veneration, saying it is the mother of the mays of their inheritances, and that by this means the mays augments and is preserved. In this moneth they make a particular sacrifice, and the witches demaund of this Pirua, if it hath strength suflScient to continue vntill the next yeare; and if it answers no, then they carry this Mays to the farme to bprne, whence they brought it, according to every man's power ; then make they another Piiiia, with the same cere- monies, saying that they renue it, to the end the feede of Mays may not perish, and if it answers that it hath force suflScient to last longer they leave it vntill the next yeare. This foolish vanitie continueth to this day, and it is very common amongest the Indians to have these PiruaSy and to make the feast of Aymuray, The seaventh moneth answer- eth to lune, and is called Aiicayciizqui Intir ay mi ;^ in it they

• Aymuray, from the middle of May. ' Yiitip Raymi,

PBBUYIAN FESTIVALS. 375

made the feast that is called Inti/raymi, in the which they sacrificed a hundred sheepe called Gnanacos, and saide it was the feast of the Sanne. In this moneth they made many Images of Qainna^ wood carved^ all attired with rich garmentes, and they made their dancings which they do call Gayo. At this feast they cast flowers in the high wayes, and thither the Indians came painted, and their noblemen had small plates of golde vpon their beards, and all did sing; wee must vnderstand that this feast falleth almost at the same time whenas the Christians obserre the solempnitie of the holy Sacrament, which doth resemble it in some sort, as in daancing, singing, and representations. And for this cause there hath beene, and is yet among the Indians, which celebrated a feast somewhat like to ours of the holy Sacrament, many superstitions in celebrating this ancient feast of Intiraymi. The eight month is called Ohahua Huarqui,^ in the which they did bume a hundred sheepe more, all grey, of the colour of Yiscacha, according to the former order, which month doth answer to our luly. The ninth moneth was called Tapaquis,^ in the which they burnt an hundred sheepe more, of a chesnut colour; and they do likewise kill and burne a thousand Cnyes,^ to the end the frost, the ayre, the water, nor the sunne should not hurt their farmes: and this moneth doth answer vnto August. The tenth moneth was called Ooyarami,^ in the which they burnt a hundred white sheepe that had fleeces. In this month, which answereth to September, they made the feast called Situa in this manner: they assembled together the first day of the moone before the rising thereof, and in seeing it they cryed aloude, carrying torches in their handes and saying, "Let all harme goe away, striking one an

1 Qnehuar (Polylepis).

' The next month was Anta-asitua according to other authors.

^ Ccapac-asitua. * Guinea pigs.

• UmU'Raymi of Molina and Velasco.

Lu.y.

376 PEBUYIAN flSTIVALS.

^■' ^* other with their torches. They that did this were called Paneoncos} which being doone, they went to the common bath^ to the rivers and foontaines^ and every one to his own bath^ setting themselves to drink foare dayes together. In this moneth the Mama-canas of the snnne made a great number of small loaves with the blood of the sacrifices^ and g^ve a peece to every stranger; yea, they sent to every Hnaca throughout the realme, and to many Curacas, in signe of confederation and loyaltie to the Snnne and the Ynca, as hath bin said.

The bathes, drunkennesse, and some relickes of this feast Situs, remaine even vnto this day, in some places, with the ceremonies a little different, but yet very secretly, for that these chiefe and principall feasts have ceased. The eleventh moneth, Homaraymi Punchaiquia^ wherein they sacrificed a hundred sheepe more. And if they wanted water, to pro- cure raine they set a black sheepe tied in the middest of a plaine, powring much chica about it, and giving it nothing to eate vntill it rained, which is practised at this day in many places in the time of our October. The twelfth and last month was called Ayamarca, wherein they did likewise sacrifice a hundred sheepe, and made the feast called Ray^ micantara Rayquis, In this moneth, which aunswered to our November, they prepared what was necessary for the children that should be made novices the moneth foUowiug; the children with the old men made a certaine shew, with rounds and turnings, and this feast was called Ituraymi, which commonly they make when it raines too much, or too . little, or when there is a plague. Among the extraordinary feasts, which were very many, the most famous was that which they called Ytu. This feast Ytu hath no prefixed time nor season, but in time of necessitie. To prepare themselves thereunto, all the people fasted two dayes, during

' PancuncUj a torch. See G, de la Vega^ ii, p. 232.

• Not given by other authorities.

PERUVIAN FESTIVALS. 877

•

the which they did neyther company with their wives, nor .^"- ^- eate anie meate with salt or garlicke, nor drinke any Ghicha. All did assemble together in one place, where no straunger was admitted, nor any beast ; they had garments and orna* uients, which served onely for this feast. They marched very quietly in procession, their heades covered with their vailes, sounding of drummes, without speaking one to another. This continued a day and a night ; then the day following they daunced and made good cheere for two dayes and two nights together, saying that their prayer was accepted. And although that this feast is not vsed at this day, with all this antient ceremony, yet commonly they make another which is verie like, which they call Ayma, with garmentes that serve onely to that end ; and they make this kind of procession with their Drummes, having fasted before, then after they make good cheere, which they vsually doe in their vrgent necessities. And although the Indians forbeare to sacrifice beasts, or other things publikely, which cannot be hidden from the Spaniardes, yet doe they still vse many ceremonies that have their beginnings from these feasts and auntient superstitions ; for, at this day, they do covertly make this feast of Ytu, at the dances of the feast of the Sacrament, in making the daunces of Llama-llama, and of Quacon, and of others, according to their auntient ceremonies, where vnto we ought to take good regarde. They have made more large Discourses of that which con- cerneth this matter, for the necessary observation of the abuses and superstitions the Indians had in the time of their gentility, to the end the Priestes and Curates may the better take heede. Let this suffice now to have treated of the exercise wherewith the divell held those superstitious nations occupied to the end that against his will wee may see the difference there is betwixt light and darknes, betwixt the trueth of Christ and the lies of the Gentiles, although the ennemy of God and man hath laboured with all his devises to counterfet those things which ai'e of God. -

378 UBXICAM FEASTS.

Lib. v.

Chap. juax. — Of the feast of lubilee which the Mexicaines

celebrated.

The Mexicaines have beene no less carious in their feasts and solemnities^ which were of small charge^ but of great effasion of man's blood. Wee have before spoken of the principall feast of Yitzilipnztli^ after the which the feast of Tezcatlipaca was most solempnized. This feast fell in MaiOj and in their Kalendar they called it Tozcoalt ; it fell every foure yeeres with the feast of Penannce, where there was -given full indulgence and remission of sinnes. In this day they did sacrifice a captive which resembled the. idoU Tezcatlipuca^ it was the nineteenth day of Maie ; upon the even of this feast the Noblemen came to the temple^ bringing a new garment like vnto that of the idoll^ thq which the priest put vpon him^ having first taken off his other garments, which they kept with as much or more reverence than we doe our ornaments. There were in the coffers of the idoU many ornaments, iewelles, eareings, and other riches, as bracelets and pretious feathers, which served to no other vse but to be there, and was worshipped as their god it selfe. Besides the garment wherewith they wor- i^hipped the idoU that day, they put vpon him certaine ensignes of feathers, with fannes, shadowes, and other things; being thus attired and funiished, they drew the curtaine or vaile from before the doore, to the ende he might be seene of all men ; then came forth one of the chiefs of the temple, attired like to the idoll, carrying flowers in his hand, and a flute of earth, having a very sharpe sound, and turning towards the east, he sounded it, and then looking to the west, north, and south, he did the like. And after he had thus sounded towards the foure parts of the world (showing that both they that were pre- sent and absent did heare him) hee put his finger into the

MEXICAN FXA8TS. 379

aire, and tben gathered vp earth, which he put in his !*»•▼• mouth, and did eate it in eigne of adoration. The like did all they that were present, and, weeping, they fell flat to the ground, invocating the darknesse of the night, and the windes, intreating them not to leave them, nor to forget them, or else to take away their lives, and free them from the labours they indured therein. Theeves, adulterers, and murtherers, and all others offenders, had great feare and heaviness whilest this flute sounded, so as some could not dissemble nor hide their offences. By this meanes they all demanded no other thing of their god, but to have their offences concealed, powring foorth many teares, with great repentaunce and sorrow, offering great store of in- cense to appease their gods. The couragions and valiant men, and all the olde souldiers that followed the Arte of Warre hearing this flute, demaunded with great devotion of God the Creator, of the Lorde for whome wee live, of the sunne, and of other their gods, that they would give them victorie against their ennemies, and strength to take many captives, therewith to honour their sacrifices. This cere- monie was doone ten dayes before the feast j During which tenne dayes the Priest did sound this flute, to the end that all might do this worship in eating of earth, and depiaund of their idol what they pleased: they every day made their praiers, with their eyes lift vp to heaven, and with sighs and groanings, as men that were grieved for their sinnes and offences. Although this contrition was onelie for feare of the corporal punishment that was given them, and not for any feare of the etemall, for they certainely beleeved there was no such severe punishment in the other life. . And, therefore, they offered themselves voluntarily to death, holding opinion that it is to all men an assured rest* The first day of the feast of this idoU Tezcatlipuca being come, all they of the Citty assembled together in a court to celebrate likewise the feast of the Kalender, whereof wee

Lib. ▼.

380 UKXICAH rSSTlVALS.

have already spoken^ which was called Toxcoalt, which signifies a drie thing; which feast was not made to any other end^ but to demaand rain, in the same manner that we solemnise the Rogations; and this feast was alwayes in Maie^ which is the time that they have most neede of raiue in those countries. They beganne to celebrate it the ninth of Maie, ending the nineteenth. The last day of the feast the Priestes drew foorth a litter well furnished with cnrtins and pendants of diverse fashions. This litter bad so many armes to holde by as there were ministers to carry it. All which came foorth besmeered with black and long haire, halfe in tresses with white strings^ and attyred in the livery of the idolL Upon this litter they set the personage of the idoU appoynted for this feast^ which they called the resem- blance of their God Tezcalipnca, and taking it upon their

• shoalders they broght it openly to the foote of the stairs;

then came forth the yong men and maidens of the Temple^ carrying a great cord wreathed of chaines of roasted mays, with the which they invironed the Litter, patting a chaine of the same about the idolles necke, and a garland vppon his head. They called the cord Toxcalt^ signifying the drought and barrennesse of the time. The yoong men came wrapped in redde curtines^ with garlands and chains of roasted mays. The maides were clothed in new garments, wearin g chaines about their neckes of roasted mays ; and ypon their heads myters made of rods covered with this mays, they had their feete covered with feathers^ and their armes and cheekes painted. They brought much of this roasted mays, and the chiefe men put it vpon their heads^ and about their neckes, taking flowers in their handes. The idoll being placed in his litter^ they strewed round about a great quantitie of the boughes of Manguey, the leaves whereof are large and pricking.

This litter being set vpon the religious mens shoulders, they carryed it in procession within the circuite of the Court,

MEXICAN FESTIVALS. 381

two Priests marching before with censors, giving often !'"•▼• incense to the idol, and every time they gave incense they lifted vp their armes as high as they could to the idoll, and to the Sunne, saying, that they lifted vp their praiers to heaven, even as the smoke ascended on high. Then all the people in the Coui't turned round to the place whither the idoll went, every one carrying in his hand new cords of the threed of manguey, a fadome long, with a knotte at the end, and with them they whipped themselves vppon the shoulders; even as they doe heere vppon holy Thurseday. All the walles of the Court and battlements were full of boughs and flowers, so fresh and pleasaunt, as it did give a great contentment. This procession being ended, they brought the idoll to his vsual place of abode, then came a great multitude of people with flowres, dressed in diverse sortes, wherewith they filled the temple and all the court, so as it seemed the ornament of an Oratory. All this was putte in order by the priests, the yoong men ad- ministring these things vnto them from without. The chappell or chamber where the idoll remayned was all this day open without any vaile.

This done, every one came and offered curtines, and pen- dants of sendal, precious stones, iewells, insence, sweete wood, grapes, or eares of Mays, quailes: and, finally, all they were accustomed to offer in such solemnities. Wheuas they offered quailes, (which was the poore mans offering,) they used this ceremonie, they delivered them to the priestes, who taking them, pulled off their heads, and caste them at the foote of the Altare, where they lost their blond, and so they did of all other things which were offered. Every one did offer meate and fruite according to their power, the which was laid at the foote of the altar, and the Ministers gathered them vp, and carried them to their chambers. This solerane offering done, the people went to dinner, every one to his village or house, leaving the feast suspended vntil

La. r.

382 mXICAH FESTIVALS.

after dinner. In the meanetime, the yong men and maidens of the temple^ with their ornaments, were busied to serve the idoll, with all that was appointed for him to eate : which meate was prepared by other women^ who had made a vow that day to serve the idolL And, therefore, such as had made this vow, came by the point of day, offering them- selves to the Deputies of the Temple, that they might com- mand them what they would have done, the which they did carefully performe. They did prepare such varietie of meates, as it was admirable. This meate being ready, and the hour of dinner come> all these virgins went out of the Temple in procession, every one carrying a little basket of bread in her hand, and in the other, a dish of these meates ; before them marched an old man, like to a steward, with a pleasant habite, he was clothed in a white surples downe to the calves of his legges ; vpon a doublet with- out sleeves of red leather, like to a iacket, he carried wings insteede of sleeves, from the which hung broade ribbands, at the which did hang a small calibash or pumpion, which was covered with flowers, by little holes that were made in it, and within it were many superstitious things. This old man, thus attyred, marched very humbly and heavily before the preparation, with his head declining: and comming neere the foote of the staires, he made a great obeisance and re- verence. Then going on the one side, the virgins drew neere with the meate, presenting it in order one after another, with great reverence. This service presented, the old man returned as before, leading the virgins into their convent. This done, the yong men and ministers of the Temple came forth and gathered vp this meate, the which they carried to the chambers of the chiefe Priests of the Temple, who had fasted five daies, eating onely once a day, and they had also abstained from their wives, not once going out of the Temple in these five daies. During the which, they did whippe them- selves rigorously with cordes, they did eate of this divine

MEXICAN FESTIVALS. 383

meate (for so they called it)^ what they could^ neither was it lawfull for any other to eate thereof. All the people having dined^ they assembled againe in the court to see the ende of the feast, whither they brought a captive^ which by the space of a whole yeare^ had represented the idoU^ being attyred, decked, and honoured as the idoU it selfe^ and doing all reverence vnto him^ they delivered him into the handes of the sacrificers, who at that instant presented them- selves, taking him by the feete and handes. The Pope did open his stomacke^ and pull out his hart, then did he lift vp his hands as high as he could^ shewing it to the Sunne^ and to the idoll^ as hath beene said. Having thus sacrificed him that represented the idoU^ they went into a holy place ap- pointed for this purpose^ whither came the yong men and virgins of the Temple with their ornaments, the which being put in order, they danced and sung with drummes and other instruments, on the which the chiefe Priests did play and sound. Then came all the Noblemen with ensignes and ornaments like to the yong men, who danced round about them. They did not usually kill any other men that day, but him that was sacrificed, yet every fourth yeare they had others with him, which was in the yeare of lubile and full pardons. After Sun set, every one being satisfied with sounding, eating, and drinking, the virgins went al to their convent, they took great dishes of earth full of bread mixt with hony, covered with small panniers, wrought and fashioned with dead mens heads and bones, and they carried the collation to the idoU, mounting vp to the court, which was before the doore of the Oratorio : and having set them downe, they retired in the same order as they came, the steward going still before. Presently came forth all the yong men in order, with canes or reedes in their handes, who beganne to runne as fast as th^ey could to the toppe of the staires of the Temple, who should come first to the dishes of the collation. The Elders or chiefejPri^^ob^r^r^d him

Lib. y.

LiB.T.

384 MEXICAN FESTIVALS.

that came firsts second^ thirds and fourth^ without regarding the rest. This collation was likewise all carried away by the yongmen as great relickff. This done^ the foure that arrived first were placed in the midst of the Antients of the Temple, bringing them to their chambers with much honour^ praiS'- ing them^ and giving them ornaments; and from thence forth they were respected and reverenced as men of marke. The taking of this collation being ended, and the feast cele- brated with much ioy and noise, they dismissed all the yong men and maides which had served the idoU : by meanea whereof they went one after another, as they came forth. All the small children of the colledges and schooles were at the gate of the courts with bottom es of rushes and hearbes in their hands, which they cast at them, mocking and laugh- ing^ as of them that came from the service of the idoU ; they had libertie then to dispose of themselves at their pleasure, and thus the feast ended.

Chap. xxx. — Of the Feast of Marchants, which those of

Gholutecas did celebrate.

Although I have spoken sufficiently of the service the Mexicaines did vnto their gods, yet will I speak something of the feast they called Quetzacoaatl, which was the god of riches, the which was solemnised in this maner» Fortie daies before the Marchants bought a slave well pi*oportioned, without any fault or blemish, either of sicken es or of hurte, whom they did attyre with the ornaments of the idoll, that he might represent it fortie daies. Before his clothing they did dense him, washing him twice in a lake, which they called the lake of the gods; and being purified, they at- tyred him like the idoll. During these forty daies, hee was much respected for his sake whom he represented. By night they did imprison him (as hath beene said) lest he should

MEXICAN FESTIVALS. 385

flie, and in the morning they took him but of prison, setting ^"- ^• him vpon an eminent place, where they served him, giving him exqaisite meates to eate.. After he had eaten, they put a chaine of flowers about his necke, and many nosegaies in his hands. Hee had a well appointed guard, with much people to accompany him. When he went through the Cittie, he went dancing and singing through all the streetes, that hee might bee knowne for the resemblance of their god, and when hee beganne to sing, the women and little children came forth of their houses to salute him, and to offer vnto him as to their god. Two old men of the Antients of the Temple came vnto him nine daies before the feast, and humbling themselves before him, they said with a low and submisse voyce. Sir, you must vnderstand that nine daies hence the exercise of dancing and singing doth end, and thou must then die ; and then he must answer in a good houre.^ They call this ceremony Neyblo Maxilt Ileztli, which is to say, the advertisement ;^ and when they did thus advertise him, they took very carefull heede whether hee were sad, or if he danced as ioyfully as he was accus- tomed, the which if he did not as cheerefully as they de- sired, they made a foolish superstition in this maner. They presently tooke the sacrificing rasors, the which they washed and clensed from the blood of men which remained of the former sacrifices. Of this washing they made a drinke mingled with another liquor made of Cacao, giving it him to drinke ; they said that this would make him forget what bad been said vnto him, and would make him in a maner in- censible, returning to his former dancing and mirth. They said, moreover, that he would offer himself cheerfully to death, being inchanted with this drinke. The cause why they sought to take from him this heavinesse, was, for that they held it for an ill augure, and a fore-telling of some

» " Y el avia de responder que fuesse mucho de norabuena." » " El apercebimiento."

C C

386 MEXICAN FESTIVALS.

Li». V. great harme. The day of the feast being come, after they had done him much honor^ sung, and given him incense, the sacrificers took him about midnight and did sacrifice him, as hath been said, oflfering his heart vnto the Moone, the which they did afberwardes cast against the idoll, letting the bodie fall to the bottome of the staires of the Temple, where such as had oflTered him took him vp, which were the Marchants, whose feast it was. Then having carried him into the chiefest mans house amongst them, the body was drest with divers sawces, to celebrate (at the breake of day) the ban- quet and dinner of the feast, having first bid the idoU good morrow, with a small dance, which they made whilst the day did breake, and that they prepared the sacrifice. Then did all the Marchants assemble at this banket, especially those which made it a trafficke to buy and sell slaves, who were bound every yeare to oflFer one, for the resemblance of their god. This idoU was one of the most honoured in all the land ; and therefore the Temple where he was, was of great authoritie. There were threescore staires to ascend vp vnto it, and on the toppe was a court of an indiflferent largenesse, very finely drest and plastered, in the midst whereof was a great round thing like vnto an Oven, having the entrie low and narrow, so as they must stoope very low that should enter into it. This Temple had chambers and chappels as the rest, where there were convents of Priests, yong men, m aides, and children, as hath been said ; and there was one Priest alone resident continually, the which they changed weekely. For although there were in every one of these temples three or foure Curates or Ancients,^ yet did every one serve his weeke without parting. His charge that weeke (after he had instructed the children) was to strike vp a drumme every day at the Sunne setting, to the same end that we are accustomed to ring to evensong. This drumme was such as they might heare the sound thereof through-

> " Curas Dignidades."

MEXICAN FESTIVALS. 387

out all the partes of the Cittie, then every man shut vp ^'" ^• his merchandise, and retired vnto his house, and there was so great a silence, as there seemed to be no living crea- ture in the Towne. In the morning whenas the day beganne to breake, they beganne to sound the drumme, which was a signe of the day beginning, so as travellers and strangers attended this signall to beginne their iournies, for till that time it was not lawfuU to goe out of the cittie.

There was in this temple a court of a reasonable great - nes, in the which they made great dances and pastimes, with games or comedies the day of the idolls feast; for which purpose there was in the middest of this court a theatre of thirty foote square, very finely decked and trim- med, the which they decked with flowers that day, with all the arte and invention that mought be, beeing invironed round with arches of divers flowers and feathers, and in some places there were tied many small birds, connies, and other tame beasts. After dinner all the people assembled in this place, and the players presented themselves, and played comedies : some counterfeit the deafe and the rheumatike, others the lame, some the blinde, and without handes, which came to seeke for cure of the idoU : the deafe answered con- fusedly, the rheumatike did cough, the lame halted, telling their miseries and griefes^ wherewith they made the people to laugh ; others came foorth in the forme of little beasts, some were attired like snailes, others like toades, and some like lizardes : then meeting together, they tolde their offices, and every one retyring to his place, they sounded on small flutes, which was pleasant to heare. They likewise counter- feited butterflies and small birdes of diverse colours, and the children of the Temple represented these formes; then they went into a little forrest planted there for the nonce, where the Priests of the Temple drew them foorth with instru- ments of musicke. In the meane time they vsed many pleasant speeches, some in propounding, others in defend-

c c2

Lis. t.

388 PROFIT FROM THE STUDY

ing, wherewith the assistants were pleasantly intertained. This doone^ they made a maske or mummerie with all these personages^ and so the feast ended : the which were vsually doone in their principall feasts.

Chap. xxxi. — What profit may be drawne out of this discourse

of the Indians superstitions.

This may suffice to vnderstand the care and paine the In- dians tooke to serve and honour their Idolls, or rather the divell : for it were an infinite matter, and of small profit^ to report every thing that hath passed, for that it may seeme to some needlesse to have spoken thus much : and that it is a losse of time^ as in reading the fables that are fained by the Bomaines of Knighthoode. But if such as holde this opinion will looke wel into it, they shall finde great diflFer- ence betwixt the one and the other: and that it may be profitable, for many considerations, to have the knowledge of the customs and ceremonies the Indians vsed : first, this knowledge is not only profitable, but also necessary in those countries where these superstitions have been practised, to the end that Christians, and the maisters of the Law of Christ, may knowe the errours and superstitions of the An- tients, and observe if the Indians vse them not at this day, either secretely or openly. For this cause many learned and worthy men have written large Discourses of what they have found : yea, the Provinciall counsells have commaunded them to write and print them, as they have doone in Lima, where hath beene made a more ample Discourse than this. And therefore it importeth for the good of the Indians, that the Spaniardes being in those parts of the Indies, should have the knowledge of all these things. This Discourse may likewise serve the Spaniards there, and all others wherso- ever, to give infinite thankes to God our Lord, who hath im-

I

OP INDIAN SUPERSTITIONS. 389

parted so great a benefite vnto vs, giving them his holy ^"- ^• Lawe, which is most iust, pure, and altogether profitable. The which we may well know, comparing it with the lawes of Sathan, where so many wretched people have lived so miserably. It may likewise serve to discover the pride, envy, deceipts, and ambushes of the Divell, which he prac- tiseth against those hee holdes captives, seeing on the one side hee seekes to imitate God, and make comparison with — him and his holy Lawe ; and on the other side, hee dooth . mingle with his actions so many vanities, filthinesse, and cmeUies, as hee that hath no other practise but to sophisti- . cate and corrupt all that is good. Finally, hee that shall see the darkenes and blindenes wherein so many Provinces and Kingdoms have lived so long time, yea and wherein many Nations, and a great part of the world live yet, deceived with the like trumperies, he can not (if he have a Christians heart) but give thankes to the high God, for such as hee hath called out of so great darkenes, to the admirable light of his Gospel : beseeching the vnspeakeable charitie of the Creator to preserve and increase them in his knowledge and obedience, and likewise be grieved for those that follow still the way of perdition. And that in the end hee beseech the Father of Pitty to open vnto them the treasures and riches of lesus Christ, who with the Father and Holy Ghost raignes in all Ages. Amen.

THE SIXT BOOKE

Of the Naturall and Morall Historic of the

Indies.

Chap. i. — That they erre in their opinion, which holde the

Indians to want iudgement.

Lib. VI. Having treated before of the religion the Indians vsed, I pretend to discourse in this Booke of their customs, policy, / and government, for two considerations : the one is to con- fute that false opinion many doe commonly holde of them, that they are a grose and brutish people, or that they have so little vnderstanding, as they scarce deserve the name of anie. So as many excesses and outrages are committed vpon them, vsing them like bruite beasts, and reputing them vn worthy of any respect ; which is so common and so dangerous an errour (as they know well who with any zeale and consideration have travelled amongst them, and that have scene and observed their secrets and counsells). And moreover, for the small regard many make of these Indians, who presume to knowe much, and yet are commonly the most ignorant and presumptuous. I finde no better meanes to confound this pernicious opinion, then in relating their order and maner, whenas they lived vnder their owne lavyes, in which, although they had many barbarous things, and without ground, yet had they many others worthy of great admiration, whereby wee may vnderstand, that they were by nature capable to receive any good instructions : and be- - sides, they did in some things passe many of our common-

AUTHORITIES FOR PERU AND MEXICO. 391

weales; It is no matter of marvell if there were so great and grose faalts amongst them^ seeing there hath been like-H wise amongst the most famous Law-givers and Philosophers ! (yea, without exception, Ljcurgus and Plato), and amongestJ the wisest common-wealths^ as the Romanes and Athenians, where wee may finde things so full of ignorance, and so worthy of laughter, as in trueth if the commonweales of the Mexicaines, or of the Yncas, hadde beene knowne in those times of the Romans and the Greekes, their lawes and governments had been much esteemed by them. But we at i this day little regarding this, enter by the sword, without , hearing or vnderstanding ; perswading our selves that the . Indians affaires deserve no other respect, but as of venison ' that is taken in the forrest, and broght for our vse and de- " light. - -

The most grave and diligent, which have searched and attained to the knowledge of their secrets, customs, and antient government, holde another opinion, and admire the order and discourse that hath been betwixt them. Of which number is Polo Ondegardo, whome I vsually foUowe in the discourse of matters of Peru, and for these of Mexico Juan de Tobar, who had a Prebend in the Church of Mexico, and is now of our company of lesuites, who by the commaunde- ment of the viceroy Don Martin Henriques,^ have made a diligent and a large collection of the histories of that nation, and many other grave and notable personages, who, both by word and writing, have sufficiently informed me of all those things I shall here set downe. ' The other end, and ^/ the good which may followe by the knowledge of the lawes, \ customes, and government of the Indians, is, that wee may helpe and governe them with the same lawes and customes,

1 Second son of Don Francisco Henriquez y Almansa, first Marquis of Alcanizes, by Dona Isabel de UUoa. He was Viceroy of Mexico from 1568 to 1580, and of Peru from 1581 to 1583. He died at Lima on March 12th, 1583.

Lib. VI. /

La. VI.

392 MEXICAN CALENDAR.

for that they oaght to be ruled according to their owne lawes and priviledgoSj so farre.foorth as they doe not con- tradict the Lawe of Christ, and his holy Church, which ought to be maintained and kept as their fundamental! lawes. For the ignorance of laws and customes hath bred many errours of great importance, for that the Govemours and Judges knowe not well how to give sentence, nor rule their subjects. And besides, the wrong which is doone vnto them against reason, it is preiudiciall and hurtefull vnto our selves ; for thereby they take occasion to abhorre vs, as men both in good and in evill alwayes contrary vnto them.

Chap. ii. — Of the method of computing time, and the Kalendar the Mexicaines vsed.

And to beginne then by the division and supputation of times which the Indians made, wherein truely wee may well perceive the great signes of their vivacitie and good vnder- standing. I will first shew in what sorte the Mexicaines counted and divided their yeere, their moneths, their kalen- der, their computations, their worldes and ages. They divided the yeare into eighteene moneths, to which they gave twentie dayes, wherein the three hundred and three score days are accomplished, not comprehending in any of these moneths the five dayes that remaine, and make the yeare perfect. But they did reckon them aparte, and called them the dayes of nothing : during the which, the people did not any thing, neither went they to their Temples, but occupied themselves only in visiting one another, and so spent the time : the sacrificers of the Temple did likewise cease their sacrifices. These five dayes being past, they beganne the computation of the yeare, whereof the first moueth and the beginning was in Maroh^ when the leaves

MEXICAN CALENDAB. 893

beganne to growe greene, although they tooke three dayes ^■' ^' of the moneth of February ; for the first day of their yeere was, as it were, the sixe and t wen tie day of February, as appeareth by their kalender, within the which ours is like- wise comprehended and contained with a very ingenious Arte, which was made by the antient Indians that knew the first Spaniardes. I have scene this Kalender, and liave it yet in my custody, which well deserveth the sight, to vnder- stand the discourse and industry the Mexicaine Indians had. Every one of these eighteene monethes had his proper name, and his proper picture, the which was commonly taken of the principall feast that was made in that moneth, or from the diversitie of tymes, which the yeere caused in that moneth. They had in this Kalender certaine dayes marked and distinguished for their feasts. And they accompted their weekes by thirteene dayes, marking the dayes with a Zero or cipher, which they multiplied vnto thirteene, and then beganne to count, one, two, etc. They did likewise marke the yeares of these wheeles with foure signes or figures, attributing to every yeare a peculiar signe, wherof one was of a house, an other of a conny, the third of a reede, and the fourth of a flint. They painted them in this sort, noting by those figures the yeare that did runne, saying of so many houses, of so many flints of such a wheele, hap- pened such a thing. For we must vnderstand that their wheele, which was an age, contained foure weekes of yeares, every weeke containing thirteene yeares, which in all made fiftie twoo yeares. In the midst of this wheele they painted a Sunne, from the which went foure beames or lines in crosse to the circumference of the wheele ; and they made their course, even as the circumference was divided into foure equall partes, every one with his line, having a dis- tinct colour from the rest, and the foure colors were greene, blew, red, and yellow : every portion of these foure had thirteene separations which had all their signes or particular

394 MEXICAN CALENDAR.

Ln. VI. figures^ of a house, a conny, a reed, or a flint, notiog by every signe a yeare, and vppon the head of this signe they painted what had happened that yeare.

And therefore I did see in the Kalender mentioned the yeare when the Spaniards entered Mexico, marked by the picture of a man clad in red, after our manner, for such was the habite of the first Spaniard, whome Fernand Cortes sent at the end of the two and fifty years, which finished the wheele. They vsed a pleasant ceremony, which was the last night they didde breake all their vesselles and stuffe, and put out their fire, and all the lights, saying, that the worlde should end at the finishing of one of these wheeles, and it might be at that time : for (said they), seeing the worlde must then end, what neede is there to provide meate to eate, and therefore they had no further neede of vessel nor fire. Vpon this conceit they passed the night in great feare, saying it might happen there would be no more day, and they watched very carefully for the day; but when they saw the day beginne to breake, they presently beat manie drummes, and sounded cornets, flutes, and other instru- ments of ioy and gladnesse, saying, that God did yet pro- long the time with another age, which were fiftie two yeares. And then beganne an other wheele. The first day and beginning of this age they took new fire, and bought new vesselles to dresse their meate, and all went to the high Priest for this new fire, having first made a solemne sacrifice, and given thanks for the comming of the day, and prolongation of an other age. This was their manner of accounting their yeares, moneths, weekes, and ages.

PERUVIAN CALENDAB. 395

Chap. hi. — Hoiv the Kings Yncas accounted the yeares and

moneths.

Although the computation of time practised amongst the i^"- ▼»• Mexicaines bee ingenious enough and certain e, for men that had no learning ; yet, in my opinion, they wanted discourse and consideration, having not grounded their computation according vnto the course of the moone, nor distributed their months accordingly, wherein those of Peru have far surpassed them : for they divided their yeare into as many dayes, perfectly accomplished as we do heere, and into twelve moneths or moones, in the which they imployed and consumed the eleven daies that remaind of the moone, as Polo writes. To make the computation of their yeare sure and certaine, they vsed this industry j vppon the moun- taines which are about the citty of Cuzco (where the Kings Yncas held their court, beeing the greatest sanctuary of those realmes, and as we should say an other Rome), there were twelve pillars set in order, and in such distaunce the / one from the other, as every month one of these pillars did note the rising and setting of the sunne. They called them Succangay^ by meanes whereof they taught and shewed the feasts, and the seasons fitte to sowe and reape, and to do other things. They did certaine .sacrifices to these pillars of the sunne. Every month had his proper name and peculiar feasts. They beganne the yeare by January, as wee doe. But since, a king Ynca called Pachacutec,^ which signifies a reformer of time, beganne their yeare by December, by reason (as I coniecture) that then the Sunne returneth

> Sucanca, Suca is a ridge or furrow in Qnichua. Sucarii, "I make furrows". Sucaiica is the future passive participle, "that which is about to be furrowed"; possibly referring to the alternate light and shadow caused by the sunlight between the pillars ; making the ground appear in ridges. — See G. de la Vega, i, p. 178.

• Pacha, time ; Cutini, I overturn, or reform.

396 LETTERS UNKNOWN IN AMERICA.

La. Ti. from the last poynt of Capricome, which is the tropike neerest vnto them. I know not whether the one or the other have observed any Bisexte, although some holde the contrary. The weekes which the Mexicaines did reckon were not properly weekes, being not of seaven dayes : the Tncas likewise made no mention thereof, which is no wonder, seeing the account of the weeke is not grounded vpon the course of the sunne, as that of the yeare, nor of the moone, as that of the month ; but among the Hebrewes it is grounded vpon the creation of the world, as Moses re- portethj and amongest the Greekes and Latins vpon the number of the seven planets, of whose names the dayes of the weeke have taken their denomination ; yet was it much for those Indians, being men without bookes and learning, to have a yeare, seasons, and feasts, so well appoynted as I have sayd.

Chap. iv. — That no nation of the Indies hath beene found to

have had the vse of letters.

Letters were invented to signifie properly the words we do pronounce, even as woordes (according to the Philoso- pher) are the signes and demonstrations of mans thoughtes and conceptions. And both the one and the other (I say the letters and words) were ordained to make things knowne. The voyce for such as are present, and letters for the absent, and such as are to come. Signes and markes which are not properly to signifie wordes but things, can- not be called, neyther in trueth are they letters, although they be written, for wee can not say that the Picture of the sunne be a writing of the sunne, but onely a picture ; the like may be saide of other signes and characters, which have no resemblance to the thing, but serve onely for memorie : for he that invented them did not ordaine them to signifie

.▲. .-

LBTTEH8 UNKNOWN IN AMERICA. 397

wordeSj but onely to note the thing : neyther do they call '^■• those characters^ letters^ or writings^ as indeede they are not^ but rather ciphers or remembraunces^ as those be which the Spherists or Astronomers do vse, to signifie divers signes or planets of Mars^ Venus, lupiter, etc.

Such characters are ciphers^ and no letters : for what name soever Mars may have in Italian^ French^ or Spanish, this character doth alwaies signifie it, the which is not found in letters : for, althogh they signify the thing, yet is it by meanes of words. So, as they which know not the tongue, vnderstand them not : as, for example, the Greekes nor the Hebrews, cannot conceive what this word Sol doth signifie, although they see it written ; for that they vnderstand not the Latine word : so as writing and letters are onely prac- tised by them, which signifie words therewith. For if they signifie things mediately, they are no more letters nor writ- ings, but ciphers and pictures : whereby we may observe two notable things. The one, that the memory of histories and antiquities may bee preserved by one of these three meanes, either by letters and writings, as hath beene vsed amongst the Latinos, Greekes, Hebrews, and many other Nations; or by painting, as hath beene vsed almost through- out all the world, for it is said in the second Nicene Coun- sell, Painting is a booke for fooles which cannot reade^': or by ciphers and characters, as the cipher signifies the number of a hundred, a thousand, and others, without noting the word of a hundred or a thousand. The other thing we may observe thereby is that which is propounded in this chapter, which is, that no Nation of the Indies dis- / covered in our time, hath had the vse of letters and writ- ings, but of the other two sortes, images and figures. The which T observe, not onely of the Indies of Peru and New Spaine, but also of lappon and China. And although this may seeme false to some, seeing it is testified by the dis- courses that have beene written, that there are so great

TI.

398 CHINESE WRITINGS.

LiB.Ti. Libraries and Vniversities in China and lappon, and that mention is made of their Chapas^ letters, and expeditions^ yet that which I say is true, as you may vnderstand by the discourse following.

Chap. v. — Of the fashion of Letters and BooJces the Ghinois

vsed.

There are many which thinke, and it is the most common . opinion, that the writings which the Chinois vsed are letters, as those we vse in Europe, and that by them wee may write wordes and discourses, and that they only diflfer from our letters and writings in the diversitie of characters, as the Greekes differ from the Latinos, and the Hebrews from the Chaldees. But it is not so, for they have no Alphabet, neither write they any letters, but all their writing is no- thing else but painting and ciphering : and their letters signifie no partes of distinctions as ours do, but are figures and representations of things, as of the Sunne, of fire, of a man, of the sea, and of other things. The which appears /plainely, for that their writings and chapas are vnderstood of them all, although the languages the Chinois speake are many and very different, in like sort as our numbers of ciphers are equally vnderstoode in the Spanish, French, and Arabian tongues : for this figure 8, wheresoever it be, sig- nifies eight, although the French call this number of one . sort and the Spaniards of another. So as things being of themselves innumerable, the letters likewise or figures which the Chinois vse to signifie them by, are in a maner infinite : so as he that shall reade or write at China (as the Mandarins doe) must know and keepe in memory at the least fourescore and five thousand characters or letters, and those which are perfect herein know above sixscore thou- sand. A strange and prodigious thing; yea, incredible, if

CHINBSE WRITINGS. 399

it were not testified by men worthy of credite, as the fathers of our company who are there continoally^ learning their language and writings wherein they have studied day and night above tenne yeares^ with a continuall labour for the charitie of Christ and the desire of salvation of soules^ pre- vailed in them above all this labour and difficultie. For this reason, learned men are so much esteemed in China, for the difficultie there is to conceive them : and those onl^ have the offices of Mandarins, Govemours, Judges, and Captaines. For this cause the fathers take great pains to instruct their children to reade and write. There are many of these schooles where the children are taught, where the masters teach them by day, and the fathers at home by night : so as they hurt their eyes much, and they whippe them often with reedes, although not so severely as they doe offenders. They call it the Mandarin tongue, which requires a maus age to be conceived. And you must vnderstand that, although the tongue which the Mandarins speake bee peculiar and different from the Vulgar, which are many, and that they studie it, as they doe Latine and Greeke heere, and that the learned only throghout all China do vnderstand it: so it is notwithstanding that all that is written in it, is vnderstood in all tongues : and although all the Provinces doe not vnderstand one another by speaking, yet by writing they doe : for there is but one sort of figures and characters for them all, which signifie one thing, but not the same word and prolation : seeing (as I have said) they are onely to denote the things and not the worde, as we may easily vnderstand by the examples of numbers in ciphering. And they of lappon and the Chinois do reade and vnderstand well the writings one of another, although they be divers Nations and different in tongue and lan- guage. If they speake what they reade or write, they should not bee vnderstood. Such are the letters and bookes the Chinois vse, being so famous in the world. To make

Lis. Tt.

400 CHINESE WRITINGS.

Lib. yi. their impressions, they grave a boord or plank with the figures they will print, then do they stampe as many leaves of paper as they lift, of the same sort as they have made their pictures, the which are graven in copper or wood. But a man of iudgement may aske, how they could signifie their conceptions by figures, which approached neere or re- semble the thing they would represent? As to say, the Sunne heats, or that he hath beheld the Sunne, or the day is of the Sunne. Finally, how it were possible to denote by the same figures the case, the coniunction, and the ar- ticles, which are in many tongues and writings ? I answer therevnto, that they distinguish and signifie this varietie by certaine points, strikes, and dispositions of the figure. But it is difficult to vnderstand how they can write proper names in their tongue, -especially of strangers, being things they have never scene, and not able to invent figures proper ynto them. I have made triall thereof, being in Mexico with certain Chinois, willing them to write this proposition in their language, '^Joseph de Acostahas come from Peru, and such like : wherevpon the Chinois was long pensive, but in the end hee did write it, the which other Chinois did after reade, although they did vary a little in the pronountiation of the proper name. For they vse this devise to write a proper name: they seeke out something in their tongue that hath resemblance to that name, and set downe the figure of this thing. And as it is difficult among so many proper names to finde things to resemble them in the pro- lation, so is it very difficult and troublesome to write such names. Vpon this purpose, father Alonso Sanchez told vs that when he was in China, being led into divers Tribunal! seates, from Manderin to Manderin, they were long in put- ting his name in writing in their chapas, yet in the end they did write it after their manor, and so ridiculously, that they scarce came neere to the name : and this is the fashion of letters and writings which the Chinois vsed. That of

CHINESB LEABNINQ. 401

the lapponois approched very neere, althoagh they aflSrme ^"- ^'- that the Noblemen of lappon that came into Europe did write all things very easily in their language were they of our proper names : yea, I have had some of their writings shewed me, whereby it seemes they should have some kinde of letters, although the greatest part of their writings be by the characters and figures, as hath bin saide of the Ghinois.

Chap. vi. — Of the Schooles and Vniveraities of China,

The fathers of our Company say that they have not seene in China any great schooles or vniversities of Philosophic, and other natural! sciences, beleeving there is not any, but that all their studie is in the Mandarin tongue, which is very ample and hard, as I have said ; and what they studie bee things written in their owne tongue, which be histories of sects, and opinions, of civill lawes, of morall proverbes, of fables, and many other such compositions that depend thereon. Of divine sciences they have no knowledge, neither of naturall things, but some small remainders of straied propositions, without art or methode, according to everie mans witte and studie. As for the Mathematikes, they have experience of the celestiall motions, and of the starres. And for Phisicke, they have knowledge of herbs, by means wherof they cure many diseases, and vse it much. They write with pencils, and have many books written with« the hand, and others printed, but in a bad order. They are great plaiers of comedies, the which they perform with great preparation of theaters, apparel, bels, drums, and voices. Some fathers report to have seen comedies which lasted ten or twelve dayes and nights, without any want of comedians, nor company to beholde them. They doe make many different sceanes, and whilst some act the others feede and sleep. In these comedies they do commonly treate of

402 MEXICAN WBTTING.

Lib. Ti. morall things, and of good examples, intermingled with pleasant devices. This is the summe of that which our men report of the letters and exercises of them of China, wherein wee must confesse to be much wit and Industrie.

, But all this is of small substance, for in effect all the knowledge of the Ghinois tendes onely to read and write, and no farther, for they attaine to no high knowledge. And their writing and reading is not properly reading and writing, seeing their letters are no letters that can represent wordes, but figures of innumerable things, the which cannot be learned but in a long time, and with infinite labour.

/ But in the end, with all their knowledge, an Indian of Peru or Mexico that hath learned to read and write knowes more than the wisest Mandarin that is amongst them : for that the Indian with foure and twentie letters which he hath learned will write all the wordes in the world, and a Mandarin with his hundred thousand letters will be troubled to write some proper name, as of Martin, or Alonso, and

^ with greater reason he shall be lesse able to write the names of things he knowes not. So as the writing in China is no other thing but a manor of painting or ciphring.

Chap. vii. — Of the fashion of letters and loritings which the

Mexicaines used.

W-e finde amongest the Nations of New Spaine a great knowledge and memorie of antiquitie, and therefore, searching by what meanes the Indians had preserved their Histories and so many particularities, I learned that although they were not so subtill and curious as the Chinois and those of lappon, yet had they some kinde of letters and bookes amongest them whereby they preserved (after their manner) the deeds of their predecessors. In the province of Yu-catan, where the Bishopricke is, which they caU of

MBXICAN PICTURE -WRITING. 403

Honduras^ there were bookes of the leaves of trees^ folded ^"•^ and squared after their manner, in the which the wise Indians contained the distribution of their times, the knowledge of the planets, of beasts and other natarall things, with their antiquities, a thing full of great curiositie and diligence. It seemed to some Pedant that all this was an inchantment and magicke arte, who did obstinately, maintaine that they ought to be burnt, so as they were committed to the fire. Which since, not onely the Indians found to be ill done, but also the curious Spaniards, who desired to know the secrets of the countrey. The like hath , happened in other things, for our men thinking that all was but superstition have lost many memorialls of ancient and holy things, which might have profited much. This pro- ceedeth of a foolish and ignorant zeale, who not knowing, nor seeking to knowe what concerned the Indians, say preiudicately that they are all but witchcrafts, and that all the Indians are but drunkards, incapable to know or leame anything. For such as would be curiously informed of^ them have found many things worthy of consideration. One of our company of lesuites, a man very witty and wel'f experienced, did assemble in the province of Mexico the Antients of Tescuco, of Talla, and of Mexico, conferring at . large with them, who shewed unto him their books, histories and kalenders, things very woorthy the sight, bicause they ; had their figures and hierogliphicks, whereby they repre- \ sented things in this manner : Such as had forme or figure were represented by their proper images, and such as had ^ not any were represented by characters that signified them, , and by this meanes they figured and writ what they would. ] And to observe the time when anything did happen they had those painted wheeles, for every one of them contained an age, which was two and fifty years, as hath beene said ; and of the side of those wheeles they did paint with figures and characters, right against the yeare, the memorable

D D 2

404 MEXICAN RECORDS.

^"- ^'- things that happened therein. As they noted the yeare whenas the Spaniards entred their Countrey, they painted a man with a hatte and a red ierkin vpon the signe of the reede^ which did rule then^ and so of other accidents. But / for that their writings and characters were not suflScient, as our letters and writings be, they could not so plainly expresse the words, but onely the substance of their conceptions. And forasmuch as they were accustomed to reherse Discourses and Dialogues by heart, compounded by their Oratours and auntient Rhethoritians, and many Chapas made by their Poets (which were impossible to leame by their Hierogliphickes and Characters), the Mexicaines were very curious to have their children learne those dialogues and compositions by heart. For the which cause they had Schooles, and as it were CoUedges or Seminaries, where the Auncients taught children these Orations, and many other things, which they preserved amongst them by tradition from one to another as perfectly as if they had beene written; especially the most famous Nations had a care to have their children (which had any inclination to be Rhetoritians, and to practise the office of Orators) to learne these Orations by heart : So as when the Spaniardes came into their Countrey, and had taught them read and write our letters, many of the Indians then wrote these Orations, as some grave men doe witnes that had read them. Which I say, for that some which shall haply reade these long and eloquent discourses in the Mexicaine Historic will easilie beleeve they have beene invented by the Spaniardes, and not really taken and reported from the Indians. But having knowne the certaine trueth, they will give credite (as reason is) to their Histories. They did also write these Discourses after their manner, by Characters and Images : and 1 have scene, for my better satisfaction, the Vaier rioster, Ave Maria, and Simboll, and the generall confession of our faith, written in this manner by the Indians.

MEXICAN RECORDS. 405

And in trueth, whosoever shall see them will wonder ^«"^'

thereat. For to signifie these words, I, a sinner, do confesse my self, they painted an Indian vpon his knees at a re- ligious mans feete, as one that confesseth himselfe : and for this, to God most mighty, they painted three faces, with their crownes, like to the Trinitie ; and to the glorious Virgine Marie, they painted the face of our Lady, and halfo the body of a little childe ; and for S. Peter and S. Paul, heads with crowns, and a key with a sword ; and whereas images failed, they did set characters, as ** Wherein I have sinned, etc/', whereby wee may conceive the quickenesse of spirite of these Indians, seeing this manner of writing of our prayers and matters of faith hath not been taught them by the Spaniards, neither could they have done it if they had not had an excellent conception of that was taught them. And I have scene in Peru a confession of sinnes, brought by an Indian, written in the same sorte, with pic- tures and characters, painting every one of the tenne Com- mandments after a certaine manner where there were cer- taine markes like ciphers, which were the sinnes he had committed against the Commandments. I nothing doubt but if any of the most sufficient Spaniards were imployed to make memorialles of the like things by their images and markes, they would not attaine vnto it in a whole year, no not in tenne.

Chap. viii. — Of Registers and the manner of reckoning which

the Indians of Peru vsed.

Before the Spaniards came to the Indies, they of Peru had no kinde of writing, either letters, characters, ciphers, or figures, like to those of China and Mexico: yet pre- served they the memory of their Antiquities, and maintained an order in all their affairs of peace, warre, and poUicie, for that they were carefuU observers of traditions from one to

406 PERUVIAN QUIPUS.

Lib. VI. another, and the young ones learned, and carefully kept, as a holy thing, what their superiors had tolde them, and taught it with the like care to their posteritie. Besides this diligence, they supplied the want of letters and writings, partely by painting, as those of Mexico (although they of Peru were very grosse and blockish), and partely, and most ^ commonly by Quippos.* These Quippos are memorialls or or registers, made of bowes,^ in the which there are diverse knottes and colours, which do signifie diverse things, and it is strange to see what they have expressed and repre- sented by this meanes : for their Quippos serve them insteede of Bookes of histories, of lawes, ceremonies, and accounts of their aflTaires. Tliere were officers appointed to keepe these Quippos, the which at this day they call Qui- pocamayos, the which were bound to give an account of everything, as Notaries and Registers doe heere. There- fore they fully believed them in all things, for, according to the varietie of business, as warres, poUicie, tributes, ceremonies and landes, there were sundry Quippos or braunches, in every one of the which there were so many knottes, little and great, and strings tied vnto them, some red, some greene, some blew, some white ; and finally, such ^ diversitie, that even as wee derive an infinite number of woordes from the foure and twenty letters, applying them in diverse sortes, so doe they draw innumerable woordes from their knottes and diversitie of colours. Which thing they doe in such a manner that if at this day in Peru, any Commissary come at the end of two or three years to take information vppon the life of any officer, the Indians come with their small reckonings verified, saying, that in such a village they have given him so many egges which he hath not payed for, in such a house a henne, in another two bur- dens of grasse for his horse, and that he hath paied but

» *' Muy grosseras y toscas." * " Quipus.'*

» *' Ramales," rope^s-ends.

PKKUVIAN QUI PUS. 407

BO mach mony, and remainetli debtor so mach. The proofe ^*'*- *'■ being presently made with these numbers of knottes and handfalls of cords, it remaines for a certaine testimony and register. I did see a handfull of these strings, wherein an Indian woman carried written a generall confession of all her life, and thereby confessed herselfe as well as I could have done it in written paper. I asked her what those strings meant that differed from the rest : she answered mee they were certaine circumstaunces which the sin required to be fully confessed. Besides these Quippos of thred, they have / an other, as it were ^ kinde of writing with small stoneSi by means whereof they leame punctually the words they desire to know by heart. It is a pleasant thing to see the olde and the impotent (with a wheele made of small stones) leame the Pater nosier y with another the Ave Maria ^ with another the Creede ; and to remember what stone signifies "Which was conceived by the holy-ghost, and which " Suffered under Pontius Pilate".

It is a pleasant thing to see them correct themselves when they doe erre ; for all their correction consisteth onely in beholding of their small stones. One of these wheeles were sufficient to make mee forget all that I do knowe by heart. There are a great number of these wheeles in the Church-yards for this purpose. But it seemes a kinde of witchcraft, to see an other kinde of Quippos, which they make of graines of Mays, for to cast vp a hard account, wherein a good Arithmetitian would be troubled with his penne to make a division ; to see how much every one must contribute : they do drawe so many graines from one side, and adde so many to another, with a thousand other inventions. These Indians will take their graines, and place five of one side, three of another, and eight of another, and will change one graine of one side, and three of another. So as they finish a certaine account, without erring in any poynt : and they sooner submitte themselves

• «•

408 YAEIOUS WAYS OP WETTING.

Lib. ti. ^ reason by these Quippos, what every one ought to pay, then we can do with the penne. Hereby we may judge if they have any understanding, or be brutish : for my parte, I think they passe vs in those things wherevnto they do apply themselves.

Chap. ix. — Of the order the Indians holde in their

writings.

It shalbe good to adde heerevnto what we have observed touching the Indians writings ; for their manner was not to write with a continued line, but from the toppe to the bottom e, or in circle- wise. The Latinos and Greeks do write from the left hand vnto the right, which is thfe vulgar and common manner we do vse. The Hebrewes contrari- wise beganne at the right to the left, and therefore their bookes beganne where ours did end. The Chinois write neither like the Greeks nor like the Hebrews, but from the toppe to the bottome, for as they be no letters but whole wordes, and that every figure and character signifieth a thing, they have no neede to assemble the parts one with an other, and therefore they may well write from the toppe to the bottome. Those of Mexico for the same cause did not write in line, from one side to another, but contrarie to the Chinois, beginning below, they mounted vpward. They vsed this maner of writing, in the account of their daies, and other things which they observed. Yet when they did write in their wheels or signes, they beganne from the mid- dest where the sun was figured, and so mounted by their yeeres vnto the round and circumference of the wheele. To conclude, wee finde four difierent kindes of writings, some writte from the right to the left, others from the left to the right, some from the toppe to the bottome, and others from the foote to the toppe, wherein wee may discover the diversity of mans judgment.

USE OF MES8EN0ERS. 409

Chap. x. — Hotv the Indians dispatched their Messengers,

To finish the maner they had of writing, some may, with JL"- ▼!. reason, doubt how the Kings of Mexico and Peru had intelligence from all those realmes that were so great, or by what means they could dispatch their affaires in Court, seeing they had no vse of any letters, nor to write pacquets : wherein we may be satisfied of this doubt, when we under- stand that by wordes, pictures, and these memorialles, they were often advertised of that which passed. For this cause there were men of great agilitie, which served as curriers, to goe and come, whom they did nourish in this exercise of running from their youth, labouring to have them well breathed, that they might runne to the toppe of a high hill without wearines. And therefore in Mexico they gave the prize to three or foure that first mounted vp the staires of the Temple, as hath beene said in the former Booke. And in Cusco, when they made their solemne feast of Capa- crayme, the novices did runne who could fastest vp the rocke of Tanacauri. And the exercise of running is gen- erally much vsed among the Indians. Whenas there chaunced any matter of importaunce, they sent vnto the Lordes of Mexico, the thing painted, whereof they would advertise them, as they did when the first Spanish ship ap- peared to their sight, and when they tooke Toponchan. In . Peru they were very curious of footemen, and the Ynca had them in all parts of the real me as ordinary Posts, called Chasquis^ whereof shall be spoken in his place.

Chap. xi. — Of the manner of governement, ayid of the Kings

which the Indians had.

It is apparant that the thing wherein these barbarous/ people shew their barbarisrae, was in their governement

410 OOYEBNMSMT IN VARIOUS COUNTRIES.

^^^- ^*- and manner of commannd : for the more that men approch to reason^ the more milde is their govemement^ and lesse insolent ; the Kings and Lords are more tractable^ agreeing better with their subiects^ acknowledging them eqaall in nature^ though inferiour in duetie and care of the common- wealth. But amongst the Barbarians all is contrary^ for that their government is tyrannous, vsing their subiects like beasts, and seeking to be reverenced like gods. For this occasion many nations of the Indies have not indured any Kings or absolute and soveraigne Lords, but live in commi- nalities, creating and appointing Captains and Princes for certaine occasions onely, to whome they obey during the time of their charge, then after they retume to their former estates. The greatest part of this new world (where there are no settled kingdoms, nor established common weales^ neither princes nor succeediug kings) they governe them- selves in this manner, although there be some Lordes and principall men raised above the common sort. In this sorte the whole Countrey of Chille is governed, where the Arau- canos, those of Tucapel and others, have so many yeeres resisted the Spaniards. And in like sort all the new kingdome of Granada, that of Guatemala, the Ilandes, all Florida, Brassill, Luson, and other countries of great cir- cuite : but that in some places, they are yet more barbarous, scarcely acknowledging any head, but all commannd and governe in common, having no other thing, but wil, violence, unreason, and disorder, so as he that most may, most com- maunds. At the East Indies there are great kingdomes, well ordered and governed, as that of Siam, Bisnaga,^ and others, which may bring to field when they please, a hun- dred or two hundred thousand men.

As likewise the Kingdome of China, the which in great- nes and power surpasseth all the rest, whose kings (as they report) have continued above two thousand yeares, by

• • Bijajrnagar."

MEXICO AND PKBU COKPABED. 411

meanes of their good order and government. But at the ^"•▼*- /

West Indies they have onely fonnd two Kingdomes .or

setled Empires^ that of the Mexicanes in New Spaine, and

of the Yncas in Peru. It is not easie to be said which of

the two was the mightiest Kingdome^ for that Mote^nma

exceeded them of Peru in buildings and in the greatnes of

his court : but the Yncas did likewise exceede the Mexi-

caines in treasure, riches, and greatnes of Provinces. In

regarde of antiquitie, the Monarchie of the Yncas hath the

advantage, although it be not much, and in my opinion they

have been equall in feates of armes and victories. It is

most certaine that these two .Kingdomes have much ex*

ceeded all the Indian Provinces discovered in this new

world, as well in good order and government as in power

and wealth, and much more in superstition and service of

their idolls, having many things like one to an other. But

in one thing they differed much, for among the Mexicaines /

the succession of the kingdome was by election, as the

Empire of the Romans, and that of Pern was hereditarie,

and they succeeded in bloud, as the Kingdomes of Fraunce

and Spaine. I will therefore heereafter treate of these two

governments (as the chiefe subiect and best knowne amongst

the Indians) being fit for thia discourse, leaving many

tedious details which are not of importance.

Chap. xii. — Of the Oovemm&td of the Kings Yncas of Peru.

The Ynca which ruled in Peru being dead, his lawfull Sonne succeeded him, and so they held him that was borne of his chiefe wife, whome they called Coya. The which they have alwaies observed since the time of an Ynca> called Yu- panqui, who married his sister : for these Kings held it an honour to marry their sisters. And although they had other wives and concubines, yet the succession of the King-

412 TNCA CEBEMONTES.

^^•^'- dome appertained to the son of the Coya. It is true, that when the King had a legitimate brother, he succeeded be- fore the Sonne, and after him his nephew and sonne to the first. The Curacas and Noblemen held the same order of succession in their goods and offices. And after their manor they made excessive ceremonies and obsequies for the dead. They observed one custome very great and fall of state, that a King which entred newly into his King- dome should not inherite any thing of the movables, imple- ments, and treasure of his predecessour, but hee must furnish his house new, and gather together gold, silver, and other things necessarie, not touching any thing of the de- ceased, the which was wholly dedicated for his Oratorio or Guaca, and for the entertainment of the family he left, the which with his of-spring was alwayes busied at the sacri- fices, ceremonies, and service of the deceased King: for, being dead, they presently held him for a god, making sacrifices vnto him, images, and such like. By this meanes, there was infinite treasure in Peru : for every one of the Tncas had laboured to have his Oratorio and treasure sur- passe that of his predecessors. The marke or ensigne, whereby they tooke possession of the realme, was a red rowle of wooU, more fine then silke, the which hung in the middest of his forehead : and none but the Ynca alone might weare it, for that it was as a Crowne and royall Diademe : yet they might lawfully weare a rowle hanging on the one side, neere vnto the eare, as some Noblemen did, but onely the Ynca might carry it in the middest of his forehead. At such time as they tooke this roule or wreathe, they made solemne feasts and many sacrifices, with a great quantity of vessells of gold and silver, a great number of small formes or images of sheep, made of gold and silver, great abundance of the stufies of Cumbi,^ well wrought, both fine and coarser, many shells of the sea of all sortes,

> " CcompV\ fine cloth.

YNOA OOVERNMBNT. 413

many feathers, and a thousand sheepe, which must be of ^"- divers colours. Then the chiefe Priest tooke a yong child in his handes, of the age of six or eight yeares, pronouncing these wordes with tjie other ministers speaking to the image . of Viracocha, Lord, we oflfer this vnto thee, that thou maiest maintaine vs in quiet, and helpe vs in our warres, maintaine our Lord the Ynca in his greatnes and estate, that hee may alwaies increase, giving him much knowledge to governe vs/^ There were present at this ceremony and oath men of all partes of the Bealme, and of all Guacas and Sanctuaries. And without doubt, the affection and reverence this people bare to their Kings Yncas, was very great, for it is never found that any one of his subiectes committed treason against him, for that they proceeded in their governments, not only with an absolute power, but also with good order and iustice, suffering no man to be oppressed. The Ynca placed govemours in divers Provinces, amongst the which some were superiors, and did acknowledge none but him- selfe, others were of lesse commaund, and others more par- ticular, with so goodly an order, and such gravitie, as no man durst bee drunke nor take an eare of Mays from his neighbour. These Yncas held it for a maxime, that it was necessary to keepe the Indians alwaies in action : and there- fore we see it to this day, long cawseis and workes of great labour, the which they say were made to exercise the In- dians, lest they should remaine idle. When he conquered any new Province, he was accustomed presently to send the greatest part, and the chiefe of that country into other Provinces, or else to his Court, and they call them at this day in Peru Mitimas, and in their places hee sent others of the Nation of Cusco, especially the Orejones, which were as Knights of an ancient house. They punished faultes rigor- ously. And therefore such as have any vnderstanding heereof hold opinion that there can be no better govern- ment for the Indians, nor more assured then that of the Yncas.

▼I.

414 DIVISIONS OF THE YNCA EMPIRE.

Lib. ti.

Chap. xiii. — Of the distribution the Tncas made of their

Vassals.

To relate more particularly what I have spoken before, you must vnderstand that the distribution which the Yncas made of their vassals was so exact and distinct, as he might goveme them all with great facilitie, although his realme were a thousand leagues long : for having conquered a Province, he presently reduced the Indians into Towns and Comminalties, the which he divided into bandes, hee ap- pointed one to have the charge over every ten Indians, over every hundred another, over every thousand another, and over ten thousand another, whom they called Hunu, the which was one of the greatest charges. Yet above all in every Province, there was a Governour of the house of the Yncas, whom all the rest obeyed, giving vnto him every yeare in particular account of what had passed, that is, of such as were borne, of those that were dead, and of their troups and graine. The Governors went every yeare out of Cusco, where they remained, and returned to the great feast of Eaymi, at the which they brought the tribute of the whole Bealme to the Court; neither might they enter /but with this condition. All the Kingdome was divided into foure partes, which they called Tahuantinsuyu, that is, Chinchasuyu, CoUasuyu, Antisuyu, and Cuntisuyu, accord- ing to the foure waies which went from Cusco, where the Court was resident, and where the generall assemblies of the realme were made. These waies and Provinces being answerable vnto them, were towards the foure quarters of the world, CoUasuyu to the South, Chinchasuyu to the North, Cuntisuyu to the West, and Antisuyu to the East. In every towne and village there were two sortes of people, which were of Hanansuyu and Urinsuyu, which is as much to say, as those above, and those below. When they com-

TNCA EDIFICES. 415

manded any worke to be done, or to furnish any thing to ^"- ^*- the Ynca, the oflScer knew presently how much every Pro- vince, Towne, and Family, ought to furnish, so as the divi- sion was not made by eqnall portions, but by cottization,^ according to the qualities and wealth of the Gountrie. So as for example, if they were to gather a hundred thousand Fanegas of Mays, they knew presently how much every Province was to contribute, were it a' tenth, a seventh, or a ^ft part. The like was of Townes and Villages and Ayllus or Linages. The Quipocamayos, which were the oflScers and intendants, kept the account of all with their strings and knottes, without failing, setting downe what every one had paied, even to a hen, or a burthen of wood, and in a mo- ment they did see by divers registers what every one ought to pay.

Chap. xiv. — Of the Edifices and maner of building of the

Yncas,

The Edifices and Buildings which the Yncas made in temples, fortresses, waies, countrie houses, and such like, were many in number, and of an excessive labour, as doth appeare at this day by their mines and fragments that have remained, both in Cusco, Tiahuanaco,* Tambo,* and other places, where there are stones of an vnmeasurable / greatnes, so as men cannot conceive how they were cut, brought, and set in their places. There came great numbers of people from all Provinces to worke in these buildings and fortresses^ which the Ynca caused to be made in Gusco, or other partes of the Bealme. As these workes were strange, and to amaze the beholders, wherein they vsed no mortar nor ciment, neither any yron, or Steele, to cut, and set the stones in place. They had no engines or other instruments to carie them, and yet

1 *' For quotas." « " Tiahuanaco." ^ u Ollantay-tampu."

r

416 * TNCA BEIDQES.

Lib. VI. were they so artificially wrought, that in many places they could not see the ioyntes, and many of these stones are so big, that it were an incredible thing if one should not see them. At Tiahuanaco I did measure a stone of thirty eight foote long, of eighteene broade, and six thicke. And in the wall of the fortresse of Cusco, which is of masonry,^ there are stones of a greater bignes. And that which is most strange, these stones being not cut nor squared to ioyne, but con- trariwise, very vnequall one with another in forme and greatnes, yet did they ioyne them together without ciment after an incredible maner. All this was done by the force of men who endured their labour with an invincible patience* For to ioyne one stone with an other, they were forced to handle and trie many of them often, being vneven. The Ynca appoynted every yeare what numbers of people should labour in these stones and buildings, and the Indians made a division amongest them, as of other things, so as no /man was oppressed. Although these buildings were great, yet were they commonly ill appoynted and vnfit, almost like to the mosques or buildings of the Barbarians. /^ They could make no arches in their edifices, nor mortar or cyment to builde them withall. When they saw arches of wood built vpon the river of Xauxa, the bridge being finished, and the wood broken downe, they all beganne to runne away, supposing that tBe bridge, which was of stone, should presently fall; but when they found it to stand firme, and that the Spaniards went on it, the Cacique saide to his companions, It is reason we should serve these men, who in trueth seeme to be the children of the Sunne". The bridges they made were of reedes plaited, which they tied to the bankes with great stakes, for that they could not make any bridges of stone or wood. The bridge which is at this day vpon the Desaguadero or river draining the great lake Chucuito^ in CoUao is admirable, for the course of that water ^ *' Maraposteria." * Or Titicaca.

TRIBUTE TO THE TNCA8. 417

is SO deep as they can not settle any foundation, and so broade ^"- ^'• that it is impossible to make an arch to passe it, so as it was altogether impossible to make a bridge eyther of wood or stone. But the wit and industry of the Indians invented a meanes to make a firme and assured bridge, being only of strawe, which seemeth fabulous, yet is it very true. For as we have said before, they did binde together certaine bundles of reedes, and weedes, which do grow in the lake that they call Totora, and being a light matter that sinkes not in the water, they cast it vppon a great quantity of reedes; then, having tied those bundles of weedes to either side of the river, both men and beasts goe over it with ease. Passing over this bridge I wondered, that of so/ common and easie a thing, they had made a bridge, better, and more assured than the bridge of boates from Seville to Triana. I have measured the length of this bridge, and, as I remember, it was above three hundred foote, and they say that the depth of this current is very great; and it seemes above, that the water hath no motion, yet they say, that at the bottom e it hath a violent and very furious course. And this shall suffice for buildings.

Chap. xv. — Of the Tncas revenues, and the order of Tributes

they imposed vpon the Indians.

The Yncas riches was incomparable, for although no king did inherite the riches and treasure of his predecessor, yet had he at commaund all the riches of his realmes, as well silver and gold, as the stuflFe of Curabi,'^ and cattell wherein they abounded, and their greatest riches of all, was their innumerable number of vassals, which were all imployed as it pleased the King. They brought out of every province what he had chosen for tribute. The Chichas sent him sweete and rich woods; the Lucanas sent bearers to

> Fine cloth.

418 YNCA REVENUE AND TBIBUTE.

Lib. Ti. carry his Litter; the Chumbivilcas, dauncers ; and so the other provinces sent him what they had of aboundaunce, besides their general! tribute, wherevnto every one contri- buted. The Indians that were appointed to that end, labored in the mines of golde and silver, which did abound in Peru, whom the Ynca intertained with all they needed for their expences ; and whatsoever they drew of gold and silver, was for him. By this meanes there were so great treasures in this kingdome, as it is the opinion of many, that what fell in the handes of the Spaniardes, although it were very much, as wee know, was it not the tenth part of that which they hid and buried in the ground, the which they could never discover, notwithstanding all the search covetousnesse / had taught them. But the greatest wealth of these barba- rous people, was, that their vassalles were all slaves, whose labour they vsed at their pleasure ; and that which is ad- mirable, they imployed them in such sorte, as it was no servitude vnto them, but rather a pleasing life. But to vnderstand the order of tributes which the Indians paj^ed vnto their Lordes, you must knowe, that when the Ynca conquered any citties, he divided all the land into three partes ; the first was for religion and ceremonies, so as the Pachayachachi,^ which is the Creator, and the Sunne, the Chuquilla, which is the Thunder, the Pachamama, and the dead, and other Guacas and sanctuaries, had every one their proper lands, the fruits whereof were spoyled and con- sumed in sacrifices, and in the nourishing of ministers and priests ; for there were Indians appoynted for every Guaca, and sanctuary, and the greatest parte of this revenue was spent in Cusco, where was the vniversall and generall sanc- tuarie, and the rest in that cittie where it was gathered ; for that after the imitation of Cusco, there were in every Citie, Guacas, and Oratories of the same order, and with the same functions, which were served after the same

' Teacher of the World.

YNCA REVENUE AND TRIBUTE. / ^ 419

manner and ceremonies to that of Cusco, which is an admi- ^"* • rable thing, and they have found it by proofe in above a hundred townes, some of them distant above two hundred leagues from Cusco. That which they sowed or reapt vpon their land, was put into houses, as granaries, or store-houses, built for that eflTect, and this was a great parte of the Tribute whioh the Indians payed. I can not say how much this parte amounted vnto, for that it was greater in some partes than in other, and in some places it was in a manner all ; and this parte was the first they put to profite. The second - parte of these lands and inheritances was for the Ynca, wherewith he and his householde were entertained, with his kinsfolks, noblemen, garrisons and souldiers. And therefore it was the greatest portion of these tributes, as it appeareth by the quantity of golde, silver, and other tributes, which were in houses appoynted for that purpose, being longer and larger than those where they keepe the revenues of the Guacas. They brought this tribute very carefully to Cusco, or vnto such places where it was needefull for the souldiers, and when there was store, they kept it tenne or twelve yeares, vntill a time of necessitie. The Indians tilled and put to profite the Yncas lands, next to those of the Guacas ; during which time they lived and were nourished at the charges of the Ynca, of the Sunne, or of the Guacas, according to the land they laboured. And the olde men, women, and sicke folkes were reserved and exempt from this tribute, and although whatsoever they gathered vpon those lands were for the Ynca, the Sunne, or the Guacas, yet the property appertayned vnto the Indians and their successors. The third parte of these landes were given by the Ynca for the - comminaltie, and they have not yet discovered whether this portion were greater or lesse than that of the Ynca or Guacas. It is most certaine they had u care and regarde that it should be sufficient for the nourishment of the people. No particular man possessed any thing proper to himself of

E E 2

Lib. ti.

420 FLOCKS OF LLAMAS.

this third portion, neither did the Indians ever possesse

any, if it were not by speciall grace from the Ynca ; and

yet might it not be engaged nor divided amongest his

heires. They every yeare divided these landes of the com-

minaltie, in giving to every one that which was needful for

the nourishment of their persons and families. And as the

familie increased or diminished^ so did they encrease or

decrease his portion, for there were measures appoynted for

every person. The Indians payed no tribute of that which

was apportioned vnto them ; for all their tribute was to till

and keepe in good order the landes of the Ynca, and the

Guacas, and to lay the fruits thereof in their store-houses. ^

When the yeare was barren, they gave of these fruits thus

reserved to the needy, for that there is alwayes supera-

boundance. The Ynca did likewise make distribution of

the cattell as of the landes, which was to number and divide

them ; then to appoynt the pastures and limites, for the

cattell belonging to the Guacas, and to the Ynca, and to

everie Towne ; and therefore one portion of their revenues

was for religion, another for the Ynca, and the third for the

Indians themselves. The like order was observed among

the hunters, being forbidden to take or kill any females.

The flocks of the Yncas and Guacas were in great numbers

and very fruitfuU ; for this cause they called them CapacUama;

but those of the common and publike, were few in number

and of small valew, and therefore they called them Huaccha-

llama.^ The Ynca took great care for the preservation of I

cattell, for that it hath beene, and is yet, all the wealth of

the Countrey, and as it is sayd, they did neither sacrifice ,

any females, nor kill them, neither did they take them when <

they hunted. If the mange or the scurvie, which they call j

Garachi, take any beast, they were presently commaunded

to bury it quicke, lest it should infect others. They did

sheare their cattell in their season, and distributed to every

8 CcapaCj rich ; HuacchOy poor. » 4

ARTS AND HANDICRAFTS. 421

one to spinne and weave stuffes for the service of his familie. ^"- ^'• They had searchers to examine if they did employ them- selves in these workes, and to punish the negligent. They made stuflFes of the wooU of the Yncas cattell, for him and for his family, one sorte very fine, which they called Cumbi, and another grosser, which they likewise called Abasca.^ There was no certaine number of these stuflFes and garments appointed, but what was delivered to every one. The wooll that remayned was put into the storehouses, whereof the Spaniards found them ful, and with all other things neces- sary for the life of man. There are few men of iudgement / but doe admire at so excellent and well settled a governe- ment, seeing the Indians (being neyther religious, nor christians) maintained after their manner, this perfection, nor to holde any private property, and to provide for all necessities, also maintaining with such aboundance matters of religion, and that which concerned their King and Lord.

Chap. xvi. — Of arts and offices which the Indians did

exercise.

The Indians of Peru had one perfection, which was to teach their young children all artes and occupations neces- sary for the life of man ; for that there were no particular trades-men, as amongst vs, taylors, shoemakers, weavers, and the rest, but everyone learned what was needefull for their persons and houses, and provided for themselves. All coulde weave and make their garments, and therefore the Ynca by furnishing them with wooll, gave them clothes. Every man could till the ground, and put it to profite, with- out hyring of any labourers. All built their owne houses," and the women vnderstoode most, they were' not bred vppe in delights, but served their husbands carefully. Other arts and trades which were not ordinary and common for the life

• Auasca, coarse cloth.

422 HEAD-DRESSES.

Lib. Yi. q( man, had their proper companies and workmen, as gold- smiths, painters, potters, watermen, and players of instru- ments. There were also weavers and workemen for exqui-

^ site workes, which the noblemen vsed : but the common people, as hath beene said, had in their houses all things necessary, having no need to buy. This continues to this day, so as they have no need one of another for things necessary : touching his person and family, as shoes and garments, and for their house, to so we and reape, and to

/make yron woorkes, and necessary instruments. The Indians heerein doe imitate the institutions of the ancient monks, whereof is intreated in the lives of the Fathers. In trueth it" is a people not greatly covetous, nor curious, so as they are contented to passe their time quietly, and without doubt, if they made choise of this manner of life, by election, and not by custome or nature, we may say that it was a life of great perfection, being apt to receive the doctrine of the holy Gospel, so contrary an enimy to pride, covetousness, and __ delights. But the preachers give not alwayes good example, according to the doctrine they preach to the Indians. It is woorthy observation, although the Indians be simple in their manner and habites, yet do wee see great diversitie amongest the provinces, especially in the attire of their head, for in some places they carried a long piece of cloth which went often about, in some places a large piece of cloth, which went but once about, in some parts as it were little morters or hattes, in some others as it were high and round bonets, and some like the bottome of sacks, with a thousand

/other differences. They had a straight and inviolable lawe, that no man might change the fashion of the garments of his province, although hee went to live in another. This the Ynca held to be of great importance for the order and good governement of his realme, and they doe observe it to this day, though not with so great a care as they were accustomed.

F0ST8 AND MESSENGERS. 423

Chap. xvti. — Of the Posts and Ghasquis the hidians

did vse.

There were many Posts and couriers which the Ynca lib. n. maintained throughout his realme, whom they called Ghas- quis, and they carried commaundements to the Governours, and returned their advises and advertisements to the Gourt. These Ghasquis were placed at every topu, which was a league and a halfe one from an other in two small houses, where were foure Indians. These were furnished by diflferent districts, and changed monthly. Having received the packet or message, they ranne with all their force vntill they had delivered it to the other Ghasquis, such as were to runne being ready and watchfuU. They ran fifty leagues in a day and night, although the greatest parte of that countrey be very rough. They served also to carry such things as the Ynca desired to have with speede. Therefore they had always sea-fish in Gusco, of two dayes old or little more, although it were above a hundred leagues oflF. Since the Spaniardes entred, they have vsed of these Ghasquis in time of seditions, whereof there was great need. Don Martin,^ the Viceroy, appoynted ordinary posts at every foure leagues, to carry and recarry despatches, which were very necessary in this realme, though they run not so swiftly as the auntients did, neither are there so many, yet they are well payed, and serve as the ordinaries of Spaine, delivering letters, which they each carry foure or five leagues.

Ghap. XVIII. — Of the lustice, lawes, and punishments which the Yncas have established, and of their marriages.

Even as sucb as had done any good service in warre, or ill the govemement of the common-weale, were honoured

" Don Martin Henriquez.

Lib. ti.

424 TNCA MARRIAGES.

and recompensed with publike charges, with lands given them in proper, with armes and tijbles of honour, and in marrying wives of the Tncas linage, even so they gave severe punishments to such as were disobedient and offend- ers. They punished murther, theft, and adultery, with death, and such as committed incest with ascendants or de- scendants in direct line, were likewise punished with death. But they held it no adultery to have many wives or con- cubines, neyther were the women subject to the punishment of death, being found with any other, but onely she that was the true and lawful! wife, with whome they contracted marriage ; for they had but one whome they did wed and receive with a particular solempnitie and ceremony, which was in this maner : the bridegroome went to the bride's house, and led her from thence with him, having first put an otoja^ vppon her foote. They call the shooe which they vse in those partes, otoja, being open like to the Francis- can Friars. If the bride were a mayde, her otqja was of wooll, but if she were not, it was of reedes. All his other wives and concubines did honour and serve this as the law- ful wife, who alone, after the decease of her husband, caried a mourning weed of blacke, for the space of a yeare ; neither did she marry vntil that time were past; and commonly she was yonger than her husband. The Ynca himselfe, with his own hand, gave this woman to his Governors and Captains ; and the Governors or Caci- ques assembled all the young men and maydes, in one place of the City, where they gave to everyone his wife with the aforesaid ceremony, in putting on the otoja, and in this manner they contracted their marriages. If this woman were found with any other man than her husband, shee was punished with death, and the adulterer likewise : and although the husband pardoned them, yet were they punished, although dispensed withall from death. They

^ Usuta,B, sandal.

TNCA MARRIAGES. 425

inflicted the like punishment on him that did commit i^^vi- incest with his mother, grandmother, daughter, or grand- childe : for it was not prohibited for them to marry together, or to have of their other kinsfolkes for concubines ; onely the first degree was forbidden. Neither did they allow the brother to have the company of his sister, wherein they of Peru were very much deceived, beleeving that the Yncas and noble men might lawfully contract marriage with their sisters, yea, by father and mother : for in trueth it hath beene alwayes helde vnlawfuU among the Indians, and for- bidden to contract in the first degree; which continued vntill the time of Tupac Tnca Yupanqui, father to Guayna- capa, and grandfather to Atahualpa, at such time as the Spaniards entered Peru, for that Tupac Ynca Yupanqui, was the first that brake this custom e, marrying with MamaocUo, his sister by the father's side, decreeing that the Yncas might marry with their sisters by the father's side, and no other.

This he did, and by that marriage he had Guaynacapa,^ and a daughter called Coya Cusilimay. Finding himselfe at the poynt of death, he commaunded his children, by father and mother, to marry together, and gave permission to the noble men of his country, to marrie with their sisters by the fathers side. And for that this marriage was vnlawful, and against the lawe of nature, God would bring to an end this kingdome of the Ynca, during the raigne of Huascar Ynca, and Atahualpa Ynca, which was the fruite that sprang from this marriage. Whoso will more exactly vnderstand the manner of marriages among the Indians of Peru, lette him reade the treatise Polo hath written, at the request of Don leronimo Loaifa, Archbishop of the city of the Kings : which Polo made a very curious search, as he hath doone of divers other things at the Indies. 'L'he which importes much to be knowne to avoyde the errour and inconveniences where into

^ Huayna Ccapac.

42 G INDIAN GOVEBNMBNTS.

Lib. ti. many fall (which know not which is the lawfuU wife or the concubine among the Indians) caasing the Indian that is baptized to marry with his concubine, leaving the lawfuU wife : thereby also wee may see the small reason some have had^ that pretended to say, that wee ought to ratifie the marriage of those that were baptized, although they were ^ brother and sister. The contrary hath beene determined by the provinciall Synode of Lyma, with much reason, seeing among the Indians themselves this kind of marriage is vn- lawful.

Chap. xix. — Of the OHginall of the Yncas, Lords of Peru, with tJieir Conquests and. Victories.

By the commandement of Don Philip the Catholike King, they have made the most diligent and exact search that could be, of the beginning, customes, and priviledges ^ of the Yncas, the which was not so perfectly done as was desired, for that the Indians had no written recordes; yet they have recovered that which I shall write by meanes of their Quippos and registers. First, there was not in Peru in olde time, any King or Lord to whome all obeyed, but they were comminalties, as at this day there be in the realme of Chile, and in a maner, in all the Provinces which the Spaniards have conquered in those west- erne Indies, except the realme of Mexico. You must y therefore understand that they have found three maner of - governments at the Indies. The first and best was a Monarchic, as that of the Yncas, and of MoteQuma, although ^ for the most part they were tyrannous. The second was of Comminalties, where they were governed by the advice and authoritie of many, which are as it were Counsellors. These in time of warre made choice of a Captaine, to whome a whole Nation or Province did obey; and in time of peace every Towne or Comminaltie did rule and governe them-

EXTENT OP THE YNCA EMPIRE. 427

selves, having some chiefe men whom the vulgar did re- lib. n. spect, and sometimes, though not often, some of them assemble together about matters of importance to consult what they should thinke necessary. The thirde kinde of - government is altogether barbarous, composed of Indians without law, without King, and without any certaine place of abode, but go in troupes like savage beasts. As farre as J can conceive, the first inhabitants of the Indies were of this kinde, as at this day a great part of the Bresillians, Chiriguanas, Chunchos, Yscaycingas, PilcoQones, and the greatest part of the Floridians, and all the Chichiraecos in New Spaine. Of this kind the other sort of government by Comminalties was framed by the industrie and wisedome of some amongst them, in which there is some more order, holding a more staied place, as at this day those of Arau- cano, and of Tucapel in Chile, and in the new kingdome of Granada, the Moscas, and the Otomites in New Spaine; and in all these there is lesse fiercenes and incivilitie, and much more quiet then in the rest. Of this kinde, by the valure and knowledge of some excellent men, grew the other government more mightie and potent, which did in- stitute a Kingdome and Monarchic. It appeares by their registers, that their government hath continued above three hundred yeares, but not fully foure, although their Seig- niorie for a long time was not above five or six leagues compasse about the Citty of Cusco. Their originall and / beginning was in the valley of Cusco, where by little and little they conquered the lands which we called Peru, pass- ing beyond Quito, vnto the river of Pasto towardes the North, stretching even vnto Chile towardes the South, which is almost a thousand leagues in length. It extended in breadth vnto the South Sea towardes the west, and vnto the great champains which are on the other side of the Andes, where at this day is to be scene the castell which is called the Pucara of the Ynca, the which is a fortresse

428 ORIGIN OF THE YNCAS.

LiB.yi. built for the defence of the frontire towards the East.

The Yncas advanced no farther on that side, for the abound-

ance of water, marshes, lakes, and rivers, which runne in

those partes. These Yncas passed all the other Nations of

America in policy and government, and much more in

valour and armes, although the Canaris which were their

mortall enemies, and favoured the Spaniardes, would never

confesse it, nor yeelde them this advantage; so as even at

this day, if they fall into any discourse or comparisons, and

that they be a little chafed and incensed, they kill one

another by thousands vpon this quarrel, which are the most

valiant, as it hath happened in Cusco. The practice and

meanes which the Yncas had to make themselves Lords of

all this Gountrie^ was in faining that since the generall

deluge, whereof all the Indians have knowledge, the world

had beene preserved, restored, and peopled by these Yncas,

and that seven of them came foorth of the cave of Pacari-

tambo, by reason whereof, all other men owed them tribute

and vassalage, as their progenitors. Besides, they said

and affirmed, that they alone held the true religion, and

knew how God should be served and honoured; and for this

cause they should instruct all men. It is a strange thing

the ground they give to their customes and ceremonies.

There were in Cusco above foure hundred Oratories, as in a

holy land, and all places were filled with their mysteries.

As they continued in the conquests of Provinces, so they

brought in the like ceremonies and customes. In all this

realme the chiefe idol they did worship was Viracocha

Pachayachachic,* which signifies the Creator of the world,

and after him the Sunne. And therefore they said, that

the Sunne received his vertue and being from the Creator,

as the other idolls do, and that they were intercessors to

him. .

} Teacher of the world ; from Yachani^ 1 teach.

LINEAGE OP THE YNCAS. 429

Chap. xx. — Of the first Ynca^ and his Successors,

The first man which the Indians report to be the begin- ^"' ^ ning and first of the Yncas was Mangocapa,^ whom they / imagine, after' the deluge, to have issued forth of the cave of Tambo, which is from Cusco about five or six leagues. They say that he gave beginning to two principall races or families of the Yncas, the one was called Hanancusco, and the other Vrincusco : of the first came the Lords which sub- dued and governed this Province, and the first whom they make the head and stem of this family was called In- garoca,* who founded a family or Ayllu, as they call them, named Vicaquirao.* This, although he were no great Lord, was served notwithstanding in vessell of gold and silver. And dying, he appointed that all his treasure should be imployed for the service of his body, and for the feeding of his family. His successor did the like : and this grew to a generall custome, as I have said, that no Ynca might inherite the goods and house of his predecessor, but did build a new pallace. In the time of this Ingaroca the In- dians had images of gold ; and to him succeeded Yaguar- guaque,* a very old man : they say he was called by this name, which signifies teares of blood, for that being once vanquished and taken by his enemies, for griefe and sorrow he wept blood. He was buried in a village called Paulo, which is vpon the way to Omasuyo: he founded a family called Ayllu-panaca.^ To him succeeded his soune Viracocha Ynca, who was very rich and made much vessell of gold and silver : hee founded the linage or family of Cocopanaca. Gonzalo Pizarre sought out his body, for the report of the great treasure was buried with him, who, after he had cruelly

1 Manco Ccapac. * Ynca Rocca.

' Vicaquirau; from quirau, a cradle. — See G. de la Vega^ ii, p. 531.

• Yahuar-hiaccac, literally, " Weeping blood".

® See G. de la Vega^ ii, p. 531.

430 YNCA TRADITIONS.

Lib. VI. tormented many Indians, in the end he found it in Xaquixa- guana^ whereas they said Pizarro was afterwards vanquished, taken^ and executed by the President Gasca. Gonzalo Pizarro caused the body of Viraeocha Ynca to be burnt; the Indians did afterwardes take the ashes, the which they pre- served in a small vessell, making great sacrifices therevnto, vntill Polo did reforme it, and other idolatries which they committed vpon the bodies of their other Yncas, the which hee suppressed with an admirable diligence and dexterity, drawing these bodies out of their hands, being whole, and much imbalmed, whereby he extinguished a great number of idolatries which they committed. The Indians tooke it ill that the Ynca did in title himselfe Viraeocha, which is the name of their God: and he to excuse himselfe, gave them to vnderstand that the same Viraeocha appeared to him in his dreame, commanding him to take this name. To him succeeded Pachacuti Ynca Yupanqui, who was a very valiant conquerour, a great politician, and an inventor of a great part of the traditions and superstitions of their idol- atrie, as I will presently shew.

Chap. xxi. — Of Pachacuti Ynca Yupanqui, and what hap- pened in his time vnto Ouaynacapa.

/ Pachacuti Ynca Yupanqui reigned seventy yeares, and conquered many Countries. The beginning of his conquests was by meanes of his eldest brother, who, having held the government in his fathers time, and made warre by his con- sent, was over-throwne in a battle against the Chancas, a Nation which inhabites the valley of Andahuaylas thirty or forty leagues from Cusco, vpon the way to Lima. This elder brother thus defeated, retyred himselfe with few men. The which Ynca Yupanqui, his yonger brother seeing, de- vised and gave forth that, being one day alone and melan-

YNCA TRADITIONS. 431

cholie^ Yiracocha^ the Creator^ spake to him^ complaining that though he were vniversall Lord and Creator of all things^ and that hee had made the heaven, the Sonne, the world, and men, and that all was vnder his command, yet did they not yeelde him the obedience they ought, but contrariwise did equally honour and worship the Sunne, Thunder, Earth, and other things, which had no virtue but what he imparted vnto them : giving him to vnderstand, that in heaven where hee was, they called him Viracocha Pachayachachic, which signifieth vniversall Creator ; and to the end the Indians might beleeve it to be true, he doubted not although he were alone, to raise men vnder this title, which should give him victory against the Chancas, al- though they were then victorious, and in great numbers ; and make himselfe Lord of those realmes, for that he would send him men to his aide invisibly, whereby he prevailed in such sort, that vnder this colour and conceit, hee beganno to assemble a great number of people, whereof he made a mighty armie, with the which he obtaynod the victorie, making himselfe Lord of the whole Kealme, taking the government from his father and brother. Then afterwardes he conquered and overthrew the Chancas, and from that time commanded that Viracocha should be held for vniver- sall Lord, and that the images of the Sunne and Thunder should do him reverence and honour. And from that time they beganne to set the image of Viracocha above that of the Sunne and Thunder, and the rest of the Guacas. And although this Ynca Yupanqui had given farmes, landes, and cattell to the Sunne, Thunder, and other Guacas, yet did he not dedicate any thing to Viracocha, saying that he had no neede, being vniversall Lord and Creator of all things. He informed bis souldiers after this absolute victory over the Chancas, that it was not they alone that had conquered them, but certain e bearded men, whome Viracocha had sent him, and that no man might see them but himselfe, which

Lib. ti.

432 MUMMIES OF THE YNCAS.

Lib. VI. Y^QYO sioce Converted into stones ; it was therefore neces- sary to seeke them out whome he would know well. By this meanes hee gathered together a multitude of stones in the mountaines, whereof he made choice, placing them for Guacas, or IdoUs, they worshipped and sacrificed vnto ; they called them Pururaucas,^ and carried them to the warre with great devotion, beleeving for certaine that they had gotten the victory by their help. The imagination and fiction of

^^ ' this Ynca was of such force, that by the means thereof hee obtained goodly victories. He founded the family called Ynacapanaca, and made a great image of golde, which hee called Ynti-yllapa, which hee placed in a brancard of golde, very rich, and of great price, of the which gold the Indians took great store to carry to Caxamarca for the libertie and ran some of Atahualpa, when the Marquis Francisco Pizarro held him prisoner. The Licentiate Polo found in his house in Casco his servants and Mamaconas, which did service to his memorie, and found that the body had beene transported from Patallacta to Totocachi, where the Spaniards have since founded the parish of San Bias. This body was so whole and preserved with a certaine rosin, that it seemed alive ; he had his eyes made of a fine cloth of golde, so arti- ficially set, as they seemed very naturall eyes; he had a blowe with a stone on the head, which he had received in the warres ; he was all grey and hairy, having lost no more haire than if hee had died but the same day, although it were seaventy and eight yeares since his decease. The foresaid Polo sent this body with some others of the Yncas to the cittie of Lima, by the viceroy es commaund, which was the Marquis of Canete, and the which was very neces- sary to root out the idolatry of Cusco. Many Spaniards have scene this body with others in the hospital of San Andres, which the Marquis built, but they were much de- cayed. Don Felipe Caritopa, who was grand-child or

• See G. de la Vega^ 11, p. 57.

THE YNCA HUATNA CCAPAC. 433

great grand-childe to this Ynca, affirmed that the treasure ^"- "• he left to his family was greats which should be in the power of the Yanaconas, Amaru^ Titu, and others. To this Ynca succeeded Tupac Ynca Yupanqui^ to whom his son of the same name succeeded^ who founded the family called Ccapac Sylla.^

Chap. xxii. — Of the greatest and moat famous Ynca called

Ouaynacapa,

To this latter Ynca succeeded Ouaynacapa^ which is to say, a yoong man, rich and valiant,^ and so was he in trueth more than any of his predecessors, or successors. Hee was very wise, planting good orders thorowout his whole realme, hee was a bold and resolute man, valiant, and very happy in warre. Hee therefore obtained great victories, and extended his dominions much farther then all his predecessors had done before him ; he died in the realme of Quito, the which he had conquered, foure hundred leagues distant from his court. The Indians opened * him after his decease, leaning his heart and entrailes in Quito ; the body was carried to Cusco, the which was placed in the renowmed temple of the Sunne. We see yet to this day many cawseries, buildings, fortresses, and notable workes of this king : hee founded the familie of Tumi-bamba. This Guaynacapa was wor- shipped of his subjects for a god, being yet alive, as the olde men affirme, which was not doone to any of his predeces^ sours. When he died, they slew a thousand persons of his^^ householde, to serve him in the other life, all which died willingly for his service, insomuch that many of them offered themselves to death, besides such as were appoynted : his riches and treasure was admirable. And forasmuch as the

^ See G. de la Vega, ii, p. 631.

• Htiayna, young ; Ccapac, rich.

F P

/

484 ARRIVAL OF SPANIARDS.

Lni. vt. Spaniards entred soone after his death, the Indians labonred

— much to conceale all, although a great parte thereof was carried to Gaxamarca^ for the ransom e of Atahualpa, his sonne. Some woorthy of credite affirme that he hadde above three hundred sonnes and grand-children in Cusco. His mother, called MamaocUo, was much esteemed amongst them. Polo sent her body, with that of Guaynacapa, very well imbalmed, to Lima, rooting out infinite idolatries. To Guaynacapa succeeded in Cusco, a sonne of his called Titu- cusi-hualpa^ who since was called Huascar Tnca ; his body was burned by the captaines of Atahualpa, who was likewise Sonne to Guaynacapa, and rebelled in Quito against his brother, marching against him with a mighty armie. It happened that Quisquis and Chilicuchi, captains to Ata- hualpa, took Huascar Tnca in the cittie of Cusco, being received for Lord and king (for that hee was the lawfuU successor) which caused great sorrowe throughout all his kingdome, especially in his Court. And as alwayes in their necessities they had recourse to sacrifices, finding themselves vnable to set their Lord at libertie, as well for the great power the captaines had that tooke him, as also, for the great army that came with Atahualpa, they resolved (some say by the coramaundement of this Tnca) to make a great and solemne sacrifice to Viracocha Pachayachachic, which signifieth vniversall Creator, desiring him, that since they coulde not deliver their Lord, he would send men from heaven to deliver him from prison. And as they were in this great hope, vpon their sacrifice, news came to them, that a certaine people come by sea, was landed, and had taken Atahualpa prisoner. Heerevpon they called the Spaniards Viracochas, beleeving they were men sent from God, as well for the small number they were to take Atahualpa in Caxamarca, as also, for that it chaunced after their sacrifice done to Viracocha, and thereby they began to call the Spaniards Viracochas, as they doe at this day.

THB LAST TNCAS. 435

And in tmth^ if we had given them good example^ and such ^■- ^' as we onght^ these Indians had well applied it, in saying they were men sent from God. It is a thing very well ' worthy of consideration, how the greatnesse and providence of God, disposed of the entry of our men at Peru, which had beene impossible, were not the dissention of the two brethren and their partisans, and the great opinion they hadde of christians, as of men sent from heaven, bound (by the taking of the Indians countrey) to labour to winne soules vnto Almightie God.

Chap, xxiii. — Of the last Successors Yncas.

The rest of this subiect is handled at large by the Spanish Writers in the histories of the Indies, and for that it is not my purpose, I will speake only of the succession of the Yncas. Atahualpa being dead in Gaxamarca, and Huascar in Cusco, and Francisco Pizarro with his people having seised on the realme, Mancocapa, sonne to Guaynacapa, besieged them in Cusco very straightly ; but in the end he abandoned the whole countrey, and retired himselfe to Vilca-bamba, where he kept himselfe in the mountaines, by reason of the rough and difficult access, and there the successors Yncas remained, vntill Amaru, who was taken and executed in the market place of Cusco, to the Indians incredible griefe and sorrow, seeing iustice doone vpon him publiquely whome they helde for their Lorde.^ After which time, they im- prisoned others of the lineage of these Yncas. I have knowne Don Carlos, grand-childe to Guaynacapa, and sou to Paullu, who was baptized, and alwayes favoured the Spaniards against Mancocapa his brother. When the Mar- quis of Canete governed in this countrey, Sayri Tupac Ynca,

^ Tupac Amaru, the last Ynca, was beheaded by order of the Viceroy Toledo in 1671.

Ff2

436 MEXICAN SUCCESSION.

Lib. ▼!. ^ent from Yilcabamba and came vpon assurance to the citty of Eings^ where there was given to him the valley of Yacay^ and other things^ to whom succeeded a daughter of his. Beholde the succession which is knowne at this day of that great and rich familie of the YncaSj whose raigne continued above three hundred yeeres, wherein they reckon eleaven successors^ vntill it was wholly extinguished. In the other linage of Vrincusco, which (as we have said before) had his beginning likewise from the first Mancocapa, they reckon eight successors in this sort. To Mancocapa succeeded Sinchi Bocca, to him Ccapac Yupanqui^ to him Lloqui Yupanqui, to him Mayta Ccapac^ to him Tarco- guaman^ vnto whome succeeded his sonne^ whome they name not^ to this son succeeded Don luan Tambo^ Mayta- panaQa. This sufficeth for the originall and succession of the Yncas^ that governed the land of Peru^ with that that I have spoken of their lawes^ governement^ and manner of life.

Chap. xxiv. — Of the manner of the Meosieaines eommon-weale.

Although you may see by the historic which shall be written of the kingdome, succession, and beginning of the Mexicaines, their manor of commonweale and govemement^ yet will I speake briefly what I shall thinke fitte in generall to be most observed ; whereof I will discourse more amply / in the historic. The first point whereby we may iudge the Mexicaine governement to be very politike, is the order they had and kept inviolable in the election of their king ; for since their first, called Acamapich, vnto their last, which was MonteQuma, the second of that name, there came none to the crowne by right of succession, but by a lawfull nomi- nation and election. This election in the beginning was by

1 This name is not in the lists of other authors.

MEXICAN SUCCESSION. 437

the Yoyce of the commons, although the chiefe men managed ^"* it. Since in the time of Iscoatl the fourth king, by the advise and order of a wise and valiant man, called TIacael, there were foure certayne Electours appoynted, which (with two lordes or kings subiect to the Mezicaine, the one of Tescuco and the other of Tacuba) had power to make this election. They did commonly choose yoong men for their/ kings^ because they went alwayes to the warres, and this was in a manner the chiefe cause why they desired them so. They had a speciall regard that they shoulde be fit for the warreSj and take delight and glory therein. After the elec- tion they made twoo kindes of feasts, the one in taking possession of the royall estate, for the which they went to the Temple, making great ceremonies and sacrifices vppon the harth, called Divine, where there was a continuall fire before the altare of the idoll, and after some Bhetoritians practised therein, made many orations and speeches. The other feast, and the most solemne, was at his coronation, for the which he must first overcome in battell, and bring a certaine number of captives, which they must sacrifice to . their gods ; he entred in triumph with great pompe, making him a solemne reception, as well they of the Temple, who went all in procession, sounding on sundry sortes of instru- mentS; giving incense, and singing like secular men, as also the courtiers, who came forth with their devises to receive the victorious king. The Crowne or royall ensigne was before like to a Myter, and behinde it was cut, so as it was not round, for the fore parte was higher, and did rise like a poynt. The king of Tescuco had the privilege to crown the king of Mexico. The Mexicaines have beene very/ duetifuU and loyall vnto their kings; and, it hath not beene knowne that they have practised any treason against them; onely their Histories report, that they sought to poison their king called Ti^occi, being a coward, and of small account ; but it is not found that there hath beene any dissentions or J

TI.

438 MEXICAN NOBILITY. '

i^y^' partialities amongest them for ambition, thogh it be an " ordinary thing in Comminalties ; but contrariwise they reporte, as yon shall see heereafter, that a man, the best of the Mexicaines, refased this realme, seeming vnto him to be very expedient for the Common- weale to have an other king. In the beginning, when the Mexicaines were bat poore and weake, the kings were very moderate in their expenses and in their Conrt, bat as they increased in power they increased hkewise in pompe and state, vntill they came to the greatnesse of Monte9nma, who if hee had had no other thing but his house of beasts and birds, it had beene a prowde thing, the like whereof hath not beene scene ; for there was in this house all sortes of fish, birds, and beasts, as in an other Noahs Arke, for sea fish there were pooles of salt-water, and for river fish lakes of fresh- water, birds that do prey were fedde, and likewise wilde beasts in great aboundaunce ; there were very many Indians imployed for the keeping of these beasts ; and when he found an impossibilitie to nourish any sort of fish, fowle, or wilde beast, hee caused the image or likenesse to be made, richly cutte in pretious stones, silver, or golde, in marble, or in stone ; and for all sortes of entertainements, hee had his severall houses and pallaces, some of pleasure, others of sorrowe and mourning, and others to treate of the affairs of the realme. There was in this pallace many chambers, according to the qualitie of noble men that served him, with a strange order and distinction.

Chap. xxv. — Of the titles and dignities the Indians vsed.

The Mexicaines haye beene very curious to divide the degrees and dignities amongst the Noble men and Lords, that they might distinguish them to whom they were to give the greatest honour. The dignity of these foure

• MSXICAN NOBILITY. 439

Electors was the greatest^ and most honourable next to the ^" ^'- king, and they were chosen presently after the kings elec- tion. They were commonly brothers, or very neare kinsmen to the king, and were called Tlacohecalcatl, which signifies prince of darts, the which they cast, being a kind of armes they Yse much. The next dignitie to this were those they doe call Tlacatecatl, which is to say circnmcisers or cutters of men. The third dignitie were of those which they called Ezuahuacatl, which signifies a sheader of blood. All the which Titles and Dignities were exercised by men of warra There was another, a fourth, intituled, Tlilancalqui, which is as much to say, as Lord of the blacke house, or of darkenesse, by reason of certaine incke wherewith the Priests annoynted themselves, and did serve in their idola- tries. All these foure dignities were of the great Counsell, without whose advise the king might not doe anything of importance ; and the king being dead they were to choose another in his place out of one of those foure dignities. Besides these, there were other Gounsells and Audiences, and some say there were as many as in Spaine, and that there were divers seates and iurisdictions, with their Coun- sellers and ludges of the Court, and others that were vnder them, as Corregidors, chiefe ludges, captaines of lustice. Lieutenants, and others, which were yet inferiour to these, with a very goodly order. All which depended on the foure first Princes that assisted the king. These foure onely had authority and power to condemne to death, and the rest sent them instructions of the sentences they had given. By meanes whereof they gave the king to vnderstand what had passed in his Bealme.

There was a good order and settled policie for the re-/ venues of the Crowne, for there were oflScers divided throughout all the provinces, as Receivers and Treasurers, which received the Tributes and royall reveuews. And they carried the Tribute to the Court, at the least every

440 MEXICAN WABTABE. »

Lib. ti. moneth ; which Tribute was of all things that doe growe or ingender on the land, or in the water, as well of iewells and

/apparrell, as of meat. They were very carefuU for the well ordering of that which concerned their religion, superstition, and idolatries, : and for this occasion there were a great number of Ministers, to whom charge was given to teach the people the custome and ceremonies of their Lawe. Heerevppon one day a christian Priest made his complaint that the Indians were no good Christians, and did not profite in the lawe of God ; an olde Indian answered him

/ very well to the purpose in these terms : *^ Let the Priest, saide hee, imploy as much care and diligence to make the Indians christians, as the ministers of IdoUes did to teach them their ceremonies ; for with halfe that care they will make vs the best christians in the worlde, for that the lawe of Jesus Christ is much better j but the Indians learne it not, for want of men to instruct them/* Wherein hee spake

^ the very trueth, to our great shame and confusion.

Chap. xxvi. — How the Mendcaines made Warre, and of their

Orders of Knighthood.

The Mexicaines gave the first place of honour to the pro- fession of armes, and therefore the Noblemen are their chiefe souldiers, and others that were not noble, by their valour and reputation gotten in warres, came to dignities and honours, so as they were held for noblemen. They gave goodly recompences to such as had done valiantly, who inioyed priviledges that none else might have, the which did much incourage them. Their armes were of rasors of sharpe cutting flints, which they set on either side of a staffcj which was so furious a weapon, as they affirmed that with one blow, they would cut oflF the necke of a horse. They had strange and heavy clubbes, lances fashioned like

MEXICAN KNIGHTHOOD. 441

pikeSj and other maner of dartes to cast, wherein they were very expert; but the greatest part of their combate was performed with stones. For defensive armes they had little rondaches or targets, and some kind of morions or head-pieces invironed with feathers. They were clad in the skinnes of tigres^ lions, and other sauage beasts. They came presently to hands with the enemie^ and were greatly practised to mnne and wrestle, for their chief maner of combate, was not so much to kill, as to take captives, the which they vsed in their sacrifices, as hath beene said. Monteguma set knighthood in his highest splendor, ordaining certaine militarie orders, as Commanders, with certaine markes and ensignes. The most honourable amongest the Knightes, were those that carried the crowne of their haire, tied with a little red ribband, having a rich plume of feathers, from the which, did hang branches of feathers vpon their shoulders, and roules of the same. They carried so many of these rowles, as they had done worthy deedes in warre. The King himselfe was of this order, as may be scene in Chapultepec, where Montezuma and his sonnes were attyred with those kindes of feathers, cut in the rocke, the which is worthy the sight. There was another order of Knighthood, which they called the lions and the tigres, the which were commonly the most valiant and most noted in warre, they went alwaies with their markes and armories. There were other Knightes, as the grey Knightes, the which were not so much respected as the rest : they had their haire cut round about the eare. They went to the war with markes like to the other Knightes, yet they were not armed but to the girdle, and the most honourable were armed all over. All Knightes might carry golde and silver, and weare rich cotton, and use painted and gilt vessell, and carry shooes after their maner : but the common peo- ple might vse none but earthen vessell, neyther might they carry shooes, nor attyre themselves but in Nequen, the

Lib. tx.

442 MEXICAN SCHOOLS.

Lib. vi. ^hich is a grosse staffe. Every order of these Knightes had his lodging in the pallace noted with their markes ; the first was called the Princes lodgings the second of Eagles^ the third of Lions and Tigres, and the fourth of the grey Knightes. The other common oflBcers were lodged vnder- neath in meaner lodgings : if any one lodged out of his place^ he sujBTored death.

Chap, xxvii. — Of the great order and diligence the Mexi- caines vsed to instruct their youth.

There is nothing that gives me more cause to admire^ nor that I finde more worthy of commendations and me- mory^ then the order and care the Mexicaines had to nou- rish their youth; for they knew well that all the good hope of a common weale consisted in the nurture aud institution of youth, whereof Plato treates amply in his bookes De Legihus; and for this reason they laboured and tooke paines to sequester their children from delights and liberties, which are the two plagues of this age, imploying them in honest and profitable exercises. For this cause there was in their Temples a private house for childeren, as schooles, or col- ledges, which was seperate from that of the yong men and m aides of the Temple, whereof we have discoursed at large. There were in these schooles a great number of children, whom their fathers did willingly bring thither, and which had teachers and masters to instruct them in all commend- able exercises, to be of good behaviour, to respect their superiors, to serve and obey them, giving them to this end certain precepts and instructions. And to the end they might be pleasing to Noblemen, they taught them to sing and dance, and did practise them in the exercise of warre, some to shoote an arrow, to cast a dart or a stafie burnt at i

the end, and to handle well a target and a sword. They I

I

V

MEXICAN SCHOOLS. 448

saffered them not to sleepe mnch^ to the end they might ^"- ^'* accustome themselves to labour in their youth, and were not men given to delightes. Besides the ordinary number of these children^ there were in the same colledges other children of Lordes and Noblemen, the which were instructed more privately. They brought them their meate and ordi- nary from their houses^ and were recommended to antients and old men to have care over them, who continually did ^ advise them to be vertuous and to live chastely; to be sober in their diet^ to fast, and to march gravely^ and with measure. They were accustomed to exercise them to tra- vell^ and in laborious exercises; and when they see them instructed in all these things, they did carefully looke into their inclination, if they found any one addicted to the war, being of sufficient yeares, they sought all occasions to make triall of them, sending them to the warre, vnder colour td carry victnalls and munition to the souldiers^ to the end they might there see what passed, and the labour they suffered. And that they might abandon all feare, they were laden with heavy burthens, that shewing their courage therein, they might more easily be admitted into the com- pany of souldiers. By this meanes it happened that many went laden to the Armie and returned Captaines with markes of honour. Some of them were so desirous to bee noted, as they were eyther taken or slaine; and they held it lesse honourable to remaine a prisoner; and, therefore, they sought rather to be cut in peeces then to fall captives into their enemies hands. See how Noblemens children that * were inclined to the warres were imployed. The others that had their inclination to matters of the Temple; and to speake after our maner, to be Ecclesiastical men, having attained to sufficient yeares, they were drawne out of the coUedge, and placed in the temple in the lodging appointed for religious men, and then they gave them the orders of Ecclesiasticall men. There had they prelates and masters

441 DANCES AND MUSIC.

'"• ^'- to teach them that which concerned their profession, where they should remaine being destined therevnto. These Mexi- caines tooke great care to bring vp their children : if at this day they would follow this order, in building of houses and coUedges for the instruction of youth, without doubt Chris- tianitie should florish much amongst the Indians. Some godly persons have begunne, and the King with his Coun- sell have favored it : but for that it is a matter of no profit, / they advance little, and proceed coldly. God open our eyes, that we may see it to our shame, seeing that we Christians do not that which the children of darkenes did to their perdition, wherin we forget our duties.

Chap, xxviii. — Of the Indians feasts and dances.

Forasmuch as it is a thing which partly dependes of the good government of the Common-weale, to have some plaies and recreations when time serves ; it shall not be from the purpose to relate what the Indians did heerein, especially the Mexicaines. We have not discovered any Nation at the Indies that live in commonalties, which have not their recreations in plaies, dances, and exercises of pleasure. At Peru I have seene plaies in maner of combats, where the men of both sides were sometimes so chafed that often their Puclla (which was the name of this exercise) fell out to be dangerous. I have also seene divers sortes of dances, wherein they did counterfait and represent certaine trades and offices, as sheepherds, laborers, fishers, and hunters, and commonly they made all those dances with a very -grave sound and pase: there were other dances and maskes, which they called cuacones, whose actions were pure repre- sentations of the divelL There were also men that dance on the shoulders one of another, as they do in Portugall, the / which they call pelas. The greatest part of these dances

DANCES AND MUSIC. 445

were superstitions and kindes of idolatries : for that they ^■- '^'• honoured their idoUs and Guacas in that maner. For this reason the Prelates have laboured to take from them these dances all they could: but yet they suffer them^ for that part of them are but sportes of recreation^ for alwaies they dance after their maner. In these dances they vse sundry sortes of instruments^ whereof some are like flutes or little lutesj others like drummes^ and others like shells: but commonly they sing all with the voyce^ and first one or two sing the song^ then all the rest answer them. Some of these songs were very wittily composed, contayning his- tories, and othgi^s were full of superstitions, and some were meere follies, f Our men that have conversed among them / have laboured to reduce matters of our holy faith to their tunes, the which hath profited well : for that they imploy whole daies to rehearse and sing them, for the great pleasure and content they take in their tunes. They have likewise put our compositions of musicke into their lan- guage, as Octaves, Songs, and Bondells, the which they have very aptly turned, and in truth it is a goodly and very necessary meanes to instruct the people^ In Peru they commonly called dances Taqui, in other Provinces Areytos, in Mexico Mitotes. There hath not beene in any other / place any such curiositie of plaies and dances as in New Spaine, where at this day we see Indians so excellent dancers, as it is admirable. Some dance vpon a cord, some vpon a long and straight stake^ in a thousand sundrie sortes^ others with the soles of their feete and their harames do handle, cast vp, and receive againe a very heavy blocke, which seems incredible but in seeing it. They do make many other shewes of their great agilitie in leaping, vault- ing, and tumbling, sometimes bearing a great and heavie burthen, sometimes enduring blowes able to breake a barre of yron. But the most usuall exercise of recreation among the Mexicaines is the solemne Mitote^ and that is a kinde

446 DANCES AND MUSIC.

^^' ^'- of daunce they held so brave and so honorable, that the king himselfe dannced^ but not ordinarily^ as the king Don Pedro of Aragon with the Barber of Valencia. This daunce or Mitote was commonly made in the Courts of the Tem- ple^ and in those of the kings houses^ which were more spatious. They did place in the midst of the Court two instruments^ one like to a drumme, and the other like a barrell made of one peece, and hollow within, which they set vppon the forme of a man^ a beast, or vpon a piller.

These two instruments were so well accorded together, that they made a good harmony : and with these instru- ments they made many kinds of aires and songs. They did all sing and dance to the sound and measure of these instruments, with so goodly an order and accord, both of their feete and voices, as it was a pleasant thing to beholde. In these daunces they made two circles or wheeles, the one was in the middest neere to the instruments, wherein the Auntients and Noblemen did sing and daunce with a softe and slowe motion ; and the other was of the rest of the people round about them, but a good distance from the first, wherein they daunced two and two more lightly, making diverse kindes of pases, with certaine leapes to the measure. All which together made a very great circle. They attired themselves for these dances with their most pretious apparrell and iewelles, every one according to his abilitie, holding it for a very honorable thing : for this cause they learned these daunces from their infancie. And although the greatest parte of them were doone in honor of their Idolles, yet was it not so instituted, as hath bin said, but only as a recreation and pastime for the people. There- fore it is not convenient to take them quite from the Indians, but they must take good heed they mingle not their superstitions amongest them. I have scene this Mi- tote, in the court of the Church of Tepotzotlan, a village . seven leagues from Mexico : and, in my opinion^ it was a

DANCES AND MUSIC. 447

good thing to busie the Indians vpon festival! dayes^ seeing ^"- ^'• they have neede of some recreation : and because it is pnb- like^ and withont the prejudice of any other, there is lesse inconvenience than in others, which may be done privately by themselves, if they tooke away these. IWe must there- . fore conclude, followiug the counsel of pope Gregory, that it was very convenient to leave vnto the Indians that which they had usually of custom, so as they be not mingled nor corrupt with their antient errors, and that their feasts and pastimes may be to the honor of God and of the Saints, whose feasts they celebratej This may suf- fice in generall of the manors and politike customes of the Mexicaines. And as for their beginning, increase, and Empire, for that it is an ample matter, and will be pleasant to vnderstand from the beginning, we will intreate thereof in the Booke following.

THE SEVENTH BOOKE

Of the Naturall and Morall Historic of the

Indies.

Eccles. i.

Chap. i. — That it is profitable to vnderstand the actes of the Indians, especially of the Mexicaines.

Ln. rn. ^jy^sy Historj, wel Written, is profitable to the reader : For as the Wise man saith^ That which hath bin^ is^ and that which shall be^ is that which hath beene/' Humane things have much resemblance in themselves^ and some growe / wise by that which happeneth to others. There is no Nation, how barbarous so ever^ that have not something in them good, and woorthy of commendation ; nor Common- weale so well ordered, that hath not something blame- worthy, and to be controlled. If, therefore, there were no other fruite in the Historic and Narration df the"^ deedes of the Indians, but this common vtilitie, to be a Belation or Historic of things, the which in the eflFect of truth have happened, it deserveth to be received as a profit- able thing, neither ought it to be reiected, for that it con- cemes the Indians. As we see that those Authors that treate of naturall things, write not onely of generous beasts, notable and rare plants, and of pretious stones, but also of wilde beasts, common hearbes, and base and vulgar stones, for that there is alwayes in them some properties worthy observation. If, therefore, there were nothing else in this Discourse, but that it is a Historic, and no fables nor fictions, it were no vnwoorthy subject to be written or read.

FIRST INHABITANTS OF MEXICO. 449

There is yet an other more particular reason^ which is, that ^"- "• wee ought heerin to esteeme that which is woorthy of memorie, both for that it is a Nation little esteemed, and / also a subiect different from that of our Europe, as these Nations be, wherein wee should take most pleasure and content, to vnderstand the ground of their beginning, their maner of life, with their happy and vnhappy adventures. And this subiect is not onely pleasant and agreeable, but also profitable, especially to such as have the charge to rule and goveme them ; for the knowledge of their acts invites vs to give credite, and dooth partely teach howe they ought to be intreated : yea, it takes away much of that common . f and foolish contempt wherein they of Europe holde them, supposing that those Nations have no feeling of reason. For in trueth wee can not cleere this errour better, than by the true report of the actes and deedes of this people. I will, therefore, as briefly as I can, intreate of the beginning, proceedings, and notable deedes of the Mexicaines, whereby wee may know the time and the disposition that the high God woulde choose, to send vnto these Nations the light of < the Gospel of lesus Christ his only sonne our Lord, whome I beseech to second our small labour, that it may be to the glory of his Divine greatnes, and some profite to these people, to whome hee hath imparted the lawe of his holy gospel.

Chap. ii. — Of the ancient Inhabitants of New Spaine, and

how the Navatlacas came thither.

The antient and first Inhabitants of those provinces, which wee call New Spaine, were men very barbarous and savage, which lived onely by hunting, for this reason they were called Chichimecas. They did neither sowe nor till the ground, neither lived they together ; for all their exercise

G o

450 FIRST INHABITANTS OF MEXICO.

Lib. VII. ^as to hunt, wherein they were very expert. They lived in the roughest partes of the mountaines beastlike^ without any poUicie, and they went all naked. They hunted wilde beasts, hares, connies, weezles, mowles, wilde cattes, and birdes, yea vncleane beasts, as snakes^ lizards^ locusts, and wormes, whereon they fed, with some hearbs and rootes. They slept in the mountaines, in caves and in bushes, and the wives likewise went a hunting with their husbandes, leaving their yoong children in a little panier of reeds, tied to the boughs of a tree, which desired not to suck vntill they were returned from hunting. They had no superiors, nor did acknowledge or worship any gods, neyther hadde any manner of ceremonies or religion.

There is yet to this day in New Spaine of this kinde of people, which live by thair bowes and arrowes, the which are very hurtfull, for that they gather together in troupes to doe mischiefe, and to robbe : neither can the Spaniards by force or cunning reduce them to any poUicie or obedience : for having no towns nor places of residence, to fight with them, were properly to hunt after savage beasts, which scatter and hide themselves in the most rough and covered places of the mountaines. Such is their manor of living even to this day, in many Provinces of the Indies. In the '^ Bookes De procuranda Indorum salute, they discourse chiefly of this sort of Indians, where it is saide that they are to be constrained and subiected by some honest force, and that it is necessary first to teach them that they are men, and then to be Christians. Some will say that those in New Spaine, which they call Otomies, were of this sort, being commonly poore Indians, inhabiting a rough and barren land, and yet they are in good numbers, and live together with some order, and such as do know them, find them no lesse apt and capable of matters of Christian religion, than others which are held to be more rich and better governed. Comming, therefore, to our subiect, the

THE NAVATLACAS. 451

Chichimecas and Otomies, which were the first inhabitants ^"- ^" - of New Spaine, for that they did neyther till nor sowe the land^ they left the best and most fertile of the country vnpeopled, which Nations that came from farre did possess, whome they called Navatlacas, for that it was a more civill and poUitike Nation ; this word signifies a people that^ speakes well, in respect of other barbarous nations without reason. These second peoplers, Navatlacas, came from other farre countries, which lie toward the north, where now they have discovered a kingdome they call New Mexico.

There are two provinces in this count rey, the one called Aztlan, which is to say a place of Herons : the other Tuculhuacan, which signifies a land of such, whose grand- fathers were divine. The Inhabitants of these provinces have their houses, their lands tilled, gods, customes, and ceremonies, with like order and governement to the Navat- lacas, and are divided into seven Tribes or Nations : and for that they have a custome in this province, that every one of these lineages hath his place and private territory. The Navatlacas paint their beginning and first territory in figure of a cave, and say that they came forth of seven caves to come and people the land of Mexico, whereof they make mention in their Historie, where they paint seven caves and men comming forth of them. By the computa- tion of their bookes, it is above eight hundred yeeres since these Navatlacas came foorth of their country, reducing which to our accompt, was about the yeere of our Lord 720, when they left their country to come to Mexico, they stayed foure score years vpon the way ; and the cause of this their / long stay in their voyage, was, that their gods (which with- out doubt were divells, and spake visibly vnto them) had -- pers waded them to seeke new lands that had certaine signes. And therefore they came discovering the whole land, to search for these tokens which their IdoUs had given them ; and in places where they found any good^^^sg^lliiigs, they

rN-VERSITY \

452 THE NAVATLACAS.

Lib. VII. peopled it, and laboured the land, and as they discovered better countries, they left those which they had first peopled, leaving still some, especially the aged, sick folkes, and the weary ; yea, they did plant and build there, whereof we see the remainders at this day. In the way where they passed, they spent fourescore yeares in this manner of leasurely travell, the which they might have done in a moneth. By this meanes they entred the land of Mexico in the yeare nine hundred and two, after our computation.

Chap. hi. — How the six Lineages of Navatlacas peopled the

land of Mexico.

These seven Lineages I have spoken of, came not forth all together : the first were the Suchimilcos, which signifie a !N'ation of the seedes of flowers. Those peopled the bankes of the great lake of Mexico towards the South, and did build a cittie of their name, and many villages. Long time after came they of the second lineage called Chalcas, which signifies people of mouthes, who also built a cittie of their name, dividing their limmits and territories with the Suchi- milcos. The third were the Tepanecas, which signifies people of the bridge : they did inhabite vpon the banke of the lake towards the West, and they increased so, as they called the chiefe and Metropolitane of their Province, Azcapuzalco, which is to say, an Ants nest, and they con- tinued long time mighty. After them came those that peopled Tezcuco, which be those of Culhua, which is to say, a crooked people : for that in their Countrey there was a mountaine much bending.^ And in this sort this lake was invironed with these foure Nations, these inhabiting on the East, and the Tepanecas on the North. These of Tezcuco, were held for great Courtiers, for their tongue and pronun- tiation is very sweete and pleasant. Then arrived the

» ** Cerro muy encorvado.

THE NAVATLACAS. 453

Tlatluicas, which signifies men of the Sierra or monntaine. ^"' ^ "- Those were the most rude «nd grosse of all the rest, who finding all the plaines about the lake possessed even vnto the Sierra^ they passed to the other side of the mountain e^ where they found a very fertile^ spatious and warme conn- trey, where they built many great villages, calling the Metropolitane of their province, Quahunahuac, which is as much to say, as a place that sounds the voice of an Eagle, which our common people call by corruption, Quernavaca, and at this day they call this province the Marquisate. Those of the sixt generation, which are the Tlascaltecas, which is to say men of bread, passed the monntaine towards the east, crossing all the Sierra Nevada, where that famous Vulcan is betwixt Mexico and the Ciudad de los Angeles, where they did finde a good country, making many buildings. They built many townes and citties, whereof the Metropol- itane was called by their name Tlascala. This is the nation which favoured the Spaniards at their entrie, by whose help they did winne this country, and therefore to this day they pay no tribute but enioy a generall exemption. When all these Nations peopled these countries, the Chi- chimecas being the antient inhabitants, made no resistance, but fledde, and as people amazed they hid themselves in the most obscure of the rockes. But those that inhabited on th' other side of the monntaine where the Tlascaltecas had planted themselves, did not suffer them in quiet, as the rest of the Chichimecas had done, but they put themselves in defence to preserve their country, and being giants, as the Histories report, they sought to expell the last comers, but they were vanquished by the policy of the Tlascaltecas, who counterfeiting a peace with them, they invited them to a great banquet, and when they were busiest in their drunkennes, there were some laide in ambush, who secretly stole away their weapons, which were great clubbes, targets, swords of wood, and other such armes. Then did they

454 THE TLASCALTECAS.

LxB. vn. sodainely set vpon them^ and the Chichimecaa seeking to defend themselves, they did want their armes, so as they fled to the mountaines and forrests adioyning, where they pulled downe trees as if they had beene stalkes of lettices. But, in the end, the Tlascaltecas being armed, and march- ing in order, they defeated all the giants, not leaving one alive. We must not holde this of the giants to be strange or a fable ; for, at this day, we finde dead mens bones of an incredible bignes.

When I was in Mexico, in the yeare of our Lorde one thousand five hundred eighty sixe, they found one of those giants buried in one of our farmes, which we call lesus del Monte, of whom they brought a tooth to be seene, which (without augmenting) was as big as the fist of a man ; and, according to this, all the rest was proportionable, which I saw and admired at his deformed greatnes. The Tlascalte- cas, by this victory, remained peaceable, and so did the rest of the lineages. The six lineages did alwayes entertaine ami tie together, marrying their children one with another, and dividing their limites quietly : then they studied with an emulation to encrease and beautifie their common-weale. The barbarous Chichimecas, seeing what passed, beganne to vse some government, and to apparrell themselves, being ashamed of what had passed: for till then they had no shame. And having abandoned feare by their communica- tion with these other people, they beganne to learne many things of them, building small cottages, having some poUicie and government. They did also choose Lordes, whom they did acknowledge for their superiors, by meanes whereof they did in a manner quite abandon this brutish life, yet did they alwayes continue in the Mountaines divided from the rest.

Notwithstanding, I hold it for certaine that this feare hath growne from other Nations and Provinces of the In- dies, who at the first were savage men, who living onely by

PEOPLINQ OF AMERICA. 455

hunting, pierciDg the rockio and rough countries, discover- ^"- ^"* ing a new world, the inhabitants whereof were almost like savage beasts, without coverings or houses, without tilled landes, without cattell, without King, Law, God, or Reason. Since others, seeking better and new lands, inhabited this ^ fertile Countrey, planting pollitike order and a kinde of common-weale, although it were very barbarous. After the same men, or other Nations, that had more vnderstanding then the rest, laboured to subdue and oppresse the lesse mighty, establishing Bealmes and great Empires. So it happened in Mexico, at Peru, and in some partes where they finde Citties and Gommon-weales planted among these Barbarians. That which confirmes me in my opinion (whereof I have amply discoursed in the first booke), that the first inhabitants of the West Indies came by land, and so by consequence that the first continent of the Indies / ioynes with that of Asia, Europe, and AflPrike, and the new world with the old, although they have not yet discovered any countrey that toucheth and ioynes with the other world ; or if there be any sea betwixt the two, it is so narrow that wilde beasts may easily swim over, and men in small boates. But leaving this Philosophic, let vs returne to our history.

Chap. iv. — Of the Mexicaines departure^ of their iourney and peopling the Province of Mechoacan.

Three hundred and two yeares after, the former two lineages had left their Country to inhabite New Spaine, the Country being now well peopled and reduced to some forme of government. Those of the seventh cave or line arrived, which is the Mexicaine Nation, the which, like vnto the rest, left the Province of Aztlan and Teuculhuacan, a pollitike, courtlike, and warlike Nation. They did worship the Idoll / Vitzilipuztli, whereof ample mention hath beene made, and the divell that was in this idoll spake, and governed this

Lib. tii.

456 MIGRATION OF THE MEXICANS.

Nation easily. This idoll commanded them to leave their Country, promising to make them Princes and Lords over all the Provinces which the other six Nations did possesse^ that hee woald give them a land abounding with gold^ silver^ pretious stones, feathers, and rich mantells : where- vpon they went forth, carrying their idoll with them in a coflfer of reedes, supported by foure of their principall priests, with whome he did talke and reveale vnto them in secret, the successe of their way and voyage, advising them of what should happen. He likewise gave them lawes, and taught them the customes, ceremonies, and sacrifices they should observe. They did not advance nor moove without commandement from this idoll. He gave them notice when to march and when to stay in any place, wherein they wholy obeyed him. The first thing they did wheresoever they came was to build a house or tabernacle for their false god, |

which they set alwaies in the middest of their Campe, and there placed the Arke vppon an altare, in the same manner !

as they have vsed in the holy Christian Church. This done, j

they sowed their land for bread and pulses, which they vsed: and they were so addicted to the obedience of their god, that if he commanded them to gather, they gathered ; but if he commanded them to raise their campe, all was left there for the nourishment of the aged, sicke, and wearie, which they left purposely from place to place, that they might people it, pretending by this meanes that all the land should remaine inhabited by their Nation. This going forth and peregrination of the Mexicaines will happily seeme like to that of Egypt, and to the way which the children of Israeli made, seeing that they, as well as those, were warned to go forth and to seeke the land of promise, and both the one and the other carried their god for their guide, consulted with the arke and made him a tabernacle, and he advised them, giving them lawes and ceremonies, and both the one and the other spake many yeares in their

■^

iiaB«»

MIORATION OF THE MEXICANS. 457

voyage to their promised land^ where we observe the resem- ^"- ^*'- blance of many other things^ as the histories of the Mexi- caines do report^ and the holy scriptures testifie of the Israelites. And without doubt it is a true things that the Divel], the prince of pride, hath laboured by the supersti- tions of this Nation, to counterfaite and imitate that which the most high God did with this Nation : for^ as is said be- fore, Satan hath a strange desire to compare and make himselfe equal with God: so as this mortall enemy hath pretended falsely to vsurpe what, communication and fami- liaritie he hath pleased with men. Was there ever divell / found so familiarly conversant with men as this divell Yitzi- lipuztli. We may wel iudge what he was, for that there was never seene nor heard speake of customes more super- stitious, nor sacrifices more cruel and inhumane, than those which he taught them. To conclude, they were invented by the enemy of mankinde. The chiefe and Captaine whome they followed was called Mexi, whence came the name of Mexico, and of the Mexicaine Nation. This people marching thus at leisure, as the other six Nations had done, peopling and tilling the land in divers partes, whereof there is yet some shewes and mines : and after they had endured many travells and dangers, in the end they came to the Province of Mechoacan, which is as much to say, a land of fish, for there is great abundance in goodly great lakes, where, contenting themselves with the situation and tem- perature of the ground, they resolved to stay there. Yet, having consulted with their idoU vpon this point, and find- ing him vnwilling, they demanded license to leave some of their men to people so good a land, the which he granted, teaching them the meanes how to do it, which was, that when the men and women should be entred into a goodly lake called Pazcuaro to bathe themselves, those which re- mained on land should steale away all their clothes, and then secretly raise their campe and depart without any

458 ABANDONMENT OF A WITCH.

LxB. Tii. braite, the which was efifected, and the rest which dreamt not of this deceit (for the pleasure they tooke in bathing), comming forth and finding themselves spoiled of their gar- ments, and thus mocked and left by their companions, they remained discontented and vexed therewith : so as, to make shew of the hatred they had conceived against them, they say that they changed their maner of life and their language. At the least, it is most certaine that the Mechoacans have been alwaies enemies to the Mexicaines, and therefore they came to congratulate the Marquis Del Valle,^ after his victory obtained when he had conquered Mexico.

Chap. v. — 0/ that which happened in Malinalco, Tula, and

in ChapuUepec.

From Mechoacan to Mexico are above fifty leagues, and vpon the way is Malinalco, where it happened that com- ^ plaining to their idoU of a woman that was a notable witch, which came in their company carrying the name of a sister to their god, for that with her wicked artes she did them much harme, pretending by certaine meanes to be worshipped of them as their goddesse : the idoU spake in a dreame to one of those old men that carried the arke, com- maunding him to comfort the people, making them new and great promises, and that they should leave this his sister with her family, being cruell and bad, raising their campe at mid-night in great silence, leaving no shew what way they passed. So they did, and the witch remaining alone with her family, in this sort peopled a towne which they call Malinalco, the inhabitants whereof are held for great sorcerers, being issued from such a mother. The Mexi- caines, for that they were greatly diminished by these divi- sions, and by the number of sicke and wearied persons which they had left behind, meant to repaire themselves,

' Ilernan Cortes.

CONTINUED MARCH OF THE MEXICANS. 459

and to stay in a place called Tula^ which signifies a place of reedes. There their idoll commanded them to stoppe a great river, that it might cover a great plaine, and by the meanes he taught them they did inviron a little hill called Coatepec, making a great lake, the which they did plant round about with willows, elmes, sapines, and other trees. There beganne to breede much fish, and many birdes came thither : so as it became a very pleasant place. The situa- tion of this place seeming pleasant vnto them, and being wearied with travell, many talked of peopling there, and to passe no farther : wherewith the divell was much displeased, threatning the priests with death, commanding them to re- tume the river to hir course, saying that he would that night chastise those which had beene disobedient as they had deserved. And as to do ill is proper to the Divell, and that the divine lustice doth often suflfer such to be delivered into the hands of such a tormentor, that choose him for their god ; it chanced that about mid-night they heard a great noise in one part of the carape, and in the morning going thither they found those dead that had talked of stay- ing there. The maner of their death was, that their stomackes were opened and their hearts pulled out. And by that meanes this good god taught these poore miserable creatures the kindes of sacrifices that pleased him, which was in opening the stomacke to pull out the heart, as they have since practised in their horrible sacrifices. Seeing this punishment, and that the plaine was dried, the lake being emptied, they asked counsell of their god what to doe, who commanded them to passe on, the which they did by little and little, vntill they came to Chapultepec, a league from Mexico, famous for the pleasantnes thereof. They did forti- fie themselves in these mountaines, fearing the nations which inhabited that Country, the which were opposite vnto them, especially for that one named Copil, sonne to this sorceresse, left in Malinalco, had blamed and spoken ill of

LiB.TII.

460 MIGRATION OF THE MEXICANS.

»

' Lib. ni. the Mexicaines : for this Copil^ by the commandement of his mother, awhile after followed the Mexicaines course, labouring to incense the -Tepanecas and other neighbours against them^ even vnto the Chalcas : so as they came with a strong army to destroy the Mexicaines. Gopil^ in the meane space, stoode vpon a little hill in the middest of a lake called Acopilco, attending the destruction of his enemies, and they, by the advise of their idoll, went against him, tooke him suddenly, and slew him, carrying his heart to their god, who commanded them to cast it into the lake, faining that thereof did grow a plant called Tunal,^ where since Mexico was built. They came to fight with the Chal- cas and other Nations, having chosen for their Gaptaine a valiant man called Yitzilonitli, who, in an encounter, was taken and slaine by the enemies. But for all this, they were not discouraged, but fought valiantly; and in dispight of their enemies they brake the squadrons, and carrying their aged, their women, and yong children in the midst of their battaile, they passed on to Atlacuyavaya, a town of the Gul- huas, whom they found solemnising of a feast, in which place they fortified. The Ghalcas, nor the other Nations, did not follow them, but grieved to be defeated by so small a number of men; they being in so great multitudes re- tyred to their townes.

Chap, vi. — Of the Warres the Mexicaines had against them

of Oulhuacan,

The Mexicaines, by the advice of their idoll, sent their messengers to the Lord of Culhuacan, to demand a place to dwell in, who after he had imparted it to his people, granted them the place of Tijaapan, which signifies white waters, to the end they should all perish there, being full of vipers, snakes, and other venomous beasts which bred in a

^ Prickly pear.

HIORATION OF THE MEXICANS. 461

hill neere adioyning. But being perswaded and taught by ^"- ^^ their divell, they accepted willingly what was ofifered, and by their diveHsh art tamed these beastes, so as they did them no harme ; yea^ they vsed them as meat^ eating them with delight and appetite. The which the Lord of Cul- huacan seeing, and that they had tilled and sowed the land^ he resolved to receive them into the Cittie^ and to contract amity with them. But the god whom the Mexicaines did worship (as he is accustomed to do no good^ but ill) said vnto his priests^ that this was not the place where he would have them stay^ and that they must go forth making warres. Therefore they must seeke forth a woman^ and name her the goddesse of Discord. Wherevpon they resolved to send to the King of Gulhuacan^ to demand his daughter to be Queene of the Mexicaines, and mother to their god^ who received this Ambassage willingly^ sending his daughter presently gorgeously attyred and well accompanied. The same night she arrived, by order of the murthererwhome they worshipped, they killed her cruelly, and having flaed her artificially as they could do, they did clothe a yong man with her skinne, and therevpon her apparrell, placing him neere their idoU, dedicating him for a goddesse and the mother of their god, and ever after did worship it, making an idoU which they called Tocci, which is to say our grand- mother. Not content with this crueltie, they did maliciously invite the King of Gulhuacan, the father of the yong maid, to come and worshippe his daughter, who was now con- secrated a goddesse, who comming with great presents, and well accompanied with his people, he was led into a very darke chappell where their idoU was, that he might offer sacrifice to his daughter that was in that place. But it chanced that the incense that was vpon the harth, according to their cus- tome, kindled in such sort, as hee might discerne his daugh- ter's haire, and having by this meanes discovered the cruelty and deceit, hee went forth crying alowde, and with

Lib. tii.

462 FOUNDATION OF MRXICO.

all his men he fell vpon the Mexicaines^ forcing them to re- tyre to the lake^ so as they were almost drowned. The Mexicaines defended themselves, casting certaine little darts^ which they vsed in the warres, wherewith they much galled their ennemies. But in the end they got land^ and leaving that place^ they coasted along the lake, very weary and wet ; the women and little children crying and making great exclamations against them and their god that had brought them into this distresse. They were inforced to passe a river that could not be waded through^ and there- fore they advised to make small boates of their targets, and of reedes^ wherein they passed. Then afberwardes^ having left Culhuacan, they arrived at Iztapalapa^ and next at Aca- tzintitlan^ afterwards at Iztacal, and finally at the place where the hermitage of San Anton now is, at the entry of Mexico, and to that quarter which they now call San Pablo. Daring which time their idoU did comfort them in their travells and incoraged them, promising great matters.

Chap. vii. — Of the foundation of Mexico.

The time being now come, that the father of lies should accomplish his promise made to his people, who could no longer suffer so many turnings, travells, and dangers, it happened that some old priests or sorcerers, being entred into a place full of water-lilies, they met with a very faire and cleere current of water, which seemed to be silver, and looking about, they found the trees, medowes, fish, and all that they beheld to be very white: wondring heereat, they remembred a prophecie of their god, whereby he had given them that for a token of their place of rest, and to make them Lords of other Nations. Then weeping for ioy, they returned to the people with these good newes. The night following, Vitzlipuztli appeared in a dreame to an antient

FOUNDATION OF MEXICO. 463

priest, saying, that they should seeke out a TunaV in the ^"• lake, which grew out of a stone (which as he told them, was the same place where by his commaundement they had cast the heart of Copil, sonne to the sorceresse, their enemy) and vpon this Tanal they should see a goodly Eagle, which fed on certaine small birdes. When they should see this, they should beleeve it was the place where their Cittie should be built, the which should surmount al others, and be famous throughout the world. Morning being come, the old man assembled the whole people, from the greatest to the least, making a long speech vnto them, how much they were bound unto their god, and of the Revelation, which (although vnworthy) hee had received that night, con- cluding that all must seeke out that happie place which was promised them ; which bred such devotion and ioy in them all, that presently they vndertooke the enterprise, and dividing themselves into bandes, they beganne to search, following the signes of the revelation of the desired place. Amidest the thickest of these water-lillies in the lake, they met with the same course of water they had scene the day before, but much differing, being not white, but red, like blood, the which divided it selfe into two streames, whereof the one was of a very obscure azure, the which bred admira- tion in them, noting some great mistery as they said. After much search heere and there, the Tunal appeared growing on a stone, whereon was a royall Eagle, with the wings dis- plaied towardes the Sunne, receiving his heat. About this Eagle were many rich fethers, white, red, yellow, blew, and greene, of the same sort as they make their images, which Eagle held in his tallants a goodly birde. Those which sawe it and knew it to be the place fore-told by the Oracle, fel on their knees, doing great worship to the Eagle, which bowed the head looking on every side. Then was there great cries, demonstrations, and thanks vnto the Cre-

• Prickly pear.

Yir.

464 FOUNDATION OP MEXICO.

^^•^'* ator, and to their great god Vitzlipuztli, who was their father^ and had alwaies told them truth. For this reason they called the cittie which they founded there, Tenoxtitlan, which signifies Tunal on a stone^ and to this day they carry in their armes, an Eagle upon a Tnnal^ with a bird in one tallant^ and standing with the other ypon the Tunal. The day following^ by common consent^ they made an hermitage adioyning to the Tunal of the Eagle^ that the Arke of their god might rest there, till they might have meanes to build him a sumptuous Temple : and so they made this her- mitage of flagges and turfes covered with straw ; then having consulted with their god, they resolved to buy of their neighbours^ stone^ timber^ lime^ in exchange of fish^ frogges^ and yong kids^ and for duckes^ water-hennes^ curlews^ and divers other kindes of sea fowles. All which things they did fish and hunt for in this Lake, whereof there is great aboundance. They went with these things to the markets of the Townes and Citties of the Tepanecas^ and of them of Tezcuco their neighbours, and with poUicie they gathered together, by little and little, what was neces- sary for the building of their Cittie ; so as they built a bet- ter Chappell for their idoU of lime and stone, and laboured to fill vp a great part of the lake with rubbish. This done, the. idoll spake one night to one of his priests in these tearmes, " Say vnto the Mexicaines, that the Noblemen divide themselves everie one with their kinsfolkes and friends, and that they divide themselves into foure principall quar- ters, about the house which you have built for my rest, and let every quarter build in his quarter at his pleasure. The which was put in execution : and those be the foure prin- cipall quarters of Mexico, which are called at this day San Juan, Santa Maria la Bedonda, San Pablo, and San Sebas- tian. After this, the Mexicaines being thus divided into these foure quarters, their god commanded them to divide amongest them the gods he should name to them, and that

SEDITION OF TLATELULCO. 465

each principal quarter should name other special quarters^ ^" ^" where these gods should be worshipped. So as vnder every one of these foure principall quarters^ there were many less comprehended^ according to the number of the idolls which their god commanded them to worship^ which they called Calpultetco, which is as much as to say^ god of the quarters. In this manner, the Citie of Mexico Tenox- tiltan was founded, and grew great.

Chap. viii. — Of the sedition of those of Tlatelulco, and of the first Kings the Mexicaines did choose.

This division being made as afore-said, some olde men and Antients held opinion^ that in the division, they had not respected them as they deserved : for this cause, they and their kinsfolke did mutine, and went to seeke another residence ; and as they went thorough the lake, they found a small peece of ground or terrasse, which they call Tloteloli, where they inhabited, calling it Tlatellulco, which signifies place of a terrasse. This was the third division of the Mex- icaines, since they left their Country. That of Mechoacan being the first, and that of Malinalco the second* Those which separated themselves and went to Tlatellulco were famous men, but of bad disposition ; and therefore they practised against the Mexicaines, their neighbours, all the ill neighbourhood they could. They had alwaies quarrells against them, and to this day continues their hatred and olde leagues. They of Tenoxtiltan, seeing them of Tlatell- ulco thus opposite vnto them, and that they multiplied, feared that in time they might surmount them : heerevpon they assembled in counsell, where they thought it good to choose a King, whome they should obey, and strike terror into their enemies, that by this meanes they should bee more vnited and stronger among themselves, and their enemies

H H

406 FIRST MEXICAN KINO.

LiB.Tn. uQt presume too much against them. Being thus resolved to choose a King, they took another advise very profitable and assured, to choose none among themselves, for the avoyding of dissentions, and to gaine (by their new King) some other neighbour nations, by whom they were in- vironed, being destitute of all succours. All well con- sidered, both to pacifie the King of Culhuacan, whome they had greatly oflPended, having slaine and flead the daughter of his predecessor, and done him so great a scorne, as also to have a King of the Mexicaine blood, of which generation there were many in the Culhuacan, which continued there since the time they lived in peace amongst them ; they resolved to choose for their King, a yong man called Acamapixtli, sonne to a great Mexicaine Prince, and of a Ladie, daughter to the King of Culhuacan. Presently they sent Ambassadors with a great present to demand this man, who delivered their Ambassage in these tearmes : " Great Lord, we your vassals and servants, placed and shut vp in the weedes and reedes of the Lake, alone and aban- doned of all the Nations of the world, led onely and guided by our god to the place where we are, which falles in the iurisdiction of your limits of Ascapusalco, and of Tezcuco. Although you have suflPered vs to live and remaine there, yet will we not, neither is it reason to, live without a head and lord to command, to correct, and governe vs, instruct- ing vs in the course of our life, and defending vs from our enemies : Therefore we come to you, knowing that in your Court and house, there are children of our generation, linckt and alied with yours, issued from our entrailes, and yours, of our blood and yours, among the which we have know- ledge of a grand-child of yours and ours, called Acamapixtli. We beseech you, therefore, to gi\:e him vs for Lord, we will esteeme him as hee deserves, seeing hee is of the lineage of the Lords of Mexico, and the Kings of Culhuacan.

The king having consulted vppon this poynt, and finding

J

FIRST MEXICAN KING. 467

it nothing inconvenient to be alied to the Mexicaines^ who ^»•^"• were valiant men, made them answer that they should take his grandehilde in good time, adding therevnto, that if he had beene a woman, hee woulde not have given her, noting the foule fact before spoken of, ending his discoarse with these wordes : ^' Let my grand-childe go to sei've your god, and be his lievetenant, to rule and governe his creatures, by whom we live, who is the Lord of night, day, and windes : Let him goe and be Lord of the water and land, and pos- sesse the Mexicaine Nation, take him in good time, and vse him as ray sonne and grand-childe/' The Mexicaines gave him thanks, all ioyntly desiring him to marry him with his owne hand, so as he gave him to wife one of the noblest Ladies amongst them. They conducted the new King and Queene with all honour possible, and made him a solemno reception, going all in generall foorth to see the king, whom they led into pallaces, which were then but meane ; and having seated them in royall throanes, presently one of the Antients and an Orator much esteemed amongest them, did rise vp, speaking in this manner : ** My sonne, our Lord and King, thou art welcome to this poor house and citty, amongest these weedes and mudde, where thy poore fathers, grandfathers, and kinsfolkes, endure what it pleaseth the Lord of things created. Remember, Lord, thou commest hither to be the defence and support of the Mexicaine Na- tion, and to be the resemblance of our God Vitzlipuztli, wherevpon the charge and governement is given thee. Thou knowest we are not in our country, seeing the land we possesse at this day is anothers, neither know we what shall become of vs to-morrowe, or another day : Consider, there- fore, that thou commest not to rest or recreate thy selfe, but rather to indure a new charge vnder so heavie a burden : wherein thou must continually labour, being slave to this multitude, which is fallen to thy lotte, and to all this neigh- bour people, whome they must strive to gratifie, and give

H H 2

468 MEXICAN TRIBUTE TO AZCAPUZALCO.

Lib. yn. them Contentment, seeing thou knowest we live vpon their lands^ and within their limites. And endings hee repeated these wordes : "Thou art welcome, thou and the Queene our Mistris, to this your realme." This was the speech of the old man, which, with other orations (which the Mexicaine histories do celebrate) the children did vse to leame by hart, and so they were kept by tradition, some of them deserve well to be reported in their proper termes. The king aunswering, thanked them, and oflPered them his care and J

diligence in their defence and .aide in all he could. After .

they gave him the othe, and after their manor set the royall crown vpon his head, the which is like to the Orowne of the dukes of Venice : the name of Acamapixtli, their first king, signifies a handfuU of reeds, and therefore they carry in their armories a hand holding many arrows of reedes.

Chap, ix.^0/ the strange tribute the Mexicaines paied to

them of Azcapuzalco.

The Mexicaines happened so well in the election of their new king, that in short time they grew to have some form of a common-weale, and to be famous among strangers; wherevpon their neighbours, moved with feare, practised to subdue them, especially the Tepanecas, who had Azcap- uzalco for their metropolitane citty, to whome the Mexi- caines payed tribute, as strangers dwelling in their land. For the king of Azcapuzalco fearing their power which increased, soght to oppresse the Mexicaines, and having consulted with his subjects, he sent to tel king Acamapixtli that the ordinary tribute they payed was too little, and that from thencefoorth they should bring firre trees, sapines, and willowes for the building of the citty, and moreover they shoulde make him a garden in the water planted with diverse kindes of hearbes and pulses, which they should

<

FLOATINQ GARDENS. 469

bring vnto him yearely by water, dressed in this maner^ ^"- ^"- without failing ; which if they did not^ he declared them his enemies^ and would roote them out. The Mexicaines were much troubled at this commaundement, holding it impos- sible : and that this demaund was to no other end, but to seeke occasion to ruine them. But their god Vitzlipuztli comforted them, appearing that night to an olde man, com- maunding him to say to the king his sonne in his name^ that hee should make no difficultie to accept of this tribute, he would help them and make the meanes easie^ which after happened: for the time of tribute being come, the Mexi- canes carried the trees that were required, and moreover, a garden made and floating in the water, and in it much Mays (which is their come) already grained and in the eare : there was also Indian pepper, beetes, Tomates, pease, gourds, and many other things, al ripe, and in their season. Such as have not seene the gardines in the lake of Mexico, in the middest of the water, will not beleeve it, but will say it is an inchantment of the Divell whom they worship : But in trueth it is a matter to be done, and there hath beene often seene of these gardens floating in the water; for they cast earth ypon reedes and grasse, in such sort as it never wastes in the water; they sowe and plant thisground, so as the grainegrowes and ripens very well, and then they remove it from place to place. But it is true, that to make this great garden easily, and to have the fruites grow well, is a thing that makes men iudge there was the worke of Vitzlipuztli, whom other- wise they call Patillas, specially having never made nor seene the like. The king of Azcapuzalco wondred much when he sawe that accomplished which he held impossible, saying vnto his subiects, that this people had a great god that made all easie vnto them, and hee sayd vnto the Mexi- caines, that seeing their God gave them all things perfit hee would the yeare following, at the time of tribute, they shoulde bring in their gB.rdine a wild ducke, and a heron.

470 DEATH OF THE FIRST MEXICAN KING.

Lib. VII. gitting on their egges, in such sorte, that they should hatch their yoong ones as they should arrive, without failing of a minute^ vpon paine of his indignation. The Mexicans were much troubled and heavy with this prowde and strict com- maunde : but their god, as he was accustomed, comforted them in the night, by one of his priests, saying that he would take all that charge vpon him, willing them not to fear, but beleeve that the day would come, whenas the Az- capuzalcos should pay with their lives this desire of new tributes. The time being come, as the Mexicaines carried all that was demaunded of their gardins, among the reeds and weeds of the gardin, they found a ducke and a heron hatching their egges, and at the same instant when they arrived at Azcapuzalco their yong ones were disclosed. Wherat the king of Azcapuzalco wondring beyond measure, he said againe to his people, that these were more than humane beings, and that the Mexicans beganne as if they would make themselves lordes over all those provinces. Yet did he not diminish the order of this tribute, and the Mexicans finding not themselves mighty enough, endured this subiection and slavery the space of fifty yeeres. In this time the king Acamapixtli died, having beautified the Citty of Mexico with many goodly buildings, streets, conduits of water, and great aboundance of munition. Hee raigned in peace and rest forty yeares, having bin alwayes zealous for the good and increase of the common-weale.

As hee drew neare his end, hee did one memorable thing, that having lawfuU children to whom he might leave the succession of the realme, yet would he not do it, but con- trariwise hee spake freely to the common-weale, that as they had made a free election of him, so they should choose him that should seeme fittest for their good government, advising them therein to have a care to the good of the common-weale, and seeming grieved that he left them not freed from tribute and subiection, hee died, having recom-

\

THE S£COND MEXICAN EINQ. 471

mended his wife and children vnto them, he left all his i^" ^n. people sorrowfall for his death.

Chap. x. — Of the second King, and what happened in his

raigne.

The obsequies of the dead king performed, the Antients, the chiefe of the realme, and some part of the people assem- bled together to choose a King, where the Antients pro- pounded the necessitie wherein thej were, and that it was needefuU to choose for chiefe of their citty, a man that had pity of age, of widows, and orphans, and to be a father of the commonweale: for in very deede they should be the feathers of his wings, the eie-browes of his eyes, and the beard of his face, that it was necessarie he were valiant, being needeluU shortly to vse their forces, as their god had prophesied. Their resolution in the end was to chuse a Sonne of the predecessor, vsing the like good office in ac- cepting his Sonne for successor, as hee had done to the commonweale, relying thereon. This young man was called Vitzilovitli, which signifieth a rich feather; they set the royall crowne vpon his head, and annointed him, as they have beene accustomed to doe to all their Kings, with an ointment they call Divine, being the same vnction where- with they did annoynt their IdoU. Presently an Orator made an eloquent speech, exhorting him to arme himselfe with courage, and free them from the travells, slavery, and misery they suflfered, being oppressed by the Azcapuzalcos : which done, all did him homage. This king was not married, and his Counsell helde opinion, that it was good to marry him with the daughter of the king of Azcapuzalco, to have him a friend by this alliance, and to obtain some diminution of their heavy burthen of tributes imposed vpon them, and yet they feared lest he should disdaine to give them his

472 DEATH OF THE SECOND KINO.

La. vn. daughter^ by reason they were his vassalls : yet the king of Azcapnzalco yeelded therevnto, having humbly required him, who, with curteons wordes, gave them his daughter, called Ayauchigual, whom they ledde with great pompe and ioy to Mexico, and performed the ceremony and solemnity of marriage, which was to tie a comer of the mans cloke to a part of the womans vaile in signe of the band of marriage. This Queene broght foorth a sonne, of whose name they de- ma unded advise of the king of Azcapnzalco, and casting lots as they had accustomed (being greatly given to sooth- sayings, especially vpon the names of their children), he would have his grand-childe called Chimalpopoca, which signifies a target casting smoke. The Queene, his daughter, seeing the contentment the King of Azcapnzalco had of his grand-child, tooke occasion to intreat him to releeve the Mexicaines of the heavy burthen of their tributes, seeing he had now a grand-child Mexicaine, the which the King will- ingly yeelded vnto. by the advise of his Counsell, granting (for the tribute which they paid) to bring yeerely a couple of duckes and some fish, in signe of subiection, and that they dwelt in his land. The Mexicaines, by this meanes, remained much eased and content, but it lasted little. For the Queene, their Protectrix, died soone after: and the yere following, likewise Vitzilovitli, the king of Mexico died, leaving his sonne, Chimalpopeca, tenne yeares olde; hee raigned thirteene yeeres, and died thirty yeeres old, or little more. Hee was held for a good king, and carefuU in the service of his gods, whose Images hee held kings to be ; and that the honour done to their god was done to the King who was his image. For this cause the kings have beene so afifectionate to the service of their gods. This king was carefuU to winne the love of his neighbours, and to traflSckd with them, whereby hee augmented his citty, exercising his men in warrelike actions in the Lake, disposing them to that which he pretended, as you shall see presently.

THE THIRD MEXICAN KING. 473

Chap. xi. — Of Ohimalpopoca, the third king, and his cruell

death, and the occasion of warre which the

Mexicaines made.

The Mexicaines, for saccessor to their deceased king, did ^"* ^"• choose his sonne Chimalpopoca by common consent^ although he were a child of tenne yeeres old, being of opinion that it was alwayes necessary to keepe the favor of the king of Azcapuzalco, making his grand-childe king. They then set him in his throaue, giving him the ensignes of warre, with a bowe and arrowes in one hand, and a sword with rasours (which they commonly vse) in the right, signifying thereby (as they do say) that they pretended by armes to set them- selves at liberty. The Mexicaines had great want of water, that of the Lake being very thicke and muddy, and there- fore ill to drincke, so as they caused their infant king to desire of his grandfather, the king of Azcapuzalco, the water of the mountaine of Chapultepec, which is from Mexico a league, as is saide before, which .they easely ob- tained, and by their industry made an aqueduct of faggots, weeds, and flagges, by the which they brought water to their citty. But because the Cittie was built within the Lake, and the aqueduct did crosse it, it did breake forth in many places, so as they could not inioy the water as they desired, and had great scarcitie : whervpon, whether they did expresly seeke it, to quarrell with the Tepanecas, or that they were mooved vppon small occasion, in the end they sent a resolute ambassage to the king of Azcapuzalco, saying they could not vse the water which he had grafciously granted them, and therefore they required him to provide them wood, lime, and stone, and to send his workmen, that by their meanes they might make a pipe of stone and lime that should not breake. This message nothing pleased the king, and much lesse his subiects, seeming to be too pre-

474 POWER OF MEXICAN KINGS.

Lib. tii. sumptuous a message, and purposely insolent, for vassals to their Lord. The chiefe of the Counsell disdaining thereat, said it was too bold that, not content with permission to live in an others land, and to have water given them, but they would hdve them goe to serve them : what a matter was that? And whereon presumed this fugitive nation^ shut vp in the mud ? They would let them know how fit they were to worke, and to abate their pride in taking from them their land and. their lives.

In these termes and choUer they left the king, whom they did somwhat suspect, by reason of his grandchild, and consulted againe anew what they were to doe, where they resolved to make a generall proclamation that no Tepaneca should have any commerce or trafficke with any Mexicaine, that they should not goe to their Cittie, nor receive any into theirs, vpon paine of death. Whereby we may vnder- stand that the king did not absolutely commaund over his people, and that he governed more like a Consul or a Duke than a King, although since with their power the commaund of Kings increased, growing absolute Tyrants, as you shal see in the last Kings. For it hath beene an ordinarie thing among the Barbarians, that such as their power hath beene^ such hath beene their commaund ; yea, in our Histories of Spaine we finde in some antient kings that manner of rule which the Tepanecas vsed. Such were the first kings of the Romans, but that Rome declined from Kings to Consuls, and a Senate, till that after they came to be commaunded by Emperours. But these Barbarians, of temperate Kings became tyrants, of which governements a moderate monarchy is the best and most assured. But returne we now vnto our historic.

The king of Azcapuzalco seeing the resolution of his sub- iects, which was to kil the Mexicans, intreated them first to steale away the yong king, his grand-childe, and afterwards do what they pleased to the Mexicans. All in a manner

MUBDSB OF THE THIRD MEXICAN KING. 475

yeelded heerevnto to give the king contentment, and for !-»•▼"• pitty they had of the child ; but two of the chiefest were much opposite, inferring that it was bad oounsell, for that Chimalpopoca, although hee were of their bloud, yet was it but by the mothers side, and that the fathers was to be preferred, and therefore they concluded that the first they must kill was Chimalpopoca, king of Mexico, protesting so to doe. The king of Azcapuzalco was so troubled with this contradiction, and the resolution they had taken, that soone after for very griefe he fell sicke and died. By whose death the Tepanecas, finishing their consultation, committed a notable treason ; for one night the young king of Mexico sleeping without guard or feare of any thing, they of Azca- puzalco entred his pallace, and slew him sodainly, returning VBseene. The morning being come, when the Nobles went to salute the King, as they were accustomed, they found him slaine with great and cruell wounds ; then they cried out, and filled all their cittie with teares : and transported with choUer, they presently fell to armes, with an intent to revenge their Kings death. As they ranne vppe and downe, full of fury and disorder, one of their chiefest knightes stept foorth, labouring to appease them, with a grave admonition : ^* Whither goe you,^' saide hee, " yee Mexicaines ; quiet your selves, consider that things done without consideration are not well guided, nor come to good end : suppresse your griefe, considering that, although your king be dead, the noble blood of the Mexicaines is not extinct in him. Wee have children of our kings deceased, by whose conduct, suc- ceeding to the real me, you shall the better execute what you pretend, having a leader to guide your enterprise, go not blindely, surcease, and choose a king first to guide and encourage you against your enemies. In the meane time dissemble discreetly, performing the funeralls of your de- ceased king, whose body yon see heere present, for heere- after you shall finde better meanes to take revenge." By

476 THE FOURTH MEXICAN KING.

^"- ^ "' this meanes, the Mexicaines passed no farther, but stayed to make the obsequies of their King, wherevnto they invited the Lords of Tezcaco and Culhaacan, reporting vnto them this foule and cruell fact, which the Tepanecas had com- mitted, moving them to have pitty on them, and incensingf them against their enemies, concluding that their resolntion was to die or to bee revenged of so great an indignitie, in- treating them not to favour so vninst a fact of their enemies ; and that for their part, they desired not their aide of armes or men, but onely to bee lookers on of what should passe^ and that for their maintenance they would not stoppe nor hinder the commerce as the Tepanecas had done. At these speeches they of Tezcuco and Culhuacan made them great shewes of good will, and that they were well satisfied, offer- ing them their ciities, and all the commerce they desired, that they might provide vittaile and munition at their pleasure, both by land and water. After this, the Mexi- canes introated them to stay with them, and assist at the election of their King ; the which they likewise granted, to give them contentment.

Chap. xit. — Of the fourth King, called Iscoalt, and of the

warre against the Tepanecas,

The Electors being assembled, an old man that was held for a great Orator, rose vp, who, as the histories report, spake in this manner; "The light of your eyes, Mexicaines, is darkened, but not of your hearts : for although you have lost him that was the light and guide of the Mexicaine Common-weale, yet that of the heart remaines : to consider, that although they have slaine one man, yet there are others that may supply with advantage the want we have of him : the Mexicaine Nobilitie is not extinguished thereby, nor the blood royall decaied. Turne your eyes and looke about you;

i

THE FOURTH UBXICAN KINO. 477

you shall see the Nobilitie of Mexico set in order, not one ^"- ^"' nor two, but many and excellent Princes, sonnes to Aca- mapixtli, our true and lawfall King and Lord. Heere you may choose at your pleasure, saying, I will this man, and not that. If you have lost a father, heere you may find both father and mother : make account, O Mexicaines, that the Sunne is eclipsed and darkened for a time, and will retume suddenly. If Mexico hath beene darkened by the death of your King, the Sunne will soon shew, in choosing another King. Looke to whom, and ypon whom you shall cast your eyes, and towards whom your heart is inclined, and this is hee whom your god Yitzlipuztli hath chosen. And continuing a while this discourse, he ended to the satisfaction of all men. In the end, by the consent of this Counsell, Izcoalt was chosen King, which signifies a snake of rasors,^ who was sonne to the first King Acamapixtli, by a slave of his : and although he were not legitimate, yet they made choyce of him, for that he exceeded the rest in behaviour, valour, and magnanimitie of courage. All seemed very well satisfied, and above all, these of Tescuco, for their king was married to a sister of Iscoalt. After the King had beene crowned and set in his royall seat, another Ora- tor stept up, discoursing how the king was bound to his Common-weale, and of the courage he ought to shew in travell, speaking thus : ^' Behold this day we depend on thee ', it may be thou wilt let fall the burthen that lies vpon thy shoulders, and suffer the old man and woman, the orphan and the widowe to perish. Take pit tie of the infants that go creeping in the ayre, who must perish if our enemies sur- mount vs ; vnfold then and stretch forth thy cloake, my Lord, to beare these infants vpon thy shoulders, which be the poore and the common people, who live assured under the shadowe of thy wings, and of thy bountie.*' Vttering many other words vpon this subiect, the which (as I have

' " Culebra de navajas/'

478 THE WARRIOR TLACAELLEL.

Lib. vix. gaJd) they learne by hearty for the exercise of their children, and after did teach them as a lesson to those that beganne to learne the facultie of Orators. In the meane time, the Tepanecas were resolute to destroy the Mexicaines, and to this end they had made great preparations. And therefore the new King tooke counsell for the proclaiming of warre, and to fight with those that had so much wronged them. But the common people, seeing their adversaries to exceede them farre in numbers and munition for the warre, they came amazed to their King, pressing him not to vndertake so dangerous a warre, which would destroy their poor Cittie and Nation : wherevpon being demaunded what advise were fittest to take, they made answer that the King of Azcap- uzalco was very pittifull, that they should demand peace, and oflTer to serve him, drawing them forth those marshes, and that he should give them houses and lands among his subiects, that by this meanes they might depend all vppon one Lord. And for the obtaining heereof, they should carry their god in his litter for an intercessor. The cries of the people were of such force (having some Nobles that ap- proved their opinion), as presently they called for the Priests, preparing the litter and their god, to perform the voyage. As this was preparing, and every one yeelded to this treatie of peace, and to subiect themselves to the Tepa- necas, a gallant yong man, and of good sort, stept out among the people, who, with a resolute countenance, spake thus vnto them : " What meanes this, O yee Mexicaines, are yee mad ? How hath so great cowardise crept in among va ? Shall we go and yeeld ourselves thus to the Azcap- uzalcos.^' Then turning to the King, he said : " How now, my Lord, will you endure this ? Speak to the people, that they may suffer vs to finde out some meanes for our honour «,nd defence, and not to yeelde our selves so simply and shamefully into the hands of our enemies.^' This yong man was called Tlacaellel, nephew to the King, he was the most

THE WARRIOR TLACAELLEL. 470

valiant Captaine and greatest Counsellor that ever the Mex- J^^.tu. icaines had/as you shall see heereafter. Izcoalt, incouraged by that his nephew had so wisely spoken, retained the people, saying they should first suffer him to try another better meanes. Then turning towards his Nobilitie, he said vnto them : " You are all heere, my kinsmen, and the best of Mexico, hee that hath the courage to carrie a message to the Tepanecas, let him rise vp. They looked one vpon another, but no man stirred nor oflfered himselfe to the word. Then this yong man, Tlacaellel, rising, offered himselfe to go, saying, that seeing he must die, it did import little whether it were to-day or to-morrow : for what reason should he so carefully preserve himselfe ? he was therefore readie, let him command what he pleased. And although all held this for a rash attempt, yet the King resolved to send him, that he might thereon vnderstand the will and disposition of the King of Azcapuzalco and of his people ; holding it better to hasten his nephew's death, then to hazard the honour of his Common- weale. Tlacaellel being ready, tooke his way, and being come to the gards, who had com- maundement to kill any Mexicaines that came towards them by cunning or otherwise : he perswaded them to suffer him to passe to the king, who wondered to see him, and hear- ing his ambassage, which was to demand peace of him vnder honest conditions, answered, that hee would impart it to his subiects, willing him to returne the next day for his answer ; then Tlacaellel demanded a passport, yet could he not obtaine any, but that he should vse his best skill. With this he returned to Mexico, giving his words to the guards to returne. And, although the King of Azcapuzalco desired peace, being of a milde disposition, yet his subiects did so incense him, as his answer was open warre. The which being heard by the messenger, he did all his King commanded him, declaring by this ceremony to give armes, and anointing the King with the vnction of the dead, that

480 MEXICAN WAB WITH TAPANECA.

Lib. tii. {^ ]^{q Kiogs behalfe he did defie him. Having ended all^ the King of Azcapazalco suffering himselfe to be anointed and crowned with feathers, giving goodly armes in recom- pence to the messenger, wishing him not to retume by the pallace gate, whereas many attended to cut him in peeces^ but to go out secretly by a little false posteme that was open in one of the courts of the Pallace. This yong man did sOj and turning by secret waies, got away in safetie in sight of the guards, and there defied them, saying, '^ Tepa- necas and Azcapuzalcas, you do your office ill ; vnderstand you shall all die, and not one Tepaneca shall remaine alive." In the meane time the guardes fell vpon him, where he be- haved him selfe so valiantly, that hee slew some of them : and seeing many more of them come running, hee retyred himselfe gallantly to the Cittie, where he brought newes that warre was proclaimed with the Tepanecas^ and that hee had defied their King.

Chap. xiii. — Of the battell the Mexicaines gave to the Tepan^ ebaa, and of the victorie they obtained.

The defie being knowne to the Commons of Mexico, they came to the king, according to their accustomed cowardise^ demaunding leave to departe the Citty, holding their ruin certaine. The king didde comfort and incourage them, promising to give them libertie if they vanquished their enemies, willing them not to feare. The people replied: "And if we be vanquished what shall we doe?" "If we be overcome (aunswered the king) we will be bound pre- sently to yeeld ourselves into your hands to suffer death, eate our flesh in your dishes, and be revenged of vs/' " It shall be so then (saide they) if you loose the victorie, and if you obtain the victorie, we do presently offer our selves to be your Tributaries, to labour in your houses, to sowe your ground, to carrie your armes and baggage when you

VICTORY OVBB THE TBPANECAS. 481

goe to the warres for ever, wee and our descendants after ^■- ^"• vs/' These accordes made betwixt the people and the nobilitie (which they did after fully performe, eyther will- ingly or by constraint, as they had promised), the king named for his captain generall Tlacaellel, the whole camp was put in order, and into squadrons, giving the places of captaines to the most valiant of his kinsfolkes and friends : then did hee make them a goodly speech, whereby he did greatly incourage them, being now wel prepared, charging all men to obey the commaundement of the Generall whome he had appoynted : he divided his men into two partes, commanding the most valiant and hardie to give the first charge with him, and that all the rest should remaine with the king Izcoatl, vntil they should see the first assaile their enemies. Marching then in order, they were discovered by them of Azcapuzaico, who presently came furiously foorth the citty, carrying great riches of gold, silver, and armes of great value, as those which had the empire of all that coun- try. Izcoatl gave the signall to battaile, with a little drumme he carried on his shoulders, and presently they raised a general showt, crying Mexico, Mexico, they charged the Tapanecans, and although they were farre more in num- ber, yet did they defeate them, and force them to retire into their Cittie; then advaunced they which remained behinde, crying Tlacaellel, victorie, victorie, all sodainely entred the Citty, where (by the Kings comraandement) they pardoned not any man, no not olde men, women, nor chil- dren, for they slew them all, and spoyled the Citty, being very rich. And not content heerewith, they followed them that fled, and were retired into the craggy rocks of the Sierras or neere mountaines, striking and making a great slaughter of them. The Tapanecans being retired to a mountaine, cast downe their armes, demaunding their lives, and offering to serve the Mexicaines, to give them lands and gardins, stone, lime and timber, and to hold them

1 1

482 VICTORT OVER THE TBPANECAS.

^'- ^"- alwayes for their Lordes. Vpon this condition Tlacaelleo retired his men^ and ceased the battell^ graunting them their lives upon the former conditions, which they did solemnely sweare. Then they returned to Azcapuzalco, and so with their rich and victorious spoiles to the cittie of Mexico. The day following the king assembled the Nobil- itie and the people, to whom he laid open the accord the Commons had made, demaunding of them if they were con- tent to persist therin : the Commons made answer that they had promised, and they had well deserved it, and therefore they were content to serve them perpetually. Wherevpon they took an othe, which since they have kept without con- tradiction.

This done, Izcoatl returned to Azcapuzalco (by the advise of his counsell), he divided all the lands and goods of the conquered among the conquerours, the chiefest parte fell to the King, then to Tlacaellel, and after to the rest of the Nobles, as they best deserved in the battell. They also gave land to some plebeians, having behaved themselves valiantly; to others they distributed the pillage, making small account of them as of cowardes. They appointed lands in common for the quarters of Mexico, to every one his part, for the service and sacrifices of their gods. This was the order, which after they alwayes kept, in the division of the lands and spoyles of those they had vanquished and sub- dewed. By this meanes they of Azcapuzalco remained so poore, as they had no lands left them to labor, and (which was worse) they tooke their king from them, and all power to chuse any other then him of Mexico.

t

WAR WITH CUYOACAN. 483

Chap. xiv. — Of the warre and victory the Mexicainea had

against the Cittie of Ouyoacan.

Although the chiefe cittie of the Tepanecas was that of ^ ^"- Azcapuzalco^ yet had they others with their private Lordes, as Tucuba and Cuyoacan. These seeing the storme passed, would gladly that they of Azcapuzalco had renewed the warre against the Mexicans, and seeing them danted, as a nation wholy broken and defeated, they of Cuyoacan re- solved to make warre by themselves ; to the which they laboured to draw the other neighbor nations, who would not stir nor quarrell with the Mexicans. In the meane time the hatred and malice increasing, they of Cuyoacan beganne to ill intreate the women that went to their markets, mocking at them, and doing the like to the men over whom they had power : for which cause the king of Mexico defended,^ that none of his should goe to Cuyoacan, and that they should receive none of them into Mexico, the which made them of Cuyoacan resolve wholy to warre : but first they would pro- voke them by some shamefull scorne, which was, that having invited them to one of their solemn feasts, after they had made them a goodly banquet, and feasted them with a great daunce after their manner, they sent them, for their fruite, womens apparell, forcing them to put it on, and so to re- tume home like women to their cittie, reproching them, that they were cowards and eflfeminate, and that they durst not take armes, being suflSciently provoked. Those of Mexico say, that for revenge they did vnto them a fowle scome, laying at the gates of their cittie of Cuyoacan cer- taine things which smoaked,^ by meanes whereof many women were delivered before their time, and many fell sicke. In the end, all came to open warre, and there was a battell fought, wherein they imployed all their forces, in » " Ved6." '^ *' Ciertos humazos."

Il2

484 WAR WITH CUYOACAN.

Lib. vii. the which Tlacaellel^ by his courage and policie in warre, obtained the victory. For, having left king Izcoail in fight with them of Cuyoacan^ he put himselfe in ambush with some of the most valiant souldiers, and so turning about charged them behind, and forced them to retire into their citty. But seeing their intent was to flie into a temple, which was veiie strong, he, with three other valiant souldiers, pursued them eagerly, and got before them, seising on the temple and firing it, so as he forced them to flie to the fields, where he made a great slaughter of the vanquished, pursuing them two leagues into the countrey, vnto a litle hill, where the vanquished, casting away their weapons and their armes across, yeelded to the Mexicans, and with many teares craved pardon of their overweening foUie, in vsing them like women, offering to bee their slaves : so as, in the end, the Mexicaines did pardon them. Of this victory the Mexicaines carried away very rich spoiles of garments^ armes, gold, silver, iewells, and rich feathers, with a great number of captives. In this battaile there were three of the principals of Culhuacan that came to aide the Mexicaines to winne honour, the which were remarkable above all. And since being knowen to Tlacaellel, and having made proofe of their fidelitie, he gave them Mexicaine devises, and had them alwayes by his side, where they fought in all places very valiantly. It was apparant that the whole victory was due to the Generall and to these three; for, among so many captives taken, two third partes were wonne by these foure, which was easily knowen by a policie they vsed : for, taking a captive, they presently cut off a little of his haire and gave it to others, so as it appeared that those which had their haire cut, amounted to that number, whereby they wonne great reputation and fame of valiant men. They were honoured as conquerors, giving them good portions of the spoils and lands, as the Mexicans have alwayes vsed to doe, which gave occasion to those that did fight to be- come famous, and to winne reputation by armes.

i

WAR WITH TH£ SUCHIMILCOS. 485

Chap. xv. — Of the warre and victorie which the Mexicans had

against the Suchiiuilcos,

The Nation of the Tepanecas being subdewed, the Mexi- ^"- ^"• caines had occasion to do the like to the SuchimilcoSj who (as it hath beene saide) were the first of the seven caves or lineages that peopled this land. The Mexicans sought not the occasion, although they might presume as conquerors to extend their limits, but the Suchimilcos didde moove them, to their owne ruine, as it happens to men of small iudgement that have no foresight, who not preventing the the mischefe they imagined, fall into it. The Suchimilcos held opinion that the Mexicans, by reason of their victories past, should attempt to subdue them, and consulted heereon amongst themselves; . Some among them thought it good to acknowledge them for superiors, and to applaude their good fortune, but the contrary was allowed, and they went out to give them battel ; which Izcoatl the king of Mexico vnderstandingy he sent his General Tlacaellel against them, with his army; the battell was fought in the same field that divides their limites, which two armies were equall in men and armes, but very divers in their order and manner of fighting ; for that the Suchimilcos charged all together on a heape confusedly, and Tlacaellel divided his men into squadrons with a goodly order, so as he presently brake his ennemies, forcing them to retire into their cittie, into the which they entred, following them to the Temple whither they fled, which they fiered, and forcing them to flie vnto the mountaines; in the end they brought them to this poynt, that they yeelded with their armes acrosse. The Generall Tlacaellel returning in great triumph, the priests went foorth to receive him, with their musicke of flutes, and giving incense. The chiefe Captaines vsed other cere- monies and shews of ioy, as they had bin accustpmed to

486 C0KQUS8T OF CUITIAYACA.

La. Tn. doe^ and the king with all the tronpe went to the Temple^

to give thanks to their false god, for the divell hath alwayes

beene yeiy desiroos hereof, to challenge to himselfe the

honor which he deserves not, seeing it is the trne God

which giveth victories, and maketh them to rnle whome he

pleaseth. The day following king Jzcoatl went vnto the

citty of Snchimilco, causing himselfe to be swome king of

the Suchimilcos ; and for their comfort he promised to doe

them good. In token whereof hee commannded them to

make a great cawsey stretching from Mexico to Snchimilco,

which is foore leagues, to the end there might bee more

commerce and trafficke amongest them. Which the Sachi-

milcos performed, and in shorte time the Mexicaine goveme-

ment seemed so good vnto them, as they helde themselves

happy to have changed their king and commonweale.

Some neighbors, pricked forward by envy or feare to their

mines, were not yet made wise by others miseries.

Cuitlavaca was a citty within the lake, which thoagh the name and dwelling be channged, continueth yet. They were active to swimme in the lake, and therefore they thought they might much indomage and annoy the Mexi- caines by water, which the King vnderstanding, hee resolved to send his army presently to fight against them. But Tlacaellel little esteeming this warre, holding it dishonorable to lead an army against them, made offer to conquer them with the children onely, which he performed in this m&ner; he went vnto the Temple and drew out of the Convent such children as he thought fittest for this action, from tenne to eighteene yeeres of age, who knew how to guide their boates or canoes, teaching them certaine pollicies. The order they held in this warre was, that he went to Cuitlavaca with his children, where by his poUicy hee pressed the ennemy in such sorte, that hee made them to flie ; and as he followed them, the lord of Cuitlavaca mette him and yeelded vnto him, himselfe, his citty, and his people, and by

SUBMISSION OP TEZCUCO. 487

this meanes he stayed the pursuite. The children returned ^'»- ^'"• with much spoyle, and many captives for their sacrifices, being solemnely received with a great procession, musike and perfumes, and they went to worshippe their gods, in taking of the earth which they did eate, and drawing blood from the forepart of their legges with the Priests lancets, with other superstitions which they were accustomed to vse in the like solemnities. The children were much honoured and incoraged, and the king imbraced and kissed them, and his kinsmen and alios accompanied them. The bruite of this victorie ranne throughout all the country, how that Tlacaellec had subdued the city of Cuitlavaca with children; the news and consideration whereof opened the eyes of those of Tezcuco, a chiefe and very cunning Nation for their manner of life; So as the king of Tezcuco was first of opinion, that they should subiect themselves to the king of Mexico, and invite him therevnto with his cittie. Therefore by the advise of his Counsell, they sent Am- bassadors, good Orators, with honorable presents, to oflfer themselves vnto the Mexicans, as their subiects, desiring peace and amitie, which was gratiously accepted ; but by the advise of Tlacaellec he vsed a ceremony for the eJSecting thereof, which was that those of Tezcuco should come forth armed against the Mexicans, where they should fight, and presently yeelde, which was an act and ceremony of warre, without any efiusion of bloud on either side. Thus the king of Mexico became soveraigne Lord of Tezcuco, but hee tooke not their king from them, but made him of his privie counsell, so as they have alwayes maintained themselves in this manner vntill the time of MoteQuma the second, during whose raigne the Spaniards entred. Having subdued the land and citty of Tezcuco, Mexico remained Lady and Mistris of all the landes and citties about the Lake, where it is built. Izcoatl having enioyed this pros- peritie, and raigned twelve yeeres, died, leaving the realme

Lib. rn.

488 THE FIFTH MBXICAN KING.

which had beene given him much augmented by the valour and couDsell of his nephew Tlacaellel (as hath afore beene saide) who held it best to choose an other king then him- selfe, as shall heereafter be shewed.

Chap. xvi. — Ofthefift King of Mexico, called Montezuma,

the first of that name.

Forasmuch as the election of the new King belonged to foure chiefe Electors (as hath been said), and to the King of Tezcuco, and the King of Tacuba, by especiall priviledge ; Tlacaellel assembled these six personages^ as he that had the soveraigne authoritie, and having propounded the matter vnto them, they made choise of Montezuma, the first of that name, nephew to the same Tlacaellel. His election was very pleasing to them all, by reason whereof they made most solemne feasts, and more stately then the former. Presently after his election, they conducted him to the Temple with a great traine, where before the divine harth (as they call it) where there is continuall fire, they set him in his royall throne, putting vpon him his royall ornaments. Being there, the King drew blood from his eares and the calves of his legs, and his shins, with certain pointed instruments of a tiger and of a deer, used for that pur- pose, which was the sacrifice wherein the divell delighted to be honoured. The Priests, Antients, and Captaines made their orations, all congratulating his election. They were accustomed in their elections to make great feasts and dances, where they wasted many lightes. In this Kings time the custome was brought in, that the King should go in person to make warre in some province, and bring captives to solemnize the feast of his corona- tion, and for the solemne sacrifices of that day. For this cause King Montezuma went into the province of

WAR WITH CHALCO. 489

Chalco, inhabited by a warlike people; from whence (having ^"' ^"' fought valiantly) he brought a great number of captives, whereof he did make a notable sacrifice the day of his coronation, although at that time he did not subdue all the province of Chalco, being a very warlike nation. Many came to this coronation from divers provinces, as well neere as farre off, to see the feast, at the which all commers were very bountifully entertained and clad, especially the poore, to whom they gave new garments. For this cause they brought that day into the cittie, the Eangs tributes, with a goodly order, which consisted in stuffes to make garments of all sorts, in cacao, gold, silver, rich feathers, great burthens of cotton, cucumbers, sundry sortes of pulses, many kindes of sea fish, and of the fresh water, great store of fruites, and venison without number, not reckoning an infinite number of presents, which other kings and lords sent to the new king. All this tribute marched in order according to the provinces, and before them the stewards and receivers, with divers markes and ensignes, in very goodly order ; so as it was one of the goodliest things of the feast, to see the entry of the tribute. The King being crowned, he imploied himselfe in the conquest of many provinces, and for that he was both valiant and vertuous, hee still increased more and more, vsing in all his affaires the couusell and industry of his generall Tlacaellel, whom he did alwaies love and esteeme very much, as hee had good reason. The warre wherein hee was most troubled and of greatest difficultie, was that of the province of Chalco, wherein there happened great matters, whereof one was very remarkable, which was, that they of Chalco had taken a brother of Monteguma in the warres, whome they re- solved to choose for their king, asking him very curteously if he would accept of this charge. He answered (after much importunity, still persisting therein), that if they meant plainely to choose him for their king,, theg^ should

Of f^"

490 MEXICAN CONQUKSTS.

Lib. nt. plant in the market place a tree or very high stake^ on the toppe whereof they should make a little scaffold, and meanes to mount vnto it. The Chalcos supposing it had beene some ceremony to make himselfe more apparent^ presently effected it; then assembling all his Mexicaines about the stake^ he went to the toppe with a garland of flowers in his hand^ speaking to his men in this maner^ '^ O valiant Mexi«  caines^ these men will choose mee for their King ; but the gods will not permit that to be a King I should committe any treason against my countrie^ but contrariwise^ I wil that you leame by me that it behoveth vs rather to indure death then to ayde our enemies. '^ Saying these wordes he cast himselfe downe, and was broken in a thousand peeces, at which spectacle the Chalcos had so great horror and dispite^ that presently they fell vpon the Mexicaines and slew them all with their launces^ as men whom they held too prowde and inexorable, sayings they had divelish hearts. It chanced the night following^ they heard two owles making a moume- full cry^ which they did interpret as an vnfortunate signe, and a presage of their neere destruction^ as it succeeded ; for King Montezuma went against them in person with all his power, where he vanquished them, and ruined all their kingdome; and passing beyond the Sierra Nevada, hee conquered still even vnto the North sea. Then returning towards the South sea, hee subdued many provinces, so as he became a mighty King, all by the helpe and counsell of Tlacaellel, who in a manner conquered all the Mexicaine nation. Yet hee held an opinion (the which was confirmed) that it was not behoovefuU to conquer the province of Tlas- calla, that the Mexicaines might have a fronter enemy, to keepe the youth of Mexico in exercise and allarme; and that they might have numbers of captives to ^orifice to their idols, wherein they did waste (as hath beene said) infinite numbers of men, which should bee taken by force in the warres. The honour must be given to Monte9uma, or

ELECTION OF THE SIXTH KINO. 491

to speake truly, to Tlacaellel his Generall, for the good i-^vu.

order and policy setled in the realme of Mexico, as also for

tlie coansells and goodly enterprises which they did execute;

and likewise for the numbers of Judges and Magistrates,

"being as well ordered there as in any common-weale; yea,

"were it in the most flourishing of Ijurope. This King did

also greatly increase the King^s house, giving it great

authoritie, and appointing many and sundry officers, which

served him with great pompe and ceremony. Hee was no

lesse remarkable touching the devotion and service of his

idoUs, increasing the number of his Ministers and instituting

new ceremonies, where vnto hee carried a great respect.

Hee built that great temple dedicated to their god Yitzil- ipuztli, whereof is spoken in the other Booke. He did sacrifice at the dedication of this temple, a great number of men, taken in sundry victories : finally inioying his Empire in great prosperitie ; hee fell sicke, and died, having raigned twenty-eight yeares, vnlike to his successor Ticocic, who did not resemble him, neither in valour, nor in good fortune.

Chap. xvii. — How Tlacaellel refused to be King^ and of the election and deedes of Ticocic,

J The foure Deputies assembled in counsell, with the lords

of Tezcuco and Tacuba, where Tlacaellel was President in the election, where by all their voices Tlacaellel was chosen, as deserving this charge better than any other. Yet he refused it, perswading them by pertinent reasons that they should choose another, saying, that it was better and ^ more expedient to have another king, and he to be his

• instrument and assistant, as hee had beene till then, and

not to lay the whole burthen vpon him, for that he held himselfe no lesse bound for the Common-weale, then if hee

492 ELECTION OF THE SIXTH KING.

LiB.Tiz. were king. It is a rare thing to refuse principalitie and commaund^ and to indare the paine and the care^ and not to reape the honour. There are few that will yeeld vp the power and authority which they may hold, were it profitable to the common-weale. This Barbarian did heerein exceed the wisest amongst the Greekes and Bomans, and it may be a lesson to Alexander and lulius Gadsar, whereof the one held it little to command the whole world, putting his most deere and faithfuU servants to death vpon some small iealosies of rule and empire : and the other declared him- selfe enemy to his country, saying, that if it were lawfuU to do anything against law and reason, it was for a kingdome : such is the thirst and desire of commaund. Although this acte of Tlacaellels might well proceede from too great a confidence of himselfe, seeming to him, though he were not king, yet in a manor that he commanded kings, suffering him to carry certaine markes, as a tiara or ornament for the head, which belonged onely to themselves. Yet this act deserves greater commendation, and to be well con- sidered of, in that he held opinion to be better able to serve his common-weale as a subiect, then being a soveraigne Lord. And as in a comedie he deserves most commend- ation that represents the personage that imports most, bee it of a sheepheard or a peasant, and leave the King or Cap- taine to him that can performe it : so in good Philosophy, men ought to have a special regard to the common good, and apply themselves to that office and place which they best vnderstand. But this philosophie is farre from that which is practised at this day. But let vs return to our discourse, and say, that in recompense of his modestie, and for the respect which the Mexicaine Electors bare him, they demanded of Tlacaellel (that seeing he would not raigne) whom he thought most fit : wherevpon he gave his voice to a Sonne of the deceased king, who was then very yong, called Ticocic : but they replied that his shoulders were

THE SEVENTH KING. 493

very weake to beare so heavy a burthen. Tlacaellel answered ^"• that he was there to help him to beare the burthen^ as he liad done to the deceased : by meanes whereof they tooke their resolution^ and Ticocic was chosen, to whom Tvere done all the accustomed ceremonies.

They pierced his nosthrils, and for an ornament put an emerald therein : and for this reason^ in the Mexicaine T>ookes^ this king is noted by his nosthrills pierced. Hee differed much from his father and predecessor, being noted for a coward, and not valiant. He went to make warre for his coronation, in a province that was rebelled, where he lost more of his own men then hee tooke captives ; yet he returned, saying, that hee brought the number of captives required for the sacrifice of his coronation, and so hee was crowned with great solemnitie. But the Mexicaines, dis- contented to have a king so little disposed to warre, prac- tised to hasten his death by poison. For this cause hee continued not above foure yeares in the kingdome : whereby wee see that the children do not alwaies follow the blood and valour of their fathers; and the greater the glorie of the predecessors hath beene, the more odious is the weakenes and cowardise of such that succeed them in com- mand, and not in merit. But this losse was well repaired by a brother of the deceased, who was also sonne to great Montezuma, called Axayaca, who was likewise chosen by the advice of Tlacaellel, wherein hee happened better than before.

TIX.

Chap, xviii. — Of the death of Tlacaellel, and the deedes of Axayaca, the seventh King of Mexicaines.

Now was Tlacaellel very old, who by reason of his age, he was carried in a chaire upon mens shoulders, to assist in counsell when busines required. In the end hee fell sicke, whenas the king (who was not yet crowned), did visit him

494 WAR IN TEHUANTBPEC.

^^- ^- ofteiij sheading many teares^ seeming to loose in him his father^ and the father of his countrie. Tlacaellel did most affectionately recommend his children vnto him, especially the eldest^ who had showed himselfe valiant in the former warres. The king promised to have regard vnto him, and the more to comfort the olde man, in his presence he gave him the charge and ensignes of Captaine Generall, with all the pre- eminences of his father ; wherewith the old man remained so well satisfied, as with this content he ended his daies. If hee had not passed to another life, they might have held themselves very happy, seeing that of so poore and small a cittie, wherein he was borne, he established, by his valour and magnanimitie, so great, so rich, and so potent a king- dome. The Mexicans made his fnnerall, as the founder of that Empire, more sumptuous and stately, then they had done to their former kings. And presently after Axayaca^ to appease the sorrow which all the people of Mexico shewed for the death of their captaine, resolved to make the expedition necessary for his coronation. Hee therefore led his army with great expedition into the province of Tehuan- tepec, two hundred leagues from Mexico, where he gave battaile to a mighty army and an infinite number of men assembled together, as well out of that province, as from their neighbours, to oppose themselves against the Mexi- cans. The first of his campe that advanced himselfe to the combate, was the King himselfe, defying his ennemies, from whome hee made shewe to fly when they charged him, vntill he had drawne them into an ambuscadoe, where many souldiers lay hidden vnder straw, who suddenly issued forth, and they which fled, turned head: so as they of Tehuantepec remained in the midst of them, whom they charged furiously, making a great slaughter of them : and following their victory, they razed their citty and temple, punishing all their neighbours rigorously. Then went they on farther, and without any stay, conquered to Guatulco,

WAR WITH TLATELLULCO. 495

the which is a port at this day well ksowne in the South ^"- ^"- sea. Axayaca returned to Mexico with great and rich spoiles, where he was honourably crowned, with sumptuous and stately preparation of sacrifices, tributes, and other things, whither many came to see his coronation. The Kings of Mexico received the crowne from the hands of the King of Tezcuco, who had the preeminence. He made many other enterprises, where he obtained great victories, being alwaies the first to leade the army, and to charge the enemy ; by the which hee purchased the name of a most valiant captaine : and not content to subdue strangers, he also suppressed his subiects which had rebelled, which never any of his predecessors ever could doe, or durst attempt. We have already shewed how some seditious of Mexico had divided themselves from that common-weale, and built a cittie neare vnto them, which they called Tlatellulco, whereas now Santiago is.

These being revolted, held a faction aparte, and encreased and multiplied much, refusing to acknowledge the kings of Mexico, nor to yeeld them obedience. The king Axayaca sent to advise them not to live divided, but being of one bloud, and one people, to ioyne together, and acknowledge the king of Mexico : wherevpon the Lorde of Tlatellulco made an aunswere full of pride and disdaine, defieing the king of Mexico to single combat with himselfe : and pre- sently mustred his men, commaunding some of them to hide themselves in the weeds of the Lake ; and the better to deceive the Mexicans, he commaunded them to take the shapes of ravens, geese, and other beasts, as frogs, and such like, supposing by this meanes to surprise the Mexicans as they should passe by the waies and cawsies of the Lake. Having knowledge of this defiance, and of his adversaries policie, he divided his army, giving a part to his generall, the Sonne of Tlacaellel, commaunding him to charge this ambuscadoe in the Lake ; and he with the rest of his people,

496 WAB WITH TLATELLULCO.

Lib. TO. |,y an ynfrequented way, went and incamped before Tlatellulco. Presently hee called him who had defied him to performe his promise, and as the two Lordes of Mexico and Tlatellulco advaunced, they commaanded their subiects not to moove, vntill they had scene who should be conqueronr, which was done, and presently the two Lordes inconntered valiantly, where having fought long, in the end the Lorde of Tlatellulco was forced to tume his backe, being vnable to indure the furious charge of the king of Mexico. Those of Tlatellulco seeing their captaine file, fainted, and fled like- wise, but the Mexicans following them at the heeles, charged them furiously : yet the Lord of Tlatellulco escaped not the hands of Axayaca, for thinking to save himselfe, he fled to the toppe of the temple, but Axayaca folowed him so neere, as he seised on him with great force, and threw him from the toppe to the bottome, and after set fire on the temple and the cittie. Whilest this passed at Tlatellulco, the Mex- icane generall was very hote in the revenge of those that pretended to defeate him by pollicie, and after he had forced them to yeelde, and to cry for mercy, the general sayed he would not pardon them vntil they had first performed the offices of those figures they represented, and therefore he would have them crie like frogges and ravens, every one according to the figure which he had vndertaken, else they had no composition : which thing he did to mocke them with their own policie. Feare and necessitie be perfect teachers ; so as they did sing and crie with all the differences of voyces that were commaunded them, to save their lives, although they were much grieved at the sport their enimies made at them. They say that vnto this day, the Mexicans vse to ieast at the Tlatellulcans, which they beare impatiently, when they putte them in minde of this singing and crying of beasts. King Axayaca tooke pleasure at this scorne and disgrace, and presently after they returned to Mexico with great ioy. This king

WAR WITH QUAIUTATLAN. 497

was esteemed for one of the best that had commaunded in ^"- "• Mexico. Hee raigned eleaven yeares, and one succeeded that was much inferiour vnto him in valour and vertue.

Chap. xtx. — Of the deedes of Autzol the eighth King of

Mexico.

Among the foure Electors that had power to chuse whome they pleased to be king, there was one indued with many perfections, named Autzol. This man was chosen by the rest, and this election was very pleasing to all the people : for besides that he was valiant, all held him curteous and aflFable to every man, which is one of the chief qualities requil-ed in them that commaund, to purchase love and respect. To celebrate the feast of his coronation, hee re- solved to make a voyage, and to punish the pride of those of Quaxutatlan, a very rich and plentifuU province, and at this day the chiefe of New Spaine. They had robbed his officers and stewards, that carried the tribute to Mexico, and there- withall had rebelled. There was great difficulty to reduce this Nation to obedience, lying in such sort, as an arme of the sea stopt the Mexicans passage: to passe the which, Autzol (with a strange device and industry) caused an Hand to be made in the water, of faggots, earth, and other mat- ter; by meanes whereof, both hee and his men might passa to the enemy, where giving them battell, he conquered them and punished them at his pleasure. Then returned hee vnto Mexico in triumph, and with great riches, to bee crowned King, according to their custome. Autzol ex- tended the limits of his kingdome farre, by many conquests, even vnto Guatimala, which is three hundred leagues from Mexico. He was no less liberall than valiant : for whenas the tributes arrived (which as I have saide) came in great aboundaunco, hee went foorth of his pallace, gathering

498 WILES OF A SOBCSBBB.

Ltt. TH. together all the people into one place, then commannded he to bring all the tributes, which hee divided to those that had neede. To the poore he gave stuffes to make apparrell, and meate, and whatsoever they had neede of in great aboundaunce, and things of value, as golde, silver, iewels, and feathers, were divided amongst the captaines, sbuldiers, and servants of his house, according to every man's merite. This Autzol was likewise a great polititian, hee pulled downe the houses ill built, and built others very sumptuous. It seemed vnto him that the city of Mexico had too litle water, and that the lake was very muddy, and therefore hee resolved to let in a great course of water, which they of Cuyoacan vsed. For this cause he called the chiefs man of the cittie vnto him, being a famous sorcerer; having pro- pounded his meaning vnto him, the sorcerer wished him to be well advised what hee did, being a matter of great diffi- culty, and that hee vnderstoode, if he drew the river out of her ordinary course, making it passe to Mexico, hee would drowne the citty. The king supposed these excuses were but to frustrate the effect of his designe, being therefore in choler, he dismissed him home ; and a few dayes after hee sent a provost to Cuyoacan, to take this sorcerer : who, having understanding for what intent the king's officers came, he caused them to enter his house, and then he pre- sented himself vnto them in the forme of a terrible eagle, wherewith the provost and his companions being terrified, they returned without taking him. Autzol, incensed here- with, sent others, to whome hee presented himselfe in forme of a furious tygre, so as they durst not touch him. The third came, and they found him in the forme of a horrible serpent, whereat they were much afraide. The king mooved the more with these dooings, sent to tell them of Cuyoacan, that if they brought not the sorcerer bound vnto him, he would raze their citty. For feare whereof, or whether it were of his owne free will, or being forced by the people.

SUPPLT OF WATER TO MEXICO. 499

he suffered himselfe to be led to the kingOj who presently ^^- ^• caused him to be strangled, and then did he pat his reso- lution in practise, forcing a chanell whereby the water might passe to Mexico, whereby hee brought a great cur- rent of water into the lake, which they brought with great ceremonies and superstitions, having priests casting incense along the banks, others sacrificed quailes, and with the bloud of them sprinckled the channell bankes, others sounding of cornets, accompanied the water with their musicke. One of the chiefe went attired in a habite like to their goddesse of the water, and all saluted her, saying, that shoe was welcome. All which things are painted in the Annales of Mexico : which booke is now at Rome in the holy library, or Vaticane, where a father of our company, that was come from Mexico, did see it, and other histories, the which he did expound to the keeper of his Holinesse library, taking great delight to vnderstand this booke, which before hee could never comprehend. Finally, the water was brought to Mexico, but it came in such abound- aunce, that it had welneere drowned the cittie, as was fore- told : and in effect it did mine a great parte thereof, but it was presently prevented by the industry of Autzol, who caused an issue to be made to draw foorth the water : by meanes whereof hee repaired the buildings that were fallen, with an exquisite worke, being before but poore cottages. Thus he left the citty invironed with water, like another Venice, and very well built: he raigned eleven yeares, and ended with the last and greatest successor of all the Mexicans.

Chap. xx. — Of the election of great Montezuma, the last

King of Mexico,

When the Spaniards entered new Spaine, being in the yeare of our Lorde one thousand five hundred and eighteen,

ke2

500 CHARACTER OF KONTEZUKA.

ld. txx. Monteqama^ second of that name^ was the last king of the Mexicaines ; I say the last^ although they of Mexico^ after his deaths chose another king^ yea^ in the life of the same Monte9ania^ whom they declared an enemy to his country, as we shall see hereafter. But he that succeeded him, and hee that fell into the hands of the Marquis del Yalle/ had but the names and titles of Kings, for that the kingdome was in a maner al yeelded to the Spaniards : so as with reason we account MonteQuma for the last king, and so hee came to the periode of the Mexicaine's power and great- nesse, which is admirable, being happened among Bar- barians: for this cause, and for that this was the season that God had chosen to reveale vnto them the knowledge of his Gk)spel, and the kingdome of lesus Christ, I will re- late more at large the actes of Monte9uma, then of the rest. Before he came to be king, he was by disposition very grave and stayed, and spake little, so as when he gave his opinion in the privy counsell, whereat he assisted, his speeches and discourses made every one to admire him, so as even then he was feared and respected. He retired himselfe usually into a Chappell, appointed for him in the Temple of Vitzilipuztli, where they said their IdoU spake vnto him ; and for this cause hee was helde very religious and devout. For these perfections then, being most noble and of great courage, his election was short and easie, as a man upon whom al men's eyes were fixed, as woorthy of such a charge. Having intelligence of this election, hee hidde himselfe in this chappell of the Temple, whether it were by iudgement (apprehending so heavy and hard a burthen as to govern such a people), or rather, as I believe, through hypocrisie, to show that he desired not Empire. In the end they found him, and led him to the place of coun- cell, whither they accompanied him with all possible ioy. Hee marched with such a gravitie, as they all sayd the name of Monte9uma agi'eed very wel with his nature, which is as

» Hernan Cortes.

SPEECH OP THE KINO OF TEZCUCO. 501

much to say, an angry Lord. The electors did him great i*"- ▼«• reverence, giving him notice that hee was chosen king : from thence he was ledde before the harth of their gods, to give incense, where he oflTered sacrifices in drawing blond from his eares, and the calves, of his legges, according to their custome. They attired him with the royall ornaments, and pierced the gristle of his nostrils, hanging thereat a rich emerald, a barbarous and troublous custom, but the desire of rule made all paine light and easy. Being seated in his throne, he gave audience to the Orations and Speeches that were made vnto him, which, according vnto their custome were eloquent and artificiall. The first was pro- nounced by the King of Tezcuco, which, being preserved, for that it was lately delivered, and very worthy to be heard, I will set it downe word by word, and thus hee sayde : " The concordance and vnitie of voyces upon thy election, is a suflBcient testimonie (most noble yong man) of the happines the realme shall receive, as well deserving to be commaunded by thee, as also for the generall applause which all doe show by means thereof. Wherein they have great reason, for the Empire of Mexico doth alreadie so farre extend it selfe, that to governe a world, as it is, and to beare so heavy a burthen, it requires no lesse dexteritie and courage, than that which is resident in thy firm and vahant heart, nor of lesse wisedome and iudgement than thine. I see and know plainely, that the mightie God loveth this Cittie, seeing he hath given vnderstanding to choose what was fit. For who will not believe that a Prince, who before his raigne had pierced the nine vaultes of heaven, should not likewise nowe obtaine those things that are earthlie to releeve his people, aiding him selfe with his best iudgement, being thereunto bound by the dutie and charge of a king. Who will likewise beleeve that the great courage which thou hast alwaies valiantly showed in matters of importance, shuld now faile thee in matters of

502 SPEECH OF THE KINQ OF TBZOUCO.

^^•^' greatest need f Who will not perswade himselfe but the Mexicaine Empire is come to the height of their sove- raignetie^ seeing the Lorde of things created hath imparted so great graces vnto thee^ that with thy looke onelie thou breedest admiration in them that beholde thee ? Bejoice^ then^ O happy land, to whom the Creator hath given a Prince, as a firme pillar to support thee, which shall be thy father and thy defence, by whom thou shalt be succoured at neede, who wil be more than a brother to his subiects, for his pietie and clemencie. Thou hast a king, who in regard of his estate is not inclined to delights, or will lie stretched out upon his bed, occupied in pleasures and vices; but contrariwise in the middest of his sweete and pleasant sleepe, hee will sodainely awake, for the care he must have over thee, and will not feele the taste of the most savourie meates, having his spirites transported with the imagination of thy good. Tell mee, then (0 happy realme), if I have not reason to say that thou oughtest reioyce, having found such a King. And thou noble yong man, and our most mightie Lorde, be confident, and of good courage, that seeing the Lorde of things created hath given thee this charge, hee will also give thee force and courage to man- nage it : and thou maiest well hope, that he which in times past hath vsed so great bountie towardes thee, wil not now denie thee his greater gifts, seeing he hath given thee so great a charge, which I wish thee to enioy manie yeares. King Montezuma was very attentive to this Discourse, which, being ended, they say he was so troubled, that indevouring thrice to answer him, hee could not speake, being overcome with teares, which ioy and content doe vsually cause, in signe of great humilitie. In the end, being come to him- selfe, he spake briefly, " I were too blinde, good king of Tezcuco, if I did not know, that what thou hast spoken vnto me, proceeded of meere favour, it pleaseth you to show me, seeing among so manie noble and valiant men within

HOUSBHOLD OF MONTEZUMA. 503

this reaJme^ you have made choise of the least sufficient : ^"' ^«  and in trueth^ I find myself so incapable of a charge of so great importance^ that I know not what to doe, but to beseech the Creator of all created things^ that he will favour mee, and I intreate you all to pray unto him for me." These words uttered^ hee began again to weepe.

Chap, xxi* — How Montezuma ordered the service of his house, and of the warre hee made for hi-s coronation.

He that in his election made such shew of humilitie and mildenes^ seeing himselfe king^ beganne presently to discover his aspiring thoughts. The first was^ he com- maunded that no plebeian should serve in his house> nor beare any royall office, as his predecessours had vsed till then ; blaming them that would be served by men of base condition, commaunding that all the noble and most famous men of his realme should live within his pallace, and exer- cise the offices of his court, and house. Wherevnto an olde man of great authoritie (who had sometimes beene his Schoolemaister) opposed himselfe, advising him to be care- full what hee did, and not to thrust himselfe into the danger of a great inconvenience, in separating himselfe from the vulgare and common people, so as they should not dare to looke him in the face, seeing themselves so reiected by him. He answered, that it was his resolution, and that he would not allow the plebeians to goe thus mingled among the Nobles, as they had doone, saying that the service they did was according to their condition, so as the kings got no reputation, and thus he continued firme in his resolution. Hee presently commanded his counsell to dismisse all the plebeians from their charges and offices, as well those of his houshold as of his court, and to provide knightes, the which was done. After, he went in person to an enterprise neces-

504 CORONATION OF MONTEZUMA.

^ '•^"- sary for his coronation. At that time a province lying farre oflF towards the North Ocean was revolted from the crowne, whither he led the flower of his people, well appointed. There he warred with such valoar and dexteritie that in the end he subdued all the province, and punished the rebells severely, returning with a great number of captives for the sacrifices and many other spoiles. All the citties made him solemne receptions at his returne, and the Lords thereof gave him water to wash, performing the offices of servants, a thing not vsed by any of his predecessors. Such was the feare and respect they bare him. In Mexico they made the feasts of his coronation with great preparations of dances, comedies, banquets, lights, and other inventions for many daies. And there came so great a wealth of tributes from all his countries that strangers vnknowne came to Mexico, and their very enemies resorted in great numbers disguised to see these feasts, as those of Tlascala and Mechoacan : the which Montezuma having discovered, he commanded they should be lodged and gently in treated, and honoured as his own person. He also made them goodly galleries like vnto his owne, where they might see and behold the feasts. So they entred by night to those feasts, as the king himselfe, making their sportes and maskes. And for that I have made mention of these provinces, it shall not be from the purpose to vnderstand that the inhabitants of Mechoacan, Tlascala, and Tepeaca, would never yeelde to the Mexicans, but did alwaies fight valiantly against them ; yea, sometimes the Mechoacans did vanquish the Mexicans, as also those of Tepeaca did. In which place the Marquis Don Fernando Cortes, after that he and the Spaniards were expelled Mexico, pretended to build their first cittie, the which he called (if I remember rightly) Segura de la Fron- tera. But this peopling continued little : for having after- wards reconquered Mexico, all the Spaniards went to inha- bite there. To conclude, those of Tepeaca, Tlascala, and

QOYBBNICXNT OF MONTEZUMA. 505

Mechoacan have beene alwaies enemies to the Mexicans^ lib.th. although Monteqama said ynto Cortes that he did purposely forbeare to subdue them^ to have occasion to exercise his men of warre^ and to take numbers of captives

Chap. xxii. — Of the behaviour and greatnes of Monteguma,

This King laboured to be respected^ yea, to be worshipped as a god. No Plebeian might looke him in the face ; if he did^ he was punished with death : he did never set his foote on the ground^ but was alwaies carried on the shoulders of Noblemen ; and if he lighted, they laid rich tapestry where- on he did go. When he made any voyage, hee and the Noblemen went as it were in a parke compassed in for the nonce, and the rest of the people went without the parke, invironing it in on every side ; hee never put on a garment twice, nor did eate or drinke in one vessell or dish above once ; all must be new, giving to his attendants that which had once served him : so as commonly they were rich and sumptuous. He was very carefuU to have his lawes ob- served. And when he returned victor from any warre, he fained sometimes to go and take his pleasure, then would / he disguise himselfe, to see if his people (supposing if he weare absent) would omitte any thing of the feast or recep- tion. If there were any excesse or defect, he then did punish it rigorously. And also to disceme how his minis- / ters did execute their offices, he often disguised himselfe, oflfering giftes and presents to the iudges, provoking them to do iniustice. If they ofiended, they were presently punished with death, without remission or respect, were they Noblemen or his kinsmen ; yea, his owne brethren. He was little conversant with his people, and seldome seene, retyring himselfe most commonly to care for the

506 SIGNS AND WONDBBS.

^"•^' government of his realme. Besides that hee was a great iusticier and very noble, hee was very valiant and happy^ by meanes whereof hee obtained great victories^ and came to this greatneSj as is written in the Spanish histories^ whereon it seemes needelesse to write more. I will onely have a care heereafter to write what the bookes and histo- ries of the Indies make mention of^ the which the Spanish writers have not observed, having not sufficiently vnder- stood the secrets of this country, the which are things very worthy to be knowne, as we shall see heereafter.

Chap, xxiii. — Of the presages and strange prodigies which happened in Mexico before the fall of their Empire,

Dent. Although the holy Scripture forbids vs to give credite to

Hier. x. siguos and vaine prognostications, and that S. lerome doth admonish vs not to feare tokens from heaven, as the Gen- tiles do : yet the same Scripture teacheth vs that monstrous and prodigious signes are not altogether to bee contemned, and that often they are fore-runners of some generall toi^tea <5hanges and chasticements which God will take, as Euse- ETftngei. bins notes well of Cesarea. For that the same Lord of

Monst. i.

heaven and earth sendes such prodiges and new things in heaven, in the elements, in beasts, and in his other crea- tures, that this might partly serve as an advertisement to men, and to be the beginning of the paine and chastise- ment, by the feare and amazement they bring. It is written in the second booke of Macabees that before that great 8 Mac. 6. change and persecution of the people of Israel, which was caused by the tyranny of Antiochus, sumamed Epiphanes, whome the holy Scriptures call the root of sinne, there were scene for forty dayes together thorowout all lerusalem great squadrons of horsemen in the ayre, who with their armour guilt, their lances and targets, and vppon furious horses.

^N

8ION8 AND WONDERS. 507

with their swordes drawne did strike, skirmish and incoan- ^"' ^"*

ter one against the other : and they say that the inhabitants i Hac. i. of lerasalem seeing this, they prayed to our Lord to appease his wrath, and that these prodegies might tume to good. It is likewise written in the booke of Wisedome, That when Sap. vu. God would drawe his people out of Egypt, and punish the Egyptians, some terrible and fearefull visions appeared vnto them^ as fires seene out of time in horrible formes. Joseph in his booke of the Jewish warres sheweth many and great wonders going before the destruction of Jerusalem, and the last captivitie of his wicked people, whome God iustly ab- horred : and Eusebius of Cesarea. with others, alleadffe the En8eb.,iib.

. . . . i, deecclea.

same texts, authorizing prognostications. The Histories i^^* are full of like observations in great changes of states and commonweales, as Paulus Orosius witnesseth of many : and without doubt this observation .is not vaine nor vnprofit- able ; for although it be vanitie, yea, superstition, forbidden / by the lawe of our God, lightly to beleeve these signes and tokens, yet in matters of great moment, as in the changes of nations, kingdoms, and notable laws, it is no vaine thing, but rather certaine and assured, to beleeve that the wisdome of the most High dooth dispose and suffer these things, foretelling what shoulde happen, to serve (as I have saide) for an advertisement to some and a chasticement to others, and as a witnes to all, that the king of heaven hath a care of man : who as he hath appointed great and fearefull tokens of that great change of the world, which shall bee the day of iudgement, so doth it please him to send wonderful signes to demonstrate lesser changes in divers partes of the world, the which are remarkable, whereof he disposeth according to his eternall wisdome. Wee must also vnder- / stand that although the divell be the father of lies, yet the King of Glorie makes him often to confesse the trueth against his will, which hee hath often declared for very Mat. i. feare, as hee did in the desart by the mouth of the pos- ^^^ iv-

Acts zzyi.

508 PBOPHETS OF EVIL.

Lib. yn. sessed^ Crying, that lesus was the Saviour come to destroy him^ as he did by the Pythoness^ who saide that Paul preached the true God, as when he appeared and troubled Pilate's wife, whom he made to mediate for lesus a iust man. And as many other histories besides the holy Scrip- ture gave diverse testimonies of idols^ in approbation of christian religion, wherof Lactantius, Prosperus, and others make mention. Let them reade £usebiu8 in his bookes of the preparation of the Gospel, and those of his demonstra- tions where he doth amply treate of this matter. I have y purposely spoken this, that no man should contemne what is written in the Histories and Annales of the Indies touch- ing presages and strange signes, of the approching end and mine of their kingdome, and of the Divelles tyranny, whom they worshipped altogether. Which in my opinion is worthy of credite and beliefe, both for that it chanced late, and the memory is yet fresh, as also for that it is likely that the Divell lamented at so great a change, and that God by the same meanes begane to chastice their cruell and abominable idolatries. I will therefore set them downe heere as true things. It chanced that MonteQuma / having raigned many yeers in great prosperity, and so pufft vp in his conceit, as hee caused himselfe to be served and feared, yea, to be worshipped as a god, that the Almighty Lord beganne to chastice him, and also to admo- nish him, suffering even the very Divelles whome he wor- shipped to tell him these heavy tidings of the ruine of his kingdome, and to torment him by visions, which had never bin seen ; wherewith hee remained so melancholy and troubled, as he was voyde of iudgement. The idoU of those of Cholula, which they called Quetzalcoatl, declared that a strange people came to possesse his kingdomes. The king of Tezcuco (who was a great Magitian, and had conference with the Divell) came one day at an extraordinarie houre to visite Montezuma, assuring him that his gods had tolde him

A TALKING STONE. 509

that there were great losses preparing for him and for ^'•▼n- his whole realme : many witches and sorcerers went and declared as mnch ; amongst which there was one did very particularly foretell him what should happen : and as he Mas with him hee tolde him that the pulses of his feete and hands failed him. Montezuma, troubled with these news^ / commanded all those sorcerers to be apprehended : but they vanished presently in the prison, wherewith hee grewe into such a rage, that hee might not kill them, as hee putte their wives and children to death, destroying their houses and families. Seeing himselfe importuned and troubled with those advertisements, he sought to appease the anger of his gods : and for that cause hee laboured to bring a / huge stone, thereon to make great sacrifices. For the effecting whereof hee sent a great number of people with engines and instruments to bring it : which they could by no meanes moove, although (being obstinate) they had broken many instruments. But as tbey strove still to raise it they heard a voyce ioyning to the stone, which said they laboured in vaine, and that they should not raise it, for that the Lorde of things created would no more suffer those things to be doone there. Monte9uma^ vnderstanding this, com- maunded the sacrifice to be perfoarmed in that place, and they say the voyce spake againe : '* Have I not told you that it is not the pleasure of the Lord of things created that it should be done : and that you may well know thatH^ is so, I will suffer my selfe to be transported a little, then after you shall not moove mee". Which happened so in- deede ; for presently they carried it a small distance with great facility, then afterwards they could not moove it, till that after many prayers it suffered it selfe to be transported to the entry of the citty of Mexico, where sodainly it fel / into the Lake, where, seeking for it, they could not finde it, but it was afterwards found in the same place from whence they had remooved it, wherewith they remayned amazed

510 flVlL OKBNS.

!<»• ^^ and confounded. At the same time there appeared in the y heavens a great flame of fire^ very bright^ in the forme of a Pyramide^ which beganne to appeare at midnight^ and went still monnting vntill the Sunne rising in the morning, where it stayed at the Soath, and then vanished away. It shewed it self in this sort the space of a whole yeare, and ever as it appeared the people cast foorth great cries as they were accustomed, beleeving it was a presage of great misfortune. It happened also that fire tooke the Temple, whenas no body was within it, nor neare vnto it, neither did there fall any lightning or thunder: wherevpon the guardes crying out, a number of people ran with water, but nothing could helpe, so as it was all consumed ; and they say the fire seemed to come forth of peeces of timber, which kindled more by the water that was cast vpon it. There was a Comet scene in the day time^ running from the west to the east, casting an infinite number of sparkles, and they say the forme was like to a long taile, having three heads. / The great lake betwixt Mexico and Tezcuco,« without any wind, earthquake, or any other apparent signe, beganne sodainely to swell, and the waves grewe in such sort, as all the buildings neare vnto it fell downe to the ground. They say at that time they heard many voices, as of a woman in paine, which sayde sometimes, ^' my children, the time of your destruction is come", and otherwhiles it sayde, '^ my children, whither shall I carry you, that you perish not utterly ? There appeared, likewise, many monsters with two heads, which, being carried before the king, sodainely vanished. There were two that exceeded all other monsters, being very strange j the one was, the fishers of the lake tooke a bird as bigge as a crane, and of the same colour, but of a strange and vnseene form. They caried it to Montezuma, who at that time was in the pallace of tears and mourning, which was all hanged with blacke, for as he had many palaces for his recreation, so had he also others for

N

> SYIL OUENS. 511

times of afflicMon^ wherewith hee was then heavily charged ^'•^^- and iormentea, by reason of the threatnings his gods had given him by th^$e sorrowfull advertisements. The fishers came about noone^ setting this bird before him, which had on the toppe of his head a thing bright and transparent, in forme of a looking glasse, wherein he did behold a warre- like nation cotoming from the east, armed, fighting, and killing. He called his Divines and Astronomers (whereof there was a great number), who, having seen these things, and not able to yeelde any reason of what was demaunded of them, the bird vanished away, so as it was never more seene : wherevpon Montezuma remained very heavy and sorrowfull. The other which happened was a labourer, who had the report of a very honest man, came vnto him, telling him, that being the day before at his worke, a great Eagle flew towardes him, and tooke him vppe in his talents, without hurting him, carying him into a certaine cave, where it left him; the Eagle pronouncing these words, Most mightie Lorde, I have brought him whome thou hast commaunded me". This Indian labourer looked about on every side, to whom^ hee spake, but hee sawe no man. Then he heard a voyce which sayde vnto him, " Doost thou not knowe this man, whome thou seest lying vpon the ground^'; and looking thereon, he perceived a man lie very heavy asleepe, with royaU ensignes, floures in his hand, and a staffe of perfumes burning, as they are accustomed to vse in that countrey, whome the labourer beholding, knew it was the great king Monte9uma, and answered presently : " Great Lorde, this resembles our King Montezuma." The voyce saide againe, " Thou saiest true, behold what he is, and how he lies asleepe, carelesse of the great miseries and afflictions prepared for him. It is nowe time that he pay / the great number of offences hee hath doone to God, and that he receive the punishment of his tyrannies and great pride, and yet thou seest how carelesse hee lies, blinde in

512 EVIL OMENS.

^^•^°' liis owne miseries, and without any feeling. But to the end thou maiest the better see him, take the staffe of perfumes hee holdes burning in his hand, and put it to his face, thou shalt then find him without feeling.^' The poore laborer durst not approach neere him, nor doe as he was com- maunded, for the great feare they all hadde of this king. But the voyce saide, '^ Have no feare, for I am without comparison greater than this King, I can destroy him, and defend him, doe therefore what Tcommaund thee." Where- ypon the laborer took the staffe of perfumes out of the king's hand, and put it burning to his nose, but he mooved not, nor showed any feeling.

This done, the voice said vnto him, that seeing he had found the king so sleepy, he should go awake him, and tell him what he had scene. Then the Eagle, by the same commandment, tooke the man in his talents, and set him in the same place where he foand him, and for accomplish- ment of that which it had spoken, hee came to advertise him. They say, that Montequma looking on his face, found that he was burnt, the which he had not felt till then, wherewith he continued exceedingly heavy and troubled. It may be, that what the laborer reported, had happened /vnto him by imaginary vision. And it is not incredible, that God appointed by the meanes of a good Angell, or suffered by a bad, that this advertisement should be given to the labourer for the king's chasticement, although an infidell, seeing that we read in the Holy Scriptures, that infidells and sinners have had the like apparitions and revelations, as Nabucadonosor, Balaam, and the Pithoness Dan. u. of Saul. And if some of these apparitions did not so ex- Nmn-xxii. presly happen, yet, without doubt, Montequma had many xxviu*. great afflictions and discontentments, by reason of sundry and divers revelations which he had, that his kingdome and law should soon end.

ABBIYA.L OF THE SPANIARDS. 513

Chap. X3nv. — Of the newes Monteguma received of the

Spaniards arrival in his Country, and of the

Ambassage he sent them.

In the fourteenth yeare of the raigne of Montezuma, LiB.vn. which was in the yeare of our Lord 1517, there appeared in the North seas, shippes, and men landing, whereat the subiects of MonteQuma wondred much, and desirous to leame, and to be better satisfied what they were, they went aboord in their canoes, carrying many refreshings of meats and stuffes to make apparrell, vpon colour to sell them. The Spaniards received them into their shippes, and in exchange of their victualls and stufies, which were acceptable vnto them, they gave them chaines of false stones, red, blew, greene, and yellow, which the Indians imagined to be precious stones. The Spaniards informing themselves who was their king, and of his great power, dismissed them, willing them to carry those stones vnto their lord, saying, that for that time they could not goe to him, but they would presently returne and visit him. Those of the coast went presently to Mexico with this message, carrying the representation of what they had scene painted on a cloth, both of the shippes, men, and stones which they had given them. King MonteQuma remained very pensive with this message, commanding them not to reveale it to any one. The day following, he assembled his counsell, and having showed them the painted clothes and the chaines, he consulted what was to be done ; where it was resolved to set good watches vpon all the sea coastes, to give present advertisement to the king of what they should discover. The yeare following, which was in the beginning of the yeare 1518, they discovered a fleet at sea, in the which was the Marques del Valle Don Fernando Cortes, with his companions, a newes which 'much troubled Monte-

d

514 KECEPTION OF CORTES.

Lib. tu. ^mna, and conferring with his counsel!^ they all said, that without doubt^ their great and antient Lord Quetzalcoatl was come^ who had saide^ that he would returne from the Eastj whither he was gone. The Indians held opinion, that a great Prince had in times past left them^ and pro- mised to returne. Of the beginning and ground of which / opinion shall be spoken in another place. They therefore sent five principall Ambassadors with rich presents, to con- gratulate his comming, saying, they knewe well that their great Lord Quetzalcoatl was come, and that his servant Monte9uma sent to visit him, for so hee accounted himselfe. The Spaniards vnderstood this message by the meanes of Marina, an Indian woman whom they brought with them, and vnderstood the Mexicane tongue. Fernando Cortes finding this a good occasion for his entry, commanded to deck his chamber richly, and being set in great state and pompe, he caused the Ambassadors to enter, who omitted no showes of humilitie, but to worshippe him as their god.

They delivered their charge, saying, that his servant MonteQuma sent to visit him, and that he held the country in his name> as his lievetenant ; that he knew well it was the Topilcin which had beene promised them many yearea since, who should returne again vnto them. And therefore they brought him such garments as he was wont to weare, when hee did converce amongst them, beseeching him to accept willingly of them, offering him many presents of great value. Cortes receiving the presents, answered that he was the same they spake of, wherewith they were greatly satisfied, seeing themselves to be curteously received and intreated by him (for in that, as wel as in other things, this valiant captaine deserved commendations) ; that if this course had been continued^ to win them by love, it seemed the best occasion was offered that might be devised, to draw this country to the Gospel by peace and love : but the sinnes of these cruel homicides and slaves of Satan

Zl.

RETURN OF THE AMBASSADORS. 515

required punisliment from heaven, as also those of many ^'- ^"- Spaniards^ which were not in small number. Thus the high iudgements of God disposed of the health of this nation^ having first cut off the perished rootes : and as the Apostle saieth^ the wickednes and blindenes of some^ hath Rom. beene the salvation of others. To conclude, the day after this Ambassage, all the Captaines and Commanders of the fleete came vnto the Admirall, where vnderstanding the matter^ and that this realm e of Montequma was mightie and rich : it seemed fit to gaine the reputation of brave and valiant men among this people, and that by this meanes (although they were few), they should bee feared and re- ceived into Mexico. To this end they discharged all their artillerie from their shippes, which being a thing the Indians had never heard, they were amazed, as if heaven had fallen vpon them. Then the Spaniards beganne to defie them to fight with them : but the Indians not daring to hazard themselves, they did beate them and intreate them ill, showing their swordes, lances, partisans, and other armes, wherewith they did terrifie them much. The poore Indians were by reason heereof so fearefuU and amazed, as they changed their opinion, saying, that their Lord Topilcin came not in this troup. But they were some gods (their enemies), come to destroy them. Whenas the Ambassadors returned to Mexico, MonteQuma was in the house of audience ; but before he would heare them, this miserable man commanded a great number of men to be sacrificed in his presence, and with their blood to sprinkle the Ambassadors, supposing by this ceremony (which they were accustomed to do in solemne Ambassages), to receive a good answer. But vnderstanding the report and inform- ation of the manor of their shippes, men, and armes, he stoode perplexed and confounded : then taking counsell thereon, he found no better meanes then to labour to stoppe the entrie of these strangers by coniurations and

ll2

Ln. VIZ.

516 TERROR OF MONTEZUMA.

magicke Artes. They had accustomed often to vse this meanes, having great conference with the divell, by whose helpe they sometimes obtained strange effects. They there- fore assembled together all the Sorcerers^ Magicians^ and Inchanters, who being perswaded by Montezuma, they tooke it in charge to force this people to returne vnto their country. For this consideration, they went to a certain© place which they thought fit for the invocation of their divells, and practising their artes (a thing worthy of con- sideration), they wrought all they could; but seeing no- thing could prevaile against the Christians, they went to the king, telling him that they were more than men, for that nothing might hurt them, notwithstanding all their coniurations and inchantments. Then Montezuma advised him of another poUicie, that faining to be very well con- tented with their comming, he commanded all his countries to serve these celestiall gods that were come into his land. The whole people was in great heavinesse and amazement, and often newes came that the Spaniards inquired for the King, of his manner of life, of his house and meanes. He was exceedingly vexed herewith ; some of the people and other Necromancers advised him to hide himself e, offering to place him whereas no creature should ever finde him. This seemed base vnto him, and therefore he resolved to attend them, although it were dying. In the end he left his houses and royall pallaces to lodge in others, leaving them for these gods as he said.

Chap. xxv. — Of the Spaniards entrie info Mexico.

I pretende not to intreate of the acts and deedes of the Spaniards who conquered New Spaine, nor the strange ad- ventures which happened vnto them, nor of the courage and invincible valour of their Captaine Don Fernando

Montezuma's strategy. 517

Cortes : for that there are many histories and relations ^^- ^^• thereof, as those which Fernando Cortes himselfe did write to the Emperour Charies the fift, although they be in a plaine stile and farre from arrogancie, the which doe give a sufficient testimony of what did passe, wherein he was worthy of etemall memory, but onely to accomplish my inten- tion. I am to relate what the Indians report of this action, / the which hath not to this day beene written in our vulgar tong. Montezuma therefore, having notice of this Captaines victories^ that he advanced for his conquest^ that hee was confederate and ioyned with them of Tiascala^ his capitall enemies, and that he had severely punished them of Cholula his friends, he studied how to deceive him, or else to try / him in sending a principall man vnto him, attyred with the like ornaments and royall ensignes^ the which shuld take vpon him to be Monte9uma, which fiction being discouered to the Marquis by them of Tlascala (who did accompany him)^ he sent him backe, after a milde and gentle reprehen- sion, in seeking so to deceive him : wherevpon Monte9uma was so confounded, that for the feare thereof, he returned to his first imaginations and practises, to force the chris- / tians to retyre, by the invocation of coniurers and witches. . And therefore he assembled a greater number then before, threatning them that if they returned without effecting what he had given them in charge, not any one should escape, wherevnto they all promised to obey. And for this cause all the divells officers went to the way of Chalco, by the which the Spaniards should passe, when, mounting to the top of a hill, Tezcatlipuca, one of their principall gods, appeared vnto them, as comming from the Spaniards camp, in the habite of Chalcas, who had his breast bound about eight folde with a corde of reeds, hee came like a man beside himselfe, out of his wits, and drunke with rage and furie. Being come to this troupe of witches and coniurers, / he staied, and spake to them in great choller, "Why come

518 KBSTINa OF C0BTB8 AND ICONTEZUMA.

Lib. m. jq^ hither : what doth Montezuma pretend to doe by your """"""^ meanes ? He hath advised himselfe too late : for it is now determined that his Kingdom and honour shall be taken from him, with all that he possesseth^ for punishment of the great tyrannies he hath committed against his subjects^ haying governed not like a Lordj but like a traitonr and tyrant/' The inchanters and coniurers, hearing these words^ knew it was their idoll^ and^ humbling themselves before him^ they presently built him an altar of stone in the same place^ covering it with flowers which they gathered there- aboutes, but he contrariwise, making no account of these things, beganne againe to chide them^ sayings What come you hither to do, yee traitours ? Retume presently and behold Mexico^ that you may ynderstand what shall become y thereof. And they say that^ turning towards Mexico to behold it, they did see it flaming on fire. Then the divell vanished away^ and they^ not daring to passe any farther^ gave notice thereof to Monte9uma, whereat he remained long without speakings looking heavily on the ground ; then he said^ What shall we doe if god and our friends leave vs, and contrariwise^ they helpe and favour our enemies ? I am now resolute^ and we ought all to resolve in this pointy that happen what may, we must not flie nor hide ourselves^ or shew any signe of cowardice. I onely pittie the aged and infants^ who have neither feete nor hands to defend themselves. Having spoken this^ he held his peace^ being transported into an extasie. In the end the Marquis ap- proaching to Mexico^ Montequma resolved to make of neces- sitie a vertue, going three or foure leagues out of the cittie to receive him with a great maiesty, carried vpon the shoulders of foure Noblemen^ vnder a rich canopie of gold and feathers: when they mette^ Monte9uma discended^ and they S9.1uted one another very curteously. Don Fernando Cortes said vnto him that he should not care for any things and that he came not to take away his realme^ nor to diminish

INTERVIEW WITH MONTEZUMA. 519

his authoritie. Monte9uma lodged Cortes and his com- I'l"-^"- panions in his royall pallace^ the which was very stately, and he himselfe lodged in other private houses. This night the soaldiers for ioy discharged their artillery, wherewith the Indians were much troubled, being vnaccustomed to heare such musicke. The day following Cortes caused Montequma and all the Nobles of his Court to assemble in a great hall, where, being set in a high chaire, he said vnto them that hee w'as servant to a great prince, who had sent them into these countries to doe good workes, and that having found them of Tlascala to be his friendes (who complained of wrongs and greevances done vnto them daily by them of Mexico), he would vnderstand which of them was in the blame, and reconcile them, that heereafter they might no more afflict and warre one against another : and in the meane time he and his bretheren (which were the Spaniards) would remaine still there with- out hurting them : but contrariwise, they would helpe them all they could. He laboured to make them all vnderstand this discourse, vsing his interpreters and truchmen. The which being vnderstoode by the King and the other Mexi- cane Lords, they were wonderfully well satisfied, and shewed great signes of love to Cortes and his company. Many hold opinion that if they had continued the course they began that day, they might easily have disposed of the king and his kingdome, and given them the law of Christ with- out any great effusion of bloud. But the iudgements of/ God are great, and the sins of both parties were infinite : so as not having followed this course, the busines was de- ferred : yet in the end God shewed mercy to this nation, -^ imparting vnto them the light of his holy Gospel, after he had shewed his iudgement, and punished them that had deserved it, and odiously offended his divine reverence. So it is that by some occasions many complaints, griefs, and iealosies grew on either side. The which Cortes find-

520 BISINQ OF THE MEXICANS.

Lu.rn. jug^ ^nd that the Indians mindes began to be distracted from them^ he thought it necessary to assure himself^ in laying hand vpon king Monte9uma^ who was seazed on^ and his legs fettered. Truly this act was strange vnto all men, and like vnto that other of his, to have burnt his ships, and shut himselfe in the midst of his enemies, there to vanquish. / or to die. The mischiefe was, that by reason of the vnex- pected arrival of Pamphilo de Narvaez at Vera Gruz^ drawing the country into mutiny, Cortes was forced to absent himselfe from Mexico, and to leave poor Montezuma in the handes of his companions, who wanted discretion, nor had not moderation like vnto him ; so as they grew to that discention, as there was no meanes to pacific it.

Chap. xxvi. — Of the death of Montezuma, and the Spaniards

departure out of Mexico,

Whenas Cortes was absent from Mexico, he that re- mained his lievetenant resolved to punish the Mexicans severely, causing a great number of the nobilitie to be slaine at a maske which they made in the pallace, the which did so far exceede, as all the people mutinied, and in a furious rage took armes to be revenged and to kil the Spaniards. They therefore besieged them in the pallace, pressing them so neere, that all the hurt the Spaniards could do them with their artillery and crosse-bowes, might not terrific them, nor force them to retyre from their enter- prise, where they continued many daies, stopping their victualls, nor suffering any one to enter or issue forth. They did fight with stones, and cast dartes after their manor, with a kind of lances like vnto arrowes, in the which there are foure or six very sharpe rasors, the which are such (as the histories report) that in these warres an Indian with one blow of these rasors almost cut off* the

UISING OF THE MEXICANS. 521

necke of a horse ; and as they did one day fight with this ^"•▼"' resolution and furie^ the Spaniards, to make them cease, shewed forth Montezuma, with another of the chiefe Lords of Mexico, vpon the top of a platform of the house, covered with the targets of two souldiers that were with them. The Mexicanes, seeing their Lord Montegama, staied with great silence. Then Monte9uma caused the Lord to advise them to pacific themselves, and not to warre against the Span- iards, seeing that (hee being a prisoner) it could little pro- fite him. The which being vnderstood by a yong man called Quicuxtemoc, whom they now resolved to make their king, spake with a loud voice to Monte9uma, willing him to retyre like a villaine, that seeing he had bin such a coward as to suffer himselfe to be taken, they were no more bound to obey him, but rather should punish him as he deserued, calling him woman for the more reproach, and then hee beganne to draw his bowe and to shoote at him, and the people beganne to cast stones at him, and to continue their combate. Many say that Montequma was then hurt with a stone, whereof he died. The Indians of Mexico affirme the contrarie, and that he died as I will shew hereafter. Alva- rado and the rest of the Spaniards, seeing themselves thus pressed, gave intelligence to Captaine Cortes of the great danger they were in : who having with an admirable dexte- ritie and valour given order to Narvaez affaires, and assembled the greatest part of his men, he returned with all speede to succour them of Mexico, where observing the time the Indians rest (for it was their custom in war to rest every fourth day :) He one day advanced with great policy and courage, so as both he and his men entred the pallace, whereas the Spaniards had fortified themselves : they then shewed great signes of ioy in discharging their artillery. But as the Mexicans farie increased (being out of hope to defend themselves) Cortes resolved to passe away secretly in the night without bruite. Having therefore made

522 BBTBEAT OF THE SPANIARDS.

Ln. TO. bridges to passe two great and dangerous passages^ about midnight they issued forth as secretly as they could^ the g^reatest part of his people having passed the first bridge^ they were discovered by an Indian woman before they could passe the second^ who cried out their enemies fled^ at the which voice all the people ran together with a hor- rible fnrie : so as in passing the second bridge^ they were so charged and pursued^ as there remained above three hundred men slaine and hurt in one place ; where at this day there is a smal hermitage^ which they vnproperly cal of Martyrs. Many Spaniards (to preserve the gold and iewells which they had gotten), perished^ and others staying to carry it away, were taken by the Mexicans, and cruelly sacrificed to their idols. The Mexicans found king Monte- zuma dead, and wounded as they say with poiniards, and they hold opinion that that night the Spaniards slew him with other Noblemen. The Marquis in his relation sent to the Emperour, writes the contrary, and that the Mexicans killed him that night with a son of Montezuma, which he led with him amongst other noblemen, saying, that all the treasure of gold, stones, and silver fell into the lake and was never more seene. But howsoever, Montezuma died miserably, and paied his deserts to the iust iudgement of our Lord of heaven for his pride and tyranny : his body falling into the Indians power, they would make him no obsequies of a king, no, not of an ordinarie person, but cast it away in great disdaine and rage. A servant of his having pittie of this king's miserie (who before had bene feaved and worshipped as a God) made a fier thereof, and put the ashes in a contemptible place. Eetuming to the Spaniards that escaped, they were greatly tyred and tur- moiled, the Indians following them two or three daies very resolutely, giving them no time of rest, being so distressed for victualls, as a few graines of Mays were divided amongst them for their meate. The relations both of the Spaniards

SUBMISSION OF THE MEXICANS. 523

and Indians agree^ that Grod delivered them here miracu- ^"' ^' lously, the Virgin Mary defending them on a little hill, whereat this day, three leagues from Mexico, there is a Chnrch bnilt in remembrance thereof, called our Lady of sacconr. They retyred to their antient friends of Tlascala, whence, by their aide and the valour and pollicie of Cortes, they returned afterwards to make war against Mexico, by water and land, with an invention of brigantines, which they put into the lake, where, after many combates, and above threescore dangerous battailes, they conquered Mexico, on S. Hippolitus day, the 13 of August 1521. The last king of the Mexicans (having obstinately main- tained the wars) was in the end taken in a great canoe, whereinto he fled, who, being brought, with some other of the chiefest noblemen, before Fernando Cortes, this pettie king, with a strange resolution and courage, drawing his dagger, came neere to Cortes, and said vnto him, *' Vntill this day I have done my best indevour for the defence of my people : now am I no farther bound, but to give thee this dagger to kill me therewith.'^ Cortes answered, that he would not kill him, neither was it his intention to hurt them : but their obstinate folly was guiltie of all the misery and afflictions they had suflFered, neither were they ignorant how often he had required peace and amity at their hands. He then commanded them to be intreated curteously. Many strange and admirable things chanced in this con- quest of Mexico : for I neither hold it for an vntruth, nor an addition, which many write, that God favoured the Spaniards by many miracles : for else it had bin impossible to surmount so many difficulties without the favour of heaven, and to subiect this nation with so few men. For although we were sinners, and vnworthy so great a favour, yet the cause of our God, the glorie of our faith, the good of so many thousand soules, as were in these countries, whome the Lord had predestinate, wrought this change

524 SANTA CBUZ DE LA SIEBfiA. '

L». TH. which wee now see by supematurall meanes, and proper to himselfe which calls the blinde and prisoners to the know- ledge of himselfe, giving them light and libertie by his holy Gospel. And to the end yon may the better vnderstand this^ and give credite therevnto^ I will aledge some examples which^ in my opinion, are fit for this history.

Chap, xxvii. — Of some miracles which Ood hath showed at

the Indies, in favour of the faith, beyond the desert

of those that wrought them,

Santa Cruz de la Sierra is a very great province, in the Kingdom e of Peru, neighbour to divei^e infidell nations, which have not yet any knowledge of the Gospel, if since my departure the fathers of our company which remaine there have not instructed them. Yet this province of Santa Cruz is peopled by Christians, and there are many Spaniards, and great numbers of Indians baptized. The maner how Christianitie entred was thus. A souldier of a lewd life, resident in the province of Charcas, fearing punishment, being pursued for his oflFences, went farre vp into the countrie, and was received curteously by this bar- barous people. The Spaniard seeing them in a great extremity for water, and that to procure raine they vsed many superstitious ceremonies, according to their vsuall maner, he said vnto them, that if they would do as he said, they should presently have raine, the which they willingly offered to performe. Then the souldier made a great crosse, the which he planted on a high and eminent place, commanding them to worship it and to demand water, the which they did. A wonderful thing to see, there presently, fel such abundance of raine, as the Indians tooke so great devotion to the holy crosse, as they fled vnto it in all their necessities, and obtained all they demanded : so as they

CUEING BY MIRACLES. 525

brake downe their idoUs, and beganne to carry tbe crosse ^"- ^ for tBeir badge, demanding preachers to instruct and to baptise them. For this reason, the province to this day hath beene called Santa Cruz de la Sierra. But to the end we may see by whom God wrought these miracles, it shall not be vnfit to show how that this souldier, after he had some yeares done these miracles, like an Apostle, and yet nothing reformed in his lewd course of life, left the pro- yince of Charcas, and continuing in his wicked courses, was publikely hanged at Potosi. Polo (who knew him wel) writes all this, as a notable thing happened in his time. CabeQa de Vaca, who since was governour of Paraguay, writes what happened vnto him in his strange perigrination in Florida, with two or three other companions, the onely remainder of an army, where they continued ten yeares with these Barbarians, traveling and searching even vnto the South sea, being an author worthy of credite: he saieth, that these Barbarians did force them to cure cer- taine diseases, threatning them with death if they did it not; they being ignorant in any part of phisicke, and having nothing to apply, forced by necessitie, made evan- gelicall medicines, saying the praiers of the Church, and making the signe of the crosse, by meanes whereof they cured these diseases, which made them so famous, as they were forced to exercise this oflSce in all townes as they passed, the which were innumerable, wherein our Lord did aide them miraculously, and they themselves were thereat amazed, being but of an ordinarie life ; yea, one of them was a Negro. Lancero was a souldier of Peru, of whom they knew no other merit but to be a souldier : he spake certaine good wordes vpon wounds, and making the signe of the crosse, did presently cure them : so as they did say (as in a proverbe), the psalme of Lancero. Being examined by such as held authority in the Church, his office and works were approved. Some men worthy of credite report (and I have heard it spoken), that in the

Lib. VII.

526 MIRACLES WROUGHT FOR THE CHRISTIANS.

cittie of Cusco, whenas the Spaniards were besieged and so straightly pressed^ that without helpe from heaven it was impossible to escape, the Indians casting fire on the tops of the houses^ whither the Spaniards were retyred (in which place the great Church is now built)/ and although the covering were of a kind of straw, which they call Chicho,* and that the fire they cast was of very resinous faggots ; yet nothing was set on fire, nor burnt, for that there was a woman did quench it presently, the which the Indians did visibly see, as they confessed afterwards being much amazed. It is most certaine, by the relations of many, and by the histories which are written, that in divers battailes which the Spaniards had, as well in New Spaine as in Peru, the Indians their enemies did see a horseman in the aire, mounted on a whit horse, with a sword in his hand, fighting for the Spaniards, whence comes the great reverence they beare at the Indies to the glorious Apostlo Saint lames. Other whiles they did see in some battailes the image of our Ladie, from whom the Christians have received in those partes incomparable favours and bene- fites : if I should particularly relate all the workes of heaven as they happened, it would make a very long dis- course. It snfficeth to have said this, by reason of the favour which the Que^ne of glorie did to our men when they were pressed and pursued by the Mexicans, the which I have set downe, to the end we may know how our Lord hath had a care to favour the faith and Christian religion, defending those that maintained it, although happily by their workes they deserved not so great favours and bene- fites from heaven. And therefore we ought not to con- demne all these things of the first Conquerours of the Indies, as some religious and learned men have done, doubtlesse with a good zeale, but too much affected. For although, for the most part, they were covetous men, cruell,

» The great hall of the palace of Ynca Huiracocha, now the cathedral of Cuzco. « Ychu. (^Stipa Ychu),

DESIGNS OF PROVIDENCE. 527

and very ignorant in the course that was to be observed ^"- ^"• with the Infidels^ who had never offended the Christians^ yet can we not deny but on their part there was much malice against God and our men, which forced them to vse rigor .and chastisement. And, moreover, the Lord of all (although the faithful! were sinners), would favour their cause and partie, even for the good of the Infidells, who should bee converted vnto the holy Gospel by this meanes, for the waies of God are high, and his paths wonderful.

Chap, xxviii. — Of the maner how the Divine Providence disposed of the Indies, to give an entrie to Christian

Religion,

I will make an end of this historie of the Indies, showing the admirable meanes whereby God made a passage for the Gospel in those partes, the which we ought well to consider of, and acknowledge the providence and bountie of the Creator. Every one may vnderstand by the relation and discourse I have written in these bookes, as well at Peru as in New Spaine, whenas the Christians first set footing, that these Kingdomes and Monarchies were come to the height and period of their power. The Tncas of Peru, possessing from the Bealme of Chile beyond Quito, which are a thousand leagues, being most aboundant in gold, siluer, and all kinds of riches : as also in Mexico, Monte- Quma commaunded from the North Ocean sea vnto the South, being feared and worshipped, not as a man, but ^ rather as a god. Then was it, that the most high Lord had determined that that stone of Daniel, which dis- solved the Bealmes and Kingdoms of the world, should also dissolve those of this new world. And as the lawe of Christ came whenas the Bomane Monarchic was at her greatnes : so did it happen at the West Indies, wherein we see the iust providence of our Lord. For being then in

528 DESIONS OF PROVIDENCE.

La. nt. ^jjQ world, I meane in Europe, but one head and temporall Lord, as the holy Doctors do note, whereby the Gospel might more easily be imparted to so many people and nations. Even so hath it happened at the Indies, where having given the knowledge of Christ to the Monarchs of so many Kingdomes, it was a meanes that afterwards the knowledge of the gospell was imparted to all the people : yea, there is herein a speciall thinge tb be observed, that as the Lordes of Cuzco and Mexico conquered new landes, so they brought in their owne language, for although there t were (as at this day) great diuersitie of tongues, yet the courtlie speech of Cuzco did, and doth at this day, runne above a thousand leagues, and that of Mexico did not extend farre lesse, which hath not beene of small import- ance, but hath much profited in making the preaching easie at such a time, when as the preachers had not the gift of many tongues, as in old tymes. He that woulde knowe what a helpe it hath beene for the conversion of this people in these two greate Empyres, and the greate diffi- cultie they haue founde to reduce those Indians to Christ, ' which acknowledge no Soueraigne Lord, let him goe to Florida, Brasil, the Andes, ^ and many other places, where they have not prevailed so much by their preaching in fiftie yeares, as they have done in Peru and Newe Spaine in lesse than five. If they will impute the cause to the riches of the countrie, I will not altogether denie it. Yet were it impossible to have so great wealth, and to bee able to pre- serve it, if there had not beene a Monarchic. This is also a worke of God in this age, that we. Preachers of the gospell being so colde and without zeale. Merchants and Soldiers, with the heatof covetousness and desire of command, search and discouer newe people whither wee passe with our August., commodities. For as Saint Austin saith, the Prophesie of

lib. ii, , *^

• • ® ™? Esaias is fulfilled, in that the Church of Christ is extended,

XXXV1« 

• Antis. Not the mountains, but the Peruvian province of Anti-

suyu, the wild forests to the eastward of the Andes.

BRAVERY OF THE INDIANS. 529

not onely to the right hand, but also to the left : which is ^" (as he declareth) by humaine and earthly meanes, which they seeke more commonly than lesus Christ. It was also - a great providence of our Lord, that whenas the first' Spaniardes arrived there, they founde ayde from the Indians themselves, by reason of their partialities and greate diuisions.

This is well knowne in Peru, that the division betwixt the two brothers Atahaalpa and Huascar^ the great King Haayna Ccapac their father being newly dead, gave entry to the Marquis Don Francisco Pizarro, and to the Spaniards, for that either of them desired his alliance, being busied in warre one against the other. The like experience hath beene in New Spaine, that the aide of those of the pro* vince of Tlascala, by reason of their continuall hatred against the Mexicaines, gave the victory and siegniory of Mexico to the Marquis Fernando Cortes and his men, and without them it had beene impossible to have wonne it, yea, to have maintained themselves within the country.

They are much deceived that so little esteeme the In- dians, and iudge that (by the advantage the Spaniards have over them in their persons, horses, and armes, both oflfensive and deflfensive), they might easily conquer any land or nation of the Indies.

Chile standes yet, or, to say better, Arauco and Tucapel, which are two cities, where our Spaniards could not yet winne one foote of ground, although they have made warre there above five-and-twenty yeares, without sparing of any cost. For this barbarous nation, having once lost the apprehention of horse and shotte, and knowing that the Spaniards fall as well as other men, with the blow of a stone or of a dart, they hazard themselves desperately, entring the pikes vppon any enterprise. How many yeares have they levied men in New Spaine, to send against the Chi- chimecos^ which are a small number of naked Indians,

M M

. vn.

530 AIDS TO CONTEBSION.

^^- ^"' armed onely with bowes and arrowes : yet, to this day, they could not bee vanquished, but contrariwise, from day to day they grow more desperate and resolute. But what shall wee say of the Chunchos, of the Chirihuanos, of the Pilco- 9oneSj and all the other people of the Andes ? Hath not all the flower of Peru beene there, bringing with them so great provision of armes and men, as we have seene ? What did they ? With what victories returned they ? Surely they returned very happy in saving of their lives, having lost their baggage and almost all their horses. Let no man thinke (speaking of the Indians), that they are men of nothing ; but if they thinke so, let them go and make triall. Wee must then attribute the glory to whom it appertaines, that is, principally to God, and to his ad- mirable providence : for if Monte9uma in Mexico, and the Ynca in Peru, had bin resolute to resist the Spaniards, and to stoppe their entrie, Cortes and Pizarro had prevailed httle in their landing, although they were excellent Cap- taines. fit hath also beene a great helpe to induce the Indians to receive the law of Christ, the subiection they were in to their Kings and Lords> and also the servitude and slaverie they were helde in by the divell's tyrannies and insupportable yoke. This was an excellent disposition of the Divine Wisedome, the which drawes profite from ill to a good end> and receives his good from another^s ill, which it hath not sowen. It is most certaine that no people of the West Indies have been more apt to receive the Gospel then those which were most subiect to their Lords, and which have beene charged with the heaviest burthens, as well of tributes and services, as of customes and bloodie practises. All that which the Mexicane Kings, and those of Peru did possesse, is at this day most planted with Christian religion, and where there is least difficultie in the government and ecdesiasticall discipline. The Indians were so wearied with the heavy and insupportable yoke of

DEFEAT OF SATAN. 531

Sathan's lawes, his sacrifices and ceremonies^ whereof wee ^"- ^"• have formerly spoken^ that they consulted among them- selves to seeke out a new law, and another God to serve. And therefore the law of Christ seemed vnto them, and doth at this day seeme iust, sweete, clean, good, and full of happinessaj

And that which is difficult in our law, to beleeve so high and soveraigne Histories, hath beene easy among them, for that the Divell had made them comprehend things of greater difficultie, and the self-same things which he had stolen from our Evangelicall law, as their manor of communion and confession, their adoration of three in one> and such other like, the which, against the will of the enemy, have holpen for the easie receiving of the truth by those who before had imbraced lies. God is wise and ad- mirable in all his works, vanquishing the adversarie even with his owne weapon, hee takes him in his owne snare, and kills him with his owne sword. Finally, our God (who had created this people^ and who seemed to have thus long forgot them)i when the houre was come> hee would have the same divells, enemies to mankinde^ whom they falsely held for gods, should give a testimony against their will> of the true law, the power of Christy and the triumph of the crosse> as it plainely appeares by the presages, pro*- phesies, signes, and prodiges, heere before mentioned, with many others happened in divers partes, and that the same Ministers of Sathan, Sorcerers, Magitians, and other In* dians have confessed it- And we cannot deny it (being most evident and knowne to all the world), that the Divell dareth not hisse, and that the practises, oracles, answers, and visible apparitions, which were so ordinary throughout all this infidelitie, have ceased, whereas the Cross of Christ hath beene planted, where there are Churches, and where the name of Christ hath beene confessed. And if there be at this day any cursed minister of his, that doth participate

M M 2

532 FRUITS OP CONVERSION. '

^'"•▼n- thereof, it is in caves, and on the toppes of mountaines, and in secret places, farre from the name and communion of Christians. The Soveraigne Lord be blessed for his great mercies, and for the glory of his holy name. And in truth, if they did goveme this people, temporally and spiritually, in such sort as the law of lesus Christ hath set it downe^ with a mild yoake and light burthen, and that they would impose no more vppon them then they can well beare, as the letters patents of the good Emperour of happy memorie doe command, and that they would employ halfe the care they have to make profite of these poore men's sweats and labours, for the health of their soules, it were the most peaceable and happy Christian part of all the world. But our sinnes are often an occasion that God doth not impart his graces so abundantly as he would. Yet I will say one thing, which I holde for truth, that although the first entry of the Gospel hath not beene accompanied (in many places), with such sinceritie and Christian meanes as they should have vsed; yet God, of his bounty, hath drawn good from this evill, and hath made the subiection of the Indians a perfect remedie for their salvation. Let vs consider a little what hath beene newly converted in our time to the Christian Religion as well in the Bast as in the West, and how little suretie and perseverance in the faith and Christian religion there hath beene, in places where the new converted have had full libertie to dispose of themselves, according to their free will. Christianitie, without doubt, augments and in- creaseth, and brings forth daily more fruite among the Indian slaves : and contrariwise ruin is threatened in other partes where have beene more happy beginnings. And although the beginnings at the West Indies have beene laboursome, yet our Lord hath speedily sent good worke- men and his faithfull Ministers, holy men and Apostolical, as Friar Martin de Valencia, of the order of S. Francis,

CONCLUSION. 533

Friar Domingo de Betanzos, of the order of S. Dominicke, ^"- ^"• Friar Juan de Roa, of the order of S. Austin, with other servants of our Lord, which have lived holily, and have wrought more then humaine things. Likewise, Prelates and holy Priests, worthy of memory, of whom we heare famous miracles, and the very acts of the Apostles : yea, in our time, we have knowne and conferred with some of this qualitie.

But for that my intention hath beene onely to touch that which concemes the proper history of the Indians them- selves, and to come unto the time that the Father of our Lord lesus Christ saw fit to show the light of his word vnto them ; I will passe no farther, leaving the discourse of the Gospel at the West Indies for another time, and to a better vnderstanding : Beseeching the Soveraign Lord of all, and intreating his servants humbly to pray vnto his Divine Maiestie that it would please him of his bountie often to visit and to augment by the gifts of heaven this new Christendome, which these last ages have planted in the farthest bounds of the earth. Glory, Honour, and Empire be to the King of the ages for ever and ever. Amen.

THE END.

INDEX

CONTENTS.

I. — General Index

II. — ^Descriptivb List of Names op Places in Peru III. — QuioHUA Words ...

IV. — ^Dbscriptivb List op Ynoas mentioned by Aoosta V. — ^Ynca Succession. The "Atllus" or Lineages VI. — Mexican Names VII. — ^Descriftiye List op Spaniards and other Europeans

PAGB

535 539 542 6ii 546 547 548

I.

GENERAL INDEX.

Agatarchides, book on the Erythrean Sea reported by Phocian in his BUHiotheca, on refining gold, 192

Alligators, 148

Alligator pear, 250

Ambrose, St., 8, 9

America. {See Indies.)

Ancestors, worship of, 812

Antarctic pole (6ee Pole), unknown lands, 170

Antilles soil, products, 169

Antipodes, views of Lactantius and St. Augustme on, 4, 19, 22, 23

Architecture of the Yncas, 415

Arctic zone, extent of land unknown, 171

Aristotle, correct opinion of the shape of the heavens, 4, 9, 21 ; believed the torrid zone to be uninhabitable, 25, 27, 29, 32, 75, 81, 96 ; ignorant of the compass, 48 ; on birds, 275

Armadillos, 283

Astrolabe, height of the sun by the, 15

Atlantis, isle of, 64, 65, 90, 102

Augustine, St., views as to the shape of the heavens, 3 ; doubt as to the South Pole, 4, 6, 9, 19 ; denied the Antipodes, 22, 23, 32, 45, 47, 187 ; on beasts found on islands, 58 ; on extension of Christianity, 528

Australia, conjectured existence, 170

Avicenna, 91

Axi, 239, 240. {See Pepper. )

Aymara dictionary, by Bertonio, v

Bacalaos, 60

Balsam, 257, 258

Bamboos, 263

Baptism, rite of Mexicans -resembling,

369 Barter, use of, 189 Basil, St., 8 Batatas, 235 Bears, 274 Bees and honey, 274 Beer. {See Chicha, Maize.) Bezoar stones, 288, 292 Birds in the Indies, 275, 279 Bogos, 151 Bonzes, 339 Brazil wood, 260 Bridges, 416, 417

Cacao, 244 -

Calendar, Mexican, 392

Calibashes, 238-

Camels in Peru, 272

Camotes, 235

Canary Isles known to Pliny, 33 ;

name, 34 Canopus star, 14 Capsicum, 239 Carthage, voyages of ships of, 55. {Se€

Hanno.) Cassava bread, 232, 233"^ Cassia fistula, 260 Cattle in the Indies, 271 Cayman. {Set Alligatpr.)

536

INDEX.

China, learning, 401 ; writing, 408

Chirimoya, 251

Chocolate, 244, 245

Chicha, 230, 231

CluyBostom, St., notion of the shape of the earth and heavens, 1, 2

Climate, in tropics, 76, 77 ; beyond tropics, 77 ; of Chile, 78 ; dry re- gions in tropics, 88 ; lofty regions the coldest, 96 ; cause of rainless belt on coast of Peru, 166, 167

Cloth made from llama wool, 289

Coca, 164, 189, 244, 245, 246

Cocoa nuts, 253

Cochineal, 248

Comet in 1577, n^otion, 122

Compass, ancients ignorant of, 48, 49; virtues of the load-stone, 50, 51 ; variation, 52

Condors, 279

Confession, used in Peru, 361, 862 ^

Conversion, divine arrangements forr 528

Copal, 260

Com. {See Maize.)

Cotton, 249

Council of Lima, vii

Dances, Peruvian and Mexican, 444 to 446

Dantas or tapirs, 283

Datura, sent to Spain by the Viceroy Toledo, 255

Dead, the worship of, 311, 313 ; cus- toms in Peru, 314 ; in Mexico, 315

Deluge, tradition of, 70

Devil, the, his pride the cause of idolatry, 298 ; his maHce, 300, 307 ; his cunning, 324 ; monks invented by, 334 ; penance invented by, 337 ; sacrifices to, 340 ; cruelty of un- endurable, 352 ; imitates the sacra- ments of the church, 354, 356 ; con- fession to, 360 ; unction, 364 ; illu- sions of, 371 ; invents a Trinity, 373, 377 ; final defeat of, 381

Dioscorides, 48

Dogs in the Indies, 272

Drugs, 260

Dyes, 260

Earth, shape, opinion of the ancients, 1 ; part discovered, 18 ; circum- navigated, 4 ; round, 5 ; rests upon nothing, 10 ; distribution of land and sea, 17 ; worship of, 304

Earthquakes, 178, 179, 180

Eclipses, proof of roundness of the earth from, 5

Emeralds, 37, 224, 225

Equinoctial, nature of, 73 ; crossed by

the author, iii, 90 Eudoxus, voyage of, 33 Eusebius on prognoetieations, 506, 508

Fathers of the Church (see Augustine,

Chrysostom, Jerome, Gregory Nazi-

ai^zen), they may err, 3 Feathers, art of working in, 280 Fig tree at Mala, 268 Fishery. (Sec PearL) Fishing {see Whale), in balsas, 150 ; by

Chinhuanas^ 151 ; in Lake Titicaca,

151 Floating gardens at Mexico, 469 Flocks. {See Llamas.) Florida, strait of, 140 Floripondio, flower, 255. {Su Datura.) Flowers in the Indies, 255 Frost-bite, a man lost his toes by, 133 Fruits of the Indies, 236, 237 Fruit trees, 265, 268, 249, 251, 252

Gallinazos or turkey buzzards, 279 Gardens, floating, at Me:xico, 469 Genoa, great emerald at, 225 Ginger grown in the Indies, 239 Giants, bones of, found at Mauta and

Puerto Viejo, 56 ; in Mexico, 454 Gold in the Indies, 190 to 193 Granadilla, fruit of the passion flower,

256 Gregory I^azianzen, 8, 23 Guano on the coast of Peru, 281 Guayavos, fruit, 250 Guinea^New, opinions concerning, 1 8, 47

Hanno, voyage of, 32

Head-dresses, 422

Heavens, shape of, notion of St. Chri- sostom, 1, 2 ; of Theodoret, 2 ; of Lactantius, 2 ; of St. Jerome, 2 ; of Procopius, 2, 8 ; of St. Augustine, 2 ; true shape, 5, 7, 12 ; proof from eclipses, 5

Hispaniola said to be Ophir, 37

History, profit to be derived from, 388, 448

Horses in the Indies, 271

Human sacrifices, 320, 346 to 350

Humming-birds, 279

Idols {su Devil), in Mexico, 318, 319, 369 ; in Peru, 371 ; the testimony of, 508

Idolatry, forms of, 303 ; sin of, 306

Imagination, uses of, 20

Indian corn. {See Maize.)

Indies (America or New World), by what means men might have first

INDEX.

537

reached, 45, 46, 47 ; discovered by chance, 64, 5Q ; possibly peopled by land, 57, 455 ; how beasts reached the New World, 58, 59, 62, 63; idea of Jewish descent of Indians refuted, 67, 68 ; report of the In- dians as to their origin, 70, 71 ; origin of native civUisation, 72 ; shape of the Indies, 182 ; how there can be animals peculiar, to, 277. (See Mexico, Peru.)

Irrigation, 159

Isaiah, prophecy, 44, 528

Isthmus of Panama, question of a canal, 185

Japan, confession used in, 363, 369

Jerome, St., view as to the shape of the heavens, 2, 8, 15, 32 ; on Tar- shish, 41

Jesuits in Peru, iv ; their work, v. (See Acosta.)

Josephus on the position of Ophir, 39

Lactantius, view as to the shape of the Heavens, 2 ; held that there were no antipodes, 19, 82 ; on the testi- mony of idols, 508

Lakes in the Andes, 152 ; in Mexico, 153

Lima, synod of; rule as to Indian marriages, 426 ; council of, vii

Liquidambar, 259

Llamas, 289 ; as beasts of burden, 290 ; diseases, 291

Llanos, 237

Macrobius, 24

Magdalena, river, 158

Maize, 228 ; harvest, 229 ; uses, 229, 230 ; beer made from, 230, 231

Malacca, 33

Manatis, 146

Marriages, in Mexico, 370 ; in Peru, 369, 424, 426, 426

Mela, Pomponius, 24

Mendocino, cape ; nothing k^iown be- yond, 18, 60, 171

Menomotapa, climate of, 94

Mercury. {See Quicksilver.)

Messengers, Peruvian, 409, 423

Metals, abundance in the New World, 185; gold and silver, 186-9; min- eral wealth of Peru, 187 ; gold, 190 to 194 ; silver, 194 ; mines of Po- tosi, 197 ; quicksilver, 211

Mexico. {See under Mexican Section.)

Milky way, 7, 14, 16

Miracles, of rain at Santa Cruz de la Sierra, 524 ; worked by Spaniards, 625 ; in defence of Spaniards, 526 ; at siege of Cuzco, 526. {See Omens.)

Monks, 334, 335 ; in Mexico, 336

Monkeys, 284, 285

Months, Peruvian, 374, 376

Moon, eclipses of, prove the earth is

round, 6 ; worship of, 304 Mulberries, 269 Mummeries of the Yncas, 432

Nature, study of, 184

Navigation, Portuguese expert in the

art of, 16 Nepos, Cornelius. {See Pliny.) New World. {See Indies.) Nicaragua, 127 Night, cause of darkness, 6 Nile, sources unknown to the ancients,

27 ; cause of inundation, 78 Nobility, Mexican, 438 North-west passage, 18, 141

Obadiah, his prophecy, 43

Olives, 269

Omens, before the Spaniards arrived

in Mexico, 506, 510 Ophir, whether Peru is ? 37, 38 ; true

position, 39 ; view of Josephus, 39 Oranges, plant themselves, 265 Orejones, nobles of Peru, 413 Orosius, Paulus ; on omens, 507

Panama, climate, 77 ; sea, 99 ; tide, 144

Paraguay, inunda-tions of, 78, 158

Pearl, fisheries, 226, 227

Peccaries, 282

Penance, of Mexican priests, 388 ; of Peruvians, 339

Peru, seasons in, 80 ; winds, 111, 112 rivers, 158 ; coast valleys, 160, 161 Sierra, 161 ; physical features, 164 rainfall, 165; use of rainless coast 166, 167 ; mineral wealth (see Me tals), 187 ; animals, 273, 282; birds 275; vicunas, 287; llamas, 290 maize, 226 ; roots, 232 ; pepper 239 ; fruit, 251, 252 ; religion, 301 302 ; deities, 304 ; idols, 308, 371 superstitions, 309 ; worship of the dead and ancestors, 311, 812, 318 temples, 325, 826 ; convents of vir gins, 331, 332; confession, 861, 362 sacrifices, 840 to 344 ; sorcerers, 362, 367 ; marriage, 369 ; dances and music, 446

Pepinos, 287

Pepper, 289, 240

Phocion. {See Agatarchides.)

Picture writing, 403

Pilot fish, or Romeros, 147

Pine apples, 236

n

538

INDEX.

Pitch, epriogs of, 165

Planets, motiona of, 7

Plantains, 241

Plants, introduced from Spain, 265

Plate, river, inundations of, 78, 158

Plato, his opinion touching the New World, 86 ; on Atlantis, 64, 65, 90

Pliny, held the opinion of Aristotle as to t^ie tropics, 29, 82 ; ignorant of the compass, 49, .55 ; mentions cro- codiles, 148 ; on emeralds, 225 ; silver, 201 ; pearls, 227 ; birds, 275 ; millet, 281 ; plane, 241 ; on a story, in Cornelius Nepos, of Indians com- ing to the King of Suevia^ 55 ; death of, at Mount Vesuvius, 177 ; on mines in Spain, 201 ; on quick- silver, 218

Poles, arctic, 171; antarctic, 16, 28, 170

Portuguese, expert in navigatioii, 15

Potat^ 238

Prickly pear, 468

Priests, in Mexico, 330 ; training of, in Mexico, 448

Ptolemy, believed the tropics to be habitable, 91

Puna of Peru ; intense cold, 182, 183

Pui^gatives, 261

•

Quicksilver, properties of, 211 ; dis- 1 covery of in Peru, 214, 215 ; method of preserving workmen from poison of, 212

Rainbow, worship of, 304

Bainfall, in the tropics, 79 ; effects of

Run on, 84 ; tempers heat, 91 ; rain

bearing winds, 127 ; in Peru, 165 ;

cause of no rain on the Peruvian

coast, 166 Rice, 234 Rivers, Amazons, 156 ; Pongo, or

rapid, 157 ; of Peru, 158 Romero. (See Pilot fish.) Roots, edible. {See Potatoe, 233; Oca,

235; Camote, 236 ; Yuca, 233, 236.)

Sacraments of the Church, counter- feited by the Devil, 846, 854

Sacrifices — human, in Mexico, 323 ; 346 to 360; Peruvian, 340, 341, 842, 843, 344

Salomon Isles ; opinions as to position, 18 ; discovery, 46, 47, 115

Salt, fountain of, 155

Saltpetre, cools water, 95

SarsaparUla, 166

Schinus Molle, 264

Schools, in the Mexican temples, 442

Sea sickness, 129

Seneca, thought to have alluded to the West Indies, 84, 35

Sharks, voracity of, 147

Sheep, in the Indies, 270

Sickness, at sea, 129

at great heights, 130, 131

Silver, in the Indies, 194 ; Pliny on, 201 ; refining, 217 ; engines for grinding ores, 222; trial of, 228

Sloths, 284

Snow blindness, 288

Sorcerers, 362, 367, 498

South sea, 56, 184

Southern cross. {See Stars.)

Springs, hot and cold, 164, 156; of pitch, 155 ; of salt, 166 ; at Guaya- quil, flowing by sarsaparilla, 156; rising on Vilcanota, 166

Stars, their motions, 6 ; Southern Cross, 14 ; and Canopus, 64 ; milky way, 7, 14, 16; in southern hemi- sphere, 14 ; names in Peru, 805

Storax, 260

Strabo, on balsam, 258

Suevia, King of. {See Pliny.)

Sugarcane, 269

Sumatra, 49, 65, 91

Sun, effect on rainfall, 78, 85 ; on va- pours, 86; worship of, 303, 304, 806 ; argument against its being God, 310

Synod of Lima ; rule as to marriages, 426

Tapirs, 283

Tarshish, 38, 40, 41, 42

Tarugas, 288

Temples, in the Indies, 325

Theodoret ; opinion as to the shape of the Heavens, 2 ; on the position of Tarshish, 41

Theophilus, 2

Theophrastus, 48; emeralds men- tioned by, 225

Thunder and lightning, worship of, 304

Tides, 143, 144, 145

Timber trees, 262

Time, change of, in sailing round the world, 173

Tobacco, 261

Totora, 236, 417

Trinity of the Peruvians, 373

Tropics, held to be uninhabitable, 25 climate of, 76, 77 ; rainfall, 79 abound in water and pastures, 81 dry regions of, 88, 89 ; moderate heat in, 90, 91, 94, 96 ; length of

INDEX.

639

days and nights, 92; oold winds, 98 ; pleasant life in, 101 Tunal (prickly pear), 463

Unetion used in Mexico, 864

Vermillion, 214, 216

Victoria, ship which has encompassed

the es^^, 4 Vineyards, 267, 268 ; in Peru, 168 Virgins, convent of, in Peru, 232 ; in

Mexico, 883

Warfare, Mexican, 440

Whale fishing, 149

Winds, cause of temperate climate in

the tropics, 98 ; land and sea breezes, 100, 126 ; their properties and causes, 105 ; in Peru, 111 ; trade winds, 113, 115; names of winds, 118, 119; cause of trade winds, 121 ; cause of westerly winds outside the tropics, 124 ; rain-bear- ing winds, 127

Yguanas, 288

2iarephath, supposed to be Spain, 43 Zones. {See tropics), 25 ; southern, 28 ; burning, 72 {see equinoctial) ; held to be uninhabitable, 74 ; burn- ing zone very moist, 75 {See Arctic, Antarctic).

II.

NAMES OF PLACES IN PERU MENTIONED BY ACOSTA.

(g denotes places also mentioned by Garcilasso de la Vega,)

Acoria, 216. Village, a native of which, named Nauincopa, discovered a quicksilver mine in Huancavelica. Acoria is now a district in the de- partment of Huancavelica, with' a small village of 646 inhabitants.

Amazons, great river of, 82.

Andahuaylas, 165, 430. A town, capi- tal of the province of the same name, on the road from Ayacucho to Cuzco ; in 13° 36' 54" S. lat. It is situated in a long fertile valley, enjoying a temperate climate, and surrounded by mountains, o.

Angoango, 180 (Ancu-ancu). A hamlet in the parish of Achacache, on the east side of lake Titicaca.

Anti-suyu, 414. The eastern division of the Empire of the Yncas. g.

Apurimac, 151. A great river which, withits tributaries, drains the moun- tainous country round Cuzco, and eventually falls into the Ucayali. a.

Araucanos, 170, 410, 427, 630. The independent Indiaiis in the south of Chile. G.

Arena, 168. A mountain near Lima

Arequipa, 161, 161, 166, 167, 173. Capital of tJie department of the same name, in 16° 24' 28" S. lat., in a fertile valley at the foot of the volcano of Misti. Arequipa was founded by order of Pizarro, in 1 540. G.

Arica, 66, 218. A seaport of Peru.

It has been several times destroyed by earthquakes, g.

Atico, 167. On the coast, between Yea and Arequipa. Occasional rain there, g.

Callao, 95. The port of Lima, in 12° 4' 15" S. lat.

Canaris, 428, 532. A powerful tribe in the kingdom of Quito. G.

Canete, 150. A town on the coast, south of Linaa, in a plain covered with sugar cane. It was founded by the Viceroy Marquis of Canete. g.

Capachica, 290. The weavers of ccompi lived in this province, on the shores of lake Titicaca. The promontory of Capachiea forms a bay in the north-west end of the lake, 15o 44' 28" S. lat.

Caravaya, 39, 192. A province of the department of Puno, on the eastern side of the Andes. Its forests are watered by streams famous for their gold washings, o.

Cavanas, 131. Corruption of Cahuana. Several places of this name. One near Huamachuco, another in An- cachs, another near Lucanas, an- other in the department of Puno.

Caxamarca, 432, 434, 435. Corruption of ccasa, ice; and marca, a town. In a large plain, at the foot of the eastern Andes, in 7o 9' 31" S. lat. Here the Ynca AtahuaJpa was ar- rested, and put to death by Pizarro. g.

540

INDEX.

ChachapoyaB, 163, 180. A province and town in the department of AmazonaB, in 6® T 41" S. lat. q.

Chancas, 481. A warlike tribe of the Ynca nation, round Guamanga, and extending aa far as the Apurimac. o.

Charcas, iv, 150, 155, 274, 525. A great province of the oldVice-royalty of Peru ; the modem Bolivia. Q.

Chichaa, 417. A tribe in the southern part of Upper Peru (modem Bo- livia). G.

Chincha-suyu, 414.. The northern di- vision of the Empire of the Yncaa. o.

ChirihuanoB, iv, 72, 150, 530. A war- like tribe in the forests to the east of the Andes, in Upper Peru (mo- dem Bolivia), o.

Chucuito, 161, 862; lake, 416. A town on the western shore of lake Titicaca. The lake itself was some- times called " of Chucuito". Lat. 16o 54' 10" S., about 12,000 feet above the sea. o.

ChumbiviHcas, 198, 199, 417. The dancers of the Ynca court. Their province is near Cuzco, in the val- ley of the Apurimac. o.

Chunchos, 427, 530. Wild Indians in the forests east of the Andes, o.

Ghuqui-apu (see La Paz). From chuqu% a lance in Quichua, or gold in Aymara; and optt, chief. See O. de la Veqa^ i, p. 225. On this site the city of La Paz was founded. G.

Colla-Buyu, 361, 414. The southern division of the empire of the Yncas. G.

Collao,83, 95, 151, 155, 861, 416. The region comprised in the northern half of the basin of lake Titicaca.

CoUahuas, 131. In the province of Huaras, north of Lima, a pass over the Andes. Another of the same name near Arequipa. g.

Coaillo, 368. A province where there were many witches.

Cunti-Buyu, 414. The western divi- sion of the empire of the Yncas. g.

Cuzco, 155, and passim. The capital of the empire of the Yncas. g.

— ^— Miracle at the siege of, 526.

Hanan, 71, 429. (Upper). G.

Urin, 71, 429, 436. (Lower), g.

Desaguadero, 416. The river which drsuns lake Titicaca, flowing south- wards. G.

Guamanga, 216 (correctly Hua- manca), now called Ayacucho.

Founded by Pizarro, 9 Feb. 1539. Lat. 13° 8' 45" S. g. Guayaquil, 156. The sea port of Quito.

G.

Huanca, 199. A tribe of the Ynca nation in the valley of Xauxa. g.

Huancavelica, 154, 160, 215 (correctly Huanca-villca), in 12o 48' 38" S. lat. Capital of the department of the same name, in the cordilleras, once famous for its quicksilver mines.

G.

Huarco, 150. The plain on the coast, now known by the name of Canete.

G.

Huarochiri, 368. Folk-lore of, v. A province of the department of Lima^ in the maritime cordilleras : between 11° 20' S., and 12° 35' S. It con- tains the sources of the coast rivers, Rimac, Lurin, and Mala.

Juli, station of the Jesuits at, v. On the banks of lake Titicaca.

La Paz, 180. A town to the south of lake Titicaca, now the commercial capital of Bolivia. Founded in 1548 by Alonzo de Mendoza, by order of the President Gasca. Lat. 17'> 30' S. The bishopric of La Paz dates from 1605

Lima, 46, 111, 127, 426, 432. The capital of Peru. Founded by Pi- zarro, January 18, 1535, in 12° 2' 34" S. Called also the City of the Kings.

Lucanas, 131, 230, 417. Bearers of the Ynca's letter. A province in the department of Ayacucho, pro- perly Rucanas. g.

Mala. A valley on the coast of Peru, south of Lima. Fig-tree in, 268

Manchay, 368. The lomas, near Lurin, on the coast, are so called ; also an hacienda near Pachaca- mac.

Manta, 225. On the sea-coast of the kingdom of Quito. G.

Marauon, 82, 83. The upper course of the grieat river Amazon. G.

Nasca, 308. A town and valley on the coast, yielding vines and cotton, and irrigated by ancient channels. G. Correctly Nanasca.

OUantay-tambo. {See Tambo.) Ynca ruins. G. de la Vega calls it simply Tampu. G. In the valley of the Vilcamayu, near Cuzco.

Omasuyo, 151, 42^. A province on the eastern shores of l^e Titicaca. Correctly Uma-suyu. o.

INDEX.

541

Paccari-tampu, 71. A place in the province of Paruro, near Cuzco. Several traditions point to this place as the cradle of the Ynca race. It is said that Manco Ccapac first appeared here. a.

Paria lake, 151, 288. In the south of Bolivia. The river Desaguadero, draining the lake of Titicaca, empties its waters into the salt lake of Paria or Aullagas. o.

Pariacaca, 131. A pass over the mari- time Cordillera of the Andes, in the province of HuarochirL

Pasto, 427. The most northern pro- vince of the kingdom of Quito, but now in Colombia, o.

Patallacta, 432. An estate in the province of Paucartambo, near Cuzco. There is another place of the same name in Tayacaja, a pro- vince of- Huancavelica.

Paullo, 429. An estate or farm, near Calca, in the valley of the Vilcamayu (department of Cuzco).

Payta, 147. A seaport in the north of Peru, in 5° 6' S.

Paytiti, 82, 156, 171. A fabulous king- dom in the forests east of the Andes.

Pilco9ones, 427, 530

Popayan, 95. A town north of Quito, in Colombia : in the province of Cauca

Potosi, 90, 152, 196, 197,198, 199, 200, 203, 218, 222, 525. A famous silver yielding district and town in Upper Peru (now Bolivia), in the province of Porco. Correctly Potocchi G.

Puerto Viejo, 225. A seaport on the coast of the kingdom of Quito. G.

Porco, 196, 199, 200, 201. A province in Upper Peru, in the centre of which is Potosi.

Quito, 90, 175, 433. Capital of the kingdom of the same name, nearly on the equator ; the most northern part of the empire of the Yncas. G.

Rucana. {See Lucanas.)

RuuahuaLnac, 281. Corruptly Luna- huana ; in the province of Canete, south of Lima. The town is on the left bank of the river Canete. G.

Salinas, 192

San Bias parish, in Cuzco, 432

Saruma, 192. Mines in the Govern- ment of Salinas.

Soras, 131. A district in the province of Lucanas, department of Aya- cucho. G.

Sta. Cruz de la Sierra, 170, 189, 524

A town and province in the eastern part of Bolivia

Tambo, 415. The great ruins of Ollontay-tambo in the valley of the Vilcamayu. G.

Tiahuanaco, 71, 415. The great ruins near the south shore of lake Titi- caca. o

Titicaca, iv, 71, 83, 151, 165. The great lake. The boundary between Peru and Bolivia passes across it. It is 40 leagues long by 20 broad, between 15° 59' 57", and 16o 3' 40" S. lat. ; 12,545 feet above the level of the sea. G.

Tanaca nunu, 232

Tarapaya, 153, 218, 222. Near Potosi. An extensive and fertile plain

Toto-cache, 432 (correctly Toco-cachi), a suburb of Cuzco, now the parish of San Bias. G.

Truxillo, 167. City fotmded by Pi- zarro in 1535. The bishopric erected in, 1609. In 8° 6' 9" S. lat., near the shores of the Pacific, g.

Ttahuantin-suyu, 414. "The Four Provinces". The general name for the empire of the Yncas. G.

Tucapel in Chile, 410, 427, 530

Tucuman, 274. A province south of Charcas, originally in the Vice- royalty of Peru, afterwards in that of Buenos Ayres. g.

Tumbez, 61. The most northern port in Peru, where Pizarro landed in 1526. G.

Tumipampa, 432. A province in the south of the kingdom of Quito. G.

Uros, 83. A tribe of Indians living among the reed beds in the south- west of the lake of Titicaca. g.

Valdivia, 192. A town in the south of Chile.

Vilcabamba, 436. There are several places in Peru called Vilcabamba. The district of Vilcabamba, to which the Yncas retired, is a mountainous tract north of Cuzco, bordering on the forests east of the Andes.

Vilcanota, 156. A snowy peak on the eastern cordillera, in 14° 28' 30" S. lat. ; 17,000 feet above the sea. It means "the House of the Sun'* in the Colla language. VUca, the sun ; and ^uta, a house, g.

Xauxa, 165, 272, 416. A town in the fertile valley of the same name, in 11° 49' 38" S. lat., between the maritime and eastern cordilleras of the Andes ; properly Sausa. G.

542

INDEX.

Yea, 56, 150. A province on the coast of Peru, yielding cotton and wine. The town is in 14o 4! 33" S. lat.

Yscaycingasy 427

Yucay, 155, 165. A village, where there were Ynca palaces and baths in the valley of the Vilcamayu (also called, in this part, the valley of Yucay), near Cuzco< o.

III.

QUICHUA WORDS IN ACOSTA-

Acoa, 230. Fermented liquor or Chica. See O. dela Vega, i, p. 298

Aclla, 232. Chosen. AcUa-cunay Vir- gins of the Sun. 0. cU la Vega, i, 292 ; ii, 250

Alco, a dog (canis Ingse), 272

Alpaca, 277, 841

Amaru, 435. A serpent. See O, de la Vega, ii, p. 352

Anas, 59. A small fox.

Apachita, 808, 309. Apachecta, the dative of the present participle of Apachini, 1 carry. See O. de la Vega, i, 117< Muchani, I worship. Apachecta muchani, "I offer up thanks by throwing a stone on a heap by the road side", on the sum- mit of a pass. Two words used by the Indians on reaching the top of a pass.

Apu, 373. Chief.

Apu-panaca, 332. Officer in charge of a convent. See also Jiamoa, cap. 9, and Ondega/rdOf p. 165

Arepas, 230

Auasca, 434, 435. Coarse clothe

Atahualpa, 434, 435. For the deriva- tion see O. de la Vega, i, lib. ii, cap. 23

Ayamarca, 376. Month of October^

Ayllu, 429, 432. lineage. See O. de la Vega, i, 67

Ayma, 377. A song. See Molina, p. 89

Aymuray, 373. April and May. Time of harvest. Ayrihuay, Molina, 33, 52

Aucaycuzqui Ynti-raymi, 374. June

Cachi, 432. Salt (in TocO'Cachi).

Camac (from Camani, I create). In the word Packacamac, which see.

Camay, 373. December.

Carachi, a disease in llamas, 291, 420. ^eQO.dela Vega, ii, 378

Catuchillay, 304. A star worshipped by shepherds, near the milky way.

Catuilla, 304. A name for thunder.

Cavi, 235. An edible root.

Cayo, 375. Dancing. See Mdina, p^

89. A playing on drums and singing. Ccapac, rich. 420, 433 Ccapac Baymi, 854 {see Raymi). Ccompi, 289, 340, 412, 417. Fine

cloth. See 0, dela Vega, ii, 324 Ccoya^ 411. Queen. Ccoya Raymi, 355. Tenth month Chacana, a star, 305. Also Balboa, 58 Chacra, 37 4< A farm. Chacu, 151, 273, 287. A hut. See

also O, dela Vega, ii, 109, 115 (Ilhahua huarqui, the eighth month, 375 Chaquira. Minute beads. CiezadeLeon,

cap. xlvi Also O. de la Vega, ii,

338 (IHiarqui, 289. Dried meat ; whence

jerked meat^ Chasqui, 409, 423. A messenger. Chicho, 526. Misprint for Ychu. Chinchilla, 283 Chirimova, 251

Chunqumchincay, 305. A star. Chuiiu. Frozen potato, 165, 233. G.

de la Vega, ii, 17, 359 Chuquilla. A name for thunder, 304,

341, 373. Chuqui, a lance. YUani,

I shine. YUapa, a thunder bolt. Churi, 373. Son. Coca^ 164, 189. Account of, 244, 245,

246 Coohuchu, 235. An edible root. CoUoa^ 304. The Pleiades. See also

O. dela Vega, ii, 237, and Balboa. Contesisca, 342. A sacrifice. Cuntur, 279. Condor. Curaca, 375. A chief Cusi, 434. Joy. Cutec, from ctUini, I overturn. See

Pachacutec Cuy, 283, 340. A guinea pig. O* de

la Vega, u, 118, 233, 384 Guaras, 373. jS^ee Huaras. Hanan, 71. Upper, Hatun, 373. Great. Hatuncuzqui, 373. May.

INDEX.

543

HomaraymiPancliaiqiiiB,376. Eleventh

month. Huaca, 300, 308, 318, 323, 325, 3.40,

356, 361, 373, 375, 412. Sacred. Huaccha, 420

Huallayicsa, 349. Sacrifice. Hualpa, 276, 434. A fowl (in Atahu-

alpa. Huaman, 436. Falcon (in the name

Tarco-huaman). Huanacu, 277, 341 Huanani, 281. I warn — In the name.

Lunahuana (Runahuanac). Huanu, 281. Guano. See also Q, de

la Vega, ii, p. 181 Huara (Guaras) 373. Breeches. Huascar, 434. A chain. Huasi, 332. A house. Huauque, 312, 323, 373. Brother.

O. de la Vega, i, p. 314 Huayna, 198, 313, 433. Youth. Huayra> 195, 196, 209, 210. Wind.

Air. Hunu, 414. An officer over 10,000. Intiraymi (see Ynti). Ituraymi, 376. (Ytu). LlaUahuas, 309. A kind of potato. Llama, 288 et seq. 420 Llimpi, 215. A purple colour. See

O.dela Vega, ii, p. 473 Lloque, 355, 436. Left-handed. Lccro, 234. A kind of potato. Machachuay, 305. Serpent. A con- stellation. G.deta Vega, ii, 240, 385 Mama, mother (in mama-codia, Pucha

mama, etc.) Mama-cocha, 303. The sea. O. dela

Vega, i, p. 293, 300, 302 Mama-cima, 332, 355. Matrons of the

Virgins. Q.dela Vega, i, 293, 300,

302 Mamana, a constellation, 305. BaXboa,

p. 58 Mani, 235. An edible root. Miquiquiray, 305. A constellation,

Balboa, p. 58. Mirco, 305. The Southern Cross. CK

de la Vega, ii, p. 476, and Balboa,

p. 58 Mitimaes, 413. Emigrants. O. de la

Vega, ii, p. 476 Morochi, 229. A kind of maize. G,

de la Vega has Muruchu, ii, p. 355 MuUi, 264. The moUe tree (Schinus

MoUe). Cieza de Leon, chap. cxiL

See aJso O. de la Vega, i, p. 187 ;

ii, p. 364, 367 MiiUu, 340. A shell. Mutti, 230. Boiled maize. 0, de la

Vega, ii, p. 357

Oca, 235 (OxaliS'ttiberosa), An edible

root Opa-cuna, 362, 369. Baths. Correctly

Upa from Upani, I wash. Otojo («ee Usuta) Otoronco {see Uturuncu). Paccari, 71. Morning. Paccari-tampu

and its legend are mentioned by G»

de la Vega, i, lib. i, cap. 15, 18.

Fernandez, Pt. ii, lib. iii, cap. 5, p.

125. BaJhoa, Ondega/rdo. Pacha. Earth, (in the words Pacha^

camac, Pachayachachic, etc.) Pachacamac, 301, 325, 327 ; " Creator

of the World", G de la Vega, i, p.

106 ; and ii, pp. 9, 38, 58 Pachacutec, the Ynca, 480. Pacha-mama, 304. " Mother earth". Pacha yachachic,301,418,434."Teacher

of the World". See G, de la Vega,

i, p. 109 ; ii, p. 56 Palta, 250

Panaca. See Apu-Panaca, Pancuncu, 376. A torch. See G. de

la Vega, ii^ p. 232 Papa, 165, 235, 236, 308. Potatoe.

G.dela Vega, ii, p. 517, 213, 359 Pirua, 374. A granary. Pucara, 427. A fort. Puclla, 444. A sham fight. Warlike

exercise. The word occurs in one

of the prayers given by Molina, p.

81. From PucUani, I play. Punchau, 326. Day ; Idol of the Sun.

See G, dela Vega, i, p. 182 Puncu (pongo), 156. Door. G, dela

Vega, ii, p. 240, 312 Pururaucas, 432. Certain Idols. See

G. dela Vega, ii, p. 57 Quinua, 198. {Chenopodium Quinoa),

G.dela Vega, ii, 5, 7, 213, 357, 367 Quipu, 406, 407, 426 Quipucamayoc, 71, 72, 406, 415. See

G. de la Vega, ii, p. 123 Quirau, 429. A cradle. (In Vica-

quiniu.) Quiso, 342. An assembly of birds for

sacrifice. Raymi, 354, 372. Festival. Baymi cantara rayquis, 376. Festival. Buna, 281. Man. G, de la Vega, i,

p. 35; ii, 181 Runtu, 276. Egg. G, de la Vega, ii,

p. 89, 481 Saparisca, 342. Sacrifice. Sapay, 301. Sole. Only. G, dela Vega,

i, p. 95, 324 Situa, 355, 375. Festival. Sora, 230. A strong liquor. G. de la

Vega, i, p. 277

544

INDEX.

Sucanca, 395. Solstitial pillars at

Cuzco. Suchi, 151. Fish in lake Titicaca.

Q. de la Vega, ii, p. 402 Suyu, 361. Province. Tampu, 287. Inn. Taqui, 445. Music. Tanga-tanga, 373. Idol at Chuqui-

saca. See G. de la Vega, i, p. 120.

Represented the Trinity. Tarco-huaman {See Huaman). Ttahuantin - Suyu, 414. The four

provinces. The empire. Tigi Viracocha, 307. Perhaps Ti^i,

from Atic, conquering. See Quichua

prayers, given by Molina. Titu, 38, 434. A proper name. Toco, 432. Window (in Toco-cachi). Tomahaui, 197. A cold wind. Topatorca, 305. A star. Ttanta, 228, 236. Bread* Q.delaVega,

ii, p. 357 Uchu, 237. Axi pepper. Uiscacha, 283 (Lagidium Peruvianum).

O. dela Vega, ii, p. 384 Upa. See Opa. Urcu, 341. Male. Urin, 436. Lower. Urcuchillay, 303. The star Vega.

Balboa, p. 5j8 Usachun, 341. From Usachuhi, I ac- complish. Usapa, 301. {See Sapay) Usuta, 67, 424. Shoes. See O. de la

Vega, i, p. 82 ; ii, p. 171. Uturuncu, 274. Jaquar. G.dela Vega,

ii, p. 385 Vicuna, 132, 286. See Q, de la Vega,

ii, 117, 378, 383, 384 Vilcaronca, 341. A sacrifice.

Vilca. (In Vilcaronca), 341. Sacred.

See G. de la Vega, ii, 255, 416.

Molina, 63, 93, 107 Villca, 368. A tree, the fruit of which

is a purgative. {Mosai.) The juice

is mingled with Chicha. Viracocha, 301, 304, 307, 418, 428,

434. G.dela Vega, ii, 66 Xiquimas, 235. An edible root? Yachachic. In Pachayachachic, 301,

418, 428. G. de la Vega, i, 110.

From Yachami, I teach. Yanlli, 342. A thorny tree. Yana. Black. Yanacauri. Yana-cunaa, 368, 433. Indians bound

to service. See Balboa, p. 120, for

the origin of this servitude. See

also G. dela Vega, ii, p. 411 Yana-oca, 235. An edible root. Black

Oca* Yapaquis. Ychu, 218, 526. {Stipa Ychu). G,

de la Vega, i, p. 254. {See Chicho) Ychuri, 361. Confession. Yllapa, 302, 304, 432. Thunder and

lightning. G. de la Vega, i, 105,

182, 275 Ynca {pasmn) Ynti, 302, 373. Sun.

Apu Ynti, chief sun.

Churi Ynti, son.

Ynti Huauque, brother.

Yntip Raymi, 374 Ytu, 376. Feast. Yuca, 232 {Jatropha Manihot). But

the proper Quichua word is Asipa,

or Rumu. Yupanqui, 355, 356, 411. Virtuous.

IV.

INDEX OF THE YNCAS MENTIONED BY ACOSTA.

Amaru, see Tupac Amaru

Atahualpa, 313, 325, 425, 434, 529. Son of the great Ynca Huayna Ccapac, by a Princess of Quito. He usurped the throne of the Yncas from his legitimate brother Huascar. For an account of the sanguinary War of Succession, see G. de la Vega, ii, p. 505 to 529. See also Vdasco, Historia de Quito, vol. ii. Balboa also gives a detailed account of the war, which he received from the

officers of Atahualpa at Quito. The most authentic account of the arrest of Atahualpa at Ooxamarca, and of his judicial murder, is in the narra- tive of Xeres, Pizarro's secretary. See also my note at p. 102 of my translation of Xeres.

Caritopa, 432. Don Felipe, grand- child of Tupac Ynca Yupanqui.

Ccapac Yupanqui, 436. The fifth Ynca. His reign and death will be found described in G. de la Vega, i, p. 234

INDEX.

.545

and 269. His lineage, called Ajm Mayta, at ii, p. 531. See also Molina, 85, 88

Coya Cusilimay, 425. Daughter of Tupac Ynca Yupanqui, and sister of Huayna Ccapac.

Chilicuchi, 434. Atahualpa's general, who took Huascar *prisoner. This is Acosta's form of Challcuchima. See O. de la Vega, ii, p. 509. Xeres has ChilieiLchima, p. 84 to 89.

Quaynacapa {see Huayna Ccapac).

Huascar, 425, 434, 529. The legiti- mate son and successor of Huayna Ccapac. See the account of the birth, and of the rope of gold (Huasca) made to celebrate it, in G. de la Vega, ii, p. 103 and 422. His accession and war with Ata- hualpa, ii, p. 505, et teq .

Huayna Ccapac, 313, 425, 43 J, 629. The twelfth Ynca. His name means "the rich youth", or one who, from childhood, has been rich in magnani- mous deeds. See O. dela Vega, ii, p. 345. His three marriages are given at, ii, p. 351; his conquests, ii, p. 423 to p. 444 ; his remark- able saying touching the Sun, ii, p. 445 ; the division of the Empire between his sons, ii, p. 460; his will and death, ii, p. 461; the dis- covery of his mummified body, i, p. 273 ; his lineage, ii, p. 532

Mama Ocllo, 425, 434. The mother of Huayna Ccapac. See O, di la Vega, ii, 353.

Manco Ccapac, 71, 429. The first Ynca. Acosta says that, after the deluge, he came out of the cave at Paccari-tampu. {See Paccari-tampu, in the index of Quichua words.) The various accounts of his origin are given by (?. dela Vega, i, p. 63 to 85, and Mdinaf p. 6 and 74.

Manco Ynca, 435, 436. Son of Huayna Ccapac. See G. de la Vega, ii, pp. 352, 526. He made an heroic re- sistance against the Spaniards, and besieged Hernando Pizarro in Cuzco, in February 1536. See the second part of G. de la Vega, lib. ii, and Herrara Dec. v, lib. viii, cap. 4. Manco was murdered by a party of fugitive Spaniards, who had fled to him for refuge. G. de la Vega, pt. ii, lib. iv, cap. 7. He left three sons.

Mayta Ccapac, 436. The fourth Ynca. For his reign and conquests, see G.

de la Vega, i, p. 173, 210, 233. For his lineage, ii, p. 531.

Pachacutec, 430. The ninth Ynca, The story related by A.costa, re- specting his accession, should be told of his father, Viracocha. G. de la Vega describes his reign, ii, 201 to 205, and gives his wise say- ings, ii, 208, 247.

PauUu Ynca, 435. A son of Huayna Ccapac who was baptized, and ac- companied Amalgro on his Chilian expedition. Acosta knew his son Don CarloSi Paullu was personally known to Cieza de Leon. See Cieza de Leon, p. 77 and 224. His son Carlos was a schoolfellow of G. de la Vega at Cuzco. His grandson^ Melchor Carlos Ynca, went to Spain in 1602, and became a knight of Santiago. See G. de la Vega, ii, p. 110, 530. Balboa, p. 304.

Quizquiz, 434. A general of Ata- hualpa. See G. de la Vega, ii, p. 484.

Sayri TupaCj 435» Sou of Ynca Manco, and grandson of Huayna Ccapac. He was baptized in 1553, and died at Yucay in 1560, leaving a daughter named Ccoya Beatriz, the vnie of Don Martin Garcia Loyola. Their daughter was Mar- chioness of Oropesa. There is a picture of the maiTiage ill the cathedral at Cuzco.

Sinchi Rocca, the second Ynca, is mentioned by Acosta, 436

Tambo, Don Juan, 436

Tarco-huaman, 436. An Ynca not given by other authors. Acosta makes him the son of Mayta Ccapac.

Titu ; treasure of Tupac Ynca Yupanqui in power of, 433

Tupac Amaru. Acosta omits the first name, 435. lie was the younger son of Manco Ynca, and was unjustly beheaded sit Cuzco by the Viceroy Toledo in 1571, iv. See G.dela Vega, ii, pp. 264, 273

Tupac Ynca Yupanqui, 425, 433. Father of Huayna Ccapac. Eleventh Ynca. See G. de la Vega, ii, 91, 246, 304, 321, 344, 352. His lineage, ii, 531. Discovery of his mummified body, ii, 273

Viracocaha Ynca, 300, 307, 361, 418* 428, 429, 431. The eighth Ynca. His history is given fully by G. de la Vega, i, p. 341, and ii, 50, 65,

N N

546.

INDEX.

245, 483, 450. His sayings, ii, 94. His fondness for the vale of Yucay, ii, 87. Discovery of his body by Polo de Ondegardo, i, 273, and ii, p. 91. See also Cieza de Letm^ p. 226, 308, 332, 338, 355, 363, and Molina, p. 12, 90, 92, 95. His lineage was called Socso Panaca. O. de la Vega, ii, p. 331. Acosta has Coco Panaca.

Tahuar - huaccac. Acosta spells it Yaguarguaque, 429. The seventh Ynca. See O. de la Vega, i, p. 327, 347, 349. He was dethroned for incapacity, ii, 62, 63. His lineage was called Ayllu panaca, ii, 531. Acosta spells it Ayllu-anaca.

Ym» Rocca, 313, 429. Sixth Ynca.

See O.de la Vega, i, p. 226, 322, 327, 332. His schools, i, p. 335. Also ii, 247, 248, 354. His lineage, 531 Yncas : their origin, 71, 428 ; use of gold by, 191 ; use of coca by, 246 ; their argument against the Sun being God, 811 ; only con- fessed to the Sun, 361 ; feasts, 372 ; divisions of their empire, 414 ; their edifices, 415 ; bridges, 416 ; revenues, 418, 419 ; arts, 421 ; head-dress, 422 ; marriages, 424, 425 ; lineage, 429 ; traditions, 430, 431, 432 ; extent of then: em- pire, 427 ; last Yncas, 435 ; sue- cession, 436

V.

YNCA SUCCESSION AND THE AYLLUS OR LINEAGES

OF EACH YNCA.

HANAN CUZCO.

Lineage {Aeotia) . of

Ajcosta.

Ur^aae {&. de ^jX la Vega).

• 6. — Ynca Rocca - Vica-quirao - 429 (Vica-quirau) -

7. — Yahuar Huaccac - Ayllu-panaca - 429 (Ayllu-panaca) -

8. — ViRACOCHA - Coco-panaca - 429 (Socso-panaca) -

^' ^^' I Ynca^Yupanqui ■ I Ynaca-panaca - 432 (Ynca-panaca) - 11. — Tupac Ynca Yupanqui Ccapac sylla - 433 (Ccapac ayllu) - 12. — Huatna Ccapac - Tumi pampa - 433 (Tumipampa) -

eoulsin 1570.

50 51

79

99

18 22

URIN CUZCO.

1. — Manco Ccapac 2. — SiNCHi Rocca 4. — Ccapac Yupanqui 3. — Lloque Yupanqui 5. — Mayta Ccapac Tarco Huaman Don Juan Tambo

- 436 (Chima-panaca) - 40

- 436 (Raurava-panaca) 74

- 436 (Apu Mayta) - 53

- 436 ( Hah uarina -panaca) 73

- 336 (Usca Mayta) - 35

- 436

- 436

Descendants in the time of Garcilasso de la Vega 594

^ These numbers show the succession, in one line, according to Garcillasso de la Vega. Acosta makes two lines spring from Manco Ccapac.

Il^DEX.

547

VI.

MEXICAN NAMES IN ACOSTA.

Acamapich, 436

Acamapixtli, 468, 470. First king of Mexico.

Acaizuitillan, 462

Acopilco, 460

Atlacuyavaya, 460

Axayaca, seventh king of Mexico, 493, 494

Autzol, eighth king, 497

Azcapuzalco, 482

Ohalcas, 460, 517

Chalco, 489, 617

Chapultepec, 357, 459, 478. A charm- ing retreat near Mexico.

Ghichemecaa, 449, 453, 454

Chimalpopuca, third king of Mexico, 472, 473, 475

Choliila, 821, 508, 517. A town in 19^^ 4' N., twenty leagues east of Mexico.

Coatepec, 459, in the district of Jalapa ; but there are several places of this name.

Copil, 459, 463

Cuitlavaca, 486

Oulhuas, peopled Tezcuco, 452, 460

Culhuacan, king of, 461, 466, 476

Cuyoacan, 353, 357, near Mexico. Here Heman Cortes founded a con- vent of Nuns, and here, according to his will, he desired to be buried, 483. Sorcerer at, 498

Guatemala, 497

Quatulco, viii, 400. A port on the west coast of Mexico, at the western end of the Gulf of Tehuantepec, in the Oaxaca province. Here Sir Francis Drake landed, viii, n.

Izcoatl, king of Mexico, 371, 436, 476, 482, 485

Iztapalapa, 462

Iztacal, 462

Malinalco, 458, 459. A district in Mechoacan.

Marina, Indian woman. Guide to the Spaniards, 514

Mechoacan, 457, 465, 504. A province on the shores of the Pacific, for eighty leagues.

Mexi, 457

Mexico, lakes, 153, 154 ; deities, 305 ; burial customs, 315, 316 ; idols, 318, 819 ; gods, 321 ; sacrifices, 323 ; temples, 327 ; priests, 880 ; virgins, 333 ; monks, 336 ; human sacrifices.

328 to 850 ; festivals, 856, 857, 877 to 884 ; unction, 864 ; baptism, 869 ; marriage, 370 ; writings, 402 picture writings, 403 ; records, 404 succession, 436 ; nobility, 438 warfare, 440 ; knighthood, 441 schools, 442 ; early inhabitants 449, 450 ; migrations of the Mexi cans, 456 ; foundation of the city 462 ; first king, 466 ; floating gar dens, 469 ; death of first king, 470 second king, 471 ; third king, 473 power of kings, 474 ; murder of third king, 475 ; fourth king, 476 coronation, 468 ; 477 ; Mexico was founded, with the name of Tenoch- titlan, in 1327, on a lake in the midst of a valley forty leagues round. Cortes took the city on 13 August 1521. Water brought to, 499 ; entry of Cortes into, 518 ; insurrection at, 520 ; Spaniards retreat from, 621 ; retiim of Cortes to, 528

Montezuma I, 487, 488, 493

Montezuma II, 436 ; character, 500 ; household of, 503 ; coronation, 504 ; Government of, 505 ; signs and evil omens presaging fall of, 506 to 512 ; news of the Spaniards, 513 ; em- bassy, 614 ; his terror, 616 ; stra- tegy, 517 ; submission to Cortes, 618 ; and death, 520

Nauincopa, 216

Navatlacas. Invaders of Mexico, 451

Quahuanahuac, 453

Quaxutatlan, 497

Quetzalcoatl, 384, 508, 514

Suchimilcos, 452

Tacuba, 491

Tenoxtitlan (name of Mexico), 478 480

Tepeaca, 504

Tepanecas, 452, 460, 464, 468,. 478, 480, 481, 486

Tepotzotlan, 446

Teuculhuacan, 456

Tezcatlipuca (Mexican God), 839, 877, 378, 879, 617

Tezcuco, 258, 487, 452, 466, 476, 487. A town fifteen miles E.N.E. of Mexico, at the foot of the hills in 19o 31' 30" N. Speech of king of, 501, 502

Ticocic, 498

548

INDEX.

Ti^aapan, 460 Tlatellulco, 496 Tocci, 461. An idoL Tozcoatl, 377 Tlacael, 436

TlacaeUel, 478, 479, 481, 484, 487 ; refuses the crown, 491 ; deat^, 494 Tlascala, 504, 517, 519, 530 Topilcin, 614 Tula, 459

VitziUpuztU (Mexican god), 306, 856, 456, 457, 460, 463, 469 ; festival of, 357, 877, 491, 500

VitzilovitU, 471

Zacatecas, 210. A province in the north of Mexico on the tropic of Cancer, 210 miles long by 177. Its tableland is 6,500 feet above the sea.

VII.

LIST OF SPANIARDS AND OTHER EUROPEANS

MENTIONED BY ACOSTA

Acosta, Bernardo de, brother of the

author, i ; in Mexico, ix Christoval de, i ; author of a

work on the drugs of Jndia, ii, n. Joseph de, the author, his

birth, i ; becomes a Jesuit, ii ; sails for Peru, ii, 56 ; on the isthmus of Panama, ii, 263 ; observes the antics of monkeys, 286 ; crosses the line, iii, 90 ; arrival in Peru, iii ; crosses the Andes, his sufferings, 130, 131 ; cured of snow blindness, 288 ; goes to Lima, v ; at the Council of Lima, vii ; his sermon, vii ; sailed for Mex- ico, viii, 127, 391, 400 ; hip return to Spain, ix, 194, 204, 226, 239, 260, 271 ; had seen the part of the heavens unknown to the ancients, 4 ; his views respecting the peopling of America, 46 ; believed that the Old and New World were joined, or approached near, 60; heard about the Amazons from a Jesuit who had been with Ursua, 82 ; saw the comet of 1577 in Peru, 122 ; saw camels in Peru, 272 ; knew a man who lost his toes by frost-bite, 133 ; conversationB with Sarmiento*s pilots, 140 ; saw grants* bones in Mexico, 454 ; his publication of the first two books of the Natural His- tory in Latin, ix, xi ; his religious works published at Rome, x ; his work, De Promulgatione Evanqdii, xi ; his Natural History published in Spanish, xii ; editions and trans- latiens, xiii ; the English transla- tion, xiv ; account of, by Antonio, XV, n. ; his death at Salamanca, x Aguirre, Lope de, the famous pii*ate who descended the river Amazon in

1560. Acosta heard of the won- derful voyage from a Jesuit who, when young, was in it, v, 83. He has Piego instead of Lope. (See Search for El Dorado^ Hakluyt So- ciety's volume for 1861.)

Alcoba9a, Diego de, his confesaionr* aries in native languages, v

Almagro, Diego de, allusion to his in- vasion ef Chile, 133

Alonzo, Hernando, pilot in the exper dition of Sarmiento, his account of the Straits of Magellan, 143

Alvarado, Pedro de, 521. In comr mand at Mexico. He was the chief lieutei^ant of Heman Cortes, and afterwards conquered Guatemala.

Antonio, Dr. Nardo, an Italian phy- sician, alluded to as quoting from the wo^rk of Dr. Francisco Herr nandez, 261

Arriaga, Pabfo Jose de, his work on th^ extirpation of idolatry, v

Avila, Dr. Francisco de, his work on the folk-lore of Huarochiri, v

Balboa, Blasco Nunez de, discoverer of the South Sea, 135

Bertonio, Ludovico, his Ayo[iara dic- tionary, V

Betanzos, Fray Domingo de, a Domi- niqan, 531. ^e was bom at Leon, and studied at Salamanca, whence he went to Rome to seek permis- sion from the Pope to become a hermit. Having obtained the de- sired leave, he went to the Isle of Ponza and lived there as a hermit for five years. He then becsime a Dominican and, in 1514, he went to Hispaniola. In 1 526 he was one of the first twelve Dominicans who

INDEX.

549

went to Mexico. Thence he re- moved to Guatemela, and, after labouring for many years, he re- turned to Spain, and died in the monastery of San Pedro at Valla- dolid.

Cabrera, Amador de, possessor of a rich quicksilver mine at Huanca- velica, which he sold, 216

Canete, Marquis of, 432, 435

Oarbajal, Gutierrez, Bishop of Pla- senda. A ship of lus passed through the Stndt of Magellan, 137.

Castro, Lope Oarcia de, 215. Go- vernor of Peru, under the title of President of tibe Audience. He succeeded the Viceroy, Conde de Nieva, who was assassinated in 1562. In his time the quicksilver mines of Huancavelica were discovered. He colonised the island of Chiloe-, founding the town of Castro. In 1567 he despatohed the expedition, under his young nephew Alvaro de Mendana, which discovered the So- lomon Islands. In 1567 the Jesuits arrived in Peru. Castro was suc- ceeded by the Viceroy Toledo in 1669.

Cavendish Thomas, his capture of a prize near Calif omia^ 141 n.

Centeno, Diego, a vein of silver ore at Potosi named aftor him, 199. A man of good family, native of Ciu- dad Rodrigo. At the age of twenty ^e came to Peru with Pedro de Alvarado in 1534. He fought on the side of the Pizarros at the battle of Las Salinas on April 26th, 1538, jand under Vaca de Castro at Chu- pas. He received a rich estate at La Plata (Chuquisaca), in the pro- '^nce of Charca^, where he was Alcalde when the Viceroy Blasco Nunez Vela publi0hed the new laws. At first he was opposed to them, but he eventually rose against Francisco de Almendras, whom Gon- ^o Pizarro had appointed his lieu- tenant in Charcas, He seized Al- mendras, who was a friend and almost a brother to him, and had him beheaded at La Plata. Gon- zalo Pizarro sent Carbajal agjetinst Centano, who defeated him several times, and he was obliged to hide in a cave near Arequipa. On the ar- rival of Pedro de la Gasca in Peru Centeno again collected a force, but

was defeated by Gonzalo Pizarro in the battle of Huarina. He escaped and joined Gasca at Andahuaylas, being present with him at the battle of Sacsiahuana. He had charge of the person of Gonzalo Pizarro until his execution. Centeno died in 1549. He was a short fair man, with a red beard.

Columbus Christopher. A nameless pilot said to have given the secret of the discovery of America to, 54. For a full discussion of this story, see my note in the first volume of my translation of the Royal Com- mentariea of Qa/rcUasso de la Vega, p. 24.

Cortez, Hernando, Marques del Valle, conqueror of Mexico, 304, 353, 458, 498 ; his arrival on the coast of Mexico, 514 ; march to Mexico, 517,

518 ; interview with Montezuma,

519 ; return to Mexico, 523 Costillas, Geronimo, lost his toes from

frost bites in Chile, 138. He was a native of 2jamora, of good family. He dissuaded Almagro from ex- ecuting Hernando Pizarro, and fled from Gonzalo Pizarro to Arequipa and Lima. He was afterwards ac- tively engaged in the campaign against Giron. * He had a house at (Xizco. (See O. de la Vega, ii, p. 243.)

Drake, Sir Francis, vi ; his passage of Magellan Strait, 137 ; his Portu- guese pilote land in New Spain, 140 ; at Guatulco, viii, n.

Ercilla, Alonzo de, 136 ; said to have written part of his Araucam>a on plantain leaves, 244. For his life and writings, lee Ticknor's SpanUh JAtera^ure, ii, p. 426.

Garces, Henrique, a Portuguese, the discoverer of the quicksilver mine of Huancavelica, 215

Gasca, President, 429

Grimston, Edward, English translator of Aco»ta, account of, xiv

Henriquez, Don Martin, Viceroy of Mexico from 1568 to 1580, and of Peru from 1581 to 1583. He was a younger son of the Marquis of Alcanicee. {See Hawkins's Voyages, p. 75, n.) Acosta conversed with him on the subject of a southern continent, vi, 139, 391, 423 ; his death, vii.

Hernandez, Dr. Francisco, 261. He was born at Toledo in 1514, and gra-

550

INDEX.

duated at Salamanca. In 1570, Philip II sent him to Mexico, with the cosmographer Francisco Do- minguez, to write the natmtd his- tory of that Viceroyalty. He re- turned in 1576, but died before he could publish the results of his labours. He prepared sixteen MS. folio volumes, six describing the plants, animals, and minerals of New Spain, and ten of drawings. Fran- cisci Hernandez rerum medica/rum N<yv(B HiipanicB Thesaurus seu planta/rum, animalium, mineralium, Mexicanorum Historia, tom i, 1648 ; ii, 1651, folio. He also translated Pliny's Naturai History. {See An- tonio, Bib. Script. Hisp., i, p. 482

Holguin, Dr. Gonzalo, lus Quichua grammar, v

Lsbdrillero, Captain, his account of a voyage through the Straits of Ma- gellan, 137

Lancero, a soldier of Peru, cures wrought by, 525

Loaysa, Dr. Don Geronimo de, first Archbishop of Lima, 425 ; letter from Polo de Ondegardo on the rites of the Peruvians, 356. Loaysa was native of Truxillo in Estremadura, a Dominican, made Bishop of Car- thagena in 1537. In 1543 he was translated to Lima, which was made an Archbishopric in 1548. He died at Lima in 1575, and was buried in the hospital of Santa Ana, which he had founded.

Magellan, Fernando, his discovery of the Strait, 136

Mandana, Alvaro de, discovered the Solomon Islands in 1568, 46, 115

Matienza, Judge, iv

Melendez, the Adelantado Pedro, afi&rmed that there was a passage north of Florida, 140 ; on whale fishing, 150 ; or Menendez ? Pe- dro Menendez was a native, of Aviles near Oviedo, of a very ancient Asturian family. He was a daring sea captain. In 1565 Philip II sent him with a fleet to conquer Florida. He returned, and died at Santander in 1574. BUs nephew Pedro, Mar-' quis of Aviles, went out to Florida with his uncle the Adelantado. He was killed by the Indians. Menen- dez wrote a report on his examina- tion of the east coast of Florida.

Mendoza, Garcia de, Governor of Chile,

- sent a ship to explore towards the

Strait of Magellan, 187. Garcia Hur- tado de Mendoza, son of the Marquis of Canete, was a young man of twenty- two when he came to govern Chfle in 1577, sent by his father the Vice- roy of Peru. He made a successful war on the Araucanians, and ex- plored the archipelago of Chiloe. He founded Mendoza on the east side of the Andes, and rebuilt An- gol and other towns previously aban- doned. In 1561 he was superseded and returned to Spain. He came out as Viceroy of Peru in 1590 until 1599. His life by Christoval Suarez de Figueron was published in 1613. {See Hawkins's Voyages, xxviii, 255, n, 338, 340. Hakluyt Society's vo- lume for 1878.)

Mogrovejo, Dr. Toribio, Archbishop of Lima, vi ; lives of, viii, n.

Monardes, Dr., on whale fishery, 150; on liquid amber, 259 ; on tobacco, 261

Narvaez, Pamphilo, landing in Mexico, 520

Pizarro, Francisco, conqueror of Peru, treasure seized by, 325, 432, 435, 529

Pizarro, Gonzalo, 429

Polo de Ondegardo, iv, v, 304, 813, 314, 356, 369, 391, 425, 432, 434, 525, the licentiate, was bom at Salamanca, and in 1545 he was in Peru, with the fame of a very learned and prudent man. He was a friend of Gonzalo Pizarro, yet Gksca made him corregidor of Potosi. Afterwards he was corre- gidor of Cuzco, when he discovered several mummies of the Yncas, which were sent to Lima. He was the adviser of the Viceroy Toledo, and died at Potosi in about 1575, very old and rich. His widow mar- ried Don Alonzo de Loaysa, a citizen of Potosi, and survived until 1603. His valuable Rdadones are ad- dressed to the Viceroys Marques de Canete and Conde de Nieva, 1561- 71. They show him to have been a humane and good man. They are in MS. in the Escurial. Another MS. of Ondegardo is in the Royal Library at Madrid. It is printed in the Hakluyt Society's volume for 1872, p. 151. (See also Prescott's Conquest of Peru, i, p. 163.)

Roa, Juan de, an Austin friar, and zealous preacher, 531

INDEX.

551

Salinas, Juan de, the Adelantado, his entry of the river Amazons, 157 *

Sanchez, Father Alonzo. On the trade winds, 12^ ; Chinese writings, 400

Sarmiento, Pedro de Gamboa, vi, 137, 138. Sarmiento had studied the records and ancient traditions of the Yncas, one of which told how the Ynca Tupac Yupanqui had visited the islands far to the west, called Ahuachumbi and Nina- chumbi. He sailed in the fleet of Alvoro de Mendana in 1667, with the object of reaching these islands. He is believed to have written a Historia de los Yncas. In 1579 he was sent with a fleet from Lima to explore the strait of Magellan. E^s journal was published at Madrid in 1768. Viaje at estreeho de M aged- lanes por el Capitan Pedro Sarmiento de Gamboa en los anos 1579 y 1580. There is an account of Sarmiento and his surveys in Bumey's Voyages,

u, pp. 3 to 67

Tobar, Juan de, ix, 391

Toledo, Francisco de, second son of the Count of Oropesa. Viceroy of Peru from 1669 to 1581, iil, iv, 137, 151, 204, 216, 231, 256

Torres, Rodrigo de. A miller who introduced the use of yohu grass for fuel, in mining, 218

Trego, Tacomo de, of Milan. A worker in brass at Madrid.. The way his workmen preserved themselves from the injurious effects of the fumes of quicksilver, 212

Ursua, Pedro de, commander of the expedition down the Amazon in 1560. (See Aguirre) 157, 171

Vaca, Cabeza de, 625. In 1627 he

went as treasurer in the expedition of Pamphilo de Narvaez to Florida. Narvaez was lost in a storm near the mouth of the Mississippi, and Cabeza de Vaca took command. He and his followers were reduced to the necessity of cannibalism, and were afterwards made slaves by the Indians. He escaped, and, after passing through a variety of in- credible hardships, reached Mexico. He retired to Spain in 1637. He was afterwards Governor of Para- guay.

Valdes, Diego Flores de. The ofiicer sent, with Sarmiento, to fortify Megellan's straits {see Sarmiento), 139

Valencia, Fray Martin de, 631. A zealous Franciscan preacher. He was a native of Valencia. In 1623 he was appointed to take out twelve Franciscans to Mexico, as their pro- vincial. Here he worked zealously for the conversion of the Indians. He died on a journey from Mexico to Tehuantepec, on August 31st> 1534. He wrote interesting letters to Charles V and to the Pope Adrian VI, as well as to Friar Matthew Weiser, the General of his Order, describing the spiritual con- quest of Mexico. He was also the author of some historical docu- ments.

Valera, Bias, the Jesuit, v.

Valle, Marques del. (See Cortes.)

Velasco, Pedro Fernandez de, intro- duced the refining of silver with mercury in 1671, 217

Villaroel, the Spaniard whose servant discovered the mines of Potosi, 203

{{GFDL}}